Oe ee BIS OF S18 Se eh eg ee ew Bye Ny Oke as

ee er oO i ad ae an

ee We ee i ee ce

tae ke ae ge re ere a o* ee

Vey CMI WY ih oF Ha ra, oe Pe ek ee tr ie ey raeat ‘ twine,

PDL ah Ae A ee Ce ay Ce oo ey . recs ee i Cee eon

ee | yeaa ® en, | PAT Rr ar ern Ma Ad pln ey dakee

’ epee ee | A bs . oy cared,

Weer ry:

, svete trie tim i ilmNcNT Mim Area ~

whee eyo fe 0 € £4 $8 we Ore

Ce Ce |

. . y or ee |

1 ee OLN OO hee tig besa a nis

CR OT Or WO ieee cee ee

Ce Re

‘

CAR, ee eo

ae A Pale

' Lk NiCr Arr ae

ee ce hr we ee oe

eee et eee, ore

ME Ut

LO aae

"SP te WMA TEE WMULO GD Ne Lt

eee ee A Re

POC aor vetee

Cee ae

rine Ue ae eee tala,

ee oe ee Se . ve @ana vue e ‘ ee

‘a se RAL SCE na see cy Tae ke Gee a hee Hea

ee eM LVWL@ 6 O4pp bb RID y te ye tan atbee Seek e

' aie Re eae a eee "x

Set eae nee see ’ Li ote

4 weer , Pas ’

+ eae genial gral! ve

raph) bile eke

Lt tee nS fits

tte

+ Mae Usa

. ,otme WA fob

DER CERO SOLOS RE

Wate a becky oe ee

Vee OR er gem Ow hte yy

See rea

ot ee ape

ee ee ee ie

OW GT deme wae bale

1a Ad tte oa gw tall 4 tm

«ome oo 1M, We daty aig, sek hee rate

10 Op ek Fe Ae era

re ey

hae et

gd, ay Ap td. fF

oe ’

maw

Where 8

au @ tee he

Li eee 8 Og 8 We Qe

5 apostate .

ber Ad

Cart. teil

way yp tye

ypu) ae es eo er

UN lieht Au Aaa Odd Nala: bb eat Lik adh Bilal

2248 8 8 Ow ee 6m ieee em ey .+ . ee te wee rte

rh ee en Pi RSS aah ati s Ei

te ee J yo act Vtets

arate ee

1 WoO; eM tie Pe tetany vs

re ee ee

reuse eae,

4 ? Woe te tem by

nt che ‘

Vewewe 1 a

sets

CC De Se on eo Buti wee

. re eer ype taste See hg ash ra ge las dea b's bs Wy: ey A eee ye Hee Tee

ek ce ce a Sai he ere i es Pe ia

ert Ce | “7 ua hoe Cr rd Lied » * See tei the eh a

. oe “ae ee owe * eo str gee “ cS Se ee eee 2,4 04s me a

a ee er ee re | SA etary ree yee ERMA Lem Raye Gen Vege

ee ee . ea ee oe a) VAAHE TS hEe we ewe

be A Hh) Hee OE Gp ae A ye W Ne yeh Hae hee Osteen vere & bee wuee 828 FS gO

ERED RHE my

ie a Oe ee ee ae

LOT NTA ee ae aed be

ee ee se eee

2 ey AAs ene

Sere yee <t

my nee ey gt ae

sabe eee ew ee

ee) Ph See AAD nd

~ FPF Te Eh het ew pel hye On wor

72 ert Ph Hee

K WS he Up

; ' 1 44 ; Spy.

5 ' pyya ot y Awe ates

¥ te ’ oof ped ap” ros BX ir "huey

- : a y i ‘ a 7

ies oy \ wy on: rag

i i] ° . 1 i ’ « 7 ee |

i ) eos mt t

; Y = lt 1

7 F te. : 7

f . ‘ ‘ oo Ff bo ¢

. bs . ‘

. ‘ ‘ ! !

‘ ! ' bog 7 7 !

F td@e " aa, ' ‘ r if ‘

‘ P ’ ; +

. ‘ , es ~ aa ‘y 4

' .

. - i

' : , H : his

3 i : ‘ - a) ’

: : the ’ . +4

‘ . $ ae J

‘ . ‘

f : i ved gt :

: i eh calla 6 aig

4 ‘ ‘ . . a

oi t . . f 1 i

. ‘ ‘ ‘ dae ‘ ee 4 ‘

\ i. te as ‘ be

] . . . if

Vea BITS '

’ t . uJ . P

> < ‘ 1 . ‘ ie i haa

i + ‘ ‘ ‘ ia '

‘ aes ed 6 idee O ‘

, ' t* to Yew ‘

ae t , ‘

4 ‘ ta hye . . .

. ‘ o* ‘ + ’ al ‘

® ‘ . ee ft ‘ ” '

. ios

’ H : {* 2 ore eer ey are .

5 ‘ ‘ i 4

. our ; ‘

: . P . ‘ i wk 3 ‘

I * 6 +4 4-4 jadi bo eia

' . 8 : wet ’

' ¥ . ‘ rae ar

' BS :

d - ‘ ’ ‘ ta ‘ ‘ 53

i : : y , Diy ’ hte dh

‘ ‘ ’ ‘ ' . s+ Ded ce Pdr eam

ra u a , fed od bed a des

. ’ ' | 5 Firat eet dee eden bebe d |

. ' ; i ‘ eer ceo. be Bhd ‘aise

' : ot » peace edie ld tied OL

J ’ ja ty ob uke Ae Bh ated fede

' . . a} danad ’ wis © bein

4 ‘ ae y

J : ‘ . x ‘ . deh @ hows = tdodeds ] ete

J ’ 4 eae | ta vi ada o didgt b alee fede ude die i

‘ ‘ r ; : . | Poy ieee ae Were rent Sr oa) ed ee tad ow wees

i . to <3 ra eet ob Cae ere Ie ee Perea oh mir eg dik Nha

‘ ‘ dowd qa Blea Bed da oP ehh APY te “

; 7 +f aon ~4 io 4.4 UM caela fread ot 6 seb det ited bee oh Diy abe .

: . rear x Fe eh paste Oa ba ate 0 be Syren wh sed dete

7 ‘ hy ‘ F : oy scala ‘ rar * ata rr | faci be eeree Pre Tee e

ta 7 ae P q oe wm a dB ar A Ue or dade seme ok oe weed

A ‘ ‘ or Fy .ay 4 ia M4 Pld ba twenes tte rd ee

. ' ‘ " Sw 4 ee © ee eee a

, i

, t 1 ea, 4% ‘ ‘ Bie le ry 4 Lew ela we

‘ ‘ . Ha i« . Yalw | awe pa 1 ot bom Lb

7 “ ' eta. «4 aba ot Wey 8 fi 1 now bribe Piao f! Sethe Sra) oitag 238

4 a ‘ 4 ‘ iys ' Co er ee thw did Oe fee

at & . 4 ’ ’ te od Ot winch dh hae bee tN oe Lab eided bleed & ow

2 oot ow sb ” ‘ 4 Piva of ce a eer ere iy Oe ee oe

' i 1) ae. ‘ rae re ’ oH het eek ee dee ba ee eet Piatt wis avons habeded Ada

‘ ‘ 4+ te ” re ere Pea, east rerren st ere Biter wore ey 9 a ae

> eo4 bat ' ar iva #49 ” + dude BONS lO id Soo Bei aN te pete Cf Pog

M fs oa ‘ . . 7 Sih rexas bys . ~ ede ede

. . 25 ' oe se . oe 4 A. | .* aaewe me bie ots nee cani

J + ‘ J ‘ see . 8 . © ted a. eee

is err <0 ives hae ed : a aut : Pid tag by dsb 2e\b or ote bore

. i os ora ‘ ‘ jo \ Pent Ct er ree eee PPh b ope eid bere hei dO Ad ed 4h KS Chee coded he BD . oaerhites dood V1

oa bis sav ha . rom ‘ * om een) Ck ee ee ce ee ere ee ee we eRe he pete Dh HR Nie

tees dais s o4e ae ‘ os Pb ey Foods FR A het ntl Oth

. Oe I ¢ ¥ tw 1 a de sf ’ 4 oud wwe ot #beeee P wet vy sO emt ee a ede Mand. d we Pete® of bo M4

. ' * . “a cre Te a | ae 1-04 Cente ae in “Ys hae 2 hee bol dee em OE ed ie ween # Sethe

" i as * ‘ ie ey Uy ene se ‘ ot Ce ee ee a ee ee er ee ee .

q ‘ ‘ Li ‘ 7 cay hevpaad df i seed kde ed dette cine al weeds pedi ay

da ’ . ‘ i ded i4@ oa Hoan, yd a bea eh dw iead

uy wey ‘ f ‘ ‘ ' A moe ew Oe Boe on

ig ‘ ’ . . i he ‘ . ae ‘ or 4 . rn a ead hte eh aera A

‘ 4 , 1 . € cs ' ’ ¥ i ry fae ai ed dried co mw Oa 6 bed ver AU abs adgt ee we G 5

Leo ‘ . boos ‘ . Cer er oe ae) ra Paid align date mkt eed ie 4p? eovk cae 6

wad ‘ " aot re or oe ene cee or ees

at] mi ak f : toa ' te 7 os ' +4 it trde 26 dau Sn ebb Wd diel 6 bhpind 6 lake

7) ‘ be fod » abirta, ve 34 A oo 6 ro, ee ee ere eC et or

‘ ‘ rary we ‘ \ ‘ oa we ‘ to. bow ft : BG 0 Spisbred bard ed bead ark pdt Wed

] ’ . ‘ t 4 rom! ‘ acme re ee ee oC a er! Se ee oe eee

: J 7 . . : ' ' he Crt hay We 0D fa. Saw bh haw ad 2 & i ee

" a Smo ‘ 3 ‘ . ’ ‘ . +2 . x» > Leeecc £4 Bie oka Se amt ae.

+ 7

ahry wi ay

pis

“iy thins

~! . ‘a

f ~]

I ing

Pes:

wes at y |

fe me AeA hi ' fae

; via fi i AS) a aA i 5 Nar

Nea eta vig Lae a Be m4 ri

‘

fp?

SOC 7S

MINT)

ANNALS

OF THE

NEW YORK

ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

Volume XI.

1895.

Editor :

GILBERT VAN INGEN.

New Pork.

PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY.

Tue New Era Printinc Company, LANCASTER, PaA.,

PRINTERS.

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES,

OFFICERS, 1898-9.

President—HEnky F. Ossporn, American Museum of Natural

History.

Vice- Presidents—N. L. Britton, J. F. Kemp.

Secretary—RICHARD E. Doncg, Teachers College, W. 120th St.

Corresponding Secretary—\WM. STRATFORD, College of the City

of New York.

Treasurey—CHARLES F.. Cox, Grand Central Depot.

Librarian—ARTHUR Hottick, Columbia University.

L:ditor—GILBERT VAN INGEN, Columbia University.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS.

Chairman—P. H. DupDLey, 80 Pine St.

Secretary-—REGINALD GORDON, Columbia University.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

Chatyman—F rep. S. Lee, Columbia University.

Secretary —Gary N. CALKINS, Columbia University.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

Chatrman—JamMEs F. Kemp, Columbia University.

Secretary —GeEo. F. Kunz, 15 Union Square.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY, PHILOLOGY AND

PSYCHOLOGY.

Chatyman—Lawrence A. McLoutu, New York University.

Secretary for Philology—A. V.\W. JacKxson, Columbia University.

Secretary for Anthropology and Psychology—Cuas. B. Buiss, New

York University.

SESSION, 1898-1899.

The Academy will meet on Monday evenings at 8 o’clock,

from October 3d to May 22d, in the rooms of the American

Society of Mechanical Engineers, at 12 West 31st Street.

(iii )

TABLE OF CONTENTS OF VOL. XI.

1.—Wilson, EB. B. Considerations on Cell-Lineage and

Ancestral Reminiscence, based on a Re-examina-

tion of Some Points in the Early Development of

Annelids and Polyclades, (Figs. 1-7),

2.—Trowbridge, ©. C. An ‘X-Ray Detector” for Re-

search Purposes. (Figs. 8-11),

3.—Trowbridge, ©. ©. The Use of the Fluoroscopic

Screen in Connection with Rontgen Rays. (Figs.

12-14),

4,—Lloyd, Francis E. On Hypertrophied Scale-Leaves

in Pinus ponderosa. (Plate I), :

5.—Hollick, Arthur. Notes on Block Island. (Plates

II-IX), boty aoe: ee

6. —Dudley, P.H. The Use of the Dudley ‘“Stremma-

tograph”’ in Determining Stresses in Rails under

Moving Trains. (Plates X—XIII),

7.—Weller, Stuart. Descriptions of Devonian Crinoids

and Blastoids from Milwaukee, Wisconsin. (Plate

IVS.

8.—Huntington, Geo. S. The Eparterial Bronchial Sys-

tem of the Mammalia. (Plates XV—X XVIII),

9.—Stevenson, J. J. The Debt of the World to Pure

Science. Annual Address of the Retiring President,

10.—Griffin, B. B. Description of Some Marine Nemer-

teans of Puget Sound and Alaska. (Figs. 15—24),

11.—Crampton, H.E., Jr. An Important Instance of In-

sect Coalescence,

PAGE.

vi TABLE OF CONTENTS: OF VOL) XE-

12.—Rankin, W. M. The Northrop Collection of Crus-

tacea from the Bahamas. (Plates XXIX, XXX),

13.—Calman, W. T. Ona Collection of Crustacea from

Puget Sound. (Plates XX XI-XXXIV),

14.__Mathews, Albert. The Physiology of Secretion,

15.—Prince, J. Dyneley. Some Passamaquoddy Docu-

ments,

16.—Calkins, Gary N. The Phylogenetic Significance of

Certain Protozoan Nuclei. (Plate XXXV),

17.—Levison, W. “fuer A Simple and Convenient Phos-

phoroscope,

18.—Levison, W. Goold. eee Ocular Microm-

eters,

19.—Clark, Hubert reaps Notes on Bermuda Echino-

derms,

20.—Hollick, Arthur. Additions to the Palzobotany of

the Cretaceous Formation on Staten Island. No.

II. (Plates XXXVI-XXXVIII),

21.—Sihler, E.G.. The Latter Part of Lucretius and Epi-

curus 7é0l PeTEWOUY,

22.—Dodge, Richard E., Recording Secretary. Records

of Meetings of the New York Academy of Sciences,

January, 1898, to December, 18098,

Index to Volume XI,

APPENDIX,

PAO

Me eS

aera

. 443

ecu

Catalogue of the Fifth Annual Reception and Exhibit, April

£3, 14, 1693.

NoTE REGARDING PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

Publication of the Transactions of the Academy is discontinued

with the issue of Volume XVI, 1898. The matter heretofore

printed in the Transactions will be incorporated in the Annals.

The Annals (8vo), beginning with Volume XVI, will appear

with new forms of typography and arrangement of matter; many

changes having been made in the endeavor to facilitate the use of

the volume for reference purposes. A volume of the Annals will

hereafter coincide with the calendar year and will be issued in three

parts. The price per volume is three dollars.

The Memoirs in quarto form will be published at irregular inter-

vals. Part I of Volume I has been issued.

( vii )

sy £8 4

1 Oe Pay ot r

\ “7 Ae ’ Ki at)

ialyt

[ANNALS N. Y. Acad. Sci., XI., No. 1, pp. 1-27, March 30, 1898. ]

CONSIDERATIONS ON: CELL=LINEAGE AND

ANCESTRAL REMINISCENCE,

BASED ON

A RE-EXAMINATION OF SOME POINTS IN THE EARLY DEVEL—

OPMENT OF ANNELIDS AND POLYCLADES.

EpMuND B. WILSON.

(Read December 13, 1897.)

FIvE years ago I observed in the embryos of two polyche-

tous annelids, Avicia fwtida (Clap.) and Spio fulginosus (Clap.),

that the two so-called “primary mesoblasts’”’ bud forth a pair

of extremely minute superficial cells near the posterior lip of the

blastopore before giving rise to the mesoblast-bands.' Scarcely

larger than polar bodies, these cells lie at or near the surface at

the posterior margin of the entoblast-plate, wedged in between

the latter and the primary mesoblasts (Fig. 1, A, C, ¢; Fig. 2,

A, ¢, ce); and in this position they are carried into the interior

during the ensuing invagination. I could not determine their

fate, and found no evidence that they underwent growth or di-

vision, or that they took any part in the building of the embryo.

In Nerets, however, I found that this pair of rudimentary cells

was represented by a group of not less than six or eight some-

what larger cells (Fig. 1, 8, D; Fig. 2, 4), formed in exactly

the same way and in the same position,” and further that these

11892,-p. 458. 21892, p. 411.

2 WILSON.

cells were functional in development, giving rise to a definite

part of the body, though, as will appear beyond, I fell into

error regarding their precise fate." These facts strongly sug-

gested that the pair of rudimentary cells in Avzcra and Spio

were to be regarded as vestiges of an ancestral type of devel-

opment in which they were represented by a group of larger

functional cells, such as are still found in the embryo of JVerezs.

Such a conclusion, if it could be established, would possess an

importance for the general problems of cell-lineage even greater

than its interest for the more special problems of annelid em-

bryology. For,if vestigial structures may appear in ontogeny

in the form of single cells, the fact would not only afford a

striking illustration of the inadequacy of all so-called ‘ mechan-

ical’’ explanations of cleavage-forms, but would supply a very

important datum for the estimation of the cell-theory as applied

to development.

The results of a re-examination of the history of these small

cells in Verezs, taken in connection with other recent studies in

cell-lineage, lend strong support to the conclusion indicated

above, enabling us, as I believe, to give a definite interpretation

to the vestigial cells of Avicia, Spro and other forms in which

they have recently been observed ;* and they also raise some

interesting further questions regarding ancestral reminiscence in

cell-lineage. I am also able to contribute some new observa-

tions on the cell-lineage of a polyclade (Leptoplana), which bear

directly on these questions and considerably extend their range.

1 Von Wistinghausen (1891 ) had previously observed in Merets Dumeriliz, a group

of small cells derived from the ‘‘ second somatoblast,’’ which probably correspond

with those I have described in WV. bata and NV. megalops, though their exact origin

was not followed. Wistinghausen believed that they gave rise to a part of the

ectoblast—a result wholly different from both my earlier account and the present one.

2 Minute cells exactly corresponding in origin and number to those of Avicza have

been found by Mead in Amphitrite (1894, p. 467 ; 1897, p. 247) and by Holmes in

Planorbis (1897, p. 101). Lillie has found a pair of corresponding but slightly

larger cells in Unio (1895, p. 27), while in Clymenedda they are as large as the pri-

mary mesoblasts (Mead, 1897, p. 264). The corresponding cells in Umbrella

(Heymons), Crepidula (Conklin), and Physa (Wierzejski) will be referred to be-

yond (see pp. 6, 11-12).

CELL-LINEAGE. 3

THE RELATIONS BETWEEN MESOBLAST AND ENTOBLAST IN

| ANNELIDS AND MOLLUSKS.

In .Verezs, as in the typical development of other annelids and

of gasteropods and lamellibranchs, the mesoblast-bands are de-

rived from the posterior cell of the fourth quartet of “ micro-

meres.”* This cell, now generally known as the second somato-

blast, divides into two symmetrical halves which have been usu-

ally designated as the ‘‘ primary mesoblasts ;” and from them, by

a series of slightly unequal successive divisions, arise the meso-

blast-bands which extend forward in the cleavage-cavity at the

sides of the embryo. Before giving rise to the mesoblast-bands,

however, the ‘primary mesoblasts’’ bud forth the small cells

already referred to, at or near the surface directly behind the

two posterior macromeres “C” and “D.’ At least six, and

probably not less than ten, of these cells are formed, the primary

mesoblasts meanwhile sinking below the surface and becoming

quite covered by ectoblast-cells which advance from the sides

and from behind. The small cells first formed lie at the surface,

wedged in between the “ primary mesoblasts’”’ and the macro-

moe (his. 1, J), ¢; Fig. 2, B;). Those formed later lie

below the surface, owing to a change in the plane of division

(Fig. 3, 4). The small cells, which are very conspicuous in

sections by reason of their intensely chromatic, closely reticu-

lated nuclei, thus become arranged in a thin plate extending

inwards from the surface between the primary mesoblasts and

the two posterior macromeres (Fig. 3, £). After the formation

of the small cells the divisions of the primary mesoblasts sud-

denly change both in form and direction, the plane of division

being now nearly or quite at right angles to the former (7. ¢.,

approximately parallel to the sagittal plane of the embryo) and

the cells thus produced being nearly as large as the primary

1 Nereis is somewhat exceptional in the fact that the other three cells of the

fourth quartet are suppressed. In Aricia, Polymnia, Spio, Pysgmobranchus, Hy-

droides, Polygordius (all of which I have examined), and in some others, the fourth

quartet, is complete, and in the first two forms named, a fifth quartet of (entoblastic )

micromeres is formed before the invagination (Cf. Fig. 2, 4).

4 WILSON.

Fic. 1.1 Early embryos of Avicza (A, C) and Nere’s (B, D) in sagittal section

(A, B, C, optical, D, actual). Showing the formation of small posterior

entoblasts (¢) between 4/ and D.

A, L, D, 64, cells of the entoblast-plate (cf. Fig. 2); JZ, the ‘‘ primary mesoblast ;’’

mt, mesoblast-band ; X, the first somatoblast or its derivatives, forming the soma-

tic plate.

mesoblasts. Thus are formed the mesoblast-bands which form

together a V-shaped mass of cells lying between the macromeres

and the overlying ectoblast. Near the middle line the two

halves of the V are often slightly separated ; and into the space

1 All the figures are from camera drawings, made from preparations unless other-

wise stated. Optical sections have been fully confirmed by actual.

ee ey ee eee ee

CELL-LINEAGE. 5

thus formed some of the small cells usually extend, appearing

in sections in the sharpest contrast both to the large rounded

mésoblast-cells and to those of the lateral ectoblast (Fig. 3, C).

From this point the mesoblast-bands extend towards the sides

and ultimately curve upwards (forwards with respect to the

adult long axis) at the sides of the embryo.’

Fic. 2. Corresponding surface views, from the lower pole, of early embryos of Avicéa

(A) and Nerezs (B) ; the limit of the ectoblast, z. e., the lip of the blastospore,

is shown by the heavy line. A shows the single pair of vestigial entoblasts (e,

e) of Avicia lying in front of the primary mesoblasts which are dividing to form

the mesoblast-bands (cf. Fig. 1, C, which shows the same specimen in sagittal

section). B shows two pairs of superficial entoblasts, lying behind the macro-

mere J, and the spindles of a deeper budding of the ‘‘ primary mesoblasts’’ (cf.

Fig. 3, A, for section of this stage).

A, B, C, D, the four basal entoblasts or macromeres; a4—c!, the fourth quartet of

““micromeres ’’ (entomeres); a5-d°, the fifth quartet (entomeres) ; c-d, deriva-

tives of the third quartet (ectomeres) ; J/, J/, the primary mesoblasts (shaded in

B).

Up to this point the account here given is substantially the

same as that contained in my earlier paper on JVerezs. Regard-

1In Aricia the mesoblast-bands are formed much earlier, while the primary meso-

blasts still lie at the surface (Fig. 1, C); and they lie at first side by side, nearly

parallel to each other, extending upwards behind the entoblast-plate (Fig. 7). In

both these respects Avicia is somewhat similar to Lawmébricus (Cf. Wilson, Embry-

ology of the Earthworm, Fig. 30: Journ. Morph., 1889).

6 WILSON.

ing the fate of the small cells, however, my first account was

wide of the mark; for I believed that they migrated into the

interior and spread out upon the walls of the archenteron to

form a part of the splanchnic mesoblast.' I accordingly called

the small cells ‘“‘secondary mesoblast’’ and applied the same

term to the rudimentary cells of Avzczaand Spiro. Later studies

by several observers seemed to confirm this conclusion. Lillie

found in Umo a single pair of small superficial cells, budded

forth from the “primary mesoblasts”’ exactly as in Avicia or

Nereis, but relatively larger, which he likewise believed to

wander into the cleavage-cavity to forma part of the mesoblast.?

- Heymons found in Umbrella two pairs of corresponding but

still larger cells, which he, too, apparently traced into the meso-

blast.’ Mead found that a corresponding pair of minute cells,

in Amphitrite are carried in at the tips of the mesoblast-bands ;*

while Holmes still more recently states that in Vanorbis they

enter the segmentation cavity.” Wierzejski’s recent observations

on Physa,® though differing from the foregoing in some impor-

tant details, agree in referring the small cells, of which several

pairs are formed, to the mesoblast. With such an array of

confirmatory evidence my original conclusion seemed to be

strongly supported. Conklin, however, in his remarkable paper

on Crepidula, reached a wholly different result, finding in that

gasteropod that cells which probably correspond with the small

cells of Nereis, give rise to the posterior part of the archenteron."

In regard to Nereis, ] have long suspected that my original

' account of the fate of the small cells was erroneous. <A re-

newed examination of the matter has left no doubt that such

was the case, and gives the strongest ground for the conclusion

that, like the corresponding cells in Crepidula, they enter into

the formation of the archenteron. ‘The evidence for this con-

clusion is as follows:

In my earlier paper on /Verezs I overlooked the fact that, be-

sides the small cells derived from the ‘“ primary mesoblasts,”’

1 Nereis, p. 413. 51807, p: LOL.

21895, p. 28. 61897, p. 389.

31893, p. 281. T1807, "Dp. 72.

41897, p. 248.

CELL-LINEAGE. (

other closely similar cells are formed, just in front of them dy

| budding from the macromeres. These cells agree closely with

those derived from the ‘“ primary mesoblasts’”’ both in size and

} in the close reticulation and intensely chromatic character ‘of

4 Fic. 3, NEREIS. Sections of successive stages in the formation of the entoblast-plug

a? and mesoblast-bands in embryos of Wereis (actual sections, Flemming’s fluid ; C is

tranverse, the others sagittal). Lettering as before. A shows a deep budding of

M (cf. Fig. 2, B); B, later stage showing group of small cells (e) derived from

MM; C, still later stage, nearly transverse, showing the mesoblast-bands (7, 77)

and the group of small cells (2) below; D, budding of the posterior macromere,

D; E, recession of the entoblast-nuclei; F, first appearance of the pigment in the

small cells.

8 WILSON,

their nuclei. The first of them to be formed are budded forth

at the surface near the lower pole at a time when the “pri-

mary mesoblasts ”’ have budded three or four times (Fig. 3, D).

Those produced later do not reach the surface, the macro-

mere-nuclei receding from the surface and leaving below them

(towards the surface) a closely packed mass or plug of small

cells (Fig. 3, Z), the more anterior of which have been de-

rived from the macromeres, and, therefore, are unquestionably

of entoblastic origin,’ while the more posterior have been

derived from the ‘‘primary mesoblasts.” This plug is_ bor-

dered in front and at the sides by the ectoblast-cells of the lips

of the blastopore, which has now become much diminished in

size, while posteriorly it abuts superficially against the ecto-

blast-cells of the somatic plate (derivatives of “d?”’ or “ X,” the

first somatoblast) and at a deeper level against the primary

mesoblasts (Fig. 3, £). In the cells of this plug are now de-

veloped coarse granules of black pigment (Fig. 3, /), by means

of which they are so unmistakably marked that their later his-

tory may be followed step by step with great accuracy. Thus

arises the pigment-area at the lower pole of the trochophore

larva, described in my first paper on WVerets.?

In that paper I concluded that the pigment-cells were derived

solely from the “primary mesoblasts,’ having overlooked the

fact described above that a part of them, and probably the

greater part, are derived from the macromeres (entomeres). |

reached the further conclusion that the pigment-cells wandered

into the interior and spread out upon the wall of the archenteron

to form a part of the splanchnic mesoblast.’? Renewed studies

demonstrate the erroneous nature of this latter conclusion, and

prove that the pigment-cells give rise to the posterior part of the

archenteric wall itself. Both in total preparations and in serial

longitudinal sections * of the successive stages, every step can

1These cells are obviously comparable to the entoblast-cells of the fourth and

fifth quartets (and later entoblast-derivatives) in other annelids. In JVerezs they

show no definite arrangement.

21892, pp. 412, 417.

3 Nereis, p. 413.

4 The best results were obtained with strong Flemming’s fluid.

—_

CELL-LINEAGE. 9

be followed of the progressive inwandering of the pigment-cells

(Fig. 4) to form the narrower posterior part of the pear-shaped

archenteron, while the anterior part is developed from the four

macromeres (entomeres) as is proved by the fact, among oth-

ers, that the fat-drops are found lying in its wall. There is no

possibility of mistaking the fact that the pigment-cells actually

form the archenteric wall, for their outlines can easily be seen

4 zi fh “

ATS /©

Fic. 4, NEREIS. Sagittal sections of larva. A, trochophore (60 hours), showing

inwandering of the pigment-cells at the lower pole; stomodzeum and neural plate

at the right; B, larva of 41% days, showing the pigment-cells at /.

and the pigment-granules are found throughout the whole thick-

ness of the wall (Fig. 4, £). The pigment-cells are, therefore,

not mesoblastic, but are extoblast-cells.

In so far as the pigment-cells are derived from the macro-

meres (entomeres), this is exactly what we should expect.

That cells derived from the ‘primary mesoblasts’’ should

enter into the formation of the archenteron is however a sur-

prising result; and it is, therefore, highly important to make

10 WILSON.

certain, first whether the pigment-cells are in part identical with

or descended from the small cells budded forth from the

‘‘primary mesoblasts,’’ and second, whether, if this be the fact,

the cells of such origin also wander in to forma part of the

entoblast. A careful study of the successive stages in surface

views, optical sections, and actual serial, sections hardly leaves

room for doubt in regard to either point. In the first place,

pigment is developed in the smali cells that abut directly

against the primary mesoblasts (Fig. 3, /), and the products

of the latter form so considerable a group that it would hardly

be possible to overlook their displacement or wandering away

did such a process occur before the appearance of the pigment.

I can find no evidence of such displacement and hence cannot

escape the conclusion that the pigment-cells lying just anterior

to the primary mesoblasts have been derived from them. The

evidence on the second point, while perhaps not demonstrative,

is hardly less convincing. The pigment-cells disappear from

the surface pari passu with the growth of the archenteron ; and

when the latter is fully formed (in embryos of five days and

upwards) not a trace of pigment can be found at the surface or

in any of the cells of the posterior region save those of the

archenteron. That the superficial pigment-cells actually pass

inwards is proved by the fact that from its first appearance the

pigment is densest in two (sometimes three) symmetrical areas

which are first seen at the surface and may then be traced pro-

gressively inwards in the archenteric wall.’

Taken together, these facts leave no doubt, in my opinion,

that the pigment-cells are derived in part from the primary meso-

blasts, in part from the entomeres, and that the cells from both

sources give rise to a portion of the archenteric wall and to no

other structure. If this conclusion be correct, it follows that

the ‘primary mesoblasts’”’ are not properly so-called, but are

mesentoblasts, precisely as Conklin has described in Crepidula.

Now, there can be no doubt that the single pair of minute cells

in Avicia and Spio represent the group of cells of like origin in

1Cf. 1892, Figs. 79-91, which show this fact, through not as clearly as it appears

in my more recent preparations.

}

]

}

CELL-LINEAGE. 11

Nereis. They must, therefore, be regarded as vestiges of func-

tional entoblast-cells such as those of Nereis, and morphologically

they represent the posterior part of the entoblast-plate' (Cf. Fig. 1,

i> Pig. 2, A).

The foregoing interpretation is entirely in harmony with

Conklin’s important discoveries in the gasteropod Crepiduda.

Conklin here definitely showed, for the first time in any animal,”

that the so-called “ primary mesoblasts ’’ give rise to a group of

entoblast-cells before dividing to form the mesoblast-bands.

But more than this, Crefidu/a represents a step in the series

which may be regarded as anterior to the condition found in

Nereis ; for here each mesentoblast divides off two entoblast-

cells, the bulk of which taken together is actually greater than

that of the mesoblastic material remaining, “less than half the

cell (4d) being destined to form mesoblast.’’* The three forms

Crepidula, Nereis, Aricia, thus form a progressive series in which

the entoblastic part of the mesentoblast cell is reduced from

more than half the bulk of the cell to an insignificant vestige.

It- is probable that two intermediate steps besides /Verezs have

been observed by Lillie and Mead respectively. The two cells

found by the first named observer, in Uno, are somewhat larger

than those of Wereis;* while in Clymenella as described by

Mead, they are equal in size to the mesoblastic moiety.’

1Jt would be interesting to determine whether the vestigial cells of Avicza may

not be taken into the archenteric wall and thus still retain their functional signifi-

cance, I have not thus far been able to determine this point; but Mead’s obser-

vations on Amphitrite seem to show that in this form such is not the case, for the

vestigial cells are here formed so far from the surface that they pass into the cleavage-

cavity and are carried forwards at the tips of the mesoblast-bands. Mead himself

concludes that their position in Amphitrite is secondary, being a ‘“‘ reminiscence of

a surface division which still persists in many forms’’ (1897, p. 295) I would sug-

gest that their position in Amphitrite may be due to the early inwandering of the ‘¢ pri-

mary mesoblasts.’’ It is not surprising that a vestigial cell of this kind should vary

somewhat in position ; and it should be recalled that in .Vereds the later-formed cells

lie at some distance below the surface. In Aricia, too, the vestigial cells do not

always reach the surface.

2 Compare, however, the somewhat similar earlier accounts of Patten for Patel/a

(1896) and Stauffacher for Cyc/as (1893). See Conklin, p. 71.

3 Crepidula, p. 69. :

4 Unio, Fig. 60.

51897, Fig. 88.

12 WILSON.

Neither of these observers, it is true, suggests the interpretation

given above, Lillie somewhat doubtfully assigning to the super-

ficial cells the same fate as I originally did in JVerezs, while

Mead leaves the matter undetermined. It seems probable,

however, that we may look for the same fate for these cells as

in Crepidula or Nereis,‘ indeed I venture to think that Lillie’s

observations are themselves open to such an interpretation.’

These facts, I believe, support the view which has been held

by many embryologists from the time of Kowalevsky onwards *

that the primary mesoblasts, or mesoblastic pole-cells of an-

nelids and mollusks must be regarded as derivatives of the

archenteron. In both these groups the primary mesoblasts are

derived from the posterior cell of the fourth quartet of ‘‘ micro-

meres,’ the lateral and anterior cells of which are, so far as we

know, strictly and always entoblastic. The facts indicate, fur-

ther, that a progressive process of differentiation in cleavage has

been going forward, through which the posterior cell of this

quartet has become more and more strictly given over to the

formation of mesoblast. The vestigial cells of Avicia, Spio,

Amphitrite and Planorbis would seem to represent the last traces

of such archenteric origin of the teloblasts ; and it is possible,

indeed probable, that there are cases in which even these traces

have disappeared, the posterior cell of the fourth quartet being

strictly mesoblastic from the first.*

1Conklin has fully considered (Crepidula, p. 72) the apparently contradictory

case of Umbrella, as described by Heymons (1893), where cells exactly corre-

sponding to the ‘‘ posterior enteroblasts’’ of Cvepzdu/a are described as giving rise to

mesoblast. Despite Heymon’s careful account, I venture to think that the case de-

mands re-investigation in the light of Conklin’s work. Ina recent account of the

mesoblast in Physa (1897), Wierzejski finds that small cells (‘‘ mesoderm-micro-

meres’’ ) are budded forth not only from the ‘‘ primary mesoblasts’’ but also from the

larger lateral cells derived from them. All these cells are assumed to be meso-

blastic, though their fate was not followed out (1897, p. 391).

2 Unio, Fig. 67.

8 Cf. Kowalevsky, 1871, p. 30; O. and R. Hertwig, 1881, p. 47. Hatschek,

1888, p. 76; Rabl, 1889, p. 207, and earlier literature there cited:

4This point must remain doubtful until renewed investigation shall show

whether ‘the superficial budding is ever entirely suppressed ; for we cannot safely

infer its absence from existing accounts, and I am not convinced that my own state-

ment of their apparent absence in Polymnia (WVereis, p. 458) may not have rested

upon an oversight.

CELL-LINEAGE. 13

The bearing of this conclusion on the possible relation be-

tween the teloblastic and enteroccelic modes of mesoblast-for-

mation is obvious. This question will, however, appear in a

clearer light after a consideration of the polyclade cell-lineage

in relation to the foregoing results.

THE MICROMERE-QUARTETS IN ANNELIDS, MOLLUSKS AND

POLYCLADES.

The marvelously close resemblance in cell-lineage between

the annelids, gasteropods and lamellibranchs which recent re-

search, more especially within the last five years, has brought

to light, leaves no doubt not only that the general forms of

cleavage in these groups are reducible to a common type, but

also that a considerable number of more or less definite cell-

homologies can be established between them, even in the early

cleavage-stages. The attempt to extend the comparison beyond

the limits of these groups has, however, thus far encountered a

very serious stumbling-block in the cell-lineage of the poly-

clades. If we accept Lang’s view, which is supported by a

large amount of evidence, that the platodes are not very far

removed from the ancestral prototype of annelids and mollusks,

we should expect to find in the polyclade a mode of cleavage

to which that of the higher forms can in its main features be

reduced. In point of fact, however, this seems to be the case

only in the form of cleavage and not, so to speak, in its substance ;

‘for, although the general type of cleavage and the arrangement

of the blastomeres in the polyclade shows an extraordinary re-

semblance to that of the annelid or gasteropod, the cells seem

not to have the same morphological value. I have elsewhere

sufficiently indicated the nature of this difficulty,’ which has

also been remarked by a number of other writers; but for

the sake of clearness I will again direct attention to its leading.

features.

1Nereis, p. 441; The Cell, pp. 314, 315.

14 WILSON.

In the typical development! of all the forms in question—

polyclades, annelids, gasteropods, lamellibranchs—the egg first

divides into four quadrants. From these at least three, and

sometimes four or five regular quartets of cells—usually smaller,

and hence designated as ‘‘ micromeres ’’—are successively pro-

duced by more or less unequal and oblique cleavages toward

Fic. 5. Diagram showing the typical arrangement of the micromere-quartets in

polyclades, annelids and mollusks (their secondary divisions being omitted).

A, from the upper pole. JB, diagram of the typical history of the posterior quad-

rant of an annelid or gasteropod embryo ; ectoblast is derived from the unshaded

cells (1, 2, 3), the mesoblast-bands from the dotted cell (4), ectoblast from the

lined cells (5, D).

the upper pole (diagram, Fig. 5). These quartets are dis-

placed according to a definite law, the first being rotated, as it

were, towards the right (clockwise), the second towards the

left (anti-clockwise), the third to the right, and so on in regular

alternation.” The secondary divisions of these micromeres also

1 There are some well-determined exceptions to this mode of cleavage, and at least

one of these—the case of Polychwrus, as described by Gardiner, 1895—is apparently

irreducible to it.

2 The reversal of the direction of displacement in the sinistral gasteropods, dis-

covered by Crampton, is an exception which emphasizes the rule.

—_— Se.

CELL-LINEAGE. bys

show a remarkable similarity, in all the forms, up to a certain point.

In morphological value, however, the micromere-quartets of the

polyclade appear to differ radically from those of the annelid-

mollusk type. Inthe former the first quartet is described as

giving rise to the entire ectoblast, while the second and third

quartets are mesoblastic.' In the latter, on the other hand,

these same three quartets give rise to ectoblast, while, as stated

above, the main mass of the mesoblast is derived from a single

cell (the posterior) of a fourth quartet of which the other three

cells form entoblast (Fig. 5, 4). Ifa fifth quartet is formed it

is invariably entoblastic (Fig. 2, A).

At the time attention was first called to these differences it

seemed hopeless to reconcile them. Later researches showed,

however, that the discrepancy was not so great as it seemed.

-Lillie first discovered in 1895 that in the lamellibranch U7zz0 one

cell (the left) of the second quartet give rise to mesoblastic ele-

ments (the “larval mesenchyme’’)* and more recently Conklin

has found a similar derivation of mesoblast-cells from three cells

(right, left and anterior) of this quartet in the gasteropod Cre-

pidula.’

It is clear that these interesting discoveries partially bridge

the gap between the polyclade and the other forms; though

how great it still remains may be judged from the fact that

Conklin still regarded the differences as “very great, perhaps

irreconcilable,” * while Mead, in a still more recent work on the

cell-lineage of annelids, is forced into a position of skepticism

regarding Lang’s whole account of the origin of mesoblast in

the polyclade.’

For these and other reasons a re-examination of the early de-

velopment of polyclades has become in the highest degree de-

sirable. After a search extending through several years, I have

at length succeeded in finding a form very favorable for this

purpose—a species of Leptoplana® having eggs that are large

1Lang, 1884. 4 Crepidula, p. 196.

2 Unto, p. 24. 51897, p. 289.

8 Crepidula, p. 150.

6 An undetermined species found in great profusion at Port Townsend, Washing-

ton, on Puget Sound.

16 WILSON.

and transparent, are easily procurable in large numbers, and de-

velop so slowly that the successive stages may be very accu-

rately followed in life, while every point may be repeatedly

verified in a large number of specimens. The results of a study

of these eggs not only help still further to set aside the ap-

parent contradiction between the polyclade and the annelid-

mollusk type, but, when taken in connection with the foregoing

observations on annelids and gasteropods, also raise some highly

interesting questions regarding the relation of cell-lineage to an-

cestral reminiscence.

I shall not here describe the cleavage of Lepfoplana in detail,

but will only indicate its leading features. Up to the thirty-

two-cell stage, and for some distance beyond, the cleavage is a

most beautiful example of the symmetrical spiral type, agree-

ing very exactly with Descocelis as described by Lang, except-

ing in the fact that in the four-cell stage the cross-furrow is.

inconstant and often wanting. The first three quartets of mi-

cromeres are formed exactly as in an annelid, and have the

same position and relative size as in Discocelis (Fig. 5, A), while

the four large cells remaining give rise to the archenteron.

Regarding the morphological value of these three quartets,

however, my results differ very considerably from Lang’s and

are such as to bring the polyclade cell-lineage into direct rela-

tion with that of the annelid, gasteropod and lamellibranch.

As in these groups all three of the quartets give rise to ectoblast,

the first and third apparently to ectoblast alone, though I am

not certain that the third quartet may not give rise also to a

small modicum of mesoblast-cells. The principal interest

centers in the second quartet, from which, as Hallez, Gotte and

Lang have shown, the principal mass of the mesoblast is formed.

What these observers have failed to observe is the fact that each

cell of this quartet gives rise to several ectoblast-cells—at least

three, and probably four—before sinking into the interior to

form mesoblast. These divisions are of constant form, as fol-

lows: During the fifth cleavage each cell divides unequally

towards the left as viewed from the side (z. ¢., clockwise, as seen

from above) to form an ectoblast-cell (‘ 2'’’) that abuts against a

Fic. 6, LEPTOPLANA. (Camera drawings from the transparent living embryos. )

A, 32-cell stage, from the upper pole; B, 36-cell stage, from the side, showing

second division of 2;. C, side view, approximately 60 cells, showing the third

ectoblast cell (2%) derived from 2, the fourth quartet (4) and the basal entoblasts

(D, C). D, delamination of mesoblast in the fourth division of 2 (shaded),

from the lower pole, showing the basal quartet of entomeres (4-—D, and the two

somewhat unequal cells (4d@1, 4d?) formed by the vertical division of the poster-

ior cell “of the fourth quartet. FE, posterior view of ensuing stage, showing the

two posterior mesoblast cells (shaded) lying in the interior, and a marked in-

equality between (4d! and 4d@?). FF, later stage; multiplication of the meso-

blast-cells (shaded) equality of 471 and 4@2, as in Descocelis.

18 WILSON.

cell of the third quartet formed about the same time (Fig. 6,

A)." The second division is nearly or quite horizontal, separat-

ing a second ectoblast-cell (“« 2?”’) directly above the original

or stem-cell (Fig. 6, B). The third ectoblast cell (‘‘ 2*’’), which

is very small, is budded forth at the lower tip in the angle be-

tween the macromeres (Fig. 6, C, DY). The three cells thus

formed (2', 2°, 2°, Fig. 6) enter, as I believe, into the general

ectoblast. At the fourth division the stem-cell divides unequally

in a direction parallel to the surface, a large inner cell being de-

laminated off from a smaller superficial cell (2*, Fig. 6, D).

The inner cell is forced into the angle between the two adjoining

“ macromeres,’ and forms one guadrant of the mesoblast; the

outer cell flattens out at the surface and ts, [ beheve, an ectoblast-

cell, though Iam not entirely sure that it may not ultimately

migrate into the interior to form mesoblast. The four primary

mesoblast-cells thus formed rapidly multiply to form four

groups of rounded granular cells (Fig. 6, /) which may easily

be seen for a long time through the transparent ectoblast and

from which the greater part, if not all, of the adult mesoblast

is derived.

It is clear from these facts that the cells of the second quartet

in the polyclade (7. ¢., in Leptoplana) are not purely mesoblastic,

but are sesectoblasts. It seems equally clear that the formation

of ‘larval mesenchyme’”’ from certain cells of the second quartet

in Unio and Crepfidula must be regarded as an ancestral remi-

niscence or survival of the process that occurs in all four of the

cells in the polyclade, and it is an interesting question whether

such a survival may not also occur in the embryos of annelids.

A careful re-examination of /Verezs with respect to this point has

thus far yielded a negative result. In Avicza, on the other hand,

it is probable that two mesoblast-cells arise from either the

second or third quartet, though the material at my command

has not enabled me to reach a decisive result. Atthe stage shown

in Figs. 1, C, and 2, A, two large and very conspicuous rounded

cells are found lying, one on either side, in the cleavage-cavity

between the lateral ectoblast and the mesoblast-band (y, 7, Fig.

1 Lang figures this division—PI. 35, Fig. 5.

CELL-LINEAGE. in

7) and slightly anterior to the latter. Sections show that these

cells are budding forth smaller cells into the cleavage-cavity. I

am nearly certain that these cells are not derived from the ento-

blast ; and their position is such that an origin from the primary

mesoblasts is improbable. They are often closely wedged in

between the overlying ectoblast-cells, and all the appearances

indicate that they have been derived from the latter. From

their position I believe it probable that these cells have been de-

rived from the two lateral cells of either the third or the second

Fic. 7, ARICcIA. Frontal optical section! of early embryo of Aricza, showing the

parallel mesoblast-bands (7, mz) extending upwards from the primary mesoblasts,

MM, M, behind the entoblast-plate (cf. Figs. 1, € and 2, A, which show the

same individual in different positions). At the sides of, and slightly anterior to,

the mesoblast-bands are the two mesoblast-cells (1, y) of probable ectoblastic

origin.

quartet—~. ¢., from derivation of c* and @’, or of c* and a? (¢¢-

Fig. 2, d)—and that they accordingly are comparable to the

“larval mesenchyme’”’ or “‘ secondary mesoblast”’ (z. ¢., the ecto-

mesoblast) of Unzo and Crepidula. Future investigation must

’ determine whether this surmise be correct, and what is the ulti-

mate fate of these cells, but the facts give, I think, good reason

1 Confirmed by actual sections.

20 WILSON.

to expect that the annelids will ultimately be shown to agree with

the mollusks in showing reminiscences of the ancestral mode of

development in the double origin of the mesoblast.

Returning now to the mollusks, Wierzejski, in a recent pre-

liminary paper (1897) states very explicitly that in Physa a

part of the mesoblast is derived from two cells of the third

quartet." This result, if well founded, gives good reason to

suspect that the third quartet may give rise to mesoblast in

some of the polyclades, as Lang has maintained for Drscocalis.

In Leptoplana I have sought carefully for evidence of such a

process, but thus far without success. This negative result is,

however, inconclusive owing to the difficulty of tracing the later

history of the individual cells. The first division of the third

quartet is vertical to the surface (Fig. 6, C) and in later stages I

have thus far found no evidence that a delamination of meso-

blast occurs. Soon after the delamination of mesoblast in the

second quartet, all of the ectoblast-cells forming the lips of the

blastopore become much flattened (Fig. 6, /), while the ecto-

blast-cap rapidly extends downward, the blastopore finally clos-

ing at or near the lower pole. In these stages the outlines of

the thin ecoblast-cells are very difficult to see, either in life or in

preparations, owing to the confusion produced by the underlying

deutoplasm-spheres, now much increased in size, on which they

are moulded. The mesoblast now forms four groups of

rounded granular cells conspicuously seen through the trans-

parent outer cells. A study of the successive stages proves that

the greater number of these are derivatives of the second quartet ;

but the possibility remains that some additions may have been

made from the third quartet.

From the foregoing account it appears that the ‘‘ mesoblast ”’

of the polyclade is derived from the ectoblast; and it may, I

think, be taken as a fair working hypothesis that this ‘‘ meso-

blast’? is represented in the mollusks, and probably also in

some annelids by cells (‘‘ larval mesenchyme,” etc.) derived from

the second quartet (U0, Crepidula, Aricia(?)) or perhaps in

1Confirmed by Holmes in the case of PVanordis since the above was written.

See Science, VI, No. 154.

CELL-LINEAGE. 21

some cases from the third quartet (Physa, Aricia (?) ).' Assum-

ing this to be the case, what shall we say of the mesoblast-

bands, which are in annelids and mollusks derived from the

fourth quartet and which, as we have seen reason to conclude

(p. 12), are probably to be regarded as derivatives of the primi-

tive archenteron? The development of the polyclade suggests

an answer to this question which is in harmony with the facts

discussed in the first part of this paper. As earlier observers

have shown, the fourth division of the ‘‘macromeres’’ in the

polyclade is unequal, giving rise to four smaller cells at the

lower pole of the embryo (4—J, Fig. 6, C—Z), and to four much

larger cells lying above them. From these eight cells, which

are heavily laden with deutoplasm and differ entirely in appear-

ance from the ectomeres and mesomeres, the archenteron is

formed. With this Leptop/ana exactly agrees, and I can find

no evidence that mesoblast-cells are formed from any of these

eight cells. If now we judge solely by relative position without

respect to size, the four larger cells or ‘‘macromeres’’ (4—4)

correspond exactly with the fourth quartet of annelids and mol-

lusks—in fact, they are relatively not very much larger than in

some of the mollusks (e¢. g., Flanorbis, t. Rabl, 1880). Lang

discovered the remarkable fact that in Descocewlis, as in so many

of the latter animals, the posterior cell of these four di-

vides long before the others; and further, that this division is

equal, giving rise to two symmetrically placed cells at the pos-

terior end of the embryo, while the ensuing divisions of the

other three cells of the quartet are unequal and irregular.’

- Mead? has pointed out the very remarkable resemblance of

these two cells in Descocwhs to the “primary mesoblasts’”’ of

annelids and gasteropods and even goes so far as to suggest

that they may give rise to mesoblast-bands in the polyclade.

My observations on Leptoplana lend no support to this sugges-

tion, agreeing nearly with those of Lang on Dscocwls save in

1Edouard Meyer (1890, p. 299) has definitely compared the ‘‘ parenchyma’’

(mesoblast) of the Turbellaria with the ‘‘larval mesenchyme’’ of the annelids,

which he believes to have a different origin from the mesoblast-bands.

2Cf. Lang, 1884, Figs. 17-20.

31897, p. 289.

22 WILSON.

one noteworthy respect, namely, that the division of the pos-

terior ‘‘macromere”’ is variable, only rarely dividing equally

(Fig. 6, #) and as a rule dividing unequally, giving rise to a

smaller cell (4d’, Fig. 6, £) that is typically formed obliquely

towards the right as seen from the side (z. ¢., in a leiotropic or

anti-clockwise spiral.' From this it appears that the form of

cleavage in the fourth quartet of Dezscocawlis, which agrees so

exactly with that of the annelids and mollusks, appears as only

an occasional variation in Leptoplana, though even here the

posterior ‘“‘macromere”’ is always the first to divide.

As regards the fate of these cells, the inequality of 4d and

4a” (often very marked) is itself indirect evidence that they do

not give rise to symmetrical mesoblast-bands as in the higher

types and I find no evidence that either of them gives rise to

mesoblast-cells. Both seem to have the same fate as the other

entoblast-cells, with which they exactly agree in deutoplasmic

structure, and enter into the formation of the archenteron as

Lang has shown in the case of Discocwlis. Can we neverthe-

less regard them as homologous to, or rather as the prototypes

of, the primary mesentoblasts of the annelids and mollusks ?

When we reflect on the facts, reviewed in the first part of this

paper, we may hesitate to answer this question in the negative.

For we have seen reason for the conclusion that the primary

mesoblasts of annelids and gasteropods have arisen historically,

as they arise ontogenetically, from the posterior part of the arch-

enteron ; and we have traced the entoblastic elements of the

posterior cell of the fourth quartet from a minute and apparently

functionless vestige (Avicia) back to a group of large and im-

portant cells (C7vepidula). 1 think we should consider the pos-

sibility, if only as a working hypothesis, that in ancestral types

the entoblastic elements of the posterior cell of the fourth quartet

1 Typically—z. e., in probably ninety per cent. of the cases observed, the division

is markedly unequal—often much more so than in Fig. 5, &. In a few cases the

direction of division is reversed, the smaller cell, 4@2 being found towards the left

(dexiotropic spiral). Sometimes the division is equal and vertical as in Descocedles ;

more rarely it is horizontal and either equal or unequal. I believe all these varia-

tions occur in normal embryos. A considerable time after the formation of 4@? the

other macromeres begin to divide unequally and irregularly, and all the macromeres

ultimately break up into smaller rounded cells, heavily laden with deutoplasm.

CELL-LINEAGE. 23

may have preponderated as greatly over the mesoblastic as the

latter now preponderates over the entoblastic in Avicza ; and that

the beginning of the series may have been such a mode of develop-

ment as still occurs in the polyclade where the entire quartet

is entoblastic. Thus we are brought anew to the view which

has been advocated by a number of morphologists, prominent

among them Edouard Meyer,’ that the mesoblast-bands (ento-

mesoblast) of the higher forms may have been of different origin

phylogenetically from the ‘larval mesenchyme’””

More specifically I would suggest that in the ancestral type

the fourth quartet was strictly entoblastic ; that at a later period

in the phylogeny the trunk-mesoblast (mesoblast-bands of higher

types) took its origin from the posterior part of the archenteron,

perhaps in connection with the development of a new body-region

from the posterior part of the ancestral body ; and that as the

cleavage became progressively specialized (7. ¢., assumed more of

what Conklin has termed a “ determinate type’’) the seat of this

mesoblast-formation became more and more definitely localized

in the posterior member of the fourth quartet. The symmet-

rical division of this cell in the polyclade might accordingly be

regarded as the prototype of that which occurs in the annelid

or mollusk, though the resulting cells have in the latter

forms acquired a different morphological significance. In other

words the old building-pattern, still persisting more or less

definitely in the polyclade, has been adapted to a new use”

precisely as in the evolution of adult structures.

I would distinctly repeat that these suggestions are offered only

as a speculative working hypothesis ; yet, despite their hypothe-

tical character, it seems to me that they may give a new point of

attack upon some of the puzzling phylogenetic problems with

which the study of cell-lineage has to grapple.

11890, p. 299.

2+ Cf. Conklin, p. 151.

3<«Tmagine that in any species a new organ is added, or rather, that a diffuse

series of structures gains great importance and compactness in the course of evolu-

tion. Then this new structure may de represented in ontogeny by acell. But the

form of cleavage is already defined. * * * The manufacture of a new cell be-

ing an impossibility, an old cell must be modified to represent the new organ.’’

(Lillie, 1895, p. 37.)

24 WILSON.

ike

On CELL—LINEAGE AND ANCESTRAL REMINISCENCE.!

The phenomena shown in the history of the micromere-quar-

tets in platodes, annelids and mollusks are, I think, of general in-

terest in two directions.

In the first place they render it highly probable, if they do not

actually demonstrate, that development may exhibit ancestral

reminiscence as clearly in the cleavage of the ovum as in the

later formation of tissues and organs. That the rudimentary

entoblasts of Avicia, Spio, or Amphitrite are such ancestral rem-

iniscences seems almost as clear as that the yolk-sac of the

mammalian embryo or the primitive streak of a bird-embryo are

such; and the same may be said of the formation of mesen-

chyme-cells from the second quartet in Uno or Crepidula

These facts, among many others, may well give us hope that,

when the comparative study of cell-lineage has been carried

further, the study of the cleavage-stages may prove as valuable

a means for the investigation of homologies and of animal rela-

tionships as that of the embryonic and larval stages. The re-

sults of experimental embryology have no doubt seemed ad-

verse to such a conclusion, by showing how easily the cleav-

age-stages may be altered by changes in the conditions of

development. But I cannot see that the embryonic and larval

stages are 1n much better case. Certainly the modification of

cleavage-forms which Driesch has effected in the echinoderm

egg by pressure, temperature and the like, are hardly greater

than those which Herbst has brought to pass in the gas-

trular and larval stages of the same eggs through modification

of the chemical environment. It is true that nearly related

forms—for example the gasteropods and the cephalopods—may

differ very widely in the form of cleavage; but so they may in

the embryonic and larval stages, and it may fairly be questioned

whether “secondary modification”’ or ‘‘ caenogenetic change ’”’

has gone further in one case than in the other.

1The term ‘‘ ancestral reminiscence’’ is here used to denote any feature of de-

velopment, the meaning of which is only apparent in the light of earlier historical

conditions, whether of the adult or of the embryo.

CELL-LINEAGE. PAS

Recent advances in the study of cell-lineage have, it is true,

raised some new apparent difficulties in the attempt to establish

‘precise cell-homologies, even between nearly related forms'

though I suspect that some of these will be found less serious

than they now appear. Against these difficulties, however,

may fairly be placed an increasing body of affirmative evi- °

dence,” and on this side may be ranged the observations re-

corded in the present paper. We should, moreover, remember

that just as the homologies of adult parts may be complete or

incomplete in various degrees (as Gegenbaur long since urged),

so cell-homologies may be more or less definite. Furthermore,

just as we cannot always find exact equivalents, in related forms,

of the several sub-divisions of homologous nerves or blood-

vessels or sense-organs, so we need not expect to find exact

homologues for all the individual cells throughout ontogeny,

The wonder is, indeed, that so many definite cell-homologies

have been established. I believe the facts now known demon-

strate the inadequacy of Hertwig’s too simple conclusion that the

definite values of the blastomeres, and hence of the cell-homol-

ogies based upon them, are merely an incidental result of the

continuity of development,’ and that they do not leave without

support the plea made five years ago in my paper on JVerevs, for

the study of cell-lineage as a guide to relationship.*

In the second place, these facts seem on the whole to em-

phasize the importance of cell-formation in development. The

inadequacy of the cell-theory as applied to development has

been very ably urged, especially by Whitman and by Adam

Sedgwick ; and their conclusions, fortified by the epoch-making

discoveries of Roux, Driesch and others on the development of

isolated blastomeres, are of an importance that we are only be-

ginning fully to realize. But the time has not yet come fora

just estimate of the cell-theory in this aspect ; and it may well

be questioned whether in the reaction against the cell-mosaic

theory, as originated by Schwann, and developed with so much

1Cf. Mead, 1897, and Child, 1897.

2Cf. Conklin, 1897.

3Cf. the very effective criticism of Conklin, 1897, p. I9I.

£13892, pp. 367, 455-

26 WILSON.

ingenuity by Roux and Weismann, the pendulum of opinion

may not have swung too far towards the opposite extreme.

The persistence in cleavage of vestigial cells (such as the rudi-

mentary enteroblasts of Avicza), or of vestigial processes in the

formation of the germ-layers (as in the origin of the ‘‘mesen-

chyme”’ in Uo or Crepidula) adds to the evidence that the

number and character of the cell-divisions stand in some direct

and important relation to the differentiation-process ; and it

would be difficult to explain such ancestral reminiscence in cell-

lineage under any view which does not recognize in cell-out-

lines the definite boundaries of differentiation-areas in the de-

veloping embryo.' The history of the posterior cell of the

fourth quartet in annelids and gasteropods gives a clue to the

process through which teloblasts and other determinate proto-

blasts have arisen by progressive specialization ; and I think it

lends support to the distinction drawn by Conklin’ between

‘determinate ’’ and “indeterminate ’”’ types of cleavage by show-

ing some of the steps by which the former may have been

acquired,

_From a physiological standpoint the persistence of rudimen-

tary cells in cleavage is a problem of high interest which

merges into the larger problem of ancestral reminiscence in

general. When one considers the analogous case of the polar

bodies, one is almost tempted to suspect that the formation of

the rudimentary enteroblasts may be in some way connected

with a definite transformation of the nuclear substance. It is,

however, equally possible that the removal of the cytoplastmic

substance of these cells may be a necessary condition of the

differentiation of the mesoblastic material.

ZOOLOGICAL LABORATORY OF COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY,

December 4, 1897.

Cf. Wilson, £893, :p. ¥4.

“E607, p- EGO:

CELL-LINEAGE. 27

LITERATURE.

Child, C. M., 1897. <A Preliminayy Account of the Cleavage of

Arenicola cristata, etc.: Zodl. Bull., 1, 2.

Gardiner, E. G., 1895. The Early Development of Polycherus

caudatus : Journ. Morph., X\, 1.

Hatschek, B., 1888. Lehrbuch der Zodlogie, I.

Hertwig, O. and R., 1881. Die Coelomtheorie.

Heymons, R., 1893. Zur Entwicklungsgeschichte von Umbrella

mediterranea: Zeit. wiss. Zobl., LVI.

Holmes, Samuel J., 1897. Preliminary account of the Cell-

lineage of Planorbis ; Zobl. Bull., I, 2.

Kowalevsky, A., 1871. Embryologische Studien an Wiirmern

und Arthropoden: St. Petersburg.

Lang, A., 1884. Die Polycladen: Fauna u. Flora: Neapel, XI

Monographie. —

Lillie, F. R., 1895. The Embryology of the Unionide: Journ.

Morph., X, i.

Mead, A., 1894. Preliminary Account of the Cell-lineage of 4m-

phitrite and other Annelids: Journ. Morph., 1X, 3.

Id., 1897. The early Development of Marine Annelids: /ourn.

Morph., XII, 2.

Meyer, E., 1890. Die Abstammung der Anneliden: Avo/. Cent., X.

Patten, W., 1886. The Embryology of Patella: Arb. Zool. Lust.

Wien, V1.

Rabl, C., 1880. Ueber den ‘“‘ pedicle of invagination’’ und das

Ende der Furchung von Planorbis: Morph. Jahro., V1.

Id., 1889. Theorie des Mesoderms: Morph. Jahrb., XV.

Stauffacher, 1893. Eibildung und Furchung bei Cyclas cornea:

Jena. Zettschr., XXVIII.

Wierzejski, A., 1897. Ueber die Entwicklung des Mesoderms bei

Physa fontinals: Biol. Cent., XVU, 11.

Wilson, Edmund B., 1892. The Cell-lineage of Verezs : Journ.

Morph., V1, 3.

Id., 1893. The Mosaic Theory of Development: Wood's Holl

Biol. Lectures, I.

Id., 1895. The Embryological Criterion of Homology: Wood's

Floll Biol. Lectures, XI.

Wistinghausen, C.v., 1891. Untersuchungen iiber die Entwick-

lung von Wereis Dumerilii: Mitth. Zoél. St., Neapel, X.

[ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sci., XI., pp. 1-27. ]

[AnnaLts N. Y. A. S., XI., No. 2, pp. 29 to 38, March 30, 1898. ]

“X-RAY DETECTOR,” FOR RESEARCH

PURPOSES.

C. C. TROWBRIDGE.

(Read November 2, 1896.)

)

THE “ X-ray Detector”’ is an instrument which has been de-

signed and constructed for the study of fluorescence caused by

Rontgen rays. It is a new form of the “ fluoroscope,’’ that ap-

paratus which has been so generally used for the observation of

the shadow images cast by these rays.

In its construction several devices were used to make it par-

ticularly suitable for research purposes, and a name has been

given it, in order that it might not be confused with the types

of the instrument previously constructed.

A description of the ‘‘ X-ray Detector”’ will be more clearly

understood, if a brief reference is first made to the original forms

of the “ fluoroscope.”’

Shortly after the discovery of the X-rays, several investiga-

tors independently perfected the method of using the fluores-

cent screen, employed by Professor Rontgen in his first experi-

ments with these rays, and devised an instrument for the study

of the shadow pictures of this recently discovered form of en-

ergy.

Professor E. Salvioni, of Perugia University, Italy, and Pro-

fessor William F. Magie, of Princeton College, in this country,

appear to have been the first to construct and use such appara-

tus. Both were apparently working on similar lines of research

and developed the same idea independently of each other.

In apaper read before the Perugia Medico-Chirurgical Society

on February 5, 1896, Professor Salvioni gave an account of

an instrument, devised by himself, for the observation of X-ray

shadow effects, in which he made use of the fluorescent screen.

(29 )

)

30 TROWBRIDGE.

A short article by Professor Magie, describing a similar con-

trivance, appeared in 7he Medical News, of February 15th. It

ran thus: ‘A sheet of black paper coated with platinum-bari-

cyanide, is placed with the coated side inward across the end of

a tube or box, into which the observer looks, and which is so

fitted to the face or shielded by cloths that the phosphorescent

substance and the eyes are protected from all extraneous light.”

“Tf the tube be then directed towards the Rontgen rays, the

phosphorescent paper in the tube glows and the shadows of

objects interposed between it and the Crookes tube appear upon

it.”’ Professor Magie subsequently suggested that the name of

‘‘skiascope’’ (an instrument to show shadows) be given to the

apparatus. :

About March 2oth, or a little over a month after the publica-

tion of Professor Magie’s article in Zhe Medical News, the Edi-

son fluoroscope appeared. It was essentially the same instru-

ment as that described in Zhe Medical News, except, that the

fluorescent substance, used by Mr. Edison to coat the screen,

was tungstate of calcium, which had been adopted because it

was believed by him to have greater fluorescent properties than

the barium platino-cyanide, and that it was provided with a bi-

nocular eye-protector, made to fit close to the face and shut out

all light from entering the apparatus at that end; thus allow-

ing both eyes to be used to observe the screen. The instrument

was furthermore made in a convenient form, and one which was

considered desirable for commercial uses. The ‘fluoroscope’’

or ‘‘skiascope’’ 1s very valuable for the observation of Rontgen

ray shadows, and has already been of considerable assistance in

a number of surgical operations, but it can only be used for ap-

proximate tests in scientific research, and is entirely unfitted for

certain investigations, for reasons which will be demonstrated

below.

Although in the greater number of investigations with Ront-

gen rays the photographic negative should be used in order

to obtain the most satisfactory results, there are a number of

important experiments relating to the various phenomena of

Crookes tubes which must be conducted by other methods.

Ana DETECTOR. 31

From these facts was evident the need of a scientific instru-

ment ‘suitable for studying the phenomena of Rontgen rays, and

one that could be perfectly relied upon. An apparatus de-

signed for such purposes was constructed by the writer in May,

1896, under the supervision of Professor Rood, of Columbia

University, who suggested some of its important devices. Sev-

eral forms of the instrument were exhibited'before the New York

Academy of Sciences at the meeting of November 2, 1896.

The “‘ X-ray Detector”’ is shown in outline in figures 8 and

g. In these cuts the main casing of the instrument is repre-

Fic. 8. Side view of the ‘‘ X-Ray Detector.’’

sented by A. It is made of thin wood, that is perfectly im-

pervious to ordinary light, and is 30 centimeters in length. The

ends of the casing, A, are rectangular, but differ somewhat in

dimensions ; at the extreme end, next to 4, the outside mieas-

a2, TROWBRIDGE.

urements are II centimeters in width by 7.5 centimeters in depth,

while at the opposite end, at C, the casing is square, being 7.5

x 7-5: centimeters:

Just back of the end C, the lower portion of the casing is en-

larged by a half-cylinder or half-drum extension of 6 cms.

radius, which was added so as to conform the shape of the casing

to certain devices which comprise a part of the interior con-

struction of the apparatus. ‘The entire inside of the instrument,

including all the brass parts, is painted a dead black.

B, in figs. 8 and 9, is a binocular eye-protector of patent

leather, which is shaped to fit above the eyes, and has a black

velvet cushion on the edge, marked 4’. This cushion is added

so as to prevent, as far as possible, all light from entering the

instrument from around the edge of the eye-protector. It

is made soft and elastic, in order that it may readily be made to

follow the contour and set close to the face of the person using

the instrument.

At the opposite end from #4 is a brass screen holder, C, which

measures 7.5 X 7.5 centimeters, and is constructed to fit exactly

into the end of the casing A. In this screen holder there is a

circular aperture 5.5 cms. in diameter, which is encircled by a

thin ring of brass that extends .5 cms. outward from the main

portion of the screen holder. A screen of black paper is placed

over this opening, having on its inner side crystals of barium-plat-

ino-cyanide (BaPtCy, + 4Aq), tungate of calcium (CaWO,), or

)

Fic. 9. Top View of the ‘*X-Ray Detector.’:

A-RAY DETECTOR. 33

some other strongly fluorescent substance. These crystals are

uniformly distributed over the area of a circle 5.5 centimeters in

_ diameter.

The black paper screen is held securely in place by a cap, D,

which is circular in form, and which fastens over the ring on the

screen holder, C, in such a manner that it is impossible for light

to enter the instrument from that portion. The construction of

these parts is such, however, that the cap, D, can be very easily

removed and the screen taken out and another substituted in its

place.

A device which is used by the X-ray Detector for purposes

which will be presently explained is shown in fig. 10. Its position

in the apparatus can be seen in figs. 8 and g. ‘In these figures

fis a disk of brass 7.5 cms. in diameter and .15 cms. in thick-

ness, fitted on a small shaft .5 cms. in diameter, that. passes

through the casing of the instrument from one side to the other,

6 centimeters back of the screen holder C, but below a line join-

ing the aperture in C and the eye-protector 4 (Fig. 8); so that

a view of the screen from the eye end is not crossed by the

shaft. On this shaft, but inside the instrument, is fastened a metal

shield, as shown by JZ, in fig. 10, which measures approximately

6.0 x 6.0 centimeters, and extends radially outward from the

shaft.

Diametrically opposite to the shield Z, two metal posts sup-

port a cross-bar /, fig. 10, 6.0 cms. long, and 1.6 cms. in thick-

ness, parallel to the shaft, and such a distance from it that when

the shaft is turned to one position, this bar will cross the center

of the field of the fluorescent screen.

The entire device can be made to revolve by turning a milled-

head £’, fig. 10, attached to the brass disk 4, and is so con-

structed, that if the shaft be turned to certain positions by

means of this milled-head, the view of the screen, as seen from

the eye-protector, may be partly or entirely shut off by the

metal shield Z, fig. 10, or it may be bisected by the cross-bar

J, fig. 10. Thus the view of the fluorescent screen may be

changed, in the different positions of the shaft, from a full toa

half-moon effect, to perfect occultation, and to the field of a cir-

cular screen crossed by a bar.

34 TROWBRIDGE.

The exact setting of the shield and cross-bar can be deter-

mined in the following manner: Outside of the box on the

brass disk /, and near its edge several short rods, 6 cms. long, ,

are placed. These are pointed at the ends and project outward

from the face of the disk. They are indicated by /, figs. 8

and 10. One rod indicates the position of the cross-bar inside,

a PSS

Fic. 10. Revolving device used in the ‘‘ X-Ray Detector.’’

and two rods the position of brass shield. Just beyond the

edge of the disk Z, figs. 8 and 9, and projecting from the cas-

ing of the instrument is a rod similar to those on the disk.

The pointed rods on the disk £ are so arranged, that if one of

them coincides with the stationary rod on the casing of the

apparatus, it shows that the cross-bar inside is bisecting the

X-RAY DETECTOR. 36

field of the fluorescent screen. If the two on the disk are in

coincidence with the stationary rod, it indicates that the view of

the screen inside has been completely shut off. There is alsoa

rod one centimeter long on the disk in that position which cor-

responds to the half-moon effect referred to in the last para-

graph.

The device for changing the view of the screen of the instru-

ment is for the purpose of giving the experimenter a means of

determining whether the screen, which is supposed to be under

the influence of X-rays, is really fluorescing or not. For,

although the screen may appear to be luminous, the effect of

vision may be only an optical delusion.

The contrivance shown in fig. 10 is used to test observations

as follows: If there seems to be a fluorescence of the screen,

the experimenter can attempt to set the cross-bar, J, fig. Io,

over the center of the luminous field.

Then, afterwards, the real position of the bar can be deter-

mined with absolute certainty by means of the indicating disk

on the outside of the instrument. If the luminous effect was

caused by light coming from the screen, and the setting of the

cross-bar made correctly, a coincidence must be found between

a certain one of the rods on the disk and the stationary rod on

the casing of the instrument, as previously explained. The

relative position of these rods is determined by the sense of

touch with the forefinger of: the right hand. When the right

coincidence is found to exist, the conclusion must be that the

screen is fluorescing.

Thus we have a checking device on the observations of the

fluorescence, which is perfectly free from any personal equation.

As it is often desirable to work with Rontgen rays completely

in the dark, Professor Rood suggested the use of the small

pointed rods on the brass indicating disk instead of marks, in

order that the investigator might remain in darkness during

experiments and determine the position of the revolving check-

ing device (shown in figure 10) by the sense of touch.

The means of eliminating the personal equations just de-

scribed, is important, because a conscientious observer may be

36 TROWBRIDGE.

led by the imagination to believe that a fluoroscopic screen is

fluorescing when it is really not. There are certain phenomena

pertaining to human sight and recognized in physiological

optics, giving the effect of a vision of dim grayish light, which

occur when the eyes are closed or in the dark. Such effects,

together with after-images, might often be a cause of deception

when an instrument is used which is unprovided with a means

for verifying observations of faint luminosity.

These phenomena are sometimes so vivid that they may

readily cause a person to believe that a pale light is coming to

the eyes from without, when the effect is really subjective and

in the eyes of the individual who is experimenting.

The name ‘‘ X-ray Detector ’’ was considered suitable for the

instrument and was adopted, because the apparatus was designed

particularly for the study of the fluorescence which is caused

by Rontgen rays, and for the reason that it is possible to de-

termine with it whether a screen of fluorescent material, which is

supposed to be under the influence of the X-rays, is actually

giving forth a perceptible amount of light, or whether the effect

which is apparently observed is due only to an optical delusion.

For most experiments of a scientific nature, a decided con-

trast between a luminous screen and the dark boundary sur-

rounding it is always desirable. A good contrast is obtained by

_ the employment of a comparatively small screen, such as-is used

in ‘‘ X-ray Detector.’’ This is the case fortwo reasons : In the

first place, that portion of a Crookes tube which is the main

source of Rontgen rays is generally quite small, seldom being

of greater extent than a few square centimeters.

If, therefore, a large screen is placed close to the source or

these rays, it will exhibit uneven fluorescence, one part showing

intense luminosity while the other portions appear faded out.

Such an effect tends to give little contrast between the fluoresc-

ing screen and the dark border surrounding it. On the other

hand, a small screen is fairly evenly fluoresced, its entire border

has equal definition, and all the contrast which is possible is

obtained.

Secondly : When a flat surface is observed at a short distance

di)

MERA ODETECTOR. we

from the eyes (20-30 centimeters), only a small portion of it is

distinctly seen at one time. Thus it follows, that a small screen

will be more clear than one that is large, because it lies more

nearly within the area of distinct vision, and its border has better

definition than that of the large screen.

‘a

seen tila =

7 WE

= TPN ITT IIIT TIiliiTItitil iii

CAP OFF CAP ON

Fic. 11. Device for holding fluorescent screen in place, showing the cap off and

the cap on. C—Screen holder. H—Black paper screen. O—Fluorescent

crystals. D—Cap. P—Screws for securely fastening the cap.

By the construction of the screen holder of the ‘‘ X-ray De-

tector,’ C, fig. 8, so that screens can be easily changed, a means

is obtained by which comparative tests and examinations of dif-

ferent fluorescent substances can be made. One method is as

follows: If it is desired that two fluorescent materials be com-

pared ; screens of these substances are prepared, and then the

farthest distance from an active Crookes tube at which each screen

38 X-RAVODETECTOR:

appears to be luminous is measured. The ratio of the squares

of the two distances will show the relative fluorescent values of

the substances, at least from an optical standpoint. In this test,

the checking device which is shown in fig. 10 is used to deter-

mine the correct distances. The screen holder, screen and

screen cover are drawn in detail in fig. 11.

The ‘‘ X-ray Detector” is provided with a base, A, fig. 8,

which is an advantage, because it is desirable that experiments

should be conducted under steady conditions. This stand has

been made very firm, and has a device by which motion in three

planes is possible, when observations are required with the ‘‘ X-

ray Detector’ in different positions with respect to the source of

the Rontgen rays. The instrument is also so constructed that

it can be easily freed from the base and held by a handle (GC,

fig. 8) in the hand of the experimenter.

The particular apparatus, described and shown in the accom-

panying illustrations, was made by J. Grunow, instrument

maker, New York, N. Y., from a model constructed by the

writer.

6 :

;

ANNALS N. Y. A. S., XI., No. 3, pp 39. to 43, March 30, 1898.

Sr PP 3 3 3 9

afk USE OF THE FLUOROSCOPIC SCREEN IN

CONNECTION WITH RONTGEN RAYS.

€. C.. TROWBRIDGE:

(Read November 2, 1896.)

IN a previous paper by the writer entitled “An ‘ X-ray De-

tector’ for Research Purposes,” containing a description of an

instrument designed and constructed for use in the study of

Rontgen rays, a reference was made to those investigators who

had improved the methods of using the fluorescent screen in

connection with the Rontgen rays. Mention was made of Pro-

fessor E. Salvioni, of Perugia University, Italy, and Professor

William F. Magie, of Princeton College, as being two investi-

gators who, working independently, were the first to construct

and describe an instrument which greatly simplified the manner

of using the fluorescent screen in experiments with these rays.

Professor Salvioni gave an account of his apparatus in a paper

which he read before a meeting of the Perugia Medico-Chirug-

ical Society on February 5, 1896. A translation of the same

appeared in ature, March 5, 1896, page 425 (No. 1375,

Vol. 53). The original manuscript having been published in

the Proceedings of the Academia Medico-chirugica di Perugia ot

February 6, 1896, Vol. VIII, No. 1-2. The instrument was

called a “‘ cryptoscope,”’ and was described in the article as a

cardboard tube 8 centimeters high, having at one end a screen

of black paper, on which had been spread a layer of calcium

sulphide, a substance that is fluorescent under the influence of

X-rays. At the other end, where the eye was placed, a lens

was fixed, which gave an image of the screen.

The priority of publication in this country of a description of

a piece of apparatus similar to that described above, belongs to

Professor Magie, who wrote a letter concerning it to Zhe MZed-

(39 )

40 TROWBRIDGE.

wcal News under the date of February 5, 1896, which appeared

in the issue of February 15th of that weekly (Vol. LX XIII,

No. 7, page 192). The paper was entitled ‘‘ A Convenient In-

strument for Visual Use in Diagnosis with the Rontgen Rays.”’

Another article, “ Application of Rontgen Rays, the Appara-

tus and its Use,” by the same writer, was published in the

American Journal of the Medical Sciences for March, 1896, Vol.

CXI, page 251. In the second paper Professor Magie referred

to the instrument which he had devised, and called it the

‘““skiascope,”’ as being a name appropriate to its uses.

Fic. 12. Cryptoscope devised by Professor Salvioni.

The first two illustrations which accompany this article are in-

tended to show the instruments which have just been described.

In fig. 12, the “cryptoscope,”’ which was devised by Professor

Salvioni, is shown. The letters which represent the parts in the

cut are as follows: A, a tube 8 centimeters long, 4, a lens used

to obtain an image of the screen, and C, a screen of fluorescent

material.

Fig. 13, shows the ‘‘skiascope’”’ as first devised by Professor

Magie. In the figure, A represents a tube about four centi-

meters ‘in diameter: and "C,the fuorescent sciecma 21h ene

tube was pressed tight against the face about the eye. JT is

meant to indicate a Crookes tube. The third cut, fig. 14, which

shows the Edison fluoroscope, has been drawn for the purpose

of comparison. Although this apparatus is quite familiar to’

many, it is described, and its uses are outlined, because it is the

form of “ fluoroscope’”’ which has been most generally used since

the discovery of Rontgen rays.

FLUOROSCOPIC SCREENS. 41

The Edison fluoroscope has been used mainly to obtain an

actual vision of the silhouette shadows cast by objects which

the Rontgen rays do not readily penetrate, such as the bones of

the human skeleton and metallic objects. In Figure 14, A rep-

resents a wooden box about 28 centimeters long, shaped as in

Fic. 13. Skiascope devised by Professor W. F. Magie.

the cut, and open at the small end at B, where there is a binoc-

ular eye-protector of patent leather, which is made to fit closely

about the eyes, so as to exclude all light from the sides, but al-

lowing the observer to look into the box. At C, in the large

end of the box 4, is a screen of cardboard coated on the in-

side with a fluorescent substance. The screens were at first

made of tungstate of calcium, but now barium platino-cyanide

is the material generally used. The apparatus is also provided

with a handle. If it is desired that the shadow of the bones of

the human hand shall be seen, the instrument is used as fol-

lows: The fluoroscope is held to the eyes with the screen end

placed before a Crookes tube emitting strong Rontgen rays.

The screen immediately becomes luminous, because the fluor-

escent substance thereon converts the energy falling on it in

the form of X-rays, into the rays of ordinary light.

The hand is then interposed between the fluoroscope and the

42 TROWBRIDGE.

source of Rontgen rays, and its shadow appears on the screen,

but as the bones absorb the rays to a much greater extent than

the flesh, they are projected as dark shadows, while the shadow

of the flesh is so faint that it can hardly be seen. Thus, the

bones of the hand appear distinctly in outline ; the effect being’

somewhat similar to the silhouettes of ordinary light.

Fic. 14. Edison Fluoroscope.

Most of the appliances for obtaining visual effect of Rontgen

rays by the use of the fluorescent screen are based on the dis-

coveries of Professor Rontgen, for it was he who first discovered

that fluorescent substances became luminous under the effects

of the X-rays. He studied both this phenomenon and the

effect of the rays upon the photographic negative in his famous

research, and obtained shadows of the bones of the hand by

the use of the fluorescent screen, as well as the more perma-

nent shadow-pictures by the photographic process.

The fluorescent effect of certain materials when subjected to

the influence of Rontgen rays was, however, partly anticipated

by certain observations of Dr. Lenard, of Bonn. This investi-

ts!

FPECORCSL OFFIC SCREENS. 43

gator found that, if a small aluminum window was fitted into

the end of a Crookes tube opposite to.the kathode, and if the

tube was excited in the usual manner by means of an induction

coil, certain materials would show fluorescence when they were

placed within a distance of six centimeters from the aluminum

window. Although this effect may not have been due to

Rontgen rays—which had not then been discovered—yet the

experiment showed that certain phenomena relating to. Crookes

tubes could be advantageously studied by the use of screens of

fluorescent material.

The ‘‘ X-rays”? which were discovered by Professor Rontgen, .

and which were emitted from an ordinary Crookes tube, were

observed to effect fluorescent substances as far distant as two

meters. The room in which Professor Rontgen conducted the

experiments was darkened, and the Crookes tube which was

used was covered with black paper. Then, when the fluores-

cent substances were brought near to the tube and in the path

of the X-rays, the fluorescence mentioned above was observed.

It will be seen, therefore, that the appliances which are used now

to observe X-ray shadowgraphs and fluorescence are simply

improvements of the methods used by Professor Rontgen.

DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS,

COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY.

[Annars N.Y. A. S., XI., No. 4, pp. 45 to 54, March 30, 1898.]

mae HYPERTROPHIED SCALE-LEAVES IN PINUS

PONDEROSA.

Francis E. Lioyp.

(Read January 10, 1898.)

[ PLATE I.]

EarLy in 1896 the writer was engaged in the study of pollen

development and, in order to supply himself with materials,

broke off a number of young staminate shoots from a specimen

of Pinus ponderosa, the Bull Pine or Yellow Pine of the West.

An examination of the same tree in the autumn discovered that

the pruning of these large, rapidly growing shoots had resulted

in the growth of one to three lateral shoots, a little distance be-

low the break. These lateral shoots which were developed from

the axils of scales on the upper portion of the shoot of the pre-

vious year were sterile, but differed in a remarkable degree from

the normal foliage shoots. In the latter the leaves are borne in

groups of threes (fascicles) upon very short branches which

spring from the axils of small triangular scales which are to be

regarded as reduced leaves. Inthe shoots induced by pruning,

however, these scales have been greatly developed, so much so,

indeed, as to have become leaves, both in structure and function,

while the fascicles, so called, were in most cases not developed

at all. When they were developed, however, there was pro-

duced the phenomenon of a twig with foliage leaves of two dis-

tinct kinds. The same operation was carried on in the spring

of the following year (1897) which resulted similarly. In one

case, however, a staminate shoot was produced.

It has been commonly observed, and was pointed out by

Masters‘ in 1880, that upon the Juniper, especially upon young

1 Nature, XXIII: 267. 1880.

(45 )

46 LLOYD:

specimens, there are found two kinds of leaves. Masters called

these two kinds the juvenile and adult forms, anc suggested that

the former, which are much the longer and sharply pointed,

represent an ancestral condition. In this way, also, he com-

pared Retinospora to an immature stage of 7wya inasmuch as

plants of the former genus suddenly assume the foliage charac-

teristics of the latter. It will be seen, however, that these two

cases, /inus and Juniperus are not quite parallel, for the ordi-

nary foliage or secondary leaves of the former are produced

upon the reduced twigs in groups or fascicles, in which the

number of leaves is practically constant for a particular species,

while this arrangement is not found in the junipers. The struc-

tures in /¢xus which should be compared directly with the leaves

of Juniperus are the primary leaves, and later the scales which

subtend the fascicles. Dimorphism in the leaves of the seedlings

of Finus is a constant feature. The cotyledons are followed

immediately by the primary leaves, so called by Engelmann, '

and it is only later that the fascicles are produced. The same

writer also drew attention to the fact that these primary leaves,

or similar ones, are also found upon sprouts of certain species

(P. mops, rigida, Canariensis, etc.), and are frequently upon

young shoots of Lavix. The structure of the cotyledons, pri-

mary and secondary leaves were studied comparatively by Da-

guillon* in 1890. He included in his studies five genera, Adzes,

Ficea, Pinus, Larix, and Cedrus, and showed that the ontoge-

netic series of leaves from the cotyledons to the adult, present

a series of gradations, gradual in Ades, but more pronounced

in /inus. Of the species of Pimus, Daguillon studied four

(P. strobus, pinea, maritima and sylvestris).

The primordial leaves which are produced in the seedling on

the stem above the cotyledons are in all cases elliptic in trans-

verse section, and have two resin ducts in contact with, or very

near the lower epidermis. In P. maritima, they are very near

the lateral angles. The supporting tissues are less strongly de-

veloped and the vascular bundle is single. In one species only

1 Engelmann, ‘‘ Revision of the genus Pizus,’’ Trans. St. L. Acad. IV, 1880.

2« Recherches sur les fuilles des Coniferes.’’ Rev. Gen. d. Bot. IL: 154. 1890.

—

HVPERTROPIED LEAVES. AT

of those studied is the vascular bundle single in the adult leaf,

P. strobus, while in the others, the bundles, which are two, are

widely separated.

It appears that the structures of the primary leaves produced

upon shoots, already mentioned, has not been studied, but it

has been assumed to be the same as that of the true primary

(primordial of Daguillon) leaves of the seedling.

There can be no doubt that the bud scales, and the scales

which subtend the fascicles of Pimus are reduced leaves. In

view of this fact it is of peculiar interest that we are able to

cause their return to the foliage condition, in that we have

clearly a case of atavism. Furthermore, the structure of an

hypertrophied scale-leaf, if we are right in regarding this as a

case of atavism, ought to furnish some clue as to the phylo-

geny of the genus. It is assumed in such an argument that

leaf characters are to be depended upon as a guide, and of this,

I believe, there can be little doubt, for it has been abundantly

shown that these characters are quite constant. This is espe-

cially true, I believe, as regards the position of the resin ducts

concerning which Engelmann wrote that it is ‘‘so constant and

seems to be so intimately connected with the essential character

of the plant, that I venture to adopt it as one of the principal

characters for the subdivision of the genus.’ Let us turn to

the consideration of the facts and see whether we may gather

any conclusions from them.

The staminate shoots have normally small, scarious scales,

in the axils of which in the upper part of the shoot, are pro-

duced the staminate cones. If these shoots are cut off, one,

two or perhaps three axillary buds on the upper end of last

year’s shoot will develop. So far I have been able to get no more

than three buds to develop. These buds, when developed into

shoots, have leaves which are narrowly triangular in outline,

broader at the base, and tapering gradually from the base to the

apex, and are of various lengths. The longest leaf observed

measures 6 cm. From the axils of some of these leaves were

developed normal fascicles. The transverse section shows them

to be flattened above and ridged along the middle line below.

48 LLOYD:

The margins are finely serrate, as is also a low ridge which runs

along the middle line on the upper surface. The surface is

markedly glaucous, and stomata are found on the upper surface

arranged in ten longitudinal rows and on the lower surface in four

rows, one row on each side of the two resin ducts.

A transverse section shows that the epidermal layer, one cell

in thickness, is underlaid by a layer of hypoderm, consisting of

strengthening cells, which, as a rule, does not exceed one cell

in thickness except at the angle of the lower side where an in-

complete second layer is found. The resin ducts are two and

are in contact with the lower epidermis.

The parenchyma is of cells of the infolded kind which is

characteristic of the group.

A fibro-vasal sheath is rather weakly developed enclosing two

bundles, which are slightly separated, consist of the usual ele-

ments and are surrounded by pitted vessels. The vascular

bundles are weaker than in the normal leaves, and are closer

together. The stomata are in nine to twelve rows on the upper,

and in four rows on the lower surface, and the latter are so dis-

posed as to be one on either side of the two resin ducts.

The normal leaves are about 20 cm. long, and, springing as

they do in threes from the fascicles, are in transverse section the

shape of a sector:of 120°:> Such Jone, slender “needles? sce-

quire and possess much stiffening tissue which occurs as hypo-

derm of several cells in thickness. The resin ducts, two in

number, are here found deep in the parenchyma, opposite the

lateral angles. The endodermic sheath is relatively larger and

contains two strongly developed vascular bundles which are

more widely separated than in the hypertrophied scales.

Without and surrounding the bundles is a mass of tissues com-

posed of pitted vessels. The stomata occur in twelve rows on

the upper and in thirteen to fifteen rows on the lower surface.

It will be seen then that the abnormal leaves in question

differ in the arrangement of tissues quite markedly from the

normal. They approach, in fact, very closely to the early or

primordial leaves in the species of Pzzus described by Daguillon.

These latter, however, are in their plan of structure very simi-

AVPERTROPEGIED LEAVES, 49

lar to the type of leaf seen in Pseudotsuga, and in many species

of Adies, and to this extent we would seem to be warranted in

saying that the Pines have been derived from a generalized

form having a leaf and other characters midway between the

firs and spruces. The nearest living representative of such a

form is Pseudotsuga. As regards the strobile, while pendant

and spruce-like in certain characters, especially when young, in

its large scales it is fir-like. As regards the leaves, it is decidedly

fir-like. As to general habit, it is spruce-like.

There is another value to be attached to this comparison be-

tween abnormal leaf and true primary leaf. Their close corre-

spondence in structure supports Celakovsky’s view that abnor-

malities in the Conifers are of very great value as a basis for

morphological study.

It has been said earlier in this paper that we have in these

abnormal leaves a retrogression to ancestral types. If this be

so we should look for a condition in the more immediate an-

cestral forms of the pines in which the primary leaves are nor-

mal, and later, intermediate forms should show a gradual sub-

stitution of fasciculated leaves for scattered ones.

Now there have been found in the Jura of eastern Siberia

certain forms which were described by Heer’ under the generic

name of Lefptostrobus. The description was originally based

upon the cones only. Further material was afterwards obtained

which showed the leaves to be pine-like and apparently fascicu-

lated at the ends of the short twigs. The material was, how-

ever, meagre, and nothing further was made out in regard to

the arrangement of the leaves.

Later Fontaine found in the Potomac of the Eastern United

States forms evidently closely allied to Heer’s Leftostrobus.

These he described? under Leftostrobus, taking the precaution,

however, of extending the original description by the addition

of the following remark bearing on the position of leaves

“leaves . . . scattered on the larger or principal stems and

grouped in bundles on the ends of short twigs.” This was a

! Flor. Foss. Arctica, VI : 23.

2U. S. Geol. Survey, Monograf XV.

ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sci., XI, April 20, 1898—4.

50 TAS OVD.

very wise procedure, inasmuch as Heer’s material, judging

from his plates, does not offer any evidence in regard to the

body of the twigs, but only as regards the ends, and even as to

this the material is meagre. In all probability more extended

search would discover that Heer’s Leptostrobus possessed the

two arrangements of leaves, scattered and fasciculated, since

this is true of Fontaine’s forms described under this genus.

It may be further remarked that with Lepfostrobus Fontaine

found other fossils which referred to a new genus, Laricopsis.

These in general are larch-like, but like Leftostrobus, possess

two kinds of leaves—fasciculate and scattered. Fontaine draws

attention to the fact that the young shoots of Larzr occasionally

produce the scattered or primarily leaves and compares them

to the permanent scattered leaves in Laricopsis, the probable an-

cestral form from which the Larch has been derived. ~ It is

reasonably certain, therefore, that in Leftostrobus and Laricopsis

we have closely allied forms which lived together and were the

forerunners of the Pines on the one hand and the Larches on

the other:

As to the causes which bring about the hypertrophy of the

scale-leaves in Pinus ponderosa it may be said that the increase

in nutrition plays no small part in the matter. Fujii’ ascribes

certain changes produced in the cones of a Japanese /yxus after

pollarding to over nutrition. Those species of /zxus, already

noted, which produce sprouts, do so from the stump after the

tree has been cut down, and these sprouts have dimorphic

leaves. The same result can be produced in Pinus ponderosa

by cutting off the staminate shoots to which, normally, a large

amount of food would pass. This food is diverted by pruning.

It is, however, not enough to say this, for there must be some

other factors at work. What they are we are not in a position

now to Say.

SUMMARY.

Abnormal leaves are produced upon shoots induced by prun-

ing the staminate shoots of /2zus ponderosa by the hyper-

1Fujii, K. Bot. Mag., Tokyo, IX, 275-271. 1895.

AIVPERTROPHIED LEAVES. 51

trophy of the scales. The latter are thus shown to be reduced

leaves. They are to be compared to similar structures found on

shoots of certain other species of which Pinus rigida is an ex-

ample. These species are those which readily produce sprouts

from the stump. They may further be compared to the scat-

tered leaves occurring occasionally upon Larix.

The structure of these abnormal leaves is not identical with —

that of the true primary leaves—those produced on the seed-

ling on the stem immediately above the cotyledons. While not

SO primitive as these primary leaves they may be compared more

properly to the Pseudotsuga type. .

-The abnormal leaves described are atavistic, and the twigs

bearing them may be compared to a permanent condition such

‘as obtained in the Lefpéostrobi of the Potomac, a condition which

probably obtained also in those forms from the Jura of eastern

Siberia described by Heer. Lepéostrobus may safely be regarded

as in the ancestral line of the Pines. Laricopsis probably stands

in the same relation to Larix.

Little can be said in regard to the causes beyond that over

nutrition plays no small part in the change. This suggests, at

least, that reduced nutrition may have been one of the more

important causes resulting in the evolution of the fasciculated

condition in Pixus and Larix.

I wish here to acknowledge the kindness of Dr. Arthur

Hollick in indicating to me literature bearing on the fossil

conifers.

PLATES:

EXPLANATION OF LETTERS USED.

e—Epidermis. h—Hypoderm.

r—Resin duct. tr—Tracheary tissue.

1—Hypertrophied scales.

2—Secondary leaves.

Fig. 1. Transverse section of normal or secondary leaf. (Sche-

matized ).

Fig. 2. Transverse section of hypertrophied scale. (Schematized).

Fig. 3. A shoot bearing both abnormal and normal leaves.

Figs. 1 and 2 are from camera lucida drawings.

(54 )

PLAT

CY La,

Ss,

ex s

<7 OTE TLE ele oe SSS

XI.

BNNALS N.Y. ACAD. SCT,

[ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sci., XI. No. 5, pp. 55 to 88, April 20, 1808. ]

NOdiee,ON BEOCK ISLAND.

(Investigation prosecuted with the aid ofa grant from tle

John Strong Newberry Fund of the Council of the Scientif.c

Alliance of New York.)

ARTHUR HOLLICK.

(Read January 17, 1898.)

Plates Iie ise

PP GEOLOGY : PAG”.

Mt PLEGELOI 9.5) ois Pals Suleehad wea eds a Spies eee eMA haat 5.

Se EMS C2 oio555.5 Lava vg Ste aa Uw one bee nate ete ere 50

tem VAD |: 22500) 6 anna ¥tagepaven's RENAL olga ane a Arr eae 6:

II. Borany:

RememMRTMMICIE Vor DCTINUE G3 2 Soe vw 3, igo) see ure Oh acd wsdl yo Ae De 6°

Pre ANS TO TNS ALOE... 0.5 cea cles vos doe acee tulaw's sacua vee teawe ee 6.1

OS CIC-SEv 6 TSO O08 OI all FG a Ia gs i ae 66

Causes which have determined and modified the Flora....... 6

Il]. MisceLLAngeous NOoTEs:

SRNR ORNS aha eet delet Ue oo gb iGov sens va Satenoevbere eee 70

MNO RC Se ch Meta egrets 2 da ea va vuivisisl ald bv lg aatiwroat te walle obs 71

L GEOLOGY.

INTRODUCTION.

At the meeting of the Academy on October 19, 1896, I gave

an account of the geology of Block Island, prepared from in-

vestigations personally made during the summer of that year,

together with all references to the subject on the part of others

which I had been able to gather.’ To this account I would

respectfully refer, in order to avoid reiteration, for information

regarding the general geologic conditions which prevail and the

opinions which have been expressed in relation to them. — Last

summer I again visited the island, for the special purpose c.

1Geological Notes. Long Island and Block Island. Trans. N. Y. Acad. Sci.,

XVI (Dec. 15, 1896), 9-18.

56 HOLLIGCK.

collecting, if possible, further material representing the Creta-

ceous (Amboy clay) formation, of which I had obtained indica-

tions at the time of my previous visit.

Three weeks were spent there, during which period the en-

tire coast line and most of the interior was subjected to critical

examination, with the result that several facts not before recorded

were noted, and a considerable amount of interesting material

was collected. During part of the time I was accompanied by

Dr. Lester F. Ward, of the United States Geological Survey.

In order that the general configuration of the island and the

several localities mentioned may be understood, I have included

a map of the island, prepared from that issued by the United

States Geological Survey’ (see plate II).

PALAZOBOTANY.

One of the most important problems which it was necessary

to solve was whether the Amboy Clay Series was represented

on the island. Theoretically these clays, which had been pre-

viously traced from New Jersey, through Staten Island and

Long Island, to Martha’s Vineyard, ought ‘to occur also on

Block Island and previous observations strongly indicated that

such was the fact. Definite evidence, however, was lacking and

it was recognized that if a few well-defined and typical species

of fossil leaves could be found the question would be settled.

Careful and systematic search was therefore made for such evi-

dence, and the result was entirely satisfactory. The material

collected was identical in its character and occurrence with that

from the other islands mentioned, consisting of ferruginous clay

nodules or fragments, containing organic remains, scattered

through the Drift, mostly in close proximity to two of the clay-

exposures, at Clay Head and Black Rock Point.

About twenty-five specimens of fossil leaves and fruit capable

of identification were found, representing fifteen species, all of

them Cretaceous in age, and at least nine of them typical of the

Amboy clay flora.

Following is the list :

1 Rhode Island, Block Island Sheet, 1889.

BLOCK ISLAND.

—~|

I. GLEICHENIA GRACILIS Heer (?).

PPLE er rig..g. )

Gleichenia gracilis Heer, Fl. Foss. Arct., Vol. iti (Kreidefl.),

eso pl. x hos IIs pros, pk xxvi.-figs.,13. b;.c, d.

Our specimen is almost certainly a Glezchenza, but the pinnules

are more acute and runcinate than in Heer’s figures of G. gra-

cits. I prefer, however, to refer it provisionally to this species

rather than to found a new one upon such a small fragment.

Locality : Near Black Rock Point, Block Island.

2. DAMMARA MICROLEPIS Heer (?).

(PL TE, Figseorge.b;,)

Dammara muicrolepis Heer, Fl. Foss. Arct., Vol. vi, Abth. II,

fess, pl. xi, fig. 5.

The specimens figured on our plate are undoubtedly referable

to the organisms which have been called Dammara and Euca-

lyptus, from the Cretaceous of America and the Old World.

The ones under consideration are, however, smaller than any

which have been previously figured and might perhaps be re-

ferred to a new species, but, in view of the limited amount of

material and its fragmentary condition, I have thought it best

to refer the specimens provisionally to Heer’s species.

Locality : Ball’s Point, Clay Head, Block Island.

3. MorIconia CYCLOTOXON Deb. and Ett.

Crleiiesiita.. 100)

Moriconia cyclotoxon Deb. and Ett., Urwelt. Acrob. Kreidegeb.

Aachen und Maestricht, p. 59 [239], pl. vii, figs. 23-27.

In regard to this specimen there can be no doubt. It is one

of the most abundant species found in the Amboy clays, at

South Amboy, N. J., and is also known from Staten Island and

the Arctic regions.

Specimens figured by Herr (Fl. Foss. Arct. Vol. vi, Abth

II, pl. xxxiii, figs. 1-9) and by Newberry (Fl. Amboy Clays

Monog. U. S. Geol. Surv., xxvi, pl. x, figs. 11-21) are far bet-

ter for comparison than are the original figures of Debey and

Ettinghausen.

Locality : Near Black Rock Point, Block Island.

58 FOLEIEGK.

4. WIDDRINGTONITES REIcuHu (Ett.) Heer (?).

(Pl = Pigs 3o)

Widdringtonites Reichu (Ett.) Heer, Fl. Foss. Arct., Vol. vi,

Abth, 1f) p. sa¢%pl xxvii, fre. 5 5. Vol vi pers) pl mes:

4, 5.

Frenelites Reichii Ett. Kreidefl. Niederschoena, p. 246, pl. i, figs.

10 a-IO €.

This little fragment of a conifer is referred provisionally to

the above species, partly on account of its close similarity and

partly because the species associated with it seem to warrant

such reference. It is one of the commonest species in the Am-

boy clays of New Jersey at several localities, and has also been

found on Staten Island and Martha’s Vineyard.

Locality : Near Black Rock Point, Block Island.

5. THINNFELDIA LESQUEREUXIANA Heer.

(PLU, aie sa ae)

Thinnfeldia Lesquereuxiana Heer, Fl. Foss, Arct., Vol. vi,

Abth: I) px 37; pl: -xliv) fies. 9, ec ela daa eer tion,

[2ea 2:

This is another well defined and typical Amboy clay species

of wide geographical distribution, which, when found with

Moriconia would, without any further evidence, be sufficient to

determine the horizon in which is occurs.

Found also on Staten Island and Martha’s Vineyard.

Locality : Near Black Rock Point, Block Island.

6. JuGLANS arctica Heer (?).

(Pi eBih cy etter 7a)

Juglans arctica Heer, Fl. Foss. Arct., Vol. vi, Abth. II, p. 71,

pl: xlit, figs= 1b, 2):

The fragment figured is apparently the upper part of an

ament similar, if not identical, with those described by Heer un-

der the above name. Inasmuch, however, as he also describes

and figures aments which can hardly be distinguished from

these, under the name of Myrica longa (Fl. Foss. Arct., Vol. vi,

BLOCK ISLAND. 59

Abth. II, p. 65, pl. xli, fig. 4b) I have been in doubt under

which species to place our specimen.

Locality : Near Black Rock Point, Block Island,

7. SALIX PROTEEFOLIA LANCEOLATA Lesq.

(Pre PVE Fie.)

Salix proteefolia var. lanceolata Lesq. Fl. Dakota Group, p.

50, pl. Ixiv, figs. 6-8.

A large number of varieties and forms have been classed under

this species. Our specimen is almost identical with Lesquereux’

fig. 8, above quoted.

Locality : Near Black Rock Point, Block Island.

8. SALIX PROTEEFOLIA FLEXUOSA Lesq.

SEE TNs Big. Ga.)

Salix protecfolia var. flexuosa Lesq. F1. Dakota Group, p. 50,

piuxiv, figs. 4, 5.

Recognized also from Long Island and Martha’s Vineyard.

Locality : Near Black Rock Point, Block Island.

g. Ficus Krausiana Heer.

(Ein Fie.’ T.)

Ficus Krausiana Heer, Fl. Moletein, p. 15, pl. v, figs. 3-6.

In naming our specimen I have been somewhat influenced

by the fact that this species is recognized by Lesquereux in the

Dakota group of the West (Fl. Dakota Group, p. 81, pl. L.,

fig. 5), although it might equally well be compared with Vele-

novsky’s Ficus suspecta (Fl. Boehm, Kreidef, part iv, p. 10

[71], pl..v [xxviii], figs. 6, 9). The two species, indeed,

I am inclined to consider as identical and the comparison of the

two is made especially significant when Velenovsky’s figure 9

is examined. It has also been recognized in the Martha’s

Vineyard Cretaceous flora.

Locality: Near South East Point, Block Island.

60 TIO TAACK.

10. MAGNOLIA WooDBRIDGENSIS Hollick.

(CED an ie isae2:

Magnoha Woodbridgensis Hollick, in Newb. Fl. Amboy Clays,

Dp. 374; pl xxxvihe wit pl: lvity tips 57.

There can be little doubt of the identity of our specimen

with the above species, especially when compared with figure 7,

above quoted.

Locality : Ball’s Point, Clay Head, Block Island.

II. LAuRUS PLUTONIA Heer.

(PL IV. Figs; 7.)

Laurus plutonta Fleer, Fl. Foss. Arcts, Voli vi, bth: i, p75,

pl. xix; figs. 1d) 2—4 ; plixx, figs? 34,°.4=0" ploxxiv ie. Ope

pl exvin, fes?to, 04 pl sd, sneelo:

Under this specific name different authorities have placed a

large number of forms from America and the Old World, and

several which have received different specific names might

equally well be included under it. It is abundantly represented

in New Jersey, and has been found on Staten Island, Long Is-

land and Martha’s Vineyard.

Locality: Near Black. Rock Point, Block island:

12. CELASTRUS ARCTICN [cer

CPN. Bier aoe)

Calastyus arctita Heer, Fl, Foss: Arct., Vol, viii p. 4o;plaisd,

fiSS. Gd Fe:

For purposes of comparison the figures by Heer, above

quoted, are not as satisfactory as those by Newberry. (FI.

Amboy Clays, pl. xiii, figs. 8-18).

It is a common species in the clays of South Amboy, N. J.

Locality : Near Black Rock Point, Block Island.

13. MyrropHy_ium (Eucatyprus ?) Geinitzi Heer (?)

(PLA: “Figs 133°)

Myrtophyllum (Eucalyptus ?) Geinitst Heer, Fl. Moletein, p. 22

plist, hosts a

BLOCK. ISLAND. 61

In referring our specimens to this protean and widely distributed

species I have done so provisionally, as the nervation is sparse

or wanting in those which exhibit the best outline, while the one

in which the characteristic nervation is shown is merely a frag-

ment. Specimens which are entirely satisfactory have, however,

been found in New Jersey and on Staten Island, Long Island

and Martha’s Vineyard.

Mocality: Fig. 1, near South East Point; figs. 2, 3, near

Black Rock Point, Block Island.

14. EUCALYPTUS ? NERVOSA Newb.

CEs ieee a)

Fucalypius? nervosa Newb. Fl. Amboy Clays, p. 112, pl.

Xxxil, figs. 3-5, 8.

In the Flora of the Amboy Clays, onthe plate above quoted,

Dr. Newberry figures two allied species—the one to which I

have referred our specimen and another which he calls Auca-

lyptus ? angustifolia, Our specimen lacks the tip by which it

could be definitely identified, but I have little hesitation in re-

ferring it to £. wervosa.

The same species has also been identified from Long Island.

Locality : near Black Rock Point, Block Island.

15. TRICALYCITES PAPYRACEUS Newb.

Geigy: igs’ 6.)

Trnicalycites papyraceus Newb. -Fl. Amboy Clays, p. 132, pl.

xlvi, figs. 30-38.

Our specimen apparently represents a central lobe of the

organism named as above by Dr. Newberry, from Woodbridge,

“i a

The same species has also been been found on Staten Island

and Long Island.

~ Locality: Ball’s Point, Clay Head, Block Island.

The evidence afforded by these species is of the highest im-

portance, as it serves to definitely correlate the basal clays of

62 PT OMETCR.

Block Island with those of Martha’s Vineyard to the east, and

Long Island, Staten Island and New Jersey to the west, and

shows them all to belong to the same Cretaceous horizon.

Inasmuch as a prominent authority has published his opinion

that these clays are probably Jurassic in age, I perhaps can not

do better than to quote the words of Dr. Lester F. Ward, ex-

pressed after an examination of the material now in our posses-

sion from the region:

‘Those who are capable of supposing that such a flora as

this could have flourished in Jurassic time are certainly at lib-

erty to do so, and the geological world will doubtless duly ap-

preciate their courage.”

STRATIGRAPHY.

While engaged in collecting the material previously described

other matters of geologic interest were also incidentally noted.

The lithologic characteristics of the basal (Cretaceous) clays

always served to distinguish them from the superficial (bowlder)

clays above. The latter are best represented on the south

shore, at Mohegan Bluffs (see plates V. and VI.) and consist of

contorted grayish sandy clay, in which gravel and occasioned

bowlders occur, but no organic remains. The Cretaceous clays

are exposed at Clay Head (see plate VII), Grace Point, and near

Black Rock Point and Old Harbor Point (see plate VIII.). They

are plastic and either black from the presence of lignite or else

pure white, yellow, red or bluish. Beds of white sand accom-

pany them at the two localities first mentioned.

Observations on dip and strike are of but little stratigraphic

importance, on account of the contortion to which the beds

have been subjected by glacial action, and such observations as

were made merely tended to emphasize this fact, the dip in all

cases being toward the north, indicating that the strata had been

pushed southward in a series of overthrust folds by the advanc-

ing ice front. This was found to be uniformly the case with the

basal clays and largely so with the superficial ones, apparently

indicating that the latter as well as the former were laid down

previous to the advent of the ice.

1Science, IV (Nov. 20, 1896), 760.

peek ISLAND. 63

Photographic views of four of the most interesting localities

mentioned were taken from which the accompanying plates

were reproduced :

PLATE V. Contorted bowlder clay, south shore, Mohegan Bluffs, looking west,

about three-quarters of a mile east of Black Rock Point. Variegated (Cretaceous )

plastic clay beneath, in the distance, at extreme left.

Dip of the latter, 60 N. W.; Strike, N. 38 E. and 50N. W.; N. Io E.

PLATE VI. View of a portion of the latter exposure, looking east, showing con-

tortions of the bowlder clay.

PLATE VII. White (Cretaceous) plastic clay and sand, overlain with Drift, east

shore, Ball’s Point, Clay Head.

ip, 35 N.; Strike, E. and :W.

PLATE VIII. Lignitic and white (Cretaceous) plastic clay, overlain with Drift, east

shore, near Mineral Spring, about half a mile north of Old Harbor Point.

Dip, 44. N. E.;. Strike, E. 20 8.

iy BOTANY:

PRELIMINARY REMARKS.

Although engaged primarily in geological investigations,

many notes on the vegetation of the island were incidentally

gathered and its connection with the geological features noted.

In fact, the study of the flora of any region, particularly that of

a restricted one such as an island, is now recognized as being

often of the highest importance when considered in connection

with the geology, the facts in one often leading to an interpre-

tation of otherwise puzzling problems in the other.

The first essential in such an investigation is to obtain a

broad general idea of the vegetation, and for this purpose as

complete a list of the plants as possible is necessary, with notes

on the relative abundance or scarcity of each species, so that

not only may the extent of the existing flora be seen at a glance,

but any striking lacune be at once noted.

Mr. W. W. Bailey’s ‘‘ Notes on the Flora of Block Island’’*

was made my basis for determining what had been previously

recorded on the subject, and with his list constantly by me it

was an easy matter, while wandering over the island, to refer to

it and ascertain whether any species in question had been noted

1 Bull. Torrey. Bot. Club, xx. (June, 1893), 227-239.

64 HOLLICK.

by him. If found upon the list it was checked off, and if not a

memorandum was made and specimens collected.

Physiographically the flora may be divided into that of hills,

the peat bogs and pond holes, the salt marshes, the sand dunes

and the salt water, the latter being exclusively algal, except for

Zostera. The island is practically treeless and hence also de-

void of such vegetation as is dependent upon forestal conditions.

The bulk of the surface is that of a typical morainal region,

with rounded hills and corresponding depressions, many of the

latter being occupied by swamps or ponds, often without any

visible outlet. Running streams are few and insignificant, and

permanent springs occur only in a limited number of localities,

mostly close to tide-water. Great Salt Pond, now connected

with the ocean by means of an artificial channel, but formerly

said to have been fresh water, occupies the center of the island

and almost divides it into two parts, while between the eastern

and western borders of this pond and the ocean are low nar-

row strips of dunes and sand beaches. The remainder of the

coast line is more or less precipitous and is strewn with boul-

ders, washed out from the adjoining land. ‘The soil, except

that of the limited dune and sand beach areas, consists of the

boulder till and gravel. There are no rock outcrops anywhere

exposed, and the geological conditions preclude the probability

of any being within hundreds of feet of the surface. Probably

all the land capable of it is, or has been at some time, either

under cultivation or used for pasturage. Such, in brief, are the

conditions under which the vegetation exists to-day on an iso-

lated island about eleven square miles in area.

ADDITIONS £0. THE) PRORA:

Mr. Bailey enumerates in his list 285 species of Spermato-

phyta and g Pteridophyta, to which I was able to make the fol-

lowing additions, collected between July 8th and July 30th.

1. Zostera marina L. Abundant in salt water.

2. Panicum spherocarpon Ell.

3. Panicum pubescens Lam. \ Abundant on the dry hills.

Probably included by Mr. Bailey under P. dichotomum L.

BLOCK ISLAND. 65

4. Juncus acuminatus Michx. Abundant in the peat bogs.

Commonly proliferous.

5. Smilax rotundifolia L. Rare. Only a few scattered plants,

in widely separated localities on the south end of the island.

6. Sesyrinchium Atlanticum Bicknell. Common. Probably

included by Mr. Bailey under S. anceps Cav.

7. Populus balsamifera candicans (Ait.) A. Gray. Sparingly

established in certain swamps. Common in cultivation.

8. Salix cordata Muhl. Common in many swamps and

along roadsides. Occasionally planted.

9. Salix cordata angustata (Pursh) Anders. Abundant in

one swamp near the south side of Great Salt Pond.

10. Salix purpurea L. Abundant and thoroughly natural-

ized along roadsides.

11. Rumex obtusifolus L. Sparingly, in a ditch along south

side of Main St.

12. Glaucium Glaucium (L) Karst. A few plants, on the

sand hills near Grace Point.

13. Roripa palustris (L.) Bess. Sparingly, in a ditch along

south side of Main St.

14. Trifolium incarnatum L. One plant, in a field at the

south end ofthe island. Probably introduced with other clover

and hardly naturalized.

15. Lrifolium procumbens L. Not common.

16. Acalypha gracilens A. Gray. Common in dry open

fields. Usually stunted. Probably included by Mr. Bailey

under A. Virginica L.

17. Vicia sativa L. Common.

18. Hudsonia tomentosa Nutt. Abundant on the sand hills

near Grace point.

19. Onagra Oakesiana (A. Gray) Britton. Not rare near

the shore. Probably included by Mr. Bailey under 4:nxothera

biennis L.

20. Lysimachia quadrifoha L. Common.

21. Trtentahs Americana Pursh. Common.

22. Asclepias pulchra Ehrh. Common.

23. Sericocarpus asteroides (L.) B.S. P. Abundant in a lim.

ited locality at the south end of the island.

ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Scr., XI, April 20,,1898—5.

66 ITOLLICK.

24. Gnaphahum purpureum L. Not common. Found with

G. uliginosum \.. in the vicinity of Clay Head.

With the above additions the list now comprises 309 Sper-

matophyta and g Pteridophyta, but there is no doubt that it

could be largely increased if collections were made in the spring

and autumn. I was-unfortunate in having explored the same

region as did Mr. Bailey, at the same time of year, so that I

was able to accomplish but little more than to pick up a few spe-

cies which he had somehow missed. ;

DISCUSSION OF THE FLORA.

If the flora be now examined as a whole several significant

facts may be noted. Many curious lacune will at once attract

attention, as remarked by Mr. Bailey, and not only are species

wanting which one might reasonably expect to find, but so also

are whole genera and even families.

For example, the Liliaceze are not represented, and of the Smi-

lace only two species (Swlax rotundifoha L. and S. glauca

Walt.) were found in very limited numbers. The Boraginacez

are wanting and, except for a few scattered trees of Vyssa aquatica

L., the Cornaceze would be likewise. The genera Cornus, Vac-

cinium (excluding the cranberry), Veronica, Metbomia, Lespedeza

and Lapiisia are entirely absent. Only four species of Carex

were found, one Pycnanthemum and one Viburnum, while many

other species are represented by only a few individuals. Among

the species which might be reasonably expected to occur, but

which were not seen, may be noted Solanum Dulcamara L. and

Verbascum Blattaria L., which usually follow in the wake of

civilization; //zdescus Moscheutos L., Vernonia Noveboracensis

(L.) Willd., /va frutescens L., Kr pane linearis (Michx.) Spach.,

K. pumila (L.) Spach. and Eee: tuberosum L. The ab-

sence of the latter would perhaps not be remarkable except for

the fact that its usual companion, Pogonta opluoglossoides (E.)

Ker. is quite abundant.

This list of lacunae could be readily extended by a careful

analysis of the flora, but it should also be borne in mind that

more thorough search might and probably would reveal the

existence of species which have thus far escaped notice.

BLOCK ISLAND. 67

The flora is morainal in its general character, except in the peat

bogs and on the limited sand-dune and sea-beach areas, and has

its nearest analogue in that of Montauk Point'. In fact, if we

could imagine Montank Point to be despoiled of its few remain-

ing trees and converted into an island it would bear a striking

resemblance, geologically and botanically, to Block Island.

CausES WHICH HAVE DETERMINED AND MOCIFIED THE FLORA.

In discussing the causes which have determined the location

of any flora and subsequently modified its characters, two

prominent factors nearly always have to be considered—the

geological and the human. Each of these may have been in-

strumental in both introducing and eliminating certain species,

and the discussion of a flora cannot be considered as complete

unless they are taken into consideration. The influence of man

is usually so obvious as to appeal at once to any observer or

else it is a matter of more or less definite record. The geo-

logical influence however is often so obscure and has its begin-

ning at such a remote period that it usually escapes attention.

In its widest application this includes atmospheric and ocean

currents, soil, climatic changes, changes of level, etc.

From a study of the existing geological and floral conditions,

as I have elsewhere attempted to demonstrate,’ the indications

are that at the close of the Ice Age there was a continuous strip

of land, except for certain river outlets, extending from what is

now New Jersey to the southeastern New England coast, with a

large body of fresh water occupying the deepest parts of what is

now the basin of Long Island Sound. This strip consisted of

an elevated portion along the northern border, formed by the

terminal moraine, left behind on the final retreat of the ice, and

a plain region to the south, of varying width, representing what

remained of the old Tertiary coastal plain, which formerly ex-

tended out to what is now the 100-fathom contour. The flora

which had been driven southward by the invasion of the ice re-

1See ‘*A trip to Montauk Point.’’ Arthur Hollick, Bull. Torrey Bot. Club,

xviii. (August, 1891), 255, 256.

2 See ‘‘ Plant Distribution as a Factor in the Interpretation of Geological Phenom-

ena,” etc. Trans. N. Y.-Acad. Sci., xii (1893), 189-202.

68 HIOLEICK.

turned when the ice receded, only such species becoming estab-

lished, however, as could exist under the changed conditions.

Fluctuations of level occurred; the final epoch, extending to the

present time, being one of depression, during which the strip of

land was gradually disintegrated and separated into a series of

islands, some of which exist to-day as Long Island, Block

Island, Martha’s Vineyard and Nantucket, while the basin of

Long Island Sound became filled with salt water.

If we consider the geological features of these islands and

compare their floras, we may note that all except Block Island

still have a greater or less area of the plain region remaining

with them, upon which a characteristic flora finds a home.

Block Island has lost all of its plain region and accompanying

flora and is now merely an isolated portion of the terminal

moraine, with small areas of modern sand-beach and dune for-

mations, affording a home only for such species as can exist

under those conditions. We may thus understand one of the

causes which has determined the location and character of the

flora and one of the reasons why it is so limited in the number

of its species.

Further than this, if the submarine contours of the vicinity

are studied it will at once be seen that a deep channel extends

almost entirely around Block Island. This fact is especially

emphasized if the twenty-fathom contour is traced out and con-

tinued around our coast line from Cape Ann to Staten Island.

(See accompanying chart, plate IX.) From such a tracing the

fact is evident that if we could imagine the coast to be subjected

to elevation, until the twenty-fathom contour became the coast

line, Block Island would yet remain an island, or perhaps a

peninsula-like projection connected with the eastern end of Long

Island by a narrow isthmus, while Martha’s Vineyard and Nan-

tucket would be part of the mainland of New England.

The indications therefore are that Block Island was the first

portion of the strip of land to be isolated and converted into an

island. The flora of the plain region, coming largely from the

south and possibly always having existed close to the ice front, *

1 Tt is well known that the floras of many regions where glaciers occur, exist and

flourish, not only up to the ice front, but even upon the débris covering the ice.

BLOCK ISLAND. 69

would be the first to advance and occupy the ground, while that

of the moraine, being more of a northern type, could not be-

come established until the conditions due to glaciation north-

ward had become modifled so that it could exist there and be-

come distributed and Block Island, on account of its morainal

character, would only be favorable for the flora which was the

last to return. These geological changes then were probably

what determined the general character of the flora in the first

instance, and the next question for us to answer is what subse-

quent causes served to modify it into its present condition.

In the accounts of the earlier explorers and settlers the trees

of the island are frequently mentioned and there is no doubt

that it was extensively wooded at that time, but with what spe-

cies there does not seem to be any record, except vague reference

to pine, oak, beech, hickory, etc. In many of the peat bogs

may yet be found large stumps, together with roots and branches,

providing us with evidence that these early accounts were true.

I saw one stump, about three feet in diameter, which had been

dug out of a swamp at Clay Head, while at Old Harbor Point,

in a swamp which had become exposed by the action of the

waves, were found numerous stumps, roots and branches. As

before stated, the island is now practically treeless, except for the

few wind-lashed and stunted individuals in the vicinity of dwell-

ings or in sheltered swamps and hollows. The extinction of

the arboreal flora was undoubtedly due directly to the necessi-

ties of civilization, not only for the purposes of land cultivation

and pasturage, but also for lumber and fire wood. On account

of their isolated position, the population, in its early days, had

to depend almost entirely for subsistence upon what could be

gathered from or cultivated on the island. The disappearance

of the trees is, therefore, readily accounted for by the direct in-

fluence of man, and to this influence was, of course, indirectly

due the extinction of such herbaceous plants as could only

exist under forestal conditions. Subsequent cultivation and pas-

turage destroyed many more, and the complete isolation of the

island rendered the re-establishing of species by natural agencies

a matter of time or fortuitious circumstances.

70 FIOLLTCK.

A limited number of species have, of course, also been intro-

duced, purposely or accidentally, by human agency and are now

part of the wild flora, and further additions will doubtless be

made in the same way in the future, but as a study of plant dis-

tribution Block Island will always be of interest chiefly on ac-

count of the geological causes which determined the character

of its flora long before the advent of man.

Ill, MISCELLANBOUSENO TES:

ARCHEOLOGY.

Around the shores of Great Salt Pond and on the sand dunes

which border the western shore of the island evidences of former

occupation by the Indians are numerous. Kitchen middens are

exposed in several street cuttings ; implements are often found

scattered over the surface of the ground in certain localities and

skeletons have been unearthed from time to time.

In many places the kitchen midden accumulations were so

obvious that it was impossible for me to ignore them entirely.

They were found to consist of the customary collection of oyster

and other shells, bones, pottery fragments, fire-cracked stones,

charcoal, finished implements, rejects, flakes, chips, etc. An

attempt was made to calculate the relative abundance of the

several kinds of molluscs represented, with the following result :

I. Oysters; 2. hard clams (Venus) ; 3. soft clams; 4. mus-

sels; 5. pectens; “6. longeclams)\(Wac7a) +7. simmpersr) eo.

land snails ; 9. occasional conch and razor shells.

The finished implements found were two axes, of a plagioclase

igneous rock and three arrow points, all of quartzite. The

flakes and chips were found to. be mostly of white quartz and

quartzite, with chert and jasper sparingly represented.

In the sand dunes are many old fire places, mostly buried by

the sand which has drifted over them. They could generally

be located, however, by the thrifty nature of the turf on the

surface immediately above. Indeed, my atttention was first

called to their presence by noticing the patches of short green

BLOCK ISLAND. T1

turf, scattered at intervals through the tall grass of the dunes.

Upon digging down to a depth of from two to ten inches I in-

variably found accumulations of charcoal, cobble stones, shells

and the bones and teeth of animals. A number of the latter

were collected and subsequently submitted to Dr. Bashford

Dean, of Columbia University, for examination, to whom I am

indebted for the following list :

Sturgeon, numerous plates.

Bluefish, jaws and teeth. .

Swordfish, fragments of a skull and premaxille.

Fish vertebra, not identified.

Porpoise (?), fragments of ribs.

Seal, fragment of a rib.

Vertebre and tibia of a bird, possibly a swan.

The indications are that the island would prove a rich field

for investigation by anyone interested in archeology, as a fair

amount of material may be obtained by mere surface scratch-

ing, and systematic search would doubtless reveal much more.

Aside, however, from the value of the material which might be

collected, an insight would be obtained into the fauna which

formerly inhabited the island and its surrounding waters—in-

formation which would be of great interest to the zoologist.

Notre.—After having made the few archzological observa-

tions above recorded I learned by accident that explorations

were being made by others specially interested in the subject.

This information caused me to abandon any further investiga-

tions in that direction, in order not to anticipate any of the work

under way, the results of which will doubtless be published in

due time through other channels.

ZOOLOGY.

As might be expected, the existing fauna is comparatively

sparse and is evidently very meagre compared to what once ex-

isted on the island. In fact, the scarcity of animal life is sure to

at once attract the attention of the observer from the main-

land.

Tree-loving birds are conspicuous by their absence, and I was

42, FIOELICR:

curious to know how the robins, which were more or less

abundant, were in the habit of nesting. Bank swallows, red-

winged blackbirds and meadow larks were the birds most in

evidence, and I found a nest of the latter, with four eggs, on

July 20th. A bird that I identified with reasonable certainty as

the bay-winged sparrow was seen in considerable numbers, evi-

dently breeding freely, as I found two nests, one with three

eggs on July 13th, the other with two on July 25th. Unless

my previous experience is at*fault, all these nests represent very

late broods, and this feature seemed to me to be a fact of suffi-

cient interest for record.

An interesting feature of the molluscan fauna is the immense

numbers of L2¢torina littoria, the “ periwinkle”’ of the Old World,

which is now by far the most abundant shell-fish on the shores.

In places the rocks were found completely covered by them, to

the exclusion of all native species. So far as I have been. able

to ascertain, the first record of the occurrence of this species in

America was in 1857, at Halifax, Nova Scotia. In 1873 it was

reported from Prince Edwards’ Island, and in 1875 from Pro-

vincetown, Cape Cod. It was next found at Wood’s Holl and

Newport, and on Loyd’s Neck, L. I., and on Staten Island in

1888. I do not know of its previous record from Block Island,

and am not informed as to its occurrence south of Staten Island.

As it lives upon rocks, the sandy shores of New Jersey would

probably not be a congenial habitat for it, and might limit its

farther southward migration.

Frogs and spotted turtles are plentiful, and I occasionally

came across a few small striped snakes, but, except for those

mentioned, the faunal elements were not obvious and would

have to be searched for in order to be observed. |

— ‘

; .

my J

t - ‘

as A +

- »

é : és]

‘ ‘

sod ‘ a

A, a ae 205

a - ;

a - P : Zz

(73 )

jg oa BS Se 9

PEATE 711:

Map of Block Island, reproduced, with alterations, from the Rhode

Island, Block Island Sheet, U. S. Geological Survey (1889). :

(74)

MmNNALS N.Y. ACAD. SCI XI. PLATE Ii,

Sandy Point

Grove Point

\4Balls Point

Ly,

BeaconHull9

Weg fe.

aaw>

Ao =pivt § $ Mn its

“ae =

ylk Mohegan

. Wy wy ppeuwl/)/\wy9

1 z \\ Aly U Liy ny

‘

Lay

SMPoint we Rocke Point

° ys z ‘* bd

fe igs Py °

me woe 4 é he 4

4 pe” ie 7

. mn

’

il 8 ee AD

PLATE Ti:

Hig. t.< 2icus Krausiane Heer southeast omit... ae a9

Fig. 2. Magnolia Woodbridgensis Hollick. Ball’s Point. . . 60

Fig. 3. Gileichenta gracis Weer @). Black Rock Pomt. 2) 159

Figs. 4, 5. Zhinnfeldia Lesquereuxiana Heer. Black Rock Point. 58

Fig. 6. 7ricalycites papyraceus. Newb. Balls Poimt.. a0. amon

Figs 7: Juclans arctica Heer,(?). Black) Rock Point. fa) see

Fig. 8. Widdringtonites Retchit (Ett.) Heer (?). Black Rock

POUL. Le oe Me

Figs. 9a, 9b. Dammara microlepis Heer (?). Ball’s Point. . . 57

Fig. 10. Moriconia cyclotoxon Deb. and Ett. Black Rock Point. 57

(76 )

PLATE III.

XI.

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI.

PLATE WY:

PAGE.

Figs. 1-3. Myrtophyllum (Eucalyptus ?) Geinitsi Heer (?). Black

Rock SE oimt.. a) : « 160

Fig: 4. Sa0x Grovnerehe lence ae anes Rock Bolte 59

Fig. 5a. Salix proteefolia flexuosa Lesq. Black Rock Point. . 59

Fig. 5b. Eucalyptus ? nervosa Newb. Black Rock Point. . . 61

Figs. 6, 7. Laurus plutona Heer. Black Rock Pomt.=:.)7 9 010e

Fig. 8. Celastrus arctica Heer. “BiackwRock Point. |.) eos

(78 )

DEA Ev

PLATE. V.

General view of Mohegan Bluffs, east of Black Rock Point, Block

Island. View is to the west.

(80 )

XI. PLATE V.

ANNALS N; Y, ACAD. SCI;

WS = wt X\ ‘ Sa _ Sa MS 73 - Bey

EN Sy a mw a

; ai hi Ml bye, ys Sy i lat AN wy Ae .

J a n Re : \ ae = Ay

————— =

——

vith ‘

a ee a ie

Ke if. ae

RNY \S

Ss ee AORN! oa

CA, ws aN “ ‘ a

\ a NS \ iV RACED

ip hs UA Mai. ‘1

Ce iy (AY

oo, Q (a Ws it i

Ay PKs @

i a

7 om ax

E ese wi 7 ey a ¢ 7

: 7 - Mb | ; are, ras

. : op arb ri TY ; ;

te ' "Wu Gil aaeae eet 1s So

2 Os A é< eA

¢ 1 4. 7

‘$73 a

id “ ie ae

ae. by at

— Cea?

a af Neatgets

alan

- Wal - ae

; / cen t

. >

Ais in ele eee

(81)

Ms ‘AN NALS N, Y. Acap. Scr., XI, April 20, 1898—6.

y _

, aes

ae a - ps4 .

_s . ? » :

* at al aS

aie > bee) Me Pe ng rs : br 7

5 pe TAY “ “ne el + Ts - g —. Py a?

s ee eye . 4 ic oy f

1 PLATE. WF*

View of portion of Mohegan Bluffs, Block Island, shown in

_ Plate V., looking eastward. }

82>

as q

Pa STI e ae ore

Nees Paw ne

Lh'®

PLATE VI.

= —s

3 5

~- S > ?, hes

x as

5 ; . SS

‘5 25 > =

i=¢ = ee

ey 3 &> as - » ‘

Sarats 5K a .

. ‘7 =

Z ath) ry i > >,

TEE * :

—

—=

cS :

3) e, vou OO

ay)

mel;

S ae

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI.

‘PLATE VIL

Exposure of white plastic exci ean clay and sand. at Ball’s

Point, Clay Head, Block Island.

“(sty

es is

van we

. PLATE VII,

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD, SCI,

‘ ' i a We)

4, [i

Ii iy

Mt,

ihe Uf x

HATE Tits

eae Uae nie

Ate *

sade

Haenst

ext

1 / Lf,

Wg l

Gs :

EW Bay isda Al ;

a} Ay Lise a Z

E a Ds.) A fy it ‘ ia a

trish iy

By ae \ | * : as

‘ ane ‘" AN ae <

ASE

PLATE VIII. =

Exposure of lignitic and white plastic (Cretaceous) clay, Mineral ui

Spring, north of Old Harbor Point, Block Island.

(86)

PLATE VIII.

XI.

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI.

rit pies a

ae 2a

“ihe Roe ; oa}

7 = ie oP al - , =A

ee pe nn Ss ae eee

- - > a ot - ‘ a a #

‘PLATE IX.

| Chart of the Atlantic Coast, from Cape Ann to Staten Island,

te showing the location of the twenty-fathom contour.

is | | (88)

ae ee

<i?

Sh, ok

bee :

Si Ws

—

PES TL TTR eT

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. scq, XI. PLATE IX.

Chart

of the

= 4

Atlantic Coast

from

Cape Ann to Staten Island Zs

Showing the location BY

of the

Twenty-fathom Contour oe)

» J?

Arthur Hollick,

1898

{

i] fe

| oO

| Za

—_|

| Jp)

| —_—

| LJ

} Dp

J S

| al

| fe

g Sanat

}

Cape Aun.

See

| \—J s

| on wy? :

Norracanset Wire \ .

| Ren, x Qe? Maatho’s Vineyard . =

D (a ad

Se felis ee \Nantueket Ve

See, ped , ° : eg

ao SST Ne427--. i / 2 Ne

ae We RS Y re cere . io

maf {ae Bug std eens Moe % Ae

SiGe ; S Gacy ea = Ye Ae

Gor diners (el6. : Ee es se Qe “ =

: ae : = = - bara VG Me

oh aaa a. Nes? £

[ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sct., XI, No. 6, pp. 89 to 116, April 20, 1898. ]

Peeowor OF THE DUDLEY “STREMMATOGRAPH ”

meDiTERMINING STRESSES; IN, RAILS

UNDER MOVING TRAINS.

P. FL . Duprey, Beat ae:

(Read February 7, 1898. )

[PLates X—XIII. ]

On former occasions I have presented to the Academy dia-

grams of railway tracks showing the undulations of different

weights of rails under moving loads as taken by my Dynagraph

and Track Indicator car.

Attention was directed to the marked reduction in the undu-

lations in the stiffer and heavier rails put into service in recent

years as a result of the earlier investigations.

I also stated that with rails of a given stiffness, surfaced in

the track to their highest condition, the trackmen can only re-

duce the undulations to definite minimum limits for the wheel

loads ; therefore, all undulations under the moving wheel loads

of locomotives and cars with their increased dynamic effects due

to speed can not be entirely reduced.

To carry the trains, the rails not only deflect under the wheel

3 loads, but the ties, ballast and road-bed are compressed until

the total resistance equals the load. Action and reaction

must be equal and before the latter is obtained for heavy loads

on light rails rapid destructive work is done upon the ties and

ballast, requiring frequent surfacing to keep the track up to its

proper standard. The destructive work on the ties and ballast

under stiffer and heavier rails is reduced as well as the neces-

sary labor to keep them in surface.

The weight of the locomotives and cars can only be transmit-

ted to the road-bed through the wheel contacts on the rails,

which produces a general deflection of the rails under the wheel

( 89 )

90 DUDLEY.

base of the locomotives and cars, the greatest deflection being

directly under the wheels.

To carry and distribute the wheel loads to the ties, ballast

and road-bed, the rail acts as a girder, the metal in the rails -

directly under the wheels above the neutral surface is in com-

pression, while that below the neutral surface is in tension.

On and near the supporting ties, shearing stresses are set up

extending through the web of the rails as the wheels pass over

the rails.

The span of the deflection of the rails under the wheels is

longer as a rule than the tie spacing, and in a short distance on

either side of the wheels the nature of the stresses is reversed,

the head of the rails being in tension and the base being in com-

pression.

The picture on the screen is a representation of the wheel

loads and base of a Boston and Albany 100-ton locomotive

standing on 95-lb. rails, showing in figures the actual depression

of the rails, ties and road-bed under the static loads. ‘The rails

under moving trains rise slightly in front of the pilot. [See

Plate Xx. Big:.2.]

The dotted line directly over the rail indicates its general de-

pression under the wheel loads and base of the locomotive.

The vertical scale is enlarged to render the depressions more

distinct ; the greatest deflections in the rails and road-bed being

directly under the wheel contacts.

The truck wheels carry 20,350 lbs. per. pair; the drivers

37,500 lbs. per pair; the front tender wheels 18,500 lbs. per

pair, and the rear ones 23,500 lbs. per pair. The depression

and deflection shown for one rail is, therefore, for wheel loads

only one-half of that per pair of wheels. Locomotives with

much greater weights on the drivers are in general use.

The depression under the front truck wheel of the engine was

0.094 of an inch; between the wheels 0.086 of an inch, and

under the rear truck wheel 0.100 of an inch.

In the wheel space between the engine truck and front drivers

the depression was 0.088 of an inch; under the front driver

0.138 of an inch; in the wheel space between drivers 0.096 of

STREMMATOGRAPAH. Qt

an inch, and under the rear drivers it was 0.140 of an inch. In

the wheel space between rear driver and front wheel of the

tender truck the depression was 0.086 of an inch; between

front tender truck wheels 0.100 of an inch, showing abnormal

conditions in the track, and under rear wheel of front tender

truck 0.099.

In the wheel space between the two tender trucks 0.095

inches, and under front wheel of rear tender truck 0.113 of an

inch and on the wheel space 0.106 inches and for the rear

wheel 0.113 inches.'

A measurement of a short gauged length, say 5 inches, of the

base of the rail under the wheels showed extension, while be-

tween the wheels, compression. The measurements were not

made in this manner, as it requires more time than can usually

be obtained in the main line, but with a micrometer in one posi-

tion on the rail each wheel and center of wheel space being

stopped over the micrometer.

Apparent stresses per square inch of the metal for the ex-

treme fibers of the base of the rail ran as follows in one posi-

tion of the rail for the different wheels and centers of the spaces :

Tension Compression

in pounds. in pounds,

Semmeemenne truck wheel, .......52.....000.s2s0cess+- 6780

emer ot wheel space, .-...:.ic.....<5.cs.2+05- 1530

Beemer truck WHEEL, ... 0.4. cccccec ses cssecdeses os 5340

Center of space between rear engine truck

Memeo! ste NIVEL, .. as... op anc Bee nad tices 3050

NERS S08 Co cee a ere tear es Pete re cee snes cece g160

Center of space between drivers,.............. 3050

CERN Boe ics Peet cms a ee os Leetoaste Jeane. es 9920

Center of space between driver and front

emer WLI ar mol Sad eseh, slide sien 2290

Sent iruck front. tender. wheel,..i...........20.0505- 3820

Center of space between wheels, .............. 760

1From Report for 1895, of Tests of Metals and other Materials for Industrial Pur-

poses, made with the U. S. Testing Machine at Watertown Arsenal. Mr. James E.

Howards, Railroad Track Experiments. By redriving the spikes in the ties,

taking up all looseness between the rail and ties, the deflections and stresses were

reduced over one-third in amount.

92 DUDLEY.

Front, truck rear tender muhcels; 2.2...4-224-.cee 3820

Center of space between tender trucks,...... 1530

Front, wheelareartendenmthuck,:°-2.1..—-. --eeta-oeee 6100

Center.of ‘space between wheels) <ys.caeeee 0000

Reéar wheel of reartender-truck, *....c32300 seco 6870

The shaded ballast under the ties in Plate X., Fig. 2 is an ideal

representation of the distribution of the pressure of the wheel

loads through the rails, ties and ballast to the road-bed, the

darker portions representing the most intense pressures. Under

moving trains the wheel loads are transmitted as a series of

waves of pressure to the ballast and road-bed.

A series of alternating stresses run through the rails in con-

sonance with the speed of the trains, the waves of greatest in-

tensity being between the ties. Some of the slides will show

that the tremors and vibrations of the rails are very decided

under the wheels passing in quick succession. The duration

of the greatest intensity of the stress of the metal is very short

per lineal inch, being only a fraction of a second for the high

speed trains, less than 1/250 of a second for a speed of 40 miles -

per hour; while the maximum stress increases with the speed,

the duration of greatest intensity decreases.

A rail in the track, like any other girder, to carry its loads

without taking a permanent set, must not have the metal

stressed beyond its elastic limits and it should be much less for

a proper factor of safety.

The diagrams of the earlier steel rails, which I have previ-

ously shown, indicate that nearly all the rails had taken more

or less permanent set ; therefore, the fiber stresses in the rails at

times had exceeded the elastic limits.

This important fact must be borne in mind, for the stresses

which occurred in the early steel rails, even for the lighter

equipment, were greater than I shall report for the present

8o-lb. rails. The stresses in rails may be much greater than

would be permissible in bridge members, for in the latter they

are of several seconds’ duration and the material a much lower

grade of steel. High stresses in rails are not of recent origin,

but occurred a few times daily in the early rails. The rails

STREMMA TOGRAPH. 93

would stand some millions of repetitions of stress nearly up to the

elastic limits before fracture would occur. If such stresses are

of a half hour or longer intervals some recovery in the metal

takes place ; but when fracture does commence, it seems to start

between individual adjacent mineral aggregates, rather than

through them, becomes progressive, and in many cases the

complete rupture of the section may take one or more years of

further service. ;

The tests of many of the earlier steel rails show that the

elastic limits only ranged from 35,000 to 48,000 lbs., the ulti-

mate strength being about twice those amounts respectively.

In the testing machine it takes 30,000 pounds tension to

elongate one square inch of steel per lineal inch 1/1000 of an inch

and the same force to compress it, which was nearly all the

early steel rails permitted the extreme fibres in the base of the

rail to be extended or compressed before set would occur.

This margin was too small, and as the traffic increased it was

impossible to maintain the tracks to a high standard even at a

very large cost for labor. These facts lead me to urge the

adoption of stiffer and heavier rails with higher elastic limits

which would reduce the fibre stresses much below the elastic

limits of the steel, increase the factors of safety and not require

so much labor to maintain them to a high standard in the

track.

When I look over the diagrams of the earlier steel rails, it is

difficult to realize that it is only fifteen years since I designed

the pioneer 5-inch 80-lb. steel rail for U. S., which was rolled

for and put into service in 1884, by the N. Y.C. & H. R. R.R.

The Pennsylvania Railroad and others soon followed with

5-inch sections of 80 or 85 lb.; 80 lbs. becoming very general

on Eastern Trunk Lines, forming a distinct epoch in the devel-

opment of American Railways.

It takes many years to change the section of rails on a long

main line, while the design of new equipment and construction

is but a few months’ work and easily keeps in advance of the

permanent way improvements.

The slide on the screen is from a photograph of the ‘“‘ Empire

94 DUDLEY.

)

State Express”’ on the third day of its installation in November,

1891, taken near Syracuse when running at 60 miles per hour

on 65-lb. rails before the entire main line had been relaid with

8o0-lb. The photograph, and another one of the same train,

which will be shown, were taken by Mr. A. P. Yates, Official

Photographer of the N.Y. C. & HR, SR. ResCor mi See, Piice

KI, Bigea |

The installation of the ‘“‘ Empire State Express,”’ the fastest long

distance train ever attempted, aroused a great deal of discussion

among railway men as to the possibility of maintaining it for

any length of time. It was considered by many a doubtful ex-

periment. But few people realized how high the standard of

the track had been raised in the past few years and the decided

advantages of the stiff 80-lb. rails in most of the track for such

high speeds. |

It is exceedingly interesting that one picture was obtained

when running on 65-lb. rails as showing the depression of the

rails under the engine, tender and front truck of the first coach.

The picture will become historic. I have studied an enlarge-

ment of the picture nearly equal to that now on the screen and

have traced the general depression of the rails and ties as stated.

The wave of the rising rail preceding the pilot can also be seen.

A train at 60 miles per hour runs 88 feet per second, which

is longer than the entire wheel base of the engine, tender and

front truck of the first coach, making, in the case of the “‘ Empire

State Express,” eleven wheels to run over a given point in the

rail per second, each wheel causing and reversing stresses of

several thousand pounds, violent tremors and vibrations being

set up in the rails. The permanent set in the 65-lb. rails of the

next track is very apparent. The 65-lb. rails were replaced by

8o-lb. rails in 1892.

The majority of the earlier 60 to 65-Ib. steel rails had all taken

a set in the tracks, the ties were cut out from 1% to 1% inches

in depth under the rails, and the undulations per mile ranged

from 8 to 12 feet. The slide on the screen is from a photograph

taken of the “ Empire State Express’ at 60 miles per hour on

8o-lb. rails. I have not been able to trace the depression of the

STREMMA TOGRAPH. 95

rails under the moving train; nevertheless it occurred, but to

much less extent than on the 65-lb. rails. [See Plate XII,

Fig. 2. ] Let

On the diagrams of the heavier rails of recent years, the un-

dulations per mile on the 80-lb. rails have been reduced to less

than three feet, and on the 100-Ilb. rails to less than two feet ;

as measured by my car, the rails being in good surface ; the ties

showing but little abrasion under the rails.

In 1883 it was considered by many that a 5-inch 80-lb. rail

was stiffer and heavier than necessary, while others thought it

would provide for the future development of the railways for all

coming time.

The rails once in the track furnished a practical demonstration

of the value of stiffness in rails and soon led to an increase of

speed and heavier equipment, increasing the fibre stresses in the

8o-lb. rails over that for which they were designed to sustain.

In March, 1892, my 6-inch 1oo-lb. rail section was rolled, the

first to go into service in the United States, to again reduce the

fibre stresses in the rails to meet requirements of increasing

traffic. To date there are several thousand miles of 100-Ib. rails

in use in this country.

In the last decade all of the Eastern and many of the Western

trunk lines have been laid with stiff, rails for the purpose of

keeping the fibre stresses in the rails down to safe and economic

limits, though this feature of the matter has received but little

discussion.

In 1888 in connection with Mr. James E. Howard, of the

Watertown U. S. Arsenal, I had one of the Boston and Albany

passenger locomotives weighed and ran it onto rails in the main

track, the upper side of the base of the rail having been pre-

pared with prick punch marks practically 5 inches apart, the

space having been measured with a micrometer to 1/10,000 of

an inch. The measurements were repeated after the locomotive

was on the rails to ascertain the compression of the base of the

rail between the wheels and the elongation under the wheels.

From the results the apparent stresses in the rails were com-

puted for the static loads which were probably too low as the

96 PGTELEEN:

largest stress was only 13,500 lbs. on a 41-inch rail for a load

of 16,000 lbs. on drivers.

Mr. Howard in 1893, 4.and 5 repeated the tests on other rail-

road tracks and heavier rails and found apparently higher stresses.

I repeated the experiments on rails in the tracks, and the results

seeming low I had solid piers erected and with rails 30 feet long

under known stresses I found my results were too low.

With micrometers designed for the work the results for static

loads should be fairly accurate.

The determination of the stresses or rather the compression

and elongation of the metal in the base of the rail under moving

trains is a much more difficult problem, or rather a series of

problems, than it is for static loads, and I am not aware that

any one has attempted their solution before I attacked them

the past year with my Stremmatograph and its accessories.

A mathematical expression for the stresses of rails under

moving trains, its span for the ties and wheel spacing, the deflec-

tion and compression of the ties, ballast and road-bed, has not

been fully determined, though many efforts to do so have been

made.

Such a formula would also have to consider the many condi-

tions of the path not only described by the centre of gravity of

the locomotive, tender and each car of the train, but also those

of the rotating wheels, their mass and speed, the smoothness of

the rails and the more or less sudden application of the loads.

The principle of the Stremmatograph is to record on a mov-

ing metallic strip the molecular compression or elongation of

the metal in a given length of the base of the rail, induced by

the stresses, produced by each wheel of the moving trains under

the many conditions of service.

These records can be measured by filar micrometers under a

microscope and then from the modulus of elasticity of the steel

compute the stresses which produce the given compression or

elongation per square inch of the extreme fibres in the base of

the wails y-See Plate Xo ob ig. ea

The object of the Stremmatograph is to convert rails of any

section and weight, of any system of permanent way construc-

STREMMATOGRAPH. 97

tion into testing machines in the track and show how much

they are stressed due to the wheel loads and spacing of any

type of locomotives and cars moving over the rails at the differ-

ent speeds of service.

It is to replace what is now mere conjecture by reliable in-

formation that further progress may be made in the interest of

greater safety and economy. [See Plate XI, Fig. 1.]

The picture on the screen shows the first form of the Strem-

matograph attached to the base of the rail between the figures

2 and 3 on the scale bar, and under the front driver of the

freight mogul engine, No. 596, of the New York Central &

Hudson River Railroad. It is on the East-bound, or track No.

1; 5%-inch 80-lb. section; outside rail on a 3-degree curve

and down grade of 10 feet per mile. The location is opposite

the southeast corner of the West Albany Paint Shop. The ties

are yellow pine 7 by g inches and 25-inch centres ; gravel bal-

last; the tracks being in good condition. A number of tests

of passenger trains were made under the same rail. The ex-

periments made on track No. 2 were directly opposite, the rail

being the inside one of the curve. The section was the 5-inch

8o0-lb. model of 1883; the rails were rolled in 1890 and all

straightened on narrow supports in the mills; were heavily

gagged and had a wavy surface.

The rails on track No. I are much smoother, the supports in

the straigthening presses having been made wider apart. On

track No. I two experiments were made with locomotive No.

596, one at a speed of two miles per hour and one at ten miles

per hour. The total weight of the locomotive was 96 tons ; the

engine 60 tons, with 15,500 lbs. on pony truck and 104,500 lbs.

on three pairs of drivers. The tender weighed 72,000 lbs. or

9,000 lbs. per axle. This type of locomotive is the standard

for freight service for the road.

It had been recently through the shops for general repairs,

the tires of the drivers having been turned the same as when new.

The tender wheels were new cast-iron chilled wheels 33

inches in diameter and unground.

At a speed of two miles per hour the locomotive passed over

ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sci., XI, April 20, 1898—7.

98 DUDEEY.

the rail to which the Stremmatograph was attached, the steam

having been shut off a few feet before reaching the instrument.

The record of the molecular compression and elongation of

the metal due to the stresses in the base of the rail was very

smooth and distinctly delineated.

For the unground tender wheels slight tremors in the rail

were distinctly indicated, a fact previously noticed under switch-

ing locomotives with the same class of tender wheels running

over very light rails in the yard. .

The apparent mean stresses for the extreme fibres of five

inches in length of the base of the rail computed on a basis of

30,000,000 lbs. for the modulus of elasticity of the steel were as

follows.

For a speed of

Two miles Ten miles

per hour per hour

Compression in front of pony truck,............ 1414 Ibs... 2654 Ibe:

Lension mmder pony truck ys. s ister ones BOO 9S Fa sores

Compression between pony wheel and front

CLEVER: thee 's Fes A dS ee ae See ae ea 262 One Ana aa

Tension under front) driver, |... .cccs/s.scad- 502% 10629) “*., 944085.

Compression between front and middle driver 5433 ‘‘ 8031 “

ihenstom, under middle: Ggiven.s. \ocene..\eeendaes 5905. “° |) s4000%"%

Compression between middle and rear driver, 4or5 ‘‘ 5673 **

shensiom underwear Grivery ce .<..- <6 -cdeser ees: 9370" Yoon.

Compression between rear driver and first ten-

Get WCE Latte ft. cave. eno as qaap sae eetas AOTIN 3°" Bes yng eee

For the speed of ten miles per hour the locomotive was

working under steam and being accelerated as it passed over the

instrument modified the wheel pressures to some extent.

The tremors from the tender wheels were very decided in this

run and were felt for the entire length of the rails. The fibre

stresses in tension are small for the loads upon the drivers even

for an 80-lb. rail, while those in compression are higher than

usual for the same weight of rail. The section is 5 % inches high

and the stiffest 80-lb. rail which has been rolled in this country.

There is also another reason for the nearly balanced stresses.

The two ties between which the Stremmatograph was attached

STREMMATOGRAPH. . 99

to the rail were very firm in the ballast, and to the eye did not

seem to depress as much as those on either side ; therefore, the

compression stresses should be higher than on ties all practically

depressing alike in the ballast.

It will be exceedingly interesting and important to have the

records of stresses under this type of locomotive when drawing

one of the trains of fifty-five 60,oc0-lbs. capacity cars, each

carrying 1,000 bushels of grain.

The picture on the screen shows two trains side by side of

fifty cars each, the length of one train not quite reaching from

New York to Chicago, but each is 2,000 feet long, and 2,640

such trains would fill one continuous track between the two

eittes,~ [See Plate XIII.]

In the trials of a number of switching locomotives in the yard,

on tracks of not very uniform tie spacing, the locomotives having

three pairs of coupled drivers, but without pony truck the front

driver usually shows greatest tension on the 65-lb rails.

Under locomotive No. 1, at Grand Central Station, having

125,000 lbs. upon drivers, the instrument between ties of 30-

inch centres, having tie plates, the apparent mean stresses were

as follows ; on 65- and 100-lb, rails respectively :

65-lb. rail, 100-lb. rail.

Wompression'in front of driver,..: 2.5.0. .5.66. 0 ano t. 10s,. E, Roi: bbs:

ensiaim under Wont Giver, <.. 222.2. .ewcaecee de FEoo4 “~-- o,oar :**

Compression between front and middle driver, 2,124 ‘‘ 2,834 *

@evsgn ttnder nigdle driver, 202. i... 22,4 8t OoAg

Compression between middle and rear driver, 2,362 ‘‘ 2,834 ‘

emg under Tear gHver; lie et ees. 235356 °° “6,442

The 65-lb. rails are of recent composition, the elastic limits

of the steel. being 60,000 Ibs., while on the 10o0-lb. rails it is

65,000 lbs.

In the above table it is interesting to note the great reduction

and more uniform fibre stressses in the 100-lb. rails as compared

with those in the 65-lb. rails. The 65-lb. rails require from six

to eight times as much labor to keep them in surface as the

100-lb. rails in the Grand Central Yard.

100 : DUDLEY.

The record curves of the stresses of compression and tension

of the metal in the rails between and under the wheels consist of

a series of very much flattened upper branches for the compres-

sion between the wheels with very much sharper lower branches

for the tension. [See Plate X., Fig. 1.] A similar record is

obtained by having a particular portion of the rail stressed by a

moving train as shown by the enlarged records of the Strem-

matozraph on the screen of two trains. [See Plate X, Fig. 2.]

After the Stremmatograph is attached to the rail a reference

line is ruled on the metallic strip and then the scriber point is

moved a few thousands of an inch, the instrument started anda

line about 14 of an inch long ruled, which in reality becomes

the measure for a median line, and the distance to the reference

line measured by the micrometer. When the train is within a

rail length of the instrument it is again started; the metallic

strip moving at right angles to the rail; the scriber point re-

cording the mean molecular compression and extension of the

base of the rail usually for five inches in length.

The upper lines are the records for the 5-inch 8o0-lb. rail on

inside of curve as already described in track No. 2. The rail

has a very wavy surface, the stresses being very largely aug-

mented owing to that feature. The locomotive was No, 888,

Class I, of the N. Y.-C. & H. RK. RR. drawing tive My acner

Palace Cars, ; speed 40 miles per hour and being rapidly accel-

lerated. The extension of the metal in the base of the rail due

to the the several wheel loads of the locomotive and car can be

traced, those of the locomotive being very distinct, while the

compression of the metal between the wheels can also be seen.

The rail was the inside one of the curve, track No. 2, in loca-

tion already described. The rising of the rail in front of the

pilot is plainly seen, the stresses of :

Compression beimp yas Jivest son iucnoeit ans eee eae 1,419) tse

Tension, under.front stack wheel, ccc usm eee ce cere 52,0700"

Compression between front and rear truck wheel.......... 3,060.0"

Tension under wear dick wheel... ..ses-cn a eee 12; 576reu

Compression between rear truck wheel and front driver. 5,433 ‘‘

‘Tensiow under front driver trac. eieees cee eee Bi Arar vs

STREMMA TOGRAPH. 101

Compression between front and rear driver, ...... pie EAE EP 2,126 lbs.

PENSION LIGIER EGAL CUVEE, Soccer we om oe hin oe eee Sends wo sie nee 26,454, %

Compression between rear driver and front tender,........ A Le

Tension under front tender wheels,................e2eeceeeees ne A

Compression between front truck wheels, ..... ..........+.- Ro

Tension under rear front tender wheels,..................... $e 462. °

Compression between front and rear truck,.............-.+. | 0

Semen under rear iront ituck wheel,.<,.. 0... .cievccenass 12,095. .*°

Compression between front and rear wheels,.......... ...... 1,889 “

mension, wider rear tender wheels, ...2 0020.05 sc. c.csc0-s-00es Ay A

Compression between rear tender wheel and car truck,..... 709 ‘*

eau under front car wheels. vs. eet ct th cies. 14,408 ‘<

Compression between 1st and middle wheel,............... Zee s

Bearman uncer nucdic.cat Wheel, «. ...0.:<cesecnsven tunes seats dda $20

Compression between middle and rear wheel,............... S544 gn ats

meant wader rear truck wheel... «..06.... cccseeaes cave one te PS 934/508

Compression in center of space between trucks,....... .... OG ass

The other wheels of the several trucks of the cars indicate

nearly the same stresses.

The record of the other train on the slide is quite similar to

the one just described. The tremors and vibrations which are

set up by the rapid reversal of the stresses, the slight irregulari-

ties in the surface of the wheels are very decided, as the records

show.

On the wavy surface of the rail on which these records were

taken, the combined static and dynamic effects in producing

stresses are about double at 40 miles per hour of the static

effects from the same wheel loads. This rate is much higher

than has been found upon smooth rails.

The importance of having the rails well finished, as we have

compelled the mills to do for some years, is very fully confirmed.

The necessity of having smooth wheels, perfectly round is very

important, particularly for fast trains.

In a number of records on the same rail, the engines when

using steam to accelerate the train, the front driver has shown

greater stress than the rear driver except in one instance.

The position of the counter-balance in all of these experiments

has been noted by the eye, and up to 35 miles per hour it has

102 DUDLEY.

not made any noticeable difference in the stresses whether it was

up or-down on-the N. Y.'C..& H. R: RB. R. locomotives de-

signed for the high-speed trains. This statement must only be

taken as applying to the conditions under which these experi-

ments have been made.

For the fast trains the locomotives will be photographed

as they pass over the Stremmatograph in the track, and as this

must be done nearly on the side it is much more difficult than

taking the locomotive on an angle head on, as in the case of

those shown of the ‘‘ Empire State Express.”’

Stresses in track No. 1, 5 ¥%-inch 80-pound rail, engine No.

gol, with train; speed 20 miles per hour :

Compression 10 front Of pilots s-. ee s eee eee 2,362 lbs.

Tension tinder front: truck wheel .s.-.o.. eee eee rig ye ey

Compression between truickimlcels...... nero A Ale

Tension under tear strack swheel.-n:. xc... eee O3400 0s

Compression between truck and front driver,.............: 5 O50 oe

Tension, under dromteadniver, «...usdsss ea eee ee 12,040.76

Compression between front.and rear driver,.)............0 9,448. “

‘ensign ainder tear sdriver,..'. 0. . yeas aed ena eee 14572

Compression between driver and tender wheel,........... 2 Oy ae

The rail in this case is the outside one on the curve and ina

number of records the stress under the front truck wheel of

passenger locomotives have been much higher than in the rear

wheel of the same truck, especially on outside rail on a curve.

In static tests the front truck wheel almost invariably shows

larger proportional stress than the drivers.

Stresses in 100-pound rail under the ‘‘ Empire State Ex-

press,” engine No. 870 and four cars, leaving Grand Central

Yard, speed 10 miles per hour.

Comipression. im drome ot pilot, <.2.-0. 4. etcom oak eee 15322: lbs.

Tenpion“inder front tuckwwheel,.. ;......stsenencoss cea 5,040 85

Compression between truck wheels, 2.2 x5 cc tice ote ne TOR Onc:

Pension under rear track wheel, si... seve ose eos eee 3,204.00

Compression between truck and front driver,:—..22.77.<:- e140 e

Tension front. dtiver,.2. / is eit hackie ees Cae eee 8, 42a5.**

Compresbion: between Gniversy /i78) .aie na sees oe een 2,478

STREMMATOGRAPH. 103

WENSIOG: TOOT EUV l yaa ped ven voar cle b de else oisng cherie ne sardacen's 6,443 lbs.

Compression between driver and tender truck,.............. 3,965 *

Tension, front tender wheels ...65 ck ccec esc e ce sn se tesensgseeees 4,400. 4f

Compression between truck TO ag a esting Cpe <a pe ee ae

Tension rear tender wheel front truck................0eeeeees A,Abo. ©

Compression between trucks............-++++++: ee Oe 2.070 °°

Tension front wheel rear truck.........0..6. ssssseseesoeeoeees wy roor, “*

Compression between wheels, ...... .....:seseereeeeeeee cerns Beige.

Tension rear wheel rear truck, .........0s000- secseseeeeeeneees 3,409: “

The rail was the outside one on a 3-degree curve; stone kal-

last ; oak ties with tie plates—24-inch centres.

The marked reduction in the stressés on the 100-Ib. rails is

very plainly seen.

Testing the Stremmatograph February 14th, 1898; Grand

Central Yard at 48th Street, on 100-Ib. rail, special brick piers

capped with chilled iron supports 30 feet apart. Temperature

44 degrees Fahr. Fairbanks U. S. Standard weights.

The modulus of elasticity taken at 30,000,000 lbs. which for

the temperature a number of tests have shown for the same rail

to be practically correct.

The Stremmatograph was applied to the base of the rail, and

the deflection measured by a micrometer, securely attached to a

heavy bridge abutment by which the brick piers were purposely

located, and from the centre of the rail 500 Ibs. of standard

U. S. weights were suspended and the deflection again meas-

ured. From the observed deflection the moment of inertia of

the rail was recalculated. The section for the test was origin-

ally slightly over-weight. The rail has undergone considerable

oxidation in two years, reducing the moment of inertia as origin-

ally rolled.

For the 500-lb. load the stress in base of the rail computed,

2.747 ths.

On the Stremmatograph slide, the scriber point was set

and a short line ruled, the scriber point was not moved anda

second line ruled, but merely displaced by the elongation of

the metal, and then the slide slightly moved forward. The

slide was then measured under the filar micrometer with the

utmost precision and the observed stress computed 2,745 lbs.

104 DUDLEY.

Results within a few pounds should be expected between the

computed and observed stresses on the brick piers. Close results

must be obtained to test the mechanical perfection attained in the

construction of the instruments.

The tests mentioned in the paper and many others have all

been made upon locomotives and trains in regular service.

TAREE, AN@ =r

GIVING THE GENERAL DIMENSIONS OF THE DIFFERENT RAIL SEC-

TIONS MENTIONED IN THE TESTS OF THE PAPER.

{

| Moment

pre fae

Section | of Sec- | ness of of ye of Resist-| Inertia

per Yard | tion in | Web. Inertia. Bacar | ance. | Vertical

; Inches. | Inches. | Inches.# | I p =. “| Anches:3 45 Axis:

| Head. | Base | HIRCMES- Inches.4

651b. Old) 2) al | ; ; | |

Model. 45 | 25 | 42 3 | 16.60 | 2.20 | 7.546

80-lb. Dudley, | | |

rte ees 2a eat +. | 20.00] 2.47") Tess 260

80-lb. Dudley, | : Be | Sf |

1890. 5g 233 | 5 32 28.50 Vite SO rE AQ er eee

100-lb. Dud- | | | |

ley, 1890. | © | 360] 5% |) 22 | 48.50.) 2.93 Sitres5sriegrce

Nore.—In answer to a number of inquiries since reading my paper, regarding the

stresses in rails under static loads, I have added as an appendix, a portion of Mr.

James E. Howard’s description and three tables from his experiments for ‘* Static

loads,”’ set forth 27 extensto in the United States Government Report on Tests of

Metals and Other Materials for 1895.

This will be a convenience to many who have not access to the above valuable

paper.

APPENDES

RAILROAD TRACK EXPERIMENTS BY Mr. JAMES E. Howarp.

From Report of the Tests of Metals and other Materia!s for In-

dustrial Purposes, Made with the U. S. Testing Machine

at Watertown Arsenal, Massachusetts. For 1895.

THESE experiments comprise observations on the fibre stresses

developed in rails in the track, the depression of the rails, and

the slope or inclination of the rails caused by the weight of the

different wheels of the locomotive.

STREMMA TOGRAPH. 105

The results show some of the phenomena displayed by rails

in service under static conditions of loading or when a loco-

motive passes slowly over the track.

The tests will in a measure supplement laboratory experi-

ments in this class of material, in addition to the aid which they

may afford to practical questions pertaining to maintenance of

Way.

The series were made chiefly on the track of the Pennsylvania

Railroad, where exceptional opportunities existed for examining

road-bed, embracing a wide variety of conditions of weight of

rails and different kinds of ballast, and its behavior under heavy

types of freight and passenger locomotives.

The tests were made during the early part of the month of

November, 1894, on track in the condition it was found in ser-

vice.

The experiments on the Boston & Albany Railroad were

made, with track on frozen gravel ballast, in the month of

February, 1895.

Describing the methods of making the experiments, the fibre

stress tests were made by means of a micrometer mounted on

the upper side of the outer flange of the base of the rail, at a

place midway adjacent ties. The instrument covered a gauged

length of 5 inches.

The micrometer was adjusted in position, and then the several

wheels of the locomotive were successively brought over the

gauged length, or until the same was midway adjacent wheels.

The instrument was read when the locomotive was at each of

these positions. It was found practicable to make the microm-

etre observations without arresting the locomotives in all

cases, taking the readings as the locomotives passed slowly over

the rail.

In this manner the strains developed were measured, and

elongation of the metal showing tensile stress, and a contraction

in the gauged length showing compressive stress.

The measured strains were reduced to stresses per square

inch, assuming the modulus of elasticity of the steel to be 30,-

000,000 Ibs. per square inch, and correcting the observed strain

106

ON IYO G) Sy of

in order to obtain the maximum fibre stresses, on the further

assumption that the strains were proportional to their distances.

from the neutral axis of the rail.

TABLE No.

RAILROAD TRACK EXPERIMENTS—GENERAL DIMENSIONS OF RAILS.

Z . Rg : Moment | Distance Neutral

Weight Width Width |Thickness| Moment | of resis- Axis to Outside

per | Height: | of of of of tance. Fibre.

Yard | Base. Head. Web. | Inertia ie

a — ™ | Head 2 | Base x’

Pounds Inches Inches Inches Inch. | Inches. | Inches.

60 4} 23 4 14.222) -6)693%) 2.025 |) 2082s

70 44 2i% 4 885055.) ,8-282u)- 2542 2.18

85 5 2%, | 44 | 26.374 | 10.853 | 2.57 | 2.43

100 52 212 5 38.957 | 14.812 2:87) apg

95 54 3 2 32.280 | 13.563 | 2.65 2.38

TABLE INO].

WEIGHT OF LOCOMOTIVES.

Locomotive.

Engine.

Weight per wheel.

Total,

Pounds. Pilot,

Pounds.

Drivers,

Pounds.

Passenger No. 8009,

Class Pk.

Passenger No. 1515,

Class Er:

Freight No. 557,

Class R.

Passenger No. 209,

B.& A. RR,

197.050

222.500

188.600

39-750

50. 300

II.000

40.700

Wheel. Pounds. | Tons.

Pilot. 9.937 | 4.968

Driver, first. 21.750 |10.875

Driver, second.) 21.900 |10.950

Tender. 8.750.) 45375

Pilot. 52.575") (0:287

Driver, first. 24.250 |12.125

Driver, second.| 23.350 |11.675

Tender. 12.833 | 6.416

Pilot. 5.500 | 2.750

Driver, first. 13.250, 6.625

Driver, second.| 13.750 | 6.875

Driver, third. | 15.650] 7.825,

Driver, fourth. | 14.250 | 7.125.

Tender. 7.075 | °3:9087

Pilot. 10.175) | 5-087.

Driver, first. 18.750] 9.375.

Driver, second.| 18.750 | 9.375

Tender. ——- | ——

First truck. 9.250 | 4.625

Second truck. | 11.7§0 | 5.875,

STREMMA TOGRAPH.

TABLE No. 3.

MAXIMUM FIBRE STRESSES IN BASE OF RAIL.

—— —— —_

Rail |

ro Ballast. Locomotive.

Yard.

| —

Pounds.) |

60 | Gravel. /Pass., No. 809, Class

= Seige.) 557,

60 Stone. ? |Pass:, -“*. Bog, “

60 3 Frgt., es a

70 Paader jbass:,.°**. 509;

7° Gravel. | 6¢ “ec “<“ 6“

7O = ret! Gas... e

7O Stone tPass../° Boo, ” “*

7° is ine ass "Aa

70 Bridge. . |Pass.,, ‘“* 809, “*

7O Splice bar. 66 ‘é 66 6“

85 idler. “|Pass:, “* S09," **

85 ce “cc (z3 1515, “cc

85 66 Fret., “cc Ve ‘ec

85 Gravel. |Pass., ‘“‘ 809, ‘*

85 6c | 66 ‘6 T5I5, ee

85 ne roth.“ Rey. ~ *e

85 Stone. | Pass.,-*" S00,-

85 e tats, Ene ss

100 Stone. -|Pass.; ** 309,

100 | Stone—tie 2 SA aes e

removed.

100 Stone. |Fret., ‘‘ 557;

| rail No. I.

D5. \Prosen.erav.| ;, ee ss

| rail No. 2.

Tensile Fibre Stress per

Square Inch.

Pilot.

| Pounds.

Pk.|

Pk. |

Pk.

“e

Pk.

Pk. |

éc |

Pk.

Pk.|

Pk.

10.540

| R. |

95 Frozen BPAY. aes «© 200, Bra.R.R.|

6.180

3-430

11.860

10.730 |

8.970 |

7-590

10.070

6.470

9.450

13.840

7.160 |

5-730

3.580

10.750

9.310

7.160

4.300 |

6.320

3-510 |

6.870

7.630

| Drivers.

Pounds.

11.670

7-550

| 19.540

II.160 |

16.050

¥7. 170

18.620

13.790

14.390

II.510

18.180

22.140

10.030 |

12.180 |

10.030

12.180

17.120

10.030

10.750

10.030 |

9.840

18.970 |

8.430

9.920

II.450

107

Compres-

sive fibre

stress per

square

Tender. inch.

Pounds. | Pounds.

275O | t\ 2e7O

3-430 . 690

9-779 | 3-499

9.770 | 1.400

10.020 | 4.290

8.280 | 5.520

6.210 | 4.830

7.910 | 6.470

6.470 | 2.880

10.910 2.180

9.230 | 8.300

5-020 | 3.580

7.880 | 4.300

5-020 | 4.300

6.450 | 4.300

9.310 | 5.020

2.870 | 7.880

4.300 | 4.300

5-020 | 3.580

5.620 | 4.220

8.430 | 2.110

4.220 | 2.810

6.870 | 3.050

6.870 | 27.630

‘¢a’’ Taken at different point on the rail.

EXPLANATIONS: OF PLAT Xe

Fic. 1.—Representation of the continuous curve showing how the

metal of the rail is stressed under the wheel loads of a train.

Fic. 2.—Wheel loads and wheel base of Boston and Albany Passen-

ger Locomotive, No. 209, on g5-lb. rails ; showing deflection of

rail and depression of the ties, ballast and road-bed under the wheel

loads.

Fic. 3.—Stremmatograph records, enlarged 2% times. The first

made under fast trains, the tremors and vibrations in the rails be-

ing very decided. The records on the bronze plates are more dis-

tinct than in the reproduction. The upper record was from loco-

motive No. 888 and 5 Wagner Palace cars; the lower record was

from locomotive No. 889 and 7 cars.

(110 )

PLATE X.

XI.

ACAD. SCI.

ANNALS N: Y

‘89/000%¢g

1S Pn F-— 5er

‘OI

eee A

TPUNVO an

Waren lt

PEATE od,

Fic. 1.—Stremmatograph attached to base of rail to obtain record of

the stresses of locomotive No. 596 on Track No. 1, 5 %-inch 8o-

lb, rails.

Fic. 2.—Locomotive ‘‘ DeWitt Clinton’’ and train of the Mohawk

and Hudson R. R. Co., 1831. The first American constructed

locomotive and train. ‘The inception of the New York Central

and Hudson River Railroad. The progress of 60 years was dem-

onstrated by the installation of the ‘‘ Empire State Express’’ in

1891, the ‘‘ fastest long distance train in the World.”’

(112 )

ANNALS N.Y. ACAD: SCI. XI. PLATE XI.

PLATE. XII.

ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sct,, XI, April 20, 1898—8.

PLATE Xe

Fig. 1.—‘‘Empire State Express’’ running 60 miles per hour on 65-

Ib. rails. Locomotive No. 862, Nov., 1891.

Fig. 2—‘‘Empire State Express’’ running 60 miles per hour on 80-

lb. rails. Locomotive No. 903.

(114)

ANNALS N, ¥. ACAD. SCL Xi. PLATE XII.

PLATE XU

Ns Y. C. and RRS R. poe trains, fy cars - each. K

N.Y; 1893. pay fe et he

j Gils

PLATE XIII.

AI:

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD, SCI:

[Annas N, Y. Acap. Sci., XI, No. 7, pp. 117 to 126, May 17, 1898.]

miSCRIPTIONS OF DEVONIAN CRINOIDS: AND

BLASTOIDS FROM MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN.

STUART WELLER.

(Read February 21, 1898.)

(PLATE. XLV: |

TuHeE Devonian strata at Milwaukee, Wisconsin, consist of two

distinct formations. The lower of these is the hydraulic lime-

stone which is quarried for the manufacture of cement. In

this limestone the fossils generally occur as internal casts and

external impressions, though some of the smaller forms are

sometimes replaced by pyrite. Lying above the limestone is

a bed of soft, blue, easily disintegrated shale, containing some

thin bands of harder limestone. In this shale the fossils are

abundant and often occur perfectly preserved.

The faunas of the two horizons are markedly different, scarcely

a species which occurs in the limestone being present in the

shale. In the limestone fauna there are many species identical

with those in the Hamilton group as typically developed in New

York, winle in the shale the species are apparently more nearly

allied to species in the Iowan Devonian faunas.

The crinoids and blastoids here described are all from the

shale, and while the crinoids are quite different from other

members of the genus to which they belong, they are to be

compared with species which have been described from Iowa

and Missouri rather than with any of the more eastern species.

With the exception of Pentremitidea filosa (?) which was col-

lected by Mr. A. W. Slocom, all the specimens were collected

by Mr. E. E. Teller, of Milwaukee, and are now in his collection.

ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sci., XI, May 17, 1898—9.

(117)

118 WELLER.

Melocrinus nodosus_ Hall.

(Pl XV... ie. '63)

1861. Melocrinites nodosus Hall, Rep. Prog. Geol. Surv. Wis.,

p. 10.

1895. Melocrinus nodosus Whitfield, Mem. Am. Mus. Nat.

EMst., vol..], p..48, PLO Woshiee ia

Calyx pyriform, truncate at the base, sides straight or slightly

convex from the tops of the basals to the arm openings ; cross-

section, as seen from above, exclusive of the nodes, obscurely

subpentagonal, greatest diameter at the arm bases. The plates

of the dorsal cup ornamented with conspicuous nodes.

Basals four, projecting laterally into more or less prominent

nodes, columnar facet large, often somewhat depressed between

the nodes of the plates. Radials large, heptagonal and hex-.

agonal, strongly nodose. First costals hexagonal, smaller

than the radials, strongly nodose; second costals pentagonal

or heptagonal, smaller than the first and less strongly nodose.

Distichals smaller than the last costals, higher than wide, free

beyond the first pair. First interdistichals hexagonal, as large

as the first costals and bearing similar nodes, followed by two

smaller nodose plates in the second row, one of which often

bears a larger node than the other ; in the third row there are

two or three smaller plates and above these numerous small

plates which lead up to those of the vault. The posterior inter-

radius is not differentiated from the other four.

Ventral disk depressed convex or nearly flat, composed of

small polygonal nodose plates of nearly equal size ; marked by

more or less prominent rounded ambulacral ridges which ex-

tend from the arm bases towards the center; and surmounted

by the base of a subcentral proboscis whose height cannot be

determined. 7

Remarks. This species, although described, but not illus-

trated, by Hall in 1861, is not recognized by Wachsmuth and

Springer in their recent monograph, it being passed over with

the remark that it was described from imperfect casts." The

1The North American Crinoidea Camerata. By Chas. Wachsmuth and Frank

Springer: Vol. I, p. 204.

MILWAUKEE CRINOIDS. 119

specimens used by Hall in his description are recorded as com-

ing from the drift about Milwaukee and also from Iowa City,

Iowa. It is possible that Hall included in his species all the

nodose forms from Milwaukee, but from a study of a consider-

able number of specimens I am led to recognize two good spe-

cies. Whitfield’s illustration of the species is drawn from the

largest of Hall’s type specimens, and, except in its larger size,

differs in no essential respects from the one here illustrated.

Although two species and one named variety, of these no-

dose forms are recognized in the present paper, it is possible

that some would prefer to include them all in a single variable

species. All the specimens, however, which have come under

my observation can be placed without hesitation in one of the

two recognized species, JZ. nodosus and M. subglobosus, but it is

more difficult to separate the variety sfzvosus from the typical

specimens of JZ. nodosus. The distinguishing differences be-

tween the two species will be pointed out in connection with the

description of JZ. subglobosus.

With the exception of the associated J/. subglobosus, Melo-

crinus nodosus is quite distinct from any other species of the

genus. It need only be compared with JZ. ca/vini' from the

Devonian of Johnson Co., Ia., and JZ. gregeri* from the Devo-

nian of Callaway Co., Mo., and from both of these species it

differs in its much more strongly nodose plates.

Melocrinus nodosus var. spinosus_n. var.

Ga igs) 2.)

This variety differs from the typical form of the species in its

higher and narrower calyx, and in its more pointed spine-like

nodes.

1'Wachsmuth and Springer, N. Am. Crim. Cam., Vol. I, p. 300, Pl. XXII,

fig. 6.

2 Rowley, Am. Geol., Vol. XII, Nov. 1893, p. 303, Pl. XVI, fig. 1.

120 WE ELLE ie

Melocrinus subglobosus _n. sp.

CPL ECVE np ate

Calyx sub-globular, sides convex from the tops of the basals

to the arm openings. Cross section, as seen from above exclu-

sive of the nodes, circular, greatest diameter at about the top of

the first costals. The plates of the dorsal cup ornamented with

remarkably large nodes, the radials, first costals and first and

second interbrachials often bearing nodes whose diameter is

nearly equal to the width of the plates. The larger nodes rise

abruptly from the general surface of the plates, with subparallel

sides and with an elevation equal to their diameter.

Basals four, projecting laterally into more or less prominent

nodes, columnar facet large, often somewhat depressed between

the nodes of the plates. Radials large, heptagonal and hexag-

onal, strongly nodose. First costals hexagonal, smaller than

the radials, strongly nodose; second costals pentagonal or

heptagonal, smaller than the first, bearing a much smaller and

lower node. Distichals smaller than the last costals, the second

pair free and attached to the first by a conspicuous sub-circular

facet with numerous fine radiating ridges. First interbrachials

hexagonal in the four regular interradial areas, as large as the

first costals, and bearing similar nodes, followed by two smaller

plates in the second row, one of which often bears a conspicuous

node similar to those of the lower plates and the other with a

much lower and smaller inconspicuous node similar to those

upon the second costals ; above the second row the interradial

spaces are filled with numerous smaller plates which lead up to

those of the dome. The posterior interradius with a heptag-

onal nodose anal plate in the first row, similar, except in out-

line, to the first regular interbrachials, followed by three plates

in the second row.

Ventral disk subhemispherical, composed of small, polygonal,

nodose plates of nearly equal size, and surmounted by the base

of a subcentral proboscis whose height cannot be determined.

Remarks. M. subglobosus is most nearly allied to the asso-

ciated species AZ. nodosus. It differs from this species: 1. In

its subglobose form, with the vault subhemispherical rather than

MILWAUKEE CRINOIDS. 121

depressed convex or nearly flat. 2. Inits more strongly nodose

plates, the nodes in this species being nearly as thick at their

bases as the width of the plate of which they are a part, with

the sides of the nodes subparallel or even in some cases diverg-

ing outward, making the node somewhat club-shaped, being

thicker towards its extremity than at its base, while in JZ xo-

dosus the sides of the nodes always converge outwards. 3. In

the presence of three plates rather than two in the second row

of interbrachials on the posterior side.

Melocrinus milwaukensis n. sp.

CE. «iis, 7.)

Calyx pyriform, truncated at the base, sides slightly convex

from the tops of the basals to the arm openings. Cross-section,

as seen from above, obscurely pentagonal. Greatest diameter

at the arm bases. All the plates of the dorsal cup convex or

ornamented with low, broad, central nodes.

Basals four, moderately nodose, not projecting far beyond the

column. Radials large, heptagonal and hexagonal. First cos-

tals hexagonal, smaller than the radials, second costals pentag-

onal or heptagonal, smaller than the first. Distichals much

smaller than the last costals, the second or third pair becoming

free. First interbrachials in the four regular interradial areas,

hexagonal, as large as the first costals, followed by two smaller

plates in the second and three still smaller ones in third row,

these being followed by small plates which lead up to the inter-

radial plates of the vault. In-the posterior interradius the first

or anal plate is similar in size to the first interbrachials of the other

sides, but is heptagonal in form, being followed by three plates

in the second row.

Ventral disk depressed convex or nearly flat, composed of

small polygonal nodose plates of nearly equal size; marked by

more or less prominent ambulacral ridges extending from the

arm openings towards the center; and surmounted by a sub-

central proboscis whose height cannot be determined.

Remarks. This species with its associated variety differs from

122 WELLER.

the two preceding species in having, simply, more or less strongly

convex plates in the dorsal cup, instead of the great nodose plates

of those species. Both the typical form and the variety agree

with JZ. subglobosus in the arrangement of the plates in the pos-

terior interradius, but in general form the species more closely

resembles JZ, nodosus and its variety spinosus.

Melocrinus milwaukensis var. rotundus nn. var.

(Pl OTe Wibiowes)

This variety differs from the typical form in being shorter,

with more convex plates, in the basals being more strongly

nodose, and in the more convex subhemispherical vault.

Pentremitidea filosa Whiteaves (?)

(Ble Xe ries)

1889. Pentremitidea filosa hiteaves, Cont. Can. Pal., Vol.

prog, PD a4; Figs..1—1b.

Body small, proportion of width to height as 3 to 5. Maxi-

mum breadth at or near the base of the radial sinus. Lateral

outline subovate, but. conical at the base and truncated at the

apex ; cross section at part of maximum width, decagonal, the

sides of the decagon represented by the ambulacral areas, short

and concave, the other sides nearly straight or slightly concave.

Basal plates three, two pentagonal and larger than the third,

which is quadrangular ; about one-fourth as high as the radials.

Basal cup strongly trihedral, about as high as wide, and reach-

ing more than half way to the bases of the radial sinuses.

Radial plates lanceolate in outline, nearly three times as high as

wide ; the bodies or undivided portions spread outward more

rapidly than the basals, and occupy one-fourth of the total length

of the plates. The apices of each of the two adjacent radials are

united to form an acute point which projects a little above the

summit. Radial sinuses deep, the sides elevated and forming

sharp edges, the portion bounding the base of the sinus more

MILWAUKEE CRINOIDS. — 123

highly elevated into a conspicuous node-like projection. Deltoid

plates, with the exception of the posterior one, apical, not visible

in a side view. Posterior deltoid small, rhomboidal, not well

preserved in the specimen.

Ambulacra linear, narrow, narrowly rounded at the base and

about one-half as wide at that point as at the summit. Surface

transversely convex, forming a longitudinal depression along

each side, the central portion raised not quite to the general

level of the radials. The food groove in the center of each -

ambulacrum deepens and broadens near the summit.

Spiracles five, rather large, the posterior one confluent with

the anal opening. The remaining characters of the summit not

well preserved.

Surface of the radials ornamented with fine concentric lines

which are only visible with a lens.

Remarks. The species here figured and described is with

some hesitation identified with Whiteaves P. filosa. It differs

from that species in its greater proportionate height, the pro-

portions between the width and height in Whiteaves’ figure being

3 to 4, while in the Milwaukee species it is 3 to 5; in the

higher and more slender basal cup, and in its more con-

spicuous node-like projections of the radials at the basal margin

of the sinus. So faras the Milwaukee specimens have been ob-

served, they are always smaller than Whiteaves’ figures.

Pentremitidea milwaukensis nn. sp.

PPL i Fie s.)

Body of medium size, lateral outline subovate, maximum

breadth a little below the middle of the radial sinuses. Cross-

section at the point of maximum width decagonal, the sides ot

the decagon represented by the ambulacral areas, short and con-

cave, the other sides longer, nearly straight or slightly concave.

Basal plates three, two pentagonal and larger than the third,

which is quadrangular, less than one fifth as high as the radials.

Basal cup trihedral, wider than high. Radials lanceolate in out-

line, a little more than twice as high as wide ; the bodies or un-

124 WELLER.

divided portions spread outward in a nearly horizontal position,

occupying about one fifth of the total length of the plates. The

apices of each of the two adjacent radials are united to form an

acute point which projects a little above the summit. Radial

sinuses deep, the sides subparallel, elevated so as to form sharp

edges, the portion bounding the base of the sinus more highly

elevated than at other points. Deltoid plates apical, not visible

in a side view, except on the posterior side, where there is a

small rhomboidal plate.

Ambulacra linear, narrowly rounded at the base, and but

little wider at the summit than at the base. Surface transversely

convex, forming a longitudinal depression along each side, the

central portion not raised to the general level of the radials.

The food groove along the median line of each ambulacrum

deepens and widens near the summit.

Spiracles rather large, the posterior one confluent with the

arms.

Surface of the radial plates ornamented with prominent raised

concentric ridges which converge downwards towards the lateral

Sutures:

Remarks. This species is in many respects similar to the

last, but differs in its larger size and in its proportionally broader

radials and shorter base, giving to the body a fuller appearance.

The rounded base of the radial sinus and ambulacra is broader

and more obtuse in this species than in the last, and the sides of

the ambulacra are more nearly parallel. The concentric orna-

mentation of sharply elevated ridges upon the radials, is much

more conspicuous than in the last species, it being always easily

recognized without the aid of a lens.

In the specimen figured the base is not preserved, the outline

indicated being taken from another specimen.

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO,

January 18, 1808.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIV.

Fic. 1. Melocrinus subglobosus n. sp. p. 119.

Fic. 2. Melocrinus nodosus var. spinosus nN. Var. p. I19.

Fic. 3. Pentremitidea filosa Whiteaves (?). p. 122.

Fic. 4. Melocrinus milwaukensis var. rotundus n. var. p. 122.

Fic. 5. Pentremitidea milwaukensisn. sp. p. 123.

Fic. 6. Melocrinus nodosus Hall. p. 118.

Fic. 7. Melocrinus milwaukensis n. sp. p. 121.

Figure 7 of this species represents the basal plates as somewhat

larger than they are in the specimen.

( 126 )

ANNALS ¥.N, ACAD, SCI, XI. PLATE XIV.

Pale

ml 7

- an

=<"

in Se

oe ee ell

+ 4a:

‘ ‘

[ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sci., XI, No. 8. pp. 127-149, May 17, 1898. ]

THE EPARTERIAL BRONCHIAL SYSTEM OF

THE MAMMALIA.

Gro. S. HUNTINGTON.

(Read February 14, 1898.)

[Plates XV-XXVIII. ]

INTRODUCTION.

DurInG the past five years I have devoted much time to the

examination of the mammalian lung in reference to the struc-

ture of,the bronchial system and the distribution of the pulmonary

vascular supply. In presenting, as a preliminary communica-

tion, some of our more important results to the Section at this

meeting, I may state that the research is by no means completed,

although it comprises the detailed examination of over two hun-

dred lungs from all orders and many families of the mammalia.

Some of the facts established appear to me so conclusive that I

do not hesitate to direct your attention to the same, especially

because they render my interpretation of the mammalian type

of bronchial distribution and pulmonary vascular supply different

from the one presented by Ch. Aeby in his valuable monograph

“ Der Bronchialbaum der Saugethiere und des Menschen.” Inas-

much as Professor Aeby’s views have been adopted, almost

without exception, by the authors of current anatomical text-

books and incorporated more or less extensively in these vol-

umes, the matter appears to me one of more than common

interest and importance.

The preparations upon which the conclusions stated in this

paper are based were obtained almost invariably by corrosion

of the injected bronchial system and pulmonary artery, the only

methods which I believe can be relied upon to give absolute and

satisfactory results.

I have appended to this paper a nearly complete bibliograph-

ical list of articles on the subject which have appeared since the

publication of Professor Aeby’s book in 1880.

( 127 )

128 HUNTINGTON.

Before proceeding to details, I may briefly recapitulate the

main facts and conclusions which Professor Aeby’s work con-

tains on the mammalian lung.

1. Aeby recognizes in each lung a main or “stem bronchus

which can be followed caudad and dorsad throughout the entire

lung, diminishing in size gradually by giving off lateral branches,

capable of being separated into a dorsal and ventral set. Aeby

defines this as the monopodic type of. division.

2. The pulmonary artery follows the same general plan of

distribution, the main trunk of each side crossing the bronchus

ventro-dorsad and continuing caudad on the dorsal aspect of

the stem-bronchus, between the ventral and dorsal lateral

branches, which are separated from each other by the vessel.

3. In the human lung and in the lungs of most mammalia

the lateral branches on the left side are all given off from the

stem-bronchus caudad of the point of intersection of the same with

the artery. They constitute, therefore, a group of “ Hypar-

terial bronchi.’’ On the right side in man and in most mam-

malia a bronchus is given off from the stem-bronchus cephalad

of its intersection with the pulmonary artery. Aeby distin-

cuishes this bronchus, which in man supplies the upper lobe of

the right lung, as the “ Eparterial”’ bronchus.

4. Inasmuch as the upper lobe of the left and the middle

lobe of the right lung is supplied by the first “ventral hypar-

terial bronchus,’ Aeby considers them homologous, regarding

the ‘‘eparterial’’ bronchus and its resulting lobe (upper right)

as an entirely new structure confined to the right lung, and

morphologically not represented on the left side.

5. While this arrangement obtains in man and most mam-

malia, Aeby’s researches revealed the fact that certain forms

are aberrant in reference to the bronchial and pulmonary vas-

cular distribution.

Aeby classifies the various types determined by himself as

follows, the list being completed by the forms examined subse-

quently by M. Weber:

EPARTERIAL BRONCHIAL SYSTEM. 129

I. Bronchial Tree with bilateral Eparterial Bronchus.

a. Eparterial Bronchus on both sides bronchial in derivation:

Bradypus, Equus, Elephas, Fhoca.

6. Eparterial Bronchus bronchial in derivation on left side,

tracheal on right: Phocena communis, Delphinis

delphis, Auchenia.

II. Bronchial tree with Eparterial Bronchus only on right side.

a. Eparterial Bronchus bronchial in dérivation : Jonotre-

mata, Marsupalia, Edentata (except Bradypus), Ro-

dentia (except Hystrix), Carnivora, Insectivora, Chi-

voptera, Prosimie, Primates.

6. Eparterial Bronchus tracheal in derivation: Artiodactyla

(except Camelus and Auchenia), many -Cetaceans

(Epiodon australe, Hyperoodon rostratus, Balenoptera

rostrata and sibbaldit).

III. Bronchial tree without Eparterial Bronchus. Bilateral hy-

parterial system: ystrix cristata, Balena mysticetus

and antipodum.

IV. Bronchial tree with triple division of Trachea into three

unequal Bronchi: Pontoporia blainvillei. (Isolated

type—not found in any other mammal.)

The above postulates comprise, I believe, the main results of

Aeby’s research as far as they concern the subject of the

present communication. They have been, as already stated,

almost universally adopted and have found place, as recognized

anatomical facts, in the majority of current text-books on human

and comparative anatomy.

Among the subsequent contributions to the morphology of

the bronchial tree one deserves special mention, on account of

its importance and because it appears to me that it has not re-

ceived the attention which it deserves. Albert Narath, in 1892,

presented a communication to the ‘‘ Anatomische Gesellschaft,”’

entitled ‘‘ Vergleichende Anatomie des Bronchialbaumes,”’ pub-

lished in the ‘‘ Verhandlungen d. Anat. Gesell. VI. Versamm-

lung, 1892.” In this paper Narath controverts a number of

Aeby’s conclusions very forcibly.

130 HUNTINGTON.

Narath establishes the following propositions, based on ex-

tensive comparative and human material :

1. The pulmonary artery in the greater part of its course is

placed /aterad of the stem-bronchus, and does not cross the same

in Aeby’s sense.

2. The pulmonary artery does not influence the structure of

the bronchial tree.

3. There is no’ fundamental difference between the “ epar-

terial’”’ and ‘‘ hyparterial’’ bronchi. of Aeby.

4. The “eparterial” bronchus: is “a «dorsal “(irst dorsal

branch, probably originally a lateral branch of the first ventral

bronchus shifted upwards on the stem-bronchus.

5. The right eparterial bronchus (when alone present as in

man) is represented by an ‘‘apical’’ bronchus on the left side,

derived as a lateral branch from the first ventral bronchus.

These important conclusions of Narath will be subsequently

again referred to in comparing them with the results obtained

by our investigations.

If we now, carefully and without prejudice, examine a large

number of corrosion preparations of mammalian lungs, in which

the bronchial system and pulmonary artery have been injected,

the following facts will reveal themselves :

1. A unity of ground plan can be discerned in all, modified in

various forms by :

a. Migration of one or more secondary bronchi cephalad

on the main bronchus, or even on the trachea.

6. Corresponding changes in the branching of the pul-

monary artery.

c. The appearance, in many forms, of a right accessory

(cardiac or azygos) bronchus.

2. If asymmetry exists the sight lung us\an general the ome

favored by the greater development and increased calibre and

number of the bronchial branches. This physiological pre-

cedence of the right over the left lung is characterized by the

following facts :

EPARTERIAL BRONCHIAL SYSTEM. 131

a. The “ eparterial’’ bronchus, if unilateral, is always on

the right side.

6. The “cardiac” bronchus is always on the right side.

EXAMINATION OF TYPES.

We may profitably begin our consideration of the mammalian

bronchial tree by examining seriatim a number of selected types,

subsequently comparing the members of the entire series, in

their probable phylogenetic relation to each other, and draw

our general conclusions from such comparison.

For reasons, which will be stated later, and which induce us

to regard the form as the representative of the primitive mam-

malian lung, we begin with the type described by Aeby as

“ Bronchial Tree without Eparterial Bronchus,”’ the complete

bilateral hyparterial type.

I. Hystrix cristata—European Porcupine.

Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery. Co-

lumbia University Museum, No. 413. Pl. XV.

The caudal end of the trachea enlarges to a capacious pen-

tagonal bulla or lacuna, slightly compressed dorso-ventrally.

The bronchi, hyparterial in their derivation on both sides and

perfectly symmetrical, arise from the tracheal bulla as two main

trunks, cephalic and caudal (Pl. XV, 4, A, 5, B). Each trunk

divides, in a nearly dichotomous manner, into two nearly equal

secondary branches (PI. XV, A’, A’, B’, B’), which in turn

give off, by monopodic division, tertiary branches.

I. CEPHALIC TRUNK (Pl. XV, 4, A).

a. Apical Branch (d’) passes to the anterior portion of

each lung.

6. Lateral Branch (A’’) supplies the central (middle) por-

tion of each lung.

2. CauDAL Trunk (Pl. XV, 8, £8). Both medial and

lateral-secondary branches (3’ and 8’’) ramify in the

posterior portion of the lung.

132 HUNTINGTON.

II. a. Taxidea Americana—American Badger.

First specimen ; juvenile animal.

Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery. Co-

lumbia University Museum, No. 1254. Pl. XVI.

The tracheal lacuna is large, bullous, rounded, projecting

caudad with a blunt rounded terminal cupola between the

caudal bronchial trunks.

The primary trunks of right and left side, two in number

(PIV, A, A288 ase directly from the expanded tracheal

bud. They are, however, compared with those of Hystrix, no

longer quite symmetrical. |

i eer Lone:

a. Cephalic Trunk (4).

Large, directed cephalo-laterad, distributing by monopodic

division, secondary branches cephalad and caudad.

6. Caudal Trunk (<).

A short wide stem, directed caudo-laterad. It divides, di-

chotomously, into two main secondary branches, a medial and

a lateral (B’, B’’), each of which again divides in a nearly di-

chotomous manner, the main secondary and the resulting ter-

tiary branches giving off monopodic. lateral twigs. (Mixed

dichotomous and monopodic type of division.)

2. Ricut Lune.

a. Cephalic Trunk (4).

A short wide stem, directed cephalo-laterad, divides into sec-

ondary branches as follows:

a, A slightly smaller apical branch directed cephalo-laterad

(4’). |

f. A somewhat larger lateral branch, directed latero-caudad

(Pl. XVI, A”). Each secondary branch gives off mono-

podic tertiary branches.

6. Caudal Trunk. (4).

Very short, sessile, directed caudo-laterad. Divides almost.

immediately into two secondary branches of nearly equal size (4’,

&'’), the lateral branch (4’) being slightly the larger. Each of

EPARTERIAL BRONCHIAL SYSTEM. 133

these, as on the left side, gives off two terminal tertiary branches,

which aré studded with monopodic lateral twigs.

The two tertiary branches resulting from the division of the

medial secondary bronchus (4”’) are characterized by obtaining

their arterial supply through a large trunk passing from the

main pulmonary artery ventro-caudad between the cephalic and

caudal trunks (angle between A and 4), and inclining mesad

across the secondary lateral branch of the caudal trunk (4’) to .

reach the terminal divisions of the medial branch of the same

trunk (4’’). The topography of this arterial vessel (PI. XVI, C)

is entirely characteristic of the usual blood-supply to the infra-

cardiac, or Azygos lobe in other Mammalia (cf. z/ra).

II b. Taxidea Americana—American Badger.

Second specimen, large full-grown male. Corrosion prepara-

tion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery. Columbia

University Museum, No. 1255. Pl. XVII.

Presents the same characters as the first specimen as regards

the tracheal bulla, and the derivation of the cephalic and caudal

primary trunks (4 and 4). The tertiary branches are more

fully developed and give off more numerous and larger mono-

podic lateral twigs.

The main interest, compared with the first specimen, centers

around the cephalic trunk (A) of the left lung. The trunk is

only slightly smaller than the one of the right side. It divides

into a large cephalic or apical branch (A’) and a very much

smaller lateral branch (A’’), while on the right side the primary

cephalic trunk A divides into two nearly equal secondary

branches (A’ and A’). We may, therefore, assume that the

large left cephalic bronchus of the younger specimen (PI. XVI, 4)

corresponds in the main to A’ of the older animal, and that one

of the proximal lateral branches develops into branch A” of the

adult.

The asymmetry of the right lung compared with the left is

well marked. The main secondary branches (A’, A’’) derived

from the right cephalic trunk (4) exhibit a tendency toward

complete separation and individual independence. The arterial

ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sci., XI, May 18, 1898—1I0.

134 HUNTINGTON.

supply of the medial secondary branch (4”’) derived from the

right caudal trunk (4) presents the same typographical peculiar-

ity found in the younger specimen.

GENERAL CONSIDERATION OF THE ‘“ BILATERAL HYPARTERIAL

TYPE,” AS SHOWN IN THE PRECEDING PREPARATIONS.

1. Zaxidea americana is a new form, presenting the bilateral

hyparterial type, now described in detail for the first time, al-

though I called attention to the peculiarities of the pulmonary

structure of this animal in the ‘ Cartwright Lectures,” delivered

in April 1896.

2. Comparison with the remaining mammalian forms leads

me to regard the bilateral hyparterial type as the prémzteve con-

dition of the mammalian lung, whereas Aeby (1) and Wieder-

sheim (Vergl. Anat. Lehrb., p. 262—266) consider it a complete

reduction form, resulting from the bilateral suppression of the

‘“eparterial’” bronchus. The reasons for the opinion expressed

are as follows:

a. The tracheal lacuna or bulla corresponds to the condition

presented by the tracheal bud during the early stages of pul-

monary development in mammalian embryos.*

6. During the early developmental stages the pulmonary

artery passes caudad on each side of the tracheal stalk to the

point of division. The subsequent descent of the heart turns

the pulmonary trunk ventrad and caudad into the position which

it later occupies in relation to the tracheal bifurcation. Hence

the original position of the tracheal buds is ‘‘ hyparterial.

The appearance, therefore, both of the bronchial system and

of the pulmonary artery in A/ystvix and Taxidea represents a

persistent embryonal type.

3. We may add that this type appears as an exceedingly ex-

ceptional one in the mammalian series. In obedience to an

1 Robinson, Arthur, ‘‘ Observations on the earlier stages in the development of

the Lungs of Rats and Mice,’’ Jour. Anat. and Phys., Vol. xxiii, Pt. 11, January

1889, p. 224.

EPARTERIAL-BRONCHIAL SYSTEM, 135

almost universal law, extension of the bronchial system by mi-

gration cephalad of some of the secondary branches brings

about asymmetry of the tree and a changed relation of the

cephalic primary bronchus to the pulmonary artery.

The only forms in which the bilateral hyparterial type is

known to exist are:

Hystrix cristata (Aeby),

Balena mysticetus and antipodum (M. Weber),

Taxidea americana (Huntington).

Turning now to the conditions presented by the remaining

mammalia, I have selected the following series of typical modi-

fications, and will present them in the order in which the sub-

sequent general phylogenetic comparison will be made.

Ill. Canis familiaris—Dog, °.

Corrosion preparation of bronchial system and pulmonary

artery. Columbia University Museum, No. 1256. Pl. XVIII.

The type presented is the one followed by the vast majority

of mammalia, and is defined by Aeby as “bronchial tree with

eparterial bronchus only on the right side, bronchial in deriva-

tion.” There is a well-developed cardiac bronchus (C) supply-

ing the Azygos lobe.

Even a cursory examination of this preparation reveals the

fact that, with the exception of the cardiac bronchus, a strict

equivalence of bronchial elements exists on the right and left

sides, but that their relation to the primary bronchus and the

main trunk of the pulmonary artery differs on the two sides.

a Left Sade.

The first bronchus is a short, thick stem, hyparterial in posi-

tion (A), which divides into an apical and a lateral branch (4’,

A”). Compared with A/ystrix and Taxidea, it is not difficult to

recognize in the former the cephalic trunk (4) and in the latter

the two secondary branches (A’ and A’’). The caudal portion

of the bronchial tree below the origin of A appears as the

136 FIUNTING TOM

‘“stem-bronchus’”’ of Aeby, from which the remaining sec-

ondary branches are derived. Compared with //ystrix and

Taxidea, we recognize the element 4, between the origin of the

first hyparterial trunk A, and the origin of the lateral branch

4’, corresponding to the caudal trunk 4 of Aystvix and Tax-

zdca. The lateral branch 4’ corresponds to the same element

in the bronchial system of 7axidea and Hfysirix.

The continuation caudad of the stem-bronchus occupies the

site of the secondary caudal branch 6” in Hystrix and Taxidea,

and, like this branch, divides into two nearly equal segments, a

medial and a lateral, each of which gives off monopodic dorso-

medial and ventro-lateral twigs.

The general comparison, therefore, of the left bronchial sys-

tem of Canis with the bilateral hyparterial type of Aystrza and

Taxidea results as follows :

flystrix and Taxidea. Canis.

A = A

At = A’

A’ acs A’

LB = B

Bi — B’

BY!’ a BY’

Aeby’s “ stem-bronchus”’ appears as the result of the follow-

ing rearrangement and further development :

1. The proximal part, between the bifurcation and the origin

of the cephalic trunk A (‘‘ primary left bronchus’) results from

the segmentation and division of the tracheal bulla.

2. The second segment of the stem-bronchus is formed by

the element 4 (caudal trunk) between the origin of A and the

derivation of 4’.

3. The third segment is continued caudad as the representa-

tive of 5”’ (medial secondary caudal branch), while the lateral

branch (4’) appears as its secondary derivative. Hence we may

regard the typical ‘‘stem-bronchus’”’ as it appears in the ma-

jority of mammalia in the following light :

‘“‘Stem-bronchus” = segmented tracheal bulla + 4 +4 4”,

medial division.

A and its two secondary divisions A’ and A’’, 4’, as well

EPARTERIAL BRONCHIAL SYSTEM. 137

as the lateral division of 4”, appear as lateral (secondary)

branches derived from the parent-stem. We have the dichot-

omous type of division of the primitive form replaced by the

monopodic origin of lateral branches from a main parent or

stem-bronchus, which condition characterizes the lung of the

higher mammalia.

b. Right Side.

The first fact noticed is the complete separation of the branches

A and A’ and the consequent elimination of the primary cephalic

trunk A. A’ has migrated slightly dorsad and cephalad, so as

to arise from the stem-bronchus near the bifurcation. A’ has

shifted ventrad and slightly caudad onthe stem-bronchus. The

interval thus opened between them by the elimination of the

trunk A is utilized by the right pulmonary artery to gain the

dorso-lateral aspect of the stem-bronchus.

In general there can be no question as to the morphological

equivalence, regarding direction, size and lung area supplied, of

the branches A’ and A’’ on right and left sides. The same is

true regarding the corresponding branches of the pulmonary

artery. To be noted is the early derivation of the arterial

trunk accompanying A’ on the right side; also the somewhat

more pronounced independent character of A’, revealed by the.

greater number and size of its lateral secondary and tertiary de-

rivatives, all facts accentuating the physiological importance

which the apical portion of the right lung has assumed.

The caudal segment follows in the main the type presented

by the left side. We recognize the same character and deriva-

tion of the stem-bronchus.

A new element, not represented on the left side, appears as

the cardiac bronchus (C), derived from the stem-bronchus

(segment 4) caudad and mesad to the separate origin of A’’.

Comparison with the bronchial tree of Zaxzdea shows that the

large artery, accompanying the cardiac bronchus and supplying

the Azygos lobe, corresponds topographically to the arterial

branch which in 7axidea is seen to course ventro-mesad be-

tween 4 and A’ and F# to reach the bronchi derived from 5’.

The cardiac bronchus appears as a secondary structure im-

138 HUNTING TON,

planted, at somewhat varying levels as we shall see, upon the

stem-bronchus of the right side, its appearance being fore-shad-

owed by the arrangement of the arterial branch (C) of the bilat-

eral hyparterial tree of Zasidea.

IV. Dicotyles torquatus—Collared Peccary.

Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery. Co-

lumbia University Museum, No. 1258. Pl. XIX.

This preparation exhibits a good type of the further modifica-

tions encountered among the Artiodactyla.

On the left side the entire bronchial distribution is hyparterial,

the cephalic trunk A dividing into an apical (A’) and a lateral

(Ao! branch.

On the right side, as in Canis, the trunk A disappears by

complete segmentation of its secondary branches, and the pul-

monary artery crosses dorso-laterad, cephalad of the origin of

A” from the stem-bronchus.

A’ has shifted its point of origin, compared with Cawzs,

further cephalad and appears as a lateral branch derived from

the right side of the trachea.

The distribution of the caudal trunk in symmetrical. The

stem-bronchus appears as an especially distinct structure, gradu-

ally diminishing in calibre in descent. 4’ appears as its first

lateral branch caudad of the origin of 4 on the left and A” on

the right side.

The cardiac bronchus and corresponding artery occupy the

same position as in Cavs.

V. Myrmecophaga jubata—Great Ant-Eater.

Corrosion preparation of bronchial system and pulmonary

artery. Columbia University Museum, No. 479. PI. XX.

A further advance in the migration cephalad of the nght

cephalic trunk 4 is noted in this preparation.

EPARTERIAL BRONCHIAL SYSTEM. 139

The entire right trunk, carrying its secondary branches A’

and A’’, has shifted cephalad on the stem-bronchus, becoming

‘ eparterial,’’ while on the left side the trunk maintains its original

position below the artery.

The secondary branch 4’ on the left side appears reduced.

The cardiac bronchus is large, arising below the origin of 5’

from the medial margin of the stem-bronchus. The cor-

responding artery reaches the ventral surface of the cardiac

bronchus by crossing obliquely meso-caudad over the stem-

bronchus below the origin 5’,

VI. Auchenia glama-pacos—Llama-Alpaca.

Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery. Co-

lumbia University Museum, No. 585. Pl. XXI.

The arrangement of the bronchial system on the right side

follows in the main the artiodactyl type as represented by

LDicotyles, with certain minor exceptions to be presently men-

tioned. The same number and disposition of the main branches

is to be noted.

On the left side further extension cephalad of the apical por-

tion of the lung has led to a division of the cephalic trunk A,

repeating the one found on the right side.

The lateral branch A’’ occupies the position corresponding

to the same branch on the right side, below the pulmonary

artery. The apical branch A’ has migrated cephalad, appearing

as an ‘“‘eparterial’’ bronchus arising close to the tracheal bifur-

cation from the left primary bronchus.

The arterial distribution is symmetrical ; the vessels accom-

panying the branch A’ are on both sides derived from the be-

ginning of the pulmonary artery, coursing on the ventral aspect

of the corresponding bronchus.

This form, noted already by Aeby, constitutes the type which

he describes as “ bilateral eparterial bronchus, tracheal on right,

bronchial on left side.”’

The cardiac bronchus is also shifted cephalad, arising from

140 HIUNTING TON.

the ventro-mesal aspect of the stem-bronchus, opposite the origin

of A” from the ventro-lateral surface.

The corresponding artery occupies a peculiar position. In-

stead of winding around the angle between stem-bronchus and

A” caudad of the latter (see preceding types), the artery is de-

rived from the caudal surface of the main pulmonary artery

opposite the point where from the cephalic margin the apical

vessel accompanying A’ takes its origin. The artery descends

on the ventral aspect of its bronchus. A similar bronchus is

found on the left side, but the corresponding arterial branches

are short trunks passing to their distribution from the main

pulmonary artery dorsad of the stem-bronchus.

VII. Cebus capucinus—Capuchin Monkey.

Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery.

Columbia University Museum, No. 4838. Pl. XX, Wentral

view. Ply XXII Dorsal view.

This type presents a somewhat peculiar arrangement of the

cephalic trunks on both sides.

On the right side the separation of the two branches 4d’ and

A” is complete, the pulmonary artery occupying the interval

between them. A’ has migrated cephalad on the stem-

bronchus, becoming “ eparterial,’’ and corresponding to the

usual mammalian type of the right side.

On the left side the migration of the cephalic trunk 4 is com-

plete compared with the preceding form (Awchenia). It is

placed cephalad and dorsad of the point of accession of the main

pulmonary artery to the stem-bronchus, and divides into the

two secondary branches A’ and A”.

We have, therefore, to follow Aeby’s nomenclature for the

moment, a ‘bilateral eparterial system. he epartenal

bronchus of the right side, as usual, being furnished by the di-

vorced and migrated apical branch A’, whereas, on the left side

the entire cephalic trunk A, with its secondary branches A’ and

A'’, becomes “‘ eparterial.”’

EPARTERIAL BRONCHIAL SYSTEM. 141

This arrangement is exceptional, as the “bilateral eparterial

type’”’ is usually symmetrical. It leads, however, directly up

to the condition presented by the two following forms, Cebus

mger and Phoca.

The cardiac bronchus is well developed, derived from the

right stem-bronchus between A”’ and 5’.

The artery passes to the cardiac bronchus from the ventral

aspect of the main pulmonary artery, before the same has

crossed to the lateral aspect of the stem-bronchus, resembling

the arterial arrangement noted in Auchenia, although a secon-

dary branch (C’’) is seen, in the dorsal view, winding around

the stem-bronchus in the usual situation of the main artery of

the Azygos lobe (Pl. XXIII).

VIII. Cebus niger—Capuchin Monkey.

Corrosion preparation of the bronchial system and pulmon-

ary artery. Columbia University Museum, No. 484. PI.

XXIV, Dorsal view. Pl. XXV, Ventral view.

This type appears as the direct result of further development

cephalad of the preceding form.

The cephalic trunks, A, of both sides appear as “ eparterial

bronchi,” each dividing into the characteristic secondary

branches A’ and A’. On the right side the trunk 4 has shifted

a little further cephalad, nearer to the tracheal bifurcation, than

on the left side.

The main caudal branches and the cardiac bronchus are

arranged as in the preceding form.

IX. Phoca vitulina—Harbor Seal.

Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery. Colum-

bia University Museum, No. 584. Pl. XXVI, Ventral view.

This final type presents the complete “ bilateral eparterial

system,” perfectly symmetrical; each cephalic trunk (4) is

situated on the stem-bronchus close to the tracheal bifurcation,

cephalad of the main pulmonary artery, and divides sym-

142 HUNTING TON.

metrically into the secondary branches A’ and A’. The cor-

responding arteries are situated ventrad, derived from the pul-

monary artery close to its division into right and left main

trunks.

In conformity with the complete bilateral symmetry of the

tree a cardiac bronchus is not present.

SUMMARY.

If we briefly sum up the main facts just deduced from the

examination of these specimens we find that a complete con-

secutive series can be established, leading from the symmetrical

“bilateral hyparterial type ’ without cardiac bronchus (/7/ystz+),

through gradual modifications, to the complete symmetrical

“bilateral eparterial type’’ without cardiac bronchus (Poca).

This series, to obtain a comprehensive view of the main fea-

tures, may be schematically represented in Pl. XX VII.

Based on this comparison we may incorporate our conclu-

sions in the following propositions :

1. The right and left lung agree, morphologically, in the

type of their bronchial distribution.

2. The asymmetry—when observed—is apparent, not real,

depending usually upon complete separation of the right

cephalic trunk A into its two components A’ and A”, and

migration of A’ cephalad, changing its original relation to

bronchial stem and pulmonary artery ; more rarely the asym-

metry depends upon the complete migration cephalad of the

entire trunk A, carrying the secondary branches A’ and A”

(MLyrmecophaga).

3. Aeby’s hypothesis of the morphological equivalence of

the middle right and upper left lobe of the human lung 1s,

therefore, incorrect.

The proposition should read :

Right side. Left side.

Upper ++ middle lobe = upper lobe.

Lower + cardiac lobe — lower lobe.

4. The active principle in changing and modifying the archi-

tecture of the lung is zo¢ the pulmonary artery (Aeby), but wz-

EPARTERIAL BRONCHIAL SYSTEM. 143

gration of the cephalic trunk A, or of its secondary branch 4’,

usually only on the right side, producing apparent asymmetry.

This migration affords an opportunity for more complete devel-

opment of the resulting terminal bronchial system, and for con-

sequent increase in respiratory area.

5. ln the majority of mammals this greater development of

respiratory surface is confined to the right side, resulting in the

formation of the so-called ‘ eparterial bronchus,” and also in-

dicated by the development of a special accessory cardiac

bronchus of the right side.

This physiological preponderance of right over left lung is

especially well shown by the arrangement of the right lung in

artiodactyls (¢. g., antelope), where the migration of the cephalic

right bronchus has carried the same cephalad, beyond the bi-

furcation, to the trachea, and where the resulting voluminous

upper lobe of the right lung at times extends completely across

the mid-line to cap the apex of the more rudimentary left lung.

6. Except, therefore, for purposes of topography we should

abandon the distinction of eparterial and hyparterial bronchi,

at least to the extent of clearly recognizing the fact that in

asymmetrical lungs every right “ eparterial’’ bronchus finds its

morphological equivalent among the ‘“ hyparterial” bronchi of

the left side.

7. The impropriety of ascribing any morphological signifi-

cance to the number of pulmonary lobes is apparent. The di-

vision into lobes is an entirely secondary character, not depend-

ent upon the type of the bronchial distribution, but probably

connected with unequal mobility in different segments of the

thoracic walls. Lobe-formation is also subject to a considerable

range of variation.

8. For the reasons above detailed the primitive type of the

mammalian lung is the symmetrical “ bilateral hyparterial form,”

the symmetrical ‘bilateral eparterial form’ representing the

end-stage in the process of evolution, not the deginning (Aeby,

Wiedersheim).

g. The primitive type of division is practically dichotomous

(Hystrix, Taxidea).

144 HUNTINGTON.

We can recognize two main trunks on each side, one cephalic,

the other caudal. The cephalic trunk supplies the anterior and

middle portion of the lung, the main migratory modifications in

the different types taking place within its region of distribution.

The caudal trunk supplies the posterior and larger portion of

the lung.

In the subsequent development of the stem-bronchus and its

monopodic type of branching, characteristic of the majority of

mammalian lungs, the following factors are active :

a. Complete segmentation of the tracheal bulla, producing

the usual bifurcation. This establishes the proximal portion of

the ‘‘stem-bronchus,” and gives to the cephalic primary trunk

A the position of a lateral branch derived from the same.

6. The caudal continuation of the stem-bronchus 1s composed

of the primary caudal trunk & and its medial secondary branch

B"’, the lateral branch 4’ and subsequently developing lateral

accessory branches appearing as the ‘ventral branches of the ~

stem-bronchus”’ (Aeby).

c. The cardiac bronchus usually appears as a special acces-

sory branch derived from the stem-bronchus of the right side

only (exception wade supra, Auchenia).

10. In the majority of forms examined the pulmonary artery

is not dorsal to the stem-bronchus, except in the terminal part.

The position, as Narath has pointed out, is lateral or dorso-

lateral.

11. Hence, the distinction into ‘“ dorsal’? and “ventral”

branches, separated by. the pulmonary artery, should be aban-

doned.

12. It will be seen that our results agree with the conclusions

reached by Narath in regard to the equivalence of the anterior

or cephalic branches of right and left side in a symmetrical lungs.

We differ from him in our interpretation of the derivation of the

“apical bronchus” which he regards as the dorsal branch of the

first ventral bronchus.

We differ also as regards the above outlined phylogenetic de-

velopment of the ‘‘stem-bronchus”’ and its monopodic system

of branching.

EPARTERIAL BRONCHIAL SYSTEM. 145

If we seek for an explanation of the cawse which leads to the

migratory changes of the cephalic bronchus, I admit that we

enter the realm of pure hypothesis. At the same time, the very

general development throughout the mammalia of this type,

with the resulting greater respiratory area of the right lung, may,

I think, not improbably be referred to the development of the

mammalian form of the systemic and pulmonary arteries. The

fact which seems to me to be most significant in this respect is

the development of the fourth and fifth embryonic arterial arches

eX V ITI).

We know that with the septal division of the arterial trunk

into systemic aorta and pulmonary artery the fifth arches on

each side are assigned to the development of the latter vessel,’

while the remaining arches are partially used in the elaboration

of the adult arterial system.

If we consider the significance of the foetal pulmonary incula-

tion it will appear at once that the conditions differ on the right

and left sides.

On the left side the greater quantity of the blood thrown from

the right ventricle into the left pulmonary artery passes through

the Botallian duct directly into the aorta, only a small portion

traversing the left pulmonary circulation.

On the right side, however, with the early obliteration of

the dorsal segment of the fifth arch, all the blood entering the

right pulmonary artery is forced to traverse the entire pulmonary

circulation, returning to the left auricle by the pulmonary veins..

I believe that we may properly ascribe to this foetal circulatory

condition a great share in the more marked development of the

right as compared with the left lung.

This view is further supported by the conditions found in

cases of ‘‘ situs inversus,” where the left lung develops the “ epar-

terial” bronchus (Lit. 6, 8, 9).

1 It seems preferable, in general considerations, to disregard the existence of the

sixth arch, demonstrated by Boas and Zimmerman, on account of the extremely

temporary and evanescent character of the interpolated arch.

146 HUNTINGTON.

CONCLUSION.

I have brought this question to the attention of the Academy

because I think it is high time to correct the erroneous views

founded on Aeby’s work. This is the more important, because

his theories have been extensively transcribed and his diagrams

reproduced in such of the anatomical text-books as deal with

the matter at all. I subjoin a list of the anatomical handbooks

most commonly in use with a brief statement of their expres-

sions on the subject.

1. Quain, ‘“‘Anatomy,’’ Vol. III, Pt. IV, p. 176-179,follows Aeby’s

description, giving reproductions or reconstructions of three figures

(195, 196, 197) and a somewhat extensive abstract of the text,

stating that the right eparterial bronchus in man is not represented

on the left side, and that accordingly the lobe which it supplies is

also absent, making the upper left the homologue of the middle right

lobe.

2. Morris, Henry, ‘‘ Human Anatomy,’’ Phila., 1893, p. 939-

940, gives a very indifferent diagram of the ventral view of lungs,

heart and pulmonary root, indicating on the right side bronchus,

pulmonary artery, and pulmonary veinin the order named cephalo-

caudad ; on the left side in the same order pulmonary artery, bron-

chus, pulmonary vein.

The text merely repeats this information in a brief statement.

3. Gray, Henry, ‘“ Anatomy, Descriptive and Surgical.’’ New

American Edition from the 13th English Edition, Philadelphia, 1897.

P. 1109 gives a diagram (Fig. 706) of the human bronchial tree

after Aeby and a brief description founded on Aeby’s work. P. 1117

gives in Fig. 710 a faulty view of the ventral aspect of the pul-

monary roots, follows it (p. 1118) with the stereotyped description

of the order of relations of the structures at the root of the lungs, and

concludes (p. 1121) witha xylographic horror purporting to present

the roots of the lungs from behind (Fig. 711).

4. Wiedersheim, Robert, ‘‘Lehrbuch der Vergleichenden Ana-

tomie der Wirbelthiere,’’ 2te Auflage, Jena, 1386, p. 262-266, gives

in extenso Aeby’s diagrams and conclusions, amplified by the in-

vestigations of M. Weber.

5. Wiedersheim, Robert, ‘‘ Elements of the Comparative

Anatomy of the Vertebrates’? adapted from the 3d German edition,

by W. N. Parker, London, 1367, p. 266.

EPARTERIAL BRONCHIAL SYSTEM. 147

Reproduces Aeby’s diagram (Fig. 239), gives a brief resumé of

Aeby’s conclusions and asserts directly that the anterior lobes of the

right and left lung are not homologous, but that the middle right

lobe corresponds to the anterior left, and that a want of symmetry is

thus created between right and left side, the right lung retaining one

more element than the left. This statement is further emphasized

by the lettering on fig. 240% representing a ventral view of the

human lungs.

6. Joessel, G., ‘‘Lehrbuch, der topographisch-chirurgischen

Anatomie,’’ II, 1. Thorax. Bonn, 1890, p. 60. Gives Aeby’s dia-

gram and repeats his conclusions quite fully.

7. Merkel, Fr., ‘‘ Handbuch der Topographischen Anatomie,’’

Bd. II, Lief. 2, p. 398 and 399, gives Aeby’s main conclusions, but

also refers to Narath’s investigations and gives a schematic figure

based on the latter’s work. This is the only author who does not

accept Aeby’s views entirely.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.

t. Aeby, Ch. ‘‘Der Bronchialbaum der Saugethiere und des

Menschen, nebst Bemerkungen iiber den Bronchialbaum der Vogel

und Reptilien.’’ Leipzig, 1880.

2. Aeby, Ch. ‘ Die Gestalt des Bronchialbaums und die Homo-

logie der Lungenlappen beim Menschen.’’ Centralbl. f. d. Med.

Wissensch, 1878. No. 16. :

3. Narath, Albert. ‘‘ Vergleichende Anatomie des Bronchial-

baumes.’’ Verhandl. d. Anat. Gesellschaft. V1. Versamml. 1892.

Pp. 168-175.

4. Hasse, C. ‘‘ Bemerkungen iiber die Athmung und den Bau

der Lungen und iiber die Form des Brustkorbes bei den Menschen

und Sdugethieren.’’ Archiv. f. Anat. u. Entw. Jahrg. 1893.

Heft 5/6. Pp. 293-307.

Ba tiasse, C. “Weber den Bau der Menschlichen Lungen.”’

Ibid., Jahrg. 1892. Heft 5/6. Pp. 324-345.

6. Aeby, Ch. ‘‘ Der Bronchialbaum des Menschen bei Situs in-

versus.’’ Arch. f. Anat. u. Phys., 1882.

7. Zumstein, J., ‘‘ Ueber den Bronchialbaum des Menschen

und einiger Saugethiere.’’ Sztzsder. d. Ges. s. Beford. d. gesammten

Naturwissenschaften zu Marburg, 1889-92.

148 HUNTING TON.

8. Weber, Max, ‘‘ Ueber das Verhalten des Bronchialbaumes

beim Menschen, bei Situs inversus.’’ Zoology. Anzeiger, 1881, No. 76.

g. Leboucg, H., ‘‘ Ein Fall von ‘Situs inversus’ beim Men-

schen, mit Riicksicht auf die Bronchialarchitectur,’’ Zool. Avnz.,

1851, No: $2:

Io. Ewart, William, ‘‘ The Bronchi and Pulmonary Blood-ves-

sels, their Anatomy and Nomenclature ; with a criticism of Professor

Aeby’s views on the Bronchial Tree of Mammalia and of Man.’’

London, 1889.

PEAPE =X V.

(149 )

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. Sci., XI, May 18, 1898—11.

PLATE XV.

Hystrix cristata—European Porcupine.

Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery. Ventral view.

Columbia University Museum, No. 413.

(150 )

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI. XI. PLATE XV.

A - Trae)

a, ea ess

‘ os

i ave nt

ar a

ak =

PLATE XVI.

Taxidea americana—American Badger.

Young animal. Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary

artery. Ventral view.

Columbia University Museum, No. 1254.

( 152 )

PLATE XVI.

ACA. SCE OAL.

ANNALS N., Y.

hes

ai {1S

zy ye

PLATE XVIE

Taxidea americana—American Badger.

Adult ¢. Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery.

Ventral view.

Columbia University Museum, No. 1255.

(154 )

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI. XI. PLATE XVII.

PLATE XVEti,

Canis familiaris—Dog.

Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery. Ventral view.

Columbia University Museum, No. 1256.

(156 )

PLATE XVIII.

ANNALS N.Y. ACAD: SCI. XI

Tht

PLATE XIX.

Dicotyles torquatus—Collared Peccary.

Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery. Ventral view.

Columbia University Museum, No. 1258.

(158 )

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI.. XI. PLATE, XIX. .

ul Ss. J

BO MAU eu ct ueuigesctcer,

PEATE, Xe

Myrmecophaga jubata—Great Ant-Eater.

Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery. Ventral view.

Columbia University Museum, No. 479.

( 160 )

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI. Al. ~ PLATE XA.

PLATE XXI.

Auchenia glama-pacos—Llama-Alpaca.

Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery. Ventral view.

Columbia University Museum, No. 585.

(162 )

BNNALS WN. ¥. ACAD. Scr. XI. PLATE XXI.

PLATE XXIL

Cebus capucinus—Capuchin monkey.

Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery. Ventral view.

Columbia University Museum, No. 488.

( 164 )

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI. XI. PLATE XXII.

N.Y. Acap. Scr., XI, July 29, 1898—r12.

oT ic a A a . .

PLATE -XXi0.

Cebus capucinus—Capuchin monkey.

Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery. Dorsal view.

Columbia University Museum, No. 488.

( 166 )

ENNAUS Ne YrACAD: SCI. XI. RATE: OE Tf,

aS tat) a 4)

may : %

PLATE: XXIV:

Cebus niger—Capuchin monkey.

Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery. Dorsal view.

Columbia University Museum, No. 484.

(168 )

AINNALS N.Y. ACAD: SCI. x1. PLATE XXIV.

= ri t

Pru tT

Persil)

PLATE XXV.,

Cebus niger—Capuchin monkey.

Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery. Ventral view.

Columbia University Museum, No. 484.

(170)

ANNALS’N. Y. ACAD. SCI. XI. PLATE XXV.

pile by AOC VE.

(171 )

PLATE XAViE

Phoca vitulina—Harbor Seal.

Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery. Ventral view.

Columbia University Museum, No. 584.

(172 )

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI. XI. PLATE XXVI.

«yh a

2 &

| ST yyy

PLATE XOOV ie

Schematic series, based on preparations described, showing types

of mammalian bronchial tree and pulmonary artery.

(174)

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI. XI. PLATE XXVII.

Phoca vitulina.

Myrmecophaga jubata.

ee | * PEATE) Xoo ii

Schema showing development of mammalian arterial system.

Guay

ANNALS NYS ACAIN SCI. -XT. PLATE XXVIII.

[ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Scr., XI, No. 9, tp. 177 to 192, July 29, 1898. ]

THE DEBT OF THE WORLD TO PURE SCIENCE.

ANNUAL ADDRESS OF THE RETIRING PRESIDENT,

J. J. STEVENSON.

(Read February 28, 1898.)

Tue fundamental importance of abstruse research receives

too little consideration in our time. The practical side of life

is all-absorbent; the results of research are utilized promptly

and full recognition is awarded to the one who utilizes, while

the investigator is ignored. The student himself is liable to be

regarded as arelic of medieval times, and his unconcern respect-

ing ordinary matters is serviceable to the dramatist and news-

paper witlet in their times of need.

Yet every thoughtful man, far away as his calling may be

from scientific investigation, hesitates to accept such judgment

as accurate. Nota few, engrossed in the strife of the market-

place, are convinced that even from the selfish standpoint of

mere enjoyment less gain is found in amassing fortunes or in

acquiring power over one’s fellows than in the effort to solve

Nature’s problems. Men scoff at philosophical dreamers, but

the scoffing is not according to knowledge. The exigencies of

subjective philosophy brought about the objective philosophy.

Error has led to the right. Alchemy prepared the way for

Chemistry, Astrology for Astronomy, Cosmogony for Geology.

The birth of inductive science was due to the necessities of de-

ductive science, and the greatest development of the former has

come from the trial of hypotheses belonging in the border land

between science and philosophy. |

My effort this evening is to show that discoveries which have

proved all-important in secondary results did not burst forth

full-grown ; that in each case they were, so to say, the crown of

(177)

178 STE RENSOW.

a structure reared painfully and noiselessly by men indifferent to

this world’s affairs, caring little for fame, and even less for wealth.

Facts were gathered, principles were discovered, each falling

into its own place until at last the brilliant crown shone out and

the world thought it saw a miracle.

This done, I shall endeavor to draw a moral which it is hoped

will be found worthy of consideration.

The heavenly bodies were objects of adoration from the earliest

antiquity ; they were guides to caravans on the desert as well as

to mariners far from land ; they marked the beginning of seasons

or, as in Egypt, the limits of vast periods embracing many hun-

dreds of years. Maps were made thousands of years ago

showing their positions, the path of the sun was determined

rudely, the influence of the sun and moon upon the earth was

recognized in some degree and their influence upon man was in-

ferred. Beyond these matters man with unaided vision and

with knowledge only of elementary mathematics could not go.

Mathematical investigations by Arabian students prepared the

means by which, after Europe’s revival of learning, one without

wealth gave a new life to astronomy. Copernicus, early trained

in mathematics, during the last thirty years of his life spent the

hours stolen from his work us a clerk and charity physician in

mathematical and astronomical studies, which led him to reject

the complex Ptolemaic system and to accept in modified form

that bearing the name of Pythagoras. Tycho Brahe followed.

A mere star-gazer at first, he became an earnest student, im-

proved the instruments employed, and finally secured recogni-

tion from his sovereign. For twenty-five years he sought facts,

disregarding none, but seldom recognizing economic importance

in any. His associate, Kepler, profiting by his training under

Brahe, carried the work far beyond that of his predecessors—

and this in spite of disease, domestic sorrows and only too fre-

quent experience of abject poverty. He divested the Coper-

nicus hypothethis of many crudities and discovered the laws

which have been utilized by astronomers in all phases of their

work. He ascertained the causes of the tides; with the aid of

the newly invented telescope made studies of eclipses and oc-

ANNUAL ADDRESS. 179

cultations, and just missed discovering the law of gravitation.

He laid the foundation for practical application of astronomy to

every-day life.

In the eighteenth century astronomy was recognized by gov-

ernments as no longer of merely curious interest and its students

received abundant aid. The improvement of the telescope, the

discovery of the law of gravitation and the invention of logarithms

had made possible the notable advance marking the close of the

seventeenth century. The increasing requirements of accuracy

led to exactness in the manufacture of instruments, to calculation

and recalculation of tables, to long expeditions for testing methods

as well as conclusions, until finally the suggestions of Coperni-

cus, the physician, and of Kepler, the ill-fed invalid, became fact,

and astronomical results were utilized to the advantage of man-

kind. The voyager onthe ocean, the agriculturist on land, reap

benefits from the accumulated observations of three centuries,

though they know nothing of the principles or of the laborers

by whom the principles were discovered. The regulation of

chronometers as well as the fixing of boundary lines between

great nations are determined by methods due to slow accumu-

lation of facts, slower development in analysis and calculation,

and even slower improvement in instruments.

Galvani’s observation that frogs’ legs twitch when near a

friction machine in operation led him to test the effect of atmos-

pheric electricity upon them. The instant action brought about

the discovery that it was due, not to atmospheric influence, but

to a current produced by contact of a copper hook with an iron

rail. Volta pursued the investigation and constructed the pile

which bears his name. With this, modified, Davy, in 1807,

decomposed potash and soda, thereby isolating potassium and

sodium. This experiment, repeated successfully by other

chemists, was the precursor of many independent investigations

which directed to many lines of research, each increasing in in-

terest as it was followed. ,

Volta’s crown of cups expanded into the clumsy trough bat-

teries which were finally displaced in 1836 by Daniel’s constant

battery, using two fluids, one of which was cupric sulphate. De

180 STEVENSON.

la Rue observed that as the sulphate was reduced, the copper

was deposited on the surface of the outer vessel and copied ac-

curately all markings on that surface. Within two or three

years Jacobi and Spencer made the practical application of this

observation by reproducing engravings and medals. Thus was

born the science of electro-metallurgy. At first mere curiosities

were made, then electro-plating in a wider way, the electrotype,

the utilization of copper to protect more easily destructible

metals, the preparation of articles for ornament and utility by

covering baser metals with copper or silver or gold; while now

the development of electro-generators has led to wide applica-

tions in the reduction of metals and to the saving of materials

which otherwise would go to waste.

Oersted in 1819-20, puzzling over the possible relations of

voltaic electricity to magnetism, noticed that a conductor carry-

ing an electrical current becomes itself a magnet and deflects

the needle. Sturgeon, working along these lines, found that

soft iron enclosed in a coil, through which a current passes be-

comes magnetic, but loses the power when the current ceases.

This opened the way for our own Henry’s all-important dis-

covery of the reciprocating electro-magnets and the vibrating

armature—the essential parts of the magnetic telegraph. Henry

actually constructed a telegraph in 1832, winding the wires

around his class-room in Albany and using a bell to record the

making and breaking signals. Here, as he fully recognized,

was everything but a simple device for receiving signals.

Several years later, Professor Morse, dreaming night and day

of the telegraph, was experimenting with Moll’s electro-magnet

and finding only discouragement. His colleague, Professor Gale,

advised him to discard the even then antiquated apparatus and

to utilize the results given in Henry’s discussion. At once the

condition was changed and soon the ingenious recording instru-

ment bearing Morse’s name was constructed. Henry’s scien-

tific discoveries were transmuted by the inventor’s ingenuity into

substantial glory for Morse, and proved a source of inconceiv-

able advantage to the whole civilized world. Steinhal’s dis-

covery that the earth can be utilized for the return current com-

ANNUAL ADDRESS. 181

pleted the series of fundamental discoveries, and since that time

everything has been elaboration.

Oersted’s discovery respecting the influence of an electric cur-

rent closely followed by that of Arago in the same direction

opened the way for Faraday’s complete discovery of induction,

which underlies the construction of the dynamo. This ascer-

tained, the province of the inventor was well defined, to con-

jure some mechanical appliance whereby the principle might be

utilized. But here, as elsewhere, the work of discovery and that

of invention went on almost pari passu ; the results of each in-

creased those of the other. The distance from the Clark and

Page machines of the middle ’30’s, with their cumbrous horse-

shoe magnets and disproportionate expenditure of power, to the

Siemens machine of the ’50’s was long, but it was no leap. In

like manner, slow steps marked progress thence to the Gramme

machine, in which one finds the outgrowth of many years of labor

by many men, both investigators and inventors. In 1870, forty

years after Faraday’s announcement of the basal principle, the

stage was reached whence progress could be rapid. Since that

time the dynamo has been brought to such stage of efficiency that

the electro-motor seems likely to displace not merely the steam

engine, but also other agencies in direct application of force.

The horse is passing away and the trolley road runs along the

country highway ; the longer railways are considering the wis-

dom of changing their power ; cities are lighted brilliantly where

formerly the gloom invited highwaymen to ply their trade ; and

even the kitchen is invaded by new methods of heating.

Long ago it was known that if the refining of pig iron be

stopped just before the tendency to solidify became pronounced

the wrought ironis more durable than that obtained in the com-

pleted process. This imperfectly refined metal was made

frequently, though unintentionally and ignorantly. A short

railroad in southwest Pennsylvania was laid in the middle 60's

with iron rails of light weight. A rail’s life in those days rarely

exceeded five years; yet some of those light rails were in ex-

cellent condition almost fifteen years afterwards, though they had

carried a heavy coke traffic for several years. But this process

ANNALS N, Y. Acap. Scr., XI, July 29, 1898—13.

182 STEVENSON.

was uncertain, and the best puddlers could never tell when to

stop the process in order to obtain the desired grade.

When a modification of this refining process was attempted

on a grand scale almost contemporaneously by Martien, in this

country, and Bessemer, in England, the same uncertainty of

product was encountered—sometimes the process was checked

too soon, at others pushed too far. Here the inventor came to

a halt. He could use only what was known and endeavor to im-

prove methods of application. Under such conditions the Besse-

mer process was apparently a hopeless failure. Another, however,

utilized the hitherto ignored work of the closet investigator.

The influence of manganese in counteracting the effects of cer-

tain injurious substances and its relation to carbon when pres-

ent in pig iron were understood as matters of scientific interest.

Mushet recognized the bearing of these facts and utilized them in

changing the process. His method proved successful, but with

thorough scientific forgetfulness of the main chance, he neg-

lected to pay some petty fees at the Patent Office and so reaped

neither profit nor popular glory for his work.

The Mushet process having proved the possibility of immedi-

ate and certain conversion, the genius of the inventor found full

scope. The change in form and size of the converter, the re-

movable base, the use of trunnions and other details, largely

due to the American, Holley, so increased the output and re-

duced the cost that Bessemer steel soon displaced iron and the

world passed from the age of iron into the age of steel.

Architectural methods have been revolutionized. Buildings,

ten stories high, are commonplace ; those of twenty no longer

excite comment, and one of thirty arouses no more than a pass-

ing pleasantry respecting possibilities at the top. Such build-

ings were almost impossible a score of years ago, and the weight

made the cost prohibitive. The increased use of steel in con-

struction seems likely to preserve our forests from disappear-

ance.

In other directions the gain through this process has been

more important. The costly, short-lived iron rail has disap-

peared and the durable steel rail has taken its place. Under the

ANNUAL ADDRESS. 183

moderate conditions of twenty-five years ago iron rails scarcely

lasted more than five years ; in addition the metal was soft, the

limit of load was reached quickly, and freight rates, though

high, were none too profitable.

But all changed with the advent of steel rails as made by the

American process. Application of abstruse laws discovered by

men unknown to popular fame enabled inventors to improve

methods and to cheapen manufacture until the first cost of steel

rails was less than that of iron. The durability of the new rails

and their resistance to load justified increased expenditure in

other directions to secure permanently good condition of the

road bed. Just here, our fellow member, Mr. P. H. Dudley,

made his contribution, whose importance can hardly be over-

estimated. With his ingenious recording apparatus it is easy to

discover defects in the roadway and to ascertain their nature,

thus making it possible to devise means for their correction and

for preventing their recurrence. The information obtained by

use of this apparatus has led him to change the shape and

weight of rails, to modify the type of joints and the methods of

ballasting, so that now a roadbed should remain in good con-

dition and even improve during years of hard use.

But the advantages have not inured wholly to the railroad

companies. It is true that the cost of maintenance has been re-

duced greatly ; that locomotives have been made heavier and more

powerful ; that freight cars carry three to four times as much as

they did twenty-five years ago, so that the whole cost of opera-

tion is very much less than formerly. But where the carrier has

gained one dollar the consumer and shipper have gained hun-

dreds of dollars. Grain and flour can be brought from Chicago

to the seaboard as cheaply by rail as by water; the farmer in

Dakota raises wheat for shipment to Europe; coal mined in

West Virginia can be sold on the docks of New York ata profit

for less than half the freight rate of twenty-five years ago. Our

internal commercial relations have been changed and the revo-

lution is still incomplete. The influence of the Holley-Mushet-

Bessemer process upon civilization is hardly inferior to that of

the electric telegraph.

184 STEVENSON.

Sixty years ago an obscure German chemist obtained an oily

liquid from coal-tar oil, which gave a beautiful tint with calcium

chloride ; five years later another separated a similar liquid from

a derivative of coal-tar oil. Still later, Hofmann, then a stu-

dent in Liebig’s laboratory, investigated these substances and

proved their identity with an oil obtained long before by Zinin,.

from indigo, and applied to them all Zinin’s term, Anilin.

The substance was curiously interesting and Hofmann worked.

out its reactions, discovering that with many materials it gives.

brilliant colors. The practical application of these discoveries.

was not long delayed, for Perkins made it in 1856. The mar-

velous dyes, beginning with Magenta and Solferino, have be-

come familiar to all. The anilin colors, especially the reds,

greens and blues, are among the most beautiful known. They

have given rise to new industries and have expanded old ones.

Their usefulness has led to deeper studies of coal-tar products,.

to which is due the discovery of such substances as antipyrin,.

phenacetin, ichthyol and saccharin, which have proved so im-

portant in medicine.

One is tempted to dwell for a little upon Meteorology, that

border land where physics, chemistry and geology meet, and to

speak of the Signal Service system, the outgrowth of studies by

an obscure school teacher in Philadelphia, but the danger of

trespassing too far upon your endurance makes proper only

this passing reference.

While men of wealth and leisure wasted their energies in lit-

erary and philosophical discussions respecting the nature and

origin of things, William Smith, earning a living as a land sur-

veyor, plodded over England, anxious only to learn, in no haste

to explain. His work was done honestly and slowly; when

finished as far as was possible with his means, it had been done

so well that its publication checked theorizing and brought men

back to study. His geological map of England was the basis:

upon which the British Survey began preparation of the detailed

sheets, showing Britain’s mineral resources.

In our country Vanuxem and Morton early studied the New

Jersey Cretaceous and Eocene, containing vast beds of marl.

ANNUAL ADDRESS. 185

Scientific interest was aroused, and eventually a geological sur-

vey of the State was ordered by the Legislature. The appro-

priation was insignificant, and many of the legislators voted for

it, hoping that some economic discovery might be made to jus-

tify their course in squandering the people’s money. Yet there

were lingering doubts in their minds and some found more than

lingering doubts in the minds of their constituents. But when

the marls were proved to contain materials which the chemist,

Liebig, had shown to be all-important for plants, the conditions

were changed and criticism ceased. The dismal sands of eastern

New Jersey, affording only a scanty living for pines and grasses,

were converted by application of the marl into gardens of un-

surpassed fertility. Vanuxem’s study of the stratigraphy and

Morton’s study of the fossils had made clear the distribution of

marls and the survey scattered the information broadcast.

Morton and Conrad, with others scarcely less devoted, labored

in season and out of season to systematize the study of fossil

animals. There were not wanting educated men who wondered

why students of such undoubted ability wasted themselves in

trifling employment instead of doing something worthy of them-

selves so as to acquire money and fame. Much nearer to our

own time, there were wise legislators who questioned the wis-

dom of ‘‘ wasting money on pictures of clams and salamanders,”

though the same men appreciated the geologist who could tell

them the depth of a coal bed below the surface. But the lead

diggers of Illinois and Iowa long ago learned the use of pale-

ontology, forthe “lead fossil’? was their guide in prospecting.

The importance and practical application of this science, so

largely the outgrowth of unappreciated toil in this country as

well as in Europe, is told best in Professor Hall’s reply to a pat-

ronizing politician’s query, “ And what are your old fossils

good for?” ‘Forthis. Take me blindfolded in a balloon;

drop me where you will ; if I can find some fossils, I'll tell you

in ten minutes for what mineral you may look and for what

mineral you need not look.”’

Many regard Botany as a pleasing study, well fitted for women

and dilletanti, but hardly deserving attention by strong men.

186 SLEVENSOL.

Those who speak thus only exercise the prerogative of igno-

rance, which is to despise that which one is too old or too lazy

to learn. The botanist’s work is not complete when the care-

fully gathered specimen has been placed in the herbarium with.

its proper label. That is but the beginning, for he seeks the

relation of plantsinall phases. In seeking these he discovers facts

which often prove to be of cardinal importance. The rust which

destroys wheat in the last stage of ripening, the disgusting fun-

gus which blasts Indian corn, the poisonous ergot in rye, the

blight of the pear and other fruits fall as much within the bot-

anist’s study as do the flowers of the garden or the sequoias of

the Sierra. Not a few of the plant diseases which have threat-

ened famine or disaster have been studied by botanists, unknown

to the world, whose explanations have led to palliation or cure.

The ichthyologist, studying the habit of fishes, discovered

characteristics which promptly commended themselves to men

of practical bent. The important industry of artificial fertiliza-

tion and the transportation of fish eggs, which has enabled man.

to restock exhausted localities and to stock new ones, is but the

outgrowth of closet studies which have shown how to utilize

Nature’s superabundant supply.

The entomologist has always been an interesting phenomenon

to a large part of our population. Insects of beauty are attrac-

tive, those of large size are curious, while many of the minuter

forms are efficient in gaining attention. But that men should

devote their lives to the study of unattractive forms is to many

a riddle. Yet entomology yields to no branch of science inthe

importance of its economic bearings. The study of the life

habits of insects, their development, their food, their enemies, a

study involving such minute details as to shut men off from

many of the pleasures of life and to convert them into typical

students, has come to be so fraught with relations to the public

weal that the State Entomologist’s mail has more anxious letters.

than that of any other officer.

Insects are no longer regarded as visitations from an angry

Deity, to be borne in silence and with penitential awe. The in-

timate study of individual groups has taught in many cases how

ANNUAL ADDRESS. 187

to antagonize them. The scale threatened to destroy orange

culture in California ; the Colorado beetle seemed likely to ruin

one of our important food crops ; minute aphides terrified raisers

of fruit and cane in the Sandwich Islands. But the scale is no

longer a frightful burden in Califarnia; the potato bug is now

only an annoyance, and the introduction of lady birds swept

aphides from the Sandwich Islands. The gypsy moth, be-

lieved for more than a hundred years to be a special judg-

ment, is no longer thought of as more than a very expensive

nuisance. The curculio, the locust, the weevil, the chinch bug

and others have been subjected to detailed investigation. In

almost all cases methods have been devised whereby the ravages

have been diminished. Even the borers which endangered some

of the most important timber species are now understood and

the possibility of their extermination has been changed into

probability.

Having begun with the ‘infinitely great,’’ we may close this

summary with a reference to the “infinitely small.” The study

of fermentation processes was attractive to chemists and natural-

ists, each claiming ownership of the agencies. Pasteur, with a

patience almost incredible, revised the work of his predecessors

and supplemented it with original investigations, proving that a

very great part of changesin organic substances exposed to the

atmosphere are due primarily to the influence of low animals or

plants whose germs exist in the atmosphere.

One may doubt whether Pasteur had any conception of the

possibilities hidden in his determination of the matters at issue.

The canning of meats and vegetables is no longer attended with

uncertainty, and scurvy is no longer the bane of explorers ;

pork, which has supplied material for the building of railroads,

the digging of canals, the construction of ships, can be eaten

without fear. Flavorless butter can be rendered delicious by

introduction of the proper bacteria ; sterilized milk saves the

lives of many children; some of the most destructive plagues

are understood and the antidotes are prepared by the culture of

antagonistic germs ; antiseptic treatment has robbed surgery of

half its terrors and has rendered almost commonplace opera-

188 STEVENSON.

tions which less than two decades ago were regarded as _ justifi-

able only as a last resort. The practice of medicine has been

advanced by outgrowths of Pasteur’s work almost as much as

it was by Liebig’s chemical investigations more than half a cen-

tury ago.

In this review, the familiar has been chosen for illustration in

preference to the wonderful, that your attention might not be

diverted from the main issue, that the foundation of industrial

advance was laid by workers in pure science, for the most part

ignorant of utility and caring little about it. There is here no

disparagement of the inventor; without his perception of the

practical and his powers of combination the world would have

reaped little benefit from the student’s researches. But the in-

vestigator takes the first step and makes the inventor possible.

Thereafter the inventor’s work aids the investigator in making

new discoveries to be utilized in their turn.

Investigation, as such, rarely receives proper recognition. — It

is usually regarded as quite a secondary affair in which scientific

men find their recreation. If a geologist spends his summer

vacation in an effort to solve some perplexing structural prob-

lem he finds on his return congratulations because of his glori-

ous outing; the astronomer, the physicist and the chemist are

all objects of semi-envious regard because they are able to spend

their leisure hours in congenial amusements ; while the natural-

ist, enduring all kinds of privation, is not looked upon asa

laborer because of the physical enjoyment which most good

people think his work must bring.

It is true that investigation, properly so-called, is made sec-

ondary, but this because of necessity. Scientific men in gov-

ernment service are hampered constantly by the demand for im-

mediately useful results. Detailed investigation is interrupted

because matters apparently more important must be considered.

The conditions are even more unfavorable in most of our col-

leges and none too favorable in our greater universities. The

“literary leisure’? supposed to belong to college professors does

not fall to the lot of teachers of science, and very little of it can

be discovered by college instructors in any department. The

ANNUAL ADDRESS. 189

intense competition among our institutions requires that profes-

sors be magnetic teachers, thorough scholars, active in social

work, and given to frequent publication, that being prominent

they may be living advertisements of the institution. How

much time, opportunity or energy remains for patient investiga-

tion some may be able to imagine.

The misconception respecting the relative importance of in-

vestigation is increased by the failure of even well-educated men

to appreciate the changed conditions in science. The ordinary

notion of scientific ability is expressed in the popular saying that

a competent surgeon can saw a bone with a butcher knife and

carve a muscle with a handsaw. Once, indeed, the physicist

needed little aside from a spirit lamp, test tubes and some plati-

num wire or foil; low power microscopes, small reflecting tele-

scopes, rude balances and home-made apparatus certainly did

wonderful service in their day ; there was a time when the finder

of a mineral or fossil felt justified in regarding it as new and in

describing it as such, when a psychologist needed only his own

great self as a basis for broad conclusions respecting all man-

kind. All of that belonged to the infancy of science, when

little was known and any observation was liable to be a discov-

ery, when a Humboldt, an Arago or an Agassiz was possible.

But all is changed ; workers are multiplied in every land ; study

in every direction is specialized ; men have ceased the mere gath-

ering of facts and have turned to the determination of relations.

Long years of preparation are needed to fit one to begin investi-

gation ; familiarity with several languages is demanded ; great

libraries are necessary for constant reference, and costly apparatus

is essential even for preliminary examination. Where tens of

dollars once supplied the equipment in any branch of science,

hundreds, yes thousands, of dollars are required now.

Failure to appreciate the changed conditions induces neglect

to render proper assistance. As matters now stand, even the

wealthiest of our educational institutions cannot be expected to

carry the whole burden, for endowments are insufficient to meet

the too rapidly increasing demand for wider range of instruction.

It is unjust to expect that men, weighted more and more by the

190 STEVENSON.

duties of science teaching, involving too often much physical

labor, from which teachers of other subjects are happily free,

should conduct investigations at their own expense and in hours.

devoted by others to relaxation. Even were the pecuniary cost

comparatively small, to impose that would be unjust, for, with

few exceptions, the results are given to the world without com-

pensation. Scientific men are accustomed to regard patents.

much as regular physicians regard advertising.

America owes much to closet students as well as to educated

inventors who have been trained in scientific modes of thought.

The extraordinary development of our material resources—our

manufacturing, mining and transporting interests—shows that

the strengthening of our educational institutions on the scientific

side brings actual profit to the community. But most of this.

strengthening is due primarily to the unremunerated toil of men

dependent on the meagre salary of college instructors or gov-

ernment officials in subordinate positions. Their aptitude to fit

others for usefulness, coming only from long training, was ac-

quired in hours stolen from sleep or from time needed for re-

cuperation. But the labors of such men have been so fruitful

in results that we can no longer depend on the surplus energy

of scientific men, unless we consent to remain stationary. If

the rising generation is to make the most of our country’s op-

portunities it must be educated by men who are not compelled.

to acquire aptness at the cost of vitality. The proper relation of

teaching labor to investigation labor should be recognized, and

investigation, rather than social, religious or political activity,

should be a part of the duty assigned to college instructors.

Our universities and scientific societies ought to have en-

dowments specifically for aid in research. ‘The fruits of investi-

gations due to Smithson’s bequest have multiplied his estate

hundreds of times over to the world’s advantage. He said well

that his name would be remembered long after the names and

memory of the Percy and Northumberland families had passed

away. Hodgson’s bequest to the Smithsonian is still too re-

cent to have borne much fruit, but men already wonder at the

fruitfulness of a field supposed to be well explored. Nobel

ANNUAL ADDRESS. 191

knew how to supply the results of science ; utilizing the chem-

ist’s results, he applied nitro-glycerine to industrial uses ; simi-

larly, he developed the petroleum industry of Russia, and, like

that of our American petroleum manufacturers, his influence was

felt in many other industries of his own land and of the Conti-

nent. At his death he bequeathed millions of dollars to the

Swedish Academy of Science, that the income might be ex-

pended in encouraging pure research. Smithson, Hodgson and

Nobel have marked out a path which should be crowded with

Americans.

The endowment of research is demanded now as never be-

fore. The development of technical education, the intellectual

training of men to fit them for positions formerly held by mere

tyros, has changed the material conditions in America. The

surveyor has disappeared ; none buta civil engineer is trusted to

lay out even town lots ;the founder at an iron furnace is no

longer merely a graduate of the casting-house—he must be a

graduate in metallurgy ; the manufacturer of paints cannot en-

trust his factory to any but a chemist of recognized standing ;

no graduate from the pickis placed in charge of mines—a min-

ing engineer alone can gain confidence ; and so everywhere.

With the will to utilize the results of science there has come an

intensity of competition in which victory belongs only to the

best equipped. The profit awaiting successful inventors is greater

than ever and the anxious readiness to supply scientific dis-

coveries is shown by the daily records. The Roentgen rays

were seized at once and efforts made to find profitable applica-

tion ; the properties of zirconia and other earths interested in-

ventors as soon as they were announced ; the possibility of tele-

graphing without wire incited inventors everywhere as soon as

the principle was announced.

Nature’s secrets are still unknown and the field of investiga-

tion is as broad as ever. We are only on the threshold of dis-

covery, and the coming century will disclose wonders far be-

yond any yet disclosed. The atmosphere, studied by hundreds

of chemists and physicists for a full century, proved for Ray-

leigh and Ramsay an unexplored field within this decade. We

192 STEVENSON.

know nothing yet. We have gathered a few large pebbles from

the shore, but the mass of sands is yet to be explored.

And now the moral has been drawn. The pointing is simple.

If America, which, more than other nations, has profited by

science, is to retain her place Americans must encourage, even

urge, research, must strengthen her scientific societies and her

universities, that under the new and more complicated conditions

her scientific men and her inventors may place and keep her in

the front rank of nations.

NEw YORK UNIVERSITY,

February, 1898.

fAnnats N. Y. Acap. Sct., XI, No. 10, pp. 193 to 217, July 29, 1898. ]

DESCRIPTION OF SOME MARINE NEMERTEANS

OF PUGET SOUND AND ALASKA.

B. B. GRIFFIN.

(Read March 14, 18c8.)

BRADNEY BEVERLEY GRIFFIN died of pneumonia on March

26th—less than a fortnight after the present paper was read be-

fore the Academy. The editor of the ANNALS has now sent me

the proof for revision and has arranged that a brief notice of his

life and work should be inserted as its preface.

Mr. Griffin came rightfully by his deep interest in science, for

his forefathers on both sides had been prominent in the learned

professions, that of medicine especially. His father, Dr. Bradney

Griffin, although dying young, was a well-known practitioner in

New York. Mr. Griffin's mother is of the Hollister family : his

paternal grandmother was a du Barriere, one of whom together

with other nobles emigrated to this country during the French

Revolution.

Mr. Griffin received his first degree in 1894, graduating with

highest honors, at the College of the City of New York. He

there evinced a remarkable bent for zoology. Continuing his

studies in the graduate Department of Columbia University he

would have taken the Degree of Doctor of Philosophy at the

present Commencement. He had held the position of Uni-

versity Fellow in Zoology and had taken part for two years in

the summer expeditions to the northwest coast.

(193 )

194 GRIFFIN.

His published writings appear, with one exception, in the

‘Transactions of the Academy. Their results are of permanent

value and have already received marked attention both in this

country and abroad. His mind was mature and none of us

‘knew before his death that he was but twenty-six. His work

showed to all, as memorial notices in foreign journals testify,

that he was an investigator of rare promise; but those who

knew him well can alone understand how much he would have

contributed to zoological knowledge had his life been spared.

I have never known a more perfect example of sacrificing de-

‘votion to a lifes work. He gave his best energy—more than

his health could spare—to zoology for zoology’s sake. Per-

-sonally, he was retiring, asked for nothing and cared for noth-

ing in the way of material advancement. His industry was in-

cessant, and was rarely directed in vain; he was conscientious

even to the least of things; he made it clear to us that his

ideals were the highest and that he did as he believed.

BASHFORD DEAN.

CoLuMBIA UNIVERSITY, July 12, 1898.

PUBLISHED WritTIncs BY MR. GRIFFIN.

’96. The History of the Achromatic Structures in the matu-

ration and fertilization of Thalassema. Zvans. N. Y. Acad. Scz.,

Vol. XV, pp. 163-176, pls 1x1. |

’97 (1) A brief account of the work of collecting in Puget

Sound and on the Pacific coast. (With others.) /dd., Vol.

XVI, pp. 33-43, pl. L :

(2) Notes on the distribution and habits of some Puget Sound

Invertebrates. (With N. R. Harrington.) /dzd., pp. 152-165.

(3) Adaptation of the shell of Placuanomia to that of Saxi-

domus, with remarks on shell adaptation in general. /dzd., pp.

1172:

’98 (1) Description of some marine Nemerteans of Puget

Sound and Alaska. (The present paper.)

(2) The Maturation and Fertilization of Thalassema. A

thesis for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy. Journal of Mor-

phology. (Shortly to appear.)

PUGET SOUND NEMERTEANS. 195

I “INTRODUCTION.

The forms here described were collected by the writer while

a member of the Columbia University expeditions of 1896 and

1897 to Puget Soundand Alaska. During the first of the sum-

mers spent on the Pacific coast about 10-15 different forms

were collected, all from the region about Port Townsend, Wash-

ington. The work of the second summer added about 15 Alas-

kan forms to the collection, besides three additional species

from Puget Sound.

Upon the return the writer lost by shipwreck not only the

Alaskan material, but all the previously prepared sections and

much valuable literature, together with manuscripts including

notes upon the color, form, habits and habitats of the living

animals. The consequent necessity of replacing the literature

and resectioning the entire set of forms has, as may be readily

understood, greatly delayed the publication of the specific de-

scriptions.

The collections were made with the view of accumulating

material for a monograph of the Nemerteans of the Pacific coast

of the United States, and it is hoped that the present brief notice

will be followed by a more extensive work with colored plates.

The special interest attaching to certain of the forms (e. g., Cari-

noma), as well as the general importance of the formal pecu-

liarities of heretofore unexplored regions, will, it is hoped, prove

a sufficient excuse for the publication of the present paper.

The species here described do not represent the entire num-

ber collected, since, in addition to those lost by shipwreck, sev-

eral have been omitted in which the material was either too

poorly preserved or too scanty for adequate determination.

As regards terminology, Montgomery’s term (96) mesen-

chyme will be used to designate that tissue formerly known as

“parenchyme,” ‘“‘body-parenchyme”’ and “gelatinous tissue.”’

The four vascular trunks of the mesonemerteans will be distin-

guished as dorso-lateral and ventro-lateral vessels (=respectively

*‘ Rhynchocolomseitengefasse’’ and ‘“ Seitengefasse ’’ of Burger,

““supra-proboscidian-sheath-vessels’’ and ‘blood vessel’’ of

Oudemans).

196 GRIFFIN.

The writer wishes to express his grateful acknowledgements

to Professor H. P. Johnson, of the University of California, for

his very kind assistance in obtaining southern specimens of

Limplectonema viride Stimpson. He also feels indebted to Mr.

Mutty, of Port Townsend, for his permission to use one of his

buildings as a laboratory, and to Mr. Shaffer for his kind loan ot

collecting appliances.

tL EIS vORIG Ads:

During the years 1857—58 there appeared in the Proceedings

of the Philadelphia Academy a series of preliminary papers by

Dr. William Stimpson, in which he briefly described the inverte-

brates collected upon the North Pacific Exploring Expedition

(1853-56). The collections made by Dr. Stimpson include,

among other groups, thirty-three species of Nemerteans, ob-

tained at points along the coasts of North America and Asia,

though principally from Japan and China.

Stimpson arranged his thirty-three species under seventeen

genera, of which the following ten were new: LDzplopleura,

Teniosoma, Dichilus, Cephalonema, Emplectonema, Diplomma,

Dicelis, Polina, Tatsnoskia and Cosmocephatia.’. One half of

the new genera have now proved synonyms. Thus Dichilus

and Cosmocephaha = Ampliporus (Verrill ’92); Tenosoma =

Eupolia (Burger ’95 (2)); Polina, according to Birger = Eu-

pola, but according to Verrill = Amphiporus. Those of the

other half (viz. Cephalonema, Diplomma, Dicelis and Tatsnoskia)

have not, tothe knowledge of the present writer, been identified

with any of the valid genera of the present day. Their fate must

await further work upon these Japanese and Chinese forms.

Of the remaining seven genera, four (Lemeus, Cerebratulus,

Valencinia and Tetrastemina) were well recognized at the time

Stimpson wrote, and are still valid ; while three (A/eckeha, Poly-

stemma and Serpentaria) are synonyms of Cerebratulus, Amplhi-

porus and Cerebratulus respectively.

Two of the ten new generic terms invented by Stimpson rep-

1 His classification throughout is superficial and based in the main upon trivial

external characters.

PUGEL SGOND NEMERTEANS. 197

resent valid genera, and, as Verrill ('95) has urged, should, by

virtue of priority, supersede those now generally accepted by

European writers. Ayzplectonema is sufficiently well defined, so

that ‘‘ Sicher ergiebt sich trotz der unvollkommenen Diagnosen

dass 49 und 55 mit Aupolia und 52 (Emplectonema) mit Lune-

mertes zusammenfallen.” (Burger ’952). As Lmplectonema long

antedates Lunemertes (Vailant 90), it should stand for this

genus. Similarly Dzplopleura is at once recognized as identical

with Langia (Hubrecht ’79) and has priority.

Owing to loss of plates and material in the great Chicago fire,

Stimpson was unable to publish his detailed descriptions and

colored drawings. The Prodromus, accordingly, together witha

brief paper on Chinese and Japanese forms (1855), represents, to

the knowledge of the present writer, all the published work upon

North Pacific Nemerteans up to date.

Of the species obtained by the present writer, one (£7zplecto-

nema viride Stimpson) was described in the Prodromus ; the other

(Emplectonema violaceum Burger) was described by Burger (96)

from the Chilian Coast, while the remainder do not seem to have

been noticed by either. Among the latter is one form of special

interest in that its genus, which represents a transitional type, has

_ heretofore been represented by two species only, both of which

are very rare. This form wich occurs abundantly in the Puget

Sound region, is a new species of Carinoma. In order, however,

to make clear the relationships and significance of Carinoma, it

will be necessary to briefly trace the historical development of

Nemertean taxonomy.

One of the most servicable taxonomic systems was that pro-

posed by Max Schultze in 1852, which divided the Nemerteans

into the well-known ENnopLa and ANopLa, based upon the re-

respective presence or absence of calcareous stylets in the pro-

boscis. Although this system was generally accepted and

adopted in the older text-books, it finally became evident that

the mere presence or absence of stylets is no certazm indication

of affinity. Thus forms are known whose inner organization in

other respects conforms to the Enoplous type, yet lack the stylets

(¢. ¢., Malacobdella, Pelagonemertes). Moreover, the Anopla

ANNALS N. Y. Acab. Sct., XI, July 30, 1898—14

198 GRIFFIN.

proved a very heterogeneous assemblage, since under this term

forms were included that differ as widely from each other as

they do from the Enopla (e. ¢., Carinella, Cephalothrix, Cerebra-

tulus). These faults were partially removed by Hubrecht (’79)

in the following system :

1. PALZONEMERTINI.

No deep lateral fissure on the side of the head. No stylet in

the proboscis. Mouth behind ganglia.

Carinella, Cephatlothrix,

Pola, Valencinia.

2. SCHIZONEMERTINI.

A deep longitudinal lateral fissure on each side of the head,

from the bottom of which a ciliated duct leads into the posterior

lobe of the ganglion. Lateral nerves between the longitudinal

and inner circular muscular coat of the body wall. Nervous

tissue deeply tinged with hemoglobin. Mouth behind the

ganglia.

Lincus, Borlasia,

Cerebratulis, Langia.

3. HoOPLONEMERTINI.

One or more stylets in the proboscis. Mouth generally sit-

uated before the ganglia. Lateral nerves inside the muscular

coats of the body-wall. No deep longitudinal fissures on each

side of the head.

Drepanophorus, Amphiporus,

Tetrastemma, Prosorhochmus,

Oerstedia, Nemertes.

The above system, the result of a deeper study of the inner

organization of these worms, marked an important advance in

taxonomy. <A single character (presence or absence of stylets)

is here no longer taken as the basis of division, but a group of

characters ; and, moreover, the importance of the number and

PUGET SOUND NEMERTEANS. 199

position of the muscular coats of the body-wall in relation to

the nerve cords commences for the first time to be recognized.

But excellent and serviceable as the Hubrechtian system was,

it still possessed a defect which became more conspicuous with

increase of our knowledge of the comparative anatomy and

embryology. It still associated under the term PALONEMER-

TINI such forms as Carinella, Cephalothrix and Polia ( = Eupolia

Hubrecht ’87), the last named type being more closely related

to the SCHIZONEMERTINI than to Carvinella. ‘The following

sentence from Oudemans (’85) shows how quickly this defect

became obvious with careful comparative study. ‘ Though the

families of the Valenciniide and thé Polide belong to the PaLa&-

ONEMERTEA, they, with respect to their vascular and nephridial

system, already approach the SCHIZONEMERTEA. To avoid con-

fusion, I will here -employ the expression, ‘“ Palzo-type,”’

‘‘Schizo-type’”’ and ‘‘Hoplo-type.” Burger (’90) went even

further, and, after a severe criticism of Hubrecht’s system, pro-

posed a return to the Anopla and Enopla of Max Schultze.

During the next two years, however, Birger (’91 and ’92) elab-

orated and published a new system, which of all those heretofore

proposed seems to come the nearest to expressing the true in-

terrelationship of the main groups of Nemerteans.

Before taking up Burger’s system in detail we must glance

briefly at the phylogenetic theories as influenced by the discov-

ery of Carinoma. All are agreed that the epithelial position of

the nerves in Carinella is a primitive feature. Accordingly the

derivation of the remaining Nemertean orders from Carzzella-like

ancestors involves an inward migration of the nerve-cords. Even

before the discovery of Carzzoma a fairly complete series could

be arranged from Carinella with its epithelial nervous system,

through Cephalothrix with nerve-cords in the longitudinal layer,

to Cerebratulus in which the nerve-cords have apparently migrated

further inward to lie closely appressed (and sometimes indenting)

the inner circular muscle layer, leading finally to the Enoplous

types with the nerves internal to a/ the muscular coats. (Com-

pare figures in Hubrecht ’87.)

In 1875 McIntosh obtained at Southport, England, a spe-

200 GRIFFIN.

cies which he described as Valencinia avmandi n. sp. The

careful description of this form by its discoverer (MacIntosh ’75)

and the able anatomical investigations of Oudemans (’85) made

it clear that Valencinia armandi is not only the representative of

a distinct type (allied to Cephalothrix), but a form in many re-

spects intermediate between Carinella and other Nemerteans.

The special interest centers in the fact that anteriorly the nerve-

cords lie ina similar position to those of Carimella (although

surrounded by a thin layer of longitudinal muscles), while more

posteriorly they break through the outer circular layer and lie

for the rest of their course within the longitudinal layer. Oude-

mans was thus thoroughly justified in creating the new genus

Carinoma for its reception. For twenty years the form remained

the sole representative ofits genus. In 1895 Burger described

the C. patagonica from some very scanty material collected at

Punta Arenas, Patagonia. Of this material he observes: ‘“‘ Uber

ihr Aussehen im Leben fehlen leider Angaben.” In C. pata-

gonica the nerves lie wholly within the longitudinal muscle layer,

so that within the limits of the genus Carizoma we have accom-

plished the theoretically required migration of the nerves through

the circular muscle layer. It now became easy’ to derive the

Enopla directly from Carizella through Carinoma and Cephalo-

thrix,” while the Schizonemertean type (including the Eupolide)

comes off as an independent side branch from an ances-

tor of Carinoma, which retained the nerve-cords outside of the

circular muscles, but lost the inner circular layer and developed

a new longitudinal layer beneath the basal membrane of which

Carinoma armanda shows rudiments.*

These points are all clearly recognized in Burger's taxonomic

system. Carinclla with Carinoma and Hubrechtia constitute the

first and most primitive order PROTONEMERTINI ; Carinoma and

Cephalothrix are ranked as an independent order MESONEMERTINI;

1Cf. Biirger ’95 (2).

2 Carinoma, while more primitive as regards the nerve-cords and presence of

nephridia, seems to have lost the cephalic organs still retained in Cephalothrix ( com-

pare Joubin ’90).

3 Such an ancestor Biirger believes to be realized in Hubrechtia desiderata (Vv.

Kennel).

PUGET SOUND NEMERTEANS. 201

the Enopla constitute the METANEMERTINI, while the remaining

representatives of Hubrecht’s Palgonemertint (viz., the Eupolide)

are grouped with the Sc/isonemertini under the ordinal term

HETERONEMERTINI.

Thus with the establishment of Burger’s system there appears

to vanish the last vestige of artificiality in the ordinal classifica-

tion, and for the first time we have a system that may be called

a natural one.

tLe SPECIAL. DESCRIPTIONS.

PROTONEMERTINI.

1. Carinella sexlineata n. sp.

In form, color and internal anatomy this species very closely

resembles C. superba (Kolliker), being marked by creamy white

lines and annulations disposed upon a

ground color of reddish brown. The

principal difference lies in the pattern of

an 7

the markings, which renders the form “&

the most complicated of the genus.

Near the anterior margin of the head

and well in front of the mouth occurs Fb eee 2

transverse band 1 (Fig. 15, I), which in

the type specimen consisted of a broader Se

dorsal and narrower ventral half meeting

laterally in a sharp posteriorly directed a

angle. From band 1 there extends a

mid-dorsal line the whole length of the

body. A short distance behind the neck'

occurs band 2, which is broad and dis-

tinct, but interrupted laterally whence

proceed caudad two-paired lateral lines.

These extend the whole length of the Fic. 15. Carinella sexlineata

body. A mid-ventral line also com- ™ Sp: I. Lateral. II.

= Dorsal aspect. Drawn

mences from band 2, arising from a , oy

é 3 rom alcoholic specimens.

flecked area involving the lower laterals.

1 Neck — constriction separating head from rest of body.

202 GRIFFIN.

The mouth is situated between bands 1 and 2 and in type speci-

men did not pierce band 2 (difference from C. superba). At inter-

vals much greater than between 1 and 2 occur bands 3, 4 and 5,

with no intermediate annulations. Band 3 is the broadest, its

edges fimbriated, and interrupted between the laterals; 4 and 5

are more sharply outlined, 4 continuous, 5 partially interrupted

at the laterals by the side organs (difference from both C. superba

and C. aunulata, in neither of which do the side organs occur on

a transverse band). The broken mid-ventral line continues

nearly to band 5, where it breaks up into a row of fine dots

which may be sometimes traced along the rest of the body.

From band 5 to posterior extremity of body occur broad unin-

terrupted annulations sometimes double, placed some distance

apart, with one to three finer intervening annulations, which are

interrupted or nearly so at the laterals. The intervals between

these body annulations are nearly equal.

VARIATIONS. It must be noted on behalf of the validity of

this species that the above outlined pattern is in its main features

remarkably constant. The variations, so far as was observed,

involve merely the shade of the ground color, the amount of

flecking, the composition (2. ¢., whether full or broken) and ex-

tension of the lines. The few specimens obtained near Sitka,

Alaska, were darker in color, with much less flecking and

fimbriation of the annulations. Those taken about Puget Sound

showed considerable flecking on the head behind band 1 and

on dorsum, mostly near lines or bands. Moreover, in some

specimens the lines are more continuous, in others more or less

dotted or broken.

In alcohol the worm darkens considerably, but even then the

main pattern can be easily made out. The side-organs then ap-

pear as white circular spots.

INTERNAL ANATOMY. A cephalic gland is absent as in C. sa-

perba. Differs from latter in general absence in region of side

organ of a pronounced dorsal and ventral decussation of the cir-

cular muscles of the body-wall. A fine raphé of connective

tissue is generally present in its place, which may involve a few

muscle-fibers. In one individual sectioned these were so abun-

PUGET SOUND NEMERTEANS. 2.03

dant as to produce a decussation similar to C. superba. The

variation of this structure would appear to show that but little

reliance can be placed upon it for specific determinations. A

layer of longitudinal muscle fibres separates the cesophagus from

the circular muscles of the rhynchoccelom as in C. rubicunda.

Cephalic organs consist of a paired ciliated tube which pene-

trates the epithelium to end blindly next the basal membrane.

Nephridia consist of branching tubules, portions of which bulge

more or less into the lateral vessels. They open at their pos-

terior extremity by a pore above the side organs, z. ¢., in trans-

verse band 5. |

HapsitTat AND DistrisuTion. Dredged in Kilisut Harbor op-

posite Port Townsend, in from 3 to 4 fathoms, also taken under

bark of wharf-piles in its tough hyaline tube, as well as in the

sand between tides. Likewise taken in and about Sitka Harbor,

Alaska.

This worm grows to a great length; some incomplete frag-

ments when fully extended were over a meter in length.

2. Carinella rubra n. sp.

? C. miniata Hubrecht.'

Color in life a uniform bright red. In alcohol the pigment

quickly washes out, leaving the worm a dull gray. The mature

worm reaches an enormous length, some of the smaller indi-

viduals (incomplete) measuring over 140 cms., while the largest

observed must have been at least two meters in length.

INTERNAL ANATOMY. Well developed glands fill the head

(differences from C. polymorpha). Cephalic organs are epithe-

lial pits which do not reach the basal membrane. Dorsal and

ventral decussation of circular muscles absent or very weak.

HABITAT AND DistTRisuTIon. Taken in sand and silt between

tides at Puget Sound (Bremerton), Kilisut Harbor, and Sitka,

Alaska.

1 Biirger (’95) figures a red species (C. miata Hubrecht) which may possi-

bly be identical with this species, but since no sections were obtained its identity

with C, rubra can be but a matter of conjecture. In color, size and form of head

they differ not a little. In form and size C. rudra more nearly resembles C. Ao/y-

morpha.

204 GRIFFIN.

MESONEMERTINI.

3. Carinoma mutabilis n. sp.

Color a pure creamy or milky white, with faint cloudy mot-

tlings in intestinal region, which cease a short distance from the

posterior extremity, leaving the tail region pure white.

Length: and breadth variable, the largest

individuals of the type measured 14 cms.

by 1 mm. in alcohol.

Head hemispherical, narrower than body

and marked off from latter by a slight nar-

rowing or neck. No eyes or caudal cirrus.

INTERNAL ANATOMY. This species ap-

proaches very closely the C. fatagonica

Burger (’95). It appears to differ, however,

in several particulars, especially in size and

; in the disposition of the nephridial tubules.

BIG. NO. Carimomamula TH. Jatter are large and loosely ramified

bilisn.sp. 1. Two in- 5 4

dividuals of type. II. but three or four cross sections of them

variety argidina. Cam- annear in each section and, although some

era lucida from alco- :

Fa EES of the branches are situated close to the

blood vessels, they do not appear to bulge

into them to the extent that they do in C. patagonica. They

open to the exterior by a single-paired excretory pore, the posi-

tion of which varies in different varieties, though always dorsal

to the nerve-cords. Circulatory system in its main features as

in C. patagonica. Ventro-lateral blood vessels thick-walled,

thickness of which steadily increases as nephridial region is

reached. This ‘peculiarity. can be traced throughout site

nephridial region.' Dorso-lateral vessels thin-walled through-

out. Dorsal and ventral nerves anteriorly outside the outer

circular muscle-layer. A double diagonal muscle-layer com-

mences to appear in the anterior cesophageal region.

Inner circular-muscle-layer much thicker anteriorly than in

C. patagonica.

1 Compare similar phenomenon figured by McIntosh (’75 ).

PUGET SOUND NEMERTEAWNS. 205

Just in front of the nephridial region the following changes

occur :

1°. Inner circular-muscle-layer becomes enormously thick-

ened.

2°. Dorsal and ventral nerves commence to break through

the outer circular-muscle-layer and dip down toward the inner

layer.

3°. Lateral nerve cords commence to break away from the

inner side of the outer circular-muscle-layer and sink deeper into

the longitudinal layer.

4°. Diagonal muscles commence to thin out, to disappear

completely a short distance further back.

Proboscis-pore subterminal, cephalic lacunz extend to tip of

head. A cephalic gland is present in type specimen. It con-

sists of deeply staining lobules that hang into the cephalic

lacunz anterior to the proboscis pore.’ Brain, with lacune and

rhynchoccelom in brain region, more or less completely inclosed

in an inner capsule of connective tissue separated from basal

membrane by a thin longitudinal muscle-layer. Mesenchyme

scanty.

Hapitat AND DistrisutTion. In sand between tides and on

piles of wharves, along the west shore of Port Townsend har-

bor, between the wharves of the city and the railroad depot.

Two varieties of this species were taken, which for convenience

of reference will be distinguished by varietal names.

4. Carinoma mutabilis argillina n. var.

General form and color as in type. The entire worm was not

obtained ; the largest fragment measures 15 cms. by 3 mm. in

alcohol, Differs from type in larger size, rather more powerful

muscular development. Excretory pore in cesophageal region

where inner circular-muscle-layer is still thick, and anterior to

cessation of dorso-lateral vessels, 2. ¢., slightly further cephalad

than intype. Mesenchyme rather more extensive, lateral halves

meeting in mid-ventral line behind mouth.

1 Biirger (’95(1) ) makes no reference to a cephalic gland in C. patagonica, and

{’95(2) ) is not quite sure of its presence in C. armandz.

206 GRIFFIN.

Hasirar AND Distrisution. Between tides in hard blue

clay among pholads, not apparently in burrows of latter, but

in surrounding clay, to all appearances excavating burrows of

its own.’ Locality, west of Point Wilson on shore of Strait of

Juan de Fuca.

5. Carinoma mutabilis vasculosa n. var.

Form and color as in type, size intermediate between type

and var. argillina. Mesenchyme most extensive, in cesophageal

region nearly surrounding the very large blood vessels. Ventro-

lateral vessels branch from time to time. Excretory pore at

commencement of visceral region where inner circular-muscles

thin out.

HABITAT AND DISTRIBUTION as in type, except that it was not

taken on piles.

All these varieties build sand-tubes and in mode of life re-

semble somewhat Cerebratulus, though they do not swim nor

readily fragment themselves as do the cerebratulids, and appear

generally more sluggish.

ANALYTICAL KEY TO SPECIES OF CARINOMA.

A.—Nerve cords anteriorly without circular muscle layer ; further

back they break through the latter, and lie wholly within longitudi-

MALIAVORS Mos sot eke kse nmin C. armandi (McIntosh) Oudemans.

B.—Nerve cords wholly within longitudinal layer throughout their

entire course. '

a—Small (3.5 cms.). Brain free in longitudinal muscles of head.

Nephridia bulge far into thin-walled blood vessels. Dorsal and ven-

tral nerves wholly within outer circular-muscles-layer throughout their

CHUTE "COUTSE ALS Jose, taNwad eee tee een tee C. patagonica Biirger.

—Large (14-15 cms.). Brain enclosed in connective tissue cap-

sule. Nephridia do not bulge so far into the thick-walled blood

vessels. Dorsal and ventral nerves anteriorly without outer circular-

muscle-layer ; further back break through same...C. mutabilis Mihi.

1If this be true, the fact is interesting because of the soft-bodied nature of the

animal. The annelid He//a ? is known'to bore in the till( Harrington and Griffin,

’96), but this animal, unlike the Nemertean, has powerful jaws and a firm exo-

skeleton. | Heretofore no Nemertean has been known to bore in so hard a substance

(McIntosh, ’68).

PUGET SOUND NEMERTEANS. 20T

METANENMERTINI.

6. Emplectonema Stimpson, 1857.

1873 Memertes McIntosh (nec Cuvier 1817).

1873 Macronemertes Verrill.

1890 Lunemertes Vaillant.

This genus is defined by Stimpson as follows: ‘‘ Corpus:

longissimum subfiliforme, depressum, proteum. Caput subdis-

cretum, stricturis nullis, fovea longitudinali in utroque margine

antero-laterali. Ocelliplurimi.” Later writers (including McIn-

tosh, Vaillant, and Burger) have added the following anatomical

characters to the definition. Mouth opens into the rhynchodeum;

proboscis very short; rhynchoccelom restricted to anterior

third of body; cerebral organs very small and far in front of

brain ; head gland but rarely reaches to brain.

7. Emplectonema viride Stimpson, 1857.

Stimpson gives the following description of this species in his

Prodromus: ‘Corpus depressum, lineare v. proteum, supra

viride, subtis album. Caput subdiscretum, marginibus albis ;

foveis elongatis bipartitis ; fronte emarginata. Ocellorum acervi

quattuor ; posteriores distincti, rotundati, ocellis confertis ; an-

teriores marginales juxta foveas, occellis sparsis. Long. II

lat. 0.05 poll. Hab. in portu ‘San Francisco’ littoralis inter

lapillos.”

The form here referred to 4. vivide occurs widely distributed

from Puget Sound to Alaska,.and shows no local variations,

the same varieties being found in all localities visited. As a

general rule, however, the specimens from the more northern

latitudes are darker in hue.

Length of largest specimen nearly 1 m., breadth 1-2 mm.,

head spatulate, emarginate in front, not especially marked off

from body, not wider than body.

Three color varieties are common: (1) A. slender and

smaller form, very light olive green, (2) a much darker green

form which shows on head and anterior portion of body, a mid-

208 GRIFFIN.

dorsal longitudinal line, and one transverse band at neck (fig. 17,

(3), a form almost black and not showing the lines that char-

acterize No. 2.

All three varieties agree in the much lighter

ventral portion marked off from darker dor-

(

sum by sharp line of demarkation. Anterior

and lateral margins of head in all three va-

rieties very light almost white.

merous, distributed along side of head, on

each side of demarkation-line between light

margin and dark dorsum. The colors keep

fairly well in alcohol, darkest green, paler,

Fic. 17. Lmplectone-

ma viride Stimpson.

Showing pattern on

head.

palest olive, and even bluish varieties

can be distinguished. Some _ speci-

mens from West Berkeley, California,

became gray in alcohol.

INTERNAL ANATOMY very similar to

E. gracile, Mouth opens into rhyn-

chodeum ; cephalic organs some dis-

tance in front of brain; canals from

cephalic organs run forward to open

ventrally in region of proboscis-pore ;

proboscis-pore’ some distance from tip

of head.

Intestinal caeca do not quite extend

to brain. Central stylet of proboscis

with very long basal portion, two

marginal stylet-pockets are present,

each containing five long curved sty-

lets. Ducts from these marginal

pockets appear to be dilatable prox-

imally (fig. 18). In some specimens

preserved in alcohol the stylet gland

and basal portion of central stylet are

a bluish green in color and contrast

strongly with the adjoining non-pig-

mented portion of the proboscis.

Eyes nu-

Fic. 18. Lwplectonema viride.

Stylet and region of proboscis.

ac.—anterior chamber. cs.—

dd@.—ducts of

bd@.—basal

77S5.—Mar-

Central stylet.

marginal pockets.

dilation of same.

ginal stylets. .—marginal

pockets. 4.—basal portion of

central stylet. —ejacula-

tory duct. sg.—stylet gland.

73. —reservoir.

1 In instances like this where the mouth opens into the rhynchodeum the common

opening (‘‘ gemeinschaftliche Oeffnung ’’ Biirger) will be called proboscis-pore.

PUGET SOUND NEMERTEANS. 209

This species very strikingly resembles 4. gracile Johnston. It

may be distinguished by its narrower head with sharply defined

color patterns and general darker hue of body. .

Hasitat AND DistrisuTion. Taken on piles, on and under

stones at Port Townsend, Washington ; Fort Wrangle and Sitka,

Alaska. The type locality (Stimpson) is the bay of San Fran-

cisco. Its range, as so far determined, is then from San Fran-

cisco to Sitka.

8. Emplectonema violaceum Birger, 1896.

Eunemertes violace Burger.

In life this form secretes an enormous amount of slime in which

it lies coiled upin tangled knots. It was found next to impossi-

ble to straighten it out sufficiently for accurate measurement,

but its length was estimated to be at least 50 cms. Broken

fragments in alcohol measure over 30 cms. Shape extremely

flattened, ribbon-like. Head rounded in front, directly contin-

uous with body. Color varies somewhat, though a fairly con-

stant pattern is presented on dorsum, which is densely flecked

with purple or brown upon a pale yellowish brown ground color.

Ventral portion yellowish white. Eyes numerous.

THE INTERNAL ANATOMY agrees more or less closely with

Burger’s (’96) description. It ‘does not possess a powerfully

developed head gland. The cerebral organs are very small and

lie very far in front of the brain. Many small eyes are present.

The cesophagus opens into the rhynchodeum.”’ Powerfully

developed integumentary glands are present throughout the

body.

HABITAT AND DiIstRiIBUTION. On piles about Port Townsend,

coiled in a tangled mass, and enveloped in its mucus. The

type specimens of Burger were obtained near Calbuco, on the

coast of Chile: Its range is thus quite extensive.

The great amount and tenacity of the slime proves an

obstacle to its proper preservation, as a coagulation of the

slime apparently hinders the thorough penetration of the al-

cohol.

GRIFFIN.

g. Amphiporus imparispinosus n. sp.

Length in alcohol, 40-45 mm. Breadth, 1-2 mm. Color,

white. Head in extension hemispherical, broader than body.

Fic. 19. Amphipor-

us imparispinosus

n. sp.

‘Camera lucida, from

Eyes numerous (23 + on each side), distrib-

uted in two elongated concentric groups along

antero- lateral to lateral margin of head, not ex-

tending behind brain as in Zygonemertes vires-

cens (Verrill) (fig. 19). Body widest anteriorly,

tapering off to a slender posterior extremity.

INTERNAL ANATOMY. Mouth opens into

rhynchodeum. Cephalic gland not prominent.

Cephalic commissure’ above proboscis-pore.

Cephalic organs in front of brain, dorso-lateral

to ventral ganglia, opposite mouth ; the canals

living worm un- d

ane oa of Open ventrally just behind

chloral hydrate proboscis-pore. Nephridia

and compressed commence behind brain

under cover slip. ;

: and open to exterior by

numerous efferent ducts, just dorsal to

nerve-cords. Nephridia cease just behind 2d

or 3d pair of gonads. Intestinal czeca extend

to brain. Apparently no integumentary

glands in body. Rhynchoccelom does not

extend quite to posterior extremity. Central

stylet as long as basal portion, latter con-

stricted in middle (fig. 20). Three marginal-

stylet-pockets, each containing two stylets.

This species is apparently to be distin-

guished from dA. dudius Hubrecht, by its

numerous eyes and paler color, and from

A. Greenmannt Montgomery, by its larger

size, greater number of eyes and distribu-

tion of eyes and color of body.

HABITAT AND DistrisuTion. On piles

and stones, Port Townsend and Sitka.

Fic. 20. Amphiporus im-

paripinosus Nn. sp.

Stylet region of proboscis.

Camera lucida from to-

tal preparation. 2%.

reservoir.

1 By cephalic commissure is here meant that connecting the blood vessels an-

_teriorly.

PUGET SOUND NEMERTEANS. 211

10. Amphiporus formidabilis n. sp.

Length in alcohol 9+ cms. Breadth 2mm. Form and

color as in preceding species except for flesh-colored tinge

anteriorly. Visceral region dull gray. Eyes very numerous

(100-150+), distributed in three groups, one

antero-lateral paired group and one median un-

paired group. The latter is V-shaped and situ-

ated just in front of brain, with the limbs directed

backwards and merging into two gray streaks

that extend along each side for a varying distance

caudad (fig. 22). Fic. 21. Amphipo-

INTERNAL ANATOMY. Mouthopens into rhyn- rus formidadilis.

chodeum. Head densely packed with cells of Free-hand from

cephalic gland. Cephalic commissure just pos- sane si

terior to proboscis-pore. Cephalic organs in front of brain, op-

posite mouth, canals open laterally behind proboscis-pore. In-

testinal czca extend to brain. Nephridia open by numerous

efferent ducts, some of which open dorsally, others laterally.

Integumentary glands abundant in anterior portion of body.

Rhynchoccel extends to end of body.

Central stylet shorter than its basal

portion. Marginal stylet-pockets ar-

ranged in a continuous row around the

central stylet. Their number appears to

be-either 6.=— or £2... Each“¢ontains

two stylets.

In number and arrangement of the

marginal stylet-pockets this form bears

close resemblance to A. spinosissimus

Burger and A. pugnax Hubrecht, but

Fic. 22. Amphiporus for. iffers in numerous anatomical points

midabilis, Camera lu- from A. spinosissimus, especially in the

cida from worm under position of the excretory pores.

ee el by Hapirat AND Distrisution. On piles

drate under cover-slip.

of wharves, and on stones and rocks

along with A. zmparispinosus and Emplectonema viride. Puget

Sound and Alaska.

ial bb GRIFFIN.

11. Amphiporus brunneus n. sp.

Length in alcohol of largest individual 3.3 cms. Breadth 5

mms. Color (in life) dark brown or smoky black on dorsum,

greenish or yellowish white ventrally. On each side of neck is

a pale angular spot.

INTERNAL ANATOMY. Pro-

boscis - pore subterminal.

Cephalic gland moderately

developed. Cephalic organ

considerably in front of brain.

Cephalic canals open oppo-

site mouth. Intestinal caeca

extend almost to brain. An-

terior portion of proboscis

| very long; in ordinary pro-

Fic. 23. <Amphiporus formidabilis n. sp. trusion the stylet-region re-

Stylet region of proboscis. The dotted mains within the everted an-

pockets and stylets filled in diagrammatic- terior chamber. Basal por-

ally, the rest from camera lucida drawing.

tion of central stylet long,

two marginal pockets each containing two (or three ?) stylets.'

Hapitat AND Distripution. On piles and rocks about Port

Townsend.

12. Amphiporus angulatus (Fabr.) Verrill ?

I have provisionally referred to this a

species a form that occurs (though not

very abundantly) under stones near low-

est low water mark in Sitka, Harbor,

Alaska. But two alcoholic specimens

are now available for description.” It =

readily contracts into a thick oblong PG. 2h oe UI a

neus. Central stylet. Cam-

mass. era lucida.

1 Rhynchoccel surrounded by a thin circular muscle sheath, within which is a

layer of longitudinal muscles.

2 Owing to these two specimens having been collected too late to be packed with

the rest of the Alaska material, they were placed in the writer’s microscope case,

and were therefore saved when the ship went down.

PUGET SOUND NEMERTEAWNS. 213

Length in alcohol, 4-7 cms. Breadth, 5-6 mms. Color

(in life) a reddish purple on dorsum, white ventrally. Head

with prominent marginal white spots at neck.

INTERNAL ANATOMY. Cephalic gland fairly well developed ;

proboscis-pore sub-terminal and anterior to cephalic commis-

sure. Cephalic canals enter ventrally and run caudad for some

distance in the epithelium. In the region of the mouth they

break through the circular muscles to reach the cephalic

organs.’ :

Cephalic organs large, considerably in front of brain. Mouth

opens into rhynchodeum. Dorsal commissure fairly large. In-

testinal czca short, do not extend near to brain. Anteriorly

the integumentary glands are very abundant ventrally, sparsely

distributed dorsally. Rhynchoccel surrounded by thin sheath

of outer circular and inner longitudinal muscles. In visceral

region gonidial pockets are numerous; a single section shows

several, distributed dorsally and laterally to the intestine.

HABITAT AND DistrisuTion. Under stones near lowest low

water mark. Sitka Harbor and Redout Bay, Alaska.

Besides A.-drunneus there are several other forms that bear a

more or less general resemblance to A. angzulatus, and are to be

classed among the boreal species. Stimpson’s Cosmocephala

Beringianus and C. /aponicus are both believed by Verrill (’92)

to be varieties of A. angulatus. At Sitkathe present writer ob-

tained three quite similar forms (sizes quite different) which seem

to approach A. angulatus. When studied under a lens they

were seen to possess two paired white lines between which, in

two of the forms, the cervical white patches were situated, so

characteristic of A. angulatus. In the third these angular

patches seem to have been absent or represented by a faint

paling of the ground color. Each of the three, with A. angu-

/atus seemed to characterize a particular zone of the beach be-

tween high and low water mark.

1 The one specimen sectioned showed an interesting abnormality in the cephalic

canal and organ of one side (left?). Onthis side the cephalic organ lay much

further caudad so as to be opposite to the ventral commissure, while its canal forked in

the epithelium, one branch opening dorsally, the other more ventrally. The cephalic

organ of the right side lay considerably in front of brain.

ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sci., XI, August 13, 1898—15.

214 GRIFFIN.

13. Amphiporus drepanophoroides n. sp.

Color red above, white below. Length probably not over

4-5 cms. Form short and stout. Eyes numerous in rows

along antero-lateral margin of head.

INTERNAL ANATOMY. Proboscis-pore terminal. Cephalic

gland prominent. Integumentary glands also prominent in

head, all situated ventrally and ventro-laterally. Further back

they commence to thin out (at first in the mid-ventral line) and

disappear completely a short distance behind brain. Mouth

opens into rhynchodeum. Cephalic organs large, anterior por-

tion opposite ventral commissure, closely pressed against brain,

further back they become pushed in between dorsal and ventral

ganglia and extend back of dorsal ganglia. Their canals open

laterally in front of ventral commissure. Differs from all the

preceding Amphiporids in the smallness of the rhynchoccel,

and in having the latter enclosed in a thick muscular sheath in

which longitudinal and circular muscles are interwoven. No

forwardly extending intestinal czca. Circular muscle-layer

quite thick.

HETERONEMERTINI.

14. Lineus striatus n. sp.

Owing to loss of all color notes and drawings by shipwreck,

no detailed description can be here given of its appearance dur-

ing life.

Color brownish red on dorsum, sharply marked off laterally

from the much lighter ventral portion. Dorsum marked by

numerous creamy white transverse bands which cease at the de-

markation-line between the dorsal and ventral coloring. Tip of

head brilliant red. Length probably not over 4 cms.

This form seems from the above quite similar to Wiicrura fascio-

fata, yet it is at most but one-half the size of the latter, much

flatter, the pattern much sharper and constant, and in all speci-

mens obtained no cirrus was present. For these reasons it must .

at present be referred to Lencus.

PUGET SOUND NEMERTEANS. 215

INTERNAL Anatomy. Nephridial system with numerous

efferent ducts opening dorsally to the nerve cords. In one sec-

tion two ducts occurred, one slightly dorsal to the other.

HABITAT AND DistrRipuTION. Under stones and in sand be-

tween tides, Kilisut Harbor, and Bremerton. Not taken in

Alaska.

15. Lineus sp. —.

This species, which appears to be new, was found among a

mass of hydroids that had been preserved in formalin. The

single specimen measured 5.2 cms. by 5 mms. ; it was an entire

worm. Color smoky black with greenish tinge on dorsum,

gray-brown ventrally.

INTERNAL ANATOMY. Cutis richly supplied with gland cells

of which two kinds occur, one staining with haematoxylin, the’

other with congo-red. In this respect the cutis is similar to the

epithelium.

Hapitat AND Distrisution. Among hydroids (LDzphasia‘

about Port Townsend. |

16. Cerebratulus marginatus Renier.

I have referred to this species a smoky black form that occurs

abundantly in the sand between tides at Port Townsend and Brem-

erton. Most of the specimens differed from the Neapolitan form

figured in Burger's monograph, in lacking the white coloration

on the posterior extremity, and the white rims to the cephalic fur-

rows. As the specimens showed variation in this regard, some

approaching quite closely the typical form, and as the internal

anatomy is indistinguishable from that of specimens from Naples,

I have referred this form to C. marginatus.

17. Cerebratulus sp.

Portions of a very large dark form with flesh-colored lateral

margins were obtained. Some of the fragments in alcohol

measure nearly 20 mms. in diameter. In internal anatomy it

. seems to approach C. marginatus ; the cnly noticeable point

of difference appears to be that the cephal:: slits cease at least

216 GRIFFIN.

10 sections (each cut at least 30 4 thick) in front of mouth. In

C. marginatus they cease in the section in which the mouth

commences.

IV. SUMMARY.

Of the fourteen species treated in the foregoing ; nine appear

to be new and peculiar to the Pacific coast*of North America ;

two (Lmplectonema viride and £. violaceum) are already de-

scribed, although likewise peculiar to the west American coast ;

one (Amphiporus angulatus) with three problematical forms are

boreal and are represented on the north Atlantic coast, and one

(Cerebratulus marginatus) is cosmopolitan. Among the forms

peculiar to the west coast are a few that show remarkably close

resemblance to west European forms. Thus Carinella sexlineata

is the Pacific representative of C. superba, while C. rubra resem-

bles C. miniata. FEmplectonema viride is very closely similar to

£. gracile, Lineus striata resembles Micrura fasciolata.". An-

other conspicuous fact is the complete absence of Atlantic

American species, outside of the strictly boreal forms such as

Amphiporus angulatus. No banded Carinellas occur on the

east coast”, no Carinoma has as yet been found. The east

coast Amphiporids and Lineids are either unrepresented on the

Pacific or replaced by different species. The noticeable scarcity

of Lzzeus on the west coast is perhaps to be correlated with the

superabundance of different forms of Azphiporus, which appar-

ently replace them functionally.

ZOOLOGICAL LABORATORY OF COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY,

March, 1808.

1 Tf it can ever be shown that Z. striata actually does possess the cirrus, and hence

is a micruran, this parallel will be further strengthened.

2Except the ‘‘ large Canadian Carinel/a dredged in the Gulf of St. Lawrence by

Mr. Whiteaves.’? McIntosh ’75.

PUGET SOUND NEMERTEANS. 217

V. LITERATURE.

Burger, O., 1890. Untersuchungen tiber die Anatomie u. His-

tologie der Nemertinen, nebst Beitrage zur Systematik.: Zeztschr.

wiss. Zool. 50.

Burger, O., 1891. Vorlaufige Mittheilungen iiber untersuchungen

an Nemertinen des Golfes v. Neapel: Wachr. d. k. G. d. Wiss. v. d.

Georg-Augusts-Univ. zu Gottingen.

Burger, O., 1892. Zur Systematik der Nemertinenfauna des Golfes

v. Neapel. Vorl. Mitthl: Wachr. d. k. G. d. Wiss. su Géttin-

gen.

Burger, O., 1895 (1). Beitrage zur Anatomie, Systematik und

geographischen Verbreitung der Nemertinen: Zeztschr. f. Wiss.

Zool. Of.

Burger, O., 1895 (2). Die Nemertinen des Golfes v. Neapel :

Fauna u. Flora des Golfes v. Neapel. 22*? Monographie.

Burger, O., 1896. Meeres und Land-Nemertinen gesammelt v.

den Herren Dr. Plate u. Micholitz.: Zo0d/. Jahrb. Ab. d. Syst. 9.

Hubrecht, A. A. W., 1879. The Genera of European Nemer-

teans critically revised, with descriptions of several new species :

Leyden Mus. Notes, Vol. 1.

Hubrecht, A. A. W., 1887. Voyage of H. M. S. Challenger,

1873-76. Nemertea. Zod/. XIX.

MacIntosh, W. C., 1875. On Valencinia Armandi, a new Ne-

mertean: Zrans. Linn. Soc., London, Ser. 2 Zool., Vol. I.

Oudemans, A. C., 1885. The Circulatory and Nephridial Ap-

paratus of the Nemertean: Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci., XXV.

Stimpson, W., 1855. Description of some of the new Marine

Invertebrata from the Chinese and Japanese Seas: Proc. Acad.

Wat. Sct., Phela.

Stimpson, W., 1857. Prodromus descriptionis Animalium Everte-

bratorum, que in Expeditione ad Oceanum Pacificum Septentriona-

lem, a Republica Federata missa, Calwaladaro Ringgold and

Johanne Rodgers Ducibus, observavit et descripsit. Pars. ii Tur-

bellarieorum Nemertineorum: Proc. Acad. Nat. Set., Phila.

Vaillant, L., 1890. Teérétulariens: H7st. nat. des Annéles ( Collec-

tion des Suites a Buffon), Tome 3, Paris.

218 GRIFFIN.

Verrill, A. E., 1873. Results of Recent Dredging Expeditions on

the Coast of New England: Am. /. of Sct. and Arts, Ser. 3,

Vol. VI.

Verrill, A. E., 1892. The Marine Nemerteans of New England:

Trans. Conn. Acad., VIII.

Verrill, A. E., 1895. Marine Nemerteans and Planarians of New

England (Supplement) ; Zvans. Conn. Acad., June.

[Annas N. Y. Acap. Sci., XI, No. 11, pp. 219 to 223, August 13, 1898. ]

AUN. IMPOR TANIESINa TANCE “OF TNSECT

COALEBSCENCE:

HENRY E. CRAMPTON, JR.

(Read March 14, 1898.)

Dourinc the winter of 1896-97 the writer performed a num-

ber of experiments upon lepidopterous pup, in order to ascer-

tain if it were possible to produce a coalescence between two in-

dividuals, or parts of individuals, similar to that obtained by

Born with the embryos of Amphibia. A report upon the re-

sults of these experiments is embodied in the form of a Woods

Holl lecture for 1897. Without going into details, it might

be stated that the two main problems were: first, whether

‘“orafting,’ or the production of coalescence, were possible

with lepidoptera ; and second, if such coalescence could be

brought about, whether the colors of one moth could be made

to replace those of another by a transfusion of haemolymph.

The first point was determined successfully in about twenty

cases out of nearly two hundred experiments. The second

point remained undetermined on account of the small number of

successful cases. During the present winter, in the course of a

further series of experiments, numbering at present over 750, one

specimen was obtained which exhibited conditions of exceptional

interest. It is considered worthy of a special notice, as the full

account of the winter’s experiments cannot of necessity be pub-

lished for some time.

The case in question (No. 341) consists of a Callosamia

promethea, united “in tandem”’ anteriorly to a Samia cecropia.

In an operation of this kind part of the abdomen of the anterior

component is cut away by a transverse section back of the

wing-cases, 2. ¢., between the fourth and fifth abdominal seg-

ments ; the remainder of the pupa is united to a posterior com-

(219 )

220 CRAMPTON.

ponent which has been deprived by a transverse section of its

anterior part, namely, head, prothorax and the basal parts of the

limb, mouth-part and antenna sacs. The method of keeping

the parts together, by means of melted paraffine applied to the

edge of the common wound, has already been described in a

communication before this section of the Academy at a meeting

last spring. The condition of the pupz was quite advanced,

owing to their being kept in the warm laboratory from the time

they were procured in November. But, as is often the case, one

of them, the cecropfia, was more advanced than the other, and

was, indeed, ready to emerge fully five days before the promethea.

Only the posterior portion of the pupal case of the former was

removed to permit of the voidance of excreta. When the fro-

methea was ready to emerge its pupal case and the remainder

of that of the cecropia were removed. The compound was

supported below a ball of cotton, so that the moths could hang

suspended from it, and thus assume the attitude which is almost

indispensable for the expansion of the wings. Nevertheless, in

spite of all arrangements, the wings of neither component ex-

panded, and the colors, therefore, appear on a reduced scale.

The wings of the cecropia remained soft and evidently in a dis-

eased discolored condition, owing, no doubt, to the prolonged

enforced stay in the pupal cases.

The general appearance of the complex is that of a long

body, provided with two sets of wings and legs. The facts of

special interest are: first, those of the structural conditions ;

and second, those relating to the coloration; for, although the

cecropia wings show no abnormalities aside from their general

decomposed condition, the wings of the promethca exhibit some

most remarkable appearances.

First, the structural peculiarities will be noted. These occur

naturally at the region of union between the two components.

From the cecropia were cut away the head, prothorax and

mesothorax in part, and as well the basal parts of the antenna

and palp sacs, and those of the first pair of legs. These parts

are all absent in the metamorphosed complex. In dorsal view

the fourth abdominal segment of the sromethea is united to the

INSECT “COALESCE NCE. 221

remains of the mesothorax of the cecropia by a sheet of regener-

ated tissue which is exactly similar to the hairless bands con-

necting normal abdominal segments. On the ventral side a more

complicated condition appears. There is, of course, the sheet of

regenerated tissue which unites the fourth abdominal segment of

the promethea to the thorax of the cecrofia. To this sheet

of tissue are attached the bases of the coxe of the first pair of

legs, and the femoro-tibial joint of the right one as well. The

second and third pairs of legs and the wings arise normally in

their proper places. The antenne and palps are absent in this

specimen owing to the application of paraffine over the sacs,

thus blocking them off.

It is obvious that this condition has been brought about as

follows: the growing edges of the opened leg-sacs, in regen-

eration naturally grew fast to whatever tissue extended over

them. This tissue was the regenerated band connecting the

bodies of the two components. Development proceeded nor-

mally, each part completing itself as usual, and presenting in

the freed complex the above condition. The reason why the

knee of one limb is also fused is evident when we consider the

doubled-up nature of the leg-sac. The knee had been involved

in the slightly oblique section.

The color-conditions are by far the most interesting. The

cecropia, as far as can be determined, possesses the normal

specific colors. Portions of the promethea wings, however, pre-

sent the colors characteristic of only the wings of cecropia.

The promethea, it will be remembered, was a female. In ad-

dition to the pupal diagnostic character—the relatively smaller

size of the antenna—the imago was cut open, and eggs were

taken from the body, so that no doubt remains as to the sex.

There are but few traces in the imaginal wings of the charac-

teristic red-brown of this sex. In detail the colors are as fol-

lows: the upper surfaces of the anterior wings are mixed, buff

and slate. Upon magnification, the scales are seen to contain

only these pigments. There are few containing the character-

istic reds and browns of a typical promethea wing. There is

about the center of the wing a patch of bright red scales similar

222 CRAMPTON.

in every way to the patches upon a cecropia wing, and differing

from anything normal upon a fpromethea wing. The upper sur-

faces of the posterior wings show also the mixed slate and

buff colors. There are no reds or browns, and there is no inner

red line to the dark border of the wing. Below, the anterior

wings have the anterior portion reddish, the middle part black-

ish, and posterior part red, thus differing not markedly from the

normal. ‘The posterior wings below are reddish, although with

a mixture of buff quite similar to the corresponding normal

promethea wing. The body hairs are a deep reddish purple,

again a nearly normal color.

From these details it will be seen that while the body and

the lower surfaces of the wings present a nearly normal appear-

ance, or at least a condition within the possible limits of specific

variation, nevertheless the upper surfaces of the wings present a

very great departure from the normal, and resemble very closely

the colors of a normal cecropia wing. The latter colors are ap-

parently outside the bounds of possible variation within the

species. And as the body cavity of the cecropia component lies

in this case in open communication with the body cavity of the

promethea, and thus to the wings, it may be inferred, I think,

that the colors in the wings of the promethea which resemble

the normal cecrofia colors were produced by the presence and

decomposition of cecropia hemolymph where such colors ap-

pear in the promethea wings.

This experimental production of a transfusion of haemolymph,

and subsequent color-effect of one moth upon another, is a

striking case in support of the conclusions arrived at by A. G.

Mayer from a study of normal phenomena. To the work of

Mayer, and to a lesser degree of some others, we owe our

knowledge that the pigmental colors of Lepidoptera are pro-

duced by the chemical decomposition of the haemolymph in the

empty scale cells. In this case the relatively small amount of

promethea hemolymph was without any effect upon the cecro-

pia; while the more abundant hemolymph of the cecropia en-

tering the body of the promethea produced, by its presence and

disintegration, the colors of the cecropfia in portions of the

wings of the promethea.

INSECT COALESCENCE. 223

The above conclusion receives considerable support, and, in

point of fact, confirmation from the results of certain other ex-

periments. In several cases, where a small part of the moth

has been united to a much larger part, the former takes on, in

the imago, the characteristic colors of the major part. One

very striking case in point is one obtained recently. The head

and prothorax, with other minor parts of a polyphemus pupa,

having been removed, the corresponding parts of a cecropia

were supplied. The resulting metamorphosed imago exhibits

an apparently perfect insect. The hairs of the head and thorax

derived from the cecropia, however, show no trace of the

cecropia color, but are shiny buff, the color of the correspond-

ing parts of a polyphemus. The available hemolymph was, of

course, only that of the polyphemus body, and therefore the

colors were those characteristic of that species.

The foregoing account, reinforced by the other minor results

above mentioned, goes to show, I believe, that it is possible zz

some cases to produce a definite color-effect of one moth upon

another, by producing a coalescence between them, thus per-

mitting a transfusion of hemolymph. Why this reciprocal color-

effect obtains in some cases, but not in others, now becomes

the next problem to be investigated.

COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY.

[AnNnaLs N. Y. Acap. Sci., XI, No. 12, pp. 225 to 258, August 13, 1898. ]

tHe NORTHROP COLEEGTION OF CRUSTACEA

FROM THE BAHAMAS.

W. M. RANKIN.

[Plates XXIX-XXX. ]

THE Crustacea collected by Professor and Mrs. Northrop in

the Bahama Islands in 1890 were sent to me by Professor

Osborn, with the request that I prepare a report onthem. The

following list is the result. Such a list is of necessity largely a

mere catalogue of names, but it is hoped that it may be of ser-

vice in the preparation of a more extensive fauna of the Baha-

mas when such a work shall be undertaken. It has been with

the idea of giving a little wider interest to the list that with each

species the range of distribution has been given, and also the

‘West Indian Islands noted where the species has been found,

although this latter record is no doubt incomplete. I hope at

least these notes of distribution may serve as a suggestion for

the fuller record of the distribution of these species among the

West Indies. The synonymy I have made brief, merely citing

the original author and usually a reference to the work where a

complete synonymy may be found.

The letters (a), (0), etc., in many species indicate the various

series of specimens in the collection as they were arranged

originally or, in some cases, sorted out by me after their re-

ceipt. To these series I have fortunately been able to add some

notes made by Professor Northrop when the collections were

made, and recently sent me by Mrs. Northrop.

Among the sixty-seven species collected I have determined

four as new species and one I have ranked as a new variety.

There is also published for the first time a figure of Stexopus

levis. For the careful drawings of the figures I am indebted to

Mr. R. Weber. I wish to express my obligations to Miss Rath-

( 225 )

226 RANKIN.

bun, of the National Museum, for assistance in identifying a few

species ; and also to Dr. Ortmann, of Princeton, who has kindly

assisted me in many ways and to whom this report owes much

of any value it may possess.

DEGAPODE.

BRACHYURA-CATOMETOPA.

Family Ocypodide Ortmann.

1. Ocypode arenaria (Catesby).

Cancer arenarius Catesby, History of the Carolinas, II, p. 35,

177

Kingsley, Proc, Acad. Nat. Sci., Phil re soepaio4

Ortmann, Zool Jahrb, VIL, p. 765,860:

(2) 5°¢,2 9. Near Nassau, NPs anie24, 90:

Range: South shore Long Island to Rio Janeiro.

Collected at Cuba, Jamaica, St. Thomas, New Providence.

2. Uca platydactyla (Milne-Edwards).

Gelasimus platydactylus Milne-Edwards, Hist. des Crustacés,

IBM ormsity thie) 74.

G. heterocheles Kingsley, 1. c., 1880, p. 137.

(2) 4 &. Under sides of stones, Dix Point, near Nassau, N.

Eareb: 4-.-00:

(Zi Scene

Range: East and west coasts Central America, West Indies.

Collected at Jamaica.

3. Uca vocator (Herbst).

Cancer vocator Herbst. Natur. Krabben u. Krebse, III, pt.

IV, 1804.

Gelasimus vocator Martens; Kingsley, l. c., 1880, p. 147.

(2) 1 é. Bahama Islands.

Range: East coast of America, west coast of Mexico, Pan-

ama, West Indies.

Collected at Bahamas, Cuba, Hayti, Jamaica.

BAHAMA CRUSTACEA. Oot

4. Uca stenodactyla (M. Edwards et Lucas).

Gelasimus stenodactylus, M. Edwards et Lucas in D’Orbigny’s

Voyage, 1843.

mingsiey: |. c., 1880, p..154.. Ortmann: |. c., p. 760, 1894.

(2) 1 ¢. Common in mud on west side of Andros Island,

meat Ked Cays, Apr. 17, ’90.

Range : West Indies, Central America, East and West Coasts.

Collected at Cuba.

5. Uca leptodactyla (Guérin MS.).

Gelasimus leptodactylus Guérin MS. (types in Phila. Acad.).

Gelasimus stenodactylus Kingsley, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.,

Phila., p. 155 (part), 1880.

(2) 10 &, 5 ¢. Holes in sand between tides about 5-6 in.

deep, very shy, near Ft. Montagu, Nassau, N. P., Jan. 28, ’g9o.

Some of these specimens were sent to the United States Na-

tional Museum, where they were identified by Miss Rathbun,

and to whom I am indebted for the following note of descrip-

tion:

“ Uca leptodactyla belongs to the division of the genus in

which the front between the eyes is broad and the body is short,

broad and subcylindrical. Itis most nearly related to U. stenodac-

tyla ; the chief differences are as follows: In U. stenodactyla the

body is much higher than in /eftodactyla, being usually higher

than long. The anterior margin of the carapace from the base

of the eyestalk to the antero-lateral angle is much more oblique

in leptodactyla, and the lateral margins are much more convergent

posteriorly. The carapace of J/eptodactyla is, therefore, more

pentagonal than that of stexodactyla. In stenodactyla the lateral

margin is much dilated behind the antero-lateral tooth, which is

not the case in /eftodactyla. The inner surface of the hands

differs as follows: The short ridge on the palm at the base of

the dactylus is perpendicular to the base of the propodos in

leptodactyla ; while it is oblique in stenodactyla. In both species

the tubercular ridge running obliquely upward from the lower

margin makes an angular turn at the middle of the inner surfaces,

and is continued until near the upper margin. In /eptodactyla

228 RANKIN.

this continuation runs parallel to the line of tubercles at the base

of the dactylus; in stexodactyla the continuation is directed

obliquely towards the line at the base of the dactylus.”’

Family Gecarcinide Dana.

6. Gecarcinus ruricola (Linnezus).

Cancer ruricola Jeinneeus, Sys. Nat. Ed. 10,.1,p..6260, 10756:

Gecarcinus ruricola Leach. Edin. Encyc., VII, 430, 1814.

Ortmann, |. c., p. 740, 1894.

(a) 1 g. Bahama Islands. (Dry.)

(2) 1 8. Nicolstown, Andros Island, March g,’90. (Dry.)

Range: West Indies, Mexico.

Collected at Cuba, Jamaica, Hayti, Martinique.

7. Cardisoma guanhumi (Latreille).

Latreille, Ency, Meth, Hist; Nat. Imseetes, xX G65, ear.

Ortmann, Ic p-. 735 rood:

(a)1é,19, SI, juv. Move sluggishly, make holes in the

ground by side of road under trees, Nassau, N. P., Jan. 25, ’90.

Range: East and west coasts of Central America, West

Africa.

Collected at Cuba, Jamaica, Hayti, St. Thomas, Barbadoes.

Family Grapside (Dana).

8. Leiolophus planissimus (Herbst).

Cancer planisstmus Herbst, |. c., p. 3, pl. LIX, 1804.

Miers, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser.5, 4, 0878 apr 53.

(2) 36,19. Onshore, just south of Ft. Montagu, Nassau,

IN. PS hati 23; -00:

(6) 2 é juv. . Ocean side of Salt Cay, NEP Jan: 3 0u:

Range: ‘Cosmopolitan, except the colder seas,’ Ort-

mann.

Collected at Jamaica.

BAHAMA CRUSTACEA. 229

g. Plagusia depressa (Fabricius).

Cancer depressus Fabricius, Entom. Sys. Suppl., p. 406,

1775.

Miers, Challenger, Brachyura, p. 272.

(a) 28. Salt Cay, New Providence. (Dry.)

Range: Charleston to Brazil, Mediterranean to St. Helena.

Collected at Cuba, Jamaica.

to. SeSarma cinerea (Say).

Sesarma rvicordi Milne Edwards, Annal Sci. Nat. (3) Zool.

fo, p. 183, 1853.

Ortmann, Carcinologische Studien, Zool. Jahrb., Bd. X,

1897.

(@)19 with ova. Under side of stones, Dix. Pt., near Nas-

cau. F., Feb. 4, ’ Oo.

Range: West Indies.

Collected at St. Domingo, Hayti, Jamaica, St. Thomas.

11. Pachygrapsus transversus (Gibbes).

Gilsbes, Proc. Am. Ass. Adv. Sci., III, p. 182, 1850.

Kingsley, |. c., 1880, p. 198.

(2) 4% (juv.), 3 2 with ova. Nassau, N. P., under stones

Jan., 1890.

Range : Warm and temperate waters of both hemispheres.

Collected at Cuba, Jamaica, Virgin Islands, Barbadoes.

12. Grapsus grapsus (Linnzus).

Cancer grapsus Linnaeus, Sys. Nat. ed. X, I, p. 630, 1758.

pain, Itans. Conn. ic-1V, 1580, p..256,- Ortmann, 1: c.,

Pp. 703, 1894.

(ay-1 3,22: Near Nassau, ‘N..P., Jan., ‘go.

Range : Warm waters of both hemispheres.

Collected at Cuba, Jamaica, Hayti.

13. Goniopsis cruentatus (Latreille).

Grapsus cruentatus Latreille, Hist. Nat. des Crust. VI, p. 70,

1803.

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. Sci., XI, August 13, 1898—16.

230 RANKIN.

Kingsley, |: ‘c., 1880, p«roo.Ortmanntal cc: 1p. Zoi, toes

(2) 13. (Dry.)

(0) 29. Onshore near Nassau, [N. 9) Jan 9237) 700:

Range : American and African Coasts of the Atlantic ocean.

Collected at Cuba, Jamaica, Hayti.

BRACHYURA—CYCLOMETOPA.

Family Oziide Ortmann.

14. Eriphia gonagra (Fabricius).

Cancer gonagra Fabricius, Sp. Ins., p. 505, 1781.

Ortmann, |..¢.,) p. 480, “1594:

(2) 1. In pools on shore, Nassau, N. P., Jan. 21, ’go.

(0) 19. Dix Pt; near Nassau, NG Hebers oe:

(¢) 1s... Salt Cay. Ocean side;nean, New ania iidae

Range: Atlantic coast from Carolina to Rio Janeiro.

Collected at Bahamas, Cuba, Jamaica, Hayti, Barbadoes.

15. Domeecia hispida Eydoux et Souleyet.

Eydoux et Souleyet, Voy. Bonite;1, Crust, pr 2st

Ortmann, 1.oc5.p.1475, 1304.

(a) 1 Oy) uv.

Range: West Indies, Florida, Cape Verde Islands, Senegal,

Pacific Islands. |

Collected at Cuba, Jamaica, St. Thomas, Guadaloupe.

16. Panopeus herbstii Milne-Edwards.

Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Cr., I, p. 403, 1834.

Benedict & Rathbun, Proc. UicS:; Nat Muss eI\~ wore coe

189g.

(a) 1626 WNassau, N. P., Jan, ooo:

Range: Rhode Island to Brazil.

Collécted sat* Bahamas, Janiaica; Sts) @homas) jeuraeaa:

Trinidad.

BAHAMA CRUSTACEA. 231

17. Panopeus occidentalis Saussure.

Saussure, Rev. and Mag. de Zool. (2), IX, p. 502, 1857.

(a) 19. Near Nassau, N. P., Febr., ’go.

(6) 1g. Onshore near Nassau, N. P., Jan. 22, ’g0.

Range: Atlantic from S. C. to Brazil.

Collected at Jamaica, Old Providence, Guadaloupe, Curagao,

Trinidad.

18. Panopeus americanus Saussure.

Saussure, Rev. et Mag. de Zool. (2), IX, p. 502, 1857.

(2) 16, 4¢. Near N. P., Bahamas, Jan.—Febr., 1890.

(6) 1é. Onshore, near Nassau, N. P., Jan. 22, ’9o.

Pare . Nassau, N. Pi Febr. 24, 1890; Dix Pt.

Range: West Indies to Brazil.

Collected at Jamaica, St. Thomas.

Family Xanthide Ortmann.

1g. Chlorodius floridianus Gibbs.

eanps, lc. p. 175, 1850:

(2) 12. Collected in Ties and under stones, N. P., and

neighboring cays.

ytd. Dix Pt; Nassau, N.. P.. Febr. 24, 1890.

og ie ae ee ne: New Boece Jan.—Feb., 1890.

(2) 18, 39. On shore near Nassau, N. P., Jan. 22, go.

Range: Florida to Brazil.

Collected at Jamaica, St. Thomas, Barbadoes.

20. Lophactzea lobata (Milne-Edwards).

Cancer lobatus Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crustacés, I, p.

375, 1834.

Lophactea lobata A. Milne- Pages, Nouv. Arch. Mus.

Hist. Nat., I, p. 249, Pl. XVI, 1865.

(2) 1g. Quarantine station, Jan. 25, ’go.

Range: West Indies, Gulf of Mexico, Bermuda.

Collected at Jamaica and the Antilles.

Dow RANKIN.

21. Heteractzea ceratopa (Stimpson).

Pilumnus ceratopus Stimpson, Ann. Lyc. Nat. Hist. N. Y.,

Wisp. 215, 1362:

Fleteractea ceratopus Kingsley, |. c., 1879, p. 396.

(2) 19. Dix Pt, Nassau, N. P:, Pebs 241800.

() 19... Quarantine station, 'N.»P., Jan. 25,’ 90:

Range: Florida and West Indies.

Collected at Guadaloupe.

22. Actza acantha (Milne-Edwards).

Cancer acanthus Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Cr., I, p. 390,

1834.

Actea acantha A. Milne-Edwards, |. c., p. 278, Pl. XVI,

1865.

(a) 1%. Quarantine station near Nassau, N. P., Febr. 10,

1890.

Range: Florida Keys, West Indies.

Collected at Jamaica, Guadaloupe.

PORTUNINEA.

Family Portunide Ortmann.

23. Callinectes larvatus Ordway.

Ordway, Boston Jour. Nat. Hist., VII, p. 573, 1863.

Rathbun. The genus, Callinectes; Proc: "Wz S. Nae fous:

KVIML ep 356, 1090:

(2) 1¢, 19, spur. juv. On shore just south cit BMon-

tacu, Nassau, N. PF. Jan, 22, 90:

Range: Florida to Brazil, West Indies, Cape Verde Islands,

Africa.

Collected at Bahamas, San Domingo, Jamaica, St. Thomas.

24. Callinectes tumidus Ordway.

Ordway, l. c., p. 574, 1863.

Rathbun, l. c., p. 356, 1806.

BAHAMA CRUSTACEA. yas Be

(2) 1g. Nassau, N. P., Jan. 21, 1890, common in shoal

water.

Range: Florida to Brazil, West Indies.

Collected at Jamaica, Hayti, Old Providence.

25. Achelous depressifrons Stimpson.

Amphitrite depressifrons Stimpson, Ann. Lyc. Nat. Pet N.

Me VIL, p. 58,, 1862.

heinis depressifrons Stimpson, ibid., p. 223.

(2) 19. Quarantine station, N. P., Jan. 25, ’go.

Range: South Carolina to Florida, Bermuda, West Indies.

Besides this specimen from New Providence, the Princeton Mu-

seum possesses one from the Virgin Islands; the only two

localities reported from the West Indies.

26. Achelous ordwayi Stimpson.

Stimpson, Notes on N. Am. Crustacea, Ann. Lyc. Nat.

Pee, N. Y., p- 224, 1862.

Smith, Trans. Conn. Acad., II, p. 9.

(a) 1. Quarantine station, N. P., Jan. 25, go.

(4) 12, with ova. Dredged near Nassau, N. P., Jan. 22, ’go.

Range: Florida and West Indies.

Collected at St. Thomas.

27. Achelous tumidulus Stimpson.

Stimpson, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., II, p. 149, 1870.

(a) 1¢é. Dredged near Nassau, N. P., Jan. 22, ’go.

Stimpson describes two specimens from the coast of Florida.

The species is probably only the young of A. ordwayi, as it

only differs from the latter (as noted by Stimpson) in the less

prominent frontal spines.

MAIOIDEA..

Family Periceride Miers.

28. Macrocceloma eutheca (Stimpson).

Pericera eutheca Stimpson, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. II, p. 112,

1870.

934 RANKIN.

Rathbun in Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Vol. XV, No. 901, p. 251,

1892.

(2) 19. Dredged near Nassau, N. P., Jan. 22, ’90.

Range: Florida, West Indies.

Collected at Cuba.

29. Microphys bicornutus (Latreille).

Pisa bicornuta Latreille, Encyc. Méth., Hist. Nat. Insectes, X,

pA L, -1o25.

Microphys bicornutus, A. Milne-Edwards, Nouv. Arch. Mus.

Mist. Nat Vip s 247, aoe

Rathbun, |. c. (No. 901), p. 253.

(a) 2 86,5 @. Common under rocks between tides and in

pools, Nek, jan, oe:

(6) 1 &. Quarantine station, N. P., Jan. 25, ’go.

(G)itt-O< cNassaiy Nase an, 2oo

(zd) 1 6. Onshore near Nassau, just south of Ft. Montagu,

Jan 222,. 00:

(2) 1 9 juv.. “Seaveardens;” near (Nassau (Nich. her sae:

(f)-1 dy Juv. Ocean side*ot-Salt Cay, i cbi~ 0, Oo:

(Ge)"t-¢d, juv.’ (Nassau, Ne SE cari OO:

(A) 1 9 juv. Salt Cay, N.’P., ocean ‘side, Jan. 31, oo.

Range: Florida, West Indies to Brazil, Bermuda.

Collected at numerous islands of the West Indies.

30. Othonia aculeata (Gibbes).

Fflyas aculeata Gibbes, |. c., p. 171, 1850.

Rathbun) 1) cy p.255,1booe.

(a) 18. On shore just south of Ft. Montagu, Nassau, N.

Pe lam (22.00.

Range: Florida and West Indies.

Collected at Cuba, Bahamas, Jamaica, St. Thomas, Guada-

loupe.

31. Othonia lherminieri Schramm.

Schramm, Crust. de la Guadaloupe, 20, 1867.

(a2) 1%, 2 9. Onshore near Nassau, Jan. 22, go.

BAHAMA CRUSTACEA. E55.

The three specimens in the collection are broken and im-

perfect. I place them doubtfully in this species.

Range: Atlantic coast ; S. C. to Brazil.

| 32. Mithrax pilosus Rathbun.

Eeatibun, |. e; p, 262; Pl XX XIX Ne, gO1), 1892.

(aj) 1°. Neds New Providence, Jan., ’90.

(0) 2 & (fragmentary). Salt Cay, ocean side, New Provi-

gence, Jan. 31, ’90.

Miss Rathbun’s four specimens were collected in Abaco,

Bahamas.

33. Mithrax cinctimanus (Stimpson).

Mithraculus cinctimanus Stimpson, Ann. Lyc. Nat Hist. N.

me Vil, p. 186, 1862.

Rathbun, |: c., p. 268 (No. gor), 1892.

Pee? ie Pt, Nassau, N.P.,, Febr. 24, 90.

i. 6. . Quarantine station, N. P., Jan. 25, '90.

fed jiv.). Nassau, N. P., Jan. *9o.

Range: Florida coast, West Indies, Gulf of Mexico.

Collected at Andros island, Jamaica, St. Thomas, Guada-

loupe.

34. Mithrax forceps (A. Milne-Edwards).

Mithraculus forceps A. Milne-Edwards. Miss. Sci. au Mex-

mae. pt.”5,: 1p. 100, 1875:

Rathbun, 1. c., p. 267 (No. gor), 1892.

(2) 6@, mostly young. Ocean side of Salt Cay, Febr. 6,’9o0.

(6) 1 & fragmentary. Nassau, N. P.

ey iie 42-9. uy,

Range: From North Carolina to Brazil and Guiana.

Collected at Nassau, Bahamas, Old Providence, St. Thomas,

Curacao.

35. Mithrax sculptus (Lamarck).

Maia sculpta Lamarck, Hist. Anim. sans Vert., V, p. 242,

1818.

236 | RANKIN.

Rathbun, |. c. (No. got), p. 271, 1892.

(a) 18,1 9. Quarantine station, N. P., Jan. 25, “90.

Range: Florida, West Indies to Venezuela, Surinam.

Collected at numerous localities in the West Indies.

36. Mithrax coronatus (Herbst).

Cancer coronatus Herbst, Natur. der Krabben u. Krebse., I, p.

HO4, Fl. ei e 62 a 7om,

Rathbun, |. 1c. (No: 901 \wp. 272 a1cee:

(2) 1 &. Salt Cay, ocean side, near New Providence, Jan. 3,

go.

(6) 1¢ juv. Ocean side of Salt Cay, Febr. 6, ’go.

Range: Florida, West Indies, Central America, Brazil.

Collected at Abaco, Bahamas, Jamaica, Cuba, St. Thomas,

Guadaloupe.

Family Inachide Miers.

37. Acanthonyx petiverii Milne-Edwards.

Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., I, p. 343, 1834.

(2) 1 @ broken. Under rocks, between tides and in pools.

Nassau, N. P., Jan., “go.

Range: West Indies to Brazil and California to Chili ; Gala-

pagos.

Collected at Cuba, Jamaica, St. Thomas, Guadaloupe, Mar-

tinique. | |

DROMIIDEA.

Family Dromiide Dana.

38. Dromidia antillensis Stimpson.

Stimpson, Notes on N. Am. Crust.,"Anm Wye Nat. iitct

ING YON ET onan BOO)

(2) 19. | Nassaw, N. P., Febr. 15; "oe:

Range: Florida, West Indies, Brazil.

Collected at Antilles, Jamaica, St. Thomas.

BAHAMA CRUSTACEA. 237

HIPPIDEA.

Family Hippide Stimpson.

39. Remipes cubensis Saussure.

Saussure, Rev. Mag. Zool. (2), IX, p. 503, 1857.

Ortmann, Die geog. Verbreit. der Decap. gruppe der Hip-

pidea, Zool. Jahrb., IX, p. 219, 1896.

Remipes scutellatus (Fabricius), Henderson, Chall. Anomura,

p. 38, 1888.

(2) 19@ (with ova). Beach at Nicolstown, Andros Island,

Apr. 4, ’90.

(0) 23,99. Quarantine station near New Providence, Jan.

25, 90.

fee 2. Nassau, N. P., Jan. 1890.

Range: ‘American and African shores of Atlantic,’ Ort-

mann (I. c. supra).

Collected at Cuba, Jamaica, St. Christophers, Barbadoes.

GALATHEIDEA.

Family Porcellanidae Henderson.

40. Porcellana sayana Leach.

Pisidia sayana Leach. Dict. d. Sci. Nat., XVIII, p. 54, 1820.

Porcellana ocellata Gibbes, |. ¢., p. 190, 1850.

Henderson, Challenger, Anomura, p. 109, 1888.

(az) 16. Came out of a shell inhabited by a large hermit

crap. Nassau, N. P., Jan. 26, ‘oo.

Range: West Indies and Southern shores of U. S.

Collected at Antilles, Jamaica, St. Thomas.

41. Pachycheles panamensis Faxon.

Faxon, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., XVIII, p. 75, Tab. 15,

1895.

Ortmann, Zool. Jahrb., X, 1897, p. 293.

(@) 16,22. Ocean side of Salt Cay, Febr. 6, ’go.

238 -RANKIN.

Size of ¢ 5% mm. long, 5 mm. broad; of ? 5 mm. long,

6 mm. broad. These specimens have been kindly examined for

me by Dr. Ortmann, who finds them identical with Faxon’s

type from Panama, and also very close tothe Cape Verde P.

barbatus A. Milne-Edwards. This is the first recorded speci-

men of P. panamensis from the West Indies.

42. Petrolisthes armatus (Gibbes).

Porcellana armata Gibbes, l. c., p. 190, 1850.

Petrolisthes armatus Stimpson, Ann. Lyc. Nat. Hist., N. Y.,

Vit; p. 72; e602:

Ortmann, Zool. Jahrb., X, 1897, p. 280.

(2)1 6, 1-9. - Ocean side of Salt (Cay Viecb6a7aa:

Ortmann (1. c. supra), gives full synonymy of this species and

makes its distribution circumtropical ; West Indies to Brazil,

Gibraltar, California to Panama, Indo-Pacific.

Collected at Cuba, Jamaica, St. Thomas, Barbadoes.

43. Petrolisthes tridentatus Stimpson.

Stimpson, Ann. Lyc, Nats (bist. No VS Mie 7 > ie

1859. |

(a) 1. Along shore, near Nassau, N. P, Feb. 20, ’go.

(6) 23,59. Salt Cay, N. P. ocean side; Jan 5315000:

Range: West Indies.

Collected at St. Thomas, Barbadoes.

PAGURIDEA.

Family Cenobitide Dana.

44. Coenobita diogenes (Latreille).

Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., II, p. 240, Pl. 22, 1837.

(a) 2%. Nicolstown, Andros Island, March 23, ’go.

(4) 2¢,,19." Nassau, N:P. Jan. 16, yee:

1890.

BAHAMA CRUSTACEA. 239

(2) 1, juv. In pools and under stones, New Providence and

neighboring cays.

Range: Florida to Brazil, West Indies, Bermuda.

Collected at Antilles, Cuba, Jamaica, Hayti, Turks Island,

St. Thomas, Barbadoes.

Family Paguride.

45. Petrochirus granulatus (Olivier).

Pagurus granulatus Olivier, Encyc. Meth., VIII, p. 640, 1811.

Henderson, in Challenger, Anomura, p. 58, 1888.

(2) 3¢.

(6)1%,19. Inshell of Strombus gigas, Nassau, N. P., Jan.

26, ’90.

Range: West Indies, Gulf of Mexico to Brazil, Cape of

Good Hope.

Collected at Antilles, Cuba, Jamaica.

The common large West Indian hermit crab.

46 (2?) Clibanarius vittatus (Bosc. ).

Pagurus vittatus Bosc. Hist. des Crust., II, p. 8, pl. XII, 1802.

Kingsley, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil., p. 236, 1878.

(a) 1¢ imperfect. In small shell of Strombus gigas, beach

near Nassau, N. P., Jan. go.

(6) 1 (?) fragmentary. Near Nassau, N. P., Febr. 1, ’9o.

Range: Fort Macon to Florida, West Indies, Brazil.

I refer these imperfect specimens doubtfully to this species.

The chele are wanting in (a), and (0) is too much broken to be

of any value in the determination.

47 (2) Clibanarius tricolor (Gibbs).

Pagurus tricolor Gibbes, Proc. Amer. Assoc., p. 189, 1850.

(a) several specimens.

(6) 1¢. South side New Providence, in small shells of

Strombus gigas.

The determination is doubtful, as the specimens are very poor

and have almost entirely lost their color. They are all with-

drawn into the shells of various littoral mollusks.

240 RANKIN.

Family Parapaguride Smith.

48. Parapagurus sp.

(az) 29. Dredged, Jan. 22, ’90, Nassau, N. P:

Length of thorax 3 and 5 mm. respectively.

I refer these imperfect, colorless specimens doubtfully to

some species of Parapagurus.

LORICATA.

Family Panuliride Bate.

49. Panulirus argus (Latr.).

Palinurus argus Latr. Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., II,

p: 3200,,.13837-

(2) 13,19. New Providence, Jan. 27,’90. Holes im sand

between tides, about 5—6 in. deep, “very shy.”

(4) 19... Nassau, N-P., Jans, 1890: (Diy)

Range: West Indies to Brazil.

Collected at Antilles, Cuba, Jamaica.

STENOPIDEA.

‘ Family Stenopide Bate.

50. Stenopus hispidus (Latreille). (Pl. xxix, Fig. 1.)

Palemon hispidus Olivier, Encyclop., VII, p. 666, 1811.

Stenopus hispidus Latreille, Regne animal de Cuvier, ed 2,

TV 5.p292:

Bate; Challenger, Macrura, p. 211, PE Xxx,

Herrick, The Life History of Stenopus, Nat. Acad. of

scietices; Vol. V,p: 330:

(2) 16. Nassau, N. P., Jan. 22,’90. In life the antenne

are carried in front, not bent back.

I note the characters of special importance in order to com-

1 This label is marked as doubtfully belonging to this specimen.

BAHAMA CRUSTACEA. 241

pare this already described species of Szenxopus with the two

species following. Rostrum with a median dorsal row of 6

spines bifurcated at extremity, a lateral row of 3 or 4 spines on

each side of rostrum; no ventral spines. Back of the sixth

dorsal spine a double row. Rostrum does not reach to end of

peduncle of inner antenne. Carapace of thorax very rough,

with firm, sharp spines which are longer on the dorsal than on

the lateral regions. Abdomen thickly armed with outwardly

projecting spines. Third pereiopod long, abundantly armed

with spines. The propodos with six rows above and below

and two on each lateral surface.

Measurements: Total length 50.5 mm., length of cephalo-

thorax 16.5 mm., of abdomen 34 mm., of rostrum 6 mm., of

telson 9.5 mm.

Unless the Eastern form should prove distinct from the West

Indian, we have a widely distributed species occurring in the

warm waters of both hemispheres. It has been reported from:

Indian ocean (Olivier), Australia (Peron and Lesneur), Borneo

and Philippines (Adams and White), South Pacific (Dana),

Amboina (DeMan), Fiji Islands and Bermuda (Bate), Cuba

(Von Martens), Bahama Islands (Herrick).

I introduce a figure of this specimen (PI. xxix, Fig. 1), al-

though not a new species, in order to compare it with the two

following species, figures of which have not yet appeared.

51. Stenopus semilzvis Von Martens (Pl. xxix, Fig. 2).

Von Martens, Ueber Cubanische Crustaceen, Arch. f. Natur-

eesch., Bd. 38, p: 144, 1872.

(2) 16,1 Q with ova. Under large sponge. New Provi-

dence, Jan., ’9o.

My specimens correspond very closely, except in certain

minor particulars noted below, with the description given by Von

Martens of a species ‘probably from the West Indies,” which

he found undescribed in the Berlin Museum and which he called

S. semilevis. |

Von Martens’ description (I. c., supra) I reproduce: ‘Cephalo-

thorax spiny; abdomen smooth; rostrum short, not longer

242 RANKIN,

than the peduncle of the inner antennz, compressed laterally

and prolonged as a ridge nearly to the sharply marked cervical

furrow, above with four teeth, below teeth wanting. Carpus of

third pair of pereiopods quadrangular asin S. /uspidus, but the

chelz compressed, with smooth sides and not so long; chele,

including the dactyl, twice as long as broad; the upper margin

sharper than the under and smooth, the under serrated. The

dactyl halfas long as the palma; the back of the dactyl keeled,

serrated. Length from tip of rostrum to tip of telson 12 mm.

Length of third pereilopod 13 mm. Breadth of chela 3 mm.

The fourth pereiopod shorter than third.”

I note the following peculiarities in my specimens: Dorsal

surface of rostrum with six teeth ; the fourth and sixth have each

a minute subsidiary tooth. ‘Ventral surface with a single, not

very prominent tooth. Both margins of the chele of the third

pereiopods very finely serrated, a rather prominent keel on the

upper margin. The third pereiopod of the right and left sides

similar. Telson spiny. The large specimen (¢) is 15 mm.

long, the ¢ slightly smaller ‘Length of ‘chelz in jo, "6 mm:

breadth, 2.5 mm.

Not having the opportunity of comparing the Bahama speci-

mens with Von Martens’ type I prefer to consider these slight

variations as possibly due to imperfect description, and to place

my specimens, provisionally, at least, with Von Martens’ species.

S. semilevis differs from S. /aspidus mainly in the teeth of

rostrum, the shorter rostrum, the proportionately shorter and

thicker hand, the less spiny carapace of cephalo-thorax and the

smooth abdomen.

52. stenopus scutellatus n: sp, (PE xa Mig. 3):

(z) 1(?) &. Under coral, near low water, Silver Cay, N. P.

Total length from tip of rostrum to tip of thorax 18 mm.

Length of rostrum 3 mm., of cephalo-thorax 7 mm.

Rostrum has a single row of ten spines on median dorsal line;

back of the tenth a double row of three spines extend to

the cervical furrow. On median ventral line of rostrum are six

spines ; 20 lateral spines on rostrum. Rostrum longer than in

BAHAMA CRUSTACEA. 243

S. juspidus, extending beyond the peduncle of inner antenne.

Whole surface of carapace covered with delicate spines obscurely

arranged in rows; usually curved forward, with a somewhat re-

flexed tip. Spines on dorsal surface of first two abdominal seg-

ments short and straight in a double row pointing forwards ; on

third segment several rows, stouter, pointing outwards ; on the

fourth, fifth and sixth segments spines are longer, pointing back-

wards. In the middle of the posterior portion of the tergum of

the third abdominal segment there is a polished, slightly ele-

vated, shield-shaped area, with crenulated margins, about I mm.

in length. The median tergal region of fourth segment is

smooth and polished, surrounded by a row of appressed spines,

the same being true to a less extent of the fifth segment. I

have taken the specific name from this peculiar scutellar area on

the third abdominal segment. This feature seems to corre-

spond to a triangular but less prominent area on the similar

segment in S. /zspzdus which is prolonged into a smooth dorsal

ridge on the next segment.

Telson lance-shaped, with a double row of spines between

which is a longitudinal groove about as long as the uropodal

lamellz, which are finely serrated on their margins, and, as the

telson, fringed with stiff hairs.

Eyes on short peduncles which are armed above with three

short spines projecting over the cornea, and with a few spines

at the anterior margin. Cornea (in alcoholic specimen) bluish-

black. Inner antennz ; peduncle with a few weak spines at

distal end of segments. Outer antennz ; peduncles with strong,

forwardly projecting spines. Scale lined on inner margin with

long, closely set hairs and prolonged into a ciliated bristle.

Flagella more than twice the length of body. Third maxillipedes

when extended reach a little further than extremity of rostrum ;

the three distal segments about equal in length.

First pair pereiopods wanting in my specimen. Second pair

slender, chelate, segments of equallength. Third pair of similar

proportions to those in S. szspidus; chele 7 mm. long; pro-

podos laterally compressed and somewhat triangular in cross

section, broad above; on the dorsal margin a double row of

244 RANKIN.

eleven spines each, on the ventral margin a single row of nine

spines ; two or three rows of minute spines on lateral surfaces.

A number of long, soft hairs over the fingers, especially at the

tips. Hands of the two chelapods similar in size. Carpus and

ischium together about equal to propodos, each armed with

rows of spines. Fourth pair long and slender ; dactylus bifid ;

propodos slightly spiny, one-half length of carpus. Carpus

and propodos obscurely articulated. Fifth pair pereiopods un-

developed: Pleopods biramous, except first, with two or three

spines each on the protopodite.

From the single specimen at my disposal I would compare

this species with S. “zspidus as follows: Rostrum proportion-

ately longer (nearly % length of cephalothorax, in x. sp. (¥% in

hispidus), longer than peduncle of inner antenne. Six ventral

teeth (/zspidus none), no lateral teeth, single dorsal row of ten

teeth (Azspidus six). Flagella of outer antenne fully twice the

length of body; proportion 2:1 for x. sp., 7:5 for sespidus.

Tergum of third abdominal segment with shield-shaped area.

Third maxillipedes proportionately shorter than in /zspidus.

Spines on cephalothorax equally long, but less rigid than in

hispidus, giving in general a less thorny character to the new

species.

EUCIPHIDEA.

Family Palemonide Bate.

53. Palemon savignyi (Bate).

Brachycarpus savignyt Bate, Challenger, Macrura, p. 795, PI.

ZO, LOSS,

Ortmann, Zool. Jahrb., Bd. V, p. 727.

(2) 1 specimen. Near Nassau, N. P., Febr., ’go.

(6) 1 specimen. Nassau, N. P., 1890.

Bate’s specimen was from Bermuda, ‘in shallow water.”

“This is the most northern limit of genus Palemon,” Ort-

mann.

The species has not been described from any other localities.

BAHAMA CRUSTACEA. 245

54. Leander northropi n. sp. (Pl. xxx, Fig. 4).

(2) I specimen. Nassau, N. P., Jan., 1890.

A single specimen with a total length of 30 mm. Length

of cephalothorax to tip of rostrum I1I.5 mm.

Cephalothorax with small tooth below orbit and a very

minute tooth below this and a little back from the anterior

margin on the lateral surface.

Length of rostrum to posterior end of orbit 7 mm., slightly

curved upwards toward apex. Jez teeth above, four below ; the

first dorsal tooth forms with the tip of rostrum a bifid extremity.

A long interval between first and second tooth ; interval between

second and third one-third the length of that between first and

second ; fourth, fifth and sixth teeth follow at slightly diminish-

ing intervals, the sixth being over the posterior part of orbit of

eye. Seventh, erghth and ninth teeth close together, posterior to

orbit of eye.

The first ventral tooth is a little in front of second dorsal,

second ventral below second dorsal ; third and fourth at equal

intervals between second ventral and orbit of eye.

Inner antenne: Peduncle reaches beyond second ventral

tooth of rostrum ; proximal segment about equal to the two

distal. Upper flagellum bifid; united proximal portion of 14

segments ; the shorter branch has 12 segments; united there-

fore for more than half its length. The longer branch reaches

beyond the undivided flagellum.

Outer antenne: Scaphocerite with lamellar portion slightly

longer than spinose, reaches beyond first ventral tooth of ros-

trum; flagellum exceeds the length of the body.

Third pair maxillipedes reach to end of peduncle of inner an-

tenne.

First and second pereiopods: Long, slender and chelate ;

second longer than first ; chela in second as long as carpus.

Third and fourth pereiopods terminate in claws.

Pleopods, biramous, setose. Telson, lanceolate, 4 mm.

long, noticeably shorter than uropods, distal extremity with

two sharp spines. Outer uropod imperfectly divided trans-

versely, the proximal division ending in a lateral spine.

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. Sci., XI, August 13, 1898—17.

246 RANKIN.

This species is allied to L. petttinga F. Muller, from Brazil

(see Ortmann, Revista do Museu Paulista, I, p. 191, 1897) and

to L. maculatus Thallwitz (Abh. Mus. Dresd., III, p. 19, 1891)

from West Africa.

I am indebted to Dr. Ortmann for the preparation of the fol-

lowing table, which exhibits the relationship :

L. maculatus. L. northropi. | L. petitinga.

{ 12-13 segments united 14 segments united | ( 9 segments united

{| 8 segments free. I2 segments free. | { 20 segments free.

Bet tse Par ag fia posterior ory apostenior 61+1(1 pestenioy

3 |: «to orbit: Ae ale, to,orbit: 5—6 to orbit.

Inner antennze

Family Hippolytide Ortmann.

55. Tozeuma carolinense Kingsley.

Kingsley : Proc. Acad. Nat. Se Phila; p. 90,713 76:

(2) 19. with ova. Dredged in about 16 ft. Near Quaran-

tine station, Jan. 90.

Kingsley’s specimens are from Fort Macon and Beaufort, N.

C., and Charlotte Harbor Fla.

Measurements of Bahama specimen: total length 41 mm.,

rostrum 12 mm., cephalothorax (without rostrum) 7 mm.,

abdomen 22 mm.

Family Alpheide Bate.

56. Alpheus edwardsii (Audouin).

Athanas edwardsii Audouin; Planches de la descrip. de

Egypte par, M. Savigny, Crust. El xeefis) fon io.£0:

Bate, Challenger, Macrura, p. 542, 1888.

(2) 4 specimens. Near Nassau, N. P., along shore, Febr. 20,

"QO. |

(2) 1 specimen. Nassau, N. P., Jan., 90.

New Providence.

BAHAMA CRUSTACEA. 247

(2) 1 specimen. Under coral and in pools between tides,

Nassau, N. P., Jan., ’9o.

(e) 2 broken. Near Nassau, N. P., Febr., ’go.

The distribution of this species is circumtropical.

57. Alpheus hippothoe, De Man.

var. bahamensis, n. var. (Pl. xxx, Fig. 5).

(a) 24 specimens. Under coral and in pools between tides,

New Providence.

(6) 3 specimens, one with ova. Nassau, N. P., Jan., ’go.

This species is most closely allied to the variety edamensis of

Alpheus hippothoé De Man, from the Bay of Bengal and Indian

Archipelago (Arch. de Naturg., Bd. 53, p. 518, 1887). Iam

indebted to Dr. Ortmann for a communication from Prof. De

Man comparing specimens from my material with his own /zp-

pothoé. As there are certain differences between the West and

East Indian specimens I propose to make a new variety for the

West Indian.

Total length from rostrum to telson, largest 24 mm., smallest

15 mm. _ Rostrum reaches nearly to end of first segment of in-

ner antenna, sharp, laterally compressed, prolonged backwards

as a distinct keel. Between keel and the prominent eyes a

rounded depression. No ocular spines.

Inner antenne: First joint of peduncle with small spine on

outer surface ; second joint nearly twice the length of proximal ;

terminal joint one-half the length of second. Shorter flagellum

about the length of peduncle. Longer flagellum slender, about

thrice the length of shorter.

Outer antennze: Peduncle a little longer than that of inner,

small spine on basal joint. Flagellum one third longer than

long ramus of inner antenna, spinose portion of scaphocerite a

little longer than the peduncle. Flabellar portion (scale) a

trifle shorter ; not quite so long as the peduncle.

Third pair of maxillipedes do not reach beyond end of

peduncle of the outer antenne.

First pair pereiopods: Large chela of largest specimen has a

248 RA NKIN.

length of 18 mm., of smallest specimen 8 mm. The large chela

has a somewhat quadrangular depression on the outer surface,

the distal end of which is continued upwards into a well-marked

depression on the dorsal margin and extends backward as a

groove along the inside of the dorsal surface. A distinct, but

less marked depression on the ventral margin. Inner surface

of the hand slightly hairy, outer surface nearly smooth. Fingers

contorted, color in alcoholic material pale blue. Movable finger

slightly longer than thumb. In the small chelapod, which may

be on the right or left side, the finger is one-third the length of

palm. Carpus of chelapods short. Meros triangular in section ;

ends distally in a sharp spine on the outer and inner angle.

Distal end of meros reaches to end of peduncle of outer an-

tenne.

Second pair of pereiopods very long. Distal end of meros

reaches beyond antennal peduncle. First and second joints

of carpus sub-equal, each a little longer than third and

fourth together. Third and fourth sub-equal. Fifth about

two-thirds length of first; equal in length to fourth and fifth

together. Finger about one-half length of thumb. (Fifth

joint a little too short in figure.)

Third and fourth pereiopods short and stout, not quite reach-

ing to distal end of meros of second. Length of meros less

than three times its breadth. Carpus one half length of meros.

Loth carpus and meros with spines on lower margin of distal end.

Propodos serrated on posterior surface.

Fifth pair of pereiopods shorter and more slender. Telson

with median furrow. Twosmall spines on either side of furrow.

Outer plate of uropod minutely serrated on end. A sharp spine

on its outer distal angle.

Principal variations from A. ippothoé—

In new variety: Peduncle of outer antennz longer than that

of inner. Lamellar portion does not reach end of peduncle.

Third maxillipedes do not reach beyond antennal peduncle.

Relative lengths of carpal joints of seeond pereiopods differ.

Variations from var. edamensis—

Finger of small hand shorter than palm (longer in eda-

BAHAMA CRUSTACEA. 249

mensis). A quadrangular rather than a triangular depression

on side of large hand.

First joint of carpus of second pereiopod is equal in length to

second (shorter in edamensis). Third and fourth pereiopods

less broad than in edamenszs.

58. Alpheus websteri Kingsley.

Kingsley, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil., p. 416, 1879.

(2) 3 specimens, one with ova. Along shore, near Nassau,

eet acs) Pet. 20;,'9O.

(0) 2 specimens, one with ova. Nassau, N. E.,: jan, » 56% "GO,

Kingsley’s type specimens were from Key West; it has been

reported by Herrick from Nassau, N. P.

A. websteri is very probably the same as A. formosus Gibbs

(Proc. Amer. Ass. Ad. Sci., p. 196, 1850). The descriptions

apparently tally, though Gibbs makes no mention of the small

black spine on the uropod which is mentioned as a character-

istic feature by Kingsley and which is very evident in my speci-

mens.

59. Alpheus nigro-spinatus n. sp. (Pl. xxx, Fig. 6).

(2) Two specimens. Under coral and in pools between tides,

New Providence.

Carapace compressed. Rostrum short, acuminate, no longer

than spines of ocular hoods; extended backwards as a ridge

between the eyes, from each of which it is separated by a

rounded depression. Spines of ocular hoods short, acuminate.

The front of carapace is thus marked by three, nearly equal,

small spines. Inner antenne: Basal segment of peduncle with

small spine (stylocerite) ; second and third segments, no spines

but scattered hairs ; second segment a little more than twice as

long as the terminal ; outer flagellum stouter and shorter than

the inner. Outer antenne: Outer angle of the basal joint of

peduncle with a sharp, short spine ; scaphocerite broad at base,

outer margin produced into a strong spine which is longer than

the inner, lamellar portion ; distal end of terminal segment of

250 RANKIN.

peduncle reaches to tip of scaphocerite. Third pair of maxilli-

pedes reach about to the end of shorter flagellum of inner an-

tennz ; strongly tufted with hair.

First pair of pereiopods: Larger hand much inflated, a

slight, but distinct constriction on the upper margin near the

articulation of the dactylus, and a deep constriction on the

lower margin. Thumb contorted; a groove on the outer

margin, the inner surface thickly covered with hairs and punc-

tate. Dactylus contorted; extends slightly beyond thumb ;

inner surface with tufts of hair. Small hand (which on the

one specimen is left, the other right) has a longer and more

slender dactylus and thumb. Length of large hand 16 mm. ;

breadth 6.5mm. Length of small hand gmm.; breadth 4 mm.

Second pair of pereiopods: Carpus five-jointed, proximal

segment the longest, slightly longer than the second and

third together; second and fifth segments each a little longer

than one-half the length of first ; third and fourth the shortest,

subequal. Posterior pereiopods; meros without spines. Tel-

son broadly triangular; extremity truncate; two small spines

on either side of median line of dorsal surface ; the outer ramus

of uropod bears on its external distal angle a large, very black

spine, which is distinguished from the similar black spine of A.

webstert Kingsley (I. c., p. 416, 1879) by its much larger size

and consequently more prominent appearance. Length of

specimens 25 mm. and 22 mm. respectively.

60. Alpheus minor Say.

Say,. Jour, Acad. Nat. Ser. *Philesbypeds moma:

Kingsley, Bull. U: S. Geol.-Survey, PV; p90, 2375.

Bate, Challenger, Macrura, p. 558, Pl. C, 1888.

(a) numerous specimens, from brown sponges.

(6) 1 9 with ova. | Along shore near Nassau, N. P., Febr.

20; 00.

Range :-- Prom/;Gape Hatteras: (U> Si eG re rees)) stoma

Paul’s Rock (Bate, Challenger). Both shores of Central America.

Collected at Jamaica, New Providence.

BAHAMA CRUSTACEA. 201

Lot (c) may possibly be a variety as the thumb is shorter than

the typical szzzor, but otherwise there seems to be no difference.

61. Alpheus saulcyi Guerin.

Guerin, in Hist. du Cuba, 1857.

Herrick, Memoires Nat. Acad. Sci., Vol. V, p. 381.

(2) 5 specimens, from green sponges. Febr. ’go.

(0) I specimen, near Nassau, Febr. 5, 90.

(2) 1 specimen, from sponge, Mar. 1, ’9o.

(¢) I specimen, from sponge, Mar. 1, go.

(/) 2 specimens, Nassau, N. P., Jan., ’9o.

Range: West Indies.

Found at Nassau, Martinique.

62. Athanas ortmanni n. sp. (PI. xxx, Fig. 7).

(2) I specimen. Along shore, near Nassau, N. P., Febr.

20; "QO.

Rostrum slender and pointed, reaching a little beyond the

second joint of peduncle of inner antenne. Antero-lateral

margin of carapace extends obliquely backward, prolonged in

front of eye into minute spine. Eye-stalk short, not project-

ing beyond carapace. The eye is seen through the somewhat

transparent carapace as in A/pheus. Inner antenne, with stylo-

cerite reaching to distal end of second segment of peduncle.

From the peduncle arise two flagella of nearly equal length, the

upper somewhat more slender than the lower, bearing on the

fourth segment from base a minute, subsidiary flagellum.

Outer antennz with scaphocerite nearly as long as the pedun-

cles of inner antenne, broad and fringed with hairs. Third

pair of maxillipedes reach slightly beyond the distal end of

scaphocerite.

First pair of pereiopods: That on the right side is robust

with swollen chela, terminating in slender hooked fingers

which are minutely serrated on the opposing edges. Mar-

gin of chela entire, length 5 mm., breadth 2.5 mm. Carpus

252 RANKIN.

short. Distal end of meros reaches to extremity of third pair

maxillipedes. Left chelapod lacking.

Second pair of pereiopods slender, with very small chele.

Carpus five-jointed; proximal segment equal in length to

the four distal segments. Remaining three pairs of perieopods

similar to each other and equal in length to the second

pair. Pleopods narrow and biramous. Telson narrow and

compressed, with smooth margins. Uropods slightly longer

than telson.

Total length of specimen 16 mm.

The species above described agrees generically with Athanas

Leach (Edin. Ency., VIII, p. 432), with the exception that the

eyes are entirely covered by the carapace. I propose, rather

than found a new genus on the single specimen, to amend Leach’s

definition of A¢thanas by changing the statement, ‘‘ Opthalmopoda

short, scarcely reaching beyond frontal margin of carapace ”’

(Bate, Challenger, Macrura, p. 528), to ophthalmopoda short,

covered by, or scarcely reaching beyond the frontal margin of

Car apace.

There are four hitherto described species of Athanas :

A. nitiscens Leach. England and Norway, Mediterranean to

Cape Verde Islands.

A. veloculus Bate (1. c., p. 529). Cape Verde Islands.

A. mascarenicus Richters (Beitrage zur Meeresfauna von

Mauritius u. d. Seychellen, p. 164, 1880), Mauritius.

A. dimorphus Ortmann, Crust. in Semon’s Forschungsreise

(Jena. Denks., VIII, 1894, p.12). East Africa: Dar-es-Salaam.

From all these species A. ortmanni may be distinguished at a

glance by the form of the large chela.

PENIDEA.

Family Peneide Bate.

63. Penzeus constrictus Stimpson.

Stimpson, Ann. Lyc. Nat. Hist: aaiay., p. 145, 1271:

Miers, Notes on the Penzidz, Proc. Zool. Soc., London,

p. 308, 1878.

BAHAMA CRUSTACEA. 253

(2) 1%. Near Nassau, N. P., Febr. 1, 1890.

(6) 29. Nessa NoPy Pebr..5,.’oe

Range: East Coast U. S.

Not before reported from West Indies.

Collected by Stimpson at Beaufort, and Charleston, S. C.

STOMATOPODA.

Family Squillide Latreille.

64. Pseudosquilla ciliata Miers.

hers, Ann: atid Map. Nat. Hist:"(5),7V, p: 108, Pit,

1880. ¢

Brooks, Challenger, Stomatopoda, p. 53, 1886.

(2) 1% broken. Near Nassau, N. P., Febr., 1890.

Range: Widely distributed over Atlantic and Pacific.

Collected at Cuba, Bahamas, St. Thomas.

65. Gonodactylus oerstedii Hansen.

Hansen, Isopoden, Cumaceen und Stomatopoden der Plankton

expedition, 1895.

(2) 1 9. Nassau, N. -Pigiiebr. 5, ’90.

(6) 1 9, fragmentary. Quarantine station, near New Provi-

dence, Jan. 25, ’90.

fe) 1 9. Nassau. N. -P., tape oo.

(e)1 6,19, 1 fragmentary. Under coral and in pools

between tides, near Nassau, N. P.

by) ice. (label erased).

(g) 2juv. Dredged in about 16 ft. near Quarantine station,

Jan., ’90.

Hansen, |. c. supra, p. 65 (and footnote), calls the West

Indian Gonodactylus : G. oerstedi n. sp. and retains the name G.

chiragra Fabr. for the East Indian form.

He says (footnote): ‘‘This species (oerstediz) may be dis-

tinguished from the East Indian form, G. chivagra Fabr., espe-

cially by the character, that it possesses a small keel inside of

254 RANKIN.

and ‘close to, the keel that ends in the sublateral process of the

posterior margin, while such a secondary keel is wanting in the

Indo-Australian species.”’

Collected at Bahamas, Cuba, Jamaica, St. Thomas.

CIRRIPEDEA

Family Lepadide Darwin.

66. Lithotrya dorsalis Sowerby.

Sowerby, Genera of Shells, Apr., 1822.

Darwin, A Monograph of the Cirripedia, p. 351, Pl. VIII,

1851.

(az) 10 specimens. Salt Cay, N. P., in rocks in surf, Jan. 28,

"90. .

(6) 8 specimen. Salt Cay, Nassau, N. P., ocean side, Febr. 6,

1890.

Range: West Indies, Venezuela, Honduras.

Collected at Barbadoes.

Family Balanide Darwin.

67. Acasta cyathus Darwin.

Darwin, A Monograph of the Cirripedia-Balanide, p. 312,

Pix 1854:

(a) 4 specimens, in sponge, dredged Jan. 22, ’go.

(7) 2 specimens, near Nassau; IN. P_ ebm, “ge:

Range: Madeira, West Indies (Darwin).

{SOPODA:

Two species of Isopoda, one probably a Lygza of which there

are several specimens. Another parasitic on a fish, probably one

of the Czvolanide.

AMPHIPODA.

Several small amphipods undetermined.

PRINCETON UNIVERSITY,

April, 1898.

PLATE XXX

Fig. 1. Stenopus hispidus (Latrei.ie)

Fig. 2. Stenopus semilevis, Von Martens

Fig. 3. Stenopus scutellatus n. sp., Rankin

(256 )

PAGE,

240

241

242

od; N. Y

PLATE :

pesssce syn We

coos om

Nios

4, fy iT i

ua ey

SX > aa

Reber, cel.

DMtadse oh er ane ol

RWeber, del.

ese SEE

oooh

peer

R.Weber, del.

Fig. 6.

hig. <7.

PLATE XXX.

Leander northropi n. sp., Rankin

Alpheus hippothoe Dre Man

var. bahamensis n. var., RANKIN

Alpheus nigro-spinatus n. sp., RANKIN

Athanas ortmanni n. sp., RANKIN

( 258 )

PAGE.

245

247

249

251

ANNALS, N. R. ACAD. SCI., XI. PLATE XXX.

SS 1th ff a

Seen Ge ;

Cg Ue S-

Ski ee pe i

iets ue oy,

7 Wal ios . — mc =

SEER SOUGHT ete (2) 0 tyr

Meee fret ha i

ay ae ’ j rs

mp, 4 ak i? As an j .

ma ;

ans y ae ae : <a

er oe preter wie 2 - tem sé > Ms

in ~~: ed

- ga ’ a

aie *

= . ; “ h 2 of

Fi Re cpa

7 + ¥ , - wy ‘ °

Pome haben ante. 3 y

a ry > .

Ir, Oke ales Sein 3) uty

yee oe eee %: , Mia hd

eee cee YS Ree Eth ATTN. OF TPE

esas ies wife eae The oa Jt galjatc

gmhtte a , Pet Dakin epldee

“Eo z anh ad »

eS ae eae ea cds 30d at

exe: ths tee > DEVE

ay Mure xh asnwaines

= “e- > ys jan t=, i

Balatiehing @ ehh

ray 4 high eteie, 3 oy aft ache! SxS oe

* : valved ;

Fi a

eres BLnicees stor PA ops

= oi ;

sa A

Je faut df Bens “at

ers ee pat a $I moe! i o

Q ; +s . 4 z . a a 2 fa Cre em '

. Gin oy Lamy 3 leone ve 33 0 tas rs , ;

oe . x4 4 =

Pes g is y Go he rvs

AS by ores ap” Pie S pene Rcrlacae Loe

a . } , - oe A

ae ree ete teh ht west es tet ~ ae oa VA

AUMLMT 2; =) dd eee to whi Tose 1 e

cgay ye £¢ no oes ag

LB VA . ~~ = ; ; >

2° iy er 2 7 > 7° * <

ioe y ae : 2 x) IFO ae roe iy ye f . pas 2

ee ots <a Pas

yates antes ys ee Ds cs

es a ;

Set (rant Sire ors mat seta eee mt

7 hw }

Ateey ae ox | at art ve ae Wir i”

260 CALMAN.

Lophozozymus bellus (Stimpson).

Trichocarcinus oregonensis (Dana).

Telmessus cheiragonus (Tilesius).

Heterograpsus nudus (Dana).

Heterograpsus oregonensis (Dana).

Pinnixa faba (Dana).

Scyra acutifrons Dana.

Hyas lyratus Dana.

Oregonia gracilis Dana.

Epialtus productus Randall.

Pugettia gracilis Dana.

Philyra pisum De Haan.

Eupagurus ochotensis Brandt.

middendorffii Brandt.

se tenuimanus (Dana).

- splendescens (Owen).

: granosimanus Stimpson.

Zh kennerlyi Stimpson (?)

A newcombei Benedict (?)

Cryptolithodes typicus Brandt.

Hapalogaster mertensii Brandt.

Petrolisthes cinctipes (Randall).

Pachycheles rudis Stimpson.

Callianassa gigas Dana.

Upogebia pugettensis (Dana).

Sclerocrangon munitus (Dana).

Crangon franciscorum Stimpson.

Crangon affinis De Haan.

Nectocrangon alaskensis Kingsley

Paracrangon echinatus Dana.

Pandalus Dane Stimpson.

SIpbelyee prionota Stimpson.

gracilis Stimpson.

= sitchensis Brandt.

3 greenlandica (Fabr. ).

as brevirostris Dana.

4 lamellicornis Dana.

i stylus Stimpson.

PUGET SOUND CRUSTACEA. 261

ISOPODA.

Livoneca vulgaris Stimpson.

Cirolana californica Hansen. (?)

Limnoria lignorum (Rathke).

Idotea Wossnessenskii Brandt.

“* — resecata Stimpson.

Ligia Pallasii Brandt.

Pseudione Giardi n. sp.

Argeia sp. (?)

Phyllodurus abdominalis Stimpson.

AMPHIPODA.

Hyperia galba Mont.

Orchestoidea californiana (Brandt).

Polycheria Osborni n. sp.

Mera dubia n. sp.

Amphithoe humeralis Stimpson.

Amphithoe sp. (?)

COPEPODA.

Cecrops Latreillei Leach.

CIRRIPEDIA.

Pollicipes polymerus Sowersby.

Coronula diadema (L.).

RHIZOCEPHALA.

Sylon sp.

The following additional species occurred in Professor

D’Arcy Thompson’s collections :

Raphonotus (—Fabia) subquadratus Dana.

Paguristes turgidus Stimpson.

Echinocerus cibarius White.

Phyllolithodes papillosus Brandt.

Callianassa californiensis Dana.

ANNALS N. Y. AcaD. Sci., XI, August 13, 1898—18.

262 CALMAN.

BRACHYURA.

Cancer productus Randall.

Cancer productus Randall, Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci., Philadelphia,

Vat O: T3630,

Cancer productus Dana, U. S. Expl. Exp. Crust; 1) 156, 32)

Wile... aloes

Cancer productus Stimpson, Boston Jour. Nat. Hist., VI, 461.

1857.

Cancer productus Lockington, Proc. Calif. Acad: Sci., VII, 95.

TO 7 7

One of our specimens has the carapace handsomely orna-

mented with a complex pattern of narrow red lines ona yellow-

ish ground. ‘The general direction of the lines is longitudinal,

interrupted here and there by narrow, more or less symmetrical

loopings. A series of three lines runs parallel to the antero-

lateral margin, and at the front end converge, together with the

adjacent longitudinal lines into the orbit. Lockington (1. c.) de-

scribes several color-varieties of this species from Monterey, Cal.,

one of which is “yellow with narrow red stripes, giving it a

zebra-like appearance.’’ This is no doubt the variety before us,

though the complexity of the pattern is hardly sufficiently indi-

cated by the epithet “zebra-like.” Miss M. S. Rathbun has

been good enough to inform me that there are similar specimens

‘in the U. S. National Museum at Washington.

Philyra pisum De Haan.

Philyra pisum De Haan, Fauna Japonica, Crust., 131, Pl. xxxiii,

ig: c/o Oso:

Philyra prsum Ortmann, Zool.” Jahrb: Abth sf. Syst, -vV lepez

1892.

A single male specimen lacking both chelipeds and some of

the ambulatory legs is referred to this species. I have been

able to compare it with two specimens dredged in Yokohama

Bay by Professor D’Arcy Thompson, and also with three speci-

mens from the Strassburg Museum identified by Dr. Ortmann

(1. c.) and sent to us by the great kindness of Professor L.

PUGET SOUND CRUSTACEA. 263

Doderlein, by whom they were collected in the same neighbor-

hood. The resemblance in both cases is so exceedingly close

that in spite of the imperfection of the Puget Sound specimen I

have no hesitation in adding P. pzszm to the list of species in-

habiting both sides of the North Pacific. It is recorded from

Japan by De Haan and Ortmann, and Mr. R. I. Pocock informs

me that there is a specimen in the British Museum from the

Philippine Islands.

MACRURA.

PAGURID.

The great number of closély allied species of Aupagurus oc-

curring in the region under consideration, and the imperfect

manner in which many of them have as yet been described, ren-

der the determination of the species a matter of difficulty in the

absence of named specimens for comparison. In this respect I

have derived great assistance from a valuable collection of ma-

rine invertebrates recently presented to the museum of Univer-

sity College by the Smithsonian Institution. In one or two of

the cases where this help was not available I have marked with

a query the names of species whose identification did not appear

to be beyond doubt. The largest and commonest species of

Lupagurus in Puget Sound, at first referred to as £. alaskensis

Benedict in Messrs. Harrington and Griffin’s paper on the Inver-

tebrates of Puget Sound Uirats. No. Yo-riead. Sci, 1897, 159)

is apparently, as mentioned in Mr. Harrington’s paper on com-

mensal nereids (ibid., p. 214), the &. armatus of Dana, which,

however, Stimpson has identified with the earlier EF. ochotensis of

Brandt (Stimpson, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil., 1858, p. 236).

LITHODID#.

Cryptolithodes typicus, Brandt.

Cryptolithodes typicus Brandt, Bull. Phys. Math. de l’Acad. de

St. Petersbourg, VII, 175. 18409.

Cryptolithodes typicus Stimpson, Boston Jour. Nat. Hist., VI,

ae) Phe 18 57:

264 CALMAN.

The larger of the two specimens in the Columbia University

collection agrees with Stimpson’s figures and description of the

type species, save that the marginal serrations are almost obso-

lete. The second very small specimen, however, is strikingly

different in general appearance. The carapace is approximately

triangular, the postero-lateral margins being nearly in a straight

line, while the orbital notches are shallower, and the truncated

rostrum more prominent than in any other specimens we have

seen. A comparison of these and other specimens in the Mu-

seum of University College suggests the probability that some

at least of the described species of this genus are based on

characters varying with the age of the individual.

HIPPOLYTID®.

The generic name //zppolyte has been used in its older and

wider signification, since Spence Bate’s subdivision of the genus

(Challenger Rep. Macrura, p. 576) does not appear to be satis-

factory.

Hippolyte prionota Stimpson.

FH, prionota Stimpson, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., 1864. 153.

HI. prionota Kingsley, Bull. Essex Inst. XIV, (1882), 127,

PLATO. Aeo3:

Kingsley’s figure of this species shows the serrated dorsal

crest passing in an even curve into the rostrum. In our speci-

mens a slight depression separates the crest from the rostrum,

and the latter is more truncate at the tip. Kingsley’s figure

omits the three orbital spines which are characteristic of the

species.

Hyppolyte gracilis Stimpson.

Al; gracjus Sumpson, Proc; Acad: Nat. Scr Lhtlads 864 aaa

A single somewhat damaged specimen is probably referable

to this species. It differs from Stimpson’s description in the

fact that the most anterior of the four teeth on the rostrum

PUGET SOUND CRUSTACEA. 265

above is placed considerably in front of the eyes, while the ex-

ternal flagellum of the antennules falls short of the broken tip

of the rostrum. As was the case with Stimpson’s specimens,

no epipod could be discovered on the third maxillipeds.

Hippolyte stylus Stimpson.

FT, stylus Stimpson, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil., 1864. 154.

Our specimens differ from Stimpson’s diagnosis in the fact

that the third maxillipeds are slightly longer, reaching a little

beyond the extremity of the antennal peduncle to nearly the

middle of the rostrum. Some of the smaller specimens show

a minute pterygostomial spine, and in this respect resemble the

allied HY. camtschatica Stimpson. (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil.,

nooo. - 33.)

AMPHIPODA.

HYpPERIID.

Hyperia galba (Mont. ).

Cancer gammarus galba Montagu, Linn. Trans., XI, 4, Pl. ui, f. 2.

flyperia galba, Sars, Crust. Norway ; I—Amphipoda, p. 7, PI.

Two specimens (gand 9) agree very well with British ex-

amples of this somewhat variable species which has not hitherto

been recorded from the Pacific.

ORCHESTIID.

Orchestoidea californiana (Brandt).

(Phe ot. Bigt. 1.)

Maltlorchesta calforniana Brandt, Bull. Phys. Math. Acad.

tnip:. Se., St. Petersburey-DX5| 310-314. ' 1851.

Oychesna’(Tatttrus\ scatvipes’ Dana, U. S.' Ex. Exp. Crust.

om oOo? Ele S27) fast Len

Megalorchestia scabripes Stimpson, Bost. Jour. Nat. Hist.

WESTOP rs 57.

266 CALMAN.

MM. californiana, Ibid.

Orchestoidea scabripes Spence Bate, Cat. Amph. Brit. Mus. II,

Pav uleetie 3." a 802:

O. californiana, Ibid., p. 14.

Description of Male.—Body robust, glabrous, lower edges of

coxal and epimeral plates and all the appendages scabrid with

short stiff seta. Fifth pair of coxal plates having the anterior

lobe larger than the posterior, angled below, while the posterior

lobe is evenly rounded. Eyes slightly reniform, black. Su-

perior antenne not reaching the middle of the penultimate joint

of the inferior, the three joints of the peduncle subequal, flagel-

lum g-jointed, hardly longer than half the peduncle. Inferior

antennz longer than the body and very stout. Last joint of

the peduncle twice as long as the preceding, increasing in thick-

ness to within a short distance of its distal end, the greatest

thickness being nearly one-fifth of the length of the joint.

Flagellum more than one and a-half times as long as the pe-

duncle. Palp of maxillipeds three-jointed, second joint ex-

panded inwards as a flat plate, last joint ovate. Inner plate

with three conical teeth on distal margin. Anterior gnatho-

pods not subchelate, carpus broader and much longer than

the propodus, and having a large tubercle projecting from

its lower or posterior edge near the distal-end. Propodus

cylindrical, having a slight swelling on its lower or posterior

face distally. Posterior gnathopods very large, carpus small,

propodus ovate, palmar edge oblique and not sharply defined

from the posterior edge of hand, bearing a low rounded setose

eminence near the articulation of the dactyl, and on the prox-

imal side of this armed with about six short spines with inter-

vening sete. Dactyl strong, somewhat sharply curved near

the base. Claw of second pereiopod bearing at about the

middle of its concave side a blunt tooth, from within which

springs a small seta. On the posterior legs the tooth is obso-

lete, but the seta remains. First pair of uropods having the

rami subequal, not much shorter than the peduncle, both bear-

ing spines on their outer and inner edges. Last pair of uro-

pods having the single ramus lanceolate and longer than the

peduncle. Telson small, triangular, rounded at the tip.

PUGET SCGUND CRUSTACEA. 267

Length, 25 mm., superior antennz 30 mm.

The identity of our species with that described by Brandt can

hardly be doubted on comparing his characteristic though some-

what rough figure of the entire animal. His detailed figures

are less successful, and in some points so obviously erroneous

that we cannot attribute much weight to the discrepancies they

show. The most important character in which our specimens

differ from both description and figures is the absence from the

palp of the maxillipeds of the minute unguiculate terminal joint

on which Brandt lays stress as one of the distinctive characters

of hisnew genus. It seems to us, however, that the resemblance

in other details, especially in the antennz and gnathopods, war-

rants our assuming an error of observation or possibly an ab-

normal specimen to account for the difference in the maxillipeds.

Our specimens agree closely with Dana’s description and fig-

ures of his Orchestia (Taltrus) scabripes, in general aspect and

relative proportions, in the shape and size of the two pairs of

enathopods, and in the scabrous character of the limbs. They

differ, however, in the length of the last joint of the peduncle of

the inferior antennz. Dana states this joint to be “more than

twice the preceding in length,” and his figure (of which a very

faulty reproduction is given in Cat. Amph. Brit. Mus., Pl. I, f.

3), shows the proportion to be 2.7:1, while the diameter is one-

tenth of the length. In our specimens this joint is only very

slightly more than twice the length of the preceding, and its

diameter is one-fifth of its length. A minor point of difference

is that Dana states the outer ramus of the first pair of uropods

to be naked. In our specimens both rami are equally furnished

with sete.

Stimpson, who may have examined specimens referred to both

species, records them as distinct, stating that Brandt’s species

differs from Dana’s ‘‘ among other characters in the great length

of the fifth epimeral,” a. point on which Brandt’s figure is

obscure, while our specimens agree perfectly with Dana’s.

Stimpson also states that the feet of J calforniana are not

scabrous. It seems to us, however, that our present knowledge

entitles us to regard the species as synonymous, on the probable

268 CALMAN.

assumption that the last peduncular joint of the antenne may

vary somewhat in length.

Brandt’s species formed the type of his genus J/egalorchestia,

and was transferred by Spence Bate to the synonymous Orches-

toidea of Nicolet. I have not been able to refer to Nicolet’s

work, but in his definition of the genus quoted in Stebbing’s

Challenger report (p. 231), it is stated that the palp of the max-

illipeds is four-jointed. Mr. Stebbing, however, informs me

that this is an error, the figure given by Nicolet showing that

only three joints are present. Zaftronus of Dana is another

synonym of Orchestoidea (Stebbing, of. cit., p. 262).

The female of O. californiana has not been identified. It seems

not improbable, as Mr. Stebbing has suggested to us, that

Dana’s O. pugettensis may prove to be the female, the scabrous

character of the legs in O. calforniana being the only character

which stands in the way of this supposition.

ATYLIDA. .

Polycheria osborni n. sp.

(Ply OO Bic. 2.)

This species closely resembles Polycheria antarctica (Steb-

bing),’ but differs from it in the following details :

The dorsal processes of the urosome are much less promi-

ment (ign 2257777):

In the maxillipeds the outer plates are longer, nearly equalling

the palps and bearing each only about eleven spines on the inner

edge (instead of 18-19).

The propodus of the first gnathopods is somewhat differently

shaped, the palmar edge, against which the dactyl closes, being

very short, not more than one-third the length of the dactyl.

In the second pair of gnathopods the hand is more than twice

1 Dexamine antarctica Stebbing, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (4) XV, 184, Pl. XV,

A. f 1.3; 7riteta Kergueleni, Stebbing. Challenger Report Amphipoda, pp. 941-

945, Pl. LXXXIIL; Polycheria antarctica (Stebb.) Della Valle. Monogr.

Gamm, 580.

PUGET SOUND CRUSTACEA. 269

as long as broad, and the palmar edge extends to about one-

half the length of the dactyl.

The coxal plates of the second pair of pereiopods, which in

P. antarctica resemble those of the first pair in being produced

anteriorly into a long sharp spine, are here different, and have

the anterior process reduced to a short blunt lobe.

The propodus of the third pereiopods differs in shape from that

of P. antarctica, the thumb-like process being much less promi-

nent and the anterior and posterior edges nearly parallel.

The first maxilla have the palp composed of only one joint,

but Della Valle has already pointed out (Monogr. Gammarini,

p. 579) that Stebbing was misled in ascribing a two-jointed palp

to P. antarctica.

Length, 7 mm.

8 specimens, all females bearing ova, “in nests in Amar-

@cium.”

The various other species of Polycheria which have been de-

scribed, are probably all referable to one, P. antarctica (Steb-

bing), with a wide distribution in the Southern Ocean (Kerguelen

Island, Antarctic Ocean, New Zealand, Australia). The occur-

rence of a second species in the Northern hemisphere is, there-

fore, interesting.

At the suggestion of Professor D’Arcy Thompson I have

dedicated this interesting species to Professor H. F. Osborn, of

Columbia University, New York.

GAMMARID.

Mera dubia n. sp.

(PL. Peete. Pig. 3°)

Description.— Body moderately slender and compressed,

sparsely covered with very small scattered sete. Lateral

lobes of head short, truncate. First pair of coxal plates pro-

duced forwards and pointed, slightly less deep than the cor-

responding segment. Fourth pair nearly twice as long as

deep, and about half as deep as the corresponding segment.

270 CALMAN.

Epimeral plates of metasome, each with a slight tooth at the

posterior lower corner. Eyes small, dark. Superior antenne

about half the length of the body ; first joint of peduncle about

one and a-half times as long as the head, short at the base and

tapering at the tip, where it is armed below with a small

spine ; second joint of equal length with the first, much more

slender ; third joint one-third the length of the second; flagel-

lum about two-thirds the length of the peduncle; accessory

flagellum about as long as the last joint of the peduncle, seven-

jointed. Inferior antennze not quite two-thirds the length of

the superior ; last joint of peduncle three-fourths the length of

the preceding and about equalling the short flagellum. An-

terior gnathopods of moderate size; hand scarcely broader

than, and equal in length to the carpus, ovate in form, the

palmar edge oblique and not sharply defined. Second gnatho-

pods large, merus produced into a sharp tooth at its lower dis-

tal corner. Carpus triangular, its distal margin equalling in

width the adjacent part of the propodus. Propodus oblong

quadrangular, twice as long as broad, anterior and posterior

margins slightly curved, palmar edge oblique, irregularly ser-

rate, defined by atooth. Dactyl equalling the palmar edge.

Both gnathopods with tufts of long sete especially on the mar-

gins. Last three pairs of peretopods with the basal joints ex-

panded, ovate, with the posterior edge almost smooth. Last

pair of uropods longer than the urosome, rami subequal, more

than twice as long as the peduncle.

enoth: oi 3mm.

The only species of amphipod hitherto described from the

west coast of North America which appears to resemble the

present form is the J/era fusca of Spence Bate (Proc. Zool.

Soc.. Lond.,'1864, p: 667). ‘The. few details oiven by tiak

writer render the recognition of the species very difficult. It is

stated, however, that the palmar edge of the gnathopods is with-

out serrations, a character which would seem to distinguish JZ.

fusca from the present species. Mr. Stebbing has called our

attention to several other species not very different in appear-

ance from the present. Of these Gammarus furcicornis Dana,

PUGET SOUND CRUSTACEA. og |

from the Sooloo Sea, is perhaps the one most closely approaching

ours. It differs, however, in the much longer accessory flagel-

lum of the upper antennz, the shorter and broader hand of the

second gnathopods, and the greater hairiness of body and limbs.

Having in view the great difficulty of recognizing with cer-

tainty many of the species indicated by the older authors in the

difficult group of Amphipoda to which this form belongs, we

have judged it best to give a new name to the species described

by us, for convenience of reference, at least until it can be shown

to be identical with some of the earlier species.

PODOCERID®.

Amphithoe humeralis Stimpson.

Amplithoé humerais Stimpson, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila-

delphia, 1864, p. 156.

Description.—Body rather compressed. Lateral lobes of

head very little prominent, rounded. Anterior pairs of coxal

plates about equal in depth to the corresponding segments ;

fourth pair large, quadrangular, the posterior lobe small and

rounded. Eyes small, rounded, close to lateral lobes of cepha-

lon, pigment dark. Superior antenne more than half the length

of the body ; first joint of peduncle stout, about equal in length

to the head and to the rather more slender second joint ; third

joint very small, about one quarter the length of the preceding,

and much narrower ; flagellum two and a-half times the length

of peduncle. Inferior antennz stout, more than half the length

of the superior, last joint of peduncle a little shorter than the

- preceding, flagellum a little more than half the length of peduncle.

Lower lip having the posterior cornu of outer lobe large. Palp

of mandible having last joint longer than the preceding, not ex-

panded. Outer lobe of second maxilla broader, but scarcely

longer than the inner. Palp of maxillipeds having the first joint

slightly produced exteriorly where it forms a distinct shoulder

tipped with a tuft of long sete; outer plates hardly reaching

beyond second joint of palp. Gnathopods similar in the two

272 CALMAN.

sexes, rather slender, and densely setose. First pair having the

carpus longer than the hand, its lower edge convex ; propodus

quadrangular, about two and a-half times as long as broad,

lower edge convex with a shallow concavity distally behind the

prominent anterior corner ; palmar edge very short, transverse,

overlapped by the serrated dactyl. Second pair of gnathopoda

having the carpus slightly longer than the propodus, its lower

edge produced into a rounded lobe; propodus hardly more

than twice as long as broad, shaped as in the first pair, palmar

edge somewhat longer but still shorter than the dactyl. First

and second pairs of pereiopods similar, basal joint expanded,

ovate, twice as long as broad ; merus with its anterior margin

expanded and regularly arcuate, produced distally in front and

overlapping the carpus for one-fourth of its length. Third pair

of pereiopods very short, fourth pair hardly extending to end of

carpus of fifth pair which are long and slender. Last pair of

uropods not reaching beyond the preceding pair, peduncle three

times as long as the rami, outer ramus with two strong hooks,

inner ramus lamellate, truncate, bearing sete. Telson triangular,

truncate, with a few setz on each side.

Length, about 26 mm.

The identity of this form with the species observed by Stimp-

son is at once suggested by his description of the first two pairs

of pereiopods, ‘‘with the basal joint very large and much ex-

panded, nearly as broad as their epimera; meros-joint in the

same pairs small, compressed, with a sharp arcuated anterior

margin.” The small size of the “subpediform’’ gnathopoda in

both sexes and other less characteristic points are quite in ac-

cordance with our specimens. On the other hand, the superior

antenna is stated to be ‘‘nearly as long as the body.” The in-

ferior antenna is ‘‘ half as long as the body, with its flagellum

no longer than the antepenult joint of the peduncle.’ Though

we should probably read “last’’ or “ penultimate’’ for “‘ante-

penult,” the length of flagellum indicated is still less than in our

specimens. It does not seem to us, however, that these dis-

crepancies are sufficiently important to prevent the identification

of our specimens with the species described by Stimpson.

PUGET SGQUND: CRUSTACEA. 273

The question whether Amp/ithoé humeralis may be identical

with some of the older species is one which it is not possible to

answer satisfactorily in the present state of our knowledge. Mr.

Stebbing (Chall. Rep. Amph., 351) compares it with Spence

Bate’s A. falklandi (Cat. Amph. Brit. Mus., 237, Pl. XLI, f. 6)

and he afterwards (op. cit., p. 1124) notes the resemblance be-

tween the latter species and Dana’s A. brevipes (U. S. Expl.

Exp. Crust., II, 941, Pl. 64, f. 5). A. falkland, however, dif-

fers, according to Spence Bate’s account, from the present spe-

cies in the fact that the last pair of uropods project much beyond

the preceding, while the last two pairs of pereiopoda are said to

be subequal. In A. brevipes Dana the posterior gnathopods of

the male are large and quite different in shape from those of the

present species.

Amphithoe sp.

A second species of Amp/ithoé is represented by an imperfect

female specimen about 18 mm. long. The coxal plates are

very large, about twice as deep as the corresponding segments.

Both pairs of antenne rather slender, upper pair half as long as

body, lower about two-thirds as long as upper. Flagellum

of lower pair about half as long as peduncle. Gnathopoda

stronger than in preceding species, second pair larger than first,

hands ovate, palm oblique and defined by a tooth. Second

pair of pereiopods (the first are missing) with basal joints not

expanded, merus not strongly arched in front. Fourth and

fifth pairs of pereiopods rather slender, subequal, with tufts of

long sete especially at tip of propodus. Body and appendages

sprinkled with minute reddish-brown pigment spots.

The single mutilated specimen offers no striking characters

to differentiate it from several of the other and imperfectly

known species, and indeed in this family the distinction of

species in the female sex are frequently so obscure that we can-

non venture on a more precise determination. It may be noted,

however, that in general aspect and particularly in the long

sete of the posterior pereiopods it resembles Dana’s A. filicornis,

from Rio Janeiro, and it may not improbably be the species re-

274 CALMAN.

corded under that name by Spence Bate from Esquimalt, in J.

K. Lord’s “ Naturalist in Vancouver Island” (from Zoological

Record for 1866). It differs, however, from Dana’s species in

the much shorter lower antennez and deeper coxal plates.

ISOPODA.

CIROLANID.

Cirolana Californica, Hansen (?).

C. Californica, Hansen, Cirolanidze, Vidensk. Selsk. Skr., 6

Raekke; Naturvid. og Math: Afds, 3; 1890, ps 3382 "Plo im:

£2.

The specimen which we refer with some doubt to this

species is a male, about 20 mm. long. ‘The body is propor-

tionately narrower (7 mm.) than in Hansen’s species. The an-

tennz hardly reach beyond the second thoracic segment. The

last segment of the abdomen hardly broader than long, more

acute than in Hansen’s figure and with only 14 spines on the

tip.

BoPyRID&.

Pseudione Giardi n. sp.

GPL) ex TV Mies 3)

Description of Female-——The single specimen, measuring 12

mm. in length, was taken from the right branchial cavity of its

host (Aupagurus ochotensis (Br.) ), and it is, accordingly, a dex-

tral individual (opyre droit Giard & Bonnier), though the out-

line of its body seems at first sight to indicate a sinistral curva-

ture, from the concavity of the right margin in the region of

the posterior thoracic segments. Closer examination, however,

shows that the head and the abdominal region are turned to-

wards the left, and that the pleopods of the right side are longer

than those of the left, as in a normal dextral individual, so that

the peculiar curvature of the body is, in all probability, merely

an accidental variation.

PUGET SOUND CRUSTACEA. 275

The specimen shows no traces of pigmentation. The dorsal

surface is flat or slightly concave, the ventral is convex and is

covered, except in the region of the abdomen, by the greatly de-

veloped brood-pouch. The dorsal swelling of the cephalic

region which marks the position of the stomach (cephalogaster),

is very slight. An irregularly oval, somewhat convex, area, the

‘‘ ovarian bosse,”’ is marked off by a groove on each side of the

first four thoracic segments on the dorsal surface.

The abdominal segments, six in number, are distinctly sepa-

rated from each other. The ventral surface of the abdominal

segments and of the last two or three thoracic segments is rough-

ened by longitudinal rugz, which are most marked on the adja-

cent margins of the segments. These ruge are neither so con-

spicuous' nor so regularly disposed as in the case of the allied

Pdegyge borre described by Giard and Bonnier (Bull. Scient.

Fr. et Belg., XIX, 68, 1888). The anterior margin of the head

is bordered by a narrow membranous expansion (/2m2be antéricur,

G. & B.), which shows a distinct notch and several fainter undu-

lations on each side of the middle line. No trace could be dis-

covered on the thoracic segments of the pleural lamella, which

in Falegyge are said to be ‘‘rudimentaires et a peine visibles.”

The antennules (inner antennze) are short, conical, composed

of three joints and bearing a few very minute setz at the tip.

The antenne (outer antennz) are composed of five joints, of

which the first is indistinctly marked off from the lower surface

of the head ; the third is longer and much more slender than the

second, the fifth is very minute. The mandibles, which are em-

braced by the upper and lower lips to form the characteristic

“beak” of the Afzcaridea, are of the usual shape. The first pair

of maxillz appear to be absent. After a careful examination

we have been unable to find any distinct rudiments of them,

though the triangular areas between the base of the mandibles

and the lower lips on each side bear some resemblance to the

rudiments of these organs in FPalegyge (Giard and Bonnier,

tom. cit., Pl. V, f. 2). The rudiments of the second maxille

are to be detected further back onthe under surface of the head.

Immediately in front of each a relatively large opening leads into

276 CALMAN.

a capacious tube lined by an invagination of the chitinous cuticle,

the protuberance interpreted as the rudiment of the second

maxilla forming the lower or posterior lip of this orifice. Un-

fortunately, these tubes were not discovered till the soft parts of

the head had been removed by caustic potash, so that we are

unable to say anything as to their connections inside the body.

This is the more to be regretted since we know of nothing anal-

ogous to these organs, not only in the Afrcaridea but even among

the WMWalacostraca.

The maxillipeds are similar to those of Palegyge but some-

what narrower. Each consists of a flat, roughly quadrangular

plate partially divided into two parts by an oblique line. The

posterior part has its external angle rounded and pointed as in

Palegyge Borret, and the antero-internal angle is produced.

The anterior margin of the maxilliped bears a few seta, and at

its inner angle is articulated the small “ palp,” also setose.

Posteriorly, the lower surface of the head terminates in a

freely projecting lamina, the ‘“‘“mbe postéricur’’ of Giard and

Bonnier. . In the present species this lamina is cut up into a

fringe of digitate processes commencing on each side a little way

from the middle line and increasing in size outwards. Exter-

nally, on each side the lamina is produced into a long process,

narrowing gradually from its base to a rounded tip, turned

inwards and extending beyond the middle line. In FPalegyge

there are two pairs of shorter processes and no fringe of minute

digitations.

The thoracic legs are all similar and of the usual structure.

The ‘‘adhesive cushions” present on the proximal segments of

the first pair in Palegyge are here absent. The oostegites or

brood lamellz were unfortunately injured in the single speci-

men found. The usual five pairs are present and are much

larger than in Palegyge Lorret, all the pairs except, perhaps, the

third and fourth, overlapping across the median line. The first

pair are, as usual, of somewhat complex form. Roughly

quadrilateral in shape, the posterior corner is produced into a

hook-like process directed inwards. A little behind the middle

of its length the lamella is crossed by a transverse fold, form-

PUGET SOUND CRUSTACEA. 277

ing on its outer or lower surface a deep groove, the anterior

margin of which is produced as an overlapping ridge. On the

inner, or in its natural position upper, face of the lamella, the

fold projects as a strong ridge which for part of its length is fringed

with digitate processes. The front edge of the second pair of

oodstegites is received into the groove on the lower surface of

the first pair. The last two pairs are strongly fringed with

setz on the posterior edge.

Five pairs of biramous pleopods are present, successively

diminishing in size posteriorly; those of the right side being,

as already mentioned, considerably larger than those of the left.

In the first pair the exopodite (lobe 4, according to the nomen-

clature of Giard and Bonnier) is roughly quadrilateral in shape

and much smaller than the endopodite (lobe c), which is long

and pointed. In the posterior pairs the exopodite approaches

more closely in size and shape to the endopodite. The last

segment of the abdomen is very small and bears articulated to

its posterior margin a pair of lanceolate lamella, of which the

right is broader and slightly longer than the left. These

lamellae may possibly represent the sixth pair of pleopods, but

a comparison with Giard and Bonnier’s figure of the correspond-

ing region in Palegyge Lorret suggests that we have here to do

with the rudimentary pleural lamelle (lobe a of Giard and Bon-

-nier), which, separated by a distinct suture from the fifth and

sixth segments in the last-named species, are here only distinct

on the sixth segment. If this view be adopted the sixth pair of

pleopods are entirely absent. In all the pleopods the surface of

the endopodite is roughened by irregularly transverse ruge

which are most distinct on the anterior pairs.

Male.—A male individual about 3 mm. long was found under

the pleopods of the female. The body is symmetrical, lanceolate

in outline, the fourth thoracic segment being the widest. A

pair of eyes are present near the posterior corners of the head.

Both antennules and antenne are well developed, the former

having three, the latter five segments. As in the female, no dis-

tinct rudiments of the first maxille could be identified. The

second maxillz have the form of rather large, rounded tubercles.

ANNALS N. Y. AcAD. Sci., XI, August 15, 1898—1I9.

278 CALMAN.

The maxillipeds are present as long slender processes each

tipped by a single seta, inserted on each side close to the base

of the lower lip. The seven pairs of thoracic feet are all similar

and of the usual form, with powerful subchelate terminations.

The six abdominal segments are distinct, regularly diminish-

ing in size posteriorly, and the first five show rudiments of pleo-

pods in the form of slight rounded eminences on the ventral

surface. In Palegyge Lorret, Giard and Bonnier describe the

male as having rudiments of pleopods on the first three abdom-

inal segments only (1. c., p. 70), but in a later paper the same au-

thors speak of the abdominal segments of the male in the genus

Pdegyge as being all furnished with these rudiments. (Bull.

Scient., XXII, 373. 1890.) The last segment of the abdomen

is very small, cordate in form, being very narrow anteriorly and

having its hinder margin notched; its greatest breadth is about

equal to the length.

Larva.—The brood-pouch of the female was filled with em-

bryos just hatched, and having the form characteristic of the

first larval stage of the /pzcaridea. The head is large and pro-

jects in front in a rounded hood-like form. The antennules are

in the form of rounded tubercles bearing a number of stout

spines among which a narrow pointed process appears to rep-

resent the rudiment of the flagellum. The antenne are about

half the length of the embryo, not vet distinctly segmented, and

armed at the tip and about the middle of their length with a

few spines.

The mouth parts are still ina very early stage, and are diffi-

cult to interpret. In the middle the rudiment of the upper lip

can be made out, and immediately behind it are a pair of minute

lobes in contact with each other in the middle line. Behind

this and at some distance from the middle line on each side are

three finger-like appendages, the last of these being minutely

forked at the tip.

Walz figures (Arb. Zool. Inst. Wien! 1V, 2,-Plo dh oga)ae

embryo of Lopyrina virbi at a stage apparently corresponding to

that of the present specimens. The upper lip and the pair of

small lobes close to it are shown, but there are only two pairs

PUGET SGUND. CRUSTACEN. 279

of finger-like processes where our specimens show three. The

first pair, Walz states, develops into the mandibles, and he

suggests that the second pair corresponds to one of the pairs of

maxilla which by fusion give rise to the lower lip (/. ¢.; p. 14).

The latter part of his suggestion appears hardly probable. The

minute lobes behind the upper lip are not referred to in the text.

The figure which Giard and Bonnier give of the mouth

parts of an embryo of Cazcrion miser (Contr. a l’etude d. Bo-

pyriens, Pl. IX, f. 13), though taken from an earlier stage, cor-

responds fairly well with our specimens. Two small lobes close

to each other, lettered // in their figure, are evidently the same

as those which we have lettered /. The figure does not seem

to be fully discussed anywhere in the text of the monograph,

but in the explanation of the plate the interpretation of the

letters is given as ‘‘ premicre paire d’ appendices buccaux (labre).”’

In their figure of a newly-hatched embryo of Portunion Koss-

mannt (op. cit., Pl. X, f. 1), a pair of appendages exactly similar

in shape and position are lettered as mandibles. In Cancrion

three pairs of appendages follow upon those just discussed. Of

these the first two pairs are simple and are interpreted as man-

dibles and first maxillz, while the third pair are biramous and

are identified as the maxillipeds. In Portunion only two pairs of

appendages are present in the corresponding position, both

simple and lettered as first maxilla and maxillipeds.

We cannot attempt to reconcile these seemingly contradictory

accounts of species which we have not studied, and shall only

indicate what seems to be the most probable interpretation of

the specimens before us. The rudiments which we have let-

tered / seem, from their position close together in the median

line, to be the paragnatha which afterwards fuse to form the lower

lip. This leaves three pairs of rudiments to be allotted between

the four pairs of appendages from mandibles to mawnillipeds,

and we may assume one of the pairs of maxillz to be missing

(probably the first pair, which appears to be absent in the adults

of both sexes). On the other hand, it is possible that the rudi-

ments / may, in spite of their small size and median position,

represent the mandibles, in which case the other appendages

280 CALMAN.

are satisfactorily accounted for. In either case the pair iv prob-

ably represent the manillipeds, the minute bifurcation at the tip

recalling the biramous character of these organs in the embryos

of Cancrion and of Cepon (Giard and Bonnier, Bopyriens, PI.

qT, Sf26:and 17):

The completely segmented abdomen of both sexes, the bira-

mous pleopods of the female and the presence of rudimentary

pleopods in the male, would refer this species to the genus

Palegyge as established by Giard and Bonnier in 1888 (Bull.

Scient., XIX, 63). The fact that the species infests a pagurid,

and the rugosity of the pleopods in the female would place it in

the second division of that genus recognized by these authors in

1890 (Bull. Scient., X XII, 373), to which, adopting Stebbing’s

suggestion (Hist. Crust., 411), we may apply the earlier name

Pseudione, Kossmann. Of the species enumerated by Mr. Steb-

bing as referable to the latter genus, three; P. /raisez (Koss-

mann), P. Dohrni (G. & B.), P. insignis (G. & B.), appear to be

nomina nuda, regarding which no particulars save the names

of their hosts are recorded. Of P. callianasse Kossmann, only

the male appears to be described, and from the account given

by Kossmanm (Z.f) W>Z., “XXX V5 6687 Pi SOC ear

and reproduced by Giard and Bonnier (Bopyriens, pp. 77-8),

we learn that that species agrees with our form in the presence

of rudimentary maxillipeds in the male, though these rudiments

are very much smaller in Kossmann’s species than in ours.

Moreover, rudiments of the first maxillz, which we have not

found, are figured as present in that species.

In Pseudione Hyndmanni (Bate & Westwood), described in the

British Sessile-eyed Crustacea (p. 243), as Phryxus Hyndmanut,

from Lupagurus bernhardus (L.), the general features of the fe-

male appear to approximate very closely to our species. The

pleural lamellae of the abdomen, however, appear to be rounded

instead of pointed, and those of the last segment are shorter and

broader. The pleopods are smaller and less unsymmetrical.

In Pseudione confusa (Norman), from Galathea dispersa Bate,

described in the above mentioned work (p. 249) as Phryxus

galathee, the brief description and imperfect figures of the fe-

PUGET: SOUND .CRUSTACEA. 281

male offer no marked distinction from the present species. In

the male, however, the abdomen tapers much less rapidly and

the last segment is twice as broad as long. The thoracic seg-

ments are somewhat more expanded laterally, and the last

thoracic is considerably wider than the first abdominal segment.

It is stated that ‘‘the small conical mouth appears to be pro-

tected on each side by a minute 2-jointed foot jaw,” but it does

not seem probable that the appendages figured are really the

maxillipeds.

While the few details available in the case of these species

render it impossible to enumerate the characters which distin-

guish Pseudione Giardi from the other members of the genus,

it appears to be most closely allied to P. Hyndmanni, as was,

indeed, to be expected from the nature of its host. Its precise

specific delimitation can only be effected when we are in pos-

session of fuller information with regard to the last named and

other species.

I have recently received by the kindness of the author a copy

of Dr. Hansen’s beautiful’ memoir on the Isopoda of the ‘‘ Al-

batross’”’ expedition (Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., XX XI, 5, 1897),

in which he describes and figures Pseudione galacanthe from

the deep-sea galatheid Galacantha diomedee. In spite of the

very different host and habitat the new species appears to differ

only in trivial characters from our own. Dr. Hansen however

recognizes a rudiment of the first maxilla in both sexes where

we have only been able to see the membranous interspace be-

tween the mandible and the labrum.

Argeia sp.

Two specimens on Crangon affinis, De Haan. Both speci-

mens were in very bad condition, having been apparently al-

lowed to dry, and nothing could be made out of their structure.

Relying, however, on the principle of MM. Giard and Bonnier,

that no species of the Aficaridea infests more than one species

of host, we may conjecture that these represent a new species of

Argeia in addition to the two already known from the west coast

of America; A. pugettensis, Dana, on Sclerocrangon munitus

and A. pauperata, Stimpson, on Crangon franciscorum.

282 CALMAN.

Phyllodurus abdominalis Stimpson.

P. abdommats Stimpson, Boston Jour’ Nat. Hist. 115 rr.

1857.

Of this interesting and imperfectly known form a large series

of both sexes and different stages of growth was obtained.

These it is proposed to describe in detail in a later paper. It

may be mentioned that the male of this species was recorded

and briefly described by Lockington in 1876, in a paper whose

title affords no clue to this part of its contents (‘‘ Descr. of a new

gen. and sp. of Decapod Crustacean,” Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci.

(1876), 1877, p. 57).

LIGIIDA.

Ligia Pallasii Brandt. .

Ligia FPatllasii Brandt, Conspectus Monogr. Crust. Oniscid.

Bull. Soc. Inip: Nat:, WMescou; Wil 171) 1643: |

Lygia dilatata Stimpson, Bost. Jour. Nat. Hist., VI, 507, Pl.

KM Or ve LOS 7.

LTigia Sitmpsont: Miers, Proc: Zool. Soc: Lond, 18775. 672.

Ligia Pallasn Budde-Lund, Isop. Terr., 261. | 1885.

Of the species described in Budde-Lund’s Monograph our

specimens approach most closely in the proportions of the uro-

pods to ZL. fallasu Br., from which they difier only im the

much narrower body. Stimpson, however, mentions that the

relative width of the body is subject to great variation. The

L. septentrionats of Lockington (Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci. (1876),

1877, p. 46), a species not mentioned by Budde-Lund, agrees

with our specimens so far as the short description goes, but its

distinctness from L. Pallasit does not appear to be beyond doubt.

The dimensions of our two specimens are as follows :

Length. Breadth. Antenna. Uropods.

3u 16 16 4.5 mm.

21 fe) 12.5 4 mm.

PUGET SOUND CRUSTACEA. 283

RHIZOCEPHALA.

Sylon sp.

A single specimen of a Rhizocephalan, probably referable to

this genus, was in the collections sent me, and I understand

that further specimens were obtained. In Messrs. Harrington

and Griffin's paper on the Puget Sound Invertebrates (Trans.

Puey. fecad. Sci., 1897, p. 164) a“ Saccuttna” is recorded as

occurring on Sclerocrangon munitus (Dana). From a sketch

kindly sent me by Mr. Harrington I gather that a specimen

occurred on a Pandalus Dane Stimpson. In the specimen sent

to me, only the abdomen of the host is preserved and this is

certainly not that of a Pandalus nor of a Sclerocrangon, but ap-

parently belongs to some species of //zppolyte.

The parasite is attached as usual to the under surface of the

third abdominal segment of its host. It has an ellipsoid shape,

the longest axis lying nearly parallel to the longitudinal axis of

the host’s body and measuring about 4 mm. _ Transversely to

the body of the host the parasite has a diameter of 3.4 mm. and

its vertical depth is 3 mm. The base of attachment is about 2

mm. in diameter and somewhat nearer the posterior pole. The

genital openings could not be detected (Hoek states, in his ap-

pendix to the Challenger Report on the MJacrura, p. 923, that

these openings are closed in young specimens), nor was any

trace of the mesenteric line visible. The branched “roots” are

easily visible inside the body of the host. Hoek states (Ib., p.

924) that in Sy/on, contrary to what obtains in Sacculina, the

roots do not reach the intestine of the host, but are, for the most

part, confined to the space between the ventral muscles of the

abdomen and the integument. In our specimen, however, the

roots penetrate further into the body and form a plexus sur-

rounding the intestine.

284 CALMAN.

APPENDIX.

Since the above paper was written I have received from Mr.

N. R. Harrington a few Crustacea which had been overlooked

in sorting out the Puget Sound material. Among them is a

specimen of a small Slerocrangon closely resembling but

apparently distinct from .S. muricus (Dana). I believe it to

be identical with a species to be described by Mr. A. O. Walker

in a forthcoming paper in the Proc. Biol. Soc. Liverpool, and

of which Mr. Walker has been good enough to send me a

sketch. His specimens were dredged in Puget Sound by Pro-

fessor Herdman, of Liverpool.

The collection sent me also includes a second specimen of

Sylon, attached to a Aizppolyte brevirostris Dana.

UNIVERSITY COLLEGE, DUNDEE, SCOTLAND.

PLATE XXXI.

Fig. 1. Orchestoidea californiana (Brandt). Male.

REFERENCE LETTERS.

ant'.—Antennules.

ant’’.—Antenne.

as.—Anal style.

bucc.—Mouth parts.

ceph.—Under surface of head.

emb.—Embryo.

en.—Endopodite.

ex.—Exopodite.

ga’, gn" .—Gnathopods.

/.—Labium.

fa.—‘* Limbe antérieur.’’

p.—‘* Limbe postérieur.”’

/or.—Labrum.

m.—Mandible.

mp.—Maxilliped.

mx’, mx" .—Maxille.

?’; p; etc.—Pereiopods.

pl. —Abdomen.

pl’, p/*'.—Pleural lamellez.

plp.—Pleopod.

up.—Uropod.

ur.—Urosome.

¢.—Telson.

I, 11, ITf, 7V.—Mouth parts of embryo (see text).

( 286 )

PLATE XXXII.

> we

¥, ACADZSEE

ANNALS N.

1mp

W. T. C. ad nat. del.

mel

PLATE XXXII.

Fig. 2. Polycharia Osborni n. sp. Female.

Fig. 3. Madera dubia n. sp.

REFERENCE LETTERS.

ant’.—Antennules.

ant” .—Antenne.

as.—Anal style.

bucc.—Mouth parts.

ceph.—Under surface of head.

emb.—Embryo.

en.—Endopodite.

ex.—Exopodite.

gn’, gn” .—Gnathopods.

/.—Labium.

/a.—‘‘ Limbe antérieur.’’

/p.—** Limbe posterieur.’’

loy.—Labrum.

m.—Mandible.

mp.—Maxilliped.

mx', mx" .—Maxille.

p', p’; etc.—Pereiopods.

pl.—Abdomen.

pl", pi*'.—Pleural lamellee.

plp.—Pleopod.

uwp.—Uropod.

ur.—Urosome.

z.—Telson.

I, 11, 117, TV.—Mouth parts of embryo (see text).

( 288 )

ANNALS N

WT. C. ad net. del,

. ¥: ACADESEL.

PLATE XXXII.

Qgn

PEATE XOOCiae

Fig. 4.. Amphithoe humeralis Stimpson.

REFERENCE LETTERS.

ant'.—Antennules.

ant” .—Antenne.

as.—Anal style.

bucc.—Mouth parts.

ceph.—Under surface of head.

emb.—Embryo.

en.—Endopodite.

ex.—Exopodite.

gu’, gn” .—Gnathopods.

7.—Labium.

/a.—‘* Limbe anteérieur.’’

/p.—‘* Limbe postérieur.’’

Joy.—Labrum.

m.—Mandible.

mp.—Maxilliped.

mx’, mx'’.—Maxille.

p', Pp’, etc.—Pereiopods.

pl.—Abdomen. °

pl", pl’. —Pleural lamelle.

plp.—Pleopod.

wp.—Uropod.

wr.—Urosome.

¢.—Telson.

l, Il, [1l, [V.—Mouth parts of embryo (see text).

(290 )

PLATE XXXIII.

XL.

¥. ACAD: Ser,

ANNALS N.

W. T. e ad nat. del.

‘

PLATE XXXIV.

Fig. 5. Pseudione Giardi n. sp.

REFERENCE LETTERS.

ant’.—Antennules.

ant” .—Antenne.

as.—Anal style.

b6ucc.—Mouth parts.

ceph.—Under surface of head.

emb.—Embryo.

en.—Endopodite.

ex.—Exopodite.

gn’, gn'’.—Gnathopods.

/.—Labium.

/a.—‘‘ Limbe antérieur.’’

Jp.—‘* Limbe postérieur.’’

/obr.—Labrum.

m.—Mandible.

mp. — Maxilliped.

mx', mx" .—Maxille.

p’', 2, etc.—Pereiopods.

pl.—Abdomen.

pl", pi*'.—Pleural lamelle.

plp.—Pleopod.

up.—Uropod.

ur. —Urosome.

7.—Telson.

I, Ll, [11, 1V.—Mouth parts of embryo (see text).

( 292 )

ANNALS N.Y. ACAD. SCI. XI. PLATE XXXIV.

5 Sbuce

W. T. C. ad nat. del.

yy 24

eee

) ' r a ’ +s et : :

res A ga - bes - fe ; . 7 “te op aad > >. - : ae | a no ee | 2.

ar a ay OR. _ ee a hte og —_ a i, bp ~ os 2 7 o wmab eae mare | Pate ee — we > ae _

[Annas N. Y. Acap. Sci., XI., No. 14, pp. 293 to 368, September 12, 1898. ]

Pe iy SLOLOGM OF SECRETION.

ALBERT MATHEWS.

(Read April 11, 1898.)

I. INTRODUCTION : PAGE.

Manica ofthe secretory herve theory. -....2 %.. 9. <u *, t 2 204

BeoOe MPATHETIC SALIVARY SECRETION: : « %.. «, ; + *s.-# 0) « + 303

a. The rate. of sympathetic secretion... used as Gee she eet

6. The decrease in amount of saliva obtainable upon sev eva successive stimu-

iatienst, .- . Si silage ins | tae ns OS Oe

€.. The Pe aentativk a cieaniinkle alga de trek Fé fe, eee

d. Paralysis of the sympathetic by emptying the ducts ea its feskores to power

igenmrertwor or Ward iito tienducts 5. ee se ww ee BEA

e. The character of sympathetic saliva. . . 320

/- Further evidence of the muscular nature of a hemi of Ba re

secretion. . . . ST iahne oe aa

g. The location and nature of the contractile cibstantee 3 in the aloha. ot i ea AY

A. Changes in the gland cells on sympathetic stimulation . . . . . . . 328

nT, TUE | COMMISION: Aa ceils ay Lh ae My hPL woe GD ee 329

PvOriEk, SECRELIONS DUE TO’ MUSCLE-ACTION:. .9 4)... «4 331 .

IV. SALIVARY SECRETION ENSUING ON STIMULATION OF THE VASO-DILATOR

NERVES :

a. ‘The increase in the percentage of organic constituents coincident with an

Paereaseurrieral GeCreNOm- 2 i. se wt te 8S

6. The post-mortem chorda secretion . . te ead ee ee eee oy

c. The nature of the action of atropine and pilocarpine Bg ce ae gee)

d. The action of quinine and nicotine. . os bec Picea uke rie

e. Evidence of the osmotic character of the salivary secretions which are ac-

companied by vaso-dilation . . 3 ee ee AY ANY eh c—* aI

fF Conclusion. The physiology of alae Seecctim nue Wai aw et RS

Pe ona PERN SCR IELONS 225° 5) Si Ga tle ee a 859

Se eee G SMICOIR | fei) cruciie Gl most kes ee wt ge RE hae woe a ke we 3KQ

Pelbe eecretion ofthe pancreas. ..=. .).. - - s « «+ . + « 360

PeeeaNenAL CONCIUSION-AND SUMMARY: 9. . . «6 « +. s + sp 361

ORM sta CUE RUE cr te 7 co ea ee Ok hg lige a ate isi «Sod

ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sci., XI, September 12, 1898—20.

( 293 )

294 MATHEWS.

I: INTRODUCTION:

A CRITICISM OF THE SECRETORY-NERVE IHEORY.

Nearly fifty years ago it was suggested by Ludwig*® that se-

cretion was afunction of the gland cells controlled by the ac-

tivity of special nerve fibres. Upon the gland cell, thus em-

phasized as the prime factor in secretion, and upon its relation —

to nerve action, most of the subsequent study of the physiology

of secretion has been focussed. This study has unearthed such

evidences of the truth of Ludwig’s hypothesis that to-day few

theories of physiology rest upon a foundation apparently firmer,

or are more widely accepted, than the hypothesis of secretory

nerves. Indeed, the recent discovery,® by means of the Golgi

and Ehrlich methylen-blue methods, of the remarkably rich

distribution of nerves to glands, and of the endings of these

nerves about the gland cells, has seemed the final convincing

demonstration of the truth of the theory which so many years

ago foretold their existence. .

The theory of secretory nerves did not long remain in the

simple form suggested by Ludwig, for it soon received, at the

hands of Heidenhain, a more complete and definite shape.

First seriously worked out by him in 1868” the theory was

further developed in 1878” and took its final form in his great

treatise on secretion embodied in Hermann’s Handbuch der

Physiologie in 1880.% The Ludwig-Heidenhain theory, thus

crystallized by Heidenhain, has been the lens through which

the facts of secretion accumulated from 1868 to the present

time, have been viewed. ‘This theory may be briefly stated as

follows :

Secretion is a specific function of the gland cells controlled by

special secretory nerve fibres, acting directly upon these cells.

There are two kinds of these nerve fibres : trophic fibres, which

render the cell contents soluble ; and secretory fibres, which

diminish the resistance to filtration offered by the lumen end of

the cell. In consequence of this decreased resistance, the con-

tents of the cell, which are under high endosmotic pressure,

escape intothe lumen. At the same time the cell imbibes liquid

from the lymph space.

SHCRELION PAYSIOLOG Y. 295

Heidenhain, R. Ueber secretorische und trophische Driisennerven, Phliiger’s

Archv. f. ad. gesam. Physiologie. Bd. XVII, 1878, pp. 60 and following: ‘* The

cell is normally under high endosmotic pressure. On nerve stimulation a

molecular rearrangement takes place at the lumen end of.the cell, so that the re-

sistance to filtration is diminished and water flows out. This flow may be hastened

by contractions of the protoplasm, as Kiihne observed in the rabbit’s pancreas under

the microscope. The tension of the water within the cell being thus diminished,

water begins to flow out of the lymph and capillaries into the cell. At the end of

stimulation molecules are rearranged, the loss of water by the cell ceases, and se-

cretion stops.’? ‘‘ The attractive pull on the water comes from the protoplasm of

the outer zone.’’

Before proceeding with the discussion of the evidence upon

which this theory rests, it will make the matter clearer to recall

the conception of secretion which the Ludwig-Heidenhain

theory supplanted. For some of the facts brought forward by

these authors are of value, not as direct evidence of the exist-

ence of secretory nerves, but because they disprove an alterna-

~ tive earlier conception. The prevalent conception of secretion,

before Ludwig’s time, was that liquid driven by intra-capil-

lary pressure filtered out through the gland.* The chorda

tympani was the principal secretory nerve then known, and it

was believed to cause secretion by greatly increasing intra-ca-

pillary pressure by contraction of the veins or arterioles. The

discovery of the vaso-dilator function of this nerve shortly

thereafter by Claude Bernard re-emphasized the possibility of

a high intra-capillary pressure being an essential cause of secre-

tion. It is not surprising that many physiologists of that day

believed that this striking correspondence between vaso-dilation

and secretion could not be accidental, and it was natural for

them to refer the secretory power of the nerve to its action on

the blood vessels.

The first blows against the theory that the vascular system

stood necessarily in a causal relation to secretion were dealt by

Ludwig and his pupils. They discovered that stimulation of the

upper end of the cut cervical sympathetic nerve caused a secretion

from the submaxillary gland of the dog,* but this secretion, un-

like that due to the chorda, was afterwards found to be accom-

panied by a pronounced vaso-constriction instead of dilation.

They found that the pressure capable of being generated by the

saliva flowing from Wharton’s duct might considerably surpass

296 MATHEWS.

the pressure of the blood even in the carotid artery. They

thus demolished, once and for all, the filtration theory. They

found, further, that the temperature of the saliva secreted from

the dog’s submaxillary might surpass by 1.5°C., the temperature

of the blood in the carotid artery,” and as final evidence that the

chorda tympani could induce secretion independent of the vaso-

motor action, they brought forward the observation that stimu-

lation of this nerve still caused a secretion, some minutes after

the heart ceased to beat." It is not strange that, in the face of

such facts, Ludwig should have felt compelled to assume the

secretory activity of the gland cell.

Heidenhain soon added other facts pointing in the same di-

rection. He found that if the blood supply be cut off from the

submaxillary gland by compression of the artery the chorda

still caused a secretion analogous to the post-mortem secretion

after the heart ceases to beat.” Giannuzzi'* discovered that by

the injection of sodium carbonate or a dilute solution of hydro-

chloric acid into Wharton’s duct a pronounced vaso-dilation en-

sued, on stimulation of the chorda, but no secretion. Heiden-

hain” found that quinine sulphate injected into the duct hada

similar action, and that atropine effectually paralyzed secretion,

while leaving the vaso-dilator power of the nerve unaltered.

Heidenhain” also discovered, and Langley confirmed his obser-

vation, that after the chorda tympani had been paralyzed by the

action of nicotine, either injected subcutaneously or applied di-,

rectly to the submaxillary ganglion, the chorda tympani recov-

ered its secretory function before its dilator function. He

observed, also, that after the chorda had been cut and allowed

to degenerate for 2-3 days stimulation of the nerve still caused

an increase in secretion, without an increase in the flow of blood

from the gland’s vein. This evidence showed that vaso-dilation

might ensue ‘without a secretion, that secretion might take

place unaccompanied by vaso-dilation, and that secretion might

be caused by stimulating dilator nerves after cutting off the

blood supply. If these facts were true vaso-dilation could not

be the cause of secretion, and hence that cause must be sought

in some other gland element than the blood vessels.

SCR ihe OLOLOG.Y. 297

Evidence of a more positive kind of the direct action of nerves

upon the gland cells was not long lacking. Heidenhain showed

that stimulation of secretory nerves caused well-marked changes

in the structure of the gland cells.*" He discovered that the

specific constituents of the secretion were accumulated in the cell

during glandular rest, and discharged from the cell during secre-

tion. That these substances were not simply dissolved from the

cells by the water stream passing through them he endeavored

to show by the fact that on passing from a weak to a stronger

stimulation of the chorda tympani, or other dilator secretory

nerve, not only the rate, but also the concentration of the secre-

tion increased. Apparently the more rapidly secreted saliva,

although in contact with the cell contents for a briefer time, never-

theless dissolved more of them than that more slowly secreted.

This obviously would have been impossible if the contents of the

cell had not been rendered more soluble by the action of the

nerve during the stronger stimulus. He brought forward, also,

still more convincing evidence.” In the dog’s parotid gland

stimulation of the cervical sympathetic causes, generally, no

secretion, but if this nerve be irritated coincident with the dila-

tor secretory nerve the saliva secreted under the influence of

both nerves is more concentrated than that secreted during irri-

tation of the dilator nerve alone. Apparently the sympathetic,

though causing no secretion, must, nevertheless, act on the cells,

so as to render their contents more soluble. That this effect of

the sympathetic could not be due to any possible action of the

nerve on contractile tissue of the gland, as suggested by Schiff,”

Eckhard’ and others, Heidenhain believed von Wittich” had

conclusively demonstrated. That the well-known high concen-

tration of the sympathetic saliva could not be referred to the

nerve’s vaso-constrictor action Heidenhain®” showed by the

fact that, if the gland artery be almost totally compressed, the

following chorda saliva was not rendered more concentrated.

These facts undoubtedly furnish strong evidence that the

sympathetic and other nerves act on the gland cells, not only

increasing the flow of water through them, but also rendering

their contents more soluble.

298 MATHEWS.

Most of these facts, brought out chiefly in the salivary glands,

have been found to be true for other glands. The independ-

ence of blood pressure and secretion, the inhibitory action of

atropine, and an increase in concentration of the secretion coinci-

dent with a more rapid flow, have been observed by Afanassiew

and Pawlow,’ Gottlieb,’” Pawlow and S.* Simonoskaja in the pan-

creas, stomach and other glands, in which secretion is normally

accompanied by vaso-dilation. Sweat may be secreted during

vaso-constriction or vaso-dilation, and in the cat’s foot, twenty

minutes after ligaturing the artery or cutting the leg from the

body.“ The skin glands of amphibia can secrete in the total

absence of blood supply." Moreover, of recent years, the im-

portance of the condition of the secreting cells, as a factor of

secretion, has been clearly realized. The quick paralysis of

some secretions during dyspnoea or by the action of drugs has

emphasized this factor of secretion. Even in the kidney, where

secretion apparently more nearly approaches a filtration, it has

been shown that the condition of the capillary, or glomerular

epithelium, and the character of the blood, exerts an influence

on the secretion.’ The possibility at once suggests itself that

if the condition of the cells is so readily affected by external

agents it may be modified by direct nerve action. The very

rich nerve supply of many glands and the intimate association

of nerve end and gland-cell undoubtedly bring strong confirma-

tion to this supposition.

From this brief outline the extreme complexity of the problem

of secretion will be manifest. Some secretions are accompanied

by vaso-dilation ; others by vaso-constriction. Some may per-

sist twenty minutes after cutting off the blood supply; others

are paralyzed within two or three minutes. Some are paralyzed

by atropine and quinine; others are not. In the same gland

stimulation of one nerve may cause the secretion of a large

amount of watery secretion, while stimulation of another nerve

causes the secretion of a small amount of exceedingly viscid

secretion. There seems, in fact, to be no general rule of secre-

tion true for all glands. The great difference between the phe-

nomena of different secretions suggests that the mechanisms of

SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. 299

those secretions may be different in different cases. However

probable it may seem, @ priori, that there is everywhere one

fundamental mechanism underlying all these secretions, a de-

cent regard for truth forbids one accepting so far reaching a con-

clusion, unless it be supported by very strong evidence.

In the present paper, therefore, I wish to reopen the question

whether all secretions are due to the activity of the gland cells,

and to re-examine the evidence of the existence of nerves act-

ing on those -cells. The great theoretical and practical im-

portance of Ludwig’s conception is a sufficient excuse for a

critical and experimental review, in the light of the physiology

of the present day, of the evidence upon which that theory rests.

Since the publication of Ludwig’s and Heidenhain’s work on se-

cretion knowledge has been acquired of vaso-motor changes,

osmosis, lymph formation as well as secretion proper, which

might, possibly, cause even Heidenhain or Ludwig, if consider-

ing the subject at this time, to adopt a somewhat different

interpretation of much of this evidence from that heretofore pro-

posed. Sucha review seems the more necessary for the reason

that special applications of the theory have been, from time to

time, questioned, and because, as will be apparent in the course

of the following discussion, some of Heidenhain’s inferences are

unsound, owing to his having neglected to consider possibilities

now known to be of importance. His recent extension of the

theory to lymph formation, for example, has been seriously dis-

puted by Starling,” Cohnheim and others. Starling especially

has shown the uselessness of assuming any such secretory

mechanism in certain special cases, and has thus thrown doubt

upon the truth of the theory as a whole. Langley®” has ques-

tioned the necessity for assuming distinct “trophic’’ fibres to

explain salivary secretion, and for the kidney secretion special

inferences of Heidenhain have been challenged by Senator,

Adami! and v. Sobiranski.” The difference in pressure be-

tween blood and secretion observed by Ludwig may be readily

accounted for on the basis of osmosis quite apart from any cell-

activity.* The difference in temperature between saliva and

blood has been denied by Bayliss and Hill,’ working with bet-

300 MATHEWS.

ter methods. For some of the facts, also, errors of method

greatly diminish the value of the testimony they offer, and

some of that evidence depends upon the assumption that all se-

cretions are probably due to the same cause. Hence, whether

the theory of secretory nerves is true or not, it must be admit-

ted, I believe, that little of the evidence which has hitherto been

presented in support of that hypothesis can be accepted as it

stands.

While fully aware, therefore, of the strong @ priovi probabllity

that nerves may act on gland cells so as to affect osmosis through

them, and while appreciating the strength of the evidence that

they do so act, I feel myself compelled, for the reasons presented

in the following criticisms of that evidence, to question whether

secretion is really controlled in this manner. °

But not only is the evidence upon which the secretory nerve

theory rests inconclusive; there are also certain weaknesses in the

theory itself which deserve more attention than they have

hitherto received. It is by no means easy to understand how

the nerve can affect the cell in such a way as to cause a secre-

tion. The mere discharge of liquid from the cells into the gland

lumen would, as pointed out elsewhere, lead to no secretion

from the gland ducts. To obviate this difficulty Heidenhain

supposed that, while the secretory nerve diminished the resist-

ance of the inner end of the cell, the outer zone imbibed water

from the lymph and capillary. The outer zone exerted an at-

tractive pull upon the lymph. By the imbibition of this lymph

the secretion was forced along the ducts. This explanation leads

at once to difficulties. Not only is the explanation exceedingly

hypothetical, but it is difficult to see why, if the pull on the lymph

comes from the outer zone, secretion should be slowest after

long stimulation, or during paralytic secretion, when the outer |

zone is at its greatest development, and how secretion can take

plate at all, or with any rapidity, in glands in which the outer

zone has almost, or completely, disappeared, as in mucous sal-

ivary glands, the stomach or pancreas, after a long rest. It is

also difficult to understand sympathetic secretion, which takes

place during a period of vascular constriction. Nor can we ig-

SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. 301

nore the extreme complexity of the theory. The assumption

that each, or any, cell of the sub-maxillary gland has acting

upon it four totally different nerve ends is, in itself, highly im-

probable. A further difficulty is encountered when we critically

examine Heidenhain’s assumption that the trophic and secretory

fibres are unequally distributed tothe chorda tympani and sym-

pathetic. It seems simple enough to refer the small secretion

ensuing on sympathetic stimulation to the presence of a small

number of secretory fibres in this nerve, but if it be asked

whether these fibres innervate all the cells, or only a portion of

them, we are at once plunged into a maze from which there is

no way out. If they innervate all the cells we may ask why,

if afew fibres suffice, more should be present in the chorda,

and why the secretion should not be as copious as the chorda’s.

If they innervate a part of the cells only, new assumptions must

be made to understand why stimulation of the sympathetic

should exhaust the constituents of the whole gland. If we

abandon the trophic fibres and postulate one sort of fibre only,

the secretory, acting on the cell, Heidenhain’s facts become

largely inexplicable. Furthermore, when Heidenhain”™

secretory nerves to the capillaries he undermined much of the

evidence accumulated by him of secretory nerves to glands. For

many of the facts of gland physiology might be understood by

reference to these capillary nerves. Atropine, for instance, might

conceivably prevent secretion by paralyzing the ends of the se-

cretory nerves of the capillaries, thus inhibiting the production

of lymph and fluid necessary for secretion.

In the present paper I have considered chiefly the physiology

of secretion in the salivary glands. The experimental work has

been devoted chiefly to studying the exceptional features of that

secretion which have seemed difficult of comprehension on

any other than the cellular theory of secretion. I have ven-

tured, however, to bring some other secretions into relation

with the conclusions concerning the mechanisms of salivary

secretion.

assumed

302 MATHEWS.

It may prevent confusion and reconcile what might appear to

be contradictory statements, to give here the chief conclusion

drawn in the present paper. ‘This its, that there is no single

mechanism of secretion. In some glands the stored metabolic

products are driven out of the cells by the action of muscle, as

in Amphibian skin glands and sudoriferous glands ; in others

they are removed by currents of lymph, which are probably the

result of osmosis, as in the pancreas, stomach, salivary glands ;

in some cases the cells imbibe water until they burst, and their

contents rush into the gland-lumen, as in the intestinal cells of

Ptychoptera larve ; in others the inner end of the cell crumbles

to pieces, as in the mammalian milk glands. Two, or more, of

these mechanisms may coexist in one gland, and itis this which

has rendered the physiology of such glands as the salivary so

confusing. In the submaxillary gland, for example, I believe

we have a muscular mechanism, innervated by the sympathetic ;

and an osmotic mechanism, innervated by the chorda. ‘The

sympathetic, in other words, causes secretion as Eckhard,”

Schiff,* ° and others” have maintained, by its action on contrac-

tile tissue in the gland body, thus mechanically compressing the

ducts and alveoli and squeezing out the secretion. The chorda

probably causes secretion, by its dilator action on the blood ves-

sels. The following pages present the evidence for these con-

clusions.

Before proceeding farther it is necessary to define the sense

in-which the word ‘secretion”’ is here used. At present the

word has no very definite significance, as it refers to different

processes. For the sake of clearness it would be better to

designate these various processes by different names. I suggest

that, in the future, the word secretion be used to indicate the

process of extruding subtances from cells into the lumen of the

gland, the process of expulsion from the ducts, and the substances

secreted by the gland. By this use of the word cellular secre-

tion will be generally coincident in time with glandular. For the

* Schiff, loc. cit., p. 304, I. ‘It is probable that the great sympathetic which

causes constriction of the parotid vessels causes, at the same time, the tissue of the

gland to contract, and that by this contraction the gland empties itself of its con-

tents formed independent of nerve action.”’

SEHCREISON PHYSIOLOGY. 303

process of the formation of substance by the gland cell—a dif-

ferent process, but one at present included under secretion—I

propose the name “ Hylogenesis” (Gr. 044 matter and yévears

generation), and for the substances formed the name ‘“‘ Hylogens.”’

Thus trypinogen, mucinogen, pepsinogen are hylogens. The

secretions consist of the hylogens plus water, salts and other

substances derived unchanged from the blood. The present

paper deals solely with secretion proper. Hylogenesis is con-

sidered elsewhere.* This word seems to me preferable to that

of ‘“‘ Mesastates,” suggested by Mr. J. N. Langley. Ranvier”

and Van Gehuchten” wish to call the process here named hylo-

genesis, ‘‘ secretion.’’ This seems to me inadvisable, as thereby

cellular secretion would correspond with glandular rest.

The experimental work embodied in this paper has been

carried on chiefly in the Physiological Laboratory of Columbia

University, and I am particularly indebted to Professor Curtis

and Professor Lee both for extending to me facilities of the

laboratories and for suggestive criticism. A portion of the

work was done in the physiological laboratories of Cam-

bridge University, England, and Marburg University, Germany.

I desire to express my hearty appreciation of the courtesy of

Professor Michael Foster and Professor Kossel in placing the

facilities of their laboratories at my disposal. To Mr. J. N.

Langley I am indebted for critical suggestions.

i oY eer i SALIVARY. SECREFION.

Stimulation of the upper end of the divided cervical sympa-

thetic nerve of the cat, horse, dog, sheep or rabbit generally causes

a secretion from the salivary glands. This secretion has every-

where+ the same characteristic features, indicating that it is pro-

duced in all salivary glands in the same manner. These com-

mon features are the following : The saliva reaches its maximum

rate of flow in the first 10 or 20 seconds, and then generally

ceases, although stimulation lasts for several minutes. If sev-

* Shortly to appear in the Journal of Morphology.

t Except in the resting parotid and submaxillary glands of the dog. See next

page.

304 MATHEWS.

eral stimulations follow closely, one upon the other, the amount

of saliva secreted at each stimulation rapidly diminishes and

often becomes nothing. Stimulation becomes then again ’effec-

tive if the gland be allowed to rest, if the chorda be irritated, or

if liquid be injected into the gland duct. Finally, sympathetic

secretion is invariably accompanied by vascular constriction, and

the saliva, with the doubtful exception of that of the cat,® con-

tains more organic matter than that secreted from the same

gland under the influence of the dilator nerve.

That there are deviations from the typical course of a sympathetic secretion just

sketched need hardly be said. Such deviations are probably due (see p. 309) to

the changing fluidity of the saliva. When the saliva is thin, asin the horse, rabbit, cat

or sheep, the secretion follows a very typical course ; if the saliva be viscous, as in

the resting salivary glands of the dog, the latent period is longer, and the secretion

persists longer. These variations shed a not unimportant light on the mechanism

of secretion.

To explain these typical phenomena, assuming the secretory

activity of the gland cell, Heidenhain supposed that the sympa-

thetic nerve carried three kinds of fibres: trophic, secretory and

vaso-constrictor. -The trophic fibres converted large quantities

of mucinogen (submaxillary) into soluble mucin, making the

juice rich in organic bodies ; the secretory fibres caused secretion ;

the constrictor neutralized the secretory action and stopped

secretion. The quick failure of the nerve on successive stimu-

lations was referred to the exhaustion of nerve, nerve end, or

gland cell.

Lhe general features of sympathetic secretion scem to me, how-

ever, plainly to suggest that the secretion has been driven from the

gland by a compression of the ducts and alveolt by some contractile

“assue.. I wish to consider these features separately, from this

point of view, together with experiments bearing on their proper

interpretation.

a. THE RATE OF SYMPATHETIC SECRETION.

Experiments I. and II.

Catanddog. Submaxillary. Animals under ether. Canula

in Wharton’s duct, connected with a narrow tube graduated in

millimeters, 250 mm. = 0.82 cc. Reading’s every ten seconds

SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. 305

inmm. Chorda-lingual divided in each case. Cervical sympa-

thetic divided and stimulated by tetanic shocks, secondary coil

180-100 mm. The chorda was first stimulated intermittently

for an hour, so that the glands were secreting watery saliva.

Gat. Dos.

I II III I I

Ist 10 seconds of sympathetic stimulation. . . 10. .9 Le BY ea ee i |

aoe ke ey ee eee ee

3d ce ‘< 6“ ‘6 6¢ oO Os. QO; ee igs 2

4th ‘c 6c 6c ‘ oe oO IOP oe 83 be"52 I

5th ‘c ‘ ‘ec 6< 6“ re) Oh O'. JR 2p 2

off off off

Gh “ ss “< ‘“ Be ec eee eo en: eee at: Wee eee

off off

By inspection of these figures, it is seen that on stimulation

the secretion comes suddenly, reaches its maximum rate of flow

in the first few seconds, and then quickly subsides. In the cat,

it abruptly ceases after 20 seconds. In the dog, probably owing

to the greater viscidity of the saliva and the resistance offered to

its passage by the fine gland-tubules, it persists slightly through-

out the stimulation.

Heidenhain attributes the abrupt cessation of secretion, after

a few seconds, to the vaso-constrictor action of the nerve, in

consequence of which the secretory mechanism is, as it were,

suffocated.” That this explanation is incorrect may readily be

shown by cutting off the blood by compressing the gland’s

artery, or by decapitation. In such cases, as the following ex-

periments show, a perfectly typical secretion may ensue on

stimulation of the sympathetic, ten or more minutes after liga-

turing the artery, or decapitation.

Experiment Va.

(A full account of this experiment is given on page 343.)

Large dog, which had received 3cc. 1% morphine sulphate

subcutaneously. Ether given through tracheal tube. Sub-

maxillary dissected free, and remained attached only at the

hilus and by its veins. Chorda-lingual and sympathetic cut.

Canula connected with tube graduated in millimeters in Whar-

ton’s duct. Gland’s artery exposed by extirpation of the

digastric muscle. Tetanic shocks. Secondary coilat 150. The

306 MATHEWS.

secretion of the sympathetic is given in mm. at ten second in-

benVals,.25@ min. =—'O.02..0c.

TIME. NERVE STIMULATED. SECRETION.

he) ams h. an Ss

Bn 2s The artery going to the gland

was clamped close to the

hilus. .

B05 —- 3 30 Chorda (intermittent) | Copious at first, it gradually

ceases.

Sy 2 2

3 32 (m4 Oo

B35 Sympathetic 16, 3, 2, 2, 0, 0, off.

20 37 ae ©, 10,0, -1.,05, O; Olt;

29 40 oF 0,20; ©; ©, 0,-05, Off,

Interval (see page 317).

B42 Artery unclamped. Chorda

stimulated intermittently for

several minutes.

Ae C7. 30 Artery clamped.

A O7)2320.="4. 68 Chorda 155

4 08 = 4 09 “(TO SEG It: 30

4 09 = “4 ET 30 as 16

Amel 2, —- 4 I3 yt Oo

4 43 =4 4 Sympathetic. 1%, 4, 2, 2, 0, off.

Anes — 4 I7 Chorda fe)

AOL 7 80m = As ton ms Sympathetic. 10, 4, 0, 0.

4 20 oe O70, 0:

Interval (see page 317).

Ae 25 Sympathetic. 05.0, 10.

4°26 =— 4. 27 Chorda. O

Interval (see page 317).

AN 20 30 Artery unclamped. The

gland secretes spontane-

* ously. Chorda stimulated

intermittently.

AN A 20 Artery clamped.

A AO ©30 = 4.47 30 Chorda its

ATA. 930 5749-40) 30 5 30

4 50 = 4 51 ae fe)

AO I5E Y (30 5 AL Be Se i. 2

4 53 2

jek ed Sympathetic 8,2, 1, 0.

4-54 —-— 4 55 Chorda 30,20, 0:

455 80 tea ‘a O

An ea = SS Sympathetic 0, 4, 3, 0, 0.

5 2 Artery unclamped.

5 03 =~ '5 109 Spontaneous secretion.

Cees) = £ 10 Sympathetic. 9, 3, 2, 0, 0.

SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. 307

Experiment V.

Large dog under morphine and chloroform. Right submax-

illary gland prepared. Chorda lingual and sympathetic cut.

Each nerve causes a good secretion. Readings as in previous

experiments. Canula in Wharton’s duct. Secondary coil 150.

Tetanic shocks.

TIME. NERVE STIMULATED. SECRETION.

am; Ss. he. io

49 30 Head cut off as rapidly as possible.

Spinal cord and vertebral column

not severed.

50 go —- 5 55 Chorda (intermittent) 175

mB *.55 Se CepIt ga} fo)

ey, Sympathetic (coil 7 ) 40, 20, 6, 2, 0.

B.) 5S = 70. 2 DO No stimulation.

G. IO Sympathetic Sara thap Beg OE

Experiment VI.

Dog. Conditions of experiment the same as in Experiment

V. Submaxillary. Both nerves active,

TIME. NERVE. SALIVA SECRETED IN MM.

| Hic 5) cis

A 9) 20 Head completely severed from body.

oan. 40 — 4° 35 Chorda intermittent 65

Ba35 = 42>. 38 Chorda. fe)

4 38 Sympathetic. 14, 3, 2, 2, 0.

The foregoing experiments, demonstrating that a sympathetic

secretion may be obtained ten minutes after all fluid and oxygen

have been cut off from the gland shows, I think, that Heidenhain

was wrong in ascribing the quick normal cessation of secretion

during sympathetic stimulation to the nerve’s action on the

blood vessels. It is obvious that vascular constriction can have

nothing to do with such cessation, because the changes produced

in a normal gland by vascular constriction, namely, diminution

of water and oxygen, have existed in all three experiments at

least seven minutes before the nerve was stimulated, and con-

tinue during that stimulation without in any way affecting the

course of the secretion.

Even a normal gland secreting a very viscous saliva furnishes

evidence against the truth of Heidenhain’s explanation. In the

308 MATAEWS.

resting submaxillary of the dog the sympathetic secretion may

have a latent period of many seconds and persist for minutes.

An instance of such a kind is the following :

Experiment III.

Large morphinized dog, receiving chloroform. Both chorda

lingual and sympathetic cut. ‘The submaxillary has not pre-

viously been secreting. Sympathetic stimulated by tetanic

shocks. Secondary coil 15. Readings every 10 seconds in

millimeters as before. The saliva was extraordinarily viscid.

Total stimulation 2 minutes, 40 seconds. Latent period 45

seconds.

Amount of Secretion':: 0; Of O;lOp5 a7 ae 5, 5,a55 eye eee

3 eS Out - 3 tis 4@):

If secretion can begin after 42 seconds, and endure for. two

minutes, during a period of vascular constriction, as was the

case in this experiment, it can hardly be assumed that vaso-

constriction is the cause -of the normal failure of that secretion

within twenty seconds.

Heidenhain seems to have overlooked the fact that a sympa-

thetic secretion may be obtained after cutting off the blood

supply, at least five minutes after the chorda becomes inopera-

tive. He referred the quick loss of the chorda’s power in these

experiments, to the suffocation of the gland cell.* If the loss

of the chorda’s secretory power is due to the paralysis of the

gland cell by suffocation, the sympathetic must cause secretion

in some other way than action on the cell, since this nerve causes

a normal secretion long after the chorda has been paralyzed.

The quick gush of saliva and its abrupt cessation, as well as

the anomalous cases represented by Experiment III, clearly indi-

cate a muscular mechanism of secretion. They are probably to

be explained as follows : On sympathetic stimulation the ducts

* Heidenhain, R. Hermann’s Handbuch der Physiologie V, p. 46: ‘ Die

Ursache der Verlangsamung der Absonderung bei hochgradiger Gefassverengerung

oder Gefassverschluss liegt nicht in dem Sinken des Capillardruckes, sondern in der,

mit der kiinstliche Anaimie der Driise verbundenen Verlangsamung des Blutstromes,

bei welcher sich das Secretions Material, und namentlich der Sauerstoff fiir die

Driisenzellen allmalig erschépft so dass der secretorische Apparat erstickt.’’

SECRETION PAYVSIOLOGY. 309

and alveoli are compressed and the liquid in them ejected. If

that liquid is thin and runs readily, as in most albuminous

glands, for example the parotid and submaxillary of the rabbit,

sheep and horse, and the cat’s submaxillary, or in mucous

glands after long stimulation, the latent period is short, and

the saliva is all expelled in from 10-20 seconds. Thereafter,

although contraction persists, no more secretion escapes. If,

on the other hand, the saliva is viscid, as in the first stim-

ulation of a previously resting mucous gland (submaxillary and

parotid of dog), it offers a great resistance in passing through

the fine ducts and consequently requires a greater pressure and

a longer time to start and to expel. Consequently the latent

period is long and the secretion persists for some time. This

explains the anomalous cases represented by Experiment III.

In cases of very great viscidity, as in the parotid gland of the

dog, the resistance may even be too great to be overcome by the

compressing strength of the tissues. In this gland stimulation

of the symyathetic either causes no secretion at all or very lit-

tle, unless the saliva in the gland be previously diluted by the

action of the dilator nerve. The muscular theory, too, readily

explains why a typical sympathetic secretion can ensue in the

total absence of blood supply.

6. THE DECREASE IN THE AMOUNT OF SALIVA OBTAINABLE UPON

SEVERAL SUCCESSIVE STIMULATIONS.

If one sympathetic stimulation be followed by several others

the amount of saliva obtainable on the second, or following

stimulations, is much less than the first, and may be nothing at

all.* If, however, the gland be allowed to rest, or if the chorda

be stimulated, the nerve again produces a copious secretion upon

sympathetic stimulation. This is shown in the following ex-

cerpts from experiments on the dog’s and cat’s submaxillary.

Readings in mm. Stimulation in each case for thirty seconds.

It is also clearly seen in Experiment VII, p. 311.

* This phenomenon has, of course, been often described. See among others

Langley.%9

ANNALS N. Y. AcAD. Sci., XI, September 12, 1898—21.

310 WA THEWS.

Cat: Car Doc.

iis Il.

Amount. Amount.

Ist stimulation . BO ete eee (Ouse:

Rest ... . 25 seconds . . I minute. . . 2 minutes; .

2d stimulation ake) ie mere Oren One. ot, ee en

2 Rest’... > 2 minutes] ae . 2 minutes . sat Mmuingite | ek ae

3d stimulation. . . IT, 7 FOL5G Pe Ue

Rest . . 2 minutes

Ath stimulation . . }4. 4 ght Lire wae

Rest ood Se ane Se pe care tee renee tee

5th stimulation.) 9 2") 27 ae eer es eee ee

Rests". ah ge ae @ Oe. oman,

6th stimulation: 7 fox’ S94 Ge ie eee eee TOA ee ae

Rest . . Chorda stimulated .

wth stimulation 9) 'S\ 28 sad: ee, De ae eke eee ee ey

Rest . wit ile PGE iy eae Ne eg ere ee ee . 2 minutes

Sth: stimulation 3 2c,.<,.-. Fuse bot Ss age Ae ot et ee ee eg A

Rest 0. ay bee ec ey we A ea Ocoee

oth stimulation tay ee oa tek eee GA

The great decrease in the amount of saliva obtainable on a

second stimulation, closely following a first, even though a min-

ute’s intreval of rest elapse, might be explained on Heidenhain’s

theory, by assuming an exhaustion of secretory fibres, nerve

ends or gland cells. Such an assumption is highly improbable.

There is, I believe, no other-example of a nerve end? on fibre:

becoming exhausted by a weak stimulus of a minute’s duration.

That the secretory fibres of the chorda, their nerve ends and

the gland cells are not exhausted or suffocated is shown by the

fact that the following chorda stimulation is little, if at all, al-

tered. The phenomena are clearly explicable, on-the other

hand, if the sympathetic causes secretion by compression of the

ducts and alveoli. By the first stimulation the gland is largely

emptied of its saliva. If no time be given for the ducts to be

refilled, the following stimulation finds less available saliva, or

none at all. The nerve appears, in fact, to have become inoper-

ative until, through the resting of the gland, or the action of the

chorda, the ducts be again filled. The exhausted element of

the gland inferred by Heidenhain is the fluid in the ducts and

alveoli.

SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. 311

c. THe AUGMENTATION OF SYMPATHETIC SALIVA.

That the small amount of sympathetic secretion, in the cases

just cited, is due to the presence of a small amount of fluid in

the ducts and alveoli is indicated by the abnormally large sym-

pathetic secretion, when the amount of liquid saliva in the gland

is rendered abnormally large by stimulation of the chorda, or by

the action of pilocarpine, nicotine and other drugs.

Langley® first observed the augmentation of sympathetic

saliva by an immediately preceeding stimulation of the dilator

nerve in the dog’s parotid and submaxillary and the cat’s sub-

maxillary. The following experiments confirming Langley illus-

trates this augmentation.

Experiment. VII.

Dog under morphine and chloroform, sympathetic and chorda

cut. Canula in Wharton’s duct. Secretion in mm. is given

geove the line for every 10 seconds, 250 mm. = 0.82 cc.

Below the line is indicated the nerve stimulated ; s, is the sym-

pathetic; c, the chorda. If no letter is written, it indicates that

at these intervals there was no stimulation.

20,35, 315 2, Bde 45 35.2525 8, 6, 4, 1%, 2, 2 ai 3. 2,0

sO, VA, 2, 2; 00, 38, 2, 1, 15, 3, 1-3; 3; 2, 2, 35 2, 4.4, 1, 2, 2, 1

ff, F240, AS ae, Bg ae Aes. 2: pe Ry oT, 2,

18, a5 35 35 2; yy, 4, 2. 2, , I,

It will be noticed, in this experiment, that the first secretion of

the sympathetic, immediately following the chorda stimulation,

is abnormally large, but that the augmentation effect rapidly

passes off. The augmented saliva, as Langley pointed out, is

a ie MATHEWS.

more watery than normal and has a shorter latent period. It

resembles chorda saliva. A similar watery and copious sym-

pathetic saliva occurs after the injection of nicotine,™ or pilo-

carpine,” and during paralytic secretion.”

This augmented saliva may be explained, assuming that the

nerve acts on the gland cell, as follows: If the chorda and sym-

pathetic act as the same gland cells (Heidenhain) it may be said

that stimulation of the chorda renders the cells more responsive

to a sympathetic stimulation immediately following. If, on the

other hand, the chorda and sympathetic innervate different gland

cells (Langley), we are forced to the assumption that nerve im-

pulses traverse glands outside of the nerve tracts. ‘‘ When

either nerve is stimulated,’ Langley says, ‘there is an irradia-

tion of impulses of less intensity to the cells in the neighborhood

of those directly affected; that on stimulation of the chorda

tympani the cells connected with it are left for a time in a state

of weak excitation, so that irridiation of impulses reaching the

gland by the sympathetic is much greater than normal, and these

irradiating impulses being weak lead to a more fluid secre-

tion.’’*? It can hardly, be said, think, that cither or thesesen-

planations is satisfactory. That irritability of the gland cells

probably has nothing to do with this augmentation, but that it

is the simple result of the presence of an abnormally large

amount of fluid saliva in the gland is shown by the injection of

innocuous fluid into Wharton’s duct. By this means we pass-

ively distend the ducts and aveoli, without the intervention of cell

activities. Following stimulation of the sympathetic causes an

augmented secretion. I have tried such experiments only in the

case of the dog’s submaxillary, a somewhat unsatisfactory gland,

owing to the viscidity of the saliva. The experiment, particu-

larly if tried on a fresh gland full of viscous saliva, is not always

successful. The cause of the failures has not been investigated,

but I suppose they are due to the unavoidable driving into the

gland of the viscous saliva and partly to the use of too great

pressure in such cases, causing an over-distension of the ducts

and a consequent injury to the nerves. The positive results are,

however, sufficiently conclusive.

SECK LION - LHYSIOLOGY. 313

Experiment VIII.

Small dog under morphine and chloroform. Left submaxil-

lary duct and nerves prepared. Nerves cut. The chorda is

first stimulated intermittently for an hour. The sympathetic is

stimulated each time for 30 seconds. Secondary coil 70. Se-

cretion in mm. as before.

TIME. NERVE SECRETION.

he i. 's;

2 30 Sympathetic 10

gp ‘< 4

Inject %cc. 0.6% NaCl solution into Wharton’s duct.

3 34 Sympathetic 15

3 36 “ 0

3 41 Pe O

4 10 = II

Plies a =< 8

4 12 30 7 4

Inject % cc. 0.5% NaCl into duct.

4 14 Sympathetic §

415 os 6

Experiment IX.

Conditions of experiment as in 8. Dog larger. Sympathetic

30 seconds stimulation, unless otherwise indicated.

TIME. NERVE. SECRETION IN MM.

be om. s.

5 20 Sympathetic 40

5 22 ss 15

oe aa fi bi =

5 26 es Io

527% 2h 27 40 a 20

5 28 -5 28 40 ae 18

Inject .4 cc. 0.6% NaCl into duct.

5220 Sympathetic 40

5 3f ts 7

uae a fe)

Inject, ce. 6/64, Nae.

5 34 Sympathetic 17

3a) “

5 36 66 fe)

Inject:.3 cc: 0.6% NaGl.

5 38 ‘ Sympathetic 11

314 | MATHEWS.

The results of these experiments, in conjunction with those

following, are most readily explicable, I believe, on the muscu-

lar theory. The augmented saliva, in whatever manner pro-

duced, gives fairly conclusive evidence that the nerve causes

secretion by compression of the ducts and alveoli. If these are

filled with an unusually large amount of fluid saliva an unusu-

ally large secretion, characterized by its short latent period and

watery character, is secreted. If there be little saliva present,

or if it be very viscous, we obtain a small secretion of long latent

period and lasting for some time.

(2) PARALYSIS OF THE SYMPATHETIC BY EmptyING THE Ducts

AND ITS RESTORAL TO POWER BY INJECTION OF

FLUID INTO THE DUCTS.

Further strong evidence of the muscular action of the sympa-

thetic may be obtained by preventing the passage of fluid into the

gland and stimulating the nerve until all available saliva in the

ducts has presumably been expelled. The nerve then appears

to have lost its action, but it may be shown to be still active by

the injection of fluid into the ducts. The passage of fluid into

the gland may be prevented either by the use of quinine or by

compression of the gland artery.

Heidenhain * showed that if quinine sulphate be injected into

Wharton’s duct the secretory action of the chorda is ultimately

paralyzed, but the gland becomes cedematous. This indicates

that, although liquid is present in the lymph spaces, it is pre-

vented in some way from passing through the cell. If, after

paralysis of the chorda, the sympathetic be stimulated, a copious

secretion is obtained. After a few stimulations, however, the

nerve appears to be paralyzed. If that paralysis is only apparent,

due to the emptiness of the gland’s ducts, we should be able to

obtain a secretion on sympathetic stimulation, by the injection

into the duct of more quinine sulphate. The following experi-

ment proves this to be the case.

* Heidenhain, Studien aus Breslau, IV, 1868.

SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. ote

Experiment X.

Large dog. Operation as in other experiments. Secretion

in mm. 250 mm.=0.82 cc., s=sympathetic ; c=chorda.

TIME. NERVE. COIL IN CM. SECRETION IN MM.

is ™m, s

AAS os 5. we. 4 4-1 6GS Meat ie uted ee ae ee ee a ee Me ee (2

AAS) a dee Si 2) eee ber ae o> en cae Wee ct a. Nor: et

Chorda stimulated for several minutes, then .5 cc. of saturated solution of qui-

nine sulphate injected slowly into Wharton’s duct.

oe é. 13 fo)

12 38 2's hae 42 3! 0

IZ 39. aS el eee aoa o> EN ek re iethn 5:5 iba 50

I2 40 1S II < 27

12 44 ao rs. 12

12 45 SSrs es ee a ei I5. 9

WT Me lg Et a i ane a jt AIS Merce sar . oO

EO TAR ee oleae a na ae eee ey es Pe Ng

Oe 5 ole el aad Re Ae ena, poke Be Ce See 1.4 Ok a

a aN Ske he a Pe ae ee a ge Bip a aseder a. a to

ae eats Cea ai uE Sh ct Ceres et Wa rele od LAY ys Ce fa, ee Te Se

Sy pe ae ee ee ee ee Ses ee tas vag Cet an ee Tee a fe lae- sete wr pl LO

ns a phd eeaany REE SO oa ig? Se des.

Inject mixture equal parts 0.6% NaCl and sat. quinine sulphate.

UC ce ec oe S Pr. 24

YOR cc iwhie oh ap tet: s ee 4

I 09. s 12 fo)

Roa ae J oe We Se te Ee ar 9 I

CORES se hw oes Se ae ce eee erie Io Oo

ACO ge ai yavuay 2) 2 nce ee eee ee: ee ee nv, 2

i ee eee are eer ere a et API re fe)

Inject 0.5 % NaCl into duct.

Ae Qe.” %, te) oi vetisbe Or, ene a Reyne 2 a -

RIGA i= ae oe eee ee tN Gree tte. 894 . 14

BOG Fe aise Pa Serie ENS ee RE ee oe tla 3

4 09 Inject HCl 0.5% into duct.

MO ie 5 OP en eS eae ceri ERAS, eas Te ca ty in a

Chorda ineffective at any strength.

In the foregoing experiment the chorda became completely

ineffective at 12:30. The gland, however, was abnormally full

of quinine fluid, and the first sympathetic stimulation after the

316 MATHEWS.

injection consequently gave a greatly augmented secretion at -

12:39. Thereafter each stimulation yielded less and less, and

finally at 12:59 only 3 mm. were secreted. The ducts may be

assumed to be practically empty. Quinine solution was now

again injected, and the next sympathetic stimulation yielded

again a greatly augmented secretion. Finally at 1:11 the sym-

pathetic failed to yield any secretion, and from then until

4 P.M. was totally ineffective. It would be said, at first sight,

that the nerve was paralyzed. Such, however, was not the

case, its seeming paralysis being due to the emptiness of the

gland. This was shown by the injection of .5 % NaCl solution

into the duct. The following stimulation of the sympathetic at

4:02 yielded a very large secretion.

This experiment in two ways furnishes very strong evidence

of the muscular nature of the sympathetic secretion. The fact

that sympathetic secretion may be obtained long after paralysis

of the chorda is very suggestive. Heidenhain* maintains that

the chorda secretion is paralyzed by the action of the drug on

the gland cells. ' If this be true, and I see no feason to doubt

it, it furnishes very strong evidence that the sympathetic pro-

duces its secretion in some other manner than action on the gland

cell, for the sympathetic secretion is not materially affected long

after the gland cells have been completely paralyzed. The fact

that the nerve’s effect soon passes away, but may be restored

by the simple injection of more quinine solution or other fluid

into the duct, I believe to be susceptible of but one explanation,

?. ¢., that the nerve causes this secretion by compression of the

ducts and alveoli.

A similar phenomenon is witnessed if the gland artery be

compressed and fluid thus cut off from the gland. A few stimu-

lations of the sympathetic suffice to render the nerve inoperative,

but by injection of fluid into the duct the nerve is shown to be

still active.

* Heidenhain, Studien aus Breslau, IV, 1868, p. 85, ‘‘so wird die Erregbarkeit

der absondernden Elemente bald herabgesetzt und nach kurzer Zeit ganz vernichtet.”’

SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. 317

Experiment Va (Continued; see p. 305).

TIME. NERVE. SECRETION IN MM.

fat. 5.

SS a ee Artery clamped close by the hilus.

Sag mer aw, EEE SOUS bier Rll ee ae fe)

Bee. at he ty SIPC ICE es we oe es 23

BRR ac W tik es Mec e rey git | cc: oy aan oe oe a rr fe)

BeAOn Ce ee a 5 SV MpAt MIE Hae wit ie as 5 oad). fe)

0.2 cc., .5 % NaCl solution injected into duct.

= a ie ea rr SYMIpRHIGHG ye ht ok se or oa A

A Dien Sartre os Ve) 2 oe Artery unclamped

ADT? SOi he us Artery clamped |

Be G4 nT oe ates gr 3 BAS ToT Ro Oe Oe me Oa a O

AREY si id sy Syimparmetcr £500 5, 5. ee a ames 25

OES OE ty NO ee as S10 a ee Os aN ee fe)

A MeO tk Lh) Supa WeMe..! G2. ee eas 14

AAO Pe val atch a.) 5 Syiipactene. 9) 9 rl 2 ae a O

Bee as ~ 4 €t.,.5 9, NaCl injected into duct

1 Ng At Ser a ee Sympathetic. . .. Seared |

0.) a) a er PSRINPACMCIC ly eee. See fe)

eer A ager.) Pe omminatnene . sy.) ke 8 2k eG O

ee a a a ae 2 ct. > hi, acl injected

Ae eOee wes! Se Pymipatetie.n” Gite (28s ox.Soe tw 8

In this experiment the sympathetic appeared paralyzed at

3:40, 4:20 and 4:26, but the injection of normal salt solution

into the duct was followed by a secretion little less than normal,

on the next stimulation. In one case twenty minutes after the

artery had been clamped, the sympathetic was thus shown still

to be active. Heidenhain attributes the loss of the chorda’s

power to the suffocation and consequent paralysis of the gland

cell. (See footnote, p. 308.) As already pointed out (p. 316) this

would, if true, show that the sympathetic produces its secretion

in some other way than by action on the cell. The fact that

the nerve’s power may be restored by the injection of innocuous

fluid into the ducts is readily explicable on the muscular theory

of secretion, but, with difficulty, on the cellular theory.

I found that a similar phenomenon may, at times, be seen in

the cat’s submaxillary, which has been paralyzed by just suffi-

cient atropin to prevent chorda secretion. As was first pointed

out by Langley, atropin paralyzes the sympathetic in the cat,

but more atropin is required than to paralyze the chorda. The

318 MATITEWS.

sympathetic may appear paralyzed, wholly or in part, before it

actually is. In this condition gently forcing the secreted saliva

back into the gland restores the nerve’s power.

Experiment XII.

Cat etherized. Canula in duct of left submaxillary. Both

chorda and cervical sympathetic cut. Both nerves active. In-

ject .1% solution of atropin carefully into femoral vein until

chorda just paralyzed. Sympathetic stimulated 30 seconds

each time.

TIME. NERVE. SECRETION IN CC.

h, m. s.

2 50 Chorda O.

2°55 Sympathetic cca

Qa52 ee Q. oT

ees) : 6. I

3 4 : 0.05

3°55 i 0.05

3 56 os 0.03

Blew the secretion gently back into gland.

3°57 Sympathetic 0.13

4 00 oe 0.15

4 06 Inject .I cc. atropin into femoral vein.

A OF Sympathetic 0.10

4 08 oc 0.10

4 09 be 0.10

4 MO Lee Sd | sympathetic ..% 26755 4s od (kD

Inject .2 cc. atropin

A AL Qe ha get, oe ae Syiipathietic — <24 1k ee pee 07

ALAS een eens Sao Nou eek is eae OREO ag eagle ee Uae we eee Cm or

WED ate gg Dt ee Oe ee eee 03

Blew saliva into gland.

Oe a ar ee . Syiipathetue's. 2 4a eee 25

AT ecses Sat yale: 6. BS iclene Gh ie, va, wen eae 505

2 cee ss renee te oe pea eg ke eg 04

Pgs Ce RA ees gree 3 ee tes Ee eed Le ee as ie 02

Blew .I cc. saliva back into gland.

Ai DE Pee eas Sytipathetic... 4.45. 2 a) pets 12

ZN SP NSS PC a eRe oe Tp! S)y@ pty iat ee te She eee een 04

AZ 2igs esta coh Mental Noten aes Seine ects. Ye. oi ta dh eae ae ete 03

Blew .1 cc. saliva back into gland.

SECRETION’ PHYSIOLOG Y. 319

Ea ek Symipetiee 3s 6 ee 14

Pais 7 A ae ee aa Tee oe DS et ar a ae . -O2

BEG eg A Mac a ae ee one ek we ea ie ae 04

REE wig alte e=.3 ae gia DS, Let! GA seas, Iie aa 02

Blew .1 cc. saliva back into gland.

(ef ae ae ee .\, Syiipathetie fy ey Ge eS

re. lat. ide AS hygeine = BOs Wal oe <9 * ee -O8

EL vetoes “ayers, Ye 757.8 pede ee Se eck ee ni a 06

See Oma gi ete isla! o's ee wit So ee PPPS he ip si ver OZ

Ae ee we ag ee (ee ea eR ete cee Oe as OF

Blew .I cc. saliva back into gland.

eee ss Soins oo SyMpathegedt: | iis seas +) a0

I aS ae ee ae a as Dae es Mea apg es Bg aie 108

AA Tae suite (tsi s,s f0! feo ene ae ei pe Se eee 05

be a a er ae Fae 04

sir ea ee Pe tad ht 03

Blew back .1 cc. saliva.

Bea meets. Wao in £ Soymepaimetic. 2 oc) LF Yr ok RS

Sebo Wap Na era Ee ites eat ted oc Pe aes aes 04

PASOV Cote ba. ee a! aye “a ol

oe aed a eae nowt 04

AOE PASS. s yd? oe (Ka ue 03

Blew back .1 cc. saliva.

eres eect. . oympatieney 5. Ses a OP

ETERS. 5 Se cO Lap aR i oh coh Rr lel mar Baan ve » +09

Merb glia, bape oh its Sao eas eee Vrs a ha ee eae ee 04

Cle orgs ar ae MR oat oe Were aimee ee cae JOR

Blew back .I cc. Saliva.

fc a Si Sf) ee 1 Lot | A a re 10

Att Sea RR aR ae Cd Na Ae a tae ee 7.2. 205

4 48 . - ee ae eee ee eee 03

PRON Ae Stet eer vat ph ces =e O04

ALISO. aia atten ares) ne a Se Meta: Sk ois dit Mase Apis 02

Blew back .1I cc. saliva.

BBE Ss OS lack ae Sywiputhetic. -. 24 6: A prans mar | |

A lnk. 5 Ala Bathe aS ae BARRO saw el » «2

NALS a Se ae ai eS 3 etna oPk MeSas Pelecge ote AL |g an 04

(NRL: Als Se Dae cae Me cnien Be Wen ti mene! Praees ge ce cers 025

Blew back .I cc

15) a ay A epee ea i Re A etd! TN Rene aia ee 075

OS ee arenes ae Dae: FAD ALO Hs 025

SS Ee I a Re Re ee ROE tee Veet yee 04 &c

The most probable explanation of the apparent failure, partial

or total of the sympathetic, in all the immediately preceding

experiments, appears to me to be this: That by the injection of

320 MATHEWS.

quinine, or atropin, or compression of the gland’s artery, liquid

is prevented from entering the gland. A few stimulations of

the sympathetic suffice to expell all, or most, of the available

saliva in the gland, and the nerve thereafter appears paralyzed.

If, now, the ducts and alveoli be passively redistended by the

injection of liquid into the duct the nerve again causes a

compression of the duct, and the fluid is again expelled and gives

a secretion. This renewed secretion cannot, however, be re-

ferred to the action of the gland cell, because the latter has been

in one case paralyzed by the action of quinine, and in the other

case by suffocation. Nor could it be referred to the action of

the cell, even were the latter not paralyzed, for the. mere hypo-

thetical taking-up of fluid into the cell from the duct, and its

discharge again into the latter, would in no way alter the bulk

of fluid in the ducts plus the bulk of the cell. There would,

hence, be no pressure to drive the secretion from the gland.

e. THE CHARACTER OF SYMPATHETIC SALIVA.

Evidence that the sympathetic nerve innervates the gland cell

has been derived from the character of the sympathetic saliva.

This, as is well known, is richer in organic matters than the

saliva secreted under the influence of the gland’s dilator nerve.

This greater richness Heidenhain attributes to the predominance

in this nerve of so-called “trophic’’ fibres, the function of which

is to render the stored-up metabolic products of the cell (hylo-

gens) more soluble, and the juice consequently more concen-

trated. This assumption involves such consequences that by

common consent it has been considered the most unsatisfactory

part of the Heidenhain theory. It is, however, practically the

only probable explanation, with one exception, which has been

offered. The exception is the view suggested by Schiff, dis-

cussed below.

If the sympathetic simply drives out the saliva already present

in the gland the sympathetic saliva must be of the character of

that present in the ducts and alveoli at the moment of stimulation.

There is evidence that this is the case. That the saliva in the

ducts of the dog’s parotid is very viscid has been shown by

SECRETION FA YSIOLOG Y. 321

Langley.” Sections show the ducts plugged with a viscous

looking mass, and Langley suggests that the saliva is here too

thick to be expelled. In one experiment Langley found a dog’s

parotid which secreted under the influence of the sympathetic

1.3 cc. Concerning this saliva Langley says :*

“The saliva was of the most remarkable nature ; it formed a

thick jelly-like mass; if allowed to collect at all in the canula

it could be drawn out as a continuous clot. During the experi-

ment the duct was frequently emptied by pressure to prevent

its being stopped up.’ The saliva contained 7.8 % of organic

solids. We can, moreover, artificially alter the fluidity of the

saliva in the ducts, rendering it more dilute, by the action of the

chorda tympani or pilocarpine. In such cases, as we have seen

in speaking of the augmented secretion, sympathetic saliva is

almost as thin as chorda saliva. By long stimulation of the

chorda, moreover, we may exhaust the soluble constituents of

the gland. In such cases it may be presumed that the gland

saliva is thinner than normal. It is known that under such cir-

cumstances the sympathetic saliva may fall within the limits of

density of chorda saliva.* A similar change occurs in paralytic

secretions following division of the chorda. The gland then

secretes a very thin saliva, and sections show the cells practic-

ally exhausted of their mucous. The sympathetic in these

causes a very abundant and very watery secretion.

We may obtain still further evidence of the character of the

saliva normally present in the ducts of the resting gland by a

sudden, strong stimulation of the chorda tympani. The rapid

inflow of fluid from the capillaries about the alveoli, taking place

under the influence of that nerve, drives out the saliva in the

ducts before it has time to become diluted. If we examine this

saliva first appearing on chorda stimulation we find it in all re-

spects typical sympathetic saliva. From this Schiff concludedt

that sympathetic saliva was nothing more than the saliva nor-

mally present in the ducts, formed during glandular rest.

* Heidenhain, Studien aus Breslau, 1V, 1868. After long sympathetic stimula-

tions the saliva becomes ‘‘ diinnflussig, hell, und dadurch dem chorda Speichel

ganz und gar ahnlich,’’

ft Schiff. Legons sur la Digestion. Tome I., p. 296, 1867; also p. 304.

322 MATHEWS.

Schiff found that if the sympathetic nerve of the horse be

stimulated the parotid secreted quickly 8-10 volumes of white

saliva, and then, as in the cat’s submaxillary, secretion ceased.

If the horse be fed there ensued a copious, clear secretion of

watery cerebral saliva. The gland was now, presumably, full

of such saliva. If it be allowed to rest for twenty min-

utes without secretion on again feeding the horse the first

saliva (8-10 volumes) was typical, thick, white sympathetic

saliva. This was followed by the clear cerebral saliva. Schiff

repeated this many times, thus showing that in the interval of rest

the gland, uninfluenced by the sympathetic, converts the clear

cerebral saliva into typical so-called sympathetic saliva. A sim-

ilar phenomenon has been described, with a somewhat different

interpretation for the dog’s submaxillary, by Heidenhain.* I

have repeated Schiff’s experiment on the dog’s submaxillary,

fully confirming him. This is shown in the following exper-

iment.

Experiment XIII.

Large dog, morphine and ether. At 10:30 A.M. canula in

right Wharton’s duct. Sympathetic and chorda-lingual cut.

On the first stimulation of the chorda the first saliva was viscid,

whitish and filled with corpuscles. The chorda was stimu-

lated until 2 cc. of saliva were secreted. This saliva was thin,

clear, typical chorda saliva. Gland rested without secretion

until 11:30. Stimulated chorda. The first saliva was thick,

viscid, white saliva. The gland then secreted 1 cc., clear

chorda saliva. Rested until 2:30 P.M. Stimulated the chorda.

A very large amount of typical, sympathetic saliva appeared first,

followed by 2 cc. of watery chorda saliva. Gland rested until

4 ?.M. Stimulated chorda. The first salva was viscid and

contained many salivary corpuscles. Secreted afterward I cc.

clear saliva. Rested until 5 p.m. “Stimulated the. chorda;

The first saliva was again viscid, whitish saliva, filled with sah-

vary corpuscles and lumps.

* Heidenhain. Studien aus Breslau, 1V, 1868, p. 52. ‘‘Die erste Speichel por-

tion war sehr dick, fast gallertartig, reich an Schleimballen wie sie sonst im Sympa-

thicus Speichel vorkommen, und ebenso an Speichelkérperchen die haufenweise

bei einander lagen.”’

SECRETION PHYSIOLOG Y. 323

This experiment proves that after each stimulation of the

chorda, the thin, chorda saliva filling the gland ducts is quickly

converted, even in the absence of sympathetic influence, into

typical viscid, sympathetic saliva.* It shows, also, that the ducts

of the normal, resting mucous gland are filled with saliva, sup-

posed to be characteristic of the sympathetic’s action. This

observation seems to me to render Heidenhain’s assumption of

special “trophic’’ nerve fibres to account for the character of

such saliva, superfluous; and, also, to give additional evidence

that sympathetic saliva is nothing more than this “saliva of

rest,” expelled by compression of ducts and alvecli. The cor-

rectness of the latter view is, in my opinion, strongly confirmed

by the great variation in character of sympathetic saliva, witha

variation of character of the saliva within the gland.

I wish to point out, also, that the influence of sympathetic

stimulation upon the composition of the saliva secreted during

coincident stimulation of the dilator nerve, upon which special

stress has been laid by Heidenhain, is also readily understood on

this hypothesis of the nature of sympathetic action. Langley’s

discovery” that the sympathetic produces a secretion from the

dog’s parotid unless the saliva be too thick for expulsion make

Heidenhain’s results clear.”

Heidenhain found, in harmony with all other observers, that

stimulation of the sympathetic usually causes no secretion from

the dog’s parotid. He concluded from this that the nerve

carried no, or few, secretory fibres. He discovered, however,

that if Jacobson’s nerve be irritated so as to cause a secretion,

and during this irritation the sympathetic be stimulated, the

saliva secreted during simultaneous irritation of both nerves was

far richer in organic solids than that secreted under the influ-

ence of Jacobson’s nerve alone.{ Denying that the sympathetic

* This is a pretty conclusive reply to the statement of Heidenhain that the simple

contact of the water with the hylogens is not sufficient to dissolve them

We have here a demonstration that it is sufficient in the total absence of nerve in-

fluence.

{ Heidenhain. MHermann’s Handbuch d. Phys. V, p. 55. ‘* Der Sympathicus

des Hundes enthilt fiir die Parotis nur trophische, fiir die submaxillaris daneben

wenige secretorische Fasern.’’

{ Heidenhain, Hermann’s Handbuch d. Phys. V, p. 55.

324 MATHEWS.

exerted a secretory effect upon the gland, he considered the

secretion to be due to Jacobson’s nerve alone. He concluded,

therefore, that stimulation of the sympathetic enormously in-

creased the content of organic solids in the cerebral saliva. The

sympathetic must hence act on the gland cells so as to render

their contents far more soluble. From Langley’s results, how-

ever, we can safely conclude that the saliva, secreted when both

nerves are stimulated, is not pure cerebral saliva, but largely, if

not wholly, augmented sympathetic saliva. Like all sympa-

thetic saliva, it is more concentrated than the saliva secreted

under the influence of the dilator nerve, because it is expelled

without dilution.

f. OTHER EVIDENCE OF THE MuscuLar NATURE OF THE

MECHANISM OF SYMPATHETIC SECRETION.

Very clear evidence, also, has been brought forward by Eck-

hard,” von Wittich” and Heidenhain” himself that the sympa-

thetic causes at least the major part of its secretion, by a com-

pression of the ducts and alveoli. The parotid gland of the

sheep is an albuminous gland, capable of secreting against a |

pressure of 400-500 m. m. of water (Eckhard). If while secret-

ing against a somewhat lower pressure (200-300 mm.) the

cervical sympathetic be stimulated, the water rises suddenly in

the manometer for some distance (30-100 mm.). Ox ceasing

stimulation the secretion rushes back at once into the gland nearly,

though never quite, torts former level. The higher the pressure

the more sudden the flow backward. The quick rise at the

beginning of stimulation and the abrupt back flow of the secretion

at the end plainly suggest that the nerve caused compression

of the ducts and alveoli, and thus pressed out the secretion.

On ceasing stimulation these structures dilated, and the secfe-

tion, being under pressure, rushed back into the gland. I see

no other explanation for the back flow, as it takes place too

suddenly and at too low a pressure (200 mm. water) to be due

to back filtration.

Heidenhain’s observation is less striking, but it is similar to

SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. . 325

the above. (Breslau Studien, p. 69, 1V.) In taking the-secre-

tory pressure of the dog’s submaxillary he stimulated the

chorda until the pressure in the ducts was 271 mm. Hg. On

ceasing stimulation the manometer gradually fell. On stimula-

ting the sympathetic the sinking became much slower, and the ma-

nometer remained stationary at 160 mm. On breaking the

stimulation the manometer sank gradually to 100. On stimu-

lating the sympathetic it rose to 107, and on chorda stimulation

to 271. It gradually fell during following sympathetic stimula-

tion, but on breaking the stimulation it fell with striking rapidity

(Auftalig beschleunigtes Sinken). Heidenhain thus records for

the dog’s submaxillary the same sudden back flow on breaking

the stimulation of the sympathetic as Eckhard and von Wittich

describe in the sheep.

Paradoxical though it may seem, the experiments just quoted

of von Wittich and Eckhard have been cited by Heidenhain as

conclusive evidence that the sympathetic does not simply drive

out the secretion already in the gland. And it is this con-

viction which led Heidenhain, in the discussion of all experi-

ments involving the sympathetic, to ignore the possibility of its

having such an action. Heidenhain believed von Wittich was

right in contending that the failure of the manometer to return

to its former level on breaking stimulation proved that the

amount of saliva in the gland had been increased. It will be

instructive to consider von Wittich’s explanation of the phe-

nomena of this secretion. von Wittich” suggests that the back

flow of the saliva is due to the saliva being pushed back into the

cells. Let us examine this more closely. von Wittich and

Heidenhain assumed that the cells, on stimulation, discharge

their stored products into the lumen. Such a process, it need

hardly be said, would lead to no secretion from the ducts, as

the bulk of the cell would diminish to just the extent that the

bulk of fluid in the ducts increases. Hence the bulk of cell

plus liquid would remain unaltered. We must, therefore, make

either one of two farther assumptions: First, that the alveoli are

greatly distended owing to the turgor of the cells. Stimulation

of the nerve might conceivably diminish the resisting power of

ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sci., XI, September 13, 1898—zz2.

326 MATHEWS.

the inner end of the cell, and the secretion be expelled from the

cell by intra-cellular tension, and from the ducts by the elastic

tension of the distended alveolar wall. Or, second, it must be

assumed that, as the fluid flows from the cell, new fluid enters

the cell from the rear, so that the cell does not diminish in bulk

to an extent aqual to the bulk of secretion it has lost. Either

of these assumptions lands us at once in difficulties. If the first

be true we cannot understand why the sympathetic secretion

should be abnormally large, just in those cases, such as par-

alytic secretions, or after long-continued chorda secretion, in

which the alveoli are not distended and are not presumably

under pressure. The second assumption, besides being wholly

imaginary, has to explain whence comes the fluid flowing into

the cell, and why it should flow in during sympathetic stimu-

lation at a time when there is a pronounced vaso-constriction.

With this difficulty of understanding how the nerve could cause

a secretion by action on the cell, let us see how the sudden back

flow could be understood. According to von Wittich and

Heidenhain the diameter of the alveoli has remained constant.

The secretion, manifestly, cannot upon this assumption return

into the gland, unless there be a diminution in the combined

bulk of the secretion in the ducts and the cells. There will be

no such alteration in bulk, however, by the secretion passing into

the cell as von Wittich assumes, for the cell will grow to just

the amount that the secretion in the lumen diminishes. The

only way a diminution in bulk could be brought about is by a

back filtration. The fall is, however, much too sudden for this,

and takes place at a pressure much less than the gland can sus-

tain without becoming cedematous. It is also impossible to see

why on ceasing stimulation the permeability of the gland to back

filtration should suddenly increase. Easy though it seems at

first sight, therefore, to ascribe such a back flow to a reabsorp-

tion under pressure of saliva by the cell, closer inquiry shows

that it is impossible to account for this back flow except on the

assumption either of a back filtration or that there has been an

alteration in the diameter of the alveoli. I maintain with Eck-

hard that a back filtration is highly improbable, and there re-

SECRELION. PITYSIOLOG Y. 327

mains only the alternative of an increase in the diameter of the

alveoli, probably following an active compression.

But if the saliva is simply pressed out, why is it that it does

not return to its former level on ceasing stimulation? This was

supposed by von Wittich to prove that the nerve increased the

amount of saliva in the gland. I fully agree with von Wittich

in this contention, but I disagree with him entirely in

referring the increase to the action of the nerve on the cell

This increase may be readily understood on the muscular theory,

without any assumption of nerve activity on the gland cell, as

follows: On breaking sympathetic stimulation of considerable

duration a temporary vaso-dilation occurs and the ducts and

alveolirelax. It takes an appreciable time for the saliva to pass

back into the fine tubules, and during this time the cells are ab-

sorbing water from the lymph and capillaries. Hence their

bulk and the amount of saliva is increased and the saliva is

never able to return to its former level. The proof of this is

sufficiently clear. That vaso-dilation does occur temporarily on

ceasing stimulation of constrictor nerves has often been re-

marked. I have myself often seen it in the rabbit’s ear and in

the cat’s submaxillary. In the dog’s submaxillary I have often

seen, also, that coincident with this vaso-dilation a slight secre-

tion may actually ensue (See Expt. VII, p. 311). It is, also, well

established that the cells do imbibe fluid and food during or after

sympathetic stimulation and thus increase the bulk of undifferen-

tiated protoplasm.

In view of these facts, I believe that von Wittich’s and Eck-

hard’s experiments, instead of proving that sympathetic stimu-

tion can not possibly be due to compression of the ducts and

alveoli, demonstrates that it must be due to such compression ;

that it is impossible to account for the back flow on any other

probable hypothesis, and that the fact that the saliva does not

reach its former level is readily understood by reference to the

nerve’s constrictor action and the temporary vaso-dilation ensuing

on breaking simulation. I do not believe that von Wittich ever

endeavored to analyze in detail his own explanation, or he must

have perceived its impossibility.

328 MATHEWS.

g. THE LOcATION AND NATURE OF THE CONTRACTILE SUBSTANCE

IN THE GLAND.

The contractile tissue, responsible for the sympathetic secre-

tion, resides neither in the gland capsule nor in the capillaries.

Glands dissected free from the capsules secrete normally. The

capillaries cannot be held responsible, as Vierheller™ supposed,

because, as one may readily see in the cat’s submaxillary, the

nerve may be still active on the blood vessels while producing

no secretion, and von Wittich’® records that after curare, the

rabbit’s sympathetic loses its secretory activity while still active

on the blood vessels of the ear. Unna’ has suggested that the

basement membrane 1s contractile, and this may possibly be the

ease. There is, however, no evidence of im. “That there as

smooth muscle about some of the principal ducts of the salivary

elands is well-known, but most histologists have failed to find

any between or about the alveoli. However, Pfliger™ and

Schliter® have each described isolated fibres, and strands of

smooth muscle lying between the alveoli, distinct from the

blood vessels, ‘so that the stroma is not entirely lacking in

contractility.”

Whether the contractile tissues thus far recognized histo-

logically in the gland are those active in the production of this

secretion appears to be doubtful. The physiological evidence

is of itself so strong, however, that I believe we can safely as-

sume the existence of such a tissue, even had we no histolog-

ical evidence of its presence.

h. THE CHANGES IN GLAND CELLS UPON SYMPATHETIC STIMU-

LATION.

The changes in gland cells, induced by stimulation of the

sympathetic nerve, are most clearly seen in the rabbit’s parotid,” .

less clearly in the dog’s parotid, where the nerve causes normally

little or no secretion. The changes consist in the diminution in

the size of the cell, the discharge of the mucous or secretory

products, the formation of new undifferentiated protoplasm and

SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. 329

in the nucleus becoming round and moving toward the center

of the cell. These changes are identical in kind with, though

taking place generally more slowly than, those following stimu-

lation of the dilator nerve or the injection of pilocarpine. Do

they indicate the direct action of the nerve on the cell? Al-

though they might be so interpreted, they may be readily under-

stood without any such assumption, as follows: Stimulation of

the nerve causes a compression of the cells and thus expels from

them their stored-up metabolic products and liquid. By this

means the cells discharge their products. On ceasing stimula-

tion the alveoli and ducts relax, and the cells take up water and

food from the lymph. The latter process is hastened probably

by a temporary vaso-dilation ensuing when the sympathetic

stimulation is broken. In virtue of the food, oxygen and lymph

thus brought to them the cells form new undifferentiated proto-

plasm. On _ several successive stimulations the accumulated

metabolic products are largely discharged, the cells become

smaller and the nuclei, relieved from pressure, become round

and move toward the center of the cells. The same explanation

holds also for the changes following stimulation of the dilator

secretory nerve, with the exception that the stored products are

dissolved out of the cell, instead of being squeezed out, and as

vaso-dilation accompanies this secretion the changes take place

at a more rapid rate. These changes are discussed more at

length in my paper on the Pancreas Cell.*

z. SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION.

The phenomena of sympathetic secretion, which have been con-

sidered, could hardly indicate more clearly, I think, the muscular

mechanism of that secretion. The sudden gush of saliva; its

sudden cessation, however prolonged the stimulation; the dim-

inution in the amount of saliva secreted when the stimulations

are rapidly repeated ; the apparent paralysis of the nerve when

the ducts are empty and its restoral to power if the ducts be

passively redistended ; the augmentation in volume of the secre-

tion, when the ducts are abnormally full of fluid saliva, and the

* Shortly to appear in the Journal of Morphology.

330 MATHEWS.

diminution in amount of secretion when there is little saliva

present ; the dependence of the character of the sympathetic

saliva upon that present in the gland at the moment of stimu-

lation; the back flow of saliva into the gland on stopping

stimulation when the gland is secreting against pressure; the

presence of smooth muscle in the ducts and between the alveoli—

these facts point unmistakably in one direction. A stronger

chain of circumstantial and direct evidence that this secretion is

caused by compression of the ducts and alveoli by contractile

tissue would be hard to imagine. If some of these phenomena

are susceptible of explanation upon the hypothesis that the

secretion is Gue to gland cell activity, others of them, z. ¢., the

augmented salivary secretion, the back flow of saliva on break-

ing stimulation, the paralysis of the nerve when the ducts are

empty, and its restoral to power if the ducts be redistended, are

explicable, if at all, by that theory, only by means of improba-

ble and unproven assumptions.

The surprisingly ready acceptance of the Ludwig-Heidenhain

theory of secretory nerves, acting on gland cells, as an explana-

tion of the sympathetic salivary secretion in the face of unmis-

takable indications of a muscular’ mechanism, has been duc

largely, I believe, to the generally prevalent belief that there is

but one mechanism of secretion. That this belief is erroneous,

there has long been, I believe, many indications. . For there is

direct evidence in many glands, such as the poison glands of

snakes, the skin glands of amphibia, many unicellular glands,

sebaceous and sweat glands, that many secretions are due to

muscular action. And in many other glands the phenomena of

secretion have shown as clearly that here the mechanism was

some other than muscular. There must evidently. be at least

two different mechanisms, a muscular and some other one.

Once the idea that there is but one mechanism of secretion is

abandoned, the salivary secretions will be found, I believe, to

lose much of their puzzling character.

The facts which Heidenhain urges as showing that the sym-

pathetic produces secretion by action on the gland cell are

readily accounted for if the sympathetic cause compression of

the ducts and alveoli and vaso-constriction.

SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. 331

Mi; OTHER SEGRE FIONS DUE TO MUSCLE

ACTION.

Probably many other secretions are due to muscle action.

The unicellular glands of the carp-louse, Argulus foliaceus,

are surrounded by muscle fibres. Nussbaum,” observing the liv-

ing glands, states that they are emptied by the contraction of this

musculature. Muscle surrounds the unicellular glands in the

mantel of Aplysia,* and the glandular pedicellaria of the Echino-

derms.** The gasteropod liver* possesses, beneath the serosa,

an incomplete musculature, the contraction of which has been

watched in the living gland. A similar sheath is found in the

livers of Crustacea, land and water Isopods, Amphipods and

Decapods.™

The poison glands of spiders have their alveoli enclosed in a

tunic of spirally arranged muscular fibres.* In the salivary

glands of Cephalopods™ the cells rest on connective tissue, which

is, in turn, surrounded by muscle fibres. An examination of the

physiology of these glands leaves little doubt that the secretion is

due to muscular action.** The amphibian skin glands are sur-

rounded by a muscular sheath lying between the cells and the

basement membrane. There is no doubt from observations on

the living glands (Engelmann,"© Drasch," Ranvier®) that this

muscle at times contracts, compresses the gland and thus causes

a secretion. A similar muscular mechanism prevails in the

mucous glands of Petromyzon, in which the cells are bodily

extruded.

The poison glands of amphibia and reptilia and others of the

salivary glands” are provided with their own musculature, or are

emptied by surrounding skeletal muscles. Many anal and

cloacal glands,” sweat® and sebaceous glands are provided with

a musculature lying between the basement membrane and the

cells. There is little doubt that the secretion of sebum is pro-

duced by the action of this muscle. The same can be said for

the secretion of the oil gland of birds. Probably the most in-

teresting secretion due to muscular action, outside of the sali-

vary glands, is found in the mammalian sweat glands. From

332 MATHEWS.

the observations of Ranvier,” Joseph” and others certain secre-

tions of sweat are probably due to the compression of the gland

by this muscle. Probably the post-mortem sweat secretions,

secretion after closing the artery, or the injection of strychnia

are due to this cause. (There is, however, a second sweat

mechanism associated with vaso-dilation. )

Many more examples of the muscular mechanism of secretion

might be given, but these suffice to indicate the very wide dis-

tribution of such a mechanism. Muscular mechanisms are, pos-

sibly, more common among the invertebrates, but they play,

also, a not inconsiderable part in vertebrate secretions. The

vertebrate, however, with its delicately coordinated, closed vas-

cular system, develops a second mechanism, that of osmosis,

which we will now consider.

IV. SALIVARY SECRETION ENSUING UPON STEM—

ULATION OF THE VASO-DILATOR NERVE.

That the general features of chorda secretion coincide with

the phenomena of osmosis, regulated by the nerve’s dilator action,

is pointed out briefly on p. 356. I wish here to consider more

particularly those facts which have hitherto been irreconcilable

with such a theory, and have been generally considered evidence

of a special action of the nerve on the gland cell. These facts

are the most important evidences of a secretory nerves and so

warrant a careful consideration. They are: (a) the increase in

the percentage of organic solids of a secretion coincident with an

increased rate of secretion ; (4) the action of atropine ; (c) the

chorda-secretion after clamping the artery; (d@) the action of

nicotine.

a. THe INCREASE IN THE PERCENTAGE OF ORGANIC CONSTITU-

ENTS COINCIDENT WITH AN INCREASED RATE OF SECRETION.

Heidenhain * observed that on passing from a weak to a strong

stimulation of the dilator nerve in the fresh submaxillary and

* Heidenhain. | Hermann’s Handbuch der Physiologie V. p. 50. Studien aus

Breslan IV, 1868, p. 32.

SECRETION PAYSIOLOG Y. 333

parotid gland of the dog, not only was the rate of secretion in-

creased, but also the percentage of solids. He obtained a simi-

No. of So & | Rate of | = 5

Stimula- Time. | Coil. = 2 | Secretion \Solids.| Salts. §

tion. | <2 | In I min, | O &

i: am. m

I | 9 20-45 315—288 335 OA [O74 “| Ol22 0.52

2 9 47-51 160—1I 30 3.5 .87 210.) “50 1.54

3 110 54.5-59 | 100— 60 3.0) 266 20S ||" .A5 1.63

4 (10 19-40 264—245 2.8 ay a 1.44} '.36 I.07

5 10 45-48 160—130 2.0" | 1.00 1.41 .49 0.91

6 [ro 50-56 S0—— 65 3.0 we hiro Pig “1! «6.76

4 II 9-27 270—250 2.5 a3 0.78 | 30 |} .o48

8 ‘II 30-34 | 150—I120 2.5 re 0.90 | .38 | 0.51

9 rik 45-44 | SB eR 2.8 | gr} o.79g 1) .36 |). 0.4%

| |

lar result in the dog’s pancreas, Gottlieb’’ in the rabbit’s pan-

creas, and Pawlow and Schumowa-Simanowskaja”™ in the dog’s

stomach. Inthe sheep’s submaxillary, on the other hand, there

was little or no increase in the per cent. of solids on increasing the

stimulus.

Heidenhain believed that this increase in solids meant that the

cerebal nerve, besides quickening the flow of water through the

cells, rendered the cell contents more soluble. How otherwise

shall we explain the fact, he asks, that although given a shorter

time of contact with these solids, the water passing through the

cells, nevertheless dissolves more than during slow secretion.

“Die blosse Berthrung mit der aus dem Blute ausgeschiedenen

Flissigkeit ist zur Uberfuhrung des Schleimes in das Secret

nicht ausreichend, denn sonst musste das Secret um so reicher

daran sein, je langer die Flussigkeit in den Drtisenraumen ver-

weilt, d. h. je langsamer die Secretion vor sich geht.’ He

further assumes that the trophic fibers require a stronger stimu-

lus than the secretory. ‘‘ Das cerebrale Secret wird, so lange

die Driise unermiidet ist, bei Reizverstarkung reicher an or-

ganischen Bestandtheilen, weil der Umsatz der organischen Sub-

stanzen in den Zellen unter den FEinflusse der starker gereizten

trophischen Fasern schneller steigt, als der Wasserstrom unter

dem Einflusse der starker gereizten secretorischen Fasern.’”’”

334 MATHEWS.

There are two possible fallacies in Heidenhain’s argument.

One fallacy probably lies in his tacit assumption that the gland

secretes as a whole ; that the secretion following a strong stimu-

lus is derived from the same alveoli as the secretion following a

weak stimulus. The other fallacy is the assumption that all of

the organic constituents of saliva secreted from a fresh gland

upon a strong stimulus are in solution. The true reason why

the dilator-secretory nerve may cause an increase in the organic

matter present in a secretion, coincident with an increased rate

of flow, in passing from a-weak to a strong stimulus, may be

the following :

If a very weak stimulus be used, only a portion of the alveoli

are aroused to activity. The supply of stored up products

(hylogens) in these, becomes soon exhausted and the secre-

tion derived from them is poor in organic constituents. On

passing to a strong stimulus, the previously resting alveoli are

thrown into activity and the secretion derived from them ts rich

in organic constituents. It is the secretion from these fresh

alveoli, which increases the percentage of organic constituents

in the whole secretion. On passing from a long continued

weak to a strong stimulus in a fresh gland, one is really pass-

ing from an exhausted to a fresh portion of the gland.

Moreover, in Heidenhain’s observation there is a second

source of error which he has overlooked. Heidenhain treats all

of the organic constituents of the rapidly secreted saliva as if

they were in solution and considers that the liquid derived from

the blood is in contact with the materials to be dissolved, only

during the time of its passage through the cell. There can be

little question, however, that saliva, and particularly the rapidly

secreted saliva of a fresh gland, cannot be considered a true

solution, for it contains many bodies in suspension. Heidenhain

himself has been one of those to describe the microscopical

appearance of the lumps of mucous matter, salivary corpuscles

and occasional leucocytes found in this secretion. The presence

of these bodies in saliva indicates that the rapidly secreted saliva

carries out of the cell not only substances in solution, but vis-

cous masses of mucous matter not in solution. Its swift cur-

SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. oon

rent is able to transport these masses, while a more slowly

flowing secretion is not. Furthermore, in all probability the

saliva keeps on dissolving them as it carries them along and

hence becomes actually more concentrated, because it is in con-

tact with them really for a longer time than the more slowly

secreted saliva and not for a shorter time as Heidenhain thought.

Heidenhain made no endeavor to distinguish between the mat-

ters in suspension and those in solution.

That any gland functions as a whole, as Heidenhain tacitly

assumes in his explanation, can not be maintained.

The whole surface of the stomach, for instance, may be con-

sidered as one large gland. It has long been known that se-

cretion can ensue in one spot, and not in another. Heidenhain

himself, has called special attention to the marked differences in

the condition of the various alveoli inthe salivary glands. Even

in the resting gland, here and there alveoli will be found posses-

sing the structural features of secretory activity.” In the stomach

he remarks that some glands show changes on stimulation before

others,” and I have, myself, repeatedly observed glands in the

Newt’s stomach close together in very different stages of activity.

Kuthne and Lea® have observed this in the living rabbit’s

pancreas, a portion only of the gland being normally active.

After pilocarpine all the alveoli passed into a condition of activity.

In the kidney the independence of the various tubules in se-

cretion has been remarked for the bird’s kidney by von Wittich,

and for the mammalian kidney by Ribbert,“ and by Dr. Herter

in conjunction with the author. Finally, in the case of the sali-

vary glands, Langley says that even on prolonged activity of the

chorda many alveoli show no change. ‘‘ This is due, in some

cases, to fibres escaping stimulation, fibres which leave the

lingual later than usual.” This histological evidence appears

to me to be conclusive with reference to the idea that the gland

does not function as a whole, but that the individual alveoli in

the secreting gland may be here active, there passive.

The physiological. evidence that the foregoing is the true ex-

planation of Heidenhain’s observation is hardly less conclusive.

We can easily obtain evidence that the secretion obtained

336 MATHEWS.

during a weak stimulus is derived from a portion of the gland

only in the following manner: Let us stimulate the chorda nerve

carefully with a very weak current, until a large amount of se-

cretion has been obtained. If this secretion has been derived

from the whole gland a stronger stimulus should yield a se-

cretion much less concentrated than a stimulus of equal strength

before the weak stimulus. The glands should show, in other

words, a considerable exhaustion of the gland products. If, on

the contrary, the whole of this secretion has been derived from

a portion only of the gland the rest of the alveoli must remain

practically unaltered, and a stronger stimulus arousing these

should yield a juice, little, if any, poorer in organic matters than

was yielded by a stronger stimulus before the weak.

Werther” has unintentionally tried this experiment and found

the latter possibility to be what actually occurs. A very weak

stimulus, with the secondary coil at 300-240 mm., was em-

ployed for over three hours, and more than 20 cc. of saliva

were secreted. The percentage of organic solids secreted in the

slowly flowing saliva steadily fell, but the percentage of such

bodies in the saliva secreted on a succeeding stronger stimulus

was little if any less, after this long secretion, than it was with

an equally strong stimulus before. If, however, a somewhat

stronger stimulus was employed, the secretion from a still

stronger stimulus was much poorer in organic solids, than the

similar stimulus before the weak.

The fact that rapidly secreted saliva is not a pure solution,

and the considerations just presented concerning the independ-

ence of the alveoli of the gland render this observatoin of Hei-

denhain of doubtful value as evidence of the existence of se-

cretory nerves.

Moreover, there is good reason for doubting the truth of

Heidenhain’s statement, in the quotation on page 333, that the

liquid derived from the blood is incapable of dissolving the con-

stituents of the cells in the absence of nerve influence. As has

already been pointed out, in treating of sympathetic saliva,

(page 322), if the thin chorda saliva be simply left in the gland

for twenty minutes, or more, it is converted into a dense, vis-

SECRETION PHYSIOLOG Y. 337

cous fluid having all the characteristics of sympathetic saliva.

This conversion takes place with equal readiness whether the

gland nerves be intact or divided.

Heidenhain’s own explanation, also, will be found on an-

alysis, I believe, to involve such assumptions as to arouse seri-

ous doubt of its truth. To explain this phenomenon on the

basis of secretory cell activity, he assumed separate ‘“ trophic”’

nerve fibers acting on the cells. He thus necessitated the im-

probable conclusion, that at least many of the cells of the sub-

maxillary gland received at least four different nerve ends, z. ¢.,

trophic and secretory of the sympathetic, and trophic and secre-

tory of the chorda; and at least two entirely different nerve

impulses, z. ¢., trophic and secretory. That such a conse-

quence should not have aroused suspicion in his own mind of

the truth of his explanation is difficult to understand.

6. POST-MORTEM CHORDA SALIVARY SECRETION.

Another strong argument that the chorda does not produce

its secretion by its dilator action on the blood vessels, but by di-

rect action on the gland cell, has been derived from the so-called

post-mortem chorda secretion. Ludwig and Heidenhain found

that if the gland’s artery be completely closed, or if the head be

rapidly cut off, and the chorda at once stimulated, a fairly copious

secretion ensued. ‘This secretion was most abundant in the first

minute after section, and thereafter rapidly diminished, but a lit-

tle could still be obtained four, and in some cases five, minutes

after decapitation, or compression of the artery. Thereafter the

nerve was ineffective. Heidenhain believed this secretion to be

due to the action of the nerve on the gland cell, and its rapid fail-

ure to lack of oxygen and water. Both Ludwig and Heidenhain

believed that by the conditions of the experiment they entirely

eliminated the factor of the nerve’s vaso-motor action, and hence

thought it demonstrative evidence that the secretory and dilator

functions of the nerve were independent.

I think it may be questioned, however, whether the condi-

tions of the experiment do entirely obviate the vaso-motor action

of the nerve, and whether it is not still possible that this dila-

338 MATHEWS.

tion may cause the secretion. It is conceivable that this post-

mortem secretion might be due to the flow of blood from the

veins and arterioles into the capillaries, owing to the active dila-

tion of the latter during chorda stimulation. This explanation,

it is true, necessitates the assumptions that the chorda tympani

causes, on stimulation, an active dilation of the capillaries, or

veins, as well as of the arterioles, and that that dilation in some

manner makes it easier for the liquid to pass out into the secre-

tion. Both of these assumptions are difficult of proof, and in

the limited time at my disposal I have not been able to get

demonstrative evidence, either of their truth or error. There is

some reason to believe, however, that they may possibly be true.

That liquid passes out of the capillaries into the secretion of

the submaxillary gland because of an attractive pull exerted

upon it by some constituents of the gland cells, has been sug-

gested both by Ludwig and Heidenhain. To the evidence pre-

sented in favor of such a view by Heidenhain, I have nothing to

add, and in the normal condition of the capillary and gland

wall, I presume that the hypothesis is true. Ludwig supposed

that during chorda stimulation the attractive pull of the cell was

increased, owing to the formation of substances in the cell pos-

sessed of a higher endosmotic equivalent. Heidenhain believed

that the attraction of the cell for the liquid in the blood was

constant, but that on stimulating the chorda, the turgor of the

cell diminished owing to the passage of liquid into the gland

lumen, and water was thus enabled to enter the cell from the

blood. Both of these explanations, as will be noticed, assume

that in some manner the effectiveness of the attractive pull of

the cell is increased during nerve stimulation and water enters

the cells independent of the state of the vascular system. The

question which confronts us and which it was supposed this

post-mortem secretion settled is this: Does stimulation of the

nerve cause secretion by increasing in some manner the attrac-

tive pull exerted by the gland cells on the liquid of the blood,

or does it indirectly render effective by vaso-dilation an attrac-

tion which is constantly exerted by the cell on this liquid?

This is a very difficult point to determine. The endeavor

SECKE LION FH YVSIOLOG Y. 339

has been made to answer this question indirectly by showing

that vaso-dilation may ensue without secretion, and secretion

without vaso-dilation. But all the evidence which has hitherto

been offered, that vaso-dilation may ensue without secretion,

and that it alone is incapable of causing secretion, is invalidated

by the fact that the conditions of such experiments produce an

abnormal gland, or capillary wall, both factors which research

on lymph formation have shown to be of importance. Quinine,

hydrochloric acid, sodium carbonate, or atropine, drugs which

enable vaso-dilation to ensue without secretion, probably alter

the permeability of the capillary, or gland cell. So that infer-

ences can be drawn from such experiments as to processes oc-

curring in the normal gland only with the greatest caution. The

evidence with the exception of the post-mortem secretion, that

the chorda may cause a secretion without vaso-dilation is also

unsatisfactory, as pointed out on p. 355. Attention may now be

directed, hence, to this post-mortem chorda secretion.

It is probable from the considerations presented on page 338,

that the liquid causing this secretion is derived from the blood.

Can the chorda tympani act on the blood vessels in the absence

of circulation, in such a manner as to facilitate the passage of

that liquid from the capillaries to the gland cells? The only

possible way in which it might so act, I believe, is by causing

an active dilation of the capillaries or veins, as well as of the

arterioles. Is there any evidence that the chorda has such an

action ?

Tiegerstedt™ states that the capillaries are contractile but that

they have not hitherto been shown to be under nerve control.

Roy and Brown have brought forward strong evidence that the

capillaries are normally in a state of tonic contraction and that

they may actively expand independent of the blood pressure.

They observed in the capillaries of the web of the frog’s foot

that, although blood pressure might be diminished almost to

atmospheric pressure, the application for an instant of chloroform

to the web caused an enormous expansion of the capillaries.

Interesting, also, in this connection, are the observations of von

Frey. v. Frey’ examined microscopically the capillaries of the

340 MATHEWS.

frog’s tongue. He found that on stimulation of the dilator,

hypoglossal nerve, a dilation of the capillaries ensued even after

the blood supply had been cut off. If the artery be clamped,

he observed that the blood streamed out of the capillaries both

into the arteries and veins. If, now, the hypoglossal be stimu-

lated the capillaries dilate and blood streams into them from the

arterioles and veins. This movement persisted for from one to

two minutes after clamping the artery. Furthermore, in ex-

perimenting on the blood flow from the veins of the submaxil-

lary gland of the dog during stimulation of the chorda, v. Frey

often observed that stimulation of the chorda was followed bya

temporary decrease in the rate of flow of blood from the vein,

before the ordinary increase. He suggests that this would seem

to indicate a widening of the capillary area leading to a back

flow of blood from the veins were it not more probable that the

increased flow from the dilated arterioles would be more than

sufficient to offset this.

These facts justify the conclusion, I believe, that on stimu-

lating the chorda tympani in the severed head, the capillaries of

the gland probably dilate, and that blood enters them from the

veins.

How such a vaso-dilation might lead to a secretion is not

clear, but two possibilities suggest themselves: (1) that the

capillaries are thus brought into closer relation with the alveoli,

and the constant attraction exerted by the gland contents for

the water of the blood is thus rendered effective: or (2) that

vaso-dilation may in some way increase the permeability of the

capillary wall. The post-mortem chorda secretion can not, I

believe, be accepted unconditionally as illustrative of a secre-

tion independent of vaso-dilation, until these possibilities have

been shown to be non-existent, or non-essential.

If it shall be found that vaso-dilation of itself is a cause of

secretion in the normal gland, and that the gland cell is not the

secretory agent, the facts of secretion in the submaxillary gland

will probably necessitate the following conclusions, which are

not without interest for those studying the physiology of the

circulation: (1) That stimulation of the chorda causes an ac-

SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. 341

tive dilation of the capillaries, as well as a dilation of the arte-

rioles. (2) That the sympathetic is able to overcome the

chorda’s action on the arterioles, but not its action on the capil-

laries. This is shown by the following fact: If, during strong

stimulation of the sympathetic, the chorda be irritated by a cur-

rent which by itself is barely able to arouse a secretion, a secre-

tion ensues which is certainly as large, if not somewhat larger,

than the chorda alone would cause. Such a weak stimulus of

the chorda is, however, unable to neutralize the sympathetic’s

constrictor action on the arterioles, as shown by the observa-

tions of v. Frey. It will be necessary to assume, hence, that

the arterioles have remained contracted, while the capillaries

have dilated and blood has entered them from the veins produc-

ing a secretion analogous to the post-mortem chorda secretion.

I endeavored, in a variety of ways, to obviate with certainty

all possibility of the chorda’s dilator action. By the injection

of supra-renal extract into the circulation I hoped to cause

such an intense peripheral constriction as to neutralize the di-

lator action of the nerve. I am indebted to Dr. R. H. Cunning-

ham for this suggestion. After division of the chorda I injected

into the jugular vein the whole of a normal salt extract of two

powdered supra-renal capsules of another dog. I found, how-

ever, that the injection was followed by a slow constant secre-

tion of what appeared to be sympathetic saliva, and that this

secretion was increased at all times by a very weak stimulation

of the chorda. Indeed, the chorda caused a larger secretion

after the injection than before, probably due to the vaso-con-

striction in other areas of the vascular system. This result was

so discouraging that I did not attempt to repeat it.

Heidenhain remarks that large doses of physostigmin cause

such an intense constriction of the arterioles of the gland after

division of the chorda that stimulation of the latter nerve is un-

able to cause either a vaso-dilation, or secretion. Unfortunately,

Heidenhain does not give a full account of the experiment.

Were it true that the drug produces this effect within three or

four minutes of its injection, it would be, I believe, conclusive

evidence that secretion can not ensue in the absence of vaso-

ANNALS N. Y. AcAD. Scl., XI, September 13, 1898—23.

342 MATHEWS.

dilation, and that the nerve does not cause secretion by action

on the gland cells; for it is known that the drug does not

directly paralyze the hypothetical secretory fibers, or the gland

cell. To obtain the details of the drug’s action, I injected into

the jugular vein of a medium-sized dog 0.1 gr. of physostigmin

sulphate. But although the chorda was divided, a spontaneous

secretion began which stimulation of the chorda considerably

increased. This discrepancy from Heidenhain’s results is prob-

ably due, I believe, to the impure calabar extract he used.

I endeavored to ascertain whether the presence of blood in

the capillaries was an essential condition of the post-mortem se-

cretion by forcing the blood out with air. After ligaturing the

carotid artery and placing in it a canula directed headwards I

rapidly cut off the head and allowed air to pass into the carotid

under a pressure of 100mm. of Hg. The first experiment gave

a positive result. On stimulating the chorda a brief, scanty se-

cretion was obtained which quickly ceased. Examination of the

gland showed it to be practically bloodless. Intwo other simi-

lar experiments the post-mortem secretion was greatly reduced

in amount and ceased after 1 to 3 minutes, instead of lasting for

from 3 to 5 minutes, as normally. The glands in these experi-

ments still contained blood in the veins. The experiments indi-

cate, I believe, that the presence of blood in the capillaries is an

essential condition of this secretion. I regret not having been

able to bring my experiments to a more satisfactory con-

clusion, but it is to be hoped that the important bearing of this

post-mortem saliva upon the theory of secretion may lead to

its being made the subject of careful investigation.

From the following experiments the following conclusions

may be drawn relative to this post-mortem secretion :

1. After clamping the gland artery, or cutting off the head,

a secretion may be obtained from the submaxillary gland on stim-

ulating the chorda. This secretion is most abundant in the first

minutes, and thereafter rapidly diminishes. After four or five

minutes no more secretion can be obtained. The total amount

of saliva secreted varies from 9.3 to 1.5 cc. (Experiments

aN Li ian es)

SECRETION PHVSIOLOG Y. 343

2. If the gland be left without stimulation for a minute after

decapitation the total amount of saliva obtainable is considerably

reduced.

3. If the gland be not stimulated until 3 or 4 minutes have

passed a small secretion may be obtained 6 minutes after decapi-

tation. (Experiment XVIII.)

4. If air be blown into the carotid artery, after cutting off

the head, the secretion of saliva is reduced in amount and se-

cretion ceases, either abruptly or after 2 to 3 minutes. (Experi-

ments LXIII, LX VI and LXVII:)

5. If defibrinated blood be run under small pressure into the

vein of the gland a small secretion may be obtained 20 to 30

minutes after clamping the gland artery.

6. If the blood supply be cut off for 30 minutes, on read-

mitting blood the arterioles dilate, arterial colored blood issues

from the vein ata rapid rate and a spontaneous secretion begins.

The rate of this secretion is not changed by stimulation of the

chorda in the first minute. (Experiment Va.)

Experiment Va.

Large dog. 3 cc. 1% morphine sulph. subcut. Tracheot-

omy. Ether. Canule in both submaxillary ducts. Both

chordo-linguals and both sympathetics cut. The left vagus sub-

sequently divided also. The right gland is stimulated from

rate tO time. (sce p. 305: Lhe left is freed from its tunic and

is attached only by the hilum. The vein on the upper surface is

open and flows continuously. The only blood vessel coming

to the gland is the hilum artery. The other artery was tied and

ent,

Readings computed in cc.

TIME. NERVE. AMOUNT OF SECRETION IN CC.

hm. $s hems

a. 25 Clamped artery going to gland.

370.25 - 3 30 s Gradually less.

3 £30 c None.

3% (34 Cc &

3.35 S 07

344

Ko OW

to Go G2 Lo

AK LA Rep KR SE AAR ERE

ey ee Ss ing te SS SS

Se ee

amp RP

we,

wm U1

MATHEWS.

s .00

s 00

Inject 5 cc. .5% NaCl into duct.

s 05

Unclamped artery.

¢ Active secretion.

Gland secretions spontaneously .17 cc. per minute.

Cut left vagus.

Clamped artery again.

Chorda (intermittent). .50

c .18

30 c 07

Cc .0O

S -08

c-coil 12 .0O

I5 Ss .05 (very viscid)

5 -0O

Inject NaCl. 5% into duct.

S 30 sec. 04

c .0O

s .0O

Inject % cc. fluidinto duct. Most of it runs out before

stimulation.

S 025

Unclamp artery (red blood rushes out of vein).

Gland secretes spontaneously, Sa ce:

se We = » £2) 6G.

€ .30 cc. per minute.

Spontaneously secreting. .08 cc. per minute.

c I mm. Joe:

Spontaneously. 25) GC:

€ .9 cc. per minute.

Clamped artery again.

30 c (coil 12) os

Gland still slowly secreting spontaneously.

30 Cc aul

c .03

30 c .005 in first thirty seconds,

then no more.

S 03

c ele)

30 c coil Io .0O

s coil Io .O15

Unclamped artery.

c Readily secretes.

Blood rushes continuously out of vein a bright red on

unclamping the artery.

Gland secretes spontaneously .5 Cc.

Ss .O5

SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. 345

Br £3 30 Clamped artery.

5 13 49-5 14 40 c +5

5 14 40-5 17 30 No Stimulation.

Rae. 30 — 5 118 30 c .03

5. £9 - 5 20 € 02

a 20 c ere)

B22 -5 23 s .OI

rm 24 c .0O

Be 25 -5 26 S .O1

5) 35 c .00

ae a SO s 00

5 36 Unclamped artery. Red blood rushes from the vein.

5 40 Chorda. Rapid secretion.

Gland secretes spontaneously.

Be .45 —5 46 Right Sympathetic. “i ee.

a Ae —-5 48 Left Sympathetic. .O4 CC.

Cut off head as rapidly as possible. Was unable to saw

5 40 30 through the vertebral column. All the muscles and skin

severed.

Right gland.

BR, 50330 — 5 55 Intermittent stimulation of right chorda. .530

5 55 Chorda (coil 5) muscular contractions. No secretion.

ae Right sympathetic. 22 CC.

6 10 Right sympathetic. 04 ce.

Left gland; no secretion either from chorda or sympa-

5 5° thetic.

Experiment LIV.

Right submaxillary. Chorda and sympathetic cut. Dog

under morphine and ether. Tracheotomy. The dog’s respira-

tions become very slow, and finally cease without any struggles,

and without ether. There was considerable fluid in the trachea.

4.46. Stimulate the chorda while dying, chorda effective

until 4.50. The secretion becomes less and less and finally

ceases.

I then stimulated the sympathetic and obtained a very copious

secretion of .2 cc. No more secretion from either nerve.

Experiment LXIV.

Before cutting. 10seconds stim. Coil 24. Secretes.79 cc.

Begin to cut at 4.50. 1 minute to sever head completely.

No secretion during operation.

346 MATHEWS.

nem eS. Oh am AMOUNT.

4 57 - 4 58 Stimulates 3 times, Io seconds at a time. 515 .€e

4 59 “ Io seconds ~150, Cc:

a> 59. 3O a LO) .O2F CE.

No more secretion.

Total time of stimulation 50 seconds. Total amount. .686 cc.

From beginning to cut to end of chorda effect, 3 m. 30s.

Experiment XXI.

Before cutting. _ Coil 20," 10 siistimulation secretes: 5 5vee:

Begin to cut at-4.05. I minute to sever head completely.

No secretion during operation.

h.: im. 's h). im AMOUNT.

4 06 -4 07 Stimulate 3 times, Io seconds at a time. I. 6235

2 Ose

Dog swallows. 3. O00

4 07 -4 08 ae 3 times, IO seconds at a time. I, '.070

2. ~.O40

Swallows. 3. .060

a OS" 205 Coil to 10, muscular contractions, IO sec, .100

4 09 30 seconds stim. off and on (muscle). .030

4 09 15 No more secretion.

4 10 * Coil 4. Heavy contractions (escape of current). 000

Total time of stimulation, 85 seconds. Total amount, 1665: ce:

Time from beginning to cut until end of chorda effect,

4m. 15s:

Experiment XVIII.

Before cutting. Coil 11. Stimulate 10 seconds.

Right gland secretes .64 cc. Left gland, .61 cc.

5.24.30 begin to cut head. Head severed in 30 s.

hy ans Ss h m RIGHT GLAND. AMOUNT.

125

. 100

.080

.070

.050

.020

.O10

Baro? —5 29 is 40 seconds. .O40 cc

Bi 28-07 3G) pa as to ag .OCO

5) 25 — 5 + 26 Stimulate 3 times, 10 seconds at a time.

5 26 Paid

iS)

Sou ) oO N

SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. 347

2 LEFT GLAND. AMOUNT.

5 30 Stimulate left chorda Io seconds. .070

Reet a”. ° -O10

i 330 30 *¢ «© chorda (strong muscular contrac-

tions ). .O70

Ss 31 Left chorda, No more effect except on mus-

cular contraction.

SUMMARY.

Right gland.

Total time of stimulation, 120 seconds. Total secretion, .495 cc. From be-

ginning of cut to end of chorda effect, 4 minutes.

Left gland.

Total time of stimulation, 20 seconds. Total amount, .o80 cc. Time from be-

ginning to cut to end of chorda effect (2) 5 minutes, 30 seconds.

Experiment LXIV.

Before cutting. Coil 18. 30sec. stimulation. Secretes 2.1

cc. Cut head at 4.30, 1% minutes to sever completely.

Sm s h m

4 31 40-4 36 Intermittent stimulation. Secretes .250 cc.

._ No more secretion after 4.35.

4 38 Stimulate sympathetic for two minutes, secretes .065 cc.

Time from beginning of cut to end of chorda effect 5 minutes.

Experiment XXII.

Before cutting. Coil 18.:10 sec. stim: Secretes .2 cc.

Cut at 6.07. 30 seconds to sever head completely.

fe: 5 lh m5

oF 630° — 6-6; Stimulation, Ist 10 seconds 225 CG:

40 seconds stim. .060 cc.

6 o9 20-6 Ig 10 Stimulate coil 18. 30 sec. stim. <E5O cc:

6 Io 30 Chorda no mre effect

GB) x2 ‘Coil to 14. Muscular contractions .050 cc.

Total secretion -375 cc.

Time from cuttiug till chorda ineffective, 3 m. 30 s.

Experiment LXIII.

Small dog, Irish terrier, under ether. Canula in left Whar-

ton’s duct. Tracheotomy. Chorda-lingual nerve cut. Pro-

348 MATHEWS.

tected electrodes on chorda. Vago-sympathetic not cut. Can-

ula connected with air reservoir in the head end of the left

carotid artery.

Before cutting, stimulation of the chorda, with secondary coil

at 200, Gauses a secretion: of 0.45 ce am 1 seconas:

Head rapidly severed at 4.17 P. M. As soon as it was

severed I opened the cock, letting air into the carotid. I then

stimulated the chorda tympani at 4.18. Stimulation of the

chorda causes a secretion of .02 cc. Secretion then stops

and no more can be obtained by any strength of stimulus.

Experiment LXVI.

Conditions of the experiment as in Experiment LXIII._ Be-

fore cutting off the head stimulation of the chorda for 10 seconds

with secondary coil at 180 causes a secretion of .17 cc.

Head rapidly severed from body at 3.03. Chorda stim-

ulated: dt 3:03.45 for 20 seconds. “Gland ‘secretess 20m ce

Air then forced into the carotid artery.

3.04.30—-3.05.30 stimulation of the chorda with secondary

coil at 130 causes .o7 cc. Thereafter no secretion with a stim-

ulation of any strength.

Experiment LXVII.

Conditions of experiment the same as in Experiment LXIII.

Before decapitation stimulation of the chorda for 10 seconds

with secondary coil at 230 yields a secretion of 0.2 cc.

Dog decapitated at 10.49. Aur forced into carotid as soon

as cutting began. Head severed in 30 seconds.

h. m. S.

Io 49 45 Chorda 10 seconds. Coil 230 GO. 7 (cc,

10 50 30 : ee Ze ee 200 0.05

Io 52 ee 2 uree ‘© 150 0.05

Thereafter no more secretion.

Post-mortem examination shows the gland veins to be filled

with blood. The air does not seem to have penetrated the

gland.

SHOCK PIO fi tr orOLOG Y. 349

c. Tue NATURE OF THE ACTION OF ATROPINE AND

PILOCARPINE.

Atropine permits vaso-dilation, on stimulation of the chorda,

but prevents secretion. The drug has been supposed to act,

not on the gland cell, but on the ends of the secretory nerve

fibers. The reasoning for this is as follows: In the dog’s sub-

maxillary, atropine paralyzes the chorda secretion, but not the

sympathetic. If the sympathetic innervate the gland cell and

cause its secretion by action on the latter, the gland cells con-

nected with this nerve have evidently not been paralyzed. As

there is no reason to suppose these cells different from those

connected with the chorda, it is probable that the cells con-

nected with the chorda have not been paralyzed. But if the

gland cells have not been paralyzed, and the dilator action of

the nerve remains unaffected, we must assume that there is some

third element connected with the nerve which has been para-

lyzed. This must be the element causing secretion, 7. ¢., the

secretory nerve fiber. The latter must be paralyzed at the nerve

termination, since, as far as known, atropine does not act on the

nerve fibre. This argument is true only for the dog and not

for the cat® since, in the cat, atropine paralyzes the sympathetic

as well as the chorda. The argument, as will be seen, depends

on the assumption that the sympathetic causes secretion by

action on the gland cells. This, as pointed out, is probably in-

correct. The sympathetic produces its secretion by action on

contractile tissue. There is, hence, no longer any reason to

suppose that the gland cells have not been paralyzed by the

drug. How it acts upon the cell is unknown, but the effect of

that action is to prevent or diminish the passage of fluid through

the cells. The variation in the susceptibility to its action of dif-

ferent glands in the same animal (compare the pancreas, salivary

glands and kidneys of dog), or of the same gland in different

animals (compare the pancreas of the dog and rabbit) points, I

believe, toward an action on the gland cell itself, the variations

in its action being due to variation in the chemical composition

of the cells.

350 MATHEWS.

That atropine does act on the gland cell is, perhaps, indicated

also by the action of its great antagonist pilocarpine. Pilocar-

pine, namely, produces a secretion of sweat two to three weeks

after cutting the sciatic of the cat, when the nerve is totally in-

active.” * *° TLuchsinger,” in commenting on this, says that

this secretion must be due either (1) to action on the secretory

cells themselves, or (2) to the non-degeneration of the nerve

ends. The second possibility is impossible since these nerve

ends are not provided with nuclei. A similar secretion may be

obtained in the dog’s salivary glands, fourteen days after cut-

ting both chorda and sympathetic. The evidence is here not so

conclusive since the submaxillary ganglion does not degenerate.

In the sweat secretion, however, I believe the evidence is fairly

strong that pilocarpine does act directly on the gland cell. It

thus strengthens the evidence that atropine also acts on the cell.

_ There is also reason for believing that atropine acts in some

manner on the capillary wall, thus reducing, or preventing the

transudation of lymph. It might, in this way effect secretion

from glands. This possibility has not received the attention it

deserves. *

The evidence that atropine checks lymph transudation ts as

follows :

If atropine permitted the transudation of lymph normally en-

suing on vaso-dilation, it would be expected that, after its injec-

tion, stimulation of the chorda would render the submaxillary

gland cedematous, since fluid no longer passes into the secre-

tion. Quite the contrary is the fact. I have repeatedly stimu-

lated the gland all day, after the injection of atropine, without

producing a trace of cedema. MHeidenhain® himself says:

“ After atropine on stimulation of the chorda tympani no in-

* Heidenhain’s reasons for rejecting the possibility that atropine checks lymph

transudation and thus secretion will be found in Hermann’s Handbuch. A strik-

ing instance of failure to consider this possibility is the following quotation from

Langley :

‘¢ Atropine prevents the stimulation of the hilum from producing a secretion.

Nicotine does not do this, therefore, atropine acts upon structures more peripheral

than those acted upon by the nicotine. Since nicotine acts on nerve cells, and

atropine does not act on gland cells, atropine must produce its paralyzing result by

action on the secretory nerve endings.”’

SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. 351

crease in lymph flow occurs, even when during stimulation of

the chorda the medulla is stimulated and the blood pressure

greatly increased.” Brunton in commenting on this says:

“Tt appears to me that this circumstance can hardly be explained

otherwise than by supposing that atropin not only paralyses the

secretary fibres of the chorda, but acts upon the blood vessels

in such a manner as to greatly diminish or prevent the exuda-

tion which would usually take place from them into the lymph

spaces.”’

Heidenhain® supposed that lymph normally left the blood

vessels on account of the secretory pull exerted by the gland

cell. Atropine prevented lymph transudation by paralysis of

the secretory chorda nerve ends. He was led to this conclusion

chiefly by the following facts: (1) No more lymph normally

leaves the blood vessels than passes into the secretion, and (2)

if one inject 4.9% solution of sodium carbonate, 0.5% hydro-

chloric acid or quinine sulphate into Wharton’s duct the chorda’s

secretory power is annihilated, but on stimulation the gland

becomes highly cedematous. If, however, atropine be injected

into the blood before the chorda is stimulated and after the in-

jection of quinine into the duct no cedema ensues, however long

the nerve be stimulated. I have fully confirmed these observa-

tions. The most probable interpretation of these facts, it seems

to me, is that quinine prevents the passage of fluid through the

glands by action onthe gland cells, but does not prevent lymph

transudation. That atropine, however, acts directly on the

capillary wall, as well as upon the gland cell, in such fashion as

to prevent lymph transudation and secretion.

A further indication that atropine checks lymph transudation is

the diminution in thoracic lymph flow after its injection. Tschir-

winsky” found that in morphinized animals thoracic lymph

gow fell from 3:75 cc,.to 1.5 cc. and from ro cc. to 4.2 cc. ina

given time. Atropine neutralized, also, the increased flow due

to curate:© In the latter ‘case it fell from:9 and 10 cc. to 2.5

and 5.3 cc. in a given time. As there is reason to believe

(Adami) that curare increases lymph transudation by direct

action on the capillary wall, the inhibiting action of atropine may

aie MATHEWS.

be referred to an opposite action on the same structure. Not

knowing of Tschirwinsky’s work, I had already performed simi-

lar experiments on the lymph flow, comparing it with pancreatic

flow on vagus stimulation and after pilocarpine. I found (Ex-

periment V that atropine temporarily neutralizes the large

increase in lyrnph flow which occurs concomitant with increased

panceas secretion during rythmic stimulation of the vago-sym-

pathetic after division of the cervical cord, and also neutralizes

the increased lymph flow due to pilocarpine.

Experiment Vb.

Medium-sized dog. Ether. Temporary pancreatic fistula.

Tracheotomy. Cervical cord cut. Arrtificial respiration. Tho-

racic duct prepared. LLymphatics of head and neck ligatured.

Readings every minute in cubic centimeters :

Thoracic Duct. Pancreas. | Thoracic. Pancreas. | Thoracic. Pancreas.

Vagi uncut. .050 .009 aLO7 .009

.220 2° | 110 O13 .180 004

.220 1@2).. | BT .O12 .180 .008

. 200 202) | ¥, hour interval. | .150 =

.200 OLS, | .120 .O13 . 190 .006

180 ors |) 416 .o12 |Rt. Vagus. Ryth. Coil 9.

.180 O10.) | 090 009 | .200 Rorere)

.190 605 | .130 {08 Te} .180 .000

.160 .013 .120 010 | — .100 002

.180 CLF. Big ko, .O10 000 .068

55 O17 | .100 .008 — .025

155 .O18 . 100 .009 | — .O15

.170 .O15 £102 .004 | - .O15

Cut vagi in neck. . 100 _- Off.

.280 .O15 Clot. .160 .020

.220 .O10 I shock per second. .140 .O10

.160 .005 Rt. Vagus. Ryth. Coil 10. .150 .005

.100 003 | .150 .009 — .O10

.120 .007 | .220 .006 |Rt. Vagus. Ryth. Coil 9.

. 100 .009 .250 .O10 . 360 .006

. 100 SOLO." | 179 .005 . 200 .009

.060 .O15 .230 .O10 .240 .005

.050 .020 Current off. Coil; to. 4;

.09O .O10 .200 .005 . 200 .005

Io .O15 .190 .0O7 — .008

.120 .003 .220 .007 Off.

.120 .007 220 .005 Clot. 0.15

.065 .O10 “380 .002 a .OI1

W125 .O10 210 .oor |Left Vagus. Ryth. Coil 9.

.100 .OII .180 — .550 .030

SECRETION Fit VSIOLOG ¥.

353

Thoracic, Pancreas. | Thoracic. Pancreas. | Thoracic. Pancreas.

.290 005 120 .005 270 O15

= .005 — .O10 — 005

— .005 275 .025 230 005

— Ro} Ke) 225 .045 240 000

Coil to 6 O15 | 250 055 — suddenly .120

— .060 220 110 250 .080

= 090 — 120 | Inject .5 cc. atropin into

.240 100 320 .140 supra-scap. vein

— - 690 300 .130 =| Stimulation continued.

Off. Then on by accident. Off. .250 .050

.230 .060 —- 185 . 200 .070

Off. | 170 .065 — .030

.140 .035 .200 .030 .180 .020

iO -030 I50 —_ .140 O15

. 160 .030 200 .030 .145 -O15

.120 O15 a .020 155 .O15

.170 .O15 a O15 Bie .O10

E30 — 140 .O15 .120 O15

~L7O .O1O .140 .O10 ae Off. 007

Left Vagus. Ryth. Coil 6. -145 .O16 as Bee

.140 .007 sh35 .009 130 lone

530 .002 . 130 005 :

ne: Mejere) . 160 .O17 Ashe mies Ss a

.140 .ogo jLeft Vagus. Rythmical.| “040 ee

.200 .120 . 160 .002 "090 to

S. 130 .250 .008 ere ec

290 140. | _ -270 000 100 aR

235 110 240 ool "190 See

280 130 a O15 aie ect

235 130 300 O75 ee wat

250 080 300 035 an roe

mi ie ee ea 0b

340 . — B | or ge

aes ee 350 100 ates Vagus. oe

.190 .052 300 110 eee REN

.160 .043 — .140 : 4 :

.190 .020 |Left Vagus. Ryth. Coil6 ea sae

.190 .020 .220 110 ae ie

. 160 .000

.170 .025 .280 .070 :

— .O1l Off. ioe oy

= O14 .200 070 oho ve

.155 -O15 . 200 050 “170 Pe

— .OIO 230 020

.150 .OIO . 180 025 es Off ae

.150 ~- . 180 030 .250 000

Left Vagus. Ryth. Coil 6. .155 005 .170 .000

.210 .OI0 145 ;005, | .190 .000

Left Vagus. Ryth Coil 6.

.190

-000

This experiment is of interest, not only as a clear confirmation of Pawlow and

Mett, but because of the invariable increase in thoracic lymph flow occurring on

stimulation of the vagus.

it, but never with such success.

point.

I have repeatedly sought to obtain other experiments like

The operation is long and apt to miscarry at some

304 MATHEWS.

Experiment XI.

Dog, etherized. Canula in thoracic duct. Readings in cc.

every minute.

Thoracic duct.

150, 220, .200, 2160; 4300). 2305-250.

I cc. 1% pilocarpine into left femoral vein. Dog perfectly quiet.

-250, .. 300, .500, \/600; 400, .460, 7400:

I cc. pilocarpine.

.490, .410.

I cc. 1% atropine 1%.

240, .090, .060, .070, .170, .110, .120, .090, .ogo.

Moved head.

5220;

I cc. atropin.

.130, . 100; '-070;..000, .040), 2120:

2 cc. pilocarpine.

.100, :080, .120, .130.

I hour interval.

. 160.

It is not without interest in this connection that pilocarpine,

contrary to atropine, increases lymph flow. This was first ob-

served by Tschirwinsky.” My own experiments have yielded

a positive result generally, but not invariably. In all cases the

dogs had divided cervical cords, and generally divided vagi.

They were all under artifical respiration. The lymph was

measured in cc. for equal intervals of time.

After the injection

Experiment. Belore pilocasp ia of 1-2 cgs. of pilo- Remarks.

injection. -

carpine.

at r53 3.00 7minutes. Dog motionless.

Some movements of

2 2. 6.

9 44 a0 abdomen.

14 0.50 1.72 Motionless. 9 minutes.

4 | 1.55 10.40 Movements.

és | 1.41 1.69 _No movements. Pancreas

did not secrete either.

In experiments 11 and 14 there were no visible movements.

The flow of the seven minutes after injection in No. 11 was

SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. 350

double that of seven minutes before, and in experiment 14 was

three times as great. In experiment 62, however, there was

scarcely any difference. 3

The evidence presented in the foregoing pages, if not conclu-

sive, certainly indicates that atropine restricts and pilocarpine

increases lymph transudation. They may in this manner affect

secretions. In any case, if the sympathetic causes its secretion

by action on contractile tissue in the gland, there is no longer

any reason against assuming that atropin acts directly on the

gland cell, in such manner as to check the passage of fluid

through it, and thus to prevent secretion.

d. THE ACTION OF QUININE AND NICOTINE.

We have considered the three main objections which have

been raised against the chorda salivary secretion being an osmosis.

There are, also, certain other phenomena which have been

thought indicative of the independence of the secretory and di-

lator action of this nerve, and, hence, are worthy of a short

criticism.

The first is the action of quinine, which when injected into

the gland duct causes a temporary vaso-dilation, but no secre-

tion. If, however, the chorda be stimulated, still greater dila-

tion ensues and secretion takes place. This secretion is less than

normal. MHeidenhain*' interprets this to mean .that vaso-dila-

tion cannot of itself produce a secretion, but that the secretory

fibres must be aroused. (See literature reference No. 21, p. 85.

exiso reference: No. 23, p; 45.)

The facts may, however, be otherwise understood. Quinine

prevents the passage of liquid through the gland cell. This is

shown by the fact that ultimately it prevents chorda secretion,

even though the gland become cedematous. If the permea-

bility of the gland membrane be thus diminished, the slight

vaso-dilation caused by the drug may be insufficient to cause a

secretion, whereag a larger vaso-dilation on stimulating the

chorda might overcome this resistance. | Another possibility is

that the quinine reaches a portion only of the alveoli, poisons

these, and throws their capillaries and arterioles into dilation.

‘

356 MATHEWS.

On stimulating the chorda the secretion may be derived from

unpotisoned alveoli of which the blood vessels have not hitherto

been in dilation.

The value of Langley’s and Heidenhain’s observation, that

the secretory fibres of the chorda tympani recover, after nico-

tine poisoning, before the dilator fibres, is seriously impaired by

a defective method of determining whether vaso-dilation did, or

did not, occur. If we admit that the rate of flow of blood from

the gland’s vein is a criterion by which we can determine

whether vaso-dilation has or has not occurred their conclusion

is justified. But reflection shows that if vaso-dilation be slight

the amount of water passing out into the secretion might so re-

duce the bulk of blood flowing through the gland as to mask

entirely all effects of the increased flow due to vaso-dilation.

In fact, the flow of blood from the vein would be a safe cri-

terion of dilation, only if there were no escape of liquid through

the capillary wall, a condition which manifestly does not here

exist. Langley’s and Heidenhain’s conclusion that the secre-

tory function recovers before the dilator is, hence, unjustified.

The same criticism applies, also, to Heidenhain’s observation

that after the chorda tympani has been cut and allowed to de-

generate for three or four days stimulation still causes an in-

crease in the paralytic secretion, but no increase in blood-flow

from the vein.

é. EVIDENCE OF THE OSMOTIC CHARACTER OF THE SALIVARY

SECRETIONS WHICH ARE ACCOMPANIED BY VASO-DILATION.

I wish now to summarize briefly those features of secretions,

accompanied by vaso-dilation, which indicate that they are ofan

osmotic character.

(1) In structure the salivary glands have all the require-

ments of an elaborate osmotic mechanism They are, essentially,

extraordinarily thin-walled bags, possessing an enormous sur-

face, containing a mass of hydroscopic indiffusible substances.

The outer surface of this bag is in intimate association with a

mesh work of capillaries so coordinated by the nervous system

as to permit an almost instantaneous flooding of the gland mem-

SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. OL

brane. Plainly here are all the requisites of a delicate osmotic

mechanism adapted to the most rapid osmosis.

(2) Chorda secretion is closely dependent on blood supply.

(Compare p. 342.) Heidenhain has shown that partial occlusion

of the artery diminishes the rate of secretion (p. 88, Breslau

Studien IV.)

(3) If the osmotic equivalent of the blood be increased by the

injection of strong salt solutions the secretion is diminished or

altogether inhibited.” *

(4) If the osmotic equivalent of the blood be decreased by the

injection of water the rate of secretion is increased.”

(5) The rate of secretion is increased, other things equal, by

an increase in the rate of blood flow through the gland.* ”

(6) The rate of secretion diminishes when the hylogens are

washed out of the gland. (Paralytic secretions, secretion after

long stimulation. )”

(7) Substances may be absorbed with extraordinary rapidity

when injected into the duct (nicotine, atropine).

(8) If the percentage of salts in the blood be increased the per-

centage of salts in the saliva increases also. If the percentage of

salts in the blood be decreased, the percentage of salts in the

saliva decreases also.** * ™

(9) If the artery of the gland be clamped for 20-30 minutes,

and the blood thus completely cut off from the gland, on read-

mitting the blood a vaso-dilation ensues, so that the blood rushes

red from the gland veins, and this vaso-dilation is accompanied

by a spontaneous secretion. Stimulation of the chorda in no

way alters this secretion during the first minute, nor until the

dilation has somewhat diminished. This spontaneous secretion

is a close duplicate of that observed by Levy in the secretion of

sweat. [Experiment V (a).]

Although this spontaneous secretion might, perhaps, be ex-

plained by supposing that a direct stimulation of nerve-end or,

cell by the oxygen has taken place, it seems more probable to

me to class it with the spontaneous secretion of sweat in the

horse, following section of the cervical sympathetic, and to refer

it to the direct effect of vaso-dilation.

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. Sci., XI, October 13, 1898—24.

358 MATHEWS.

J. COoNncLusion. THE PHYSIOLOGY OF SALIVARY SECRETION.

If the sympathetic salivary secretion shall be found to be due

to the action of contractile tissue, and if the criticisms of the ob-

jections to considering the salivary secretion, coincident with

vascular dilation, an osmosis, be sustained by subsequent work,

the following conclusions concerning the physiology of this

secretion may be drawn.

The salivary glands may be caused to secrete, either by the

action of contractile tissue under control of the sympathetic

nerve or by osmosis under control of the vaso-dilator nerve.

Probably in normal secretion both of these nerves come into

play, but of this evidence is as yet lacking.

Drugs, or other reagents, may arouse secretion by action on

either or both of these mechanisms. I would suggest that

secretion following strychnine injection, camphor, pikrotoxin,

physostigmin (after division of the chorda) are due to the con-

tractions of the contractile tissue. All of these drugs stimulate

the nerve centers and cause a pronounced vaso-constriction.

On the other hand, pilocarpine, nicotine, muscarine, curare and

chloral hydrate, or other drugs with a similar action on the

vascular system, probably cause secretion partly by vaso-dila-

tion and partly by increasing the permeability of the gland mem-

branes. Such drugs work through an osmotic mechanism. A

third class of drugs, such as quinine, atropine, hydrochloric acid

or sodium carbonate may produce vaso-dilation, but probably act,

also, on the gland cells in such manner as to diminish their per-

meability- Most of the work which has hitherto been done

upon the action of drugs on salivary secretion needs to be re-

peated with the possibility in mind that the chorda and sym-

pathetic induce secretion in these different ways.

The osmotic mechanism of secretion in the salivary glands is

probably dependent on the condition of the gland and capillary

membranes, upon the composition of the blood, upon the rate

of flow of the blood and the character and amount of hylogens

present within the gland. The evidence that the course of os-

mosis is controlled by the action of nerves directly on the gland

SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. 359

cells is open to serious criticism. That chorda salivary secre-

tion can ensue without vaso-dilation may be seriously doubted,

not only for the reasons already stated, but because in the

pancreas there is good reason to believe that secretion can not

take place without vaso-dilation. (See p. 361.)

V. SOME OTHER SECRETIONS.

The submaxillary gland, considered in the foregoing pages,

may be taken as a type of all the salivary glands, as each pos-

sesses a dilator secretory nerve, and a constrictor, sympathetic

secretory nerve. I wish now to consider some other secretion in

the light of the conclusions derived from the physiology of the

submaxillary.

a. THE PHYSIOLOGY OF SWEAT SECRETION.

There is reason to believe that the mammalian sweat glands

also have a double mechanism of secretion, a muscular and an

osmotic. These glands are surrounded by a sheath of muscle

fibres lying, like those of the skin glands of amphibia, be-

tween the cells and the basement membrane. From the obser-

vations of Ranvier, Joseph and others, who have shown that

upon stimulation of the sciatic this muscle contracts, there can

be little doubt that a secretion may thus be formed. Probably

sweat secretions ensuing coincident with vaso-constriction, upon

the injection of strychnine, upon stimulation of the sciatic in the

amputated limb or after compression of the blood vessels is due

to this mechanism.

On the other hand, certain secretions of sweat are too copi-

ous to be due to muscular constriction of the gland. That

those secretions probably fall under the second, or osmotic,

mechanism is shown by the following facts :

(1) The coincidence of vaso-dilation and sweat secretion.

Most sweat secretions are normally accompanied by vaso-dila-

tion. If the cervical sympathetic of the horse be severed,

strong’ hyperemia and sweating occurs on the side of the neck

the nerve governs. This sweating ensuing after nerve division

360 MATHEWS.

can hardly be explained, I think, on the basis of secretory cell

activity.

(2) Pilocarpine, which does not cause contraction of the mus-

cular sheath, causes a profuse secretion.

(3) The vaso-motor and secretory fibres in the cat follow the

same paths.

(4) Pilocarpine causes sweat secretions fourteen days after

nerve degeneration.

(5) If the blood supply be cut off, on readmitting the blood

after 30 minutes, a spontaneous secretion occurrs.** The sim-

ilar secretion in the submaxillary is invariably accompanied by

vaso-dilation.

(6) Increasing the capillary blood pressure or drinking large

quantities of water increases secretion.

The facts, as far as they go, are the same as those observed

in the cerebral salivary secretions and: pancreatic secretion

They justify us, I believe, in classing all three secretions in the

same category. That these sweat secretions are of an osmotic

character would thus be indicated. That other sweat secretions

are due to muscle there can be little doubt.

6. THE SECRETION OF THE PANCREAS.

Secretion of the pancreas is normally accompanied by vaso-

dilation. In its relation to atropine, its increased content of or-

ganic bodies coincident with an increased rate of flow, and in

taking place after compression of the aorta, pancreatic secretion

resembles the submaxillary secretion on stimulation of the

chorda tympani. There is reason to believe, however, that the

pancreas cannot secrete unless the blood vessels dilate. Thus

the means employed by Pawlow,” Mett™ and Kudrewetsky™ to

give the vagi a secretory function are just the means used by

Bowditch, Luchsinger and others” to give the sciatic and other

mixed dilator and constrictor nerves a dilator action. These

authors either cut the vagi and splanchnics, and allowed them to

degenerate three or four days, or else they stimulated them

with rythmic induction shocks, at the rate of one per second

after division of the cervical cord. There are two possible ex-

SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. 361

planations of the fact that stimulation of the normal nerve with

the cord undivided causes no secretion. Either the nerve carries

inhibitory secretory as well as secretory fibres, or stimulation

of the nerve is unable to cause a secretion without vaso-dilation.

The first alternative Heidenhain has particularly combatted in

the case of the submaxillary, and it appears to me lacking all

proper experimental basis. The second alternative is probably

the true explanation, for the reason that stimulation of the zor-

mal nerve below the cardiac branches causes no alteration in

blood pressure, and for the reason that the treatment to which

the nerve is subjected is calculated to give it a dilator action.

If this be true the pancreas would appear fundamentally differ-

ent from the salivary glands, unless, as I have endeavored to

show, the latter are, also, in reality, unable to secrete on stim-

ulation of the chorda or other cerebral nerve, unless vaso-dila-

tion ensues.

Further evidence of the dependence of pancreatic secretion

on vaso-dilation is furnished by the action of pilocarpine, chloral

hydrate” and curare, drugs which cause vaso-dilation and secre-

tion, and by strychnine,” or digitalis, drugs which cause vaso-

constriction and inhibit secretion. Heidenhain,” also, has

observed a close correspondence between vaso-dilation and

secretion, and between vaso-constriction and the cessation of

secretion. This parallelism between vaso-dilation and secretion

can not be accidental. It indicates, I believe, that the dilation

is the cause of the secretion, other things being normal.

Vi Ge wea CONCLUSION.

We have now considered the evidences of the existence of

secretory nerves, and the reasons for believing that secretion is

a function of the gland cells. While readily admitting the pos-

sibilities that secretion may in certain instances be a function of

the gland cell, controlled by the action on it of secretory nerve

fibres, we have seen reason to believe that certainly many so-

called secretions are due not to the gland cell, but to the action

of contractile tissue either within or about the gland. Among

362 MATHEWS.

such secretions are the salivary secretions following stimulation

of the sympathetic, certain secretions of sweat, the secretion of

the cephalopod salivary glands and of the skin glands of am-

phibia.

Whether those secretions which are normally accompanied by

vaso-dilation, such, for instance, as the salivary secretions follow-

ing stimulation of the cerebral nerves and the secretions of the

alimentary tract and its appendages, are governed by nerves act-

ing directly on the gland cells, or indirectly through the vascu-

lar system, cannot with certainty be said. But I believe it has

been shown in the present paper that the evidence which has

hitherto been offered that such secretions are controlled by

nerve action on the gland cell is open to serious criticism. The

remarkable parallelism between the hypothetical secretory and

vaso-dilator fibres, the close dependence of such secretions on

the vascular system, the general features of such secretions and

the structure of glands, all indicate, I believe, that osmosis is

the essential cause of these secretions, and that they are con-

trolled by the action of nerves on the vascular system. No

one would deny that the course of these secretions is modified

by the condition of the gland or capillary wall, and that that

condition is easily affected by drugs, but that nerve action di-

rectly affects that condition, I do not believe the evidence

entitles us to say.

Probably the study of these secretions from the standpoint of

osmosis will bring to light facts difficult to reconcile with our

present knowledge of osmosis. But while our knowledge of the

latter process through membranes undergoing chemical change,

such as gland membranes, remains in its present fragmentary

state, I do not believe that we are justified in assuming a special

sort of secretory activity on the part of the gland, or capillary

cell, unless the facts are certainly irreconcilable with any other

hypothesis. ,

In short, while fully admitting the possibility that nerves may

act on gland cells, in some way affecting osmosis through them,

it appears to me that, in the present state of our knowledge of

secretion, the assumption of a particular secretory function of

SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. 363

cells, and of special secretory nerves, is unwarranted, unneces-

sary, and, in certain particular cases, opposed to the phenomena

of the secretion itself.

SUMMARY OF RESULTS.

(1) The sympathetic nerve induces salivary secretion by

acting on contractile tissue in the glands and thus causing a

compression of ducts and alveoli.

(2) The chorda tympani, or other dilator salivary, secretory

nerve probably causes secretion by its dilator action on the blood

vessels, thus increasing osmosis.

(3) The evidence that the chorda tympani acts on the gland

cells is open to serious objections, as follows :

(a) Atropine probably acts directly on the gland cells and

capillary endothelium, diminishing their permeability.

(4) The post-mortem chorda salivary secretion is possibly

due toa back flow of blood from the veins owing to a dilation

of the capillaries.

coincident with an increased rate of secretion is of little value

as evidence of secretory nerves, because (1) saliva is generally

not atrue solution, and (2) a weak stimulus probably arouses

but a portion of the gland.

(2) The evidence derived from the action of nicotine and

the degenerated chorda tympani that secretion may ensue on

stimulation of the chorda without vaso-dilation is of doubtful

value, because of an erroneous method of determining that

vaso-dilation had not occurred.

(4) The sweat glands and the amphibian skin glands, like the

salivary glands, receive a double nerve supply and prebably pos-

sess a double mechanism of secretion, z. ¢., a muscular and an

osmotic.

(5) Whether secretory nerves exist or whether secretion is

ever a function of the gland cell must be considered at present

an open question.

(6) The thoracic lymph flow in dogs reacts to nerve stimula-

364 MATHEWS.

tion and drugs very similar to pancreatic secretion. It is in-

creased by rhythmical stimulation of the vagi after division of

the cervical cord and by pilocarpine and chloral hydrate, and

decreased by atropine.

CoLtuMBIA UNIVERSITY, April, £898.

Vil... EITERABUERE,

1. Adami, On the Nature of Glomerular Activity in the Kidney:

Journal of Physiology, VI. 1885.

2. Adamkiewicz. Ueber Schweisssecretion: Archiv. f. Anat. u.

Physiol. (Physiol. Abth.). 1887 and 1880.

3. Afanassiew and Pawlow. bBeitriage zur Physiologie des Pan-

creas: Archiv f. d. gesam. Physiologie, XV\. 1878.

4. Barfurth. Ueber den Bau und die Thatigkeit der Gasteropoden

Leber: Archiv f. Mik. Anatomie, XXII. - 1883.

5. Bayliss and Hill. The Formation of Heat in the Salivary

Glands: Journal of Physiology, XVI. 1894. .

6. Berkely, John. ‘The Intrinsic Nerves of the Submaxillary Gland

of Mus Musculus: Zhe Johns Hopkins Hospital Reports, Vol. IV.

Cajal. Barcelona, 1893.

Huber. Observations on the Innervation of the Sublingual and

Submaxillary Glands: /ournal of E-xp. Medicine. Vol. I. 1896.

Marinescu. Ueber die Innervation der Driise1: der Zungen-

basis: Archiv f. Anat. u. Phys. (Phys. Abth.). 1891.

Dogiel. Die Nervendigungen in der Thranendriise der Sauge-

thiere: Arch. f. Mik. Anatomie, XLII. 1893.

Retzius. iologische Untersuchungen, U1, 1892; IV. 1893.

7. Claude Bernard. Lecons sur les propriétés physiol. et les al-

térations pathologiques des liquides de l’organisme, II. 1859.

8. Blochmann. Ueber die Driisen des Mantelrandes bei Aplysia

ind verwandten Formen: Zeztschft. f. Wissensch. Zodlogte,

ROCK Aa TBS 3.

Q. Brown-Sequard. Journal de Physiol., UW. 1859.

Ir. Drasch. Beobachtungen an lebenden Driisen mit und ohne

Reizung der Nerven derselben: <Arvchv. f. Anat, u. Phys., 1889.

(Phys. Abth.).

12, Dupuy. /ournal de Med., XXXVII. 1816. See also Golz.

ATH AT. Wea GPRS EE NS AUT:

SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. 365

13. Eckhard. Der Sympathicus in seiner Stellung zum Secretion

in der Parotis des Schafes: ckhara’s Beitrdége,1V. Also Zeit.

f. rat. Medicin., X XIX.

14. Ellenberger und Hoffmeister. Beitrag zur Lehre von der

Speichelsecretion: Archv. f. Anat. u. Phys, 1887. (Supp.)

15. Ellis. Plethysmographic and vaso-motor experiments upon

Frogs: /ournal of Physiology, Vi. 1885.

16. Engelmann. Ueber das Vorkommen und die Innervation von

contractilen Driisenzellen in der Froschhaut: Arch. f. d. ges. Phys.

BY: 91877.

17. von Frey, Max. Ueber die Wirkungsweise der erschlaffenden

Gefassnerven: Ludwig’s Ardbeten aus der. Physiol. Anstalt zu

Weipsic, XV. 1876.

18. Giannuzzi. Von der Folge des beschleunigten Blutstromes

fiir die Absonderung des Speichels: er. d. Konig. Séchs, Geselt-

schaft d. Wrssench, 1865, p. 68.

1g. Gottleib. Beitrage zur Physiologie und Pharmakologie der

Pankreas Absonderung: Archiv f. exper. Path. u. Pharmakol.

XXXII. 1893-94.

20. Grunhagen. Iris u. Speicheldriise: Zeits. f. rat. Medicin,

XXXII. 1868.

21. Heidenhain. Beitrage zu der Lehre von der Speichel Abson-

derung: Studien des phystol. Instituts su Breslau, 1V. 1868.

22. Heidenhain. Ueber Secretorische u. Trophische Driisen-

nerven: Archv. f. d. gesam. Physiology, XVII. 1878.

23. Heidenhain. Hermann’s Handbuch der Physiologie, Bd. V,

Leipzig, 1880.

24. Heidenhain. Ueber die Wirkung einiger Gifte auf die Nerven

des Glandula Submaxillaris: Archv. f. d. gesam. Physiologie, V.

DO72-

25. Heidenhain. Einige Versuche an den Speicheldriisen: Avchv.

f. a. gesam. Phystologie, 1X. 1874.

26. Heidenhain. Versuche und Fragen zur Lehre von der Lymph-

bildung: Archy. f. d. gesam. Physiol., XLIV. 1891.

28. Hering. Ueber die Ursache des hohen Absonderungsdriick in

der gld. Submaxillaris: Ber. d. Wiener Akad. Bd. LXVI,

mbt, Til... 2872:

29. Joseph, M. Ueber Schweiss und Talgdriisensecretion: Archv.

fo Ana?.a.. PAYS: Sgr:

30. Kendall and Luchsinger. Zur Innervation der Gefasse:

Arnona. ves. Physiol, Xt. 7 1876.

366 MATHEWS.

31. Krause. Die Speicheldriisen der Cephalopoden :. Centralb/. f.

Physiologie, IX. 1895.

32. Kudrewetsky. Chemismus der Pankreasabsonderung unter

dem Einflusse der Nervenreizung : Archv. f. Anat. u. Phys. 1894.

(Phys. Abth.)

33. Kuhne u. Lea. Beobachtungen iiber das Secretion des Pan-

creas: Studien aus dem Physiol. Instituts su Heidelberg, 1. 1882.

34. Lang. ‘Text-Book of Comparative Anatomy, II, English

Translation. Macmillan, 1896, p. 399.

35. Langley, J. N. Zur Physiologie der Speichelabsonderung I.

Vom Eniflusse der chorda tympani und des n. Sympathicus auf die

Absonderung der Unterkieferdriise der Katze: Untersuch. aus dem

Physiol. Institut. zu Heidelberg, 1. 1878.

36. Langley, J. N. The Antagonism of Poisons: /ournal of

Physiology, Wl. 1881.

37. Langley. On the Physiology of Salivary Secretion. IV. The

effect of atropin upon the supposed varieties of Secretory Nerve

Fibres: Journal of Physiology, IX. 1888.

38. Langley and Fletcher. On the Secretion of Saliva. In

particular the Secretion of Salts in it: PAzlosoph. Transact. of the

Royal Soc., CLXXX, B. 1880.

39. Langley. On the Physiology of Salivary Secretion. V. The

effect of stimulating cerebral secretory nerves upon the amount of

saliva obtained by stimulating the sympathetic nerve: /ouwrnal

of Physiology, X. 1889.

40. Langley. Onthe Changes in Serous Glands during Secretion:

Journal of Physiology, Il. 1879-80.

41. Langley. On the Physiology of Salivary Secretion, VI:

Journal of Physiology, X1. 1890.

42. Langley. On the Physiology of Salivary Secretion, III.

Paralytic Secretion: /ournal of Physiology, VI. 1885.

44. Levy, Max. Ueber Blutfiille der Haut u. Schwitzen: Dewtsche

Med. Wochenschr., p. 615, 1892.

45. Leydig. Die Circumanaldriisen des Menschen: S?¢zungsber.

a. Wiener Akad, Wl, p. 329, 1871.

46. Luchsinger. Die Wirkung von Pilocarpin u. Atropin auf

die Schweissdriisen der Katze: Archv. f. d. ges. Physiol., XV.

ES?7.

47. Luchsinger. Hermanns Handbuch der Physiologie, Ba. V, p.

426. 1880.

SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. 367

48. Ludwig. Neue Versuche iiber die Beihilfe der Nerven zu der

Speichelsecretion: Ziirischer Naturf. Gesellschft. Mittheil. 50.

mise Le. J. ar. Medicin, IN, ¥. 1 1851.

49. Ludwig, C. und Spiess. Vergleichung der Warme des Un-

erkieferdriisen Speichels und das gleichzeitigen Carotidenblutes :

mausch. 7. rat. Medicin, N. F. XV.) 1857.

51. Macleod. Notice sur l’appareil venimeux des Aranéides :

Archive ad. Biologie, 1. 1880.

52. Marme. Jachber. ad. kin. Gesellsch ad. Wiss. 2u Gottingen,

Paroz- 1678.

53- Mett. Beitrage zur Physiologie der Absonderung, Zweiter

Mittheil. Zur Innervation der Bauchspeicheldriise: <Arvchv. f.

Anat. u. Phys. (Phys. Abth.). 1894.

54. Novi. Ueber die Scheidekraft der Unterkieferdriise: Arch. f.

BwOl. ’teP hys, Physiol. Abih.). 2388.

55. Nussbaum. Ueber den Bau und die Thatigkeit der Driisen :

Archiv f. mk. Anat., 1882.

56. Ostroumoff. Versuche iiber die Henmungsnerven der Hautge-

fasse: Archiv f. d. Physiologie, X11. 1876.

57- Pawlow. Beitrage zur Physiologie der Absonderungen. Inner-

vation der Bauchspeicheldriise: Arch. f. Anat. u. Phys. (Phys.

Abth.). 1893.

58. Pawlow and S.—Simanowskaja. Die Innervation der

Magendriisen beim Hunde: Hermann und Schwalbe Jahresbericht,

1889.

59. Puelmau. Luchsinger. Zum Verlauf der Gefassnerven im

Ischiadicus der Katze: Arch. f. d. ges. Physiol., XVIII. 1878.

60. Pfluger. Die Speicheldriise, Stricker’s Handbuch der Zehre

v. a. Gewebe, Leipzig, 1871.

61. Rahn, C. Untersuchungen iiber Wurzeln und Bahnen der Ab-

sonderungsnerven des Glandula parotis beim Kaninchen: J7/7?-

theil. der Ziiricher Naturfor. Gesellschft, 63. .

62. Ranvier. Le Mechanisme de la Secretion: /ournal de Mt-

crographie, p. 150, 1880.

63. Rawitz. Ueber den feineren Bau der hinteren Speicheldriisen

der Cephalopoden: Arch. f. Mik. Anatomie, XXXIX. 1892.

64. Ribbert. Die normale u. pathol. Physiologie u. Anatomie der

Niere: Lzblotheca Med. Abth. C. Cassel, 1896.

65. Schiff. Lecons sur la Physiologie de la Digestion, II, p. 304.

1867.

368 MATHEWS.

66. Schluter. Disquisitiones microscopicae et physiolog. de Glan-

dulis Salivalibus: J/zaug-Diss. Breslau, 1865. (Quoted from

Pfliiger ).

67. von Sobieranski. Ueber die Nierenfunction und die Wirk-

imesweise der Diuretica: Archi. fo exp. Pama. Phar, Ba:

DOOX Vic 1805:

68. Starling, E. H. On the Mode of Action of Lymphagogues:

Journal of Physiology, XVII. 1894-5.

68a. Tiegerstedt. Jlehrbuch der Physiolosie des Menschen ai,

Keipzilgs soe

69. Tschirwinsky. Beobachtungen iiber die Wirkung einige

phamakolog., Mittel auf die Lymph Ausscheidung: Arch. f. Exp.

Path, W Pharm, Bd. SOO. > 1893-45

7o. Unna, P. G. Zur Theorie der Driisensecretion, insbersondere

des Speichels: Cent. f. d. Med. Wissensch, 1881, p. 258:

71. Vierheller. Beitrage zur Anatomie u. Physiologie der Parotis

dés Schates: 2277. f.-7a7, Med. SOOM ar 868:

72. Vulpian. Comptes rendus, UXXXVII. 1878.

73. Van Gehuchten. Recherches histologiques sur l’appareil di-

gestif de la larve de la Ptychoptera contaminata: La Cellule, VI.

1890.

74. Weber. Ueber den Bau und die Thatigkeit der sog. leber der

Crustaceen: <Archv. f. mik. Anatomie, XVII. 1880.

75. Werther. [l[inige Beobachtungen iiber die Absonderung der

Salze im Speichel: Avchv. z. d. gesam. Physiol. XXXVI. 1886:

76. Wiedersheim. Text-book of Comparative Anatomy.

77. von Wittich. Sympathicus und Parotis: Virchow’s Archv.

PEGS Anal WP hist, XXX

78. von Wittich. Virchow's Arch. f, Path: Anata. Tie,

XXXVIT.

fAnnats N. Y. Acap. Sci., XI, No. 15, pp. 369 to 377, October 13, 1898. ]

Sen. PASSAMAQUODDY DOCUMENTS.

J. DyNELEY PRINCE.

(Read April 25, 1898. )

THe Passamaquoddy Indians of Maine are members of the

Wabanaki or northeastern group of the great Algonkin family

which in earlier times occupied territory extending from James’

Bay on the north to the Carolinas on the south. The Wa-

banaki tribes which still exist are (1) the St. Francis Indians, of

Canada, who are at present a small sept of mixed race resident

on the St. Francis river, near Quebec. These people, who call

themselves by the generic name Aduaki or Wabanaki,' are com-

posed of Wabanakis of various tribes from New Hampshire

and Massachusetts, of Sagadahoks, and of Norridgewoks,’* from

Maine. (2) The Penobscot Indians of Maine are very closely

allied both in race and language to the St. Francis tribe. (3)

The Passamaquoddies* of Maine are practically identical with

(4) the Maliseets (Milicetes) of New Brunswick. (5) Finally,

the Micmacs of Nova Scotia and New Brunswick constitute the

easternmost branch of the Wadbanaki. |

The Passamaquoddies, like many other Indian tribes, have

an extensive oral literature, consisting of historical, mytholog-

ical and legal traditions, as well as many songs and recitations.

A great part of this material is preserved by means of a mne-

monic system of wampum shells arranged on strings in such a

manner as to suggest to the mind of the reciter certain sen-

tences of a tale already committed to memory.‘

In 1887, during a visit to Bar Harbor, Me., I obtained from

Mr. Louis Mitchell, a Passamaquoddy Indian, who was at that

time Indian member of the Maine Legislature, some selections

from this oral material which he had committed to writing.

Undoubtedly, the most important of these, both from an his-

( 369 )

Bi PRINCE.

torical and ethnological point of view, are the so-called Wam-

pum Records, which embody a detailed description of various

ancient rites and ceremonies, peculiar not only to the Passama-

quoddies, but to all the northern Algonkin clans (Wadbanakt),

who, after a long period of internal strife, seem to have formed

a close offensive and defensive alliance. These records I have

published in the Proceedings of the American Philosophical So-

ciety, XXXVI, pp. 479-495. Besides the Wampum Records,

I have a number of other documents, the most important of

which is an outline of the Wadbanaki history previous to the

establishment of the inter-tribal treaty of peace between the

Wabanaki clans and the foundation of the common suzodus

vivenadi set forth in the Wampum Laws

I have ventured in the following pages to reproduce this his-

torical sketch, which has, at least, the merit of being purely

native, and, as a specimen of the Passamaquoddy poetic genius,

I have added, in both Indian and English, part of a character-

istic love-song.

The original text of the Indian history was not included in

the manuscript which I received. It is necessary to remark that,

as Mr. Mitchell’s translations were written in what may be

termed Indian-English, I have been compelled to rearrange his

versions into our current vernacular. His Indian text, both in

the song in the present paper and throughout the Wampum

Records, is written syllabically without any attempt to divide

the sentence into words, so that it is extremely difficult to edit

the Passamaquoddy original with even approximate correctness.

WABANAKI History PREVIOUS TO THE ESTABLISHMENT OF

THE Wampum Laws.

In former days the Wadanaki nation, the Indians called M/e-

guytk? or Mohawks and other members of the Iroquoian Six

Nations® were want to wage bloody and unceasing war with one

another. The Wabanaki nation consisted of five tribes, ¢. &.,

Passamaquoddies, Penobscots,’ Micmacs, Maliseets* and the

tribe (now extinct) which formerly inhabited the banks of the

Kennebec river.” The bitterest foes of the Wabanaki were un-

PASSAMAQUODDY DOCUMENTS. 371

doubtedly the JMJeguyiks or Mohawks, who, on the slightest

provocation, would send bands to harry them and destroy their

crops. The Mohawks invariably treated their prisoners with

the most merciless severity, showing no pity even to the women

and children. A favorite torture which they frequently prac-

ticed was to build a large fire of hemlock coals, into the flames

of which they drove their captives, compelling them to walk

back and forth over the glowing coals until relieved by death.

No case is on record where a brave of the Wadvanaki nation

succumbed to the pain. Their warriors would always pace the

fiery path with undaunted resolution and without uttering a

sound until nature put an end to their agony. Tortures of

this sort were practiced by all the tribes, but the Mohawks ex-

ceeded the others in cruelty."

The cause of the strife was an hereditary dispute about hunt-

ing grounds. Besides the enmity which they nourished in

common against the Six Nations, the Wadanaki had also in-

ternal disputes. Thus, the Penobscots were at feud with the

Maliseets and the Micmacs with the Passamaquoddies.

The first war between the last mentioned tribes was brought

about by the quarrel of two boys, sons of chiefs. On this occa-

sion the Passamaquoddies were on a friendly visit to the Mic-

macs, during which the sons of the Passamaquoddy and Micmac

chiefs went shooting together. They both shot at a white sable,

killing the animal by their joint effort, but each lad claimed it

as his game. Finally, the Passamaquoddy boy, becoming en-

raged, killed the son of the Micmac chief. The latter on hear-

ing of the murder could think only of vengeance and positively

refused to listen to the Passamaquoddy chief’s attempt at con-

ciliation. The latter even offered the life of his own son who

had been guilty of the murder, but all to no purpose. In con-

sequence of this unfortunate occurrence the celebrated ‘great

war’ was then declared which lasted many years.

The Micmacs, although more numerous than their enemies,

were inferior warriors, so that the victory was always (sc) won

by the Passamaquoddies. So great was the hostile spirit that

the two tribes fought whenever they met, paying no heed to the

Siles PRINCE.

time of year. On one occasion, the Passamaquoddies went to

Tlancowatik, thirty miles west of St. John, N. B., with a small

party consisting principally of women and children with the

chief and a few braves. At this place they met a number of

Micmacs on their way to Passamaquoddy Bay. The Micmac

chief being a lover of fair play ordered his men to land on an

‘island to await the coming of a messenger. The other chief

sent word that on the following day ‘‘the boys would come out

to play.”’ As the Passamaquoddy chief had very few men able

to bear arms, he made the women attire themselves like war-

riors, so that from a distance they might be mistaken for men

and directed them to play on the beach shouting and laughing

as if entirely fearless. “The Micmac chief, deceived by this

stratagem and being afraid, summoned his braves to council

and setting forth the disasters which had been caused by the

long war advised a treaty of peace. This proposition was

made to the Passamaquoddies who, wearied by the perpetual

state of unrest, gladly acceded to the request. “A general

council was accordingly called, by which it was decided that

‘(as long as the sun rises and sets, as long as the great lakes

send their waters to the sea, so long should peace reign over

the two tribes.”’

The usual ceremonies for making peace were then observed,

as follows: (1) a marriage was contracted between a brave of

the challenging people and a maiden of the challenged people.

This was regarded as a type of perpetual future good will. (2)

A feast lasting two months was celebrated nightly and (3)

games of ball, canoe and foot races and other sports were car-

ried on. After such ceremonies were ‘over no breach ola

treaty is on record, not even a single murder.

After the great Micmac war was ended, the Passamaquoddies

lived at peace except for occasional raids of Mohawks, but the

latter finally received a blow from which they never recovered,

the details of which are as follows: It was the custom of the

Mohawks to make night attacks and at one time, when the

Passamaquoddies were at the head of Passamaquoddy Bay," the

Mohawks approached the camp, which was called Quenasquam-

PASSAMAQUODDY DOCUMENTS. 373

cook,” with the purpose of utterly destroying it. On this oc-

casion, however, they were seen by a Passamaquoddy brave

whose people lay in ambush for them. It was the custom of

chiefs to wear medallions of white wampum shells which were

visible at a long distance, particularly in the moonlight. Pick-

ing out in this way the person of the Mohawk chief whose name

was Lox, “panther,” the watching braves shot him first, owing

to which calamity the Mohawks were thrown into confusion and

fled. The Passamaquoddies followed them as soon as day

broke, but the tracks were so scattered that they could not find

the refugees. It was ascertained afterwards that the Mohawks

had quarreled among themselves, one party being in favor of

making peace with the enemy, while another faction was

strongly opposed to such a measure. The discussion of the

question ended in a fierce combat. ‘This was the final blow to

the Mohawk cause, so that the nation ever afterward sought to

be at peace with the Passamaquoddies. |

After this battle the Passamaquoddies were never again mo-

lested, but the Penobscot tribe was still at war with the Mali-

seets and Mohawks and, in fact, were nearly destroyed three

times by their ruthless foes. A most interesting legend of this

Mohawk war is the account of the miraculous revelation to the

Penobscots by Wenagamesivook or fairies of the approach of a

large body of Mohawks. Two Penobscots were coming down

the Penobscot river from their winter hunting, when they spied

a newly made canoe paddled by what seemed to be two small

boys who, pursue as they would, always kept at an even dis-

tance ahead of them. Finally, the supposed children stopped

and called out to the wondering Indians “ Nowut Kemaganck

Meguytk’’ “ At Nowut Kemaganck there are Mohawks.”’ As the

hunters had noticed some chips floating down the stream, they

believed the report at once. The Mohawks had been making

rafts with which to float down the river in order to destroy the

Penobscot tribe. As soonas the hunters reached Oldtown they

told their curious tale, which was immediately credited by the

old men, who straightway prepared for war. The fairies, ac-

cording to their belief,‘ always either appeared in person or

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. Scl., XI, October 13, 1898—25.

374 PRINCE:

carved a warning on rocks before a danger which threatened the

tribe. Greatly excited, the Penobscots despatched scouts in all

directions, so that when the Mohawks arrived, they found the

warriors perfectly prepared awaiting them behind a brush-wood

breast-work (/szgnigen).

No damage was done at that time, but on another occa-

sion the Mohawks completely defeated the Penobscots, saving

only one man as a guide to the St. John’s river (Wudas-

‘uk).'* Constructing rafts there, they aimed to float down strean

for the purpose of destroying the village of Maliseets (Wilastu-

kuk). The Penobscot guide told them that there was no falls

or rapids before them, knowing full well all the time that on this

river is the great fall of Chikchenikbik of nearly 100 feet, the

roar of whose torrent is perfectly inaudible to the traveler until

he is within a few yards of it. The Mohawks, trusting to their

guide, were all sleeping on their rafts, when the Penobscot, sud-

denly jumping overboard, swam ashore and left his 600 sleeping

foes to be carried over the falls. Not a man escaped to tell

the tale except the Penobscot guide.

The Mohawks, discouraged by their repeated failures, decided

to make a treaty of peace among all the nations, apportioning

the disputed hunting grounds as follows : To the Penobscots,

the Penobscot river and its tributaries; to the Maliseets the

St. John’s river and its tributaries; to the Passamaquoddies,

the St. Croix river” and its territory, and to the Micmacs their

own streams. The Wadanaki lived ever after as one nation, un-

disturbed by internal strife and keeping the Mohawks and Six

Nations at peace with them by presenting a united front. This

is the origin of the Wampum Laws which were the product of

the union of the tribes.

The following song is the plaint of the youthful Indian lover

who sings to his fair one before going away to his winter hunt-

ing in the autumn when the leaves are ved. He promises to re-

turn to her embraces in the Spring when the grcex foliage has

begun to bud. The song has in the original four sense-stanzas.

A refrain precedes the first, second and fourth and is repeated

for the last time after the fourth verse. In Mitchell’s MS. no

PASSAMAQUODDY DOCUMENTS.

37d

translation is given of the fourth stanza, so that I have omitted

it and the final refrain in the present paper.

PASSAMAQUODDY LOVE SONG.

Refrain.

Anigowanotenoo !

Boski k’ tlabin elmi nelemwwtk

elmt papkeyik ; boski k tlabin,

Anigowanotenoo !

1. Neket m pesel etl-nemtiot-

yikw. LEtucht w'linakw-ben se-

bayt sibook; etucht wh baguas-

heten. K’machtena noltthasiben ;

mechinoltena keppitham’l, Anigo-

qwanotenoo !

Refrain.

Boski k’ tlabin elmi nelemwik

naga elmi papkeytk Antgowanote-

200.

2. Negetlo he elt-alnisookme-

kwhen sebayt guspentk etuchit we-

lanakw-sititben wuchowek he el-

machip klamisken miptsel, Anigo-

wanotenoo /

3. Anigowanotenoo, mnittloch

apch elt-alnisooknukw tan etuch

apachyaie; tanetch etuch boski

pkestk mipisel yut pemden nit

k’ tlaskooyin.

Refrain.

Boski k’tlabin elmi nelemwik

elmi papkeytk, Anigowanotenoo.

Anigowanotenoo !

Oft on a lonely day thou look’ st

on the beautiful river and down

the shining stream. Oft thou

lookest, Anigowanotenoo !

When last I saw thee, how

beautiful that fair stream looked,

how lovely was the silver moon.

Thou knowest how happy we

were. Ah, since that night I

think of thee always, Anigowan-

otenoo !

Of’t ona lonely day thou

look’st on the beautiful river and

down the shining stream, Anigo-

wanotenoo ?

When we paddled the canoe

together on that beautiful lake

how fair the mountains looked

and how we watched the red

leaves whirl in the gentle breeze,

Anigowanotenoo !

Anigowanotenoo, we will go

once more in a canoe and watch

the beautiful green leaves on the

mountain.

Of’t ona lonely day thou

lookest on the beautiful river and

down the shining stream, Anigo-

wanotenoo !

376 PRINCE.

EXPLANATORY NOTES.

* Wabanaki means ‘‘ inhabitants of the East or dawn country ”’

from waéan ‘‘ daybreak” and ak ‘land, territory.’’ The latter is

a suffix used in composition for ‘‘ land, region” (see Brinton, The

Lenape and their Legends, p. rgr).

* Norridgewock or Norridgewalk is on the Kennebec and not as

Gatschet states on the middle Penobscot (Vat. Geogr. Mag., VII,

p- 23). Its original name was /Vanrantsouack, which may have

meant ‘‘ stretch of still water,’’ although this is not certain. The

settlement was the home of the nucleus of the present St. Francis

clan, where Father Rasle, the author of the Abnaki dictionary, first

established himself in 1689 (see Pickering’s edition of Rasle’s work

in Amer. Acad. Sct. and Arts Mem., New series, 1332, Vol. 1p:

372). The tradition of the present Abnakis of Canada asserts that

their ancestors came from Maine and New Hampshire.

* The Indian form of the name Passamaquoddy is Peskatumagatick

‘“ those belonging to the place abounding in pollock-fish’’ (feskatum ) ;

el MGoatsehet, J...4:, p23:

*See Prince, Proc. Amer. Philos. Soc., XXXI, p. 480.

°The real Mohawks called themselves Canuzengas. When first

known they were living on the south side of the Mohawk river be-

tween Canajoharie and Schoharie creeks in New York Province.

Being loyalists, they removed to Canada with Brant at the time of

the American Revolution (Hale, the Iroquois Book of Rites, p.

34). It isprobable that Mitchell means here by Mohawks ( AZeguyzh)

not only the Camzengas, but also the Canadian Iroquois. The whole

Iroquois race is called in the St. Francis language AZagwa, and indeed

the term Mohawk which is a corruption of the word A/agua was used

in England in much the same way.

° Originally Five Nations, ¢. g., Onondagas, Mohawks, Oneidas,

Senecas and Cayugas who called themselves in the Iroquoian dialect

Ffotinonstonnt (Prince, 7. ¢c., p. 438). The Tuscaroras came into

the league later. The Iroquoian name for the completed federation

was Kanonsionni ** the league of the united households’’ (Hale, /. ¢.,

Pp. 10, 171),

' The original form of the name Penobscot is Panawampskik (St.

Francis Panapskak) ‘‘ where the steep rocks are.’’

PASSAMAQUODDY DOCUMENTS. 377

*The Maliseets (Milicetes) who speak practically the same lan-

guage as the Passamaquoddies are called Etchemins by the Micmacs.

*Undoubtedly the Norridgewoks mentioned notes. Kenebec is

probably a slight alteration of Azzebek ‘‘ deep river.”’

In connection with this undoubtedly biassed statement, cf. Hale,

Z. c., p. 83, ff. on the Iroquois character. There is no reason to be-

lieve that the members of this much-maligned race were any more

barbarous in the treatment of their captives than their hereditary

Algonkin foes.

ee note 3 and Gatschet, /. c.

” Quenasquamcook ‘‘ at the gravel beach of the pointed end’’ (cf.

Meaicenet, /. ¢., p. 22).

* Delaware, guenischquney, literally ‘‘ long tailed’’ (Brinton, Lenape

Eng. Dictionary, p. 121). Ojibwa peshew , Micmac utkogwech.

Witastuk “*the good river’’=Aroostook, ¢. g., the St. John

river. Waulastukuk isa locality “at ornear the St. Johnriver.’’ The

Micmacs call St. John AMenawges ‘* the place where dead seals are

collected.’’

® Called Skutzk in Passamaquoddy (according to Mitchell) from sgt

‘*fire;’’ ‘‘at the fire,’’ owing to the custom of spearing salmon by torch-

light. It is much more likely that the name is an allusion to the

burnt lands or clearings on the banks of the river or on Schoodic

lake. Tradition asserts that large forest fires took place here about

1675.

[Annas N. Y. Acap. Sci., XI, No. 16, pp. 379 to 400, October 13, 1898. ]

me PHYLOGENETIC SIGNIFICANCE OF CERTAIN

PROTOZOTUN: NUCEE I.

Gary N. CALKINS.

(Read April rz, 1898.)

[Prare XXX V-]

THE nucleus is often looked upon as a more or less well-de-

fined morphological element of the cell, possessing in its various

phases a common type of structure and composed in all cases

of similar substances. A comparison of cells in various tissues

whether vertebrate or invertebrate, plant or animal, shows that

in the majority of cases the nuclei are so similar that, with slight

variations, a description of one answers for a description of all.

In resting phases the similarity is shown in the distribution of

chromatin, linin, and in the nucleoli, while the nuclear membrane

is usually present. In active phases metazoan nuclei as a rule,

pass through the same stages of spirem-formation, loss of mem-

brane, chromosome-formation, and various processes of re-for-

mation. The differences between such nuclei being confined

mainly to variations in number of chromosomes, in arrangement

in the nuclear plate, and in the mode of division.

The nuclear type being so constant in higher animals we

must look to the lower animals—that is, to the Protozoa—to

find not only the prototype, but any transitional forms leading

up tothe highest types, bearing in mind, however, that not-

withstanding the constancy of type manifested in the nuclear

forms and mitotic processes of the latter, individual differences

may have arisen and mitotic processes may have developed in

quite diverse ways. In the present paper it is my object to

bring together a few facts, some of which are new, showing

how in the Protozoa, the nucleus of the type found in Metazoa

(379 )

380 CALKINS.

may have arisen from simpler forms, and how in its mitotic

phenomena it passes through stages represented by permanent

nuclei of lower Protozoa.

In the first comparison of metazoan with protozoan nuclei

we are at once beset with difficulties. Protozoan nuclei vary

so widely among themselves that, save for the same class of or-

ganisms, a description of one nucleus would not correspond at

all to that of another. Some resemble the ordinary type of

nucleus in the Metazoa, others are so different from this type

that they can scarcely be compared. In general the nuclei of the

Protozoa are much simpler in structure than those of Metazoa.

Chromatin is present in all cases but other parts which are usu-

ally found in nuclei of the Metazoa are frequently missing, ¢. g.

the linin, the nuclear membrane or the nucleolus. “On the

other hand, bodies are occasionally found within the nucleus of

Protozoa which are absent altogether or present in some other

form, in Metazoa ; such for example are the significant centro-

some-like bodies found in /wg/ena and allied forms.

There are so many different types of nuclei in the various

classes and orders of the Protozoa that it should be possible to

select a chain of forms connecting the simplest known type with

the highest. Such a sequence may be sought for in the struc-

ture of the resting nucleus or in the method of division. An

ideal sequence would result if the two lines could be developed

simultaneously, but this is extremely difficult as a nucleus may

be high in the series of nuclear structures and low in the matter

of mitotic division. The nuclei of Actenospherium, Actinophrys

and iVoctiluca offer a striking example of this fact, the two

former resembling the structure of the metazoan type more

closely than the latter, while in mitosis the latter is much nearer

the metazoan type than are the former. In questions of phyl-

ogeny however, morphological characters are usually of more

importance than physiological characters and this must be kept

in mind inthe present discussion. A number of authors have

built up theories of phylogeny on the method by which the

nuclei of Protozoa divide, and the obvious result is a series of

mitoses which satisfy to a certain extent the requirements in

PROTOZOAN NUCLEI. 381

such a scale, but the series applies only to the nuclei during

division while the nuclei at rest are quite different, and the cell-

bodies to which the nuclei belong, often represent widely separ-

ate classes of animals. A phylogeny based upon such a foun-

dation must necessarily be weak, for it is perfectly possible that

various classes of Protozoa may develop mitotic modifications

quite independently of each other and yet along the same lines.

In view of the fact that the nuclei of the Protozoa show such

wide differences it is not surprising that some forms should pos-

sess no structures which can be accurately defined as nuclei.

Indeed, if the nucleus be regarded merely from a morphological

standpoint it is quite easy to conceive of cells which possess no

nuclei (Haeckel’s Monera, in part) and to imagine groups of cells

intermediate between such forms and those in which a definite

morphological nucleus can be made out. ‘These intermediate

forms are the subject of the present paper.

The observations were made on various Protozoa including

simple flagellates, dinoflagellates, rhizopods, heliozoa, ciliates,

suctoria and WVoctiluca. The material was fixed with sublimate

acetic (5 per cent. acetic), picro acetic, Hermann’s fluid, and

saturated sublimate. The stains used were mainly iron hama-

toxylin with orange or Congo red, and the Flemming triple.

The nuclei were studied from thin sections or from total prepara-

tions, sections giving the best results.

THE SO-CALLED ‘“ DISTRIBUTED NUCLEUS.”

A number of forms which Haeckel included in his enucleate

Protista, have subsequently, by the use of better optical instru-

ments and improved technique, been found to contain minute

particles of chromatin which are distributed without definite or-

der throughout the cell. Such types have been called distributed

nuclei. Occasional instances of this type of nucleus have been

found in nearly every group of Protozoa. In the Ciliata,

Gruber (’84) found that Chewia teres and Trachelocerca phenicop-

terus possess no true nuclei but minute granules of chromatin

distributed throughout the cell-substance. These granules, ac-

382 CALKINS.

cording to Gruber, unite into a common body previous to divi-

sion and are then halved.

The Ciliata are highly specialized Protozoa and it is probable

that, among them, the primitive distributed nucleus is very un-

common ; we should expect to find this condition in the simpler

and less differentiated forms like the flagellates or the lowest

plants. In the latter, especially the bacteria and the closely

allied Cyanophycee, Butschli (’90 and ’96), confirmed by

Zacharias (90), described cells possessing a distinct proto-

plasmic structure enclosing numerous granules which he found

to be chromatin. Butschli regards these cells as nuclei with

only a fine layer of protoplasm around the outside. The chro-

matin is laid down on what appears to be the cytoplasmic retic-

ulum but which according to his view, would be linin. How-

ever this view may be in regard to the bacteria it cannot hold

for cases of distributed nuclei among the Protozoa.

A flagellate belonging to the genus 7etramutus possesses a

nucleus of the same distributed type. The protoplasmic struc-

ture of this flagellate is strikingly similar to Butschli’s figures

and photographs of Chromatium and other bacteria. The pe-

riphery is characterized by a distinct alveolar layer consisting of

vacuoles of regular size and arrangement, and the walls which

bound them. The central portion is made up of alveoli of

various sizes and is much looser in texture than the outer layer

(Plate XX XV, Figs. 1-4). After fixation with Hermann’s fluid

and staining with Flemming’s triple stain, this cytoplasmic

structure appears yellowish or of an orange tone. In the endo-

plasm the substance of the alveoli appears to have run together

at one point to form a more compact, denser aggregate which,

with the stain used, appears homogeneous (Fig. 1 Ad). With the

iron-haematoxylin the fused portion becomes more conspicuous

although not more deeply stained than the cytoplasmic reticu-

lum. It appears to be a coalescence of cytoplasmic microsomes.

No inner structure could be made out, although in some cases

a lighter area (Fig. 2) was faintly indicated in the center. In

some individuals the body in question appears biscuit-shaped

as though undergoing division (Fig. 4).

PROTOZOAN NUCLEL. 383

In addition to the above structure the cells of Zetramitus con-

tain a number of comparatively large-sized granules which stain

intensely with saffranin in the Flemming stain and black with

the iron-hematoxylin. In division they are separated into two

equal groups in the daughter-cells (Fig. 5). From the relation

to stains and the general appearance during rest and division

I have no hesitation whatever in comparing them with the

granules of chromatin described by Butschli in the case of Chro-

matium and Bacterium termo. The most frequent position of the

granules is at the extremity of the cell opposite the flagella,

where they form an aggregate of greater or less density, but in

which the individual granules can be distinctly made out (Figs.

2, 4). There is reason to suppose that this close aggregation

indicates the approach of division, for the culture was extremely

active and the monads were increasing rapidly. Many indi-

viduals were found, however, in which the chromatin granules

were distributed over all parts of the cell (Fig. 1). Aggregates

were also found in the flagella-end of the cell (Fig. 3), although

such cases were ccmparatively rare. In this connection it is a

significant fact that division of the body begins at that end of the

animal which holds the chromatin, in this case at the posterior

end, although the majority of flagellates begin to divide at the

flagellate end (Fig. 5).

This type of nucleus must be very primitive. It has no

membrane and no Jinin unless the meshes of cytoplasm around

the chromatin granules be called linin. Is there a nucleolus?

Were it intra-nuclear the cytoplasmic body described above

might be called a nucleolus on account of its staining reactions,

but it is not intra-nuclear, and furthermore it appears to have a

special function in the activity of the cell. Wherever the aggre-

gate of chromatin granules may be found the cytoplasmic body

is invariably in the near vicinity. It appears to divide before the

group of chromatin is halved, and in the daughter-cells of a

just-divided form the chromatin granules appear to surround the

cytoplasmic body (Fig. 5.) It is certainly conceivable and in

view of the phenomena in other allied Protozoa, almost probable

that this cytoplasmic body exerts some influence upon the chro-

matin granules to attract them about itself at certain stages.

384 CALKINS.

THE INTERMEDIATE TYPE OF NUCLEUS.

The ‘intermediate type’”’ includes those nuclei which have

either a faint nuclear membrane or none at all, and which per-

sist in the form of spherical aggregates of chromatin granules

about a central attractive body. The majority of the common

autoflagellates possess nuclei of this type and a description of

a few will suffice for all. The forms selected are Microglena,

Synura, Chilomonas, Trachelomonas and Euglena.

Microglena punctifera (Pl. XX XV, Fig. 6). This minute form

possesses two large chromatophores which occupy the greater

part of the cell and which obscure the finer protoplasmic struc-

ture. There isa single flagellum attached at the end where the

chromatophores come together. At this end also a small pig-

mented “‘ eye-spot’’ can be made out (Fig. 6, E). The nucleus

lies between the chromatophores in the center of the cell. It

consists of a large number of chromatin granules surrounding a

deeply-staining central body. The granules are loosely ar-

ranged, often forming an irregular outline and apparently are

not bounded by a nuclear membrane.

Synura uvella (Pl. XXXV, Fig. 7). This beautiful colony-

form is similar to JZcrog/ena in regard to nuclear structure, and,

‘being larger, the details can be more readily made out. The

monads are attached at a central point by their sharp ends,

which form the lower extremity of the gelatinous mantle sur-

rounding the protoplasmic body. The two equal-sized flagella

arise from the outer end of the protoplasmic body and run nearly

parallel through the outer mantle. Two large chromatophores

occupy the greater part of the cell, each being curved like the

half of an empty nut shell. The nucleus is enclosed in the

space between the chromatophores. It is excentric in position,

lying nearer the flagella end. Like the nucleus of AZicroglena

it is made up of fine granules of chromatin disposed around a

distinct central body. Here also the chromatin appears to be

free from a bounding membrane, but in both of these forms the

nuclei are distinctly outlined and well marked off from the sur-

rounding cytoplasm while they invariably appear round in

section.

PROTOZOAN NUCLEI. 385

Chilomonas cylindrica Ehg. (Plate XXXV, Figs. 8, 9, 10.)

This very common flagellate is characterized by the buccal

depression typical of the family Cryptomonide, by two equal

flagella, by an cesophagus-tract in the endoplasm, by absence of

chromatophores, and in most cases, by the absence of plastids.

The absence of cytoplasmic intra-cellular substances makes

Chilomonas particularly favorable for nuclear study as well as

for the study of cytoplasmic structure. The nucleus is a con-

spicuous body in the lower half of the cell just below the mid-

dle line. It is always irregular in outline, the irregularity being

due to prolongations of its substance, like pseudopodia, into the

adjacent protoplasm. We again find the granular chromatin

and the intra-nuclear deeply-staining body. In this case, there

is, in all probability, no nuclear membrane, and from the vari-

ous shapes of the nuclei in different individuals it is inferred

that the chromatin granules may become more or less scattered,

although remaining in the vicinity of the central body. During

division of the cell the chromatin becomes closely aggregated

around the central body which divides first, the chromatin gran-

ules, as in Auglena, separating later into two equal portions.

Division here is not as complicated, however, as in Eug/ena, for

the chromatin granules do not fuse into distinct rods or chromo-

somes as in the latter form (Figs. 9 and 10).

Trachelomonas. Several species of Trachelomonas were ex-

amined and in all cases the nuclei were of the same type as

those already described. Among the most noteworthy were

the nuclei of 7. /agenella, T. volvocina and T. hispida. The

simplest of these was found in 7: /agenella (Fig. 11) where, as

in Chilomonas, it consists of an irregular mass of chromatin

granules surrounding a central body. No nuclear membrane

was seen, although the protoplasmic structure was plainly ap-

parent. Compared with the entire nucleus the central body in

this case is quite small.

Two varieties of Z: jzspida, which for convenience I shall

characterize as variety A, and variety B present two distinct

phases of nuclear arrangement. The two forms differ in other

respects ; variety A is smaller; has no collar, has a compar-

386 CALKINS.

atively thick shell and is provided with fine, needle-like spines

(Fig. 12). Variety B has a collar bearing six distinct spikes on

its outer margin. Its wall is comparatively thin and is pro-

vided with spines of thorn-like structure, z. ¢., with broad bases

and sharp points (Fig. 13). In both cases the protoplasm is

characterized by great vacuoles in which lie a varying number

of plastids. The nucleus in variety A resembles that of 7.

lagenella in having an irregular mass of chromatin granules.

The edge of the mass is irregular and more or less “frayed

out,” leaving little doubt as to the absence of a nuclear mem-

brane. The central body is comparatively small and is either

round or elliptical in form. The nucleus of variety B, on the

other hand, presents quite a different appearance. It is very

regular in outline, the margins are smooth and even, and a deli-

cate though distinct membrane encloses it. The central gran-

ule is large and conspicuous (Fig. 13).

In Zrachelomonas volvocina the nucleus resembles that of 7:

hispida variety B. The cell is somewhat more compact how-

ever, the nucleus is smaller and the cytoplasm contains more

plastids (Fig. 14).

Euglena viridis (Pl. XXXV, Figs. 17, (18,19): Luglena

of the same family as the Zyrachelomonads has, perhaps, the

most highly differentiated nucleus of the intermediate type.

Blochmann (’94) and Keuten (’95) described this nucleus as

a group of chromatin granules enclosed by a membrane, and sur-

rounding a central body—the “ nucleolus-centrosome.”’ Each

chromatin granule was described as a ‘“ Stabchen’’ or rod-like

element. Butschli (’90) had described, in addition to the chro-

matin granules and central body, a more or less distinct linin

network which was apparently overlooked by Keuten. This

so-called linin substance is extremely difficult to see but in thin

sections. and with the use of oblique light can be made out as

delicate fibrils running from granule to granule. This structure

could not be seen in the shelled euglenoids (77achelomonas), pos-

sibly because the nuclei were not so easy to study, being total

preparations of shelled forms. In other monads, as for example

Chilomonas, which are as easy to study in total preparations as

PROTOZOAN NUCLEI. 387

the thinnest of sections, no such fibrils could be made out, al-

though an occasional microsome between the chromatin granules

aroused the suspicion that the latter are laid down on the cyto-

plasmic reticulum, in which case the inter-chromatin cytoplas-

mic net might be called linin in view of the connection which

has been established between cytoplasmic and nuclear networks

in the Metazoa.

In Auglena the central granule apparently exerts an attractive

force during division. The chromatin granules aggregated in

the form of small rods—primitive chromosomes—are arranged

about it radially. The entire nucleus is surrounded by a deli-

cate though distinct membrane.

Although the structure of the nucleus of Aug/ena and its be-

havior during cell division have been carefully described by

Keuten, the differences between the chromatin and the central

body do not seem to have been sufficiently brought out. A

carmine stain, for example, is not sufficient to distinguish chro-

matin from plasmosomes and from the results shown by the

iron-hematoxylin stain the central body would appear to be

chromatin. A very delicate differential result is obtained by the

use of the Biondi-Ehrlich mixture of methyl green and acid

fuchsine (Auerbach’s formula). After this stain the central

body is distinctly red and shows out in marked contrast to the

green of the surrounding chromatin. From this reaction it fol-

lows that the chemical composition of the central body is differ-

ent from that of chromatin, a result which brings this body

even more closely in line with the attraction sphere of the

higher forms.

At this point Schaudinn’s observations on FParameba EFil-

hard: are interesting and important. /arame@dba is a rhizopod

with flagellate swarm-spores. The spores resemble C/z/omonas

in general appearance, but a peculiar Mebenkorper is found in

the former which is lacking in the latter. This body is outside

the nucleus which, although it seems to have no nuclear mem-

brane, is nevertheless distinctly marked off from the rest of the

cytoplasm. During cell-activity the Mebenkirper assumes a

dumb-bell shape and, when the ends are well separated but still

388 CALKINS.

held together by a connecting rod of its own substance, the

chromatin granules begin to migrate towards the center of the

connecting rod and finally form a complete ring around it.

The Nebenkorper is thus a central body similar to the central

body of Aug/ena at a corresponding stage in division (cf. Figs.

17, 18, 19). After division of the chromatin the daughter-nu-

clei are reformed, but in each case the central body is left out in

the cytoplasm. This phenomenon recalls the conditions in 7e-

tranutus where a similar protoplasmic body acts ina very similar

manner (cf. Figs. 1 to 5). The latter form is more primitive

however, for the chromatin is not collected in a definite body—

the nucleus—but is distributed throughout the cell and collects

only during and for cell division.

PROTOZOAN NUCLEI OF TYPICAL METAZOAN STRUCTURE.

A typical metazoan nucleus differs from the forms described

above in having a distinct linin reticulum with chromatin laid

down within it and forming a chromatin reticulum; often a

more or less clearly differentiated nucleolus, and a nuclear

membrane which usually disappears during mitosis. Many

important differences are found when a comparison is made

of the nuclei during division. In the majority of Metazoa

there is a distinct spirem leading up to the formation of chro-

mosomes in each case characteristic of the species ; and distinct

spindle-formation with centrosomes and spindle fibers. In the

Protozoa a number of nuclei have been described which agree

more or less closely with the requirements of such a nucleus.

So far as the resting nucleus goes, Actnospherium and the

nuclei of some Sporozoa are similar to the Metazoan nuclei

while the nuclei of Actimophrys and of Luglypha approach

them in mitosis. The number of such cases, however, is very

small and, when compared with the number showing the inter-

mediate type, it is insignificant. In short, the vast majority of

Protozoa excluding the infusoria possess various conditions of

nuclei of the intermediate type.

PROTOZOAN NUCLEI. 389

ABERRANT TYPES OF PROTOZOAN NUCLEI.

While nuclei of the type described above in flagellates seem

to lead by gradual stages into more complicated forms of the

Metazoan type, other nuclei of the Protozoa seem to have de-

veloped along a divergent path and finally resemble only

remotely the primitive forms on the one hand, and the higher

forms on the other. These nuclei may be described as aberrant

forms, although the number of such forms is probably greater

than any other type among the Protozoa. In most cases,

however, the structure can be traced back to more primitive

forms of the ‘Intermediate type.” A few examples which

have come under my own observation must suffice. These are

Ameba proteus among the Rhizopoda, Ceratium and Peridinium

among the Dinoflagellata, Voct/uca, a Cystoflagellate, and S7/-

lonychia among the Ciliata.

Ameba proteus (Fig. 16). The nucleus of this common

rhizopod is of large size and of characteristic shape, resembling

a biconcave disc. It is constant in shape and is bounded by a

firm membrane which, together with the granular chromatin

contents, can be easily made out while the animal is alive. The

finer structure, however, is seen only in sections which, with these

large forms, can be cut in any desired plane. The nucleus

contains, in addition to the general ground substance, or nuclear

sap, two kinds of staining substances one of which becomes

intensely black with iron hzematoxylin, while the other is gray,

The more deeply staining substance is chromatin in the form of

granules distributed throughout the nucleus; the other sub-

stance has the form of a disc lying in the center of the nucleus.

Gruber (’83) calls this central mass the ‘‘nucleolus.” In all of

the specimens which I examined at this time the nucleus had

the same structure and Iam convinced that it is typical of

Ameba proteus. The faintly staining central mass is perfectly

homogeneous in structure and, although I have not seen it in

division, I am confident that it is to be compared with the intra-

nuclear body in the flagellates. In other species of Aszwba the

nucleus possesses an internal structure similar to the “ nucle-

olus centrosome” of Luglena (Schaudinn, ’94).

ANNALS N. ¥. AcaD. Scr., XI, October 13, 1898—26.

390 CALKINS.

The nucleus of Amwéa proteus can be regarded as similar to

that of Chilomonas plus a nuclear membrane. There is no evi-

dence of other intra-nuclear bodies such as linin, nucleoli, etc.,

nothing is present but chromatin and the central body. ‘The

tough nuclear membrane ts possibly due to the peculiarly rough

treatment which the nucleus undergoes in its cyclosis with the

other endoplasmic substances.

Ceratium and Peridinium, Butschli(’85) found a very curious

structure in the dinoflagellate nucleus. Viewed from one side it

appears to be of the regular reticulate type with local thickenings

on the linin network ; but, looked at from another side, the nu-

cleus seems to be composed of rows of chromatin connected by

delicate fibrils, the whole having a more or less honey-comb

structure. Lauterborn (’95) confirmed Bitschli’s description but

added that the nucleus invariably contains one or two nucleoli,

and that in division a peculiar rod-like body of ‘‘ unknown signifi-

cance’’ stretches across the division axis. Lauterborn is inclined

to believe this structure homologous with the intra-nuclear body

of Euglena. I have examined a number of Dinoflagellata from

Puget Sound and Alaska including Perzdinium divergens, Dino-

physts, Ceratium tripos, Ceratium fusus, etc. and in all of them I

have found the familiar intra-nuclear central body, differing

however from the more frequent type in being sometimes single,

sometimes double or multiple. (Figs. 21 Perzdinium divergens,

and 20 Ceratium fusus.) The peculiar rod-like or even lamel-

late structure of the chromatin is perhaps due to the fusion of

chromatin granules, thus forming a permanent structure com-

parable to a spirem.

Noctiluca miliaris (Pl. XXXV, Figs. 22-26). Of very

different structure is the nucleus of Moctluca milaris, a form

possibly allied to the Dinoflagellata. The chromatin here is

massed in from eight to eleven large reservoirs (Fig. 22),

while the rest of the nucleus is filled with a granular sub-

stance of quite a different chemical composition. The whole

is enclosed ina firm membrane. ‘This nucleus would be diffi-

cult to understand were it not for the changes which the chro-

matin undergoes previous to division. The large reservoirs

PROTOZOAN NUCLEL 391

disintegrate during the earlier stages of mitosis, forming smaller

and smaller chromatin bodies, the final result being a great

number of minute chromatin granules, which, as in Chzlomonas

or Luglena, are found distributed throughout the nucleus.

The chromatin granules later unite to form distinct chromo-

somes. The formation of the chromosomes is entirely different

from the account of the process given by Ishikawa (’94). The

granules of chromatin unite in lines which are focussed at one

side of the nucleus ; these lines are the chromosomes, and they

are subsequently divided through the agency of a complicated

mitotic process in which centrospheres, central spindles and

centrosomes play an important part.' In the early stage of

division, when the chromatin is scattered throughout the cell in

the form of minute chromatin granules, the nucleus of Nocétzluca

is obviously comparable with the nucleus of the intermediate

type, while the vegetative condition can be conceived as due to

the coalescence of the chromatin granules to form the large

reservoirs. An essential difference in the nucleus of /Voctluca,

however, is found in the absence of an intra-nuclear central body.

The place of this important mitotic agent is taken by a large

cytoplasmic sphere lying just outside the nuclear membrane.

This sphere, during mitosis, plays the same part as the intra-

nuclear body of the lower flagellates, but in a much more com-

plicated way. While the chromatin granules are fusing to

form the chromosomes the sphere divides to form a dumb-bell

shaped body consisting of two daughter-spheres and connecting

fibrous substance forming the “central spindle” (Fig. 23).

The nucleus then bends around in the form of a U until it al-

most completely surrounds the central spindle. The chrom-

osomes, focussed at the side of the nucleus which was turned

towards the cytoplasmic sphere, now form a nearly continuous

line or ring—the nuclear plate—around the central spindle (Fig.

23). At this period it can be found by sections that the nuclear

1For a description of the process of mitosis in JVoctzluca see my paper,

now in press, which will shortly appear in the /ournal of Morphology on ‘* Mitosis

in LVoctiluca mitfiaris and its Bearing on the Nuclear Relations of the Metazoa and

the Protozoa.’’

rope pee CALKINS.

membrane has disappeared from that portion of the nucleus be-

tween the chromosomes and the central spindle, and that the

ends of the chromosomes are connected by distinct fibers—the

mantle fibers—with centrosomes inside of the spheres (Figs. 24,

26). The chromosomes are then divided longitudinally be-

ginning at the ends turned towards the central spindle, and one-

half of each chromosome goes to form the daughter nuclei.

The nuclei are reconstituted by the subsequent aggregation of

the chromatin granules into the large reservoirs while the sphere

in each case forms a definite body on the outside of the nucleus.

The staining reactions of the sphere in Voct/uca are the same

as those of the intra-nuclear body in Auglena and Chilomonas,

and the same as the cytoplasmic body in Zetramutus. During

mitosis its history is remarkably similar to that of the Wedben-

korper as described by Schaudinn (96) in the case of Parameba.

I think therefore that there can be no doubt that the sphere in

Noctiluca, the Nebenkorper in Parameba, the cytoplasmic body

in 7etramitus, and the intra-nuclear body of Awglena, Chilomo-

nas and allied forms are all analogous structures and have the

same physiological part to play in the activities of the cell.

The sphere in Nocéeluca however possesses an element dur-

ing division which has hitherto not been found in the corre-

sponding intra-nuclear or cytoplasmic bodies described above.

This element is a distinct centrosome which was first described

for Noctiluca by Ishikawa and the presence of which I have

demonstrated beyond question. In addition to the centro-

somes furthermore there is a second set of fibers—the mantle-

fibers—which connect the chromosomes with the centrosomes ;

nor have these been found in the simpler nuclei described above.

A number of the Protozoa agree with octiluca in the history

of the chromatin, and several observers (Gruber, Hertwig,

Brauer) have described the breaking down of large chromatin

reservoirs or “‘ nucleoli’ as they have been erroneously called.

When we come to consider the nuclei of the Ciliata and the

Suctoria we are met by a new difficulty. The nuclei are di-

morphic, and the two forms differ as much in structure as they

undoubtedly do in function. I have no new observations to

PROTOZOAN NUCLEI. 393

record on the structure of micro- and macronuclei, but it is

possible that the facts given above may throw some light on

their origin. A number of theories have been advanced to ex~-

plain the origin of the micronucleus and the aberrant type of

nuclei in the Infusoria in general. The usual form of theory is

that the two types gradually arose by differentiation of a prim-

itive bi-nucleated form, one of the nuclei becoming the micro-

nucleus, the other the macronucleus (Butschli, Lauterborn, etc).

A serious objection to this theory is that the macronucleus is

formed from one of the subdivisions of the micronucleus at

each conjugation. Schaudinn suggested in his paper on Fara-

meba (’96) that the micronucleus and macronucleus of the In-

fusoria might have arisen from the WVedenkérper and nucleus

respectively of forms like Parameba. The possession of chro-

matin by the micronucleus is a serious obstacle to this theory,

and yet the important part which the micronucleus plays in re-

production makes Schaudinn’s suggestion valuable. If pure

hypothesis be allowed it might be conceived that the micronu-

cleus represents the cytoplasmic body of forms like 7etramutus

and Parameba plus a certain amount of chromatin while the

macronucleus represents the nucleus with the remnants of chro-

matin minus the essential cytoplasmic body. The cytoplasmic

body which appears to be essential to reproduction as shown

by its universal presence, is found, in most cases, in only one

of the nuclei, which persists, while the other degenerates.

GENERAL CONCLUSION.

Enough has been given above, I believe, to show that a type-

form of nucleus can be found to which the nuclei of the various

groups of Protozoa can be compared; divergent forms being

explained as modifications of this type. Such a nucleus can

be described in brief as consisting of two distinct substances,

one of which acts as an ‘‘attraction’’ center, the other as chro-

matin in the form of granules. From this primitive type two

lines seem to have developed, in one of which the attraction cen-

ter remains outside of the nucleus (Voctiluca, Paramaba) while

394 CALKINS.

in the other it is intra-nuclear (Euflagellata). The significance

of the central granule as an attraction-center in the case of -v-

glena was early recognized by Butschli (’87), Blockmann (’94),

Keuten (’95), Lauterborn (95) and others who saw in it a prim-

itive centrosome. Hertwig more recently ('96) accepted the

idea and explained the central! body in Euglena, together with

the large spheres in Vocti/uca and the pole-plates found in various

Protozoa as centrosomes of the type observed by himself in sea-

urchin eggs after treatment with various salts. I have shown

above, however, that the sphere in Voctiluca, the cytoplasmic

body of Zetramitus, the Nebenkorper of Parameba and the in-

tra-nuclear body of Chilomonas, Euglena and allied forms are an-

alogous structures and that they have the same physiological

function to play in the activity of the cell. But it has also been

shown that there is a true centrosome in the sphere of Voctluca.

The intra-nuclear body of /wzg/ena therefore cannot be called a

centrosome as the above-named observers have designated it,

and cannot be compared with the centrosome of the Metazoa.

It is comparable however with the cytoplasmic bodies of Para-

maba, of Noctluca, and therefore with the attraction-sphere of

metazoan nuclei. Moreover, this element seems to arise in the

simplest cases as a cytoplasmic structure and independently of

chromatin or nucleus (Zetramitus). It appears therefore that

Boveri's original conception of an independent cellular substance,

the archoplasm, holds good in the case of the Protozoa. By

considering the intra- or extra-nuclear body of Protozoa as

archoplasm in the form of an attraction sphere, rather than as a

centrosome, the various conflicting views in regard to these

structures can be more or less brought together. By this view

can be explained the origin and significance of the central spindle

of the Metazoa (cf. Centrodesmus of Heidenhain); the origin of

spindles without centrosomes in the higher plants (cf. Stras-

burger’s Aznoplasma); and, to some extent, the various inter-

pretations of the function, origin and fate of the centrosome.

According to this view the centrosome is originally of minor

importance, the sphere alone being functional as an attraction

center. The centrosome appears to be of later origin, although

PROTOZOAN NUCLEI. 39a.

even in the higher tissues, as Flemming (’97) suggests, it is

apparently not an organ of primary importance, but an organ

which may be present in connection with cell-divisions, although

not necessary for it.

There is also good evidence in this study of primitive nuclei

to show that the common type offers an explanation of the

changes which the constituents of the metazoan nucleus undergo

during and preparatory to a division. Stated briefly this idea

may be expressed as follows: (1) Before forming chromosomes

the chromatin material of the metazoan nucleus is distributed

in the nucleus in the form of minute chromatin granules, a stage

representing the ancestral condition which in flagellates and

lower plants is permanent ; (2) the chromatin granules (Brauer,

’93 Ascaris) secondarily fuse to form distinct bodies—the.

chromosomes—of definite form and number for each species ;

(3) the chromatin is in close connection with the kinetic center

(centrosome or centrosphere plus central spindle), to accom-.

plish this connection the nuclear membrane disappears (in most

Protozoa the attraction sphere is inside the nuclear membrane

and so in constant connection with the chromatin; in other

forms of Protozoa where the attraction sphere is extra-nuclear

as in Noctluca and Parameba the membrane disappears on the

side of the nucleus nearest the sphere—/octi/wca—or there is

no membrane at all—/aramw@da). In all cases the chromatin

at the time of division is collected around or between the spindle

fibers, or in case of Protozoa, the attraction-sphere, possibly to

ensure a more perfect division of this important substance. |

SUMMARY OF OBSERVATIONS AND CONCLUSIONS.

1. Metazoan and protozoan nuclei cannot be strictly homolo-

gized, but it can be shown that an intermediate series of forms

connect them.

2. The nuclei of Protozoa are not all of the same type and in

some forms they may possibly be absent. The simplest struc-

ture is the distributed nucleus, consisting of isolated chromatin

granules scattered about the cell.

396 CALKINS.

3. A higher type is shown by the ‘‘intermediate”’ nuclei,

where the chromatin granules are massed together in a compact

form with or without a nuclear membrane (most Euflagellates).

4. Typical nuclei of the metazoan type are uncommon among

the Protozoa, but are occasionally found.

5. Nuclear differentiation in Protozoa is closely connected

with an attraction-sphere or active agent in division. In nuclei

of the distributed type this is an indefinite faintly staining cyto-

plasmic mass in the vicinity of which the scattered chromatin

granules collect previous to division and about which they are

grouped during division. In nuclei of the ‘“‘intermediate’’ type

the attraction-sphere is intra-nuclear, definite in form, deeply

staining and active, and chromatin granules are massed about

it either permanently (Syzura, Chilomonas, Englenotds, etc.) or

only during division (Parameba), and with or without a nuclear

membrane. In higher types of nuclei the attraction-sphere is no

longer intra-nuclear, but this position of vantage is taken by the

central spindle during division (oct/uca and many Metazoa).

6. The intra-nuclear body of Awg/ena and other allied forms is

equivalent to the attraction-sphere and not to the centrosome of

the metazoa.

7. Chromosome-formation is first seen in the flagellates in

the form of rods which arise by the union of the previously scat-

tered chromatin granules. They form in typical though primi-

tive metazoan manner in Wocti/uca and Luglypha and all Metazoa

pass through these stages in preparing for mitosis.

CoLuMBIA UNIVERSITY, April, 1898.

PROIPCALOAN NUCLEL 397

LITERATURE.

794, Blochmann. Ueber die Kerntheilung bei Luglena. rol.

Cent., XIV, 1894.

*93, Brauer, A. Zur Kenntniss der Spermatogenese von Ascaris

megalocephala. A. M. A., XLII.

’*87, Butschli, O. Protozoa. Bronn’s Theirreich.

°85, Butschli, O. Einige Bemerkung iiber gewisse Organization

verhaltnis der sog. Cilio-flagellata. Morph. Jahrb., X, 1885.

’90, Biitschli, O. Ueber den Bau der Bacterien und verwandten

Organismen. Leipzig, 1890. ;

*96, Butschli, O. Weitere Ausfiihrungen iiber den Bau der Cyan-

ophyceen und Bacterien. Leipzig, 1896.

’*98, Flemming, W. Zelle, in Merkel & Bonnet’s Lrgednisse,

1897.

°83, Gruber, A. Kerntheilung bei einige Protozoen. 27. W. Z.,

38, 1883.

°84, Gruber, A. Ueber Kern- und Kerntheilung bei den Protozoen.

Oe WZ... 40, 1884.

’96, Hertwig, R. Ueber die Entwicklung des unbefruchteten

Seeigeleies. Festschrift f. C. Gegenbaur.

"94, Ishikawa. Studies on Reproductive Elements. Vocteluca

miliaris, etc. Journ. Coll. of Sctence, Imp. Univ. Japan, Vol. VI,

1894.

"95, Keuten, J. Kerntheilung von Euglena viridis Ehrg. Z.W. Z.,

60, 1895.

°95, Lauterborn, R. Protozoen-Studien ; I Kerntheilung bei Cera-

tum hirundinella. Z. W.Z., 59, 1895.

94, Schaudinn, F. Ueber Kerntheilung, etc., bei Ameba crys-

talligera. Akad. W. Berlin, 1894.

’96, Schaudinn, F. Ueber die Zeugungskreis von Paramedba

Litthard. Sitzb. Berlin Akad., 1896.

’98, Schewiakoff, W. Ueber die Karyokinetische Kerntheilung

der Luglypha alveolata. Morph. Jahrb., 13, 1888.

’90, Zacharias. Ueber die Zellen der Cyanophyceen. - Bor.

Zeitung, 1890.

Figs.

Fig.

Pig.

Fig.

Fig:

Figs.

Fig.

Figs.

PLATE: xy

PROTOZOAN NUCLEI.

1-4. <A flagellate Protozoan of genus Tetramitus,

showing ‘‘ distributed nucleus’’—(N), and a

compact alveolus—(A). See page .

. 5. The same form of Tetramitus undergoing aierant

See page

Ig. 6. Microglena pinichiera. Bs = Eye spot. -See page

Synura uvella. See page are el

3 to. Chilomonas cylindrica Euc. See page

11. Trachelomonas lagenella. See page .

12. Trachelomonas hispida var. A. See page

13. Trachelomonas hispida var. B. See page

14. Trachelomonas volvocina. See page . ,

15. Macro- and micronuclei of Stylonichia. See page

16. Amoeba proteus. See page

17-19. Euglena viridis. See page .

20. Ceratium fuscus. See page .

21. Peridinium divergens. See page

22-26. Noctiluca miliaris. See page

( 400 )

382

383

384

385

356

388

389

386

390

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI.

/ ’ a >

H — ae ey, ~

PLATE

XXXV.

[ANNALS N. Y. AcAp. Sci., XI, No. 17, pp. 401 to 403, October 13, 1898. ]

A SIMPLE AND CONVENIENT PHOSPHOROSCOPE.

WALLACE GOOLD LEVISON.

(Read April 4, 1898.)

In Wright’s Z’gfz' there is a description of a phosphoroscope

designed for lecture illustration which is attributed to Professor

John Tyndall. It consists of a cylinder set in revolution by a

crank mechanism before a slit in a light-tight box, through

which the light from an electric arc lamp enclosed in the box

falls upon the cylinder. The cylinder being coated with

coarsely pulverized uranium glass, the audience, in a dark room

observes a band of green light across the cylinder the inten-

sity of which increases in proportion to the rapidity of its revolu-

tion. This is due to light absorbed by the uranium glass as it

passes the slit, and given forth so deliberately as to be still es-

caping during the time required for more than a half revolution

of the cylinder.

Having occasion to use some such simple contrivance in a

recent investigation upon this property” of minerals, I con-

structed a modified form of this instrument consisting of a hol-

low pasteboard cylinder, set in revolution by an electromotor,

whereby much greater speed is attained than by a mechanical

device. Instead of coating the cylinder directly with the min-

eral to be examined I dust it in coarse or fine powder upon the

surface of sheets of paper brushed over with hot gelatine.

These fold around the cylinder and fasten with rubber bands,

and are, therefore, interchangeable at pleasure. In other cases

I simply fix a single piece of a mineral, either transparent or

opaque, upon the surface of the cylinder. At the great speed

1Wright (L.), Zzght, London, 1882.

2 For which the term photofluorescence, in view of the recent experiments of

Wiedemann and Schmidt seems to me best adapted.

(401 )

402 LEVISON.

attained by the electromotor, bands of light are thus obtained

from certain minerals which afford perhaps a shorter afterglow

than uranium glass. In one or the other of these ways I have

obtained a band of green light from willemite, from Franklin,

N. J., and a band of crimson light from corundum, from near

Franklin, Macon Co., N. C. I have no doubt that other min-

erals affording too short an afterglow to be at all pronounced

with the cylinder revolved by a hand power motor, would be

effective with my light cylinder set in rotation at the high speed

of an electromotor.

By further modification the apparatus may be used in two

other ways. The hollow pasteboard cylinder employed is

closed by a solid wooden block at the end which is fixed upon

the axle of the electric motor. The other end may be closed

with a paper cover, or left open; in the former case I attach to

the inside of this cover’ a spring forceps, by means of which an

object such as a diamond, a ruby, or a piece of willemite may

be held exactly in the center of the cylinder. The cylinder is

provided with a side opening through which the light from a

lantern condenser may be focused upon the object in the center

of the cylinder when the opening is on the side away from the

observer, and through which the side of the object just pre-

viously illuminated, may be seen by the observer wholly

screened from any light whatever, when the opening is on the

side of the cylinder toward the observer. If the object be thus

examined in a totally dark room and affords no afterglow, noth-

ing whatever is seen; but if it affords an afterglow, it becomes

visible owing to the persistence of vision, with a characteristic

colored light when the cylinder rotates with sufficient speed,

and its brilliancy increases as the speed of rotation of the

cylinder further increases.

In the latter case a similar spring forceps supported upon a

suitable stand is introduced through the open end of the cylinder

to hold the object, which, therefore, does not partake of the

motion of the cylinder. The first form is adapted to both trans-

1 Modification adopted since the paper was read. Exhibited at the Annual Re-

ception of the Academy [Physics, No. 7], April 13, 14, 1897.

SIMPLE PHOSPHOROSCOPE. 403

parent and opaque objects, the latter more particularly to trans-

parent objects which, being at rest, are more distinctly seen ; an

advantage in the case of cut gems.

In one or the other of these ways I have obtained beautiful

results from uranium glass, cut rubies, semi-transparent corun-

dum and willemite. I have not yet had an opportunity to try

a diamond affording an afterglow.

It is evident that both opaque and transparent substances may

be examined by this instrument, either fixed upon the outside

of the cylinder, or held within it, as described ; and in either

case its indications are quite sensitive, inasmuch as it may be

given so high a speed that only a very small fraction of a second

elapses after the object is illuminated and before its presentation

in absolute darkness to the eye of the observer. Moreover, in

either case, one object may be substituted for another quickly

and easily, and the brilliancy obtained from some minerals, es-

pecially rubies, is quite surprising.

as ets

nae i

iin |

. we,

Bai

[ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sci., XI, No. 18, pp. 405 to 406, October 13, 1898. ]

PHOTOGRAPHED OCUEAR MICROMETERS.

WALLACE GOOLD LEVISON.

(Read April 4, 1898. )

Owi1nc probably to the difficulty of starting and stopping rul-

ing machines at cross lines without overrunning them, it has

been found difficult to obtain eye piece micrometers ruled in

squares, particularly of the design now so much used in water

supply investigations for counting and measuring micro-organ-

isms.

It occurred to me that these micrometers might be made

easily by photography, and as a test experiment I made some

of them by the ordinary simple dry-plate method with some

precautions to ensure clear films. An outline drawing 14 centi-

meters square was first made with India ink and an ordinary

drawing pen upon glass coated with gelatin, and one-half the

square in each direction was ruled in five equal parts. The

small central square formed by the crossing of these lines was

then divided by cross lines into twenty-five equal areas accord-

ing to the plan given in Prof. Albert R. Leed’s report on the

Brooklyn water.'

This drawing was photographed down by an ordinary one-

quarter portrait lens with small diaphragm stop, to about five

centimeters square on a Stanley dry plate, care being taken to

obtain as nearly as possible a black negative with very clear

lines. For each micrometer this is again reduced by the same

lens to a square of seven millimeters on lantern slide plate, care

being taken to develop the lines black, keep the film transparent

and avoid scratches.

1A. R. Leeds, Report on the Brooklyn Water, published by the Department of

City Works of Brooklyn, N. Y., 1897.

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. Sci., XI., October 13, 1898—27.

( 405 )

406 LEVISON.

The plates thus obtained are cut in circles a little larger than

the recess in the eye piece diaphragm in which they are to be

used. A cover class is then applied with balsam and xylol and

baked for several days until the cement is hard and dry. The

circle is finally accurately centered on a lathe and ground toa

true circle of the exact size of the recess in the eye piece dia-

phragm.

In making these photographs the action of halation will cause

the lines to be much thinner in the negative than in the original

drawing and thicker in the finished positive than in the nega-

tive, and moreover it will cause a peculiar thickening where the

lines intersect unless the precautions known to expert photog-

raphers are employed at each step to counteract this peculiarity

of the photographic process.

But even if not wholly obviated, this does not materially in-

terfere with the practical utility of the micrometer. I have no

doubt that very accurate and beautiful micrometers may be thus

made by the so-called process method which is a wet plate

method used for making photo engravings as it affords jet black

lines on a particularly clear ground. The lines as I have made

them are thicker perhaps than is necessary, but this does not

appear to interfere with the use of the micrometer, providing

distances are taken from one side of a line to the same side of

the next line, and so on throughout the scale.

Eye ptece micrometers made by the simple method I have

tried appear to be satisfactory for use with any objective, as re-

gards transparency. In fact they seem in some respects to be

more satisfactory than ruled micrometers, especially in the cir-

cumstance that the lines are black and always distinctly visible

and that they can be made with facility of any design desired.

For the latter reason they may be valuable not only for meas-

uring micro-organisms but also any class of microscopic objects

whatever, as for example the areas of the crystals or grains of

minerals in thin sections of rocks and building stones and

thereby perhaps estimating their relative proportions.

[ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sci., XI, No. 19, pp. 407 to 413, October 13, 1898. ]

NOTES ON BERMUDA ECHINODERMS.

HusBeErRtT LYMAN CLARK.

(Read May 9g, 1898.)

Tue collection of echinoderms made in Bermuda in the sum-

mer of 1897 by the New York University party, has been very

kindly placed in my hands by Professor Bristol, for examina-

tion. Although the collection is in itself'a small one, it is of no

little interest, as our present knowledge of the echinoderms of

Bermuda is very incomplete. So far as I can discover, no at-

tempt has hitherto been made to prepare a complete list of them,

so that it has seemed worth while to add to the species in the

New York University collection, others which have previously

been recorded from the islands, thus making as far as possible a

catalogue of the littoral echinoderms of Bermuda. In 1888,

Professor Heilprin, of the Philadelphia Academy of Sciences,

published in the Proceedings of that Academy, a list of the echin-

oderms, which he and a party of students had collected in Ber-

muda that summer. The list contains twenty species, six holo-

thurians, six echinoids, six ophiurids and two asteroids. Of the

six holothurians, four are described as new to science. The

New York University collection contains only eleven species,

but of these at least three are additions to Professor Heilprin’s

list. The principal interest of the collection, however, lies in

the light which it throws on Professor Heilprin’s ‘‘new”’ species

of holothurians, and on one of Professor Verrill’s species of

starfish.

There are only two species of ASTEROIDs in the collection, but

both are of interest. One of them, of which ten specimens lie

before me, is the common starfish of the Bermudas. One of

its peculiar features is the great variation in the number of arms,

one specimen having nine, five having seven and the other four

( 407 )

408 CLARK.

six, while Professor Heilprin reports having found one or two

specimens with only five. The specimens I have agree in every

particular with the most careful descriptions of Asterias tenui-

spina Lamk., from the Mediterranean and eastern Atlantic, and, I

have no doubt, belong to that species. Verrill has separated

the Asterias of Bermuda from A. tenuispina as A. atlantica, on

the ground that the proportions of the arms are slightly differ-

ent and that there are no large single pedicellariz. Sladen, in

his. report on the starfishes of the “Challencer ~ cellectiong}

identifies the only Asé¢evias from Bermuda as A. ¢enuispina and

questions the authenticity of Verrill’s species. In the specimens

before me the proportions of the arms vary considerably and

large single pedicellarize occur in the ambulacral furrow as in A.

tenuispina. Accordingly it would appear that A. et/antica must

be regarded asa synonym of that species. In several of the New

York University specimens the prominent spines on the upper

surface are rather unusually colored, being strongly tinged with

violet. The other starfish, of which there are five specimens in

the collection, is Asterina folium Ltk., a small pentagonal

species found closely adhering to the under side of broken

pieces of rock. They are very light colored, almost white, but

one is strongly tinged with blue. ‘They agree in all particulars

with specimens of the same species from Jamaica.

The two Opuiurins are of no especial interest, though one of

them has not previously been taken in Bermuda. This is Ophiura

appressa Say, of which there are three specimens in the collec-

tion. They were kindly identified for me and compared with

Jamaica specimens by my friend, Mr. Caswell Grave, of the Johns

Hopkins University. Of the other species, Ophionereis reticu-

fata Ltk., there is a large number of specimens. It seems to

be the common brittle-star of the islands.

The four Ecuinoips are all reasonably common in suitable

places, Professor Bristol tells me, and have all been recorded from

Bermuda before. They are Diadema setusum Gray, Lchinometra

subangularis Leske, Hipponoé esculenta Leske and oxopneustes

variegatus Lamk. Anyone familiar with the latter urchin as it ap-

pears in Jamaica or along our southern coast would never recog-

BERMUDA ECHINODERMS. 409

nize it in these handsome specimens from Bermuda. A close

examination, however, shows that the great difference in color is

only one of degree. Specimens from Jamaica are green with white

markings and with whitish or greenish spines, the latter being

often tipped with violet. Now in the Bermuda J/ovxopneustes,

violet has become the predominant color, so that all trace of

green and white variegation has disappeared. The test has be-

come very dark and the spines are a bright purple violet. This

tendency towards violet coloration of spines has already been

mentioned in connection with the starfish, Asfevzas, and it is

also quite marked in one of the other sea-urchins, Echinometra.

Specimens of this form from Jamaica are usually reddish-brown

of some shade but the spines are often greenish, tipped with

violet. Bermuda specimens show this violet coloration of the

spines much more plainly. It would be interesting to know

what may be the cause of this tendency toward violet among the

Bermuda echinoderms ; but I have no explanation to offer.

There are only three species of HOLOTHURIANs in the collection

but all of these are of considerable interest because of the light

which they throw on the “ new”’ species described by Professor

Heilprin. Professor Bristol's students report that there are two

large species of Stichopus common at the Bermudas, and that

they are readily distinguishable from each other. This statement

agrees with Professor Heilprin’s, who has described and figured

each of them as a new species. One of them is black and was

called S. daboli, but I am sorry to say that of this species there

is not a specimen in the collection before me. The other one

is less common, is markedly different in color, and was given

the name S. ranthomela Heilprin. Of this species, I have two

specimens in hand, one of which agrees perfectly in color with

Professor Heilprin’s description, while the other is much darker.

It needed but a glance to see that they are the common West

Indian form of Svchopus, though what that form is to be called

it is not easy to decide. A more careful examination of the Ber-

muda specimens has shown that they agree in all particulars

with specimens from Jamaica. After a careful examination of

hundreds of specimens of Stichopus from Jamaica, both living

410 CLARK.

and alcoholic, I am convinced that specific differences cannot be

distinguished in this genus with any accuracy except in living

specimens, and furthermore that coloration is so variable that it

is almost useless as a standard in classification. Four species of

Stichopus have been described from the West Indian area, all of

them from alcoholic material, by men who have never visited

the West Indies, and they are separated from each other by char-

acters which are seen in a large series of specimens to intergrade

in inextricable confusion. For the present however, the com-

monest West Indian species may bear the name S. 77007, be-

stowed by Semper, and Heilprin’s S. aanthomela is doubtless the

same. According to the latter the Bermuda form has eighteen

tentacles, but both of the specimens before me have twenty,

while one Jamaica specimen has nineteen and another twenty-

one. The normal number of tentacles in S#chopus is however

twenty, and any other number is merely an individual peculiarity.

The second species of holothurian from Bermuda in my

hands is a small one, occurring under broken slabs of rock, and

of this there are six specimens. I have compared them with

more than a dozen species of small holothurians collected in Ja-

maica in similar situations, but they do not agree with any of

them satisfactorily. After some hesitation, I have decided to

refer them provisionally to Ludwig’s Hlolothuria surinamensis, as

they approach nearest to that species, though the differences are

pretty clearly marked. I think it probable that a larger series

of specimens will show the Bermuda form to be a new species.

Professor Heilprin collected five specimens of a small holothu-

rian, which he refers to 7. foridana Pourt., but neither in his

description nor his plate does he refer to the small rosette-like

calcareous bodies, so characteristic of that species and its allies.

If they are not present in his specimens, I should think it at

least possible that these are the same species as the ones before

me. The last of the three species in the New York University

collection is obviously either a 7hyrne or a representative of

that section of Cucumaria to which Lampert gave the name

Semperia. There are two specimens about 6 cm. long and

agreeing in all particulars with each other. After a careful

BERMUDA ECHINODERMS. 411

examination I refer them without hesitation to Ludwig’s Czcw-

maria punctata, described from a specimen collected in Barba-

does. In a few details they differ from that species: the

color being apparently different, the stone canal free, only

one polian vessel, and the- anus armed with five small cal-

careous teeth. The calcareous buttons are so numerous

in some places that the skin is very hard, the layer of but-

tons being .4 mm. thick. Professor Heilprin describes from a

single specimen a new species of Cucumaria which he calls

Semperia bermudicnsis. While I have no way of proving that

this is the same species as the specimens before me, the differ-

ences which he points out between it and Ludwig’s C. punctata

do not seem to me important, and I strongly suspect that 5S.

bermudicnsis Heilp. ought to be put down asa synonym of C.

punctata Ludw. Iam ata loss to understand what Professor

Heilprin means by the ‘long back processes’”’ of the calcareous

ring ‘for the attachment of the powerful retractor muscles.”’

So far as I know the retractor muscles of Cucumaria and

Thyrne are never attached to the posterior prolongations of the

radial pieces of the calcareous ring but always to azéerior pro-

longations. The latter are quite long in Cucumaria punctata.

In the light of these facts, I append the following revised list

of the littoral echinoderms of.Bermuda, as complete as I have

been able to make it. It does not pretend to include the deeper

water species collected in the vicinity of the islands by the

* ehallencer.”

CVATALOGUE OF THE. LITTORAL ECHINO—

DEKMS OF BERMUDA.

ASTEROIDS.

1. Asterias tenuispina Lamk. = A. atlantica Verrill. Com-

mon. Collected by all parties.

2. Asterina folium Lrx. Not very common. One speci-

men collected by the “ Challenger’ and five by the New York

University party.

412 CLARK.

3. Linckia guildingii Gray. Apparently not common.

Recorded by Sladen in the ‘‘ Challenger’’ report and by Pro-

fessor Heilprin.

OPHIURIDS.

4. Ophiactis mulleri Lrx. Two specimens collected by the

Philadelphia party.

5. Ophiocoma crassispina Say. One specimen taken by

the Philadelphia party.

6. Ophiocoma pumila Lrx. Collected by the ‘ Chal-

lenger ’’ and by the Philadelphia party.

_ 7 Ophiomyxa flaccida Lrx. One specimen taken by the

Philadelphia party. |

8. Ophionereis reticulata Lrx. Abundant. Recorded by

all parties.’

g. Ophiostigma isacantha Say. Two specimens taken by

the Philadelphia party,

10. Ophiura appressa Say. Three specimens taken by ‘the

New York University party.

ECHINOIDS.

11. Cidaris tribuloides Br. Reported common by the

Philadelphia party.

12. Diadema setosum Gray. Common. Collected by all

parties. |

13. Hipponoe esculenta Lreske. Not uncommon. Col-

lected by all.

14. Echinometra subangularis Leskr. Common. Col-

lected by all.

15. Toxopneustes variegatus Lamx. Common. Collected

by all.

16. Mellita sexforis Ac. Said to be common, but not

actually collected by either the Philadelphia or New York

parties. Recorded from Bermuda by Agassiz.

1'7. Echinoneus semilunaris Lamx. Reported from Ber-

muda by Agassiz in his “‘ Revision of the Echini”’ and in the

‘“ Challenger” ‘report:

BERMUDA ECHINODERMS. 413

18. Brissus unicolor Kr. Reported from Bermuda by

Agassiz.

HOLOTHURIANS.

19. Cucumaria punctata Lupw. Two specimens collected

by the New York University party.

20. Cucumaria (Semperia) bermudiensis Herirp. A very

doubtful species described from a single specimen taken by the

Philadelphia party.

21. Holothuria floridana Pourr. Five specimens collected

by the Philadelphia party.

22. Holothuria captiva Lupw. Two specimens collected

by the Philadelphia party.

23. Holothuria abbreviata Herirpr. A very doubtful species

described from a single specimen, probably an abnormal indi-

vidual of the preceding species, collected by the Philadelphia

party.

24. Holothuria surinamensis (?) Lupw. Six specimens,

collected by the New York University party, are referred to

this species with much hesitation.

25. Stichopus diaboli Herirp. Reported as very common.

26. Stichopus mobii Semper. = S. xanthomela HEIrp.

Reported as quite common.

27. Stichopus haytiensis Semper. Reported from Ber-

muda by Dr. Theel froma single specimen collected by the

“Challenger.” I .am inclined to think it may be the same

species as the preceding.

28. Synapta vivipara Orerst. Recorded from Bermuda by

Dr. Theel in the ‘‘ Challenger”’ report under the name SS. fecta.

Dr. Theel also has numerous other specimens from the Ber-

mudas.

Of the above twenty-eight species, four or five of the holo-

thurians are in doubt, so that the need of larger and more com-

plete collections is very obvious. Of the remaining twenty-two

or three species, all but one or two are distinctly West Indian,

so that it is only fair to expect the discovery of many more, by

more careful and systematic collecting.

: 2

Sy Pe ms |

oe (=e be

a 7 -_

Ss 4

[ANNALS N. Y. Acan. Sci., XI, No, 20, pp. 415 to 430, October 13, 1898. ]

ADDITIONS TO THE PALAAOBOTANY OF THE CRE-

TACEOUS FORMATION ON STATEN

ISEAND.. NO. iF

ARTHUR HOLLICK.

(Read May 16, 1808.)

[PLrates XXXVI-XXXVIII.]

IN two papers upon this subject previously published our

knowledge of the Cretaceous flora of Staten Island was brought

up to the year 1892." Since that time considerable additional

material has been collected, including several species not before

recorded from the island, which have been the subject of notes

and memoranda read before the Natural Science Association of

Staten Island and published from time to time in its Proceedings.

The object of the present paper is to describe this material as

a whole and also to indicate certain modifications of views pre-

viously expressed, due to information acquired since the other

contributions to the subject were issued.

All the specimens were found in hardened ferruginous clay

concretions or shaly fragments, in connection with the terminal

moraine. None of the specimens was found in place, although

they must have been derived from Cretaceous strata in the im-

mediate vicinity, either on the island or on the adjacent main-

land. Some of those from Tottenville and Prince’s Bay may

have been from the latter source, but the Arrochar specimens

were undoubtedly native to the island, although disturbed from

their original position.

It was previously taken for granted that all the cretaceous

1The Palzontology of the Cretaceous Formation on Staten Island. 7Zyans. WN.

Y. Acad. Sct., XI (1892), 96-104; Pl. I-IV. p

Additions to the Palzeobotany of the Cretaceous Formation on Staten Island.

Ibid., XII (1892), 28-39; Pl. I-IV.

( 415 )

416 HOLTAGCK.

strata on Staten Island were continuations of those at Perth

Amboy and Woodbridge, and that the fossil plants found in

them or derived from them would prove to be identical with

those of the mainland. Such, however, has not been found to

be the case, and this fact has seemed to indicate that some of

the strata from which the Staten Island plants were derived

may represent a different and presumably a higher member of

the Amboy clay series than do those represented at the New

Jersey localities mentioned.

Many of the species are identical, but a number of those

found on Staten Island have not yet been discovered in the

New Jersey clays, although these have been quite extensively

exploited and hundreds of specimens have been collected from

them ; and further, some of the species most common in New

Jersey are conspicuous by their absence or rarity on Staten

Island.

As is well known the Cretaceous clays of New Jersey ex-

tend across the State with a general northeast and southwest

strike and a dip towards the southeast of about fifty feet to the

mile. Those which outcrop furthest to the northwest are

therefore the lowest or oldest of the series. If a geological

map of New Jersey be examined and the trend of the clay out-

crops be theoretically extended on to Staten Island, it may be

readily seen that the lower beds, represented by those at Wood-

bridge, Sayreville, Perth Amboy and possibly South Amboy,

would strike the western shore of Staten Island in the vicinity

of Tottenville and Kreischerville, while the upper beds, repre-

sented by those in the vicinity of Cheesequakes creek, would

strike along the southern shore of the island from Tottenville

to Arrochar.

This probability is further strengthened by the fact that marl

bed fossils have been found in the moraine at the latter locality,

showing that strata even higher than the upper members of the

clay series are or once were represented there.

From a consideration of these facts and other similar ones in

connection with the Cretaceous clays on Staten Island, Long

Island, Block Island and Martha’s Vineyard, the name ‘ Island

CRETACEOUS FORMATION ON STATEN ISLAND. 417

Series ’’ was given by Dr. Lester F. Ward to the strata repre-

sented on these islands. !

The ‘Island Series’? would therefore lie above the Amboy

clays as described by Newberry,’ and below those of the clay

marls at Clifford, as described by me in a recent paper.’

The sequence of the strata and their relations to the localities

where they are prominently exposed may be understood from

the following table :

Geological Horizons. Strata. New Jersey Localities.

Matawan. Cliffwood.

Island Series. | Morgans. (?)

South Amboy.

Perth Amboy.

Upper Potomac

(Amboy Clays ). Albirupean Series.

Sayreville.

Woodbridge.

? (*« Tron Ore Series”? )

Middle Potomac. Acquia Creek Series.

ae Not known in New

Mount Vernon Series. Jersey.

Basal Potomac. _ Rappahannock Series.

James River Series.

Whether or not all of Dr. Ward’s conclusions will stand, ap-

pears to me, will depend upon future investigation. Thus far I

have failed to find the equivalent of the Island Series on the

mainland of New Jersey in the region where it should theoretic-

ally occur, nor have the ferruginous concretions and fragments,

by which the series is characterized on the islands, been found

there, and the fact of their absence on the mainland, and their

presence on the islands only in connection with the terminal

1 The Potomac Formation, 15th Ann. Rept. U. S. Geol. Surv., 335, 330:

2 The Flora of the Amboy Clays, A/onoy. U. S. Geol. Surv., XXVI.

’The Cretaceous Clay Marl Exposure at Cliffwood, N. J., 7rans. W. Y. Acad.

Sct., XVI (1897), 124-136.

418 HOLLICE.

moraine, has led me to think that they are not characteristic of

the series except as representing fragments of clay strata which

were originally in a plastic condition but which have become

hardened by oxidation after having been torn up and made part

of the morainal material. This view is further strengthened by

the fact that these concretions and fragments may be found in

the moraine in every stage of development from masses of soft

clay with only a thin shell of limonite on the outside to those

which are hardened throughout. Many of the hardest frag-

ments also exhibit beautifully defined planes of shearing or

slipping, evidently accomplished before the process of harden-

ing had been completed. In several localities, notably at Glen

Cove, Long Island, and at Gay Head, Martha’s Vineyard, the

shaly fragments and concretions occur in the Cretaceous clay

strata, but these strata are greatly contorted and have been sub-

jected to similar conditions to those which have wrought the

changes noted in the mixed morainal material. The disturbance

of the strata would naturally expose them to the same oxidizing

influences and would cause portions of them to be converted

into hardened seams or assist in the formation of concretions.

So that until we find the strata upon the mainland with such

hardened seams, fragments or concretions in place and con-

taining representatives of the same flora, the most reasonable

explanation of their occurrence throughout the morainal region

of the islands would seem to be that it is due to oxidation

caused by the disturbance wrought there by glacial action.

CRETACEOUS PLANTS OF STATEN ISLAND.

In the following list Nos. 4, 5,8) 0; IO; 11, 12,904 15 ane

16 have not before been reported from Staten Island, and No.

12 represents a species here described for the first time.

1. Moriconia cyclotoxon Den. « Err.

(Plate XXXVI Figs.)

Moriconta cyclotoxon Deb. & Ett., Urwelt. Acrob. Kreidegeb.

Aachen und Maestricht, p. 59 (239), Pl. VII, Figs. 23-27.

Locality : Prince’s Bay, Staten Island.

CRETACEOUS FORMATION ON STATEN ISLAND, 419

2. Thinnfeldia Lesquereuxiana Heer.

(Plate XXXVI, Fig. 6.)

Thinnfeldia Lesgquereuxiana Heer, Fl. Foss. Arct., Vol. VI,

Pepto: Ip. 37, Pl. XLIV, Figs. o, 10% Pl. XLVI, Figs. 1-11,

I2a and b.

Locality : Tottenville, Staten Island.

3. Populus Harkeriana Leso. (?)

(Plate SX XVI, Fig. 3:)

Populus Harkeriana Lesq., Fl. Dak. Gr., p. 44, Pl. XLVI,

Fig. 4.

Although somewhat imperfect in outline, this specimen

appears to agree in all essential particulars with this species

and seems to warrant at least a provisional reference to it.

Locality : Tottenville, Staten Island.

4. Salix inzequalis News.

(Plate XX XVIII, Fig. 4a.)

Salix tnequalis Newb., Fl. Amboy Clays, p. 67, Pl. XVI,

Pies. i 4, G~ Pl XVII, Figs. 2—7.

Locality : Arrochar, Staten Island.

5. Myrica longa Herr.

(Plate XX XVII, Fig. 6.)

Proteotdes longus Heer, Fl. Foss. Arct. Vol. III (Kreidefl.), p.

Pie, Pi XXX, Fie Sb > PliX x Xi; Figs: 4,5.

Myrica longa Weer, tid., Vol. VI, Abth. IT, p. 65, Pl. X VIII,

Pieosop, bl woh ies 15-17 FLX XIII, Fig. 10; Pi.

ALY, Fig. ad.

Locality : Arrochar, Staten Island.

6. Ficus Woolsoni News. (?)

(rate XXXVI, Fig. 9.)

ficus Woolsont Newb., Fl. Amboy Clays, p. 70, Pl. XX, Fig.

3; Pl. XXUI, Figs. 1-6.

420 t1 OLETGR

It is with considerable hesitation that I have provisionally

referred this fragmentary specimen to this species. Fig. 6 of

Plate X XIII, seems, however, to approach it, quite closely. <A

similar specimen was also found in the clay at Kreischerville,

which I referred provisionally to the same species (Trans. N. Y.

Acad. Sei., Vol. XI1(1892), p. 33-7), Ui Fies 1 randsthere eam

be hardly any doubt that our two specimens represent one and

the same species.

Locality : Tottenville, Staten Island.

7. Proteoides daphnogenoides Herr.

(Plate XX XVI) Figss=3.)

Proteoides daphnogenoides Heer, Phyl. Cret. Nebraska, p. 17

Plt isso eno,

This species was identified in the Amboy clays of New Jersey

by Newberry and whether his specimens are correctly referred

or not, there can be no doubt of the identity of our specimens

with those from New Jersey. (See Fl. Amboy Clays, PI.

XM, Fies. 1, ae ae)

Locality : Tottenville, Staten Island.

8. Myrsine elongata News.

(Plate XX XVIII, Figs. 3, 4b and c.)

Myrsine elongata Newb., F1. Amboy Clays, p. 122, Pl. XXII,

Figs. I-3.

Locality : Arrochar, Staten Island.

g. Andromeda Parlatorii Heer.

(Plate XXXVIT Bigs)

Andromeda Parlatorit Heer, Phyl. Cret. Nebraska, p. 18, PI.

| igi uta se

For purposes of comparison the specimens figured by New-

berry (FL. Amboy. Clays, Pl: XX XT Wies*i-7 Piex i

Figs. 1, 2, 4, 5) are better than the type specimen figured by

CRETACEOUS FORMATION ON STATEN ISLAND, 421

Heer. This is particularly the case in regard to Figs. 2 and 4,

Pl. XX XI, above quoted.

Locality : Tottenville, Staten Island.

10. Hedera sp. ?

(Plate XX XVIII, Fig. 5.)

This specimen is too fragmentary for more than a generic

reference. It may possibly be a small specimen of //. primor-

dialis Sap., as depicted by Newberry in the Flora of the Amboy

Clays, Pl. XX XVII, Figs. 1-7.

Locality : Tottenville, Staten Island.

11. Aralia rotundiloba News. (?)

(Plate XX XVIII, Fig. 2.)

Arala rotundiloba Newb., Fl. Amboy Clays, p. 118, PI.

peeVill. Fis. 5; Pl. XXXVI, Pig. o.

The obliteration of the lobing in this specimen renders ac-

curate determination impossible. It may, perhaps, also be com-

pared with Cissites ingens Lesq. (Fl. Dak. Gr., Pl. XIX, Figs.

2, 2a), or with C. formosus Heer, as identified by Newberry.

(Fl. Amboy Clays, Pl. XLVII, Figs. 1-8.)

Locality : Tottenville, Staten Island.

12. Pistacia Aquehongensis n. sp.

(Plate XXXVI, Fig. 5.)

Leaf entire, linear-elliptical in outline, about 34 in. long by 4%

in. wide; nervation finely and uniformly pinnate, secondaries leav-

ing the midrib at a somewhat obtuse angle, closely parallel and con-

nected near the margin by cross nervation in a series of angles.

The specific name refers to ‘“ Aquehonga,” the Indian name

for Staten Island.

This leaf is closely similar to P. aquensis Sap. (Ann. Sci. Nat.,

Ser. V: Bot., Vol. XVIIF (1873), p. 105, Pl. XV, Figs. 1-24),

which, however, is a Tertiary species.

Locality : Tottenville, Staten Island.

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. Sci., December 17, 1898—28.

422 VIOLELICKS

13. Sapindus Morrisoni LEso.

(Plate XXXVI, Fig. 4.)

Sapindus Morrison: ‘esq. Ctet. & Vert. FL p33, ria avi

igs.“ 1, 2:

Locality : Prince’s Bay, Staten Island.

14..Sterculia Snowii Lesq. (?)

(Plate XX XVII, Fig. 4.)

Sterculia Snown Lesq. Fl. Dak. Gt.,.p. 183, Pl. XXX, Fic:

5; PY. XXXI,- Migs.-2,.03. Plea XXX aioe.

I—4. 3

This specimen is too fragmentary for more than provisional

reference.

Locality : Tottenville, Staten Island.

15. Sterculia sp. ?

(Plate: 22 vA rie 3s)

Locality : Tottenville, Staten Island.

16. Pterospermites modestus LEso.

(Plate XXX VIL. Fig.)

Pterospermites modestus Lesq. Fl. Dak. Gr., p. 186, Pl. LVIII,

Fig. +s.

Locality : Tottenville, Staten Island.

17. Magnolia longifolia News. (?)

(Plate XXX VAT io? 3,)

Magnolia longifolia Newb. Fl. Amboy Clays, p. 76, Pl. LV,

Pies .3 $45 ob Vie Piese 4

This specimen is evidently a fragment of a large leaf, with the

nervation of Magnolia, and its provisional reference to one of the

Amboy clay species seems to be justifiable.

Locality : Tottenville, Staten Island.

CRETACEOUS FORMATION ON STATEN ISLAND. 423

18. Dewalquea Groenlandica Herr. (?)

(Plate XXXVI, Fig. 7.)

Dewalquea Groenlandica Heer. Fl. Foss. Arct., Vol. VI,

oe Lt p87, Pl. Ae Bigs, 18, 10; Pl. XLII,, Figs. 5,

Pe LIV, Fie. 1's wa, Vol. Vil, p. 37, Pl. LXU,. Figs.

=..0.

The reference of our specimen to this species is questionable.

Amongst all of Heer’s figures the only one with which it can

be satisfactorily compared is Fig. 6, Pl. LXII, above quoted.

Nevertheless, as our specimen is apparently identical with those

provisionally referred to the species in the Flora of the Amboy

Siays (p: 1209, Pl. XI, Figs. 2, 3, 12), | have, thought it

best to retain the name.

Locality : Tottenville, Staten Island.

19. Tricalycites papyraceus Newb.

(PLEX Vil, Figs. 3,2.)

Incalycites papyraceus Newb., Fl. Amboy Clays, p. 132, Pl.

XLVI, Figs. 30-38.

Locality: Tottenville, Staten Island.

20. Rhizomorphs.

(EVI Fis: 5.)

I use the term Rhizomorph in the same sense as it was

originally used by the late Dr. J. I. Northrop, in describing

similar cylindrical structures in the coral rocks on the island of

Nassau. (Notes on the Geology of the Bahamas, Zrans. NV. Y.

Acad. Sc., Vol. X (1890), p. 16.) It has no connection with

the fungus genus Rhzzomorpha.

Amongst the commonest of the fossil remains found in the

hardened clay nodules in the drift at Tottenville are those which

I have included under the comprehensive name of Rhizomorphs.

They usually consist of limonite tubes, concretionary in struc-

ture, sometimes hollow, sometimes containing lignite or pyrite.

Occasionally the lignite has no casing of limonite around it.

424 HTOLLTCE,

They invariably extend through the rock at, or nearly at, right

angles to the plane of stratification and are either straight or

sparingly branched. Where the ends appear on the surfaces

of the rock these give rise to little pits, usually encircled by the

rims of the limonite tubes. On breaking one of these nodules

open the structure and arrangement of the remains may be ob-

served.

I have never seen any fossils in the Cretaceous clays which

are comparable to them, but roots of living plants which have

found their way down into ferruginous clays and sands often

produce very much the appearance of our specimens, and I am

inclined to think that these rhizomorphs represent the lignified

remains of former living roots, which were retained in their

original positions after the clay had been torn up and trans-

ported. During the subsequent hardening of the clay and the

oxidation of its contents, iron-bearing water followed along the

roots, gradually depositing a tube of limonite, while the vege-

table tissue was either destroyed or converted into lignite.

From this point of view our rhizomorphs would represent post-

Cretaceous preglacial vegetation.

Figs. 1-3.

Fig.

CO NR

PLATE, SOV TE

CRETACEOUS PLANTS FROM STATEN ISLAND.

ville

Protezoides daphnogenoides Herr.

Sapindus Morrisoni Lese. Princes Bay

Pistacia Aquehongensis Horticx.

Thinnfeldia Lesquereuxiana Herr.

Tottenville .

Tottenville

Dewalquea Gronlandica Heer (?) ‘Tottenville

Populus Harkeriana Leso. (?) Tottenville

Totten-

PAGE.

420

422

421

419

423

419

PLATE XXXVI.

XI.

¥> ACAD SCI.

ANNALS N.

m~<

Figs.

Fig.

PLATE XXXVII.

CRETACEOUS PLANTS FROM STATEN ISLAND.

1,2. Tricalycites papyraceus News. Tottenville .

Magnolia longifolia News. (?) Tottenville

Sterculia Snowii Lesa. (?) Tottenville

Sterculia sp.? ‘Tottenville

Pterospermites modestus Lesg. Tottenville .

Andromeda Parlatorii Herr. Tottenville

Moriconia cyclotoxon Des. & Err.

Princes Bay

Ficus Woolsoni News. (?) Tottenville .

( 428 )

PLATE. XXXVI.

SOL.) 2k,

ANNALS: N. YY. ACAD,

bets

—

’

A i

D) -

wy:

9 1

)

]

)

* 7

wf :

“he

7 -,

oy. ee

7 7

mG :

; _ i

_ ¥ _

Pp. ,

“

- a

“«

a |

; cw a

Ai se > | b Sy

[77> ee 475, pees

SLES ee eee

"4 pt aes

a ae 15

a):

A+

a i) - ne

= a -”

Oca eag : 1

PLATE XXXViIIi-

CRETACEOUS PLANTS FROM STATEN ISLAND.

Fig. 1. Rhizomorphs. Tottenville . ane

Fig. 2. Aralia rotundiloba News. (?) Tottenville

Figs. 3, 4b andc. Myrsine elongata News. Arrochar.

Fig. 4a. Salix ineequalis News. Arrochar

Fig. 5. Hedera sp. ? Tottenville .

Fig. 6. Myrica longa Heer. Arrochar

( 430 )

PAGE.

423

421

420

419

421

419

PLATE XXXVIII.

NALS: N.-¥. ACAD: SCT. XT.

[ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sct., XI, No. 21, pp. 431 to 441, December 17, 1898. ]

fi LATIER: PARTVOR, BUCKETIVUS, AND

EPICURUS zept petewour.

E. G. SIHLER.

(Read March 28, 1898.)

THE charm of Lucretius is perennial. The source of it, how-

ever, is rather complex. That his work is the foremost didactic

poem of antiquity is admitted. That his manipulation of the

possibilities of the Latin tongue stamps it, as Teuffel says, as the

production “‘ Eines Sprachgewaltigen” few would gainsay. That

his exordia and many of his digressions really are meant by the

lumina of Cicero’s judgment in his letter to his brother Quintus

(2, 11) seems most probable. And still stronger than these

is the tremendous earnestness of the man. We have a distin-

guished Epicurean in the generation after L., Horace of Venu-

sia. To him, too, we may trace that blending of morals, of

quasi-religious conviction and strictly philosophical tenets, which

constituted adherence to the one or the other of the two most

prominent sects of the day: the Epicurean and the Stoic.

These conditions Horace evidences most frankly in his earlier

writings, ¢. g., in the Iter Brundusinum, I, Sat. 5, 97.

dein Gnatia lymphis

Iratis extructa dedit risusque iocosque,

Dum flamma sine tura liquiscere limine sacro

Persuadere cupit. Credat Judaeus Apella

Non ego: namque deos didici securum agere zvum,

Nec, siquid miri faciat natura, deos id

Tristes ex alto caeli demittere tecto.

The vanity of concern for the utter extinction implied in the

mortality of the soul is iterated in his Odes, as is the vanity of

all human passions; the good-natured banter of criticism of

Stoic exaggeration comes naturally from an Epicurean ; but the

(431)

432 SITE Te

fearless and uncompromising attack on the Etruscan religion of

his country is not sounded by the pensioner of Maecenas, and

the poet who composed for the princeps the Carmen Saeculare

and supported distinctly the social and religious reforms so dear

to Augustus (recorded too as the latter’s dearest aspirations in

the Monumentum Ancyranum) could not well make a propa-

ganda—for Epicureanism. It is different with Lucretius. His

tremendous earnestness is coupled with a humility and rever-

ence for the person and doctrine of Epicurus which I need not

substantiate here in detail, I, 66-79, III, 1 sqq, and particularly

His te42

ipse Epicurus obit decurso lumine vite

qui genus humanum ingenio superavit et omnis

restincsit, stellas exortus ut etherius sol. . .

and the much quoted lines V, 8, sq.

deus ille fuit, deus, inclyte Memmi

qui princeps vitz rationem invenit eam quz

nunc appellatur sapientia . . .

As to the Greek sources of Lucretius: was there anything be-

side Epicurus himself? If so, what? If not, which writings

of E.2 Then too: did: he base it all on the 37 bb: of Ei mee

guasws? The exhaustive grouping of every shred of Epicu-

rean doctrine by H. Usener, of Bonn, in his Epicurea, Leipzig,

1887, with the critical edition of the text of book X, of Diog- ,

enes Laertius is a monument of erudition. . . still, inasmuch

as Epicurus’ doctrine is stated there with very great conciseness

as a Summary digest for the conning of confirmed disciples and

not with explicit clearness nor argumentative breadth, the temp-

tation has always been great for students of the subject to make

Epicurus’ letter to Herodotus a “source on 1

The exact mode in which Lucretius used the main work the

37 bb. zepe guaews will probably never be known, inasmuch as,

although there were three complete copies of Ep. zeo¢ guaeu¢

in the villa of Piso at Herculaneum, the deciphered fragments

from the carbonized rolls are entirely too scanty to permit in-

ferences ; if Philodemus, a second-rate writer, was represented

LUCRETIUS AND EPICURUS. 433

with his endless volumina in that Epicurean library, are we to

believe that a Lucretius was content with a perusal of anything

short of the great dogmatic work of the master? It is not

likely. This, too, is made more probable by the substantial ele-

ments of controversial analysis or censure directed against other

schools, and particularly against the Stoics, although the latter

are never mentioned by name throughout the work of Lucre-

tius. These controversial elements certainly were not in them-

selves attractive to such Roman readers as were to be made

proselytes of the sect. Therefore, I do not see how the paral-

lels between the letter to Herodotus and between Lucretius,

elaborated by /vo Bruns in his Lucrezstudien, Freiburg, Tuebin-

gen, 1884, prove anything in this respect. Noram I convinced

of the main thesis of Bruns, that Lucretius, in the course of the

elaboration of his work, determined quietly to omit or remove

the treatment of the theory of cognition, to xavoxzov, of the

system of Epicurus.

Why should we assume that the treatment of the Aavwy was

an essential part of the 37 bb zeo¢ guaews when, as we see in

Diogenes L. X., 27, there was a distinct volume zeoe xoetyotov

4% Kavov....

Lucretius essayed to show that this physical theory truly

emancipated the souls of men from fear of death and from all

the terrors with which the traditional mythology had invested

the Inferno, that it secured that peace of soul which in the Epi-

curean conception is essentially negative, freedom from all the

passions whether involved in the persuit of wealth, of sexual

indulgence [hence the appendix of book IV in L.,] or of political

preeminence. This is “purgare pectora’”’ L. VI, 24.. Now

books I-IV substantially present in sequence what Epicurus

called 7 r>qjar0s guaohoyta : [letter to Pythocles, Diog. L. 10, 85].

But books V and VI of L. are apt to make at first the impres-

sion of a mass of unrelated or ill-related matter. As for book

V the very exordium 55 sqq. states distinctly a complex theme :

the creation of organic beings, persistence of created types, es-

sentially physical nature of mind: deception of man by visions.

My next theme [rationis ordo] : this organic universe is perish-

434 SALER.

able [Diog. L. 10, 74 g@aprtot of xoopoe]. Earth, sky, sea,

stars, sun and moon established by that association of matter,

creation of living beings out of the earth [primitive civilization ],

origin of speech, religion, absence of conscious purpose in the

movement of heavenly bodies, no teleology: celestial mechanics

directed by no divine providence.

These themes are actually found in the book, although in a

somewhat different order. Beginning with V. 509 sqq. we begin

to notice that characteristic mark of Epicurus’ treatment of

“ra wstéwpoa,” viz., the advancement of two or more theories to

explain phenomena so radically different from the absolute posi-

tivism of the atomistic physical system proper, of boks I.—IV.

But it may be more instructive to present at first tables showing

the themes and the sequence of themes in Epicurus and

in Lucretius.

EPICURUS TO PYTHOCLES. LucreTIus V.

Dios. Laert. X..35 sqq_ 509. Motion of stars.

Sun, moon and ‘‘ other stars’’ 564. Size of Sun.

Size of sun. Heat of Sun.

Decline and filling of the moon. 619. Sun’s mutation of course

Face in moon. in the year.

Eclipses. 650. Night,

ta&ts meptddov. 656. Periodicity of sunrise.

Length of night and day. 680. Correlation of day and

Clouds. night ir length.

Rain. 705. moon’s phases.

Thunder. We iy MeCUpSEs:

Lightning. (771-779 resumé. )

Thunderbolt. ;

Waterspouts. Book VI.

Earthquakes. 96. Thunder.

Winds. 219. Lightning: optical phe-

Hail. nomena.

Snow. 379. Lightning: destructive

Dew. phenomena.

Hoarfrost. | 451. Clouds.

Tce: 495. Rain.

LUCRETIUS AND EPICURUS. 435

Rainbow. 527. Snow, hail, hoarfrost, ice.

Halo of moon. (A few lines only. )

Comets. 535. Earthquakes.

Slower movements of some stars. 639. Etna.

Meteors. 713. Nile. (explanation of

Seasons. (?) summer-rise. )

738. Exhalation of Avernus.

840. Puzzling changes of tem-

perature.

go6—1082. Magnet.

togo. Epidemics in general.

1138. The plague at Athens.

4309-429.

(Paraphrase of Thucyd. II 47-

55-)

The most striking thing in the letter to Pythocles is this:

The interest of Epicurus in the explanation of these phenomena

is not a scientific or even a positive one: it is mainly negative ; to

furnish zatural explanations, an assortment of two or three or four

or even more, sometimes without much, if any, indication which to

prefer as long as the idea of any divine will or agency as a fac-

tor was utterly cancelled from the problem ; cf., also, in letter to

Herodotus § 76 xae pry ev tots pstewoors QOPay xat TpOT HY xat

Exhehey xat dvatokny xat Ovaw xat Ta ovaTOLYa TOUTOLS HATE heetOUP-

yourtog tevos vomiCew det ytvecbar xat deatdtcovtog 7 dcatd&avto¢

x0L OMA. THY TAdoay paxapLotyta. EYOVTOS psta d~bapotag . . . and

so in the letter to Pythocles § 97 of the course of the sun

nat h Geta quer mpd0¢ tadta pHdapn Tpocayéabw GALd Ghectovpy7toOT

dcatnostabw xat ev tH Tdon paxapeotyte, Ws t TOVTO pn TeAayYOnasTak

dmaca. i mept TOY peteWowY altiohoyta patata Soca. And fur-

ther recurring to the element of supernatural cause 87-, ‘‘éze

tov woUov xatapps.”’ And § 115, speaking of other possible

modes of explaining meteora: ‘‘ xae Gdhoe 02 ToOTOE eg TO TOUT

tehéoat apulytot setae.”

When we turn away from this general negative bias of this

summary petewpodoyvta we are met by acurious and puzzling

characteristic.

436 STHLER.

These phenomena, according to Epicurus, according to their

very nature, are unattainable to our positive knowledge ; many

explanations are possible for each of them as a rule, one is as

good as the other; their knowledge is a mere inferior corollary

to the system of atomism proper, 7 7yyat0¢ guacoloyta (Diog. L.

10.85). The aim of this a¢ceodoyta is not scientific precision, nor

the satisfaction of the craving for accurate knowledge ; no, here

too it is ($85) draoagta ; these themes belong to an entirely dif-

ferent category from the (§ 86) tay didwv guaomarv mpo0fdnudter

kddapacc, e. g., that the universe is material and intangible (dvagyc¢)

as to its fundamental substance (z. ¢., as to the atoms), and that

the atoms are the material principle, principles which are in adso-

Jute harmony with phenomena; not so, however, with petéwoa ;

AAG TAUTE Ee TASOVAYHY EYst KA THE FEVEGEWC ALTLAY XO THE OvGtAS

tats utalnacat oUpowrvoy zatnyoptay.

The main point is not to adopt and persist in any ove explana-

tion, but give equal authority to them all as long as none of

them is in hisharmony with parallel or analogous processes from

the spheres of our actual empirical perception and observation

(gvaoy7 pata § 93)...

In one passage § 94 he refers to the adoption of the single

or exclusive as “being smitten’’ with it—cf. § 98 (xatayarav)

as a folly of him who knows not the (§ 113) limits of human

survey. And so—a brief illustration must suffice—e. ¢., he

gives four explanations of the changes of sun and moon, and

speaks with scorn of the computations of professional astrono-

mers as (§ 93) ta¢ “uvdpaTodmdste “uatpohoywy TEyveTetag. . . .

of the decline and increase of the moon he offers not less than

six; explanations, of clouds (§ 99), four; of rain, four; of

thunder, five (§ 100); of lightning § 101-102, seven; of earth-

quakes, ¢hree ; with a fourth collective which recurs frequently.

It would be mere iteration to go through the whole list.

This easy eclectic attitude towards the real solution of these

phenomena, this absolutely unscientific, nay childish, position as

over against exact science, naturally brought Epicurus and his

school into very glaring contrast as over against the positive

attainments of the Peripatetic and Stoic schools.

LUCRETIUS AND EPICURUS. 437

And so this particular matter well illustrates the attitude of

Epicurus and his school to technical culture or towards the

cultivation of technical knowledge. Usener has collected the

passages: Epicurea, p. 170, sqq. Cf. particularly Diog. 10, 6

TaOstay O& Tadoav, poxdos, were, Taxdt~ov “apdpevog and

Quintil. 12, 2, 24, “fugere omnem disciplinam.” But, we

are all told, there are doubts as to the genuineness of the letter

to Pythocles, so that Usener, while critically editing it with the

other two letters, brackets the title. This is due to a notice of

Philodemus in the Herculanean papyri, 2d collation, Tom. 1,

fol. 152, with Usener’s supplements, p. 34.

<< Szow [fa]y Thy [a] [Aa] pBav[e ae “ws TEpt TI@y

’extatod[ dy] xat THs [7pds I]v0| oxida es Jetes] tedpur

ETLTOPT,S xar TOD mept “apeTOv xté Peay cr

The notice of Philodemus, who was a close contemporary of

Lucretius and intimate friend of Calpurnius Piso, really is, in the

first place, a prima facie proof that this piece of Epicurean writ-

ing existed in Jus day and hada place among the works of Epi-

curus. Further, the summaries must have (like the zvp¢ae dogaz)

enjoyed a much greater vogue than the bulky works of Epi-

curus ; they were evidently studied and passed on from genera-

tion to generation in a school in which the zpse dixit of the

master was zealously maintained as the standard of true doc-

trine. It is natural, on the other hand, and most probable that

a man of real attainments and wide knowledge like Philodemus

had little love for this weakling among the intellectual progeny

of the son of Neocles, and would have been glad to have it

neglected or cast aside as a bastard.

The genuine and profound indifference of Epicurus towards

this entire sphere of themes I need not emphasize again ; it is

unfair to demand (as Usener does) more apt arrangement and

fitness in the succession of themes—or what succession of

themes would Usener postulate ? The strongest argument for

the genuineness of this second-rate product of Epicurus, how-

ever, is afforded by the parallel of Lucretius’ themes.

He is not (as Epicurus did not) desiring to write an exhaus-

ANNALS N, Y. ACAD. Sci., XI, January, 1899—29.

438 SE

tive or systematic treatise on physical phenomena both normal

and abnormal ; at the first reading of the greater part of Book

V and all of Book VI one cannot suppress a feeling that sys-

tem is cast to the winds and to miss that rigid, comparatively

speaking, that rigid sequence of treatment which is so unmis-

takable in the general unfolding of Epicurean doctriue in Books

I-IV. Cf. Munro’s commentary’ on Jeucretius V, 533: and

with Epicurus’ incessant railing against the postulate of ome ex-

planation (tov povayy tporov, §95 |. c. and § 113 TO 0& puay

OLTLAY TOUTWY ATOOLOOVAL, TAEOVAYOS TOY PALVOPEVWY EXXAAOD LEVY,

paxtxoy éoct). Cf. Lucretius V, 620, “ zon inquam, szmplex his

rebus reddita causast.”’

‘¢729 [of two different astronomical theories]

‘* proinde quasi id fieri nequeat quod pugnat uterque

‘*aut minus hoc illo sit cur amplectier ausis.’’

Pune! 2755, te

Solis item quoque defectus lunaeque latebras

pluribus e causts fiert tibi posse putandumst.

And so again in book VI, 703 sqq., the theory of a¢zeosoyta is

advanced even more clearly:

«Sunt aliquot quoque res quarum wsam dicere causam non

satis est, verum pluris, unde una tamen sit; as f. e. when you

see the dead body of a man lying at @ distance [7. e., preclud-

ing a close and direct inspection on our part]; there it behooves

us to exhaust the entire range of contingencies through which a

man may perish; although we cannot, at that distance, prove

any particular single one: the sword, or frost, or disease, or

poison. And so we find the same plurality of explanation in

Lucretius : positive and exclusive asseverations in this sphere

are impossible.

V 526 nam quid in hoc mundo sit eorum fonere certum difficile

est; sed quid possit fiatque per omne [das All].

in varlis mundis varia ratione creatis

id doceo plurvisque sequor dsponere causas, etc...

LUCRETICOS ANE EPICUR GS. 439

¢. g., V, 509 sqq. of the motion of the stars ¢iree conjectural ex-

planations, with two alternatives for the third; for the light of

the moon 575 ¢wo, the periodical mutations in the sun’s course

614 sqq. two, the problem of night (650), ¢wo ; the correlation

of day and night 680 sqq. three ; moon’s phases 705 sqq. “ree ;

eclipses 750 sqq. ¢wwo.

Thunder VI, 96, ze explanations ; lightning (246), four ;

waterspouts (423), two; clouds (451), five; rain (495), four;

earthquakes (535), four, rise of Nile (712), four.

It is a matter of some interest, philologically, to survey the

range of expression in which each writer presents the modality

of possibility of alternative conjecture; in Diog. L. 10, 93;

evOe eta. . . OMOLWS. . . 7G KOL. . . Y XOL— ; Q4 Hat Ofotws, . . ET

OS nat... ete Te evOeystae. . . evdsyetar O&. . . in Q5 ; OvvaTac xat.

... xt... iN 107; “evdeysta... ytvorto dy... ’amotéeaw dv

dopBdvoe... in III TOL... Toe H.—in 112; ob povov...’adha

, 4 \ > AY Sahil? ' Ay °

XL... 1. . Kat zat Gdhoug OF TAstovag TooTOUs OvYatat. With

this compare Lucretius V, 515 sqq. Aut... est etiam quoque

Brieigesiias 275) Sq; (SVE... VSive, J =) 637 fit quoque ut;

Gai mut... aut... quia; also 658, 660, 682, 697, aut etiam

quia 701 ; potest 705, est etiam quare 715; and 731 sqq. cur

nequeat..\/,, difficilest; rattone. docere. . ..753.isqq. cur luna

Sica ...1On posse; putctur,.. ..762, cur terra: queat.... 765

slat .nequeat..j.\,and.)in- VI, 97 propterea. quia... 108

Rie eiew 1 1G..b Quogue, tt. 121.-hecetiam pacto: .<

cademMiur 132 \eSt etiam ratio. ... >. 137 fit. quoque ut: . . 142

sunt quoque 156 denique. .. 160 item.—295 est etiam cum.

It cannot be my aim to enter into the detail, much less into

the scientific merits, of these explanations; it is curious and

noteworthy that Seneca in book VI of his xaturales quaestiones

dealing with the problem of earthquakes [a theme suggested by

the great earthquake of 63 A. D., from which Pompei and all

the gulf of Naples suffered], in reviewing the extant theories on

earthquakes, while quoting the Epicurean Metrodorus c. 19;

and Epicurus himself does not mention Lucretius, with whom

he was familiar. Now Seneca puts Epicurus 6, 20 in the cate-

gory of those “ qui oma tsta quae retult in causa esse dixerunt

440 STHLER.

aut ex jis plura. And particularly VI, 20, § 5 is so strong a

confirmation of the letter to Pythocles that it seems pertinent to

give part of it entire: omnes istas posse esse causas Epicurus

ait pluresque alias temptat, et a/zos, qui aliquid unum ex iis esse

adfirmaverunt, corripit, cum sit arduum de his quae coniectura

sequenda sunt, aliquid certi promittere.’’ And so the version of

Seneca contains the following words or phrases of alternative

conjectural statement: potest, potest, fortasse enim, fortasse,

fortasse, fortasse, fortasse, fortasse .. . et inde aut, aut.

But Lucretius has further themes which hardly come within

the sphere of petéwoa, Etna, Nile, exhalation of Avernus,

odd changes of temperature in a certain spring, the Magnet,

Epidemics, the Plague at Athens. True, but his fundamen-

tal interest is that of ad Pythoclem § 104: jpovoy o poéos

ONEOTU, OTEaTH Of, Edy TIS KAAS TOTS Waevopervots axohovAar TZE;t

Tay “agavey onyuswta. The absolute elimination of divinity as

factor or efficient cause, § 113 and 116, ‘learn this by heart,’ my

dear Pythocles ; for the sequence is stated as a two-fold one:

KATH TORY TE ~AO TOD pobon "exByoH zat TH OpOyEry, TOUTOLS GULODaY

dvvyio7. And so we see Lucretius engaged in elaborate and

ambitious efforts to apply the abstract and fundamental doc-

trines of atomism, ¢. g., in dealing with Etna, 647 sqq., with

Avernus and its reputed exhalations, 769, 790 sqq., w. the

magnet, go6 sqq., where the preliminary elaboration of first

principles is carried on with such fulness that the poet apologizes :

gIg. et minimum longis ambagibus est adeundum and

1081. nec tibi tam longis opus est ambagibus usquam

nec me tam multam hic operam consumere parest .

and while it is his ambitious attempt to apply fixed principles (cf.

Diog. L. 10, 116, “tay Tw@Y apya@r xat amEcptag xat THY GLyyEvoY

toutots Gewptav)” to definite physical problems which swelled the

theme of the Magnet to the bulky total of 184 lines (905-1080),

let us glance at the theme of Thunder and Lightning in the

earlier part of book VI, 96-379, a little 'ess than 300 lines .. .

and then follows the fervid attack on the formule of the Etruscan

ritual and the folly of ascribing these manifestations to Jupiter ;

LUCRETIUS AND EPICURUWS. 441

which uprooting of popular fear of the gods with its interde-

pendence with the fear of death is really the chief motive and the

very essence of this unique poem . . . the practical moral in-

terest of emancipating the soul vastly predominates over the

didactic or speculative interest.

But the limits of the /3e7, the mechanical necessity even of

limitation, so instructively elaborated by Th. Birt in his ‘‘ Das

Antike Buchwesen,” 1882, put their constraint upon the poet ;

so that alongside of these disproportionate elaborations of par-

ticular themes as just noted we find, e. 9., VI, 527 sqq. snow,

winds, hail, hoarfrost, ice merely summarily mentioned, and

turned over to the reader’s application of first principles. We

must not incline, however, to the assumption that this apparent

miscellany of physical and meteorological themes and problems

in Lucretius V and VI was a mere appendix, or second-thought

supplement of the work proper; for in the very first detailed

announcement of his chief themes, in I, 127, this entire matter

is even placed first in order:

Qua propter bene cum suferis de rebus habenda

nobis est ratio, solis lunzeque meatus

qua fiant ratione. . .

In conclusion we ask were the yetéwpa an essential part of the

37 bb. zeoe gucsws? It seems impossible to prove that the let-

ter to Herodotus, § 35, 83, in Diog. 1.., X, isa true, 7. 2., an even

and truly proportioned summary of the entire range of the great

work of 37 bb., the brief reference to wetéwoa in § 76 is too

slender for elaborate or positive inferences. In the list of E’s

works Diog. L., 10, 27, of some forty-nine titles with 89 volumina

are recorded as ta féAttata out of the total of 300 xvid 00e with

the exception of zeoe votrwy ddFaz there is no title specifically

bearing on the subject of wetéwoa.

NEw YoRK UNIVERSITY, 1808.

fAnnats N. Y. Acap. Scr., XI, No, 22, pp. 443 to 499, January 18, 1899. |

RECORDS OF MEETINGS

OF THE

NEW YORK

men DENY OF SCIENCES.

JANUARY, 1898, TO DECEMBER, 1808.

RICHARD E. DODGE,

Recording Secretary.

[ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sci., XI, No. 22, pp. 445 to 499, January 18, 1899. ]

RECORDS OF MEETINGS

OF THE

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCDTENCES.

January, 1898, to December, 1898.

RicHARD E. Donce, Recording Secretary.

REGULAR BUSINESS MEETING.

JANUARY 3, 18098.

Academy met with President Stevenson in the chair. The

minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. The Sec-

retary presented for election as Resident Members the names

of the following candidates which had been duly approved by

the Council.

RESIDENT MEMBERS ELECTED.

F. W. Devoe, tor Fulton street.

W. G. Dewitt, 88 Nassau street.

E. 1 Haines, New Rochelle. N: Y:

Michel M. LeBrun, 8 Mountain avenue, Montclair, N. J.

Charles S. Schultz, Hoboken, N. J. |

5. L: H. Ward, 67 Wall sttert:

The Secretary was authorized to cast a ballot for the names

read, and all were declared elected.

The section of Astronomy and Physics then organized.

J. F. Kemp,

Secretary.

(445 )

446 RECORDS.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY AND CRY sles

JANUARY 3, 1898.

Mr. Dudley in the chair, eighteen members and guests pres-

ent. W. Hallock was appointed Secretary, pro fem. Minutes

of last meeting read and approved.

The first paper was by H. Jacoby, entitled PHoToGRAPHIC

RESEARCHES NEAR THE Nort POLE oF THE HEAVENS. Pro-

fessor Jacoby explained how the “trail plates’ are taken with

stationary telescope having in its field the north pole point, and

pointed out how, after proper corrections, an improved location

of the pole could be obtained as the common center of the trail

arcs. The results are excellent, and bid fair to give much better

values for declination than those obtained by other methods.

The paper was discussed by Professor Rees, Mr. Post and

Professor Hallock.

The second paper was by P. H. Dudley, entitled THE Com-

PLETION OF RELAYING THE TRACK OF THE BOSTON AND ALBANY

RAILROAD WITH 95-LB. Rais. Mr. Dudley outlined the intro-

duction of rails of improved material and section, and the

gradual relaying of this line, showing how greatly the road was

improved at all points, how heavier loads were carried, and how

a gain was obtained in all directions. Meeting then adjourned.

W. HIALLOGK;

Secretary of Section, pro tem.

SECTION“OF-BICLOG

JANUARY I0, 1898.

Professor Osborn in the chair, fifty-six persons present. The

following programme was offered:

H. F. Osborn, THE OrIGIN OF THE MAMMALIA.

F. M. Chapman, Tue DistripuTion oF BirDs IN THE STATE

OF VERA CRUZ.

F. E. Lloyd, On HyprertropHieD LEAF-SCALES IN PINus

PONDEROSA.

RECORDS. 447

Professor Osborn showed that the speculation of recent au-

thors (Cope, Baur, Osborn) regarding the ancestry of the mam-

malia turns back to certain Permian reptiles of the orders Therio-

dontia Owen, and Gomphodontia Seeley. He reviewed the

characters of the skeleton of these Theriodontia, showing their

unmistakable promammalian features. A number of persistent

reptilian characters were also cited. In conclusion, the speaker

said that these Theriodontia have the geological age required for

ancestors of the mammalia, and are the only type of reptiles

which exhibit mammalian affinities. Their great size and cer-

tain adaptive specializations alone bar any known type from di-

rect ancestry of the much smaller earliest mammals; but this

fact does not preclude the existence of very small unspecialized

forms which may have developed into the mammalian type. Pro-

fessor Osborn’s paper was illustrated by lantern slides.

Dr. Chapman described the various types of vegetation and

the altitudinal distribution of birds along the course of the two

railroads running from the coast at Vera Cruz into the table-

lands of the interior. His paper was also illustrated by lantern

slides. In answer to Professor Britton’s question whether the

variations in air pressure have any influence in modifying bird

structure, the speaker said apparently not. They undergo dif-

ferent pressure, as shown by height of flight, and seem to thrive

equally well under differing conditions of barometric pressure.

Professor Lloyd showed that scales which subtend the fasci-

cles of Pzxus ponderosa are morphologically equivalent to leaves ;

and, when hypertrophied, these leaves closely resemble the leaf

of the genus Pseudotsuga. The speaker suggested that the

Pines may have been derived phylogenetically from a general-

ized form represented by Pseudotsuga, and that the hypertro-

phied leaves are atavistic.

Gary N. CALKINS,

Secretary of Section.

448 RECORDS:

SECTION: OF “GEOLOGY

JANUARY 17, 1808.

Professor Kemp in the chair, fifteen persons present.

The first paper was by Mr. Arthur Hollick, entitled Fur-

THER NoTES ON Biock ISLAND GEOLOGY AND Botany. The

speaker gave a summary of his work done on Block Island in

July, 1897, and particularly of his success in tracing eastward

from Long Island the Amboy clays which had previously been

determined by paleontological evidence on Staten Island, Long

Island and Martha’s Vineyard. Something like fifteen species

of Middle Cretaceous flora, nine of them typical of the Amboy

clays, have been found.

Mr. Hollick then classified the existing flora of the Island

physiographically into that of the hills, peat bogs, sand dunes

and beaches, salt marshes and salt water. In the course of his

work he has added to the already published lists something

like twenty-four new species, although it is not considered that

this by any means completes the list of possible species that might

be found in the springtime. The flora as a whole is distinctly

that of a morainal country, and its nearest analogue is that of

Montauk Point.

Mr. Hollick then offered some suggestions to account for the

present peculiar flora of the island, and particularly for the ab-

sence of certain species that would be expected, and showed

that two elements are to be taken into consideration, the geolog-

ical and the human. Block Island is the only part of the ter-

minal moraine along the New England coast which does not

have accompanying the moraine a certain amount of plain land

which would naturally allow a variety in the flora. It is pre-

sumable that Block Island also has been practically separated

from the rest of the continent by a deep channel of more than

twenty fathoms for a considerable time, and that even before

the last depression of the land the island was connected with

the mainland merely by a small peninsula. Hence the diversity

of the flora as compared with the continent, because of the

length of separation.

KLECORDS. 449

The speaker also mentioned the extensive archeological dis-

coveries on the west shore of the island, and gave a list of the

shells and implements discovered in several of the kitchen mid-

dens, and also of the bones of animals brought to light in the

old fireplaces in the sand dunes. He made particular mention

also of the great numbers of Lzttorina, the common periwinkle

of Europe, which has never before been announced from Block

Island. The paper was discussed by Professor Lloyd and Dr.

Martin.

The second paper of the evening was by Richard E. Dodge,

entitled ScIENTIFIC GEOGRAPHY IN EpucaTion. The speaker

brought out the point that geography work may be classified

into three divisions, that for the common schools, the secondary

schools, and the universities, and outlined briefly a few sugges-

tions as to how the subject matter might be treated scientifically

in each of the groups, and the dependence of each group upon

the others. He paid particular attention to the difficulties of

securing scientific work in geography in the grade schools, and

to the fact that geography at present is extremely unsatisfactory

in most of our schools, probably because of the lack of inspi-

ration owing to the neglect of the subject hitherto in the universi-

ties of the country. The paper was illustrated by the exhibi-

tion of cheap and easily procurable maps, that can be used for

scientific geography work of several grades.

The meeting then closed with a few remarks by Professor

Kemp, in reference to the famous classic, entitled LitHo-

GRAPHLE WIRCENBURGENSIS DUCENTIS LAPIDUM FIGURANTORUM,

A POTIORI INSECTIFORMIUM PRODIGIOSIS IMAGINIBUS EXORNATA,

SPECIMEN PRIMUM, written by J. B. A. Beringer in 1726. Pro-

fessor Kemp summarized the work of the author in attempting

to explain a great collection of pseudo fossils from a theolog-

ical standpoint, the fossils having previously been made by some

practical jokers and buried in the rocks for the author to find.

RicHARD E, DoncgE,

Secretary of Section.

450 RECORDS:

SECTION OF PSYCHOLOGY AND ANT OROrOLEeGy

JANUARY 24, 1898.

Professor Bliss in the chair. Fourteen names proposed for

membership by the Secretary, were referred to the Council.

The following papers were then presented :

E. L. Thorndike, ExPpERIMENTS IN COMPARATIVE PSyYCHOL-

OGY.

H. J. Smith, Recenr ARCHEOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS IN

BRITISH COLUMBIA.

L. Farrand, Report oF THE MEETING OF THE AMERICAN

PSYCHOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION AT ITHACA.

CHARLES B. BLIss,

Secretary of Section.

REGULAR. PURE see erukes:

JANUARY 31, 1898.

The Academy met in the Mott Memorial Library and listened

to the second public lecture of the season, which was delivered

by Professor Henry H. Rusby, of the College of Pharmacy,

upon the subject, AN AFTERNOON ON A VENEZUELAN Bayou.

Thirty persons were present and at the conclusion a vote

thanking the speaker was passed.

J. F. Kemp,

Secretary.

REGULAR BUSINESS MEETING

FEBRUARY 7, 1808.

The Academy met, with President Stevenson in the chair.

About twenty-five members present. The minutes of the last

meeting were read and approved. ‘The Secretary presented the

following nominations of new members from the Council :

RECORDS. 451

CORRESPONDING MEMBER ELECTED.

Professor George E. Hale, Yerkes Observatory, Williams

Bay, Wis.

RESIDENT MEMBERS ELECTED.

James Boyd, 12 Franklin street.

Alfred S. Brown, 160 West 76th street.

William Phelps Eno, 111 Broadway.

William W. Hoppin, 111 Broadway.

J. Morgan Howe, M.D., 58 West 47th street.

John S. Kennedy, 6 West 57th street.

Solomon Loeb, 37 East 38th street.

Edwin S. Marston, 20 William street.

George L. Nichols, 66 East 56th street.

Wheeler H. Peckham, 685 Madison avenue.

J. Hambden Robb, 23 Park avenue.

Henry H. Rogers, 26 East 57th street.

J. A. Roosevelt, 4 West 57th street.

H. L. Thornell, 51 West 73d street.

Spencer Trask, 27 Pine street.

John I. Waterbury, Morristown, New Jersey.

Frederick H. Wiggin, 55 West 36th street.

Alfred R. Wolff, 15 West 89th street.

C. A. Woodward, D.D.S., 49 West 36th street.

George Zabriskie, 45 West 48th street.

On motion the Secretary was instructed to cast a ballot for

all the nominees, which was done. The Secretary presented the

following recommendation from the Council, which, on motion,

was adopted by ballot :

Resolved, That in consideration of the extremely valuable and

conscientious services to the Academy of Professor D. S. Martin,

his past dues be hereby remitted, and that he be made a Life

Member.

AMENDMENTS TO By-Laws.

The Secretary laid before the Academy the following amend-

ments to the by-laws, which had been recommended by the

Council :

452 RECORDS.

Chapter I, to add Article 4: “The number of Fellows shall

be limited to 100.” |

Chapter V, Article 1, to add: “Past Presidents of the Acad-

emy, residents of New York City, shall be advisory members

of the Council, with a right to be present at the meetings and

to serve on committees, but without vote. They shall be

notified of all meetings.”

The Section of Astronomy and Physics then organized.

James F. Kemp,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY AND, PHySic=:

FEBRUARY 7, 1898.

The meeting was called to order with Mr. P. H. Dudley in

the chair, twenty-one members and guests being present. The

reading of the minutes of the last meeting was omitted, and

the section proceeded with the programme of the evening.

H. Jacoby took the chair; and P. H. Dudley read a paper,

illustrated by lantern views, entitled THE UsE oF THE DUDLEY

STREMMATOGRAPH FOR DETERMINING THE STRAINS PRODUCED

IN Rairs By Movine Trains.”’ He described the use of the

instrument in recording tensional and compressive stresses

in steel rails under various kinds of traffic, and stated that

much greater stresses exist in steel rails than are commonly

supposed to be caused by locomotives and cars standing on or

moving over them. After a few supplementary remarks in reply

to questions, Mr. Dudley resumed the chair, and W. S. Day

read a paper entitled RECENT EXPERIMENTS CONCERNING THE

SpeciFIC HEAT oF WaTER. He discussed the results obtained

by Rowland, Schuster, Bartoli, Griffiths and Miculescu, in

measuring the mechanical equivalent of heat, and compared the

results obtained by these scientists by means of curves. The

paper was discussed by W. Hallock, H. Jacoby and others.

After a few concluding remarks by Professor Jacoby, the meet-

ing adjourned.

R. Gorpbon,

Secretary of Section.

RECORDS. 453

SEC PION@Or BIOLOGY:

FEBRUARY 14, 1898.

Professor Osborn in the chair. Twenty-one persons present.

The following programme was presented :

George S. Huntington, THe EparTerIAL BRONCHIAL Sys-

TEM of THE MAMMALIA.

F. S. Lee, THE Function OF THE EAR AND LATERAL LINE

IN FISHES.

Professor Huntington’s paper dealt with the structure of the

Bronchial System and with the pulmonary supply in various

representatives of orders and families of the Mammalia. The

conclusions reached are at variance, in their main points at least,

with the views expressed by Professor Achy and with the gen-

erally accepted views in the text-books of human and com-

parative anatomy. The most primitive form appears to be Achy’s

“bilateral hyparterial type,’ represented by Achy in Aystrix

cristata, by Weber in Lalena mysticetus, and now by the author

in Zaxidea Americana.

In the other mammalia a distinct and progressive series can

be established between the primitive types of bronchial distribu-

tion and the most complex arrangement.

Among the many conclusions reached by Professor Hunting-

ton, we may note the following: The active agent in changing

the architecture of the lung is not the pulmonary artery (Achy),

but the migration of the cephalic primary trunk or its proximal

secondary derivative for increasing respiratory area. The pul-

monary artery, in the majority of forms, is lateral ; hence, dis-

tinction in “ dorsal’ and “‘ ventral” should be abandoned, etc.

Dr. Huntington’s paper was well illustrated by lantern slides.

Dr. Lee, after describing his experiments on the auditory

functions of certain fish, came to the following conclusions : (1)

the otolithic organs mediate the perception of progressive move-

ment; (2) all experiments for demonstrating the power of hear-

ing in the customary sense, have failed, but destruction of the

organs of the lateral line, combined with removal of the large

pectoral and ventral fins in some species (Latrachus tau) causes

ANNALS N. Y. AcaD. Sci., XI, January 18, 1899—39.

454 RECORDS.

lack of appreciation of equilibrium, also central stimulation of

lateral nerve causes coordinated compensating movements of the

fins exactly similar to those caused by stimulation of the acous-

tic nerve. The inference then is that the organs of the lateral

line are sense organs of equilibrium analogous to the ear; (3)

the ear is a derivative of the lateral line.

Dr. Lee’s paper was illustrated by models, charts and dia-

grams.

Dr. J. A. Blake was nominated for membership, and referred

to Council.

Gary N. CALKINS,

Secretary of Section.

STATED MEETING:

FEBRUARY 21, 1898.

The Academy met with President Stevenson in the chair.

Seventeen members present.

The Secretary presented the following nominations for resi-

dent membership :

Robert F. Cornish, 123 Claremont avenue, Montclair, N. J.

Mrs. Henry Draper, 271 Madison avenue, New York.

Rev. “Dr. Henry Mitchell. McCracken, (D9. -Lie Dees

York University.

Mr. G. F. Kunz presented a circular relating to the proposed

dinner of the Scientific Alliance and urged all the members of

the Academy to be present. °

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

FEBRUARY 21, 1808.

Professor Kemp in the chair. In the absence of the Secre-

tary, Mr. Gilbert van Ingen was elected Secretary, pro fem.

The first paper was by George F. Kunz, entitled A REcENT

DISCOVERY OF HUGE QUARTZ CRYSTALS IN THE WEsr. The

RECORDS. 455

crystals were found in the neighborhood of Grass Valley, Cal.,

in placer gold mines and, although somewhat waterworn, are re-

ported to be of great size and clearness. One is said to weigh

a ton. The paper was discussed by Messrs. Levison and

Kemp.

The second paper related to the exhibition of recent acces-

sions of rare minerals, loaned for the purpose, by Professor A.

J. Moses. Among the rest a large specimen of cellular rock

with coats of Huantahajite, the whole being 8 inches square,

was of particular interest. In the absence of Professor Moses

the specimens were commented on by the Chairman and by

Professor Chester.

The third paper was by Professor F. D. Chester, entitled

KRENNERITE FROM CRIPPLE CREEK, Cor. The speaker re-

marked on the rarity of the mineral and described his good for-

tune in obtaining a specimen with crystals capable of being

measured, which were now being studied by Professor Penfield

of Yale. The paper led to a considerable discussion upon the

occurrence of the telluride ores, by Messrs. Caswell, Chester,

Kunz and Kemp.

Professor Kemp then exhibited some specimens of the Nephe-

line Syenite from Dungannon, Ont., which he had received from

Mr. F. J.. Pope, and which showed crystals of Corundum of

large size, forming an original mineral in the rock.

Dr. W. G. Levison exhibited some microscopic mounts of

minerals in small pasteboard boxes.

A paper by Stuart Weller, entitled DrEscriprion or DE-

VONIAN CRINOIDS AND BLASTOIDS FROM MILWAUKEE, WIS., was

read by title.

On motion the meeting adjourned.

GILBERT VAN INGEN,

Secretary, pro tem.

456 RECORDS.

ANNUAL BUSINESS MEETING.

FEBRUARY, 21, 1808.

The Academy met with President Stevenson in the chair.

Fifty persons present. There being no minutes to read, the

President called for the Annual Reports of the various officers.

REPORT OF THE RECORDING SECRETARY.

The year now closing has been a successful and gratifying

one in the history of the Academy. The meetings have been

well attended, the quality of the papers good, and the general

interest in the affairs of the organization has been pronounced.

The membership has increased beyond any previous figure in

its history.

There have been nine meetings of the Council, nine regular

business meetings of the Academy, twenty-two additional stated

meetings, five public lectures, one public reception, and two re-

ceptions to distinguished scientific visitors from abroad.

The Section of Astronomy and Physics has held eight meet-

ings, with an average attendance of twenty; the Section of Bi-

ology has held eight, with an average attendance of twenty-

four; the Section of Geology and Mineralogy eight, with an

average of thirty-three; the Sub-section of Philology three,

averaging twenty-seven; and the Sub-section of Psychology

and Anthropology four, with about the same number.

A total of eighty-three papers has been presented, not includ-

ing Public Lectures, which may be classified as follows :

Anatomy I Geology 16

Anthropology 5 Mechanics I

Archeology 2 Mineralogy 4

Astronomy 6 Paleontology 8

Botany I Philology 5

Civil Engineering 1 Physics 9

Chemistry 4 Psychology 2

Geography 3 Zoology 18

RECORDS. 457

Fifty-one new members have been elected, nine have resigned,

and three have died, leaving a total of 330 on the Secretary’s

list, a gain of 39 over last year. As stated above, the resident

membership of the Academy is now the largest in its history.

One Honorary Member has been elected and ten nominations

are pending. One Corresponding Member has been elected

and the nominations of fifteen are pending. Nineteen Resident

Members have been elected Fellows.

In connection with the publications the Council has decided

that it is inadvisable to issue two octavo series and a quarto.

The Z7ransactions will therefore be discontinued with Volume

XVI and will be merged into the Annats, beginning Volume

XI of the latter. While the same size of page will be pre-

served a new and more desirable font of type has been chosen.

The records of the meetings will be printed separately from the

scientific papers. The volumes will also run coincidently with

the calendar years.

The by-laws have been amended so as to abolish the fee

for election as Fellow. And so as to limit the number of Fel-

lows to one hundred.

The public reception of the Academy in March last passed off

most successfully and the exhibition has now become an annual

event, anticipated both within and without the Academy.

The Academy extended to Sir Archibald Geikie in May last

a reception which proved a very enjoyable occasion; and in

October offered its hospitalities to Dr. Albrecht Penck.

Respectfully submitted,

J. F. Kemp,

Recording Secretary.

ANNUAL REPORT OF THE TREASURER.

RECEIPTS.

Balance on hand as ‘per last Annual Report. ...-.. $394.89

Panciibution to: Audubeneh utd ee 100.00

mace: of Audubon und’. tise wastes Gasnle ll. 89.86

458 RECORDS.

income ol Pabheation Fund 5256 tae ee ee $60.00

“ Permanent Fund.3\2. 22a eee 300.14

ite Memberships Fee? 2/21 .:.): eee 100.00

Pnttiation Fees! o.s ole SR ae eee 250.00

ammeal doves.) GOa. nak Sees $10.00

aS Of UNBOISS co 21a eee aeieeemaetarae 30.00

‘> ES OO gee eh te eee ee 80.00

. (0 S807 «xs ee eee 2,035.00

o nS SSIS Bc9s if Cetin eg ae 2900.00: 2,445.00

Proceeds Salesot, Electrical Fixtures: 253. ee 20.00

$3,759.89

DISBURSEMENTS.

Wet Cow of Publishing Avinals’. Lea $690.14

Net Cest of Publishing Transactions> <9) 425 24 1,033,7%

Expenses.ot Recordine Secretary..- 11-7) ee 380.68

s Secretary of Biological Section’ 7. 7.) 15.22

ae SB GAFIAIE- a 2'.J-Pin miles eo ee ee 82.46

Cost -of Accession to lkibraty S2c.g oe eee [4.93

Expenses or Dreastirer: aire ee ee ee eee 2463

Janitorial Services ts Fi" are eae eee ee oe 48.00

Rent.of itooms, Oct.’ 11607, to Janet, 1S0d7 2 ea. 70.00

Insurance: Premiums 2/7 95 208 es ce ee eee KG"37.

Expenses wor Wectures s/t... year kee. eee eee 58.00

“ Fourth Annual Reception. (4 ee 546.52

2 NiGWiihe< | 470g he co aoe eee 22.63

$3,022.49

Balance. Cash now on hands... 737.40

DETAILS OF PERMANENT FUND.

Balance on hand as per last Annual Report....... $348.68

Life Membership Fee received during the year .. .. 100.00

Initiation Fees received during the year ja eae 250.00

Balance now-on hand 2.2 5)) eras $698.68

RECORDS. 459

DETAILS OF AUDUBON FUND.

Contribution received from Mrs. Esther Hermann.. $100.00

Income from Bond and Mortgage Investment ..... 89.86

ieareed back to Publication, Fund... 2. V2... - 23.00

Balance now Of mate. .o seth. ess $212.86

DETAILS OF PUBLICATION FUND.

Income from Bond and Mortgage Investment ..... $60.00

Credited back to Audubon Fund..... $2 3.00

Credited to General Income a/c .-:... 37.00

$60.00

DETAILS OF GENERAL INCOME ACCOUNT.

Balance brought down as per last Annual Report. . $46.21

meee om Permanent Mand: 5... 0:06 62 60 ee +.5) 300.14

2 Pe iica mon twits. . 25. ee eek es es 37.00

Peeceecds sale-o! Flectrical Fixtures............. 20.00

Reever tor intial Des 5... cn ees eke ages oo 2,445.00

$2,848.35

cess :

Net Cost of Publishing Annals and Transactions... $1,723.85

eM, GG io ean er 509.99

Rent of Rooms, Janitorial Services and Cost of

ra ig a ee ee a 150.63

Post of Accessionus'te Library.) os... 2 $14/13

Bean Oh CERES a) ees So8 oe no sha Saker ei 58.00

Gost-of Fourth Annual. Reception... ... 546.52

fasurance Prete. 22007000... % ed ex. 10.37 $3,023.40

Deficiency in Income to meet Current Expenses... 174.14

SUMMARY.

Balance to credit of Permanent Fund............ $698.68

" ‘<. VAnidabon Fai) OG 212.86

$Q1I.54

Bens Deicit uw teneran amciine oe oy ey). 174.14

Balance, Cash on hand ..... eee er $737.40

460 RECORDS:

ASSETS

Casha, Dankisdierient fori" aks hn A ee $737.40

Investments in Bonds and Mortgages,

aye tenmanent und, - ee eee $8,402.75

aie Publication: (und 22.4. urewemee 1,800.00

ajc Audubon, und’. .aneeen er eee 1,797.25 $12,000.00

Annual Dues, in arrears,

Pof-1805' igo See 20.00

8 PG OO eee eee ee 140.00

DSO 7 Ges sue koa Seek tee ea 21O100 470.00

Totals 25 poe eas, oe ee eee $13,207.40

AS avainst amount last year wae gee 12,644.89

Respectfully submitted,

CoCo

Treasurer.

On motion the report was referred to the Finance Committee

for auditing.

HONORARY MEMBERS ELECTED.

The following nominations of Honorary Members were then

presented from the Council :

Professor Arthur Anweers, Berlin.

Professor W. K. Brooks, Johns Hopkins University, Balti-

more.

Dr. David Gill, Astronomical Observatory, Cape of Good

Hope.

Dr; George W.osrll, Nyack, N.Y:

Professor E. Ray Lankester, Oxford, England.

Professor Albrecht Penck, Vienna, Austria.

Professor W. Pfeffer, Leipzig, Germany.

Professor Hans Reusch, Christiania, Norway.

Professor Karl von Zittel, Munich, Germany.

Professor R. Virchow, Berlin.

On motion, the Secretary was instructed to cast a ballot for

all the nominees, which was done and they were declared

elected.

KECORDS. 461

CORRESPONDING MEMBERS ELECTED.

The following nominations of Corresponding Members were

presented from the Council :

Professor F. D. Adams, Montreal.

Professor W. B. Balfour, Edinboro, Scotland.

Professor George Baur, Chicago.

Dr. William Carruthers, British Museum, London.

Professor T. C. Chamberlin, Chicago.

Professor William M. Davis, Cambridge, Mass.

me A. Pranchet, Paris.

Professor J. P. Iddings, Chicago.

Professor C. S. Minot, Boston.

Dr. George Murray, British Museum, London.

Professor W. B. Scott, Princeton, N. J.

Professor C. O. Whitman, Chicago.

Professor H. S. Williams, New Haven.

Mr. C. D. Walcott, Washington.

On motion the Secretary was instructed to cast a ballot for

all the nominees, and they were declared elected.

ELECTION OF OFFICERS.

The Academy then proceded to the election of officers for the

ensuing year. The following ticket was elected by ballot:

President, Henry F. Osborn.

7st Vice-President, Nathaniel L. Britton.

2a Vice-President, James F. Kemp.

Corresponding Secretary, William Stratford.

Recording Secretary, Richard E. Dodge.

Treasurer, Charles F. Cox.

Librarian, Arthur Hollick.

Councilors, Charles L. Bristol, Bashford Dean, Charles A.

Doremus,, William Hallock, Harold Jacoby, Lawrence A. Mc-

Louth.

Curators, Harrison G. Dyar, Alexis A. Julien, Géotee EF

Kunz, Louis H. Laudy, William D. Schoonmaker.

finance Committee, Henry Dudley, John H. Hinton, Cor-

nelius Van Brunt.

462 RECORDS.

ANNUAL ADDRESS OF RETIRING PRESIDENT, J. J. STEVENSON.

On the announcement of the election, President Osborn took

the chair and assumed control of the meeting. Retiring Presi-

dent Stevenson then delivered the annual Presidential Address

upon the subject, THe DeBr oF THE WoRLD TO PURE SCIENCE.

The addfess appears in the ANNALS, Vol. XI, pp. 177-192. At

the conclusion of the address, President Osborn expressed the

thanks of the Academy to the speaker, and the meeting ad-

journed.

REGULAR BUSINESS MERTING:

MARCH 7, 1808.

President Osborn in the chair, fifteen members present. Min-

utes of last meeting read and approved.

The amendments to the by-laws proposed at the February

meeting were both carried.

The Secretary presented for the Council the following names

for Resident Membership, and he was authorized to cast one

ballot for the list, which was done.

RESIDENT MEMBERS ELECTED.

Robert H. Cornish, 123 Claremont avenue, Montclair, N. J.

Henry Mitchell MacCracken, D.D., LL.D., New York Uni-

versity.

Dr. Joseph A. Blake, 437 West 59th street.

Mrs. M. A. P. Draper, 271 Madison avenue.

MEMBERS PROPOSED.

The following nominations were read and referred to the

council :

Life member, Miss Catherine W. Bruce, 810 Fifth avenue ;

nominated by J. K. Rees.

Resident members, S. B. Hoffman, Morristown, N. J. nomina-

ted by Harold Jacoby.

RECORDS. 463

Douglass Burnett, 42 Livingston street, Brooklyn, N. Y.;

nominated by P. H. Dudley.

The following paper was read by title, and referred to Publi-

cation Committee : THE NorTHROP COLLECTION OF CRUSTACEA,

by Professor Walter M. Rankin, of Princeton, illustrated by

three plates.

The Section of Astronomy and Physics then organized.

RICHARD E. DODGE,

Secretary.

SCION OF ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS.

Marcu 7, 1898.

Meeting was called to order by the Chairman, Mr. P. H.

Dudley, there being eighteen persons present. The first busi-

ness of the meeting was the election of officers for the ensuing

year. Nominations being declared open, J. K. Rees nominated

P. H. Dudley as Chairman. There being no other nominations,

the Secretary was empowered to cast one ballot for Mr. Dudley;

and he was declared elected Chairman. R. Gordon was nomi-

nated Secretary by W. Hallock. There being no other nomi-

nations, the Secretary was empowered to cast one ballot for him;

and he was thereby declared elected.

The next business was the reading of papers.

Romeyn Hitchcock read a paper entitled, InpusTRIAL APPLi-

CATIONS OF OxyGEN in which he described a gas enriched by

oxygen for the purpose of increasing its heating power. He

compared the composition of this gas, with which experiments

have been carried on recently, with that of several of the usual

gases commercially employed for lighting and heating. After

brief discussion, W. Hallock described a Maxke-Circuit PEN-

DULUM, and showed a working model of the same. After some

discussion, the meeting adjourned at 9:20 P. M.

ne R. GORDON,

Secretary of Section.

464 RECORDS:

STATED MEETING

MaArcH 14, 1808.

President Osborn in the chair.

Secretary read the following nominations of committees made

by the President, from the body of the Council for the en-

suing year.

Committee on Publication: President and Secretary, Professors

Dean, Jacoby, McLouth, Kemp and Britton.

As representatives of the New York Academy of Sciences in

the Scientific Alliance: The President, Professor Stevenson and

Mir. Cox:

Secretary then made announcement of the proposed grant of

the Newberry Fund for the ensuing year.

Section of Biology then formed.

RIcHARD E. DODGE,

Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY:

Marcu 14, 1898.

Professor Wilson in the Chair. Twenty-three persons pres-

ent. The following program was offered :

1. B. B. Griffin, A Drescrirrion oF SOME MARINE NEMER-

TEANS FROM PUGET SOUND AND ALASKA.

2. W. H. Hornaday, THe Desrrucrion oF BIRDS IN THE

UNITED STATES. :

3. N. R. Harrington, REporT ON THE CRUSTACEA OF PUGET

SOUND.

4. H. E. Crampton, Jr., AN Important INSTANCE OF INSECT

COALESCENCE.

In the absence of the author, Mr. Griffin’s paper was read

by title.

Mr. Hornaday first described the method employed to reduce

bird loss to figures. Circulars containing the following ques-

tions were sent out to trappers, guides, sportsmen and natural-

ists in all parts of the United States. (1) Are birds decreasing

RECORDS. 465

in your locality? (2) How many birds are there now com-

pared with fifteen years ago? (3) What are the most destruc-

tive agents? (4) Are any birds becoming extinct? The

answers came from all but four States and territories, and

showed surprising agreement. The most destructive agencies

are sportsmen, plume-hunters, boys after eggs, pot-hunters,

fire, English sparrows, etc.; and through these it has been esti-

mated that there has been a decrease of about 46% during the

last fifteen years. It was shown that game and edible birds are

becoming scarce, and that song birds are being used for food in

their stead ; that plume-birds are becoming extinct, and that de-

structive agencies are increasing. Mr. Hornaday concluded

with an appeal for more drastic measures in our game laws and

for their careful execution. The paper was discussed by the

Chairman, by Professor Osborn and by Mr. Mathews.

Mr. Harrington’s report was based on the Crustacea col-

lected at Puget Sound in 1896, and worked up by W. T. Cal-

man, University College, Dundee, Scotland. It dealt with sixty-

three species, some three of which were new. One of the new

species, a parasite, Psewdione giard., is interesting because males,

female, and larva, were all found on a single specimen of its

host Lupagurus ochotensis ; another new species, Polycheria os-

borni is interesting because the only other known representative

of the genus is found in the Antarctic region. The entire col-

lection was made up as follows: Macrura, 15 species (13 of

which were shrimps); Srachyura, 34 species; [sopoda, 6 spe-

cies; Amphipoda, 3 species; Copepoda, I species.

Mr. Crampton spoke of his experiments on insect-grafting,

and of one case in particular where the colors of the scales of

one species were imposed upon the scales of another. The

paper was discussed by Dr. Dyar and others.

The Secretary of the Academy notified the Section that the

income of the John Strong Newberry Fund of the Council of

the Scientific Alliance is to be awarded this year to a paleon-

tologist or a zoologist ; and that a candidate should be chosen

before the Council meeting of April 2d.

Gary N. CALKINS,

Secretary of Section.

466 RECORDS.

SIATED MEBITEING:

MarcH 21, 1898.

President Osborn in the chair. Minutes of meeting of Feb-

ruary were read and approved. Secretary read the following

paper by title:

THE PHYSIOLOGY OF SECRETION, by Albert P. Mathews.

Section of Geology and Mineralogy then formed.

RICHARD E. DODGE,

Secretary,

SECTION OF GEOLOGY. AND: MINERMEOG

MARCH 21, 18098.

Professor Kemp in the chair. Thirty-four members present.

Minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. Secretary

read a letter from the Secretary of the Scientific Alliance mm

reference to the Newberry grant for paleontology or zoology.

The paper of the evening, illustrated by lantern, was by Dr.

Heinrich Ries, entitled THe Cray anp Kaorin DEposits OF

Europe. Dr. Ries sketched briefly the geographical distribu-

tion of the Kaolin deposits, and their relation and comparison to

similar deposits of America. He then gave special attention to

the deposits of Great Britain, Belgium, Denmark, Germany and

Austria, and mentioned briefly those found in other regions

He described particularly the deposits of Cornwall, which are

found in association with veins of Tin and Granite in regions

where it is supposed that the Feldspar has been changed to Kaolin

through the influence of fluoric fumes rising from below. These

products are very pure, containing 97 %4 % of clay substance. He

also spoke of the ball plastic clays found in southwestern Eng-

land, which occur in lenses in large beds of sand, and are used

to mix with non-plastic kaolins. Refractory clays are found in

England and Scotland in the Carboniferous rocks, and are worked

by underground mining. Impure clays, used for bricks, are par-

ticularly found in the vicinity of London. The Staffordshire

ce COR DS. 467

blue brick, Fuller’s earth and Bath brick deposits were sketched

briefly, and the technological treatment in Great Britain, Ger-

many and the United States was compared. The latter part of

the paper was devoted to a rapid summary of the position, quality,

uses and manner of mining of the famous clays of Bornholm,

Denmark ; of the Glasspot clays of southeastern Belgium ; of

the Kaolin deposits of Limoges, France, and the deposits of

Prussia.

The paper was discussed by Dr. Julien, the Chairman, and

Professor Hallock.

Professor Henry F. Osborn described the progress this year

made through international effort in correlating the larger divi-

sions of the fresh water Tertiary deposits of Europe by a study

of the vertebrate remains.

Professor J. F. Kemp was nominated for Chairman of the Sec-

tion for the ensuing year. There being no other nomination he

was unanimously elected.

Dr. Heinrich Ries was nominated for Secretary of the Section

and unanimously elected.

Academy adjourned at 9:15.

| RicHARD E. DonceE,

Secretary of Section.

SUB-SECTION OF PHILOLOGY.

MarcH 28, 1808.

Meeting called to order by Chairman, Professor T. R. Price.

Officers for the ensuing year were elected: Lawrence A. Mc-

Louth, Chairman, A. V. Williams Jackson, Secretary.

Moved and carried to request Council of Academy to pro-

vide for four meetings of Philological Section for 1898-99.

The following papers were read and discussed :

E. G. Sihler, Tue carrer part or Lucretius, AND Epicurus

TEN PETEWO POY.

J. R. Wheeler, THE Newry Discoverep Poems or Baccuy-

LIDES.

468 KECOKDS.

B. D. Woodward, THE VowELs OF THE RUMANIAN AND

OTHER ROMANCE LANGUAGES.

On account of the lateness of the hour, the reading of the

last paper on the programme was postponed.

LawRENcE A. McLoutu,

Secretary of Section.

REGULAR: BUSINESS MEETENG:

APRIL 4, 19890:

Academy met at 8:10, President H. F. Osborn in the chair.

Minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

Secretary submitted the following list of names that had

been approved by the Council for election, and was authorized

to cast one ballot for the same, which was done.

MEMBERS ELECTED.

Miss Catherine W. Bruce, 810 Fifth avenue, Life Member

Douglas Burnett, 42 Livingston street, Brooklyn.

S. V. Hoffman, Morristown, N. J.

MEMBERS PROPOSED.

The following candidates for membership were read and re-

ferred to the Council under the rules:

Francisco G. P. Ledo, Chancellor of the Brazilian Consulate.

C..E. Tripler, 121 West oth street:

De L: T? Chamberlain, 123 Muth avenue.

The President appointed Mr. P. H. Dudley as the represen-

tative of the Academy in the Sctentific Alliance, in the place of

Professor J. J. Stevenson, resigned.

The Secretary made announcement of the changes to be in-

corporated in the eleventh volume of the ANNALS, now under

way, with certain new regulations in reference to the printing of

papers, and gave a statement of recent business transacted by

the Council.

Section of Astronomy and Physics then organized.

RICHARD E. DonGE,

Secretary.

RECORDS. 469

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS.

APRIL 4, 1898.

The Section organized with Mr. P. H. Dudley, the Chairman,

presiding. There were sixteen persons present. After the

reading of the minutes of the last meeting, the following papers

were presented :

Mr. W. G. Levison showed a PHOTOGRAPHED EYE-PIECE

MIcRoMETER, and described the construction of it, also speaking

of micro-organisms as a complication in washing photographic

plates. He, in addition to this, described and showed a model

of a simple phosphoroscope. The discussion on these subjects

was participated in by W. Hallock, C. F. Cox, H. F. Osborn,

and C. C. Trowbridge.

The next paper was entitled A MopiricaTIoN oF MANCE’s

MetuHop oF MEASURING BATTERY ReEsISsTANCE, by W. S. Day.

This was treated mathematically by Dr. Day at considerable

length. After this Frank Schlesinger read a short paper upon

THE PR#SEPE GROUP, mentioning the measurement and reduc-

tion of the Rutherford photographs of this group. After a few

questions by members on the subject of the measurements the

meeting adjourned.

REGINALD GORDON,

Secretary of Section.

SECTION: OF BIOLOGY.

APRIL II, 1898.

Professor Wilson in the chair. Eighteen persons present.

Election of sectional officers for ensuing year. Dr. Dean sec-

onded by Professor Stratford, moved that Professor Wilson and

Mr. Calkins be reelected to their respective offices, and the

Secretary was directed to cast one affirmative ballot.

The following programme was announced :

1. 0. S. Strong, A New PoInTt ON THE INNERVATION OF

THE LATERAL LINE ORGANS.

ANNALS N. Y. AcaD. Sci., XI, January 18, 1899—31

470 RECORDS.

2. A. P. Mathews, THE PuysioLoGy oF SECRETION.

3. G. N. Calkins, THE OriGIn oF Protozoan NUCLEI.

4. F. C. Paulmier, SPERMATOGENESIS IN HEMIPTERA. |

Dr. Strong explained some exceptions which have been urged

to the view that the lateral line organs are innervated exclusively

by special roots having a common center in the medulla.

Among these exceptions is the innervation of a certain canal-

organ by a branch of the glossopharyngeus instead of by a lat-

eral line nerve proper. Dr. Strong showed that, close to the

medulla in the young dog-fish (Sgwalus acanthias) a small intra-

cranial bundle of fibers becomes detached from the lateral line

root, and fuses with the glossopharyngeus. This bundle retains

its identity, shown by greater calibre, etc. On emerging from

the auditory capsule the bundle becomes detached and passes

to a canal organ. Similar fibers described by Kingsbury in

Anua, would probably be found to have the same history.

The three other papers were read by title, the authors not

being present.

H. E. CRAMPTON,

Secretary of Section, pro tem.

FIFTH ANNUAL EXHIBITION,

APRIL 13 AND 14, 1808.

The Fifth Annual Reception was held in the American Mu-

seum of Natural History, April 13 and 14, 1898, under the

control of the following committee, assisted by the chairmen of

fifteen departments of science: Henry F. Osborn, Reginald

Gordon,- Charles: F: 1Cox,: Gary IN Calkins;eand, Racharadae:

Dodge, Chairman.

The exhibition lasted two evenings and one afternoon, and

was attended by an estimated umber of more than 6,000 people.

The annual lecture was given April 14th by Professor George

E. Hale, of Yerkes Observatory, on ‘THE FuNcTION OF LARGE

TELESCOPES.”” Several demonstrations of Liquid Air were given

by Mr. Charles E. Tripler.

RECORDS. 471

The programme and catalogue of this exhibition is printed as

an appendix to Part I of Vol. XI of the ANNALs.

RICHARD E. DODGE,

Secretary.

STATED. MEE LENG.

APRIL 18, 18098.

Academy met with Vice-President Kemp in the chair, in

Schermerhorn Hall, Columbia University.

Minutes of the meeting for March were read and approved.

Letters of thanks from Professor J. P. Iddings and Frank P.

Adams, accepting the honor of being elected Corresponding

Members were read.

Having no further business, the Section of Geology and

Mineralogy then formed.

RICHARD E. DOonpcE,

Secretary.

Sec ltiONn OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

APRIL 18, 1898.

Professor Kemp in the chair. Thirty-five members present.

Professor Kemp made a few opening remarks and was fol-

lowed by Dr. A. A. Julien who read a paper entitled THE

ELEMENTS OF STRENGTH AND WEAKNESS IN BUILDING STONES.

Dr. Julien called attention to the fact that in the testing of

building stones little consideration is given to the causes influ-

encing their various properties. In judging the resistance which

a stone shows towards weathering, care should be taken to rec-

ognize the character of the forces to which it has been sub-

jected. The strength of a stone bears no relation to its mineral

components, but is dependent on the shape and arrangement of

the mineral grains and the character of the cementing material.

In considering the strength of a stone four facts have to be kept

in mind, viz.: interlockment of the particles; coherence, de-

472 RECORDS.

pendent on the character of the cement and adhesion of the

grains ; rigidity and tension. The “quarry sap,” Dr. Julien be-

lieves, plays a more important role than has hitherto been rec-

ognized, as it probably carries much of the cement in solution

and deposits it only when the stone is exposed to the air. This

accounts for the hardening of the stones after being quarried.

A distinction should also be made between porosity due to

cavities between the grains and interstices in the individual min-

etals. The former is a source of weakness; the latter not, al-

though either may cause the rock to exhibit a high absorptive

capacity. All of these points, which have an important bearing

on the strength of building stones are best studied with the

microscope. The paper was illustrated by means of sectiors

thrown on the screen with a polarizing lantern. Discussion

was by Professor Kemp and Mrs. Dudley.

The second paper of the evening was by J. D. Irving on

CONTACT-METAMORPHISM OF THE PALISADES DIABASE.

Mr. Irving referred to the work done by Professor Osann and

Andrae some years ago and stated that his results agreed with

theirs, but recent railroad excavations at Shadyside had enabled

him to obtain additional facts. The Diabase flow becomes

denser, finer grained and porphyritic towards the contact, with a

Mr. Irving found: 1. A normal hornfels zone rich in Spinel.

2. A hornfels zone with brown basaltic hornblende layers.

3. Hornfels with an undeterminable isotropic mineral resemb-

ling Leucite. 4. Hornfels with Andalusite, gradually chang-

ing to Arkose farther from the contact. The Diabase is to be

considered as an intruded mass and nota surface flow. The

paper was discussed by Professors Kemp, Dodge, Dr. Hovey

and Mr. White.

Owing to the lateness of the hour the reading of the other

two papers on the programme was deferred until the next meet-

ing.

Academy adjourned at 10:15.

HEINRICH RIEs,

Secretary of Section.

RECORDS: 473

SUBSECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND

PSYCHOLOGY.

APRIL 25, 1898.

President Osborn in the chair.

After some discussion, the section asked the chair to appoint

a committee of four to confer with the council in reference to

the number of meetings to be held by the Section of Psychology

and Anthropology during the coming year. The committee

appointed consisted of Messrs. Bliss, Farrand, McLouth and

Boas.

The following papers were then presented :

J. D. Prince, Some Passamaquoppy DOCUMENTS.

L. McWhood, A Meruop or StupyinG THE Motor EFFECTS

oF Music.

After the papers Charles B. Bliss was elected Secretary of the

subsection for the coming year.

CHARLES B. BLIss,

Secretary of Section.

RGU kK PUBLIC LECTURE.

The third public lecture of the year was delivered Friday

evening, April 29, 1898, at the Mott Memorial Library, by

James Douglass, Esq., of New York, on the subject: Furry

YEARS’ PROGRESS IN MINING AND METALLURGY IN THE UNITED

STATES.

The lecture was copiously illustrated by lantern slides, and

was both descriptive and statistical. The changes in centers of

production and the improvements in furnaces were shown for

iron, copper and the precious metals. At the conclusion of the

lecture there was passed a vote of thanks to Mr. Douglass.

Forty members and friends were present.

RIcHARD E. DOonDGE,

Secretary.

474 RECORDS.

SPATED MEETING OF THE TACADEMa.

May 2, 1808.

Academy met at 8 P. M., Mott Memorial Library. President

Osborn in the chair. In the absence of the Secretary, Mr.

William Hallock was appointed Secretary, pro tem. Minutes

of the last meeting were read and approved.

MEMBERS ELECTED.

The following candidates for election, approved by the Coun-

cil, were read by the Secretary who was authorized to cast one

ballot for them, which he did.

Dr: L.. Y.Chamberlin) 125) Piith-avenue.

Francisco G; P. Weso0, 23 State streck:

Charles E> Tnipler;- 121 West. Soth street.

AMENDMENTS TO By-Laws.

The following amendments to the by-laws recommended by

Mr. C. F. Cox, Mr. Wm. Hallock and Mr. Edmund B. Wilson,

a committee acting for the Council, were read and laid on the

table for one month, in accordance with the rules:

1. That Section 2 of Chapter I of the by-laws be repealed.

2. That a new section be added to Chapter I, entitled Sec-

tion 2, as follows:

“Any Resident Member or Fellow, who shall resign because

of removal to a distance from the city of New York, may be re-

stored to Membership or Fellowship at any time upon his own

application, by a vote of the Council, and without payment of

initiation fee.”’

A series of letters of acceptance were read by the Secretary

from several of the new Corresponding Members.

Section of Astronomy and Physics then organized.

WILLIAM HALLOcK,

Secretary, pro tem.

RECORDS. 475

SRLBION-OF BIOLOGY.

MEETING OF May g, 1898.

Professor Wilson in the chair, twenty-three persons present.

The following programme was offered :

1. C. L. Bristol, MEAsuREMENTS oF A LARGE LOBSTER

CAUGHT OFF SANDY Hook.

2. H. L. Clarke, Notes on BERMUDA ECHINODERMS, pre-

sented by C. L. Bristol.

a. 0. P.. Keppel and Go N. Calkins, F REPORT ON THE Hy-

DROIDS COLLECTED IN PUGET SOUND.

4. E. B. Wilson, ON THE STRUCTURE OF PROTOPLASM IN THE

EGcGs oF ECHINODERMS AND SOME OTHER ANIMALS.

5. In addition to the above Professor Osborne reported on

some facts concerning a huge herbivorous Dinosaur, bringing

out in particular the discovery of some hitherto unknown char-

acters of the caudal vertebre, and the peculiarly avian structure

of the posterior cervical and the anterior dorsal vertebre.

Gary N. CALKINS,

Secretary of Section.

se CliON OF GEOLOGY. AND. MINERALOGY.

May 16, 1898.

Professor Kemp in the chair. Ten persons present.

Minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

Mr. Geo. F. Kunz exhibited specimens of Quartz crystals in

massive Gypsum from Gallineo Springs, N. Mex., and announced

the discovery of a new meteorite from Ottawa, Kansas.

The first paper on the programme was by Professor D. S.

Martin on THE GeEoLocy oF CoLumsiA, S. C., AND ITs VI-

cinity. Professor Martin described the granitic and gneissic

rocks of that region, and their residual products. He also com-

mented on the character of the Potomac, Lafayette and Colum-

bian formations which are well exposed in the railroad cuts

south of the city.

476 RECORDS.

The paper was discussed by Mr. Dodge and Dr. Ries.

The next paper of the evening was by Professor Kemp, en-

titled SOME REMARKS ON TITANIFEROUS MaGnetitTes. The

speaker discussed the formula of Ilmenite, and stated that it was

probably a mixture of FeO, TiO,, and z FeO,. The amount

of Titanium present in the titaniferous magnetites is very variable,

running sometimes as high as 40% ; in the Adirondack ores it

running 10-20%.

Magnetic methods of separation for the elimination of the Ti-

tanium have not yet proved successful. Nearly all of the titanif-

erous magnetites show small amounts of MnO, Cr,O,, CoO, NiO,

V,O,and MgO. The latter suggests the presence of Spinel. SiO,

and AI,O, have also been found, but Phosphorus and Sulphur

are rare. Professor Kemp suggested that the rarer constituents

might have some influence on the metallurgical behavior of the

ore. The native and foreign occurrences of these ores were -

also alluded to.

Discussion of the paper was by Professor Martin, Dr. Ries

and Mr. Kunz.

Owing to Dr. Ries’ removal to Cornell University, his resig-

nation as Secretary of Section was accepted, and Mr. Geo. F.

Kunz elected Secretary for the remainder of the year.

Meeting adjourned at 10 P. M.

HEINRICH RIEs,

Secretary of Section.

SECTION “OF PHEROLGGr

Way..22,. tage:

The Section of Philology held its closing meeting for the

year 1897 and 1898 on Monday evening, May 23d. The at-

tendance numbered fifteen persons. Professor J. F. Kemp

opened the session and presented Professor L. A. McLouth,

the Chairman of the Section, who thereupon assumed the duties

of presiding officer for the coming year.

Professor T. R. Price brought forward a contribution in

RECORDS. 477

which he gave the results of his study of SHALL AND WILL IN

Livinc EncuisH Usace. Dr. Price’s investigations were con-

fined to works that have appeared since 1850, in order to get

the results of present usage. He chose as typical writings (1)

a file of the London Spectator from August, 1897, to January,

1898 ; (2) The Poems of Stephen Philips; (3) The Essay of

Henley on Robert Burns; (4) The Poems of Matthew Arnold ;

(5) The Idyls of Tennyson that have appeared since 1850. He

presented only that part of his paper which dealt with the first

person; the second and third persons are reserved to be printed.

His results showed that shad/, should are the normal usage in the

first person; / wl and / would in best usage are regularly con-

fined to the idea of volition. The distinction seems to be quite

sharply made in the best writers; and the number of occur-

rences is equally balanced. Several of those present took part

in the discussion that followed.

The second paper of the evening was by Professor L. ‘A.

McLouth, and was entitled, Norres on E. JosepH’s KuREN-

BURG THEORY. Dr. McLouth emphasized the strong points in

Joseph’s monograph, but criticised the tendency which the

writer showed at times, it seemed, somewhat arbitrarily to re-

construct the text on the basis of a preconceived theory. Dr.

McLouth favored rather a more conservative method.

Shortly after ten o’clock the meeting adjourned.

A. V. WILLIAMS JACKSON,

Secretary.

STATED MEETING.

JUNE 6, 1808.

Academy met at 64 Madison avenue, Vice-President Britton in

the chair. Minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

The changes in the by-laws which were to be brought up for

adoption at this meeting were laid over until October, a legal

quorum not being present.

478 RECORDS.

After a notice by the Secretary about the meeting place for

next year, the Section of Astronomy and Physics organized.

RICHARD E. DopaGE,

Secretary.

SECTION ‘OF ASTRONOMY Ey Slee:

JUNE 6, 1898.

Regular monthly meeting of the Section was held on Mon-

day, June 6th, at 8: P.-M., thetchairman, DE. 2. ne Dudley.

presiding. There were nine members and guests present.

The minutes of last meeting were read and approved.

Dr. P. H. Dudley read a paper on Strap Rairs oF THE Mo-

HAWK AND Hupson RAILROAD, and showed a specimen of the

rail, rolled in the year 1826.

After a few general questions and remarks, Dr. Budiey de-

scribed the improvement that has been made in the condition of

the track of the Boston and Albany Railroad, by the use of

heavy rails, especially on steep grades.

Professor D.S. Martin then read a paper entitled, ARCHEO-

LOGICAL NOTES NEAR COLUMBIA, S. C., and showed specimens

of curiously marked pieces of pottery found in that locality ;

also, a very interesting shell that had probably been used as a

drinking cup. -

After brief discussion, the meeting adjourned at 9:25 P. M.

R. Gorpdon,

Secretary.

REGULAR: BUSINESS? MEETING

OcTOBER 3, 1808.

Academy met at 12 West 3Ist street, at 8 P. M., Vice-Presi-

dent Kemp in the chair. The minutes of the last meeting were

read and approved.

Proposed changes in the by-laws in reference to Correspond-

RECORDS. 479

ing and absent Members were referred back to the committee on

by-laws, on request of the Secretary.

Section of Astronomy and Physics then organized.

RIcHARD E. DOonbGE,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS.

OCTOBER 3, 1898.

Section met on Monday evening, October 3, 1898, at 8 P. M.,

Vice-President J. F. Kemp in the chair. There were eighteen

members and guests present.

The minutes of the meeting of June 6, were read and ap-

proved.

The Secretary then read a paper by Mr. P. H. Dudley on

STREMMATOGRAPH RECORDS, giving some recent results obtained

with the instrument under locomotives, and entire trains. Brief

remarks were elicited by the paper, after which another by the

same author was read by the Secretary, entitled OXYDATION OF

Rairs 1n Tunnets. After a few remarks on the subject, the

Section adjourned.

REGINALD GORDON,

Secretary.

SHC LION OF BIOLOGY.

OCTOBER 10, 1898.

In absence of the chairman, Professor Wilson, Professor Os-

born presided. Twenty-four persons were present.

Professor Osborn referred to the loss sustained by the Acad-

emy, and the Biological Sciences in general, through the death

of Professor Baur, of Chicago, and of Dr. Arnold Graf, of New

York.

Following the usual custom the meeting was devoted to ac-

counts given by various members of their summer’s work.

480 RECORDS.

Professor H. F. Osborn described the different museums which

he visited in Europe, giving a very brief account of the good and

bad points of each. At Stuttgart he saw a unique and unde-

scribed fossil Yyrax which Professor Fraas very generously gave

him the pleasure of describing. The description was presented

at the Meeting of the British Association in Cambridge.

Professor Osborn was followed by Professor N. L. Britton,

who gave a resume of the work accomplished during the sum-

mer on the building and grounds at the Botanic Garden in

Bronx Park.

Professor B. Dean reported on a few results on the embryol-

ogy of the Hag Fish, which he thinks is similar to that of the

sharks. He also described the appearance of a South American

Lung Fish (Profopterus) which was sent to him in a ball of dried

mud.

Dr. 0. S. Strong and Mr. H. E. Crampton reported briefly

on the nature of the work accomplished at the Marine Biolog-

ical Laboratory at Wood’s Holl, bringing out particularly the

fact of the cordial relations between the investigators of the

Fish Commission and those of the laboratory.

Mr. N. R. Harrington related some interesting experiences

in connection with his expedition to the Nile valley in quest of

Polypterus bishir. The expedition, which was made possible by

the generosity of Mr. Chas. H. Senff, was undertaken by Mr.

Harrington and Dr. Reid Hunt. As guests of the Egyptian

government they enjoyed unusual advantages in securing their

ends, but only after repeated trials and discomforts and many

disappointments did they finally get the fish.

Other brief reports were made by Professor Lloyd (on the

botanic gardens of Germany), Dr. Brockway and Mr. Calkins.

At the suggestion of Professor Osborn and Dr. Dean a

series of nominations for corresponding membership was sent to

the Council.

Gary N. CALKINS,

Secretary.

RECORDS. 481

REGULAR MEETING.

~ OCTOBER 17, 1898.

Academy met at 8 P. M., Vice-President Kemp in the chair.

' Twenty-five persons present. In the absence of the Secretary,

reading of the minutes was dispensed with.

MEMBERS PROPOSED.

The following nominations for new members were presented

for the Secretary by the chair :

Jacob M. Rich, 50 West 36th street ; Ernest Foley, 108 East

62d street.

The nomination of Dr. Henry S. Washington, of Locust, N.

J., was made by Mr. George F. Kunz. These three names wee

referred to the Council under the rules.

The following paper was read by title: ANNOTATED CaAtTa-

LOGUE OF THE FAMILY OF Muricip# NorTH OF THE ISTHMUS OF

PanaMA, by Frank C. Baker, Chicago.

Section of Geology and Mineralogy then organized.

RICHARD E. DopGE,

Secretary.

SCTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

OcTOBER 17, 18098.

Section met at 8 P. M., Professor Kemp in the chair, and

twenty-two members present.

The first paper, by Professor J. F. Kemp, on the MINERALS

OF THE CoprpER Mines aT DuckTown, TENN., gave a brief his-

tory of the mines, and described some of the processes em-

ployed in treating the ores and the character of the rocks and

the associated minerals. The paper was illustrated with an ex-

tended series of lantern views of the mines and the works, and

with a suite of specimens. Professor Kemp referred particularly

to the extremely interesting crystals of Almandite Garnet which

he showed, in which the faces of the hexoctahedron are strik-

482 RECORDS.

ingly developed, giving 48-sided forms, sometimes with small

faces of the rhombic dodecahedron in addition. Zoisite also

occurs in fine terminated crystals, and Limonite of remarkable

iridescence.

The second paper, by Dr. Arthur Hollick, was entitled NorEs

ON THE GLACIAL PHENOMENA OF STATEN ISLAND, and embodied

the general results of several years of study and exploration by

himself and others. The author outlined the topography of the

island and the distribution of drift material upon it, and de-

scribed the transported contents of the drift with relation to their

sources. Most of the drift material is made up of the Triassic

sandstone and shale from the adjacent mainland, ground up by

the ice-sheet ; but the boulders are largely brought from afar.

They comprise material from all the fossiliferous beds of central

New York, from the Potsdam to the Hamilton, but there is a

great preponderance of Lower Helderberg and Schoharie grit.

The fossils are in many cases finely preserved, have been col-

lected in large quantities, very carefully studied and determined.

The question as to the route by which they have come, over

the hilly and almost mountainous regions lying between their

source and their resting place is one of much interest.

An extended discussion followed the reading of this paper.

Mr. van Ingen claimed that the course had probably been down

the Mohawk Valley to that of the Hudson and then down the

latter, rather than over the highlands of southern New York.

Professor Stevenson suggested that the transportation over this

long distance may have been due to repeated glacial movements,

each transporting over a moderate distance.

The next paper was by Mr. Francis C. Nicholas, on the

SEDIMENTARY FORMATIONS OF NORTHERN SoUTH AMERICA, and

dealt with 2 large area of fittle-explored country between the

Caribbean coast andthe Northern Andes. It was illustrated by

a most extensive and carefully labeled series of rocks, ores and

minerals from many localities and horizons, to which it was im-

possible to do justice within the limits of the evening. Among

many interesting points described and illustrated with speci-

mens was the agency of sun’s heat as a rock-disintegrator ;

RECORDS. 483

the changes of day and night temperature in high regions in

the tropics producing a fracturing of the superficial portions of

exposed rocks, comparable in result to the action of frost in

higher latitudes.

The last paper was by Mr. Geo. F. Kunz, upon A Mereoric

STONE THAT FELL AT ANDOVER, MAINE, ON AUGUST 5, 1808,

with exhibition of the stone, or rather about half of it. The

fall took place early in the morning of a cloudy and threatening

day, so that the sound made by the meteor, which was heard

for many miles around, was generally supposed to be thunder.

A dark cloudy trail, like a dense smoke, followed and marked

the path of the body through the air. Its course was from the

north, southward, and in coming down it tore its way through

a group of large trees, struck a heavy stone in a wall near the

ground and buried itself in the earth. Here it was found two

days later, by that time entirely cooled. The specimen is a

typical stony meteorite, with a thin black crust on the outside,

and of a bright pale gray on the broken surface, with very little

iron. It weighs about 7 pounds, and its description will appear,

later. Geo F. Kunz;

Secretary.

REGULAR - MEETING.

OCTOBER 24, 1898.

Academy met with President Osborn in the chair. Read-

ing of the minutes was dispensed with.

MEMBERS PROPOSED.

The following nominations for Resident Membership were read

by the Secretary and referred to the Council under the rules:

MaTurin L. DELAFIELD, JR., 56 Liberty street.

Rk. ELLswortH CALL, 201 Lenox avenue, Flatbush, Brooklyn.

After a notice from the President in reference to the forth-

coming meeting of the American Society of Naturalists, the

Section of Psychology and Anthropology organized.

RICHARD E. DOonbGE,

Secretary.

484 RECORDS.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND YsYCHoOLoGy:

OCTOBER 24, 1808.

At the close of the regular meeting of the Academy, the Sec-

tion of Anthropology and Psychology organized by appointing

Professor Osborn Chairman pro fem.

Professor J. McKeen Cattell presented a paper entitled

SomME ANTHROPOLOGICAL TESTS AND MEASUREMENTS, showing

two new instruments. Reports of summer field work in an-

thropology were then made by Dr. Livingston Farrand and

Mr. Harlan I. Smith, who spoke of their work on the northwest

coast, and by Dr. H. M. Saville and Dr. Carl Lumholtz, who

gave an account of explorations in Mexico.

CHARLES B. BLIss,

Secretary.

PUBLIC LECTURE.

OCTOBER 31, 1898.

The first public lecture of the season of 1898-99 was given by

Professor George W. Blodgett, of the Boston and Albany

Railroad, on RAILWAY SIGNALLING, PAST AND PRESENT. The

lecture was under the auspices of the Section of Astronomy

and Physics.

The lecturer was introduced by the Chairman, Mr. -P. H.

Dudley, who gave a brief summary of railway progress within

the last few years.

Professor Blodgett spoke simply and very interestingly for an

hour and a-half, sketching the various systems of railway signals

in use on the more important railroads, and illustrating his re-

marks with an extensive series of well-chosen lantern slides.

The lecture was free from technicalities, and very pleasing.

About sixty guests were present, and at the close of the lec-

ture a vote of thanks was unanimously extended to Professor

Blodgett. RIcHARD E. DonGceE,

Secretary.

RECORDS. 485

REGULAR MEETING.

NOVEMBER 7, 18098.

Academy met with Mr. P. H. Dudley presiding.

There not being a quorum present, the business meeting was

postponed to Monday, November 14th.

RICHARD E. DoncGE,

Secretary.

SECTION OF. ASTRONOMY AND *PHYSICS:

NOVEMBER 7, 1808.

Stated meeting, Monday, November 7, 1898, Dr. P. H. Dud-

ley presiding. Eight members present.

Professor J. K. Rees read a paper on VARIATION OF LATI-

TUDE AND THE CONSTANT OF ‘ABERRATION. In this he ex-

plained the scope of the work that had been done in this direc-

tion at Columbia University during the years 1894-98, gave a

summary of the results, and stated that in future these observa-

tions would be carried on chiefly at Government observatories.

Accompanying the paper were plotted curves to show the dis-

placement of the earth’s axis from time to time, based upon

these observations.

The Section then adjourned. R. Gorpon,

: Secretary.

ADJOURNED BUSINESS MEETING.

NOVEMBER 14, 18098.

Academy met at 8 P. M., President Osborn in the chair.

Reading of the minutes of the previous meeting was dispensed

with.

: MeMBERS ELECTED.

The following names for membership were reported from the

Council, and the Secretary was instructed to cast one ballot for

the list, and they were thereby elected.

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. Scl., XI, January 19, 1899—32.

486 RECORDS.

M. lL: Delafield; Jr, 56 Liberty street, (iene Wemiber

Ernest Foley, 108 East 62d street.

Dr HS: Washington, locusi Ney:

Jacob M. Rich, 50 West 38th street.

R. Ellsworth Call, 279 Winthrop street, Flatbush, Brooklyn.

MEMBERS PROPOSED.

The following nominations for membership were made and

referred to the Council :

Rev. A. B. Kendig, 86 Vernon street, Brookline, Mass.

Daniel C: Beard,-204 Amity street eE lushing- eg.

B. Talbot B. Hyde, 82 Washington street. Life Member.

J. D. Irving, Columbia University.

Professor Graham Lusk, New York ee Hospital and

Medical College.

Marshall A. Howe, Columbia Uiverige

Dr. L. H. Reuter, Merck Building, New York City.

Mason A. Stone, 20 East 66th street.

M. H. Beers, 408-410 Broadway.

Dr. Ivan Sickels; 17 Lexington avenue:

Alfred Douglas, 170 West 5oth street.

Dr. Max Meyer, 159 West 1034 street.

William L. Mason, 170 Fifth avenue.

William Wicke, First avenue and 3 Ist street.

Edward R. Hewitt, 119 East 18th street.

Professor Charles H. Judd, New York University.

A series of proposed by-laws, presented by the Council, were

read by the Secretary, and laid on the table until the next

business meeting, according to the rules.

RicHARD E. DopcGE,

Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY,

MEETING OF NOVEMBER 14, 1808.

Sixteen persons present.

The resignation of Professor E. B. Wilson was read and ac-

RBCORDS. 487

cepted by the section. Professor Frederick S. Lee was unani-

mously elected chairman of the section.

The following programme was then presented :

1. H. F. Osborn. ON THE PRESENCE OF A FRONTAL HORN

IN ACERATHERIUM IncIstvuM Kavp.

2. H. F. Osborn. On Some ADDITIONAL CHARACTERS OF

DipLopocus.

3. W. D. Matthew. On Some NEw CHARACTERS OF CL#-

NODON AND OXYENA.

4. W. E. Ritter. On THE ASCIDIANS COLLECTED BY THE

CoLuMBIA UNIVERSITY PuGET SOUND EXPEDITION OF 18696.

Presented by Dr. Dean.

5. J.P. McMurrick. Report ON THE HEXACTINI® OF THE

SAME EXPEDITION. Presented by Dr. Calkins.

Professor Osborn described the appearance of an hitherto un-

recognized frontal horn on the skulls of Aceratherium incisivum

Kaup ; a discovery of great importance as it practically removes

Aceratherium from the group to which it gives its name and

ranges it with the rhinoceroses. Professor Osborn suggested

that it may possibly be an ancestor of Alasmotherium.

In discussing the paper Dr. Wortman criticised the common

tendency to create types based an a single character, citing in

support of his suggestion the considerable variations to which

single individuals of a species are subject, and giving one or two

instances where errors have occurred.

In his second paper Professor Osborn described the structure

of the vertebre of Dzplodocus, bringing out in considerable de-

tail the variations in the sacrum of the herbivorous Dinosaurs.

Dr. Matthew briefly described the characters of the teeth,

manus and pes of C/enodon, a form belonging to one of the

three families, Arctocyonide, which gave rise to the present-day

Carnivora. The structure of the wrist bones in particular brings

this form almost within the limits of the Carnivora and Dr. Mat-

thew regards it as a primitive bear which lived on fruits, honey

or other soft foods.

Oxyena another typical Creodont, was also described by

Dr. Matthew, the principal points brought out being the dispro-

portion of the brain case, limbs and lower jaws.

488 RECORDS.

In the discussion which followed, Professor Osborn showed

that while C/enodon undoubtedly possesses many precocious

bear-like structures there are many difficulties to be pushed aside

before it can be considered the direct ancestor of the bear. There

are transitional forms for example between dogs and bears, as

shown in certain types of teeth (Amphicyon), while on the other

hand there is a marked difference in the size of the brain of the

Arctocyonidae and that of the bears ; the brain of the former re-

sembling more closely the brain of the marsupials. If the Am-

phicyon evidence is of a sufficient phylogenetic value the bear

line must have arisen much later than Dr. Matthew believes.

Dr. Lee also questioned the advisability of ascribing particular

functions to specialized structures, a criticism which Dr. Mat-

thew met by saying that in this case the relation of structure to

function was in the nature only of an hypothesis ; an explanation

supplemented by Professor Osborn’s statement that in all such

cases it is necessary to have some working hypothesis, although

each hypothesis is considered merely tentative.

At the request of Dr. Dean, Mr. Richard Weil was asked to

give the main results of his observations on the DEVELOPMENT

OF THE OssICULA AUDITUS IN THE Opossum. Mr. Weil finds that

both the malleus and incus are derived from the mandibular arch

and have no connection with the hypidean, thus confirming the

older German view.

The other papers on the programme presented by Dr. Dean

and Dr. Calkins were strictly technical and received only brief

mention.

Gary N. CALKINS,

Secretary.

REGULAR. MEETING.

NOVEMBER 21, 1808.

Academy met with Vice-President Kemp in the chair.

Reading of the minutes was dispensed with.

RECORDS. 489

MEMBERS PROPOSED.

The following nominations were read and referred to the

Council :

Fred W. Franklin, 700 West End avenue.

John I. D. Bristol, 1 Madison avenue.

Rudolph Keppler, 28 West 7oth street.

Academy adjourned.

RicHARD E. DODGE,

Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

NOVEMBER 21, 1898.

Section met at 8 P. M., the Chairman, Professor Kemp pre-

siding. Minutes of last meeting were read and approved.

The first paper of the evening was by Dr. J. H. Pratt, State

Mineralogist of North Carolina, on the OCCURRENCE, ORIGIN

AND CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF CHROMITE. An abstract follows.

Chromite has only been found in the peridotites and allied

basic magnesian rocks and in the alteration products of these

rocks. The mineral occurs in grains or crystals and in im-

bedded masses near the boundary of lenticular masses of peri-

dotite that have been shown to be of igneous origin. The

chromite occurs in the fresh as well as in the altered peridotite.

The theory advanced by the author for the origin of the

chromite is that the mineral was held in solution by the molten

mass of peridotite and crystallized out from the molten magma

as this began to cool.

The fused mass of rock would hold the different minerals in

solution, and as this began to cool, the minerals would separate

out, not according to their fusibility but according to their solu-

bility in the fused magma. The more basic minerals being the

more insoluble would be the first to separate out and in the

present case would be the minerals chromite, spinel and corun-

dum. This crystallizing or solidifying out from the molten

magma would take place first on its outer boundaries, for here

490 RECORDS.

it would cool first. Convection currents would tend to bring

new supplies of material to the outer zone where the chromic

oxide would be deposited as chromite.

This theory would account for all the vagaries of chromite

deposits, their pockety nature; the shooting off of apophyses

from the main masses of the chromite into the peridotite, the

widening and pinching of the chromite lodes ; and the appar-

ently non relation or connection of one pocket of chromite with

another. The masses of chromite that are found in the midst

of a peridotite formation, which at the present time are isolated

and have no connection with each other, were at the time of

their formation part of the chromite concentrated near the bor-

der of the peridotite.

In mining for either chromite or corundum it is in that deposit

found near the contact of the peridotite with the gneiss that a

large deposit of either of these minerals would be expected to

be found.

Chemical Composition.—¥rom an examination of the analysis

of chromite it is shown that a nearly pure chromite, with the

composition FeOAO, is rarely found in nature. With the ex-

ception of three, in all the chromite analyses examined, alumina

and magnesia were invariably present, and this would seem to

indicate that the molecule of the mineral now called chromite is

not pure FeOAO, but is a combination of the three isomorphous

molecules; PeOA,O,; MsOA,O;; and MeOAl Oana nee

ratio of a FeQA, 0, e the MgOA,O, or Meee Ney is gen-

erally 6. tor1o” 1.

An analysis of a chromite from See Jackson Co., N.

C., gave as A,O, — 95%; Al,O, — 29.28% ; FeO — 13.90, and

MgO — 17.31. This gave for the formula of the chromite,

ratio of the molecule MgOA,O, observed in any of the chromite

examined.

It was noticed that the magnesia usually varied with the

alumina, those rich in alumina being correspondingly rich in

magnesia.

The second paper was by Professor D. S. Martin, entitled

NOTES FROM THE SEMI-CENTENNIAL MEETING of A. A. A. S.

RECORDS. 491

Dr. Martin summarized the more important papers in geology

given at the 1898 meeting of the Association, and particularly

the papers devoted to glacial phenomena.

Section adjourned at 9: 45.

Gal Ounz,

Secretary.

eee llION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

NOVEMBER 28, 1898.

Section met at 8 P. M., with President Osborn and the Sec-

retary in charge of the meeting.

The following paper was read by title: A Parrozoic TErR-

RANE BENEATH THE CAMBRIAN, by Geo. F. Matthew, of St.

John, N. B.

The first paper of the evening was by Dr. Geo. V. N. Dear-

born, entitled, THE Emorion or Joy. Brief summary of a

monograph in experimental and descriptive physiological psy-

chology. ‘‘Somewhat in proportion to its pleasantness, an

emotional extramotion of ‘expression’ consists in general ex-

pansiveness and outwardly in contraction of the extensor mus-

cles ; this is, in particular, true of the smile and laugh of Joy,

the muscles concerned in which, from the early foetal cervical

flexion are properly of the extensor sort.’’ Four series of ex-

periments (nearly 3,500 in number), on the hands, head, arm,

and leg, prove the correlation between pleasantness and organic

sensation. The regular occurrence of habitual inhibitions, due

to the complex conditions of civilized social development, sup-

plies the apparent deficiency of the kinaesthetic theory in case

of the emotions of man. Human “emotions” are not so in

the biologic sense, but rather concrete expressions of the affec-

tive social consciousness at present quite indefinite.

The second paper of the evening was by Mr. E. G. Dexter,

entitled THe INFLUENCE OF THE WEATHER ON MENTAL ACTIV-

-ITIES OF CHILDREN, and was devoted to the particular study of

the apparent influence of the weather on the children of Den-

492 RECORDS.

ver, Col., as shown by the study of some 600 cases of punish-

ment inflicted upon children during a period of years. It was

illustrated by diagrams, and created considerable discussion.

The third paper was by Mr. Stansbury Hagar, entitled

THe WATER Buriat. Mr. Hagar paid particular attention

to the evidences of water burial as seen among the Micmac In-

dians, and gave a brief survey of similar customs in all parts of

the world, present and past.

The last paper was by Mr. A. Kroeber, entitled REMARKS

ON THE ESKIMOS OF THE CUMBERLAND SounpD. In this paper

Mr. Kroeber compared certain tales of the Eskimos of Cum-

berland Sound with those of other Eskimos, and paid particular

attention to two or three tales which were of unusual interest

because of their variations from the ordinary myths as hitherto

known among the Eskimos.

Section adjourned at 10 P. M.

RicHARD E. DopceE,

Secretary.

SUBSECTION: OF PHILOLOGY.

NOVEMBER 28, 1808.

The meeting was called to order at 8:30 P. M., by the Chair-

man, Professor McLouth.

The first paper was by Professor C. L. Speranza, entitled

MAcHIAVELLI. Machiavellism in the odious sense generally

attributed to the word, is misleading and does great injustice to

Machiavelli. It originated in the fact that no notice was taken

of the great man’s works except the one “‘ Del Principe,” which,

moreover, was misunderstood and judged from the standpoint

of morals instead of that of logic and science, as it ought. The

great aim of the booklet, namely, the formation of a great Italian

state, founded on the universal consent of the people, finding its

legitimacy within itself, independent, autonomous, and defended

not by mercenary soldiers, but by its own citizens, was lost sight

of. All importance was attached to what immoral means the

RECORDS. 493

author, prompted by experience, proposed as best fitted to ob-

tain that aim ; and none whatever was given to the sound and,

in some capital respects, original theory set down by him, ac-

cording to which the ruler of a state must act exclusively as the

representative of that state, propose to himself no other object

than the good of it, ascertain the best means to accomplish it, and

apply these means intelligently and resolutely. While Machia-

velli was convinced that the task of forming a great Italian state

capable of preserving its independence could be carried out

only by one man, and not by a republic, he was also convinced

that it was for the people to consolidate and make fruitful the

work performed by the one man. But the coiner of the word

Machiavellism took no notice of this; he ignored absolutely

Machiavelli's “‘ Discors,”’ by which he taught the people how

to govern themselves, and in which he devised the program of

democratic government which is entirely modern. Nor was any

notice taken of the other fact that Machiavelli proclaimed the

necessity of an international code regulating the conduct and

results of war, as well as other mutual relations between states ;

or of the foundation laid by him upon which the philosophy of

history has in modern times been built ; or of the thoroughly

experimental method by which he arrived at his conclusions ; or

the blow inflicted by him upon the artificial literary form of his

days, and the inauguration of the ordinary, direct, natural way

of discourse. In fact, Machiavellism, in its generally accepted

significance, represents what in Machiavelli’s system was merely

transitory and dependent upon circumstances of place and time,

instead of representing what was original, characteristic and of

permanent value.

The second paper was by Professor A. Cohn, entitled

SOME RerorMs IN FRENCH SPELLING. The needed reforms

in French spelling are those that consist in introducing more

uniformity, and correcting mistakes that have crept in through

misapprehension. In the word /egs (legacy), for instance, the

g was introduced, in the sixteenth century, by grammarians

who thought this word came from the verb “guver, while it really

comes from /azsser (to leave), a good reason for not pronouncing

the ¢.

494 RECORDS

The most important reform needed is the substitution of s for

4 in the plural, words like chapeaux, and in masculine adjectives

like genereux, and, in general, at the end of all words where wx

is preceded by a vowel. The presence of the # in these words

is the result of a misapprehension ; in old French texts the letter

+ is there for ws, as shown by the interchangeable spellings in

the same texts (for instance, dzar, diaus are both found in

Aucassin et Nicolette). We see thus that in the spelling deux,

the letter z is really twice represented. The advantage of spell-

ing, in the plural deus, chapeaus, and, in a whole class of adjec-

tives, gencrceus, odicus, etc., is evident. Besides being a correc-

tion, it would simplify greatly the rules for the formation of the

plural of nouns and adjectives, and of the feminine of adjectives,

as well as the rules of pronunciation. The rule for the forma-

tion of the plural of nouns and adjectives in az, eu, ou, would

then simply be the general rule: add an s to the singular. The

rule for the formation of the feminine of adjectives like g¢néreus,

etc., would also be the general rule: add a mute ¢ to the mas-

culine.

Also why spell zez (nose) with z? This word comes from

the Latin zaswm, and in old French texts z stands for ts. Ety-

mology would rather require to spell ez (Lat. zatos) and nés

(Lat. xasum), but, of course, no one thinks of substituting mes

for zes in the participle.

Silent penultimate letters like p in corps, temps, might be

dropped, and one might also spell chandbre instead of chamore,

substituting 2 for 7 before 6 and f/f, a spelling that would bring

more uniformity in the representation of nasal sounds. The

Latin origin of these words would be just as clear to scholars

as before.

None of these reforms, however, ought to be considered

necessary, except the substitution of s for x, as above outlined.

This last ought to be introduced at once, for the present spell-

ing is perfectly absurd. This paper was discussed by Professor

Jackson.

Professor E. G. Sihler then read the third paper, on THE

Main Lines oF CICERO’S PoLiTICAL JUDGMENTS. Dr. Sihler

RECORDS. 495

was ied to comment upon Mommsen’s attitude toward Cicero

and he endeavored to show from history and from Cicero’s

writings that the Roman orator’s judgments of Caesar were abso-

lutely fair. Professor Sihler went on to show that Cicero ac-

tually had a definite policy, that he put himself on the conserv-

ative side as opposed to the tribunal or democratic party, and

that such were his ideals and such the true convictions that he

lived up to in hiscareer. The paper was discussed by Professor

Cohn.

The subsection then adjourned.

A. V. WILLIAMS-JACKSON,

Secretary.

REGULAR BUSINESS: MEETING.

DECEMBER 5, 1808.

Academy met at 8 P. M., President Osborn in the chair,

Minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

The following list of nominations were submitted from the

Council, recommended for election as resident members, and

the Secretary was authorized to cast a ballot for the list and

they were thereby elected :

RESIDENT MEMBERS ELECTED.

Rev. A. B. Kendig, 86 Vernon street, Brookline, Mass.

Daniel C. Beard,.204 Amity. street, Flushing, L. I.

B. Talbot B. Hyde, 82 Washington street. Life member.

J. D. Irving, Columbia University.

Graham Lusk, New York University Hospital and Medical

College.

Marshall A. Howe, Columbia University.

Dr. L. H. Reuter, Merck Building, New York City.

Mason A. Stone, 20 East 66th street.

M. H. Beers, 408-410 Broadway.

Dr.-Ivan Sickles, 17 Lexington avenue.

Alfred Douglas, 170 West 59th street.

496 RECORDS.

Dr. Max Meyer, 159 West 103d street.

William L. Mason, 170 Fifth avenue.

William Wicke, First avenue and 3 Ist street.

Edward R. Hewitt, 119 East 18th street.

Charles H. Judd, New York University.

Fred W. Franklin, 700 West End avenue.

John I. D. Bristol, 1 Madison avenue.

Rudolph Keppler, 28 West 7oth street. Life member.

The proposed by-laws, submitted to the Academy for adop-

tion, were adopted with two slight amendments, and will appear

printed in ANNALS, Vol. XII, No. 1.

After certain announcements by the Secretary in reference to

new plans, the Academy adjourned.

RICHARD E. DODGE,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS.

DECEMBER 5, 1898.

The meeting was called to order at 8:15 P. M. by the Chair-

man, Mr. P. H. Dudley ; 24 members and guests being present.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

Mr. Wallace Goold Levison presented a paper A SysTEM

OF CLASSIFICATION OF THE FLUORESCENT AND PHOSPHORESCENT

SUBSTANCES, in which he classified as phosphorescent all those

substances that give out rays of shorter wave-length than that

of the rays they have previously received; and as fluorescent,

all those substances that give out rays of greater wave-length

than those they have received. The system was amplified by

an arrangement of substances under headings with reference to

the circumstances under which they phosphoresced or fluo-

resced. The classification was very clearly shown by lantern

slides of charts on which all phosphorescent and fluorescent

substances were set down, and in addition, remarks about their

behavior under various circumstances. This classification has

required much labor for its preparation, and at the conclusion

RECORDS. 497

of the paper the members of the Section expressed their appre-

ciation of it in a few remarks, with especial reference to the

logical arrangement of the subject-matter.

There being no further business, the Section adjourned at

9:50 P. M.

R. GORDON,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ‘BIOLOGY.

DECEMBER 12, 1808.

Thirty-one persons present, Professsor Lee in the chair. The

following programme was offered :

1. F. S. Lee. THe Course or MuScLeE FATIGUE.

2. W. K. Brooks. THe EmsryoLocy or LUCIFER.

3. F. E. Lloyd. Srupies In THE EmBryoLocy OF THE Ru-

BIACE. }

4. N. R. Harrington and Edward Leaming. THE Reac-

TION OF AmazBA TO LIGHT OF DIFFERENT COLORS.

Professor Lee showed that in the different types of animals

‘studied by him in determining the course of muscle fatigue, the

height of the curve, which represents the lifting power, becomes

less and less in all cases. The reduction in height of the curve

is accompanied in the case of muscles from the frog and turtle,

by a concomitant increase of the duration of relaxation. The

duration of contraction is also increased slightly in the frog and

greatly in the turtle. In the cat neither of these secondary

phenomena is represented, the height of the curve, or the lifting

power, alone varying. The experiments show that the diminu-

tion of the latter phenomenon is the essential element in fatigue.

Professor Brooks gave a brief review of his interesting obser-

vations on the development of Lucifer bringing out in particular

the essential features of cleavage and gastrulation which dis-

tinguish this decapod from most of its allies.

In the discussion which followed the paper it was shown by

Professor Brooks that his results on the unusual mode of

498 hE CORDS.

cleavage of this form throw no light upon its phylogenetic

position or upon that of its allies.

Professor Brooks’ paper was accompanied by a demonstra-

tion of three microscopic preparations.

Professor Lloyd showed that in a number of genera of Rubi-

aceze studied by him the embryo-sac is divided into two regions ;

an upper region in which the pro-embryo is developed, and a

lower part containing numerous nuclei of uncertain origin.

The suspensor of the pro-embryo develops branches which act

as haustoria, taking food from the endosperm. The latter in

turn takes its food from the integument by means of cells spec-

ialized for food absorption.

Dr. Leaming showed that light of different colors acts

strongly upon the activities of Ameba proteus. Certain colors

(red, orange, yellow and green) accelerate the protoplasmic

flow, while other colors (white, violet and blue) retard it. The

apparatus was fully described and the experiments were re-

peated in part, before the Section.

Gary N. CALKINS,

Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND: MINERALOGN;

DECEMBER IQ, 1898.

Section met with Professor J. F. Kemp in the chair. Twelve

persons present.

A paper was read by Mr. Henry S. Washington, on THE

IGNEous Rocks oF Essex County, Mass. The rocks were de-

scribed in some detail, and shown to be mainly Granites, Quartz-

Syenites corresponding to the Akerites and Nordmarkites of

Brogger ; Quartz-Diorites and Diorites, with smaller areas of

Nepheline-Syenite, Syenite, Essexite and Gabbro. These are

cut by numerous dykes of various kinds, including Aplites,

Granite-Porphyries, Paisanites, Solvbergites, Tinguaites, and

many basic dykes, most of which are of Diabase, but some of

camptonitic rocks. There are also extensive flows of Rhyolite,

RECORDS. 499

accompanied by ash beds and breccias. Twenty-two analyses

of the various types were given.

The character of the region as a petrographical province was

discussed at some length. Chemically it was shown to be rich in

alkalies, especially Soda, low in Lime and very low in Magnesia,

and rather acid. The low Magnesia was commented on, and the

occurrence noted of many minerals in these rocks as varieties

poor in this oxide which are usually rich in it, as Lepidomelane,

Fayalite and Glaucophane. The usually high ratio of FeO to

Fe,O, was discussed and it was pointed out that in most of the

rocks FeO is extremely high, replacing MgO, while in the

foyaitic group it is much lower. Iron oxides tend to vary with

soda. Soda is constantly higher than Potash, but the molecular

ratio varies a great deal, being about 1.10 in the granitic rocks,

higher in the foyaitic group, and very high in the basic, the

ratio in nearly every case approximating to whole numbers.

This differentiation of Na,O was commented on and its impor-

tance pointed out.

Comparisons were instituted with other regions and the great

resembance to the rocks of southern Norway were described. It

was shown that probably the chemical composition of the magma

as a whole approaches that of a Nordmarkite, and that it is rather

acid, asin Norway. The relations of the rocks of Essex county

to those of the other alkali-rich regions of the Atlantic slope were

also discussed.

The paper was discussed by Professor Kemp and others.

fe 7, JULIEN,

Secretary pro tent.

7 pan i pia

= hel

“| ea? ’

GENERAL INDEX TO VOLUME XI.

Names of authors in heavy face type.

Generic and specific names in z¢a/ics.

Bee DIEAL LON IN; . nes .ciec eves acess 49 | Andromeda parlatorit, Heer......420, 428

Abnaki,’see Wabaniki............000 Anilin colors; discovery of........... 184

Acalypha gracilens, of BlockIsland 65 | Annelids. Early development of..1, 3, 13

Acanthonyx petiverit, Milne-Ed- LOREM cn Seen Fe wes a 239, 244, 246, 250

MAIER IE san besanestddasees coddesse'e 236:| Anopla and -Bn0p1 a: vis fae cnscvseeet 197-9

Acasta cyathus, Darwin.............+. 254 Ant-Eater, Bronchial System of..... 138

Acheloiis depressifroms S., etc........ 233.1, Amtipyrin 5, discowely Of: .c0ss.56.0 184

Actea acantha, Milne-Edwards..... 232 | Antiseptic SUrgery..........cceesseeees 187

MODINE einai dSictaweccieewtves es 380, 388 | Anweers, A.. Hon Mem............ 460

Actinospherium, nuclei of........ 280; 206 | Adysta Glands) Of... Jancdes os eeaors 331

RMBEREIAT ECT oa gic cc cic noes ease <ewncs ZOO WAGE CATO! >, a stundasudsncgwdastseerat ademhece 189

Pee MIEICWICZ, TEL. ......:..:.-sarescas 364 | Aralia rotundiloba Newb (?)....421, 430

means. FF. D., Cor. Mem..........0. 461 | Archzeology of Block Id.............. 70

Adams and White, ref.............. 241 | Archenteron, formation of............ 6

Hepy, Ch.; ref. Archoplasm, of Protozoa............. 394

127-8, 131, 134, 139-40, 142-4, 146-7 | Avgeza, sp., of Puget Sd......... 261, 281

Afanassiew and Pawlow, ref..298, 364 | Arvgulus foliaceus; glands of.,...... 331

PEMSSIZ TOL io. c gee cdccsecss 189, 412-13 | Avzcta; Ancestral Reminiscence,

mbasica’s AMpPhipora, ... isso ssesiee sae PEO By) GACUC aca caislatacynoansereaiteanes 3-6, 10-26

MON ARElIALA. «5 cecnt ss cae veess 390 | Arrochar, Staten Id., Cretaceous

Marine Nemerteans.............. 193 (a (Re eye ay APRS Sos 416, 419-20

Alchemy and Chemistry .............. 177 | Artiodactyla; Bronchial System

Algonkin Indians.............. 369-70, 377 CE PO EAC e aaa tic Sasi wicklaciwedties 129, 138

SEE ACC sc csioadieiscnsdseseessass 246 | Asclepias pulchra Ebrh., of Block

Alpheus edwardsit, etc......06 246, 249- ote 1G a ie alee Seen re moe er eee 65

Amboy clay series ‘of Block Island.. 56/ Asia; Pacific Nemerteans of......... 191

mmer. Psych, Assoc., report of Asterias atlantica and tenuispina

Be ININS tos sat co tecsutawenweds eRe CO, Py MAMI yore Sars s deca nibya ein Baaha d 408-9, 411

PIERO DYOLCUS; cidsaes vondanwes 89-90, 400 | Asteroids of Bermuda............. 407, 411

Reaction of, to colored light... 499 | Astrology and Astronomy ............ 177

Amphibia ; Coalescence of embryos 219 | Astronomy; sketch of history...... 177-9

Skin-glands of,...... 298, 2a 330-1 | Athanas ortmanni, N. SP.........008- 251

Poison-glands of... 331 | Atropine ; action of, and _pilocar-

Amphipoda ; Northrop Coll., “254; pine, 296, 298, 301, 317, 320, 339, 349

embueeb (od: 03... dune cteomecske 261, 265 | Atlantic; Astertas of Eastern....... 408

Amphiporus , of N. Pacific, 196 Twenty-foot contour of coast,

pL IC sss cat tinkiahs ¥ ieepar eee 210-14 Ra Nebeg etic ois hac nn'svv dele od oleeictas Nee 88

Amphithoé, of Puget Sd., Anda, of Puget Sd... incsececes ance 268

261, 271 273, 290| Auchenia; Bronchial System of,

Amphitrite; Ancestral Reminis- £20, /130;.140,- 102

GCE. calle onacsss vicaabadersainaneaeemes 24

Rudimentary cells, 6, 12; ves- Bacteria, NUCIEUS Of. .i..2. cases te. cu' 382

IEPA GGENS ey aso nadieecodebetadiateboes 2 | Badger, Amer.; bronchial tree of..132-3

TAGS, 2.555. Sone ocaoemnsmtaeants 331 | BAHAMAS ; THE NORTHROP COL-

ANCESTRAI, RENIMISCENCE; CON- LECTION OF CRUSTACEA FROM,

SIDERATIONS ON CELL-LINEAGE De TR re fs oon, u dain S0'e Seuiwrep actetosin 225

ARDS UU ISOs cocces es Sedgutedent pibailey. VY WW .3 ref... ci. cveeces 63-4, 66

(501 )

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCt.,

XI, March 14, 1899—33.

502 INDEX.

Balanide, Darwin; of Bahamas... 254, Brachyura, of Puget Sd....227, 230, 262

Balfour,+W, 0B. Cor: Meém. 2... 461 | Bradypus ; Bronchial tree of........ 129

Ball’s Point, Block Id., Paleobot- Brandt 5 tetsu. secs seein ceeeeeee 267

AAW GL jet cesta: sese eee Sets 57 0038, 04"), IBAM Ce ier ee oe eee cae 376

Ballast ; destruction of by, trains.... 89) Brauer, A.; ref.......:..... 392, 395, 397

Balena, bronchial tree of........ 129, 135 | Bremerton; Lemeus, ceribratulus at 215

Laptisia ; absence of bronchial tree Brinton sel, oe teeere nee 376-7

PMI etepetceiiss = oasis cama scite' testa aeemed 66 | Brissus unicolor K\., of Bermuda.. 413.

PArtint ey, WC ely.ccce a cgee rcecuseereaeues 364 | ‘Bristol, Jz TP: D.,) Res. Meme... 9496

Bate. Spence, Tel. ....stuntas-csess 240—Ti4| STISt@l eke a0 o.ccnucaresanee sere eee 407-9

244, 246, 250, 252, 264-8, 270, 273-4 | British Geol. Survey; basis of...... 184

Battery Resistance, measurement of 469 Sessile-eyed Crustacea........... 280

Baur, G: ‘Corsi Meni es wens: cis 461 | Columbia; Recent Archeol.

Bayliss ; ref., 299; and Hill; ref 364 | Investigation in. (..22. 06040 450

Beard) ..D.iC. . des, WWlemy Sesjceee 495 | BRONCHIAL SYSTEM OF. MAMMALIA ;

Benedict and Rathbun, ref....... 230| THE EPARTERIAL, Huntington 127

Beers, MVE... Res. Mem: is,.22.% 495 Symmetrical series of types,

Beringer’s pseudo-fossils, Kemp... 449 Tyee Plate 4-4 eee 144

Berkely, John, tels..2.4¢45-2.c0 400 364 Aeby’s classification of B. Tree 129

BERMUDA; NOTES ON ECHINO- Brooks, W. K., Hon. Mem......... 460

DERMS On, ClaTK Fe cos.4cceeisners 407 | Brooks, W. K.; The Embryology

Bernard, Clauderret.s-..5, 37.0.0. 295 of Loucifets Ranccgscaecec nero ne 497

besserier Steel process. cusenuecenacns 182 POL a. sass gaebesceeececee serene nee 253

Biondi-Ehbrlich mixtute:.0..<dececes 387:| Brown, A. 5.5 Jes Mien. ee 451

Birds, oil glands of, 331; of Block Brewis: TEES. doen eae 339

Id., 71-2; DESTRUCTION OF, IN Brown -Séquartl: tel... tc. een 365

THE U,..S.,! Hornaday, 404; Brunton; quoted s.4:5.5..-.00-ee ces 351

DISTRIBUTION OF, IN VERA CRUZ, Bruce, C. W.,.,. lutte: Mem 2...:0..008 468

Chapin. o.4 ve ccsee. sas ccee tee mneet 447 | Budde-Lund 3 -refes.; 22. 282

Beant, nt rete ces eee astte ate a41 | Bud-scales of -Pimus.....J:.<<ccuseseees 47

Black Rock Pt., Block Id., Paleo- BUILDING STONES, ELEMENTS OF

bOtaniy Oleic asses keene recente 56-62 STRENGTH AND WEAKNESS, in

Blalee, J As, « dkes,. Memit n¢20 sc 06: AG2 4. Pullem ss irs cscnyecuspans esses ea

BLASTOIDS AND CRINOIDS; DE- | Bull Pine, Hypertrophied Scale-

VONIAN ; DESCRIPTION OF, FROM | eavEs AMA ttoc. oak eee eee 45

MILWAUKEE, WIs.; Weller.....

Bilochiuanns Tete. oe) ease ee ee

BLOcK ISLAND; NOTES ON;

lick, 55-62; further notes on

Geol. and Bot., 448 ; Geol. Hist.,

68-9; Physiog and Flora, 64;

Cretaceous of, 416; Maps........ 74, 88

Bilockmanns Rel. s3 26552508. ovewen oe 394

Boas and Zimmermann; ref. note 145

Bomite : *refiecs tts fea. - 6 eae 230

Bopiridg, OF Puget oun... 25.0.2 274

BODY FINA DUOIL Reconeeiseeves 27S

Borlasia, of Puget Sound:.........:- 198

BS Oris $ tel a cater cee wok gee van sees 219

Boston and Albany R. R.; rail

ES EST OM Soe rerctereletsistsettetstetet eter tsistere 90, 95, 105

Botallian duct, in pulmonary circu

EN (3) cS Re er Rte bee 145

Botany ; economic value of.......... 186

Of Block Lads te areessnecsstnw's 63-7

Tpoyd. jy. es; Meunier. fs s-npecsee so 451

Bowditch set. occ. sote eee ek 360

Burger, O.; ref.

197, 190,, 201, 205, 207.215 ..20y,

468

| Burnett, DL, Resi Miemie 2 cee eres,

Butschli, O.; ref. 382-3, 390. 393-4, 397

By-Laws, Amendments to........ 451, 474

Catal>-'fetigs.<.. betes eae eee 364

Calbuco, Chili; 7lectonema of.. 209

Calkins, Gary N. -THE PHYLO-

GENETIC SIGNIFICANCE OF CER-

TAIN PROTOZOAN NUCLEI........ 379

THE ORIGIN OF PROTOZOAN

INNUCIID Iss ou ds conte eee eee 470

and Keppel, REPORT ON Pu-

| GET SD. -HYDROIDS........, 475

| Call, (R. .; Res. Mem eee. 486

Callaway Co., Mo. JZelocrinus gre-

ROFUTOMN cacke <a cottons ee een aes ee IIg

Calhianassa californiensis Dana... 261

and sips Dania! 5 cbs cscs secre 260

Callinectes larvatus and tumidus,

Ord way avast oon secwenaste eeeeeeee 232

INDEX.

Callosamia promethea ; Grafting of 219 | Chemistry and Alchemy

Calman, W. T., ON A COLLEC-

TION OF CRUSTACEA FROM PUGET

Peete ailed vin Scrabanenkvse a sen sce 259

Cancer gammarus galba, Montague 265

and productus, Randall...... 259, 262

Cancrion miser, of Puget Sd...... 279-80

Canis ; Bronchial Tree of.....135-8, 156

‘Capucin Monkey; Bronchial Tree of 140-1

Cardiac bronchus ; Division of...... 144

Cardisoma guanhumi (Latreille), 228 |

Meter, OF Block Td... o.0:.cecc0cce-0e00 66)

Carinella, 198-9; superba ( Kalli-

ker), 201-2; annulata, 202-3;

rubicunda, 203; rubra n. Sp.,

polymorpha, miniata Hubrecht,

203; and sexlineatan. sp

Carinoma ; of Puget Sd

patagonica, 200, 204; armanda,

200, 206, mutabilis n. sp., 204,

205 ; mutabilis argillina n. var.,

205 ; mutabilis vasculosa n. var.

wee eeeeet

See eee eee

Carnivora ; Bronchial tree of......... 129

arp-louse ; Glands of................ 331

Sarrathers, W. . Cor. Mem......... 461

- Cat; Secretion Physiology of......89, 303

i f—4, 3°99, 317-18, 322, 327; 349; 35°

Catalogue, Exhibits, N. Y. Acad.

Sci Appendix

Cattell, J. McK., SomE ANTHRO-

MORPHIC TESTS AND MEASURES.

Pe PEA MIT AINE oo cicgiaala's xn ;0'0' wins

Cebus capucinus; Bronchial tree of

376

T40, 164, 170 |

UN PES || Seine ee

Gccreps Latweller, Leach. .iccicsss+ «2

Celastrus Arctica, Heer, of Block

Island

‘CELL LINEAGE ; CONSIDERATIONS

ON, AND ANCESTRAL REMINIS-

PRICE... WWaISORN A, a) Fon coccinea us

Cenobita diogenes ( Latreille).........

141, 168, 170

261

Ceutrodesmus; origin: Of. 2.1.5 sneaks. 394

Cephalonema, of N. Pacific......... 196

Cephalopods, cleavage in, 24; sal-

mary Sands: Ols.<eyesaseseen ado. 31

enon, Of Puget Sdici.cpeccsenns pahns 280

Ceratium tripos, 390 ; fUscus........ 400

Cerebratulus of N. Pacific............ 196

marginatus Reiner and sp...... 215

‘Cervical sympathetic nerve........... 295

Cetacea ; Bronchial tree of............ 12

Chenia teres ; nucleus of......,..... 331, 2

Chamberlin, L. T. Res. Mem..... 474

Chamberlin, T. C. Cor. Mem.,.... 461

Chapman, F. M., DIstTRIB. OF

BIRDS IN THE STATE OF VERA

RD Cie seated: avin pds amheeaan aed 447

197, 199°

484 |

AR, OS ee 60, 78,

503

Piatt 177

Chester, F. D., KRENNERITE

PROM (CRIPPLE: CREEK,........... 455

Chilian Coast, Nemerteans of...... 197

CRE Ga Bile g TEE. i vies easee ue ces 25527

Chilomonas....384-9, 392, 394, 396, 400

China, Nemerteans: of.::..........2: 196

Chiroptera, Bronchial tree of......... 129

Chlorodius Horidianus Gibbs......... 231

Chorda, paralysis of, 317; tympani

MEEVIEL cd rae ti voce deans <deewece 295-7, 301

Cera Con ca one ftnandevawugeeencs 352,.3

CHROMITE ; OCCURRENCE, ORIGIN

AND CHEM. Comp, OF, Pratt..... 489

Cidaris tribuloides Bl. of Bermuda 412

Cirolana californica Hansen (?) 261, 274

| Crerepedia GET USetNIG, j 2b .Jes22008 261

Clark, Herbert L., NoTrrEs oN

BERMUDA ECHINODERMG...... 407, 475

'Clark and page electric generators 181

| Claude: Berard: tetooc0) Me seieces 365

Clay Head, Block Id., Paleobot-

SRY SGE 3 nsoagascdanverush tetas see 56-7, 62

CLAY AND KAOLIN DEPOSITS OF

EUROPE, THES Riess. Bite. 466

Cleavage forms, ‘‘ mechanical ’’ ex-

planation, 2; progressive differ-

ences of, 12; stages, 24.

Clibanarius vittatus (Bosc), ¢ri-

COLOFGIDUIS |) o-\cet deicdies vacates oe 239

Chitord, WN: J. Cretaceous of;,.s.2- 417

Clomealp land sie oss. i esti ees 331

Clymenella, vestigial and rudi-

MICMUArYACe St IN. 5 :d0 yess et ccuyeee 25ST

COALESCENCE, AN IMPORTANT IN-

STANCE OF INSECT, Crampton...... 219

Coal tam produetseic. inte east. cndderes 184

Cohn, A.; SOME REFORMS IN

IPRENCH: SPWUEING, ...' Besse. «seats 493

COlMBeMULT TES, . cFentasweates canasien 299

iMeelatsowsivy’s Tel...:...;0sacc) pesaceae 49

| COLUMBIA, S. C., ARCHEOL. NOTES

A ioe iy 06 eo 478

GEOLOGY OF, AND VICINITY,

| [Gye Ra aoe A Oey eee Acs A 475

| Conifers ; abnormalities in............ 49

fConklin = rel....6, £0, 11, 15, 23) 25-6

Conrad and Morton, paleonto-

VSN ARGUE Of. sa x'ice hace cn vanes 185

Copepoda ot Puget Sdic.ciscacoceteks 261

Copernicus in Astronomy............. 178-9

Commacee Of Block Idinci.s2.nte coe 66

Gomis, ik, H. Res; Mem:.......: 462

Corundum, fluorescence of,........... 402°

Coronula diadema (L.), of Puget

SEM aks asntansonasden ongs eov eee coene 26 1

Cosmocephalia of N. Pacific.......... 196

Cosmogony and Geology......:..... 1177

504 INDEX.

Crampton, H.E., Jr., AN IMPOR- | Decapoda of Puget Sound............ 259

TANT INSTANCE OF INSECT CO- | Northrop Coll,, 226; liver of.. 331

NUTS) Gi Ds (C1 Dy ge amen age ee eves 219, 465 | De Maan rele oe 263

Tote NOLO so ate to taseeeavecneceeeseen 14| Delafield, M. L. Res. Mem........ 486

Crangon franciscorum, Stimpson, Delaware Undians-.2.:s22cceree eee 37

and affinzs, DeHaan............ 260, 281 | De la Rue on cupric sulphate...... £80

Crepidula ; vestigial cells in, 2; ru- Della Valle vehis ss cnc cee eee 269

dimentary cells in, 6, 10-12; Delphinus delphis ; Bronchial Tree

“‘Jarval mesenchyme,”’ 18; rela- (oy ae or nia ree eneetar RCimaer ek Deh et 129

tion to WVereis and Arvicza, 11; De; Mannrefisic 8 5.5: eaeaaerees 241, 247

cell lineage, 22; ancestral remi- Devoe, F. W.. Res. Mem... .....<.: 445

niscence in, 24; mesenchyme of, 26) Devonian Crinoids and Blastoids... 117

Cretaceous, of Block/Iidsi. sa 56, 62| Dewalguea groenlandica, Heer (!)

CRINOIDS AND BLASTOIDS; DE- 423, 426

SCRIPTION OF, FROM MIL- “De Waitt’ Clinton,” ies Piaosile

WAUKEE, WIS.; DEVONIAN; Expl ices ieee pee ae eee 112

Weller. \.c5 fick ene acum ee r27 | Dewitt,-WiiGes Res Mem ase 445

Crookes’ tubes, in X-Rays, 30, 36, 41, 43| Dexter, E. G., THE INFLUENCE

CRUSTACEA FROM PUGET SOUND; OF WEATHER ON THE MENTAL

On A COLLECTION OF, Calman,. 259] ACTIVITIES OF CHIT. DREN......... 49

THE NORTHROP COLLECTION OF Diadema setosum, Gray,.......04. 408, 412

CRUSTACEA FROM THE BAHAMAS, Dicelis, of N. Pacific Bice hoveXeuracataa ee 196

1 Sar 0 hg eee Nie gE Cs eo om eM 225 | Dichaias, ot INP Acie: sesseces cee 196

Crustacean diversi. % secs eee eens 331 | Dicotyles torquatus, Bronchial Tree

Cryptolithodes typicus, Brandt... ...260, 203 | Ol. .ccscanceadeces eon eee eee eee 138, 153:

Cryptomonide, nuclel Of:5.5..452 cs 385 | Dinoflagellata, nuclei of.....381, 389, 390

Cryptoscope of Prof. Salvioni....... 20, 40 | Dzmophysis, nucleus’ Of..22.22e..0eee 390

Cuba; Decapoda...226-30, 234, 236-40 | Diplomma, of N. Pacific............. 196

Stomatopodas. 2c /tia.teenessscce 253\| Diplopleura, of IN; Paciiic..........-- 196

Cucumarta punctata Ludw., etc., Discocelis, cleavage of...... 16-17, 20-22

, __ _ 411, 413 | Doderlein, Prof. L.; ref. .....-«..-. 263

( Semperia) bermudiensis, Heilp Dodge, R. E., Ruane nic GEOG,

Cumberland Sound; Eskimos of... 492) IN EDUCATION 0c. -sseccsesseseee, 449

Cunningham, Dr. R. H.; ref..... 347 Dog; Bronchial tree of, 135; se-

Curtis, Prof.; RE leeenake Seacrest 26° cretion physiology, 333, 342,

Cyclas ; cell-lineage of, note......... CI 349; experiments, 304 et seq.;

Cystoflagellates, Aberrant nuclei of.. 389] salivary secretion, 303-4, 320,

323, 325, 327-8; submaxillary

Dapuillon: reteset ses ace ae 46-8 secretion, 2953; parotid secre-

Dammara microlepsis Heer, of HOM: Dove oeay hg eesenaees oes Leer 2907

lGckrdidns es reatcnemce tess soins 57,76! Dogiels retin icnatactton eee eee 365.

ana Pareles ces ca 241, 267 | Domecia hispida Eydoux et Soule-

Danitell’s Watteryngs.cosesseeenccscccasse “LQ. “Webs meenaeseecteen one ey een eee 230

IDATRY tite etoile ced enes ee. 254. | Douglas, Ay (Xess Mem... tee 495

Dawis, We Mi. Com Nem ier... .cose 461 | Douglas, James, Lecture on Min-

DAVY «5 Jaccectssousavese eadeiatnesie doa caress 179 |. img and: Metallureys.. 77-227 ..ccesree 473

Day, W.S.; THE SPEcIFIC HEAT Draper, M..A,.B..Kes-2Miems:. cst. 462

OF WATER J: ccaeor se receescoassoenee 453)| Drasch® ref. te. asc oe 237; ae

BATTERY REeEsIsT. MEASURE- Drepanophor HS; 01 Pues Sd sae

MEN ESI: poe ee ernaecte es A69.|\Driesch; rel. siuseese ee eee eee e

Dean, Bashford, memoir of the Drie. of Puget, Sdi seek eex.t 236

late B,B.Grittimh. s.sewee cence. 193 | Dromidia antillensis, Stimpson...... 236

LOE casa tredec doe teaeenee eee 71, 259 | DUCKTOWN, TENN., MINERALS OF

Dearborn, G. V. N.; THE Emo- THE COPPER MINES AT, Kemp 481

TIONG OV pier. ccpaest eee pio deod 491 | Dudley, P. H., Rep. in Sci. Alli-

Deb@y +. Lel i senc neocons 57 ANCE... sacvandeaere ema seeeee Meno eeee 468

DEBT OF THE WORLD TO PURE Dudley, P. H., THE USE OF THE

SCIENCE ; THE, Stevenson..... 77 DUDLEY STEMMATOGRAPH, 89 ;

INDEX. 505

ref., 183; TRACK RELAYING ON | ? nervosa NewD...........c0eeees 61, 78

toe. b. and. A. R. R., 446); | BRAM TESEL OWE exhale ohn oS sles 0 61

STRAP RAILS OF MOHAWK AND Enciphidea, of Bahamas.............. 244

Hupson R. R., 478; STREM- | Euflagellata, UPGLEL Ol. 5. dlese ves 394, 396

MATOGRAPH, 452; STREM. REC- Euglena, nuclei of,

Raa. n Se cnc kwiw chgunekmdaxe cue 479 | 380, °384— —90, 392, 394, 396

BURRIS CL co? os ait Liteterede «e050 365 | Euglenia virides, nuclei of........... 386

Dynagraph, of P. H. Dudley........ 89 | Euglypha, nuclei Of.........e.s00e- 388, 400

| Eunemertes, of N. Pacific........... 197

Etchinocerus cibarius, White......... 261 | Eupagur wus ochotensis Brandt, etc.

ECHINODERMS OF BERMUDA; 260, 263, 274

moves ON THE, Clark....:....-<1 407 | | Eupagur us bernhardus (UL. ) of

pedicellaria Gh as een RAT Hae PieenN SOUNGLS ca. cars niasesteesnt sco 280

Echinoids of Bermuda...... AT, AOSTAT2) Lapota Olsen. Paeiie: ..).(¢.<. ts dnste 196

LEchinometra subangularis, Leske | Bwart, William * refi: .-....2..<2-- 148

408-9, singly eerie ue of N. 5 Acad. Sci. Cata-

Echinoneus semilunaris, Lamk..... 412; logue, Appendix.

ekhard: ref....... 297, 302, 324-7, 365 | Eydoux et Souleyet ; ref........... 230

£dentata, Bronchial tree of ......... 129 |

Mdison, fluoroscope,...........-.0: 30, 40-2 |

? iaeailayot eet rset tae ok ee « Pheetan cee 181

Edwards et Lucas; ref............ |

Ehrlich methylen blue method...... Nie ance a ee ei ae Bp

SYCH. SOC. MEETING.......:..%% 450

Elastic limit of steel rails............. 93, 99 Fauna Japonica, Crust, ref. see

Electricity, Hist. sketch of......... 179-81 F . : ae eC

: VEGAN * ORCI, 32 0... Sas ee aan deiwak ceatee 237-8

Llephas, Bronchial tree of............ 129 :

: Fermentation, study of.,............ 187

Ellenberger & Hoffmeister; ref. 365 |, K ‘ u Ee

Pelli «ret 365 Ficus Krausiana, Heer, 59, 76;

a a. Bt ee ae a Ree CAS {dais A BRAS ey 59

Empire State Express, Rail tests, Wain Nowe 410; 428

BPERRES ee ere ies soy oss 94, 102, 114, 365 Pu PRR AL < haemeee Nt Ao ?

Lmplectonema of N. Pacific...... 196, 197 oo ee ene OF Ee ae

Ape PATERATL INE INS. LiGe@. 5, .cc<eo 453

pea Stimpson Pele <lopethon tatiana ie 107; 207 Ever At One fe tk yb ae 76

re. BE FOYs ZOU ae) Piaveliat?, MACY Of... ..0s4. 598 381-2, 385

2 Sec CA iy een mes Fleming, VAR Tet. tis 6 iy ees 395, 397

eee ee tae mel 2. Pe lee ed Flora of Block Id.; modification of, 67

fay WPS) Res. Metin. weccece ds 451

Fluorescence ; even and uneven,

Enopla and Anopla.....::./....... 197, 199 ;

: 36; relative values of materials

Entoblast, relat. to primary meso- ae 37-8

BEAD CROP AG oxina ct ocvieSens > ocindoe= Geet <eees é 10 Bigcisedno wow fore al dey oase

Entomeres, deriv. of pigment cells f : : ih

AMEN iw ers ea hare Bhai ea eta EN at Ooauee ee’ Pee eee ee eer

Entomology, economic value of....... 186 es oe 223

EPARTERIAL BRONCHIAL SYSTEM i es a ae USES......+4+ EM

oF MAMMALIA, G. S. Hunt- cee aaa os CM. es eeeeeee seers 4 s

CT 201s a A ee E275\453 3 TOD, .eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 49, 5

i ariden, of Page Sd. o76ea)S, 281 Forest, preservation, and use of

: SESE ered trusta dsc tana dnctes cane deur soe 182

“5 aaah AND Ta Fort Wrangle, Alaska, Emplecto-

OF LUCRETIUS mept peTewpor, Ee tat : : 209

E ee ee Sages Suk a ay se Pranchet,A. -Cor: Mem.....2.c60: 461

sy Big at ao aed era a 43 Foster, Prof. Michael; ref........ 303

LEpialtus productus, Randall......... 260 | Price ho C= Cortndaatiram ke: aap

gel J aapaagtae eae 129 Franklin, N. J., Willemite from... 402

. gonagra (Tab-)y of Bu: 230 Franklin, F. W. Res. Mem........ 496

Esquimalt ; Amphithoé from ......... 274 | lee he la a Se ele. a

ESSEX Co.; MASS., IGNEOUS Rocks uj , *) ec: eee eee eee ee eee eee eee ee 5

Die. wy asShineton , ..7.atsceraewees 499

Mine MAUSEN ; refx...2.52.5.0 RS 57 | Galacantha AMiomtede®. .....cccecerevees 281

Eucalyptus, fossils of, Block Id..... By Ga athea dispersa, Bate.......0s000 280

506 INDEX.

Galatheidea of Puget Sound......... 237 ; Flabsenhek; 33.3 rel... 2. cceeeuse eee 27

eb TORN Ear’) Rs ct ey ee 150) Himckelswelt. ss. ce eee 381

Galvani’ S experinient, <2.; is.0c.02 ss 179 Hager, Stansbury, THE WATER

BOPP de ik tonne aw svids sane oAnenele ts 269 IBURTAL:..to% sonarus aoeanad een 492

Gammarus furcicornts, Dan...... a, 270 |dtainess i> de) kes: Memsee 445

Gardiner, IS. Gisele sic: scccneed. EA, 27 \bbale, (Ges) Can, em see 451

Gasteropods ; displacement in sinis- | Halation, action of,on Phot. Lines 406

tral, 14; cell homologies, 13; re- Fhale, televes.cjsois aoe ee eae eee 376-7

lation to ee 16; cleavage Halifax, N. S.; Zittorina littoria of 72

eee SESS NET AOL so dos eee ease ee $31 ') Thal: Protcexet tte eee 118-109, 185

IFAtSCHel iret. 25. 92..5 astesocelaasens 3760-7 | Hallez; LOL sa Saee Seal Meena eee 16

Gay Head, Martha’s Viney ani. Cre- Hallock, Wis MAKE-CIRCUIT

taceous ot cba Ieee oer ted at 418 | PESDURDA 8 Au 2 ee 463

Gecarcinide, Dana, of Puget Sd... 228 | Hamilton group of fauna............. 117

Gecarcinus ruricola (Vo. Ve. cccedse cus 228 | Hansen, quoted, 252; ref...... 274, 281

Greeenbautss Kel. ccs sacha secon 25 | Hapatogaster mertensit, Brandt...... 260

Van Gehuchten ; ref. .2c¢.2.5 303, 365 | Harrington, N. R., REPORT ON

GEOGRAPHY, SCIENTIFIC, IN Epvu- CRUST, “OF PUGET “Sp, 4655

CATION; DOG: 4252 socceuecaeeeea 449| ref., 259, 283-4, and Griffin,

Geology and Cosmogony............. 177) |\» BO ssct tocente nese aes 206, 263, 283

Geol. Survey of England, 184 ; of (“Hlasse; Cos wet tt foo peeee ce eee 147

Ajnnted States 1.2) sesec. bacece cece oes 154 |‘ Hatcheck: ref: 5 notenca>. 5, ee oe 12

lock: stsbatidy 3.22 os tee 55) | teedend Spot Sree enes ssa ene 421, 430

Granaz7is er thas eee 5296, 30%) Meera rel... 250. cream anna 57-8, 60

Giard:and Bonnier; ref::..:/...<. 275-OL | Fheidenhains cel 25 ooo eee ee

Sts Tel rsssac5 5 o5 23 san ao ae eee 229, 231| 294-9, 304-14, 317, 320, 324-5,

Gill; Dayid:. Hon, Mem. :.2..:.<: 460| 327, 330-8, 342, 350-1, 355-7,

lace dene. b ene eso 65

Gleichenia gracuzs Heer, Block Id 57, 76 |

Glen Cove, ds I . Cretaceous Of... AUS

Gnaphalium pur ‘pureum L. of

Block Uden etecseeoncronv etc 66

Golgi, methylen-blue method........ 2904

Goniopsis cruentatus (Latreille)..... 229

Gonodactylus erstedit Wansen....... 253

RT GOELES LC thas cass we sereaet weonenan sheer 16

Gotthieb; vel. svete ses: 298, 333, 305 |

Grace Point, Block Id., basal clays

Of. Scscasieiecnds Loree beewsacianteste sk abes 62

Br apsus oF mpsUs | Vardosee oncmaee Sones 2209 |

Grapside (Dana) of Puget Sd...... 228 | |

Gramme, induction machine......... 181 |

Grave, Caswell Tele. vcnecs.sacn, 408 |

iaray, Rieniy ete each acnccoede 146 |

Great Salt‘Pond, Block Id:.........: 70

Griffin, B. B.; DESCRIPTION OF |

SOME MARINE NEMERTEANS OF

PuGET ‘SD. AND ALASKA......... 193 |

List of Published Writings..... 104

MARINE NEMERT. OF PUGET

SD os seca rae Soares eis 464

and Harrington, ref., note..... 206

Graber, A. tet 382, 389, 392, 397

Grunow, J., instrument maker..... 38)

Gaombagens iret. is:0tysscenanes cee 365

CGAVETIN; “Kelsi cise Soh achaleursiaw estes Zr

361, 365, 394; quoted notes,

295, 321-3, 308, 316, 333

Feiiprin; cel noose see ease eee 407-11

LL IGLOD IS Oe ae net eee Roe cee 38

Flenderson> ref :...cne0inescees soe 237, 220

(elenry’s telepraph: 2)-. S572. .02----e-- 180

der bsthiret iis... Gosessecenac cere eee 24

Herdman Protss et. .ca noe ee 284

Hering: ‘refi circa aeeeetenas 365

_Hermann’s Handbook on Phys... 294

Eberricks rel. .30202.ss 4 240-1, 251

Flerters tet: sisq ease eee 335

Hertwig; O. and R:; rei, £2.25)

27 aR: Moet Be ener oneers 3025) 904,397

| Heteractea ceratopa (Stimpson)... 232

Fleterograpsus nudus (Dana) and

OF EZ ONLISUS cies amano’ 260

LL ACP ONEMUETTAND xian acoso ob es ices 200, 214

| Hewitt; Ei AR. « Res: Memes. 2. 496

| Heymons, R.; ref., 6 5) note:....- 12; 127

| Hibiscus moscheutos, L., of Block

Tidy: donsnanme teen adanaeawumement ara 66

Hill, °G., Wa Home Miemerss. eter 460

Hill; Pela: biuy hose eee eee er 299

Hippide, Stimpson, of Puget Sd..... 237

Fiippolytide, OmmMann.,. accceesest=s 246

[ippolyte prionata, Stimpson..260, 264-5

brevissostris, Dana....is.:- 284

| Hipponoé esculenta, Leske........ 408, 412

Hitchcock, Romeyn; INDUS-

TRIAL APPLIC. OF OXYGEN........ 463

INDEX. 507

MRE EL ccc ys eacewsnsdaseannan sateen 283 | Indians; of Block Id., 70; Oral

eeeieson Ss equest... sic nusae ape vee ee 190| literature of, 369; love song,

OMRON TOE os vin as 05 ventana scat £54 , 2753 Peace -ceremonies,. 372°;

Hoftman, S. V. Res. Mem......... 468 Rs eet rei ha Sc orp ba ea ainsa.n'a ed he ACR 373

BROHCYs MIVENTON: 25.00. oc ceasincerave 182 | Induction; discovery of.............. 181

Hollick, Arthur; NOTES ON TRPOSORA, WERT ONIN; ius aadecacvecsscs 393

Biock ID., 55; ADDITIONS TO INSECT COALESCENCE; Griffin,

THE PALEOBOTANY OF THE CRE-

TACEOUS 3; NOTES ON THE GLA-

CIAL PHENOMENA OF STATEN

Ip., 482; FORMATION ON

STATEN ID., 415; FURTHER

NOTES ON BLOcK ID., 448; ref.

51; notes 67.

Holmes, S. and J.; ref

Holothuria surinamensis, 410 ; flor-

tzdana Pourt, 410, 413; captiva

Ludw.; abbreviata, Heilp......... 413

foppim, W. W.. Jes.. Mem......... 451

DAO ORLILENTUI os ansaesasvieuserestnia ses 198

Horace, and Epicureanism........... 432

Hornaday, W. H.; THE De-

STRUCTION OF BIRDS IN THE

MP Sin tS ie caccadene ude ds 46+

Horse, salivary secretion of,

3937451399; 322

Howard, James E.; ref, 91, 95, 96, 104

owe, J. M.. “Res. Mem.........:.. 451

Wea TOE a. ss ooo daca Geen ane valeon’ 364.

Hubrecht, A.A. W,,; ref....... 198, 217

Prowe, M: A.-)Res. Mem.,..:.224. 495

Hubrechtia MestAervata...cccce ceeceees 200

Hudsonia tomentosa Nutt., of Block

gia haitin sows vigiaea 2 dies 65

PMOL ® TOE sc ceccwsck <cccaeene'ee 189

Huntington, Geo. S.; THE EPAR-

TERIAL BRONCHIAL SYSTEM OF

THE MAMMALIA.; 3. civscvecieses. 127, 452

Hyas lyratus, Dana, of Puget Sd... 260

fryde, 6... B: Bife Mem: .5./... 495

Hyroides, cell-lineage in, note...... 3

Hylogenesis and Hylogens ...... 303, 320

Hyparterial bronchial tree,

128, 130, 134, 143

figperia galba, Mont: ...:. .csvesses 261, 265

HYPERTROPHIED SCALE-LEAVES IN

Pinus PONDEROSA, Francis E.

BAI es susin ta rseeeacnenedeaaeeies

fTystrix ; Bronchial tree of,

129, 134-7, 142-3

Ice age; S. New England coast

SE recta in ws x a Se raises aa ORD

Rehthyal:;, discovery Of.,..3..sidnsiccs 184

Ichthyology ; economic value of.... 186

dings, §*C.. Cor. Ment .sicicse 461

Ldota wossnessenskit, Brandt, and

Me ARete?, SLMUDSON 5. «5s ey ua wneaceviens 261

465; AN IMPORTANT INSTANCE

PO) Ge He: Gel) 0) 92) 7 ke 219

Insectivora ; Bronchial tree of...... 129

Instructors; modern requirements of 189

Iowa, Johnson Co., Alelocrinus cal-

CUCL U0 Cg ie ng a ae i Sy ore ee ge 119

Iowa, Devonian Pantie Ol we. ties. LIZ, TIO

Iroquois, Piguet <8 fs cate whens 370, 376-7

Tein, Cts MRCS CUT ein Beek 495

Irving, J. D.; ConrTacT-META-

MORPHISM OF THE PALISADES

IS EATEAS Secon So diee one cen erenose cae 472

Rshikawea sre.) cii.3 eicetnyous 391-2, 397

Esland: series, strata; s, scaswors eck teens 417

Isopoda ; Northrop Coll., 254; of

Puget'Sd., 265, 2745 liver oft 331

Rae’ Fras cens Vans csc cdeusconeee Rees 66

Jacobi and Spencer, in _ electro-

WNGta ICS Youle eee oy eee nna 180

Jacoby, H.; PHot. RESEARCHES

NEAR THE N. POLE OF THE

PE AW IONS 5 ooo ae cuconar eet eee 446

Paeabsomig Nerve... ee iaesjaheosnaee 323-4

Jamaica, Echinoderms of............. 408-9

Japan; mountains of, 196; PA7-

WH, DISUHe OBAe ero. aioe pees 263

Jocssel,\G.* tele tiie ta cee

fahnson, Hi. Pi; téfsc. ik. oo

Johnson Co., Iowa; Melocrinus

ROLUDICU OMe telco as ak vteda nae s OT eeee: 119g

Jeseph,; Mis ref. n.3-3 00%. -.02 332, 3595 365

Joy; THE EMOTION oF, Dearborn 491

juddy Ga «Res: Memntsc Sa. ies cous 496

Juan de Fuca Str., Cavinoma of..... 206

JSuglans artica Heer, of Block Id...58, 76

Julien, > A. “Aw ELEMENTS OF

STRENGTH AND WEAKNESS. IN

BUILDINGS STONES... s.dsb<sasexcaxies 471

Juncus acuminatus Michx., of

POG! toga os Sse bee dace ceed eens 65

Yunsper, leat forms im. .....ceerseie0 45-6

ure, -beeptostrobus/Of 26.55...ns<se0e 49

Jurassic clays of Block Id.......... 62

Kemp, J. F., ON BERINGER’S

PSEUDO-FOSSILS, 449; #RE-

MARKS ON TITANIFEROUS MAG-

NETITES, 476; MINERALS OF

THE CopPpER MINES AT DUCK-

LOW. LEMN { ici» aah came 481

508 INDEX.

Kendall -and*‘uchsinger 5 ref., 365) ea 5 welts e.ce eae eee 335

Kennebec River, Indians of ..370, 376-7') Leao, K.G. P:.) Res; Memo...) 47

Kennedy; j.00. ies. Mem: ....:: 450 | leat ‘character, as guide to phylog-

IKeplers ¥GisCoveries:. 3.220. 00.0-<.2e% 178-9 GDY n5 acs sawiacts'ee Eason ne meee meeeeee 47

Keppler. Ress Lite Mer sts 2s.204 eee 496 | Leander northropt, N. Sp..........00. 245

Keppel, F. P., and Calkins, Rr- maculatus and pettlinga......... 246

PORT ON HypRoIDs COLLECTED Leboueq, Hs: tel. ir. c...vege scenes 149

GN GLE S68 id hag) b Rar eR ane BF Aina 475 | Le Brun, M.M. Res..Mem...:::2.. 445

Kerenelen, Td> Ant.“Ocean......-- 269/Lee, F. S., FUNCTION OF EAR

HMGULCTI ] o>, DOL. ; riiveecee mere 394, 397 AND LATERAL LINE IN FISHES,

Mendip, As b..° Res. ‘Meme... 2. 495 453; THE CouRSE OF MUSCLE

Kidney; secretion physiology of, FATIGUE," AO] 5: Lett. snsteeeentee 303

208=0; 335)| Iueeds cA, Rie. rer. eee ee 405

Kilisut Harbor, Puget Sd., Zzzezs Letolophus planissimus (HERBST) 228

Daa ce dace eahiese Serie aa ae TO 203, 215 | Lenard, Dr.; ref. on fluorescence, 42

Kingsley; ref., 226-7, 220, 246, 240-50 || Lenape Indians {..0--8--2-2.s-oese eee 4760-7

Kitchen. middens,.of,. Block Id * “7o | Lepadide, Warwinh-c.caxcec ecm etea ve 254

Kneifiia linearis and pumila, of Lepidoptera, gratting Of... .0......<.-- 219

BlGek aid 1. te ceseebenennese 66 | Leptoplana, eggs of, etc.....15-17, 20-22

Rossel; Prot.stret-7.1..2.<.20s-.8see- 303 | Leptostrobus, of Juras and Potomac

Rossman 7 7sels, 5. oferetincecca sence 280 formations)... sc. tcsseeceeereeees 49, 51

Kowalevsky.,-A.; refs cee 12; 27, || Leshedezas 2 nes ketenes eee 6

Kudrewetsky’;.. réf.-.2.12. 6 -<22- 360, 366 |, Lesquereux + ‘rel... cscs eos ees 59

J oT OF oT eis 2) ae Se eee A 295, 335 Levison, Wallace Goold ; A sIM-

Kubne; wea serel.c.).ccseceneee: 306 PLE AND CONVENIENT PHOS-

Kunz, (G.ol:; METEORIC STONE

OF ANDOVER, MAINE, 483; RE-

CENT DISCOVERY OF HUGE

OUARTZ, CRYSTAL. 27. scdscuseneee 454

WTAUGSE SPE ath coca ore floes 3,66

Kreischerville, S. I., Cretaceous

ro) I aes OE EERIE AS Fri de ARR 416, 420

KRENNERITE FROM CRIPPLE

Crem, Gol. Chester: «cc. 455

Kraeber, A., Eskimos OF CuUM-

BERLAND Sp bse eadeuvetnddssosenenes 492

Lamellibranchs, cell lineage in.....13, 16

Lang; ref. ....14-16, 18, 20, 21, 27, 366

PANSIa Ol AN, BEARMIC, 20. Sea e oat 197-8

Langley,J.N.; ref.,

290, 299, 303, 309, 311-2,

317, 321, 323-4 335, 350, 356, Se

Langley and Fletcher; ref........ 366

LUankester, FE: KR. Hon, "Mem eee 460

Laricopsis, HORSUIS OL Wosaseatiass st oss 50-1

Larix, primary leaves upon, 46;

leaf formistin cic. .es. tne eeent ones

SLABES: sasucccay sory Mee amare ens es 24

LATERAL LINE ORGANS, Strong.. 470

LATITUDE, VAR. OF CONSTANT OF

ABERRATION, “REGS: -.n.c2.heeesa 485

Watrewle: els ease pee aeeee ee 228-9

Laurus plutonia Heer, of Block

WN AG Fe ccd terdvscvetsaleatoes 60, 78

Lauterborn, R.;

ref,....389, 393-4, 397

PHOROSCOPE, 401; PHOTO-

GRAPHED OCULAR MICROMET-

ERS, 405 ; PHOT. EYE-PIECE MI-

_CROMETERS, 469; A SYSTEM OF

CLASSIFICATION OF THE FLUOR-

ESCENT AND PHOSPHORESCENT

SUBSTANCES =. con eothacey seen eee 496

Wevy Wax srelite. sees eters 357, 306

We ydig' 5: Teles. caciea..ce sos «carci tases

Ligia pallastt,, Brandt: ... «2. ss 261, 282

TARGCETEs conver eek ti ease eden e eae 66

Lillie, FR? ret:.256; Dr —Taeen 5 ieee

Limnoria lignorum (Rathke)....... 261

Limodorum tuberosum Lirrrccceceeee 66

Linckia guildingit, Gray...........6+ 412

LLNEUS SPP CATUSS TN. SP). Sera 214-15

of NvPacitic tc, ahs 195, 198

Tanin, ‘of nuclet2.2ie..e-<-aeea ee 379-83

LE WRODUWA LS ctnds. Coan ae 263

Lithotrya dorsalis, Sowerby......... 254

Littorina littoria, on Blockidise-- 72

Ltvoneca vulgaris, Stimpson........ 261

Llama-alpaca, Bronchial Tree of... 139

Lloyd, Francis E.; ON HYPER-

TROPHED SCALE-LEAVES IN

PINUS PPONDEBROSAssecaserees eee 45, 447

STUDIES IN EMBRYOLOGY OF

THE RUBIACEEs.- tee cack 498

| Lloyd’s Neck, Lettorina hittoria of, 72

Lockingtom eet se st eco 262, 282

Locomotives, weight of, in track

CEStS 2 oda ced testa cen can teeweeagaee 106

Loeb S:- “Res Memes nose a eeeurene 451

INDEX.

Long Island ; Amboy clays of, 59 ;

Myrtophyllum, Laurus, and 777-

calycites of, 60-1; basal clays

related to Block Id., 62; In Ice

age and Geol. Hist., 67-8 ; Cre-

eS 6.3 8 bles eM oa ee 416

Lophactea lobata (Milne-Edwards) 231 |

Lephozozymus bellus (Stimpson).... 260

Meare ES. 5 TEL, 555. csteescceseces 274

_ Oo Ee eee nae ye 440

Puchsinger ; ref. ...0c2.s6 350, 360, 366

LucIFER, THE EMBRYOLOGY OF,

Ss ne re rR 497

LUCRETIUS, THE LATTER -PART

OF, AND EPICURUS repli peTe@pwov

ME ag cl cB taare ks suet eeone Waser 431

Ludwig, C.; ref.,

294-5, 299, 330, 337-8, 367

Bie ENOTES TOP ay. prised vncacs» 367

NEOPETS STHOLES 2 sins ast caacne doses 5

Lung, morphology of............... 142, 145

Maisie As. Res: Mem: 2.0..63% 2 495

Lysimachia quadrifolia L. of Block

ES co 65

MACHIAVELLI, Speranza........... 492

MacIntosh ; ref........ 199, 207, 216-17

RIE TOR ss ald sadonies 367

McLouth, L. A.; Nores on E.

JOSEPH’s KURENBURG THEORY.. 477

McMurrick, J. P.; REPORT ON

HEXACTINI OF PUGET SD. Ex-

MIAO eet 8S Sea ce sicsng'e's eves 487

MEI GWOTA D2 SD. cciccanecie-icacads 288

MacCracken, H. M. Res. Mem... 462

mercrura, Of Puget Sd2..5....415-.0%6 263

Macroceloma entheca (Stimpson)... 233

Macromeres, of Wereis........00..00: 32

MAMET I LICIES 0 oto mntvmin cassis sade s 393

McWhood, L.; A METHOD OF

STUDYING THE MOTOR EFFECTS

(Or NRUSICL A: Jet naar h case’: 473

ORE SECO: 5-2, patra nas oeesee eas 270

IE eae a OUR re oe Leese 261, 269

Maric, Prof; W..F.: ref...... 29, 30, 39

Magnolia woodbridgensis, Hollick,

Peete G5. 4 of sith avdoe seen 60

and longifolia Newb......... 422, 428

Seabee, Pridians: Of, «ccd. s0keenss- 369, 376

wieorden, of Puget Sd......2.cke0ss 233

NMC OECI LE 50. & icisat cisd ace des snbdastas 197

PML AOONIGE <205 5. 5. ocicducsvcevhes uhees 276

Malisseet Indians............ 360;370, 377

Malorchestia californiana, Brandt,

265, 267

MAMMALIA; THE EPARTERIAL

BRONCHIAL SYSTEM OF THE;

PAUMATIEIEOR 55.00 chee vec icnnw nde 127

509

ORIGIN. ‘OF + ‘Osborn... :.....:: 447

Manganese and carbon in pig iron,, 182

MARINE NEMERTEANS, DESCRIP.

OF PUGET SD. AND ALASKA,

(Cpgliies Ones Seer eure, OPT 193

MMArINNeSOU Rel. J.806 Gi ote acs aca 364

Martha’s Vineyard, Amboy clays of

56, 58-59; Ficus of, 59; Lau-

aus of, 60; Basal clays relat. to

Block Id., 62; Geol.-Hist. of, 68

Marston, FS. . Res, Mem.\..%.: 451

Marsupalia, Bronchial tree of...... 129

Martien, iron refining process of..,.. 182

Martin: 1. S:) LifesiMem yee: 451

Martin, D. S., GEOL. OF COLUM-

BIAG Oo: CG. AND VICINIEY; 475 5

ARCHEOL. NOTES NEAR DO.,.... 478

Mason, Wiel, Res: Mem-.5 25 496

Massachusetts, Indians of ........... 369

WL ASCSES melt aki crcecvbteeiwt ante wean 45

Matawan. horizon. 72252. Rivest 417

Mathews, Albert P., THE PHy-

SIOLOGY OF SECRETION. ...... 293, 466

Matthew, G. F., PALEOZOIC TER-

RANE BENEATH THE CAMBRIAN, 491

Matthew, W.D., ON SOME NEW

CHARACTERS OF CLANODON

Agia MOREE A 9! 3 dc dew ud todo gskeet 487

Miayers Ae Gre tel, 26.. .s5 seamen aoe.

Mead, A.; ref., 2, 6, 11, 12, 15, 21,25,27

Medical News, ref 2.20. S025 sieseeme 30, 39

Mediterranean, Asterias of, ......... 408

Megalorchestia scabripes, Stimpson, 265

AOD OW La Cask aan isk aa 5s ed See odes 66

Meguyiks, see Mohawks,

DICUIEESERSOFIS ING ir een vwnew aus dns <h 12

Melocrinus nodosus Hall and Whit-

field, 118; sebglobosus, gregert,

nodosus var., spinosus N. Var.,

calvini, 119 ; milwaukenstis n. sp.

123 ; var, rofundus Di. Var....ceovs £22

Wiraele lite TES. icc) studecss cont ewes 147

TCR RTECS see oaks SSdav ns vane eedeeenss 303

Mesenchyme and parenchyme ...... 195

Mesentoblasts, primary mesoblasts,

LS tase wietevale sisie steininis alels « nfc's(o'e Ta sinininic'e simalniare Io

Mesoblasts, in aurelias and mollusks

3: bands in Avicta and Nereis... 4-5

ERMC IRONTL GIG om aadags net esse va sweets 200

Metacarcinus magister (Dana)...... 259

Metazoa, nuclei of ............. 379-80, 388

PCIE fehetn ei tty. Rewaeees 360, 367

Meyer, rr fete sc. aste cea 29530 27

Miyerc Wine Wes.’ Nemo cen censes 496

WITCIMAC EMAIANS, «Le scsnasens oe dhs So 3690-74

Microglena punctiferd....cccices 384, 400

Micromere Quartets in Annelids,

etc 13-16, 24

Pewee ere etwas ee eee eeeeseeeeeee

510 INDEX.

MICROMETERS, PHOT. OCULAR, | Mectocrangon alaskensis, Kingsley 260

ELE VISON Gea, trea heseeanench ues eenes 405 NEMERTEANS; DESCRIPTION OF

PHOT. EYE- PIECE MICROM- SOME MARINE, OF PUGET SOUND

UGE rei ebomsasyeis as vespaweme 469 AND ALASKA, Griffin, 193 ; tax-

WINGTONMICIEUS Go.c2 hee cs 0daeesedarc0e 26393 onomy of, 197-9; Summary of

Luicrophys bicornutus (Latreille)... 234) distribution and resemblance...... 216

NLCFUIRJASCIOLALE.... , nines saisceandeet 214 | Nereis; rudimentary cells of, 1;

144 GS: OVC a) 2 ee 228-9, 252-3 dumerilit, limbata and emegalops

MILWAUKEE, WIS.; DEVONIAN 2; mesoblasts and macromeres,

CRINOIDS AND BLASTOIDS OF, 3° embryos of, 4, .5, 7,-9'3 ento-

WWrelliet ())niccsice<ncnsussdeosnseecren 117 blast and vestigal cells in, I1;

Missouri, Calloway Co., AZ. gregert | ancestral ee 18; cell

abl cos at hebraicie Shere x ae easiceeets ean ee TIO"). | climeage 5 sie nsen cc caunalaqensee sper 25

Devonian faunaiah wenger ce 117 | Newberry, J.S.; Toit a

Mitchell, Louis ; ref., 55, 57, 60-1, 417, 420-1

369-70, 374, 376-7 | New Brunswick Indians.............. 369

TOERFRCULENG Ne eanta ta tant wees ook 235 New Hampshire Indians......... 369, 376

Mohawk Indtans4.2 2. Fcc gagecc esos 370-76 | New Jersey ; Amboy clay series,

Mohegan Blufts, Block Id., bowl- 56, 58; Laurus of, 60; Ayrto- .

der.clays Of ccav..essapeawessaeeeee 12,79| phyllum of, 60; Basal clays relat.

Moll’s electro-magnet...............- 180| to Block Id. etc., 62; Geol. Sur-

Mollusks, Mesoblast and Entoblast wey, 185 ;) Cretaceous off:.--..2-- 416

in, 3; Micromere-quartets in, 13; Newport, Littorina littoria of...... 72

typical development of.20->.-es-. 14 | New York Acad. Sci. Records of

Monotremata, Bronchial tree of..... 129 Micetingss.. cast esaeee ohio a 445

Montauk Point, Floral analogy to | INS YC. 6c Ti ie RR ealitests

Block didisias at dec aetna comes O7:|, CORA cera sars se eee eee 93, 95, 100

Monterey, Cal., Cancer productus _ | New York, Hamilton Group in..... 117

AO cg se Saatts te eicieaioe aeRO eo 262 | New Zealand, Crustacea of........... 269

Moriconia cyclotoxon Deb. and Ett., Nicholos, Francis C., SEDIMEN-

57, 418, 428; of Amboy clay TARY FORMATIONS OF NORTH-

SPECIES! nun eduncecberesuibe nes oh eee 5S. ERNiGs AMERICAS Ay s... eecnter 482

Mortis, Henry: ref cc.c..c24..000ee 146 | Nichols;.'G. LL... Res. Mem........ 451

Morse?s telegraplty, nc -cvsecemepacteen: ESO Nicolet; rel. so.0 0. nonce see ene 268

Morton and Conrad, on fossils, Nicotine, action of quinine and, in

185, and Vanuxem, Geol. Secretion, Jost teccstas 296, 311-14, 355

Stiidites wim JIN si |taenn sacntenaceweeseks 184-5 | Nobel’s work and bequest in chem-

Moses,A; J.,. on rare minerals... 4455 | IStly ah ceeennesnesieeee ate.eaee eee Igl

Mucinogen-and mucin«g....,...5.2.5.0 +5 303-4 | octiluca, ........ oie 38% 391-6, 400

Murray,3Gs Cor Miemivs. 6003 seces Ab |;Northrop; Dr. fs tele eee 423

MUSCLE FATIGUE, THE COURSE OF | NoRTHROP, COLL. ms eee

TiCO Reames aecuinds aot tneneaeee 497 FROM THE BAHAMAS, ee 225,

Muscle action, mechanism of secre- Norridgewok Indians............369, 37077

{OM Saracen b nnneamissiacal 324; 331 | Nova Scotia: Indians... wer eecre 369

Mushet, tron econvertine process: of. 182:\JNovi > teti.c 02... tes seeen se eee 367

Music, A METHOD OF STUDYING NUCLEI PHYLOGENETIC SIGNIFI-

THE Moror EFFEcTs oF, Mc- CANCE OF CERTAIN PROTOZOAN,

Wihoodis foe eerste oes 473 Calkins...) .:c..0. ce eee 379

Wtyrica louga, Weta sons 5OnAlO.- 4:30 Nucleoli of, 379-80, 383, 388-9, 392

Myrmechophaga jubata, Bronchial Intermediate type of, 384, 389,

free of? oy... 2eveeeeee 138, 142, 160 396 ; distributed, 381, 394;

Myrsine elongata, Newb.......... 420, 43 primitive type, 382; nuclear

Myrtophyllum geinitzi Heer......... 60, 78 | membrane........ 379-80, 383, 387

; Nussbaum siretcsve-eeeee 335, 307

Wantucket, (Geol. sElis).- 9.2 Wanssbencss 68 |

Naples, Cerebvaryis aliens sek cca, 215 | Ocypoda arenaria (Catesby)....... 226

Narath, Albert; ref...129-30, 144, 147 | Ocyfodid@, Ortmann, of Puget Sd.. 227

MebenkOrnet:,ccscecnesreecy 387-8, 392-4 | Oersted, in: etectricity...c-<+00-1-m 180-1

INDEX. o11

OP reise nine sca ddsaan'anhisa te navees 198 | Panicum spherocarpon Ell, of

DPE SPCICOVEC. 5. oun. vcacveswaseectnany 461 Block Id.; and pzzdbescens Lam.. 64

Old Harbor Pt., Block Id., basal Panopeus her bstit, Milne-Edw ards... 230

RO ee 20 ss vnc urneidignie & cote ales 62 occidentalis, Saussure , and

PERSE «coc vg aca ont sccesesseesrios 241 RLEPECIIUS,. Disadoaivaces seven 231

Onagra ‘oakesiana (Gray) Britton, | Panulirus argus (Latr.)....ssceseee 240

REINS. BO ooo soc Siapnnnntans'pule aude ets 65 Paracrangon ” echinatus, Danae 260

ME A PRCT 5c. oo soon ee cae beens Seas 376 Palcgicke, 387, 392-6; ewlhardi.. 387

Onondaga Indians........... Re uendans 370 | Parapagurid@, Smith..........+...++ 240

Ophiactis miilleri, Lik..........+.+0. 412 | PASSAMAQUODDY DOCUMENTS,

Ophiocoma crassispina, Say......+.+ 412 BGnh. (PLtniCe ., oncswsts Ogee ss ees? 369

miter Permits LAK. cscs Jc awesbace” 412 | Pasteur, in bacteriology.............+. 187

*. Ophiomyxa flaccida, Ltk..........++. 412 | Patagonia, Carinoma Of...........+0+ 200

Ophionereis reticulata, Ltk....... AOB, ALZ | Patella... .viacneavacaedvonensseaes cdasevee IL

Ophiostigma tsacantha, Say... ai2| Patten, W., tel. .:..6..1ccssscexassees ey

Ophiura oppressd, Say........000 408, 412 Paulmier, F. C., SPERMATOGEN-

Ophiurids of Bermuda.......... 407-8, 412 ESI6) IN’ ELEMIPTERAS «0. cancees<< os 470

Optical illusions in fluorescence obs. 35-6 Pawlow; ref., 298, 333. 360, 367,

Orchestia ( Talitrus) scabripes, and and S. Simanowskaja; ref., 367

EG Sab 5 272 ee A CnC ee 267 | Peccary, collared, Bronchial treein 13

Orchestoidea californiana, Brandt Péckham, W. Hi. Res. Mem... 451

261, 265 | Pelagoneniertes......cescsesereee coves 197

Reel Waly 5 TCL. acy ,<cracnsuen stn. soon 232 | Penaeus constrictus, Stimpson...... 252

Oregonia gracilis, Dana ...........00 360)| Pencky A.) dion). Meni. ctosescpes 460

Sremani. Dr.> réf.c......60c 225, 262-3 PENDULUM, A MAKE-CIRCUIT,

Osborn, H. F.; THE ORIGIN OF (hee SN (otc) aemeeenne ee een 2 463

THE MAMMALIA, 447 ; FRONTAL “Penna. R. R., Heavy rails used

HoRN IN ACERATHERIUM INCIs- Oi and tests. 8. os. ois serenade 93, 105

IvuM Kaup, 487 ; ON SOME AD- | Penobscot Indians,

DITIONAL CHARACTERS OF DIP- 369, 370-1, 373-4, 376

MeIOCUS: AST = TCL, ...0..05-0%- 225, 269 | Pentremitidea filosa, Whiteaves, 117,122

Osmosis, mechanism of............... 332 MilwaUuRensts Vi. SP ..cseeeceeeees 523

oF baste ie eee 367 | Pepsinogen .......s.s0ssoseeeeeroneceees 303

Othonia aculeata (Gibbes), | Periceride, Miers., of Puget Sd, 233

cherminiert, Schramm.............- 234 | Peridinium divergens......... 389-90, 400

Oudemans, A. C.; ref....199, 200, 217 Perkins, in anilin dyes .............+. 184

OXYGEN, INDUSTRIAL APPLICA- Personal Equation, in X-Ray Obs., 35

TIONS OF, Hitchcock............... 463 | Perth Amboy,'N. J., Cretaceous of 416

Oziide, Ortman, of Puget Sd........ 230 | Petrochirus gr anulatus (Olivier) 239

| Petroleum “aindusties:<.7..<e05<.sxce>s IgI

Pachycheles panamensts, Faxon.,.... 237 | Petrolisthes armatus (Gibbes) and

FAIS, SUMAPSON 5s. . cene4aseuens oes 260| ¢ridentatus Stimp. 238; cinctz-

Pachygrapsus transversus (Gibbes) 229| pes (Randall) ..........:..eeeeeee eee 260

Page and Clark, electric genera- Petromyzon, raucous glands of...... 331

Bees de bdvtch al eaanetanentor eet Eat; Meier: Tet fo ce.ssscreese- 295, 328, 367

Paguride, of Puget Sound....... 238, 263 | Phenacetin, discovery of............. 184

Paguristes turgidus, Stimpson...... SOI PUA tet PIU, od ict pete ne 259, 260, 262

Palegyge borret......cc.00 275-6, 278, 280 | Phoca, Bronchial tree of, 129, 142;

Palemon savigniji (Bate), etc...... 244 CI LD, het ee EO EE TE ee IAT ETS

PEIZOREMLETTUNG. ~ 0.500 sun's eaascns dacess 198 | PHospHOROSCOPE, A SIMPLE AND

Paleobotany, of Block Id., 56; CONVENIENT, Levison. ........... 401

Preactical use: Of. :35..¢.sc.0eecevoress 186 PHoroGRAPHIC RESEARCHES

PALISADES DIABASE; CONTACT- NEAR THE NORTH POLE OF THE

METAMORPHISM OF THE; (Se ABAVENS, JACODYs:..s4si02sce<n000 446

LOST ea ee nee tay 472 | PHOTOGRAPHED OcuULA MICcROo-

Pancreas, secretion physiology, MEPERS: LoevisOm. 2.22.2 cteess ss 405

302, 329, 360) PHOTOGRAPHED Eye PIkEcE MI-

Pandalus Dane, Stimpson 260, 283 |

CROMETERS, Levison.

512

401 | Potomac,

Photo fluorescence, note,. ..2......-.

PEP CUS PEL yMOMANMN: 3.50 s4202<5eee6 ..280-I

Phyllolithod s papillosus, Brandt... 261

Phyllodurus abdominalis, Stimp-

SOL is." ie Ee Rm SON ape AP a dk 261, 282 |

PHYLOGENETIC SIGNIFICANCE OF

CERTAIN PROTOZOAN NUCLEI,

ON en (Calkins: 23.0. see 379

Physa, Rudimentary cells in, 6, 12;

vestigal cells in, 2; cell lineage

(1S Ey MR RS on oe 2021

PHYSIOLOGY OF SECRETION, THE,

Mathews, cith. sc emonceeeee ees 293

Pigment cells, derivation of, 8; re-

’ lation to archenterie wall.../....... 8-10

Pilocarpine, action of, in Secretion

PY Ses ees oereee 31 I-12, 321, 335, 349

Pinnixa faba (Panay s.2.. eee cee 260

Pinus, derivation of, 49; leaf

forms, 46; ponderosa, Hyper-

trophied Scale Leaves in, 45;

riygida, abnormal leaves oft. beeen

Pistachin aquehongensts n. sp. AEs 426

Plagusia depressa (¥abricius)...... 229

LL CHONOTS NS eee eas se: 2 Gehl 2. 21

Pocock, WR. Ts teh iciccct tee 263

TOD ONEVID EA bea on Rites bitte ee 271

Point Wilson, Carinoma of.......... 206

Potting of IN. Paci: 2... An a eae 2 196

Pollicipes polymerus, Sowersby...... 2061

Polycheria osborni, 259; antarctia

(Stebbing \e.2. mace ae: weeeeee 268-9

Poly cherus, cleavage i. <../..2..6-+. 19

Polyclades, early development, I ;

micromere-quartets, and_blasto-

mere arrangement, 13, 15; typ-

ical development, 14 ; mesoblast

ANGINA CTOMEFES = 2 0. cecssnene nes 20-1

Polygordius, micromeres in, note.... 3

Polymnia, micromeres in, etc.,

MOLES franc cetesme icine urine aaces eto Bi 2

Pontoporia blainvillei, Bronchial

AirSewoltensssadenstes Bets aera Merce A 5 120

Populus balsamifera candicans

(CAG Ae Gray eter ti cniest Seana CO

harkertana Lisk. (?)........419, 426

Porcellanide Uenderson, of Puget

od. ‘and sayara each: %).%..0.... 227

Porcupine, European, Bronchial

MLSCNOUS ere: eee RM ara ae ast cles L231

Portunide, Ortmann, Gf Pogetsd.. 23

Portunion hossmenin. Peciesc sere 279

Port Townsend, Washington; Nem-

erféans’of-,.. dives seer een ae 195

LEmplectonema of, 209; Lep-

toplana of, note 15; Am-

phiporus, 210, 212 ; Lineus,

DiS) “CeveoraQHdlus.wecctueses 275

INDEXG

Leptostrobus of, 49; P.

Ponmetion! Gaia clicnistea ge cutie memes ore PAL,

Pratt, J. H. 3 OCCURRENCE, ‘ORIc

GIN AND CHEMICAL COMPOSITION

OF CHROMUTES asset siacce 4G

Primates, Bronchial Tree of....... Mes ne P)

Primordial leaves, in Pimus......... 46-7

Price, T...R., SHALE AND WILE

IN LIVING ENGLISH USAGE....... 476

Prince, J. Dynfley, SomME Passa-

MAQUODDY DOCUMENTS........ 360, 473

Prince Edward’s Id ; Lettorina Lit-

LOVED: Oe Saceeeas alsin cob woinans seuiewaomee 72

Prince’s Bay, Staten Id.; creta-

Ceous Off -.e eae ee -415, 418, 422

Prosimie, bronchial tree of.......... 129

LPOSOTROCIUEUS x85 ccese teen Ree 198

Preteoides daphnogenoides, Heer, 20, 426

Protista, enucleate............ hice pee 381

PF OLOMCTLEKLLINE dass oi dceas nate ee 200-1

PROTOZOAN NUCLEL; PHYLOGE-

NETIC SIGNIFICANCE OF CER-

TAIN 3° CalkintS;/s.<25.-s5eeee hoe a

ORIGIN. OE. a eavmncs caer ETO

Provincetown, Cape Cod ; Litto-

VAD LUCOPEL ON Pe er ene sim oa

Pseudione, WKossmann, 280, 1;

Giatal, NSP... Pee. 27A, 292

Pseudosquilla ciliata, Mitersse cece Aye)

Pseudotsuga, type of abnormal

SERS e) ya ie a Sehpeee nator 49, 51

Psychology, experiments in com-

parative; Mhorndike ..,..asuesee 450

Pteridophyta, of Block 1d........... 64, 66

Pterospermites modestus, Lesq...422, 428

Ptychoptera \arve ; intest. cells of.. 302

Publications, changes in.......... ae 7)

Publications, cost Glisten

Puelmaju. Cuchsinger ; ref... 367

PuGET SOUND; DESCRIPTION OF

SOME MARINE NEMERTEANS OF,

AND ALASKA; Griffin, 193; ON

A COLLECTION OF CRUSTACEANS

FROM, Calman, 259; REPORT

ON CRUSTACEA OF, Harrington,

465; Leptoplana of, 15 ; Amphi-

porus at, 211; Dinoflagellata..... 390

Pugettia graci.ts, Dana...... contjeuee 260

Pulmonary artery; changes in

branching iofs saneate-eee sean .’ 120

lobes ; “character of division... 143

Punta Arenas, Patagonia; Carv-

Pycnanthemum, of Block Iki eee

Quain:: rels eee Ee PE ee! 2) B40

QUARTZ CRYSTAIS; RECENT Dis-

COVERY OF s#KcGnZ-.ceeeeereeeee 454

INDEX. 513

Quinine and nicotine; action of, Piwocers; i. Eis ~ Res.) Mem) wnuscx 451

upon secretion, EEG PP EOte TELS ides dann tandan eons Zhai,

200, 211-12, 314, 220, 320, 255) Roosevelt, |... A. Res, Mem... 451

Roripa palustris (L.) Bess. of

Rabbit; Secretion-Physiology of, PCL Ae atocdiscbdncsans tanevied« 65

eee S07. 308, 226. 283, 395 S40 | IOUS TOL cick cin edi civsins cue'sb eens ens 25-6

Seretat ee. TEL... NOE. se cacevisg ode cnooss Lo ae RO WAOY 5. TRh aes viuncnandgeeans'nanaiveee 119

eat LCL... sw econ cateten caemee BOP. mys TEL =. crcdatcswaiia avers yee ctiens 339

Rails, Use of heavy, on Amer. Rail- RUBIACEZ, STUDIES IN THE EM-

roads, 93; Stresses in, 89, 92, BRYOLOGY OF THE, Lloyd........ 498

95-6, 98; Tests of, 91, 98, 99, romana cells, in Verets, Ari-

100, I10, 112; deflection under lh PUP bCLC aes a0'ss nada ennaaeavatabes ee ls

train loads, 90, 94, 95; See | Rumex obtusifolius L. of Block

Srremmatograph.....<..cscssssweres Bids aise nadas bev oncads ae seneeerce ee ane 65

NS FE cen cousin yeewihoneianse I91 | Rusby, Henry H.; Public Lec-

Rankin, W.M.; THE NORTHROP Re nis ee Scena cosa pase eeae 450

COLLECTION OF CRUSTACEA |

FROM THE BAHAMAG......cssee- 225, 463 Saccharin, discovery Ri ac Pec ecyibewicw i 184

manvier ; ref....... 303, 331-2, 359, 367 | DOCU: wan steeeeeeeecenesensseeees 283

Raphonotus subquadratus, Dana... 265 | Sagadahok EDTA 3a oe, se otro 369

EL 20S RM a a ee ee dere 376 Salivary Secretion; sympathetic,

Rathbun, Miss M. S;; ref......... | 303; rate of, 804; decrease by

225. 232, 294-6, 262 | stimulation, 309; augmentation

eawitz 5 ref,.....:.... stadt Scmatcents 367| of, 311; Paralysis of Sympa-

UST ARE Ss Ee ee re I91| thetic, 314; character of, 320;

Recording Secretary, report; 1898 456, muscular mechanism of, 324;

Records of Meetings, N. Y. Acad. | contractile sub. in gland, 328;

SS FES sie Sc hosdstainnsed 445| changes in gland cells, 328;

Redout Bay, Alaska; Amphiporus at 213 conclusion, 329; post-mortem

Rees J. K.; VARIATION OF LAT- chorda, 337 ; action of atropine

ITUDE, AND CONSTANTS OF AB- and pilocarpine, 349; action of

“Se ee 485 quinine and nicotine, 355; os-

Remipes cubensis, Saussure........... 237 motic, with vaso. dilation, 356 ;

Resin ducts; constant position of.. 47 PUY SIOLORW. Ok odemeaianin cnacasedecaods 358

Retinospora ; leaf forms in........... 46 Saliva; fluidity of, 321; back flow

Retractor-muscles of Cucumaria of, 324-7, 330; viscous,

er ainda tase nibs tenets, desgs sel soos 4II 307-10, 313, 321-2

PEE PRES St BEE Lorch whites Socks is ose 365 | Salix cordata, etc., of Block Id.... 65

Reusch, H. Hon. Mem............ 460 | Salix inegualis Newb. of......... 419, 430

Rhizocephalia, of Puget Sd....... 261, 283 Salix proteefoa, flexuosa, and

Meuter, 1. H... Res. .Mems<........ 495 bP CareceOl are LES. ice cs nahev ete vader. 59, 78

MME AOROF DIOS. as cae amabensisvaeeisiunns 423,, 430 | Salvioni, Prof, E.; ref........<..<: 29, 39

Me OPDAG ... 0s - cae newcsnage-enrse lees 381, 389 | Samza cecropia, grafting of........... 219

Rhode Island, Geol. Survey, note 56 | San Francisco, Emplectonema at... 207

OS CES gg (1 ae ee a ea 335, 307 | Sapendus Morrison, Lesq........ 422, 426

mica, J. M Res, Mem. ......06.00 ARG) SAUSSULE 2 TEE... ween econstnins 235, 297

Ries, Heinrich ; CLAY AND Kao- SO ORE TS EN en aa ee 250

LIN DEPOSITS OF EUROPE........ 466 | Sayreville, N. J.; Cretaceous of.... 416

Rio Janeiro, Amphithoé from........ 273 SCALE-LEAVES ; HYPERTROPHIED,

Ritter, W. E.; ON THE ASCIDIANS IN Pinus PONDEROSA; Lloyd... 45

COLL. BY THE PuGET Sp. ExPeED 487 | Schaudinn; ref.......... 389, 392-3, 397

oon, .j: Et. Res. .Mem ...5 scceex A5F pschewiakoll, W.; ref... ccemsd-<s 397

Robinson, Arthur ; ref............ £34 | schiff 5 xef........... 297, 302, 320-2, 367

Rodentia, Bronchial tree of......... E20) | SCMIZONEVIEI TOIL, 0.053 any oe nnnsceiss Yaees 198

ROENTGEN RAys; USE OF THE Schlesinger, Frank; THE PR#&-

FLUORSCOPIC SCREEN IN Con- fe EEE REP Son vceails wwareenitanats ve 469

NECTION WITH, Trowbridge.... 39| Schluter; ref..................0000. 328, 368

iter nA DETECTOR, do... .- 20: cmmidt + ref, NOtG:,.2......<exesras 401

514 INDEX.

mehraimn ¢ Fel i. csdveweethassebee2: 234 | Snakes, poison glands:of............. 33

sennliziuG.5. Res. Mem. .:.225... 4A5 | von Sobieranskiy; wet.o-5-aeee 299, 368

SGhwltze Wax s -rel. 5, 5s J5ss0c aes 197-9 | Solanum dulcamara L.. ....cc..ec00e 66

Sele UE one ROMs 2) it aa ne rear ae 25 | Sooloo Sea, Gammarus from. ...... 275

Schumowa-Simanowskaja; ref. 333 | South Amboy, N. J., Cretaceous of

SCIENCE, PuRE; DEBT OF THE 416; clay fossils, 57 ; Celastrus of 60

WORLD. TO, Stevenson. .....-.6. 177 | South-East Point, Block Id ......... 59-60

inductive and deductive......... 177 | Southport, Eng. ; Vadencinia of.... 199

Sclerocrangon munitus...... 200, 281,253 | Sewersby > nels.cdssces ace ee esenee 254

WUTICUS, Dama ..iweegeennstesiees 284 | Speranza, C. L., Machiavelli..... 492

Scott, W. B.- ‘Gor. (Meme ee 461 | Spermatophyta of Block Id.......... 64-6

Scyra acutifrons, Dana............0+ 260 | Spiders, poison glands of............. Zar

Seal; Harbor, Bronchial tree of..... 141 | Szo; cell lineage of..1, 3, 6, 10, 12, 24

sebaceous glands ; musculature of. :\) 431 || SpOlOzOa ty cccicsieenessees chee eee 388

SECRETION, THE PHYSIOLOGY OF, Syuilliiog, Watreille. 2) .c\.e ne eeenes 253

Mathews . vicccecinbiemndgrtacateecms 293 | stabchen, jof nucleus,..5.....200 vais side 386

Secretions ; sweat, 359; pancreas, Starling, 2 Piss teh eee 299, 368

360; Sympathetic Salivary, 303 ; Staten Island, Amboy clay series

due to muscle action, 331; Lit- of, 56-7; Laurus of, 60; Myrto-

CTAtUTEOl Stk. Mesure eens 364| phyllum of, 60; Tricalycites of,

Secretory nerve fibres.....294, 300-1, 304| 61; Basal clays, relation with

Sedgewick; Adams tel... ..2..2.~. 25 Block Id., etc., 62; NOTES ON

SI) C0 Of =) gape ey GA ET re aM 410| THE GLACIAL PHENOMENA OF,

Semperta bErMUALENSIS. ...0..ccereeeee Atel), cEtoiel: evs cote oan ee eee

WENAtOFS Fell fhe. cen sae cece eta 209)| Stauffacher 3 vet oo sseccste. sed ee 27

NunecaImdianss.coc.c ere ee 3276) Stebbing, Rev; 1. Rios; ser,

Sericocarpus asteroides (.), of 259, 268-9, 280

Block Wlidsicc Matdis Soxteres eet 65 | Steel, Hist. Sketch of, 181; use of,

SCSAV WIG, GEMEKCL ( SAY Vic sacs sda eaaee 2209) and forest (preservation. 2.2... 182

Sheep, Secretion physiology of, Stenopus hispidus (Latr.).........+.. 240

said tw can tebeeemenies 303-4, 309, 324, 333 semiiledts, vou Martinis: >: .s<<se 2a

Siberia ; Jura, Leptostrobus of...... 49 SCULCU OTIS Tis, SD leer Sacatiecoc mes 242

Sickles, I; “Ress, Mem. cc. ccccnccs 495 | Sterculia snowit Lesq. (?) and sp.

Slemens’*electhic miachimes:,.ccs.<.-- I8I 422, 428

Signal Service ssicetchvoti.csassses: 184| Stevenson, J. J.; DEBT OF THE

Sihler, E. G.; THE LATTER PART WORLD: TO PURE. SCIENCES. e 1 hel

OF LUCRETIUS AND EPICURUS St. Francis ‘Indiansis. cceseeesace 369, 376

TCE LET EW PVs e Stee tes ala Nor 431, 467 | Stechopus of Bermuda, 409-10 ;

THE MAIN LINE OF CICERO’S diaboli, 409; Xanthomela, 409-

POLITICAL JUDGMENTS...... 494 13; mébi, 410; haytiensis....... 413

Simonoskaja, vor ele. co secennccee 298'| Stimpson, Dr: Wm; retire 196

Sinistral Gasteropods, displacement 217, 233, 236; 235,252," 204-07, 272

Tm Obese ste eee eee ae tite ae suey is 14| St. Jonn’s River Indians.......... 3745 377

Sisyrinchium atlanticum Bicknell.. 65|St. Lawrence Gulf, Carinella of, ;

Sitka, Alaska, Amplectonema of.... 209 NOE; se, scdee aesee ag sens ware teeeeeee 216

Amphiporus Of.........00 210; 212-13 | Stoic and; Npicureany..es.pseee scene 431

Six Nations ry janes amanstgeseecs<sacen-ihs 370-1 | Stomach, Secretion physiology of

Skiascope of Professor Magie....30, 40-I 202,° 335

Sladen, challenger report ; ref.408, 412 | Stomatopoda, of Northrop Coll...... 253

Slocums Al Waseem ed ec nese 117 | Stone, M.A’. Res# Memes. s-tee ee. 495

Swilacee ot Blocks Udkas a -..1.asec <0 66 | Strasburger’s Kinoplasma............ 394

SOLAR Ota Ofte Menino eee eectas 65 | STREMMATOGRAPH, THE USE OF

Sitith,; Tel. 52/55. bates 220,233) THE, Dudley. paces 89, 452

Smith, H. J.; RECENT ARCHEO- Determination of Stresses by

LOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS IN 96, 100 3 (RECORDS :;....8. 479

BRITISH COLUMBIA. S tcp secsocees 450| Strong, O. S.; INNERVATION OF

Smithsonian bequest. ..........-seseees 190| THE LATERAL LINE ORGANS... 470

Smithsontan-Jns. = retu.s-aeeeeeee, ce BO 3') SUclOr 10... due ccden et scnee taae eee 381, 392

INDEX. 515

Sudoriferous glands of Amphibia... 302| Tripler, C. E. Res. Mem.......... 474

Sweat glands, musculature of....... 331 Trochophore larva; pigment area

semen: OL. 5 2:5 iveseect Coceae BNP MARL, neat erat ya Oy ac pdon veake haceretsd 8

SS) eee mabe 261, 283 Trophic nerve fibres,

Sympathetic Salivary Secretion...... 303 24,7209, JOT, 304, 320, 323;- 337

Synapta vivipara, Oerst..........060 413| Trowbridge, C. C.; THE USE OF

DUMCIE WUCLIA... co scareccevnes 384, 396, 400| THE. FLUOROSCOPIC SCREEN IN

CONNECTION WITH ROENTGEN

warmoskia, of Ni; Pacifie..... ih... 196} Rays, 39;.AN X-RAy DETEC-

Taxidea americana; Bronchial TOR FOR RESEARCH PURPOSES... 29

es E325 = ESA PS, | DRA MMOS CTs Ane ex nae deb sts ba ven nesses 303

PePeTStGG’ 5 - TEL. i..cise.ce oceans 339| Tschirwinsky ; ref...... 351-2, 354, 368

Helearaph, invention of ..........0.3 180 | Zurbellaria ; mesoblast of, note... 21

Telmessus chetragonus (Tilesius).. 260] Tuscarora Indians................0e006 376

Teloblasts, archenteric origin, and Tycho Brahe's studies. 04.0 viviis 000s 178

oi ORE EES ie SSS RP ere B2;/23 | Pytidall, John 5). eb... 0a ee oe 401

SUS a SR ORES =) ee eee 117

Tetramitus .......382—3, 388, 392-4, 400| Umbrella, cell-lineage of........... 2.) 6, m2

SS Beis 2 ae mee RA ere 413 mentary cells in, 6, 11, 12; larval

Thinnfeldia lesquereuxiana Heer, mesenchyme of, 18; ectomesoblast

58, 419, 428 of, 19-20; Ancestral reminis-

Thompson, Prof. D’Arcy W.; cence, 24; mesenchyme of........ 26

ES AR RE eS ae ee ee ake. Gand, .-iG.§. ele i sevcess cxevits 328, 368

Thorndike, E. L., EXPERI- Upogebia pugettensis (Dana)......... 260

MENTS IN COMPARATIVE Psy- Uranium glass; fluorescence of..... 403

PENG Nets at eet cocnakwcees Senedss cee 450 | Usener, H.; Epicurea, ref...... 432, 437

Thomell, H. L: Res. Mem...... 451

Thryne of Bermuda, retractor VOCAMIBEE: wcdnvwxsbinunvoeayweseoeede te 66

“LIA ee ee ee AIOE s Waillarie sa mel, esses cteeds odaeede 207,217

ema, leaf forms iN: ../...05 00060006 46 | Valencinia of N. Pacific, 196, 198;

MEP ETStEGE +: TEL. Hi..4 2555.0 -000. =e BEI ser HIL, TS Picasa wana sis cvags i cenvce 200

Ties; destructive work of trains, Vanuxem and Morton; ref.......184-5

89 ; spike redriving, note......... g1 | Vaso-dilator nerves, in Secretion,

TITANIFEROUS MAGNETITES; 332,356

SoME REMARKS ON, Kemp..... 476] Velenovsky; ref.............0...0000 59

Tentsoma of N. Pacific........ Snes 196| VERA CRUZ; DISTRIBUTION. OF

Tottenville, S. I.; Cretaceous of BIRDs IN, Chapman.............. 447

415, 419, 420-3 | Verbascum blattaria L...........00005 66

Toxopneustes variegatus Lamk, Vernonta moveboracensts ..ccecececeee 66

BORG IE CT IC Oo eco ex nducenadadeiuasedcde'es 66

Tozeuma carolinense, Kingsley..... 240') Verrill, A. Eis. ref... 197, 218, 407-8

Trachelomonas lagenella, volvocina Vestigal cells, and origin of telo-

MBA MISPEII osiseeaoencesdens: 385-6, 400 CHESS (Ss oe ae en Rs 12

Trachelocerca phemicopterus........ 381 | Viburnum, of Block Id............... 66

TRACK-RELAVING ON THE B. & Vicia sativa L., of Block Id......... 65

AG Re, Domleys eet. 446) Viereller: ref... 5 0i.ccesccckeees 328, 368

Track Indicator car of P. H Warchow-vik. “Elion. Mem.:.....\0252: 460

RONEN Joso yet crutadenebanepee eee Boy, Morar ( berbst)\...sisvescvssccss veces 226

mapas os es: (Mem) ceckcedscene AAS BAN fa] CAS 904 Ce ee 179

Treasurer’s Report, 1898......... 457 von Wistinghausen; ref......... ee ¥

Tricalycites papyraceus News., Von) Wittich';; tef......: 324-8, 335, 368

Gl, Fos eae ae Moulin 2eTet vce. lleva encbecsocaes 38

Trichocarcinus oregonensis (Dana) 260

Trientalis americona, Pursh, of Wabaniki Indians...369, 370-2, 374, 376

EMG HINN grak sao da wn alin etiece ans 65.) Walcott, C: D. — Cor. Mem. <......; 461

Trifolium procumbens L. and 7- Wilaiker AIO is FOE cede se 284

EME NS 0056 ong iceaweueek Ccneeeet Pei ew Wether PAEOI co sk ate. cei eee nb ok 279

516 INDEX.

Wampunt Laws: ..tv..csce.- 00%. 369-70, 374, Wierzejski; ref.............. 6; 152; 20727,

Ward, Daride. Pisses. 24.00: 56, 62, 417 | Wiggins, F. H. Res. Mem......... 451

Ward, S. lL. H. Res. Mem...... .. 445 | Willemite, fluorescence of...2.-2....- 402

Washington, H. S. Res. Mem....... 486 | Williams, H. S. Cor. Mem........ 461

Washington, H. S.; THE Ic- Wilson, E. B.; CONSIDERATIONS.

NEOUS Rocks OF ESSEX Coa., ON CELL LINEAGE AND ANCES-

IAS Beeetat ts oleh welders cine enncLs pce 499 TRAL REMINISCENCE, I; ON

Washington; Leptoplana of Port THE STRUCTURE OF PROTO-

sRawmnsendss NOE. 55. sisssicitereseesice 15 PLASM IN THE EGGs OF ECHINO-

WATER, SPECIFIC HEAT OF; Day. 452 DERMS AND SOME OTHER ANI-

Waterbury, J. U.” kes. Miem:2...; 451 MALS

Watertown Arsenal; metal tests ; Literature of Cell Lineage... 27

TMOLE ~Gurnwetsassneesice seventeen emeenene gt | Wolff, Ay Re. Res: Miem'!.c-; ye... A451

Weber. Max > refs.ch Saccckee 129, 148 | Woodbridge, N. J ; Cretaceous of 416

Weber; ref., on Secretion Phys... 368} Woodbridge, N. Y.; 7Z7ricalycites

Wieber sso rel..... ee Cees: 225 FY 0) (0 ERP ee Sei nea Seni Rae nes tes. 2 61

Weil, Richard; DEVELOPMENT Wood’s Holl, Littorina fittoria of 72

OF OssICULA AUDITUS IN THE Woodward; Ca A. “Rest-Mem i: 451

OPOSSUM: 2h. ns. eens 488 | Woodward, B. D.; VOWELS oF

Weismann; cell mosaic theory... 26) ROUMANIAN AND OTHER Ro-

Weller, Stuart ; DESCRIPTION OF MANCEH PANGCUAGHSMie ieee 468

DEVONIAN CRINOIDS AND BLAS- Wright; 2s net eee 401

TOIDS FROM MILWAUKEE,

en ee oe areca eee aes oemiote LOA 55 Kantiada. Ocmnannof ice cee

Fev oes Gees oat ee a 336, 368 :

West Berkely, Cal.; 2zplectonema 2S DIE EELS IER

OLS fo gimens aoe if spieiindataeeatoaeee 208 PURPOSES, TSR Dr ea za

West Indes, crastaceaol..........0s.. 225 | __ é P

Whiartom’s duct y 20. coseecrs sac sonster 295-6 Yellow Pine, see Pinus ponderosa

Wheeler, J. R.; THe NEWLY Yokahama Bay, Philyra pisum of 262

DISCOVERED POEMS OF BACCHY-

TAD ES pci Seat cece ee atest oe 467 | Zabriskie, G. Res. Mem............ 451

WVihiteayes; teliasts act dete es 123, 216i.-Zachaniass wrete.. nce. .tean vette 382, 307

WH hitheld’s wetiads. tec oscidece enc ees 119| Zimmermann and Boas; ref.,

Whitman, C. O:.. Cor. Mem;,.-.... 401 MOLE bs Aeron ersdcns soles oben 145

SN Ditmams ster, asus anaes Mears 25'| Zinin, discovery;et-Anilin,.,s2,eeees 184

Wicke, W: U.Res. Memi.,<.054.... 496 | Zittel, K. von. Hon. Mem......... 460

Wiedemann’: refi; note, ....c4.<.. Aol.| Zoology: of Block lds jc.ee cere 71

Wiedersheim, R.; ref....134, 146, 368| Zostera marina L. of Block Id..... 64

Widdringtonites reichit (Ett.), Zunstein ss Teleco eee 147

CER Tie caoseRiettcca tant esenea ees 58 | Zyonemertes VITESCENS....recsesersaese 210

aoe

)

‘

MAYS on fiete’ Ly #1 <)"

. els

mr MA car:

pe (is eae

slices aimed

oem eb 8 +X a

ide tae 3 aie , Pp e *

NEW YORK

ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

Fifth Annual Reception

and Exhibit of

Recent Progress in Science

in the

American Museum of Natural History,

ADM baad 14:

1898.

* wee ~

“dee “i

, at 4

~ \k Dae

4 ¥, a °

=) *

* Ae

ics

A >

‘

pa) i S

‘ Lae o » i Ps

- m a

¥ 7 ‘ be

, ‘ ! - .

’

i 7 » _ iy Fi om | oe

16 . > 3

S i ‘ ¢

ws J Lhe

. r L

% 3 ’

‘a i

s ‘ '

- p

’ = pi

ay Wie he

¥ , -

*) ‘

toe - 1 “

ij ;

7 — : %

tee 2 - : as ® 7

Pn i . , . ; P

» 7

is c : ‘rR: .

. a a :

7 4 / - > oe

3 ih, , .

Poy

, ars

a Tet,

, ra po i ee tere ie fang

ip Ate a : =

ne ey

la :

vad Ea PEN Se

Z he ere - 4%

‘

ier

Je .

% “

* an Ns

iy al

~ ~ a 4

.. - : +9 ae ] RA I oy y Lo

nk ps ‘ ae ae : Ju ? eek ye >! a rs * F ay D heise

i. Di eo : ’ iy i ae i . iy P a id My I act

Fa eh ol < hee) Eke pe haa ip ss % Rs fs ‘ a ca

pe » - ’ 1

a i

Mae A»

h oY by a

aa? f rt ‘ af 4 ih “)}

bd ag r iar Eve ab S Sy ol

Committees.

Honorary Committee of Members.

ADDISON BROWN, MORRIS K. JESUP,

CHARLES P. DALY, SETH LOW,

WILLIAM E. DODGE, HENRY M. McCRACKEN,

ABRAM S. HEWITT, WILLIAM C. SCHERMERHORN.

Reception and Exhibition Committee.

HENRY F. OSBORN, CHARLES F. COX,

REGINALD GORDON, GARY N. CALKINS,

RICHARD E. DODGE, Chairman.

General Committee.

ANATOMY: GEORGE S. HUNTINGTON anp JOS. A. BLAKE.

ASTRONOMY: J. K. REES, HAROLD JACOBY anv H. 5S. DAVIS.

BoTany: GEO. V. NASH.

CHEMISTRY: CHAS. A. DOREMUS.

ELECTRICITY: GEO. F. SEVER.

ETHNOLOGY AND ARCHZ OLOGY: FRANZ BOAS Anp L. FARRANI).

EXPERIMENTAL PsycHOLOGY: CHAS. B. BLISS.

GeoLocy: ARTHUR HOLLICK.

MINERALOGY: EDM. O. HOVEY.

PALZONTOLOGY: GILBERT van INGEN.

PHOTOGRAPHY: CORNELIUS Van BRUNT.

Puysics: WILLIAM HALLOCK.

PHYSIOGRAPHY: R. H. CORNISH.

ZoOLocy: E. B. WILSON.

PROGRAMME.

APRIL 13.

RECEPTION TO MEMBERS OF ACADEMY AND

INVITED GUESTS, = 2 = . 8-10 P.M.

APRIL I4.

AFTERNOON EXHIBIT, - . - - 3-5 P. M.

EVENING RECEPTION, TO MEMBERS OF THE

SCIENTIFIC ALLIANCE, : - - S-II_ P. M.

DEMONSTRATIVE ADDRESS, THE FUNCTION

oF LARGE TELESCOPES,” Promptly at- - 9 P. M.

By Pror, Gror Es bawe:

PRECEDED BY AN

INTRODUCTION BY THE PRESIDENT OF THE, ACADEMY,

Pror. Henry F. OSBorn.

AND BY THE PRESIDENT OF THE MasEuM

Morris K. Jesur, isa;

NEW YORK

ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

FOUNDED IN 1817.

ORGANIZATION.

The New York Academy of Sciences is fourth in age among

American scientific societies, having been organized in 1817 as

the Lyceum of Natural History. It embraces all branches of

science and its scope is the same as that of the older Euro-

pean societies. Its publications are of world-wide reputation

and contain the first announcement of many discoveries, which

have proved to be of great importance in their practical and

theoretical relations.

The former Presidents have been: Dr. Samuel L. Mitchell,

1817-1823. Professor John Torrey, 1824-1826; 1836. Major

Joseph Delafield, 1827-1837; 1839-1865.. Professor Charles

A. Joy, 1866-1867. Professor John S. Newberry, 1868-1892.

Professor O. P. Hubbard, 1892-1893. Dr. H. Carrington Bol-

ton, 1893-1894. Professor John K. Rees, 1894-1896. Profes-

sor J. J. Stevenson, 1896-1898.

MEMBERSHIP.

Honorary members are limited to fifty in number, and are

elected from the representative scientific men of the world.

Corresponding members are also chosen from distinguished men

in different parts of the world engaged inthe prosecution of vari-

ous branches of research, the results of which they are invited

to communicate to the Academy from time to time. This list

now includes over 250 names.

Fellows are limited to 100 and are chosen from among the

Resident Members in recognition of scientific attainments or

services; they form the Council and the main working body,

and conduct the business of the Academy.

Resident Membership is not restricted to specialists, but is

open to those who take a general interest in science and desire to

promote the work of the Academy by their subscriptions.

The Initiation Fee is $5, and the annual dues are $10. Pay-

ment of these confers upon Members full privileges and the right

to all publications. By payment of $100 a Member may become

a Life Member, commuting his annual dues. Donors of $250

become Patrons, and have all the privileges of Life or Resident

Members.

Members are elected as follows: The candidates are proposed

publicly, in writing, at any meeting, by a Fellow or Member;

and the nominations, together with the name of the person mak-

ing them, are referred to the Council; if approved, the candi-

dates may be elected by ballot at any succeeding business meeting.

PUBLICATIONS.

The publications of the Academy at present consist of two

series— Zhe Annals (octavo) and The Alemotrs (quarto). All

are distributed to Members and Fellows, and are circulated in

exchange for the publications of nearly all the foreign and Amer-

ican Academies and learned Societies. The Annals, which

opened in 1824, contain the longer contributions and reports of

researches, together with the reports of meetings. The Zrazs-

actions, in which the shorter papers and business reports have

hitherto appeared, are now abolished and the matter appears in

the Annals. The complete volumes of Annals will hereafter

coincide with the calendar year, and beginning with the volume

now in press will appear with a new typography and arrange-

ment of pages.

Under the present system of printing, an author can secure

immediate publication and distribution of a discovery in which

it is important to establish priority. The present edition of the

Annals is 1,000. The Memoirs, issued in quarto form, are

adapted to papers requiring large plates or tabulations. But

one number has thus far been issued.

LIBRARY.

The Library numbers over 18,000 titles, and is especially

rich in sets of the publications of American and Foreign Societies.

In this respect it is one of the most complete in this country. It

is now shelved in a special room of the Schermerhorn building

at Columbia University, and is accessible to Members from 8 A.M.

to 5 P.M.

MEETINGS.

The Academy at present meets at 64 Madison Ave. in Mott

Memorial Hall. Meetings are held every Monday at 8 P.M.,

from October to May, inclusive. The Academy meets in sections

on successive Mondays in the following order: Astronomy and

Physics; Biology (Zoélogy, Physiology, Botany) ; Geology and

Mineralogy; Anthropology, Psychology and Philology. Other

sections may be formed by a vote of the Council. Each of the

sectional evenings is devoted mainly to scientific papers and dis-

cussions. All the meetings are open to the public and are an-

nounced, with the subjects of the papers to be read, in the bul-

letins of the Scientific Alliance of New York.

SCOPE OF WORK.

Owing to the increased scientific activity in this city, expan-

sion of the Academy’s work is called for along three lines, pub-

lications, lecture courses and grants for research. The Academy

is endeavoring to increase its efficiency in the near future by se-

curing a larger publication fund so that it will no longer be neces-

sary to decline important scientific papers offered for publication,

especially when accompanied by illustrations. A certain sum of

money should also be available annually for lecture courses—

such as the well known lectures of the Royal Institution in Lon-

don; and for grants for original research. Our scientific men

give their results freely to the world with no thought of financial

return in most cases, and should be aided in their work by Sci-

entific Academies.

Persons desiring to join the Academy or support its scientific

work by subscription in either of the lines suggested above should

address

THE SECRETARY,

New York Academy of Sciences,

TEACHERS CoLLEGE, NEw York Ciry.

OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY, 1898-9.

President,

HENRY F. OSBORN.

First Vice-President, Second Vice-President

NL BRITON. J. Fo KEMP:

Corresponding Secretary, WM. STRATFORD

Recording Secretary, RICHARD E. DODGE.

Treasurer, GC. FCO

Librarian, ARTHUR HOLLICK.

COUNGIEEORS.

CHARLES LL. BRISTOL, WILLIAM HALLOCK,

CHARLES A. DOREMUS, HAROLD JACOBY,

BASHFORD DEAN, LAWRENCE A. McLOUTH.

MEMBERS OF COUNCIL, £x-offcco.

Ex-Presidents O. P. HUBBARD, J. K. REES and J. J. STEVENSON:

CURATORS:

HARRISON G. DYAR, GEORGE F. KUNZ,

ALEXIS A. JULIEN, LOUIS H.-LAUDY;

: WILLIAM D. SCHOONMAKER.

FINANCE COMMITTEE.

HENRY DUDLEY, JOHN H. HINTON;

CORNELIUS VAN BRUNT.

OFFICERS OF THE SECTIONS,

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS.

P. H. DUDLEY, Chairman. R. GORDON, Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

E. B. WILSON, Chatrman. G. N. CALKINS, Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

J. F. KEMP, Chairman. H. RIES, Secretary.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY, PSYCHOLOGY AND PHILOLOGY.

L.A. McLOUTH, Crewman. A.V. W. JACKSON,

Secretary for Philology.

CHAS. B. BLISS, Secretary for Anthropology and Psychology.

ANATOMY.

In CuarGE oF GEo. 8. HuNTINGTON AND Jos. ie) BUARES

g. RADIOGRAPHS AND DIAGRAMS SHOWING THE TOPOGRAPH-

ICAL RELATIONS OF THE TRACHEA AND BRONCHI TO

THE THoraAcic WaLLs. Exhibited by Dr. Jos. A. Blake,

Department of Anatomy, Columbia University.

z. THE STRUCTURE OF THE FOURTH VENTRICLE AND OF THE

LATERAL REcEsSsES. Exhibited by Dr. Jos. A. Blake.

3. RECENT STUDIES IN THE VISCERAL ANATOMY AND THE

é VASCULAR SYSTEM OF ReEptitia. Exhibited by the

Department of Anatomy, Columbia University.

4. THE CEREBRAL GYRES AND FISSURES OF TWO NATIVES OF

BritisH NEw Guinea. Exhibited by the Department

of Anatomy, Columbia University.

mo iKONOMY.

In CuarcGE or J. K. Rees, Haro_tp JAcospy AND HERMAN 8S.

DAVIS. ©

1. PHOTOGRAPHIC ILLUSTRATIONS OF RECENT Work. Ex-

hibited by Harvard College Observatory through E. C.

Pickering, Director.

a. Vicinity of Eta Carine, photographed with the Bruce

telescope.

4. Large Magellanic Cloud.

ec. Arequipa Station, showing new Bruce Building.

dad. Bruce Building.

e. Spectroscopic Binary, yp! Scorpii.

f- Spectroscopic Binary, A. G. C. 10534.

Spectrum of § Puppis.

Spectrum of Meteor as photographed.

Spectrum of Meteor, enlarged 9 times.

. Variations in Light of U Pegasi.

Proper Motion of Z. C. 5h 243 and occultation of 26

Arietis.

Dumbbell Nebula.

Spiral and Ring Nebule.

Nebula in Andromeda.

2. PHOTOGRAPHS OF APPARATUS AND OF STELLAR SPECTRA,

Cc.

ILLUSTRATING A NEw Metuop. Exhibited by Prof.

Charles Lane Poor, of Johns Hopkins Observatory.

Concave grating spectroscope; ordinary form attached

to eye end of telescope.

Concave grating spectroscope; direct form.

Same as 4, mounted on telescope.

Series of spectra of Sirius, including Glass positive, or-

dinary size; photograph enlarged three times without

widening; photograph, enlarged and widened; Glass

positive, enlarged and widened; Series of Spectra of

other stars.

3. CHARTS AND SKETCHES. Exhibited by United States Coast

Cc.

and Geodetic Survey, H. 5S. Pritchett, Superintendent,

Washington, D. C.

Isogonic and Isoclinic Charts for 1900 A. D. \

Base map showing astronomical positions and gravity

stations to date.

Sketch showing the Triangulation of the Great Transcon-

tinental arc from Cape May, New Jersey, to Point Arena,

California.

4. Grass Positives. Exhibited by the Yerkes Observatory of

the University of Chicago, George E. Hale, Director.

. Photographs of the Building and Instruments of the

Yerkes Observatory. Thirty positives on glass.

Stellar spectra photographed with the 4o-inch telescope

and stellar spectographs by Hale.

1. Part of spectrum of a Orionis (three prisms).

2. Part of spectrum of o Citi (Mira)—(three prisms).

3. Comparison of the spectra of 78 Schjellerup ( Vogel’s

type 3b) and p Persei (Vogel’s type 3a).

5. BromipE ENLARGEMENTS OF PHOTOGRAPHS OF RECENTLY

bs ie,

ConsTRUCTED INsTRUMENTS. Exhibited by Warner &

Swazey, Cleveland, Ohio.

. 6-inch Meridian Circle made for U. S. Naval Observa-

tory, Washington, D. C.

. 5-inch Alt-Azimuth made for U. S. Naval Observatory,

Washington, D. C.

3-inch Combined Transit and Zenith Telescope.

. 4-inch Zenith Telescope.

3-inch Prism Transit.

Standard ro-inch Equatorial Telescope.

6. PUBLICATIONS OF VARIOUS OBSERVATORIES, showing repro-

Cc.

ductions of photographs of the Moon. Exhibited by

Columbia University.

Plates from Photographs, by M.M. Loewy and M. P.

Puiseux, Paris Observatory.

Plates by Dr. Weinek, of Prague.

Plates from the Lick Observatory photographs.

7. MirRoRS AND REEL USED IN THE DETERMINATION OF

THE [CONSTANT OF ABBERRATION BY THE LOEWY

Metuop. Exhibited by Professor George C. Comstock,

Washburn Observatory, Madison, Wis.

BOSANY.,

In CHARGE oF Geo. V. NASH.

1. ALBRECHT’S KLINOSTAT TO ILLUSTRATE THE EXCLUSION OF

HELIOTROPIC AND GEOTROPIC CURVATURE. Exhibited

by Dr. C..C.- @nens:

T@.

» Wi BF

14.

re.

MeETHOD oF MEASURING RooT GROWTH AND NUTATION.

Exhibited by: Dr. C.-C. Curtis.

SLIDES ILLUSTRATING THE LIFE HIsTOoRY OF SOME FRESH

Water ALGa@.° Exhibited by Mr, I.E Hazen.

MusEuM PREPARATIONS OF SEEDS AND SEEDLINGS OF PHE@-

NIX DACTYLIFERA. Exhibited by Prof. Francis E. Lloyd.

ABNORMAL CONE FROM DouGLAS SPRUCE, PSEUDOTSUGA

MUCRONATA. Exhibited by Prof. Francis E. Lloyd.

HyPERTROPHIED SCALE-LEAVES OF PINUS PONDEROSA. Pro-

duced by pruning staminate shoots. Exhibited by Prof.

Francis E. Lloyd.

AccrEssory Buns IN PISUM SATIVUM, CULTIVATED VARIETY.

Obtained by amputation of plumule and successive axil-

lary buds. Exhibited by Prof. Francis E. Lloyd.

STUDIES IN THE EMBRYOLOGY OF SPARGANIUM. Exhibited

by Mr. F.C. -Paulmier.

SET OF SLIDES SHOWING THAT THE FORMATION OF CELLU-

LOSE DEPENDS UPON THE INFLUENCE OF A NUCLEUS.

Exhibited by Dr. C. O. Townsend.

STUDIES IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE OVULE OF LARIX

LARICINA. Exhibited by Miss Ada Watterson.

DEVELOPMENT OF THE EMBRYO SAC IN SAGITTARIA.

Exhibited by Miss Louise B. Dunn.

NEw JAPANESE AND AMERICAN CHARACE. With illus-

trations and descriptions. Exhibited by Dr. T. F. Allen.

New SPECIES FROM THE VICINITY OF NEw YorkK CIty.

Illustrated by Specimens. Exhibited by Mr. Eugene P.

Bicknell.

Two NEW SANICULAS FROM THE SOUTHERN STATES.

Represented by specimens. Exhibited by Mr. Eugene

P; Bicknell:

Mosses OF NoRTHERN BOLIVIA AND SOUTHERN PERU.

Collected by Pierre Jay in July and October, 1893.

Exhibited by Elizabeth G. Britton.

16.

17.

18.

19g.

20.

21.

22.

BR:

24.

ac:

26.

a7.

28.

SoME New SpeciEs oF ASTER. Exhibited by Prof. Edward

S. Burgess.

SPECIMENS AND FiGurES ILLUSTRATING THE HEPATIC

FLoraA OF CALIFORNIA. Exhibited by Mr. Marshall A.

Howe.

NEW SPECIES IN THE GRAMINEZ. Illustrated by speci-

mens. Exhibited by Mr. Geo. V. Nash.

Two New Grass GENERA. Illustrated by specimens.

Exhibited by Mr. Geo. V. Nash.

NEw GENERA AND SPECIES OF PLANTS FROM SOUTH

AmeERiIcA. Exhibited by Dr. H. H. Rusby.

NEw SpEcIES FROM Montana. Exhibited by Mr. P. A.

Rydberg.

NEw SPECIES IN THE SOUTHERN UNITED STATEs. IIlus-

trated by specimens. Exhibited by Dr. John K. Small.

RECENT DISCOVERIES IN THE GENUS ERIOGONUM. Illus-

trated by specimens. Exhibited by Dr. John K. Small.

Two New GENERA FROM NortH America. Exhibited by

Dr. John K. Small.

SPECIMENS REPRESENTING RECENT RESEARCH IN THE

ASCLEPIADACE#. Exhibited by Miss Anna Murray

Vail.

NEw SPECIES FROM New Mexico. Exhibited by Mr. E.

O. Wooton.

A Fosstt Moss FROM THE TERTIARY, PROBABLY MIOCENE,

OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON. Collected near Cle

Elum, Kittetass Co., by ‘Mr. I. C.-Russell, July 7th,

1897. Exhibited by Dr. F. H. Knowlton, Elizabeth G.

Britton and Dr. Arthur Hollick.

SOME STUDIES ON THE BACTERIOLOGY OF THE NEW

York City WATER SuppLy. Exhibited by Smith Ely

Pits:

Notre.—The more important botanical publications of members dur-

ing the year are exhibited on a table and are open to examination.

CHEMISTRY:

In CHARGE OF CHARLES A. DOREMUS.

1. Liquip AIR WITH EXPERIMENTAL ILLUSTRATIONS OF ITS

PROPERTIES. Exhibited by Mr. Charles E. Tripler.

2. BomB CALORIMETER. Exhibited by Dr. H. W. Wiley, Chief

of Division of Chemistry, United States Department of

Agriculture.

3. IMPROVED SPECIFIC GRAVITY BOTTLES OR PYKNOMETERS.

Exhibited by Dr. E. R. Squibb.

. IMPROVED ZERO BurETTE. Exhibited by Dr..E. R. Squibb.

. VISCOSIMETER. Exhibited by Mr. P. H. Conradson.

. PROGRESS IN MANUFACTURE OF ArTisTIC GLass. Exhibited

by Mr. Louis C. Tiffany.

7. SPECIMENS OF TRITHIOFORMAL DEHYDE, TRITHIOALDEHYDE

AND ANHYDROFORMALDEHYDE-ANILIN ; SODIUM Oxy-

METHYLSULFONATE, TRIOXYMETHYLENE AND SALI-

FORMIN. Exhibited by Dr. L. H. Reuter.

8. SPECIMENS OF SALICYLID, SALICYLIDCHLOROFORM AND

POLYSALICYLID... Exhibited by Dr. ixentern:

9g. TABLES TO SHOW THE APPLICATION OF THE PERIODIC SyYS-

TEM TO THE STUDY OF ANALYTICAL METHODS. Ex-

hibited by Professor Robert W. Hall.

10. Moprets INDICATING THE RELATION BETWEEN VOLUME,

PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE OF GASES. Exhibited

by Professor Morris Loeb.

11. PURE PREPARATIONS OF TELLURIUM AND SOME OF ITS

Compounps. Exhibited by Professor Morris Loeb and

Mir. J: EE eehipley.

12. ARTIFICIAL CRYSTALS OF CHEMICAL CompounNDs, ILLUS-

TRATING ISOMORPHISM AND ENANTIOMORPHISM. Ex-

hibited by the Chemical Museum of New York Univer-

sity.

—

13. EXHIBITS FROM THE LABORATORY OF COLUMBIA UNIVER-

siry by Professor, C. E. Pellew and Dr. S.A. ‘Tucker.

. Calico Printing. The production of insoluble azo col-

ors in the cotton fibre.

. Viscose. Exhibition of Process and Samples of the

new form of Soluble and Amorphous Cellulose known

as Viscose.

c. Electrochemistry. The Persulphates and Percarbonates

of Alkaline Metals, Prepared by Electrolysis of the

Normal Salts.

14. EXHIBITS FROM THE LABORATORY OF THE COLLEGE OF

THE City oF NEw YoRK.

. Three different types of ray filters to contain either

liquids or gases and suitable for photographic or purely

chemical work. Exhibited by Dr. L. H. Friedburg.

Red sublimate of Nitro-diphenylamin and Yellow crys-

tals of quinone-oxim. Exhibited by Dr. L. H. Fried-

burg.

miokhe RRICI EY:

In CHARGE OF GEo. F. SEVER.

I. EXHIBIT OF NEW APPARATUS by Queen & Co. through Mr.

mH 2 AA WR

O..-F. Lewis:

Horizontal Magnet D’Arsonval Galvanometer.

A new Automatic Self-Focusing Arc Lamp.

Acme Testing Set.

. Acomplete 12" X-Ray Outfit with Self-Regulating Tube.

A new Lantern Galvanometer.

A new Portable Photometer.

. A new Portable Cable Testing Galvanometer.

2. AMERICAN APPARATUS FOR THE TRANSMISSION OF SIGNALS.

AT A DISTANCE WITHOUT WIRES. MARCONI SYSTEM.

Exhibited by Mr. W. J. Clarke.

3. EXHIBIT OF NEW ELECTRICAL APPARATUS by Prof. M. I.

Pupin.

a. Optical Telephone.

6. Induction Coil with 30" spark.

c. Electrical Oscillators for Selective Signalling.

d. Bridge for measuring phase retardation between current

and electro-motive force.

4. METHOD OF SUPPORTING GALVANOMETERS TO AvoID VI-

BRATIONS. Exhibited by Electrical Engineering De-

partment, Columbia University.

5. Exuisit oF RECENT ELECTRICAL APPARATUS by Mr. J.G-

Biddle.

1898 Type Willyoung Induction Coil.

Willyoung Direct Reading Potentiometer.

The Rowland Electro Dynamometer.

The Rosa Curve Tracer for Alternating Current Curves.

See

ETHNOLOGY AND ARCH AOLOGy

In CHARGE OF FRANZ Boas anp L. FARRAND.

1. EXHIBIT OF THE JESUP NorTH Paciric EXPEDITION.

a. Facial paintings of Indians of the North Pacific Coast.

Collected by F. Boas and L. Farrand.

6. The Prehistoric Races of southern British Columbia.

Collected by Harlan I. Smith.

c. Conventionalism among the Thompson River Indians.

Collected by James Teit.

2. SYMBOLISM OF THE HuicHoL INDIANS OF Mexico. Col-

lected by Dr. Carl Lumholtz and exhibited by the

American Museum of Natural History.

fx PERIVIEN TARAS YCMOLOGY.

In CHARGE OF CHARLES B. BLIss.

. An AUTOMATOGRAPH WITH REGISTRATION ATTACHMENTS.

Exhibited by Mr. W. L. McWhood.

. AN INSTRUMENT FOR STUDYING THE DISCRIMINATION OF

LoupNEss OF Sounps. Exhibited by Prof. J. McKeen

Cattell.

. AN INSTRUMENT FOR THE MEASUREMENT OF THE TIME OF

PERCEPTION AND MoveEeMENT. Exhibited by Prof. J.

McKeen Cattell.

. VERNIER CHRONOSCOPE. Exhibited by Prof. Edmund C.

Sanford.

. AN AUDIOMETER. Designed by Dr. J. A. Gilbert and ex-

hibited by Prof. Charles B. Bliss.

. An ADJUSTABLE STEREOSCOPE Carp. Exhibited by Prof.

Charles B. Bliss.

COG ve.

In CHARGE OF ARTHUR HOLLICK.

. SUITE oF EuROPEAN CLays AND KAOLINS AND OBJECTS

SHOWING CLAY WHEN BuRNED. Collected and ex-

hibited by Dr. Heinrich Ries.

. BAUXITES FROM DEPARTMENT OF HERAULT IN SOUTHERN

FRANCE. Obtained and exhibited by Dr. Heinrich Ries.

. CoppER Ores AND AccoMPANYING Rocks, FROM OTTO

SHAFT, EISLEBEN, NEAR MANSFIELD, GERMANY. Col-

lected and exhibited by Dr. Heinrich Ries.

. SPECIMENS FROM THE SALT MINES, STAASFURT, GERMANY.

Collected and exhibited by Dr. Heinrich Ries.

5. FULLER’s EARTH FROM ENGLAND. Collected and exhibited

by Dr. Heinrich Ries.

6. BAUXITE FROM STyRIA, AusTrRIA. Exhibited by Dr. Hein-

rich Ries.

7. SPECIMENS SHOWING TRANSITION FROM QUARTZ-PORPHYRY

To KAOLIN FROM DGOLAN, NEAR HALLE, GERMANY.

Collected and exhibited by Dr. Heinrich Ries.

8. FULGURITE. Summit of Little Ararat, Russian Armenia.

Collected ‘by “Dr. E: (O, Hovey, Sept: 30,1807. ae

hibited by Dep’t of Geology, of American Museum of

Natural History.

9g. GRANITES AND GNEISSES FROM FINLAND. Exhibited by

Professor J. J. Stevenson.

10.{OrES AND Rocks’ FROM PELICAN AND Dives MINEs,

GEORGETOWN, CoLo. Exhibited by Professor J. J.

Stevenson.

I1. PHOTOGRAPHS AND SPECIMENS ILLUSTRATING RECENT

EXPERIMENTS IN PRODUCING COMPRESSIONS AND FLow-

AGE OF MARBLE WITHOUT RUPTURE OR DESTRUCTION

oF CoHESION. Exhibited by Dr. F. D. Adams, Me:

Gill University, Montreal.

12. SUITE OF Rock SPECIMENS ILLUSTRATING THE RECENT

PETROLOGICAL WorRK OF PROFESSOR W. C. BROGGER,

IN THE VICINITY OF KRISTIANIA, Norway. Exhibited

by Henry S. Washington, Locust, N. J.

13. SUITE OF ROCK SPECIMENS ILLUSTRATING RECENT PETRO-

LOGICAL WorK OF THE EXHIBITOR UPON THE LEv-

CITIC AND TRACHYTIC ROCKS OF THE ITALIAN PENIN-

SULA. Exhibited by Henry S. Washington, Locust,

14. EXHIBITION OF MODELS AND SPECIMENS by Professor J. F.

Kemp, Columbia University.

a. Model of the Franklin Furnace Zinc Ore-body, made

by F. L. Nason for the Lehigh Zinc Co.

5S.

16.

17.

18.

19.

8. Suite of gold-bearing conglomerates from the so-called

‘¢banket” reefs, near Johannesburg, South African

Republic. Collected by Mr. J. T. Curtis.

c. Specimen illustrating the cross-section of a tin-bearing

pegmatite vein, Saxony.

d. Specimen illustrating the cross-section of the Half-moon

vein, Pioche, Nevada, collected by Mr. George W.

Maynard.

e. Model illustrating the Black Rock silver vein, Butte,

Mont., secured through the courtesy of Mr. W. D.

Thornton.

GEOLOGICAL MopEL oF NANTUCKET ISLAND. Exhibited

by the designer and maker, George C. Curtis.

Mope.t or New York Istanp. Colored as to Geology

and exhibited by Dr. F. J. H. Merrill, of the New

York State Museum.

SERIES OF GEOLOGICAL MAps SHOWING RECENT PuB-

LISHED RESULTS IN THE UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL

SURVEY, AND EXHIBITED BY THE SAME.

. Pyramid Peak and Truckee, areal sheets.

Franklin, Va., areal, economic and structure sheets.

c. Wartburg and Briceville, Tenn., areal and economic.

d. Peublo, Col., 8 sheets.

e. Butte Special, Mont., topographic and economic.

SET OF SPECIMENS. Exhibited by Professor R. E. Dodge,

of Teachers College.

a. Fault breccia from the Quarry Bed, Meriden, Conn.

6. Cinders from the Ash Bed, Lamentation Mountain,

Meriden, Conn.

c. Strain slip cleavage from Wallingford, Vt.

A SERIES OF ANDESITES, BASALTS, TUFFS, ETC., FROM THE

AntTiI-Caucasus MounTAINS AND RussIAN ARMENIA,

collected in September—October, 1897, by E. O. Hovey,

and exhibited by the Geological Department, American

Museum of Natural History.

MINE RAROG TT.

In CHARGE OF EpmuND O. Hovey.

I. PETROGRAPHIC INSTRUMENTS. Exhibited by the inventor,

Dr. T. A. Jaggar, Jr., Harvard University.

. Microsclerometer, for determining exactly the hardness

of minerals under the microscope.

Instrument for inclining a preparation in the petro-

graphic microscope.

2. MopELs AND APPARATUS recently acquired by the Mineral-

ogical Department, Columbia University, and exhibited

by Prof. A. J. Moses.

. Student Goniometer designed by Prof. P. Groth.

Model of Spherical Projection, Isometric Crystal,

Model of Spherical Projection, Triclinic Crystal.

Model of Positive Uniaxial Ray Surface.

Model of Negative Uniaxial Ray Surface.

Model of Biaxial Ray Surface.

3. ExuisiT oF Pror. J. F. Kemp, Cotumsia UNIVERSITY.

(Gfr

Chalcanthite, Mt. Wilson, San Miguel County, Colo.

Collected by M. B. Spaulding.

Calaverite (?), inclosing Native Gold, Kalgoorlie, Wes-

tralia. -Collected by G. J. Bancromt:

4. EXHIBIT OF THE DEPARTMENT OF MINERALOGY, AMERICAN

ie Ses St8

Museum Natura. History, through L. P. Gratacap.

Endlichite, Hillsboro, New Mexico.

Pollucite, Paris, Maine.

Hamlinite, Paris, Maine.

Montmorillonite, Paris, Maine.

Beryl, containing cesium, Haddam Neck, Conn.

. Microcline, Haddam Neck, Conn.

. ExuisiT oF Pror. 8. L. PENFIELD, YALE UNIVERSITY.

a. Wellsite, Buck Creek, Clay County, N. C.

6. Bixbyite, on Topaz, Near Simpson, Utah.

c. Clinohedrite, Franklin, N. J.

d. Illustrations of some methods for mounting crystals.

6. Exurpit or Lazarp Caun, New York.

a. Herderite, Auburn, Maine.

6. Hamlinite, Oxford County, Maine.

c. Pollucite, Oxford County, Maine.

d. Montmorillonite, Oxford County, Maine.

7. EXHIBIT OF ERNEST SCHERNIKOW, BROOKLYN.

a. Tourmaline Crystals and cross sections, Haddam Neck,

Conn.

6. Beryl, Haddam Neck, Conn.

c. Microcline, with muscovite and _ lepidolite, Haddam

Neck, Conn.

8. ExuisiTt oF Dr. A. E. FoorTeE, WarREN M. Foote, MAn-

AGER, PHILADELPHIA.

a. Crocoite, Western Tasmania.

5. Massicot, Western Tasmania.

c. Cerussite, Western Tasmania.

d. Gmelinite, Flinders, Victoria, N. S. W.

e. Mesolite, Flinders, Victoria, N. S. W.

f. Vivianite, Falls of Wannon River, Victoria.

g. Ferrocalcite, Near Melbourne, Victoria.

h. Phillipsite, Near Melbourne, Victoria.

z. Phacolite, Near Melbourne, Victoria.

j. Newberyite, Skipton Caves, near Ballarat, Victoria.

&. Stephanite, Lake Chelan District, Montana.

Z, Endlichite, Hillsboro, New Mexico.

m. Marcasite, Near Sparta, Ill.

z. Roeblingite, Franklin Furnace, N. J.

o. Meteoric Iron (section), Sacramento Mountains, Eddy

County, N. M.

g. Exuipit oF GEorGE F. Kunz, NEw York.

a. Celestite, Put-in-Bay, Ohio.

6. Meteoric Iron, York County, Nebraska.

Sapphire Crystals, Yogo Gulch, Fergus County, Montana.

d. Rutilated Quartz, sphere 5% inches in diameter, New

Zealand. ‘The property of the Tiffany Co.

e. Quartz (Rock Crystal), Mac Elumne Hill, Calaveras

County, Calif.

f. Tourmaline, Smoky Quartz and Graphic Granite, Mt.

Mica, Paris, Me.

10. ExuiBit oF A. CHESTER BEATTY, NEw York.

Calaverite, Cripple Creek, Colo.

PALAZONTOLEOGY.

In CHARGE OF GILBERT VAN INGEN.

1. CAUDAL VERTEBRZ AND LimsB BONES OF THE GIGANTIC

DinosAUR CAMARASAURUS, COPE, BRONTOSAURUS,

MarsH. Exhibited by Professor Henry F. Osborn,

Department of Vertebrate Paleontology, American Mu-

seum of Natural History.

2. CAUDAL VERTEBRZ AND LimB BoNES oF DIPLODOCUS,

MarsH. Exhibited by Prof. Henry F. Osborn, of the

Department of Vertebrate Paleontology, American

Museum of Natural History.

3. SERIES OF FEET AND SKULLS, ILLUSTRATING THE Evo-

LUTION OF THE CAMELS AND LiaAmas IN NORTH

AMERICA. Exhibited by Dr. J. L. Wortman, Depart-

ment of Vertebrate Paleontology, American Museum of

Natural History. |

4. SKELETONS OF THE EARLIEST AMERICAN UNGULATES—

PANTOLAMBDA AND Euproroconia. Exhibited by Dr.

W. D. Matthew, Department of Vertebrate Paleontology,

American Museum of Natural History.

5. RESTORATIONS OF Extinct REPTILES AND MAMMALS.

Seven large water colors exhibited by Chas. Knight,

Department of Vertebrate Paleontology, American

Museum of Natural History.

6. Mopers or Extinct VERTEBRATES by Chas. Knight,

cast by Jacob Gommel. Exhibited by the Department

of Vertebrate Paleontology, American Museum of Natu-

ral History.

7. SERIES OF Exuisits by Dr. Chas. R. Eastman, of Harvard

University.

a. Fin of new species of Cladodont Shark, from the Hamil-

ton group, near Buffalo, N. Y.

6. Photograph of Egg of Ostrich, Struthiolithus cherson-

ensis, Brandt., from superficial (Pleistocene) deposits,

northern China.

c. Photograph showing variation in Dental Plates of the

Chimeroid, Ptyctodes calcolus N. & W., from the

Devonian of Iowa.

d. Photograph of the remarkable Psammodont-Cochlio-

dont-Lung-fish, Syzthetodus. From the Upper De-

vonian (State Quarry) Fish-bed, Johnson Co., Iowa.

S. Exnipir in Patzosotany by Mr. Arthur Hollick, of De-

partment of Geology, of Columbia University.

a. Fossil Plants from the Middle Cretaceous clays of Block

Island, R. I.

6. Samples of the Plant Bearing Basal clays, Middle Cre-

taceous, and the Superficial Bowlder-clays, Glacial, of

Block Island, R. I.

c. A new fossil Palm from the Yellow Gravel (Miocene ?)

of Bridgeton, N. J.

g. New Fossit FuncGi, PRESERVED IN SILICIFIED WooD AND

EXHIBITED UNDER THE MicroscopE, by Dr. A. A. Ju-

lien, Department of Geology, Columbia University.

a. In wood of the Petrified Forest, at Chalcedony Park,

Arizona.

1. Silicified fungus-spore, in act of sprouting.

2. Silicified bacteria. A chain of bacilli crossing lim-

pid quartz.

3. Silicified mycelium, branching along the walls of

the wood-cells, and secreting iron-oxide.

& In wood of the Petrified Forest, near Cairo, Egypt.

1. Young sporanges on walls of the wood-cells.

2. Mature sporanges, enclosing spores.

3. Chain of sporanges.

PEHILOLOGY:

In CHARGE OF LAWRENCE A. McLoutH Aanp A. V. WILLIAMS

JACKSON.

The exhibits in each language will represent all or part of

the following heads:

MANUSCRIPTS.

2. FACSIMILES OF MANUSCRIPTS.

3. Epirions—OLp, Rare, or NEw.

4. LEXICAL AND GRAMMATICAL WORKS.

5. ILLusTRATIVE MATERIAL: PHOTOGRAPHS, ENGRAV-

INGS, AUTCGRAPH LETTERS, ARCHZOLOGICAL RE-

MAINS.

6. JOURNALS AND PERIODICALS.

A. PHILOLOGY IN GENERAL.

I. SOME OF THE MorE RECENT WORKS ON THE SUBJECT.

2. CERTAIN RESULTS IN THE PIELD OF DIALHET “STUDY IN

AMERICA. Exhibited by Mr. E. H. Babbitt, Colum-

bia University (Secretary of American Dialect Society).

B. SpPEcIAL LANGUAGES AND LITERATURES.

1. INDO-GERMANIC.

a. Indo-Iranian. With the codperation of Prof. A. V.

Williams Jackson and Mr. A. Yohannan, Columbia

University.

6. Armenian. With the codperation of Mr. A. Yohan-

nan, Columbia University.

c. Greek. With the codperation of Professors E. D.

Perry and J. R. Wheeler, Columbia University, and

Prof. H. M. Baird, New York University.

d. Latin. With the codperation of Professors E. G. Sih-

ler, New York University, and E. C. Egbert, Columbia

University.

e. Romance. With the codperation of Professors H. A.

Todd and A. Cohn, Columbia University, and Prof.

W. K. Gillett, New York University.

f. Germanic. With the codperation of Professors W. H.

Carpenter and Calvin Thomas, Columbia University,

Prof. L. A. McLouth, New York University, Prof. T. R.

Price, Columbia University.

2. SEMITIC.

a. Hebrew. With the codperation of Prof. J. D. Prince

6. Aramaic. and Mr. Geo. Osborne, New York Univer-

e Atabic. sity, and Prof. R. J. H. Gottheil, Columbia

University.

3. OTHER LANGUAGES.

a. American Indian. Dr. F. Boas, Columbia University.

1. An Indian Newspaper. Printed in Shorthand.

Edited by Rev. J. M. Le Jeune, ‘ Kamloops,

British Columbia. Exhibited by Dr. Franz Boas.

2. Indian Manuscript. Written by a half-blood In-

dian of Fort Rupert, B. C.

6. Chinese. With the cooperation of Prof. J. D. Prince,

New York University.

PRoLOGRAPHY.

In CHARGE OF CORNELIUS VAN BRUNT.

1. ExuHIBIT BY Mr. G. GENNERT.

a. New developer, ‘‘ Ortol.”

. Zeiss telephoto lense, capable of doing instantaneous

work.

New Cycle and Hand Camera.

New Platini paper—producing Platinotype effects.

Series of framed prints, showing the work of Platini-

paper.

2. Exuteirs or :.E. & Hef ANTHONY 2: Co.

Farrand Vignetter.

New Dalmeyer Stigmatic lense, F. 6th Series, No. II.

Frame of Photographs, illustrating New Dalmeyer Stig-

matic lense combinations.

Frame of Photographs, illustrating American Aristo-

type paper—with new toner.

2. EXHIBIT oF BAuscH & LomMB OPTICAL Co.

. Iconoscopes—Three sizes.

. Ray Filters—Styles A and B.

Zeiss convertable, Series VII. A, No. 8.—Lense with

diaphragm shutter and telephoto attachment.

. Zeiss convertable, lense C, set with diaphragm shutter.

All manufactured by the above company.

Photographs, showing effects with and without ‘‘ Ray

tutes

4. THE JOLY-SamBra Co., Montclair, New Jersey.

Demonstration of new color process by electric light.

Lantern slides and screens.

PHYSICS:

In CHARGE OF Won. HALLOCK.

1. SET OF PHOTOGRAPHS SHOWING WIDENING OF SPECTRUM

LINES WITH INCREASE OF PRESSURE. Exhibited by

Prof. J. S. Ames, Johns Hopkins University.

2. PHOTOGRAPHS OF PROJECTION LANTERN. Exhibited by

Prof. Le Conte Stevens, Trov, N. Y.

3. BrEAK-ciRCcUIT ATTACHMENT FOR PENDULUM. Exhibited

by Prof. W. Hallock, Columbia University.

4. PENDULUM, ADJUSTABLE PERIOD. Exhibited by Prof. W.

Hallock, Columbia University.

5. Torsion PENDULUM oF ADJUSTABLE PERIOD. Exhibited

by Prof. W. Hallock, Columbia University.

6. IMPROVED APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING BATTERY RE-

SISTANCE; Mance’s method. Exhibited by W. 8. Day,

Columbia University.

7. PHOTOGRAPHED MICROMETER OcuLar. Exhibited by Wal-

lace Goold Levison.

S. APPARATUS FOR SHOWING PHOSPHORESCENCE. Exhibited

by Wallace Goold Levison.

9. STREMMATOGRAPH AND ReEcorps. Exhibited by oP. EG

Dudley.

10. SIMPLE PHOTOSPECTROGRAPH WITH NEGATIVES. Ex-

hibited by F. L. Tufts, Columbia University.

11. BauscH & Loms MicrRoscoPE STAND WITH SPECIAL ARM

FOR MICROMETRIC MEASUREMENTS. Exhibited by 2.

H. Dudley.

12. NEw Form or THERMOMETER FOR SUBTERRANEAN TEM-

PERATURE Work. Exhibited by Prof. W. Hallock,

Columbia University.

13. SERIES OF LANTERN SLIDES ILLUSTRATING A NEw METHOD

oF CoLoRING BY WHICH UNIFORMITY OF TINT AND

DEFINITION OF OUTLINE IS OBTAINED. Exhibited by

C. C. Trowbridge, Columbia University.

14. SET OF SCALES PROVIDED WITH DIFFERENT TYPES OF

VERNIER, used in the Physical Laboratory, Columbia

University. Exhibited by C. C. Trowbridge and H. S.

Curtis, Columbia University.

15. SCHONE’Ss APPARATUS FOR MECHANICAL ANALYSIS, AND

SPECIMENS TESTED By IT. Exhibited by Dr. H. Ries,

Columbia University.

16.

a8.

TQ.

20.

21.

PORCELAIN MILL FoR GRINDING CLAY AND OTHER SOFT-

MinerALs. Exhibited by Dr. H. Ries.

. SUITE OF SPECIMENS SHOWING SHRINKAGE OF CLAY AT

DIFFERENT TEMPERATURES. Exhibited by Dr. H. Ries.

AUDIMETER FOR THE MEASUREMENT OF THE SENSITIVE-

NESS OF THE Ear. Exhibited by Prof. Alfred G. Comp-

ton, Department Applied Mathematics, College of the

City of New York.

CALORIMETER FOR Liquips. Exhibited by R. L. Litch,

Princeton University.

WATERMAN CALORIMETER. Exhibited by Prof. F. A.

Waterman, Smith College.

SpPEcIAL ELecTrIcAL APPARATUS. Exhibited by J. E.

Moore, Princeton University.

. PHOTOGRAPHS SHOWING THE PENETRABILITY, THE PATH

AND THE REFRACTION OF ROENTGEN’S Rays, by A.

Bourgougnon.

PHYSIOGRAPHY.

In CHARGE OF ROBERT H. CORNISH.

. A SERIES OF THREE MODELs oF TyPicAL LAND Forms, de

signed and modeled by Prof. W. M. Davis and G. C.

Curtis, and exhibited by the Harvard Geographical

Laboratory.

. A Mopert SHOWING SEA Coast CHARACTERISTICS. Exhib-

ited by the designer, G. C. Curtis.

MODEL OF THE STATE OF NEw York. Executed under the

direction of the New York State Museum, and exhibited

by thesame, through Dr. F. J. Et.’ Merall, Director.

MoDEL OF THE CATSKILL MountTAIns. Executed under the

direction of the New York State Museum, and exhibited

by the'same, through Dr. F. J. 1. Merrill, Director,

. MopEt oF New York ISLAND, SHOWING TOPOGRAPHY IN

1776. Exhibited by the New York State Museum,

through Dri Pa .t. Merrill, Directar

6. ExuiBir oF RECENT TopoGrRAPpHic MAps, made and loaned

by the United States Geological Survey, Washington,

Dec.

Vicinity ot Lake George.

Mohawk Valley.

Platte Valley, Nebraska.

Drumlin Area of Wisconsin.

e. Progress Map, New York and New England,

oli eo

7. NUMBERS 36 AND 37 OF H6LZEL’s GEOGRAPHISCHE CHAR

' AKTERBILDER. Loaned by the Teachers College.

8. Two ‘TRANSPARENCIES FOR TEACHING ASTRONOMICAL

GroGRAPHY. Published by the Century School Supply

Co., and loaned by the Teachers College.

9g. PANORAMA OF CRATER LAKE, OREGON. Photographed and

exhibited by Prof. F. E. Lloyd, of Teachers College.

NotTe.—The more recent books in Physiography and the topographic

maps of New York State thus far published are exhibited on a table.

ZOOLOGY:

In CuHarcGe or E. B. WItson.

1. ILLUSTRATIONS OF THE FAUNA OF BERMUDA. From col-

lection made in June, 1897, by the New York Univer-

sity’ Alumni Expedition. Exhibited by Prof. C. L.

Bristol.

2. ILLUSTRATIONS OF NEMERTEAN AND ENTEROPNEUSTAN

FAUNA OF PUGET SounpD. Exhibited by B. B. Griffin.*

a. Carinella sexlineata n. sp. (fragments).

6. Carinoma mutabils n. sp. type and var. argzl/ina with

piece of clay in which latter lives.

c. Emplectonema virtde Stimpson (a few individuals from

San Francisco, showing lighter hue of written speci-

mens).

* Owing to Mr. Griffin’s death this exhibit could not be prepared.

“I

ad. Cerebratulus marginatus Renier and C. sp.

e. Amphiporus, several species.

Jf. Ptychodera sp.

PREPARATIONS ILLUSTRATING DEVELOPMENTAL STAGES OF

THE CRANIUM AND CLASPING ORGANS IN THE CHIM-

£ROID, Hydrolagus colliec. Material from the Puget

Sound expedition of 1896 of the Zodlogical Department

of Columbia University. Exhibited by R. W. Shearman.

a. DEVELOPMENTAL STAGES OF THE AUSTRALIAN LUNG-

FISH, Ceratodus forstert, collected near Gayndah,

Queensland.

6. Larva or EEts—Conger, Congermurena, Angu-

zlla—from Strait of Messina. Received through Pro-

fessor Lankester from Professor Grassi. Exhibited by

Dr. Bashford Dean.

. Errects or Licut or DirrerREnt Corors Uron Pro-

TOPLASM. Exhibited by N. K.. Harrington ands 2

Leaming.

. EXHIBITION OF TEACHING PREPARATIONS by B. B. Griffin.

Development stages of:

a. Petromyzon; @.° Shark; c. Skate; d. luepidosteuscac:

Accipenser; f. Amia; 2. Amiurus; 7%. Necturusie

Progsy7. luizard:

. GRAFTING EXPERIMENTS UPON Motus. Compound pupeze

and compound adult moths, illustrated by photographs

and specimens. Exhibited by H. E. Crampton, Jr.

. SLIDES ILLUSTRATING THE ORIGIN oF NUcLET IN. PROTO-

zoA. Exhibited by G. N. Calkins.

a. Monad ( Zetramztus) with distributed nucleus.

6. Monad ( Chzlomonas) with intermediate type of nucleus.

c. Luglena viridis, with complete nucleus in early stage

of division.

d. Euglena viridis, with nucleus in anaphase of division.

9g. PREPARATIONS ILLUSTRATING THE DEVELOPMENT OF SPER-

MATOZOA IN THE HEMIPTERA. Exhibited by F. C.

Paulmier.

10. PREPARATIONS ILLUSTRATING THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE

SPERMATOZOA IN AMPHIBIA. Exhibited by J. H.

McGregor.

I1. PREPARATION SHOWING ALVEOLAR STRUCTURE OF PRo-

TOPLASM IN THE Ecc. Exhibited by Prof. E. B.

Wilson.

12. SERIAL SECTIONS OF THE HEAD oF youNG Doc-FISH

| (Squalus acanthias). Prepared for the study of the

Cranial Nerves. Exhibited by Dr. O. S. Strong.

13. SECTIONS OF GrowiNnc Eccs or an AscipiAn, JZoleula

manhattensts, Illustrating the Formation of the Albu-

minous Food-material or Yolk. Exhibited by H. E.

Crampton, Jr.

14. PECULIAR STAGES IN THE MATURATION AND FERTILIZA-

TION OF THE Ecco or an Ascipian, MWoleula manhat-

tensts. Exhibited by H. E. Crampton, Jr.

15. Exurpir of CyToLocicaL PREPARATIONS, by Francis B.

Sumner.

a. Fertilization stage of Fundulus heteroclitus. Entrance

of spermatozo6én.

6. Abnormal amphiaster in periblast of Amdurus. A nu-

clear division with no nucleus present.

c. Degenerate mitoses. Transition to amitosis.

16. Maps anp DesicNs oF BuiLpIncs oF NEW York Zo-

OLOGICAL Society. Exhibited by Prof. H. F. Osborn

and W. T. Hornaday.

VoL. XI. April 30, 1898. Part I.

ANNALS

NEW YORK

ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

Bs) .; The New Era Printing Company,

Lancaster, Pa.

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

OFFICERS FOR 1898-9.

President,

Henry F. Osporn.

Vice- Presidents,

N. L. Brirron, J. F. Kemp.

Recording Secretary, Corresponding Secretary,

RicHarD E. DopcE, Wm. STRATFORD,

TEACHERS COLLEGE: COLLEGE OF THE CITY OF NEW YORK.

Treasury, | Librarian,

Cer COX, ARTHUR HOLLIck,

- GRAND CENTRAL DEPOT. ’ ‘ COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY.

- Councillors,

CHARLES L. BrIsTOL, Witiiam Hattrock,

CHARLES A Doremus, _ HAROLD JAcosy, —

BASHFORD DEan, LAawreNcE A. McLoutn.

Members of the Council, ex-officio, |

Lx Presidents : QO. P. Hupparp, J. K. Rees, J. J. Stevenson.

Curators,

Harrison G. Dyar, GeEoRGE F, Kunz,

ALExIs A. JULIEN, Louis H. Laupy,

Witiram D. SCHOONMAKER.

Finance Committee, |

Henry Dupiey, Joun H. Hinron, CORNELIUS Vis Brunt.

OFFICERS OF THE SECTIONS.

Section of Astronomy and Physics, |

P. H. DupLey, Chairman, R. Gornon, Seeetary

Section of Biolog

E. B. Witson, Chazrman, G. N. CALkins, DED. watt

Section of Geology and Mineralogy, | ,

J. F. Kemp, Chatman, H. Rigs, Secretary, —

Section of Anthropology, Psychology and Philology, bt :

L. A. McLouru, Chawyman, A. V, W. Jackson,

: Secretary for Philolog

CHAS. tr Buss, Secretary ‘fir Anthropology and Psychology.

VOL. XI. August 31, 1898. PART II.

ANNALS

OF THE

NEW YORK

ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

Editor:

GILBERT VAN INGEN.

The New Era Printing Company,

Lancaster, Pa.

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

OFFICERS, 1898-0. .

President—HeEnry F. Ossporn, American Museum of Natural

History.

Vice-Presidents—N. L. Britton, J. F. Kemp.

Secretary—RicHarp E. Dopcg, Teachers College, W. 120th St.

Corresponding Secretary—-WM. STRATFORD, College of the City

of New York. |

LTreasurey——_CHARLES F. Cox, Grand Central Depot.

Libvarian—ARTHUR HOLiick, Columbia University.

L:ditor—-GILBERT VAN INGEN, Columbia University.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS.

Chairman—P. H. Duptey, 80 Pine St.

Secretary—_REGINALD GorpDoNn, Columbia University.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

Chaiyman—Epmunp B. Witson, Columbia University.

Secretary—Gary N. CaLkins, Columbia University.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

Chatrman—JAMES F. Kemp, Columbia University.

Secretary—Gr0. F. Kunz, 15 Union Square.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY, PHILOLOGY AND

PSYCHOLOGY.

Chairman—\LAWRENCE A. McLoutu, New York University.

Secretary for Philology—A. V.W. Jackson, Columbia University.

Secretary for Anthropology and Psychology—Cuas. B. Buss, New

York University.

SESSION, 1898-1899.

The Academy will meet on Monday evenings at 8 o'clock,

from October 3d to June 5th, in the rooms of the American

Society of Mechanical Engineers, at 12 West 31st Street.

IMPORTANT.

All matter for the New York Academy of Sciences should

be addressed—

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES,

COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY,

(SUB-STATION 84), WEST IIGTH STREET,

NEw YORK CITY,

UNITED STATES OF AMERICA.

It is requested that all correspondents of the Academy will

have the above address correctly recorded on their mailing

, lists, and that exchanges be addressed accordingly.

VOL. XI. December 31, 1898. PART III.

ANNALS

OF THE

NEW YORK

ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

Editor:

GILBERT VAN INGEN.

The New Era Printing Company,

{ Lancaster, Pa.

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

OFFICERS, 1898-9.

President—HEnNry F. OSBORN, American Museum of Natural

History. |

Vice-Presidents—N. L. Britton, J. F. Kemp.

secretary—RicHAarD E. Doncg, Teachers College, W. 120th St.

Corresponding Secretary—\WM. STRATFORD, College of the City

of New York.

Treasurey—CHARLES F. Cox, Grand Central Depot.

Librarian—ARTHUR Ho tick, Columbia University.

Editor—GILBERT VAN INGEN, Columbia University.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS.

Chairman—P. H. Duptey, 80 Pine St.

Secretary—REGINALD GorDON, Columbia University.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

Chairman—F rED. S. Lee, Columbia University.

Secretary—Gary N. Caxins, Columbia University.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

Chairman—J AMES F. Kemp, Columbia University.

Secretary —GEo. F. Kunz, 15 Union Square.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY, PHILOLOGY AND

PSYCHOLOGY.

Chairman—LAWRENCE A. McLoutu, New York University.

Secretary for Philology—A. V.W. Jackson, Columbia University.

Secretary for Anthropology and Psychology—Cuas. B. Buiss, New

York University.

SESSION, 1898-1899.

The Academy will meet on Monday evenings at 8 o'clock,

from October 3d to May 22d, in the rooms of the American

Society of Mechanical Engineers, at 12 West 31st Street.

er.

a o

” .

ier sigh

CONTENTS OF VOL. XI. PART I.

PAGE

1.—Wilson, E.B. Considerations on Cell-Lineage and An-

cestral Reminiscence, based on a Re-examination of

Some Points in the Early Development of Annelids

and Polyclades. (Figs. 1-7),. ..

search Purposes). (Hips: 0-19) 8t6.. oo Se s+ 29

in Connection with Rontgen Rays. (Figs. 12-14),

4.—Lloyd, Francis E. On Hypertrophied Scale-Leaves in

Pinus ponderosa... (PlateDy,. 54 eee:

5.—Hollick, Arthur. Notes on Block Island. (Plates IT.-IX.),

6.—Dudley, P. H. The Use of the Dudley “Stremmato- |

graph” in Determining Stresses in Rails under Mov- —

ing Trains, (Plates X.-XIII.),..~.

APPENDIX.

ea:

89 |

Catalogue of the Fifth Ann ual Reception and Exhibit, 5 April

13, 14, 1898.

CONTENTS OF VOL, XI. PART IL.

7.—Weller, Stuart. Descriptions of Devonian Crinoids

and Blastoids from Milwaukee, Wisconsin. (Plate

EMME R Ga Se ck soe Ne! 6 a ahs oh ER ie ea Va

8.—Huntington, Geo. S. The Eparterial Bronchial Sys-

tem of the Mammalia. (Plates XV-XXVIII.), .

9.—Stevenson, J. J. The Debt of the World to Pure

Science. Annual Address of the Retiring President,

10.—Griffin, B. B. Description of Some Marine Nemer-

teans of Puget Sound and Alaska. (Figs. 15—24.),

11.—Crampton, H. E., Jr. An Important Instance of In-

ee eee a YS AIDE ee ee ae

12.—Rankin, W. M. The Northrop Collection of Crus-

tacea from the Bahamas. (Plates XXIX, XXX.),

13.—Calman, W. T. On a Collection of Crustacea from

Puget Sound. (Plates XXXI-XXXIV.),....

Pace

117

127

177

193

219

225

259

IMPORTANT.

All matter for the New York Academy of: Sciences should

be addressed—

New YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES,

COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY,

(SUB-STATION 84), WEST IIGTH STREET,

New YORK CITY,

- UNITED STATES OF AMERICA.

It is requested that all correspondents of the Academy will

have the above address correctly recorded on their mailing

lists, and that exchanges be addressed accordingly.

CONTENTS OF VOL, XI. PART IIL

Title Page, Contents, etc. to Volume XI.

14.—Mathews, Albert. The Physiology of Secretion, . 293

15.—Prince, J. <ireran Some Passamaquoddy Docu-

Meni eh Se Psat sae 3) Te a ee Ga

16.—Calkins, Gary N. The Gisigeocs Significance of

Certain Protozoan Nuclei. (Plate XXXV), . . 379

17.—Levison, W. Goold. A Simple and Convenient Phos-

BEGHOSEONG, fy to ee Ae Ae ne oe: 8)

18.—Levison, W. Goold. eee ree Ocular Microm-

CIRESS es DMs sae ba Sigh a hypothe le tin 6: ki id ae

19.—Clark, Hubert Lyman Notes on Bermuda Echino-

Gere Oa be es ee Ee eh era

20.—Hollick, Arthur. Additions to the Palzobotany of

the Cretaceous Formation on Staten Island. No.

lie Plates a VIX VITE)S O

21.—Sihler, E. G. The Latter Part of Lucretius and

EB piCurus, TeAk AETEM GMP. i i ee

22.—Dodge, Richard E., Recording Secretary. Records of

Meetings of the New York Academy of Sciences.

January, 1898 to December, 1898, . . . . . 443

Mae LOrNASTINIG ahs Meru cote to ig Lf masils o 22 Ran pete ROLE

Index Slips for Volume XI.

PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES,

A [ Lyceum or Natura History 1818-1876. ]

The publications of the Academy at present consist of two

series—The Annals (octavo) and The Memoirs (quarto). The

Annals, which opened in 1824, contain the scientific contribu-

tions and reports of researches, together with the reports of

meetings. The Zvansactions,in which the shorter papers and

business reports have hitherto appeared, are now abolished and

the matter appears in the Annals. The complete volumes of

Annals will hereafter coincide with the calendar year, and be-

ginning with the volume now in press will appear about April

30, August 31, and December 31.

The price of the Annals will hereafter be one dollar per part

(three dollars per volume). By vote of the Academy, all pub-

lications will be sent free to resident members and to such hon-

orary and corresponding members as may express a desire to

receive them.

Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back

numbers of any of the publications of the Academy should be

addressed to the editor,

GILBERT VAN INGEN,

Columbia University,

New York City.

PRICES OF PUBLICATIONS.

Annals of the Lyceum (Vols. I—XI.), . . . . per Vol., $5.00.

Proceedings “ us (Vols. LTS 2c. 2% St Saas

Trans. of the Academy (Vols. T=XV1.),.. 225) | (0 5 eg a

Annals “ J (Vols. Ta Anyoe oF ee Se ee eee

Memoirs “ “ Voli: (Pattcd.gep sc aeons tae eae 1.00.

Annals “ es Vol. DL ef SCZie ne ie kp oe 8 ae ee

1746"